Venue Profile Versão 2.9 - Manual PDF

VENUE Profile
e software VENUE versão 2.9
VENUE Profile Guide

and VENUE Software 2.9
9322-62809-00 REV A 08/10

Notas Legais
Este manual tem todos os direitos reservados para Avid Technology, Inc., (denominada
“Avid”), e não pode ser duplicado ou copiado, inteiramente ou em partes sem o
consentimento por escrito da Avid. Copyright ©2011.
003, 96 I/O, 96i I/O, 192 Digital I/O, 192 I/O, 888|24 I/O, 882|20 I/O, 1622 I/O, 24-
Bit ADAT Bridge I/O, AudioSuite, Avid, Avid DNA, Avid Mojo, Avid Unity, Avid Unity ISIS,
Avid Xpress, AVoption, Axiom, Beat Detective, Bomb Factory, Bruno, C|24, Command|8,
Control|24, D-Command, D-Control, D-Fi, D-fx, D-Show, D-Verb, DAE, Digi 002, DigiBase,
DigiDelivery, Intelligent Noise Reduction, TDM Bus, DigiDrive, DigiRack, DigiTest,
DigiTranslator, DINR, DV Toolkit, EditPack, Eleven, HD Core, HD Process, Hybrid, Impact,
Interplay, LoFi, M-Audio, MachineControl, Maxim, Mbox, MediaComposer, MIDI I/O, MIX,
MultiShell, Nitris, OMF, OMF Interchange, PRE, ProControl, Pro Tools M-Powered, Pro
Tools, Pro Tools|HD, Pro Tools LE, QuickPunch, Recti-Fi, Reel Tape, Reso, Reverb One,
ReVibe, RTAS, Sibelius, Smack!, SoundReplacer, Sound Designer II, Strike, Structure,
SYNC HD, SYNC I/O, Synchronic, TL Aggro, TL AutoPan, TL Drum Rehab, TL Everyphase,
TL Fauxlder, TL In Tune, TL MasterMeter, TL Metro, TL Space, TL Utilities, Transfuser,
Trillium Lane Labs, Vari-Fi Velvet, X-Form e XMON são marcas e marcas registradas
da Avid Technology, Inc. Xpand! está registrada no Escritório de Patentes dos Estados
Unidos.
Todas as outras marcas são propriedade de seus respectivos donos.
Recursos, especificações, requerimentos de sistema e disponibilidade dos produtos
estão sujeitos à alteração sem prévio aviso.
Guide Part Number 9322-62809-00 REV A 08/10
Feedback da documentação
Na Avid, sempre estamos buscando o aperfeiçoamento da documentação de nossos
produtos. Se você tem comentários, correções ou sugestões a respeito de nossa
documentação, envie um e-mail para techpubs@avid.com.
Parte I: Visão Geral e Instalação
Stage Rack Features Additional Required Components
Chapter
Capítulo used1:
Stage Racks are 1: Introduction
Introdução
with an FOH Rack, and à VENUE
provide toProfile
all stage VENUE Profile
The following components must be purchased separately:
audio I/O for VENUE Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks
• Video Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display
can be used simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total inputs.
recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
DVI supported.
Audio I/O
Bem-vindo à VENUE Profile, parte integrante do ambiente modular de sonorização ao vivo and
• USB keyboard VENUE, da Avid. O sistema
trackball/mouse VENUE
(Windows Profile oferece
compatible)
Welcome to VENUE
• 48 inputs withProfile, partcontrollable
remotely of Avid’s modular VENUE
mic preamps live sound environment. VENUE Profile systems offer an intuitive
and
layout intuitivo, esquemas de entradas e saídas flexíveis e processamento digital poderoso, além de opções de expansão para gravação
console layout, a flexible
individually I/O scheme, powerful digital processing, and expansion options for integrated Pro Tools recording and
integrada em Pro Toolsselectable
e mixagem phantom power. controlada
de monitoração pelo artista.
Digital Snake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
artist-controlled monitor
• 8 analog output mixing.expandable up to 48 analog or
channels;
• The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
digital outputs per Stage Rack.
a Digital Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
Recursos e Sistema VENUE Profile from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Synchronization
VENUE
A console Profile
VENUE andpode
Profile Control
Systems I/O juntamente
ser usada and Features
com unidades Mix Rack, FOH Rack e Stage Rack.
• Snake connectors to enable primary and redundant (if
The VENUE Profile console can be used with one Mix Rack, or with Optional Components
FOH Rack and Stage Rack units.
applicable) connection to a VENUE FOH Rack.
The following components are optional, and must be
purchased separately:
System Components • USB flash disk (or other portable USB storage device for
transfer of Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
Included Components • Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring

• Headphones with 1/4-inch jack
All VENUE Profile systems include the following:
• Dynamic or condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
• VENUE Profile console
(for Talkback)
• Two (2) IEC power cables
• Footswitches (up to 2)
• Monitor mount for VGA screen (screen not included)
• MIDI cables (for connecting external MIDI devices)
• Trackball mount (trackball not included)
• BNC cables (for connecting Word clock between the
• VENUE Mouse Pad VENUE system and external digital devices)
• VENUE Profile Guide • 25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
• Two (2) console lights
Figura1.1 -VENUE
Figure Console VENUE
Profile Profile
console
• Protective Dust Cover
• Rack(s) (see next)
Recursos
Profile de Controle
Console do Console
Control FeaturesProfile VENUEI/O
Console
Console Profile Expansion Options
I/O
• •2424canais de entrada, cada um com um fader sensível ao
bankable input channel strips, each with a touch-sen-
• The Entrada para microfone Talkback com controle de ganho e
• Talkback
followingmic input,can
options with gain and
be added phantom
to VENUE power
Profile systems.
Racks,
toque e Software
um controleCDs, iLoks,
rotativo and Cables
multifunção, além de controles phantom power.
sitive fader, one multi-purpose assignable rotary encoder,
de Solo, Mute e seleção. • For details
• Headphoneon all
Saída para VENUE
output
fones systems and options, visit the Avid
de ouvido.
• Each solo,
FiltrosMixmute
Rack and select
or FOH
passa-alta, controls
Rack includes:
processadores dinâmicos e EQ • • USB
website (www.avid.com).
Entrada USBfor
inputs para teclado, mouse
keyboard, ou trackball,iLok
mouse/trackball, chave
USBiLok
•incorporados
Built-In High-Pass
em cada
• System Restore Filter,
CDcanal de entrada.and EQ processors on
Dynamics USB e Keys,
Smart dispositivos
and USBde armazenamento
storage devices USB.
• Medidores
•each
ECxinput de nível em cada
channel
Ethernet canal de entrada.
stripSoftware
Control Installer CD • Mix
Saída de vídeo VGA para visualização das telas do software.
Rack
• VGA Options
monitor output for software screen display
• Seção
• •Level de endereçamento
meters on each de
input canal comstrip
channel controle de Bus, Aux • Portas GPI (DB-25) que oferecem 8 entradas e 8 saídas.
Standalone Software Installer CD • GPI ports (DB-25) providing 8 GPI inputs and 8 GPI out-
Send, Direct Output, EQ e Dynamics.
• •8 •Assignable
iLok USB
réguas Channel
Smart Keysection
multifunção with
(forsaída,
de storing dedicated
plug-in
cada Bus Assign,
uma authorizations)
com um fader I/Oputs
Options
Aux
sensível Send, Direct Output, EQ and Dynamics controls.
• Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok e
ao toque, um controle rotativo multifunção
AI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
•controles de Solo, Mute
8 multi-purpose e seleção.
Output faders strips, each with a
• 1 fader principal. fader, one multi-purpose encoder, solo,
touch-sensitive
mic/line level inputs
• • One
Até FOH Link cable
24 equalizadores
mute
for connection
gráficos
and select controls de 31 bandasto a disponíveis
VENUE consolepara
AO16 Analog Output Card that provides 16 analog line level
as saídas.
• 1 Mains
Each Stage faderincludes:
Rack outputs
• Busses principais configuráveis como Left–Center–Right ou
•Left–Right+Mono.
•Up Twoto 24
(2) 31-band
IEC power Graphic
cables EQs available for Outputs
XO16 Analog and Digital Output Card that provides 8 analog
• Main Busses configurable as Left–Center–Right or
line level outputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.
Left–Right+Mono
AT16 A-Net Output Card that provides 16 channels of A-Net
output compatible with Aviom® Personal Mixers and other
Pro16™ Series devices.
IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an addi-

tional 8 channels of analog I/O and 8 channels of AES/EBU
digital I/O. Chapter 1: Introduction to VENUE Profile 3
Chapter 1: Introduction to VENUE Profile 5
Capítulo 1: Introdução à VENUE Profile 3

VENUEVENUE
Sistema Mix Rack System
Mix Rack VENUE
SistemaProfile
VENUE System
Profile
Console
VENUEVENUE
ProfileProfile
Consolecom MixMix
with Rack
Rack VENUE Profile
Console VENUEConsole
Profile with
com FOH
FOH Rack
Rack eand Stage
Stage RackRack
Mix RackMix
Recursos Features
Rack FOH
FOHRack
RackFeatures
Features
The Mix Rack provides all stage and mix position I/O for The FOH Rack is used with one or more Stage Racks, and pro-
O VENUE
Mix RackMix
oferece
Rack todas as entradas e saídas de palco e mix para
systems. O FOH
vides mixRack é utilizado
position I/O forcom um ou
VENUE maissystems.
Profile Stage Racks e oferece
sistemas VENUE Mix Rack. entradas e saídas da posição de mixagem para o sistema VENUE
Stage Profile.
Audio I/O
Stage I/OI/O
• 48 inputs with mic preamps. Each fully recallable input Audio I/O of analog I/O for hardware inserts, or for input
• 8 pairs
• 48provides
entradas com pré-amplificadores
phantom de microfone. Cada
power and input gain. and output of line-level material from the mix position.
entrada oferece phantom power e controle de ganho. • 8 pares de entradas e saídas analógicas para inserts ou
• Analog and digital (AES or S/PDIF) 2-Track inputs and
• •1616 line level
saídas analognível
analógicas outputs (expandable
de linha up to
(expandíveis 32)32)
para to para para entrada e saída de material nível de linha da posição de
connect to mains and
conectar PA e monitores. monitors. outputs.
mixagem.
• • Entradasoutputs
Monitor e saídas
for analógicas e digitais
mix position demonitors.
near field 2-Track (AES ou
FOH
FOHI/OI/O S/PDIF). mic input
• Intercom
• Entrada para microfone de comunicação com controle de
• •8 8pares
pairs of
de analog I/O eforsaídas
entradas hardware inserts, para
analógicas or forinserts
input ou
ganho e phantom power.
para
andentrada
outputeofsaída de material
line-level nível
material de the
from linha da position.
mix posição de Synchronization and Control I/O
• Saídas de monitoração para monitores near-field na posição de
•mixagem.
Analog and digital (AES or S/PDIF) 2-Track inputs and • MIDI In and Out ports, providing 16 channels of MIDI
mixagem.
• Entradas e saídas analógicas e digitais 2-Track (AES or S/PDIF).
outputs. input and 16 channels of MIDI output.
• Entrada para microfone de comunicação com controle de Entradas e saídas de sincronização e controle
•ganho
Comemic input,power.
phantom with gain control and phantom power. • Word clock I/O for digital clock synchronization.
• •Saídas de monitoração
Monitor outputs for para monitoresnear
mix position near-field na posição de
field monitors. • • Portas
USB 2.0 MIDI
portsInfor
e USB
MIDI disks,
Out oferecendo
iLoks, and16 canais
other USBde entradas e
devices.
mixagem. 16 de
• 100 saída.
BaseT Ethernet (ECx) port for Ethernet-based remote
Synchronization and Control I/O • Entrada e saída Word clock para sincronização.
control.
Entradas e saídas de sincronização e controle
• MIDI In and Out ports, providing 16 channels of MIDI
• Porta USB 2.0 para dispositivos de armazenamento, iLoks e
outros.
• Portas
inputMIDI
andIn
16e channels
MIDI Out oferecendo 16 canais de entradas e
of MIDI output. • applicable) connection
Porta Ethernet to(ECx)
Base 100 the VENUE Stage Rack.
para controle remoto.
16 de saída.
• Word clock I/O for digital clock synchronization. • Conectores multicabo para permitir conexão principal e
• Entrada e saída Word clock para sincronização.
redundante
CPU, DSP, (se aplicável)
and System Drives com a VENUE Stage Rack.
• •Porta
USBUSB
2.0 ports for USB
2.0 para disks, iLoks,
dispositivos and other USB devices.
de armazenamento, iLoks e
•outros.
100 BaseT Ethernet (ECx) port for remote control. CPU,Rack
FOH DSP,houses
and System Drives
the CPU, DSP, hard drive and CD-ROM drive
• Porta Ethernet Base 100 (ECx) para controle remoto. that run the VENUE software on your VENUE system. System
CPU, DSP, and System Drives O Mix Rack abriga CPU, DSP, hard disk e drive de CD-ROM que
CPU, DSP e Drives de sistema software is installed at the factory. The CD-ROM drive lets you
executam o software VENUE no sistema VENUE. O Software
Mix Rack houses the CPU, DSP, hard drive and CD-ROM drive update or restore your system software, and install compatible
VENUE é instalado na fábrica. O drive de CD-ROM permite atualizar
O Mix Rack abriga CPU, DSP, hard disk e drive de CD-ROM que plug-ins from their installerde
discs. A standard
that run the VENUE software on your VENUE system. System ou restaurar o software sistema VENUEFOH Rack in-plug-ins
e instalar
executam o software VENUE no sistema VENUE. O Software cludes
software is installed at the factory. The CD-ROM drive lets you compatíveis de seus respectivos discos de instalação.plug-ins
three Mix Engine cards, which provide DSP for
VENUE é instalado na fábrica. O drive de CD-ROM permite atualizar and
Ummixing.
FOH RackYou can add
padrão up três
inclui to two additional
placas Mix Engine
Mix Engine, que oferecem
ouupdate or restore
restaurar your system
o software software,
de sistema and install
VENUE compatible
e instalar plug-ins
processamento
cards, para plug-ins
up to a maximum e mixagem. Você pode adicionar mais
of five.
compatíveis de seus respectivos discos de instalação. Rack in-
plug-ins from their installer discs. A standard Mix
duas placas Mix Engine opcionais perfazendo o total de cinco.
Umcludes two Mix
Mix Rack Engine
padrão cards
inclui duasproviding
placas MixDSP for plug-ins.
Engine, You
que oferecem
processamento para plug-ins
can add one additional Mixe Engine
mixagem. Você
card, forpode adicionarofuma
a maximum
Redundant Power Supply Units (PSUs)
Unidades Redundantes de Alimentação (PSUs)
placa Mix Engine opcional perfazendo o total de três.
three. Each FOH Rack comes with two universal (100V to 240V nom-
Cada FOH Rack é fornecido com duas PSUs universais (100V a 240V
Unidades Redundantes de Alimentação (PSUs) inal, 50–60 Hz) PSUs with auto redundant failover and LED
Redundant Power Supply Units (PSUs) nominal, 50–60 Hz) com redundância automática contra falhas e
status indication.
indicação por LED.
Cada Mix Rack é fornecido com duas PSUs universais (100V a 240V
Each Mix Rack comes with two universal (100V to 240V nom-
nominal, 50–60 Hz) com redundância automática contra falhas e
inal, 50–60 Hz) PSUs with auto redundant failover and LED
indicação por LED.
status indication.
4 VENUE Profile Guide
4 Guia VENUE Profile

Recursos Stage Rack Componentes adicionais necessários
Stage Racks are used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage The following components must be purchased separately:
audio
Stage I/Osão
Racks for VENUE
utilizadosProfile
com osystems. Up etooferecem
FOH Rack two Stagetodas
Racksas Os seguintes
• Video componentes
Display devem
(15-inch or ser flat-panel
greater adquiridosVGA
separadamente:
display
entradas e saídas de áudio do palco para o sistema VENUE Profile.
Dois Stage Racks podem ser usados simultaneamente, suportando • recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
Monitor de vídeo (é recomendável o uso de monitores LCD, de
DVI supported.
um Audio
total deI/O
96 entradas. plasma ou LED de 15 polegadas ou maiores com resolução
mínima
• USB de 1024x768).
keyboard Conexões VGA
and trackball/mouse e DVI são
(Windows suportadas.
compatible)
• 48 inputs with remotely controllable mic preamps and
Audio I/O • Teclado e mouse/trackball USB compatíveis com Windows.
individually selectable phantom power.
• 48
• entradas
8 analogcom pré-amplificadores
output controláveis
channels; expandable up toremotamente
48 analog or Multicabo Digital (para sistema VENUE Profile apenas)
e phantom power selecionável individualmente. • The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
• 8 saídas analógicas (expandível para até 48 saídas analógicas • a Digital
A conexão entre
Snake o This
cable. FOH cable
Rack can
e obeStage Rack directly
purchased requer um
ou digitais por Stage Rack). multicabo
from Avid ordigital. Este cabo
assembled devepreferred
by your ser adquirido diretamente da
vendor.
Synchronization and Control I/O
Avid ou montado pelo seu fornecedor de preferência.
Entradas e saídas
• Snake de sincronização
connectors e controle
to enable primary and redundant (if
applicable) connection to a VENUE FOH Rack. Optional Components
Componentes Opcionais
• Conectores de cabo para conexão principal e redundante (se
aplicável) com a VENUE FOH Rack. Theseguintes
Os following componentssão
componentes are opcionais
optional, eand mustser
podem be adquiridos
separadamente:
• Dispositivo de armazenamento
transfer of Show data; 512 MB orUSB (para
larger transferência e
recommended)
armazenamento de dados Show. É recomendável o uso de
Componentes do Sistema
Included Components • dispositivos
Near-field monitor speakersigual
com capacidade for mix position
ou maior monitoring
a 512 MB.
• • Monitores
Headphonesde with
áudio near-field
1/4-inch jack para uso na posição de
Componentes Incluídos • mixagem.
Dynamic or condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
• VENUE Profile console • Fones de ouvido com jaques de 1/4 de polegada.
(for Talkback)
Todos •osTwo
sistemas
(2) IECVENUE
powerProfile incluem:
cables • Microfone dinâmico ou condensador e cabo de microfone XLR
• (para
Footswitches
Talkback)(up to 2)
• Console VENUE Profile
• 2•cabos
Monitor mount for VGA screen (screen not included)
de força IEC • • Footswitches
MIDI cables (2)
(for connecting external MIDI devices)
• Suporte
• Trackball mount (trackball
para monitor notnão
VGA (monitor included)
incluído) • • Cabos MIDI (para
BNC cables conexão de dispositivos
(for connecting Word clock MIDI externos)
between the
• Suporte
• VENUE paraMouse
trackball
Pad(trackball não incluído) • Cabos
VENUEBNC (para and
system conexão de Word
external clock
digital entre o sistema VENUE
devices)
• Mouse pad VENUE
• VENUE Profile Guide
e dispositivos externos).
• Guia VENUE Profile • • Cabos
25-pin25-pin
D-SubD-Sub
cables(para
(for conexão
connecting to GPI devices)
de dispositivos GPI).
• 2•luzes
Twode(2)console
console lights
• Capa de proteção
• Rack(s) (veja adiante)
• Rack(s) (see next) VENUE Profile Expansion Options
Racks, CDs de Software, iLoks e Cabos Opcionais de Expansão VENUE Profile
The following options can be added to VENUE Profile systems.
Racks, Software CDs, iLoks, and Cables
Forseguintes
Os details on all VENUE
opcionais systems
podem and options,
ser adicionados visit
aos the Avid
sistemas VENUE
Cada Mix Rack ou FOH Rack inclui:
• Each
CD deMix Rack or FOH
Restauração Rack includes:
do Sistema Profile.
websitePara detalhes de todos os sistemas VENUE e opcionais,
(www.avid.com).
• CD• de
System Restore
Instalação do CD
Software ECx Ethernet Control visite o website da Avid (www.avid.com).
• CD• de Instalação
Ethernetdo Standalone Software
Mix Rack para Options
ECx Control Software Installer CD
• Chave iLok USB (para armazenar autorizações e registros de
• Standalone Software Installer CD
Opcionais Mix Rack
plug-ins)
• Discos
• iLok deUSB Smart Key
instalação (for storing
de plug-ins plug-in
com iLok authorizations)
pré-autorizado I/OOptions
I/O Options
• 2•cabos de força IEC
Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok AI16 Analog
• Um cabo de conexão FOH Link para conexão com a console AI16 Analog Mic/Line
Mic/Line Input
InputCard
Cardthat
queprovides
oferece16 16
analog
entradas
• Two (2) IEC power cables mic/line level
analógicas inputs
mic/line.
VENUE Profile
• One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console AO16 Analog Output Card que oferece 16 saídas analógicas de
AO16deAnalog
nível linha. Output Card that provides 16 analog line level
Cada Stage Rack inclui:
outputs
• Each Stage Rack includes:
2 cabos de força IEC XO16 Analog and Digital Output Card que oferece 8 saídas de
• Two (2) IEC power cables áudio analógico em nível de linha e oito saídas digitais AES
Analog
XO16A-Net
AT16 and Digital
Output Output
Card que Card16
oferece thatcanais
provides
de 8saída
analog
A-Net
line level outputs,
compatíveis and 8Aviom®
com mixers AES digital outputs.
Personal e outros dispositivos da
série Pro16™.
queA-Net
AT16
IOx Output
oferece Card that
oito canais providese16
de entradas channels
saídas of AES
digitais A-Net
e oito
output
pares decompatible
entradas e with Aviom®
saídas Personal
analógicas ¼” TRS Mixers
para and other
insert.

digital I/O.

or menu choices and key commands:
:
Convention Action
com- Opcionais de Expansão DSP Opcionais Stage Rack
File > Save Choose Save from the
e-
File menu
Uma placa adicional Mix Engine pode ser adicionada ao Mix Rack Opcionais I/O
(perfazendo
Control+N um total de Hold
três down
placas
theMix Engine)
Control key para aumentar a
quantidade de processamento DSPthe
and press disponível
N key para mixagem e uso Cada Stage Rack suporta até 6 placas de entradas e 6 placas de
de plug-ins. saídas, para um total de 48 entradas e 48 saídas (analógicas ou
Control-click Hold down the Control key
digitais). Os opcionais I/O para o Stage Rack I/O incluem:
and click the mouse button
Record and Playback Options
Right-click Click with the right
SRI Analog Mic/Line Input Card que oferece 8 entradas analáogicas
ol- mic/line level.
Placa FWx Firewire Estemouse buttonFireWire permite gravar ou
opcional
e on-
reproduzir até 18 canais de áudio diretamente do Mix Rack com um SRO Analog Output Card que oferece 8 saídas analógicas nível de
low- The names
sistema of Commands,
Pro Tools LE™. Options, and Settings that appear
linha.
on-screen are in a different font.
Placa HDx TDM Este opcional permite gravar ou reproduzir até DSI Digital Output Card que oferece 8 saídas digitais (AES ou
64The following
canais symbols
de áudio are used
diretamente dotoMix
highlight
Rack com um sistema Pro ADAT)
System
Tools|HD®.
important Requirements and
information: Conventions Used in This Guide
DSO Digital Output Card que oferece 8 saídas digitais (AES ou
Compatibility
Apenas
User umaare
Tips placa HDx pode
helpful ser instalada
hints em um
for getting theMix Rack. ADAT)
All of our guides use the following conventions to indicate
Apenas um opcional de gravação e reprodução pode ser instalado por vez.
most
Avid from
can your
only system.
assure compatibility and provide support for menu choices and key commands:
Personal Q O sistema de monitoração pessoal Q (PQ) permite ao
Placahardware and softwareopcional
VENUE MADI Este permite enviar ou receber
:
it has tested and approved. usuário ajustar a mix de monitoração enviada a partir da VENUE
até 64 canais de áudio digital MADI. A placa VENUE MADI pode Convention Action
Important Notices include information that utilizando uma unidade PQ Controller. O Stage rack pode acomodar
For complete
ser conectada system requirements
a qualquer and acompatível,
dispositivo MADI list of qualified
comocom-
as
could affect umFile
PQ >Rack
Savee 8 PQ Controllers.
áudioyour data orpara
the performance of Choose Save from the
interfaces deoperating
puters, HD systems,
MADI Pro drives,
hard Tools. and third-party de-
your system. File menu
vices, visit: A-Net Output ANO A-Net Output Card que oferece 16 canais de
Opcionais FOH Rack
www.avid.com/compatibility saídas A-Net compatíveis Hold
Control+N com down
dispositivos da série
the Control key Aviom® Pro16™
Shortcuts show you useful keyboard or Series para monitoração pessoal.
and press the N key
Opcionais I/O
mouse shortcuts. Control-click
Stage Rack Adicional Hold down the Control key
Uma placa FOH Input/Output (IOx) pode ser adicionada ao FOH and click the mouse button
Registration
Rack, oferecendo 8 canais adicionais de entradas e saídas Um segundo Stage Rack pode ser adicionado para um total de até
Cross References point to related sections in 96 Right-click
entradas e 96 saídas.Click
(Umwithsegundo
the right Stage Rack requer uma
analógicas
Review ethe
8 canais adicionais de entradas
enclosed e saídas digitais
this guide and otherRegistration
VENUE guides. Information Card and fol- mouse button
placa Snake adicional instalada no FOH Rack.)
AES/EBU.
low the instructions on it to quickly register your purchase on-
line. By
Opcionais de registering,
Expansão DSP you become eligible to receive the follow- The names
Digital of Commands, Options, and Settings that appear
Snake Redundante
ing: on-screen are in a different font.
Placas adicionais Mixsupport
Engineinformation
podem ser adicionadas ao FOH Rack Um cabo opcional Digital Snake redundante pode ser instalado
• Technical
(perfazendo um total de 5 placas Mix Engine) para aumentar a entre o FOH Rack
The following e cada
symbols are Stage
used toRack. Esse cabo redundante
highlight
• Software update and upgrade notices automaticamente assume a comunicação se o primeira falhar.
capacidade disponível para mixagem e processamento de plug-ins. important information:
• Hardware warranty information
Placa de Expansão Snake Card User Tips
A VENUE are não
Profile helpful hints
suporta for getting
expansão the D-Show Sidecar.
via unidades
most from your system.
Adicionar uma segunda placa Snake Card ao FOH Rack permite
adicionar um segundo Stage Rack ao sistema VENUE, oferecendo
um total de 96 canais de entradas e saídas Stage. Important Notices include information that
could affect your data or the performance of
Opcionais de gravação e reprodução
your system.
Placa FWx Firewire Este opcional FireWire permite gravar ou
reproduzir até 18 canais de áudio diretamente do Mix Rack com um
sistema Pro Tools LE™. Shortcuts show you useful keyboard or
mouse shortcuts.
Placa HDx TDM Este opcional permite gravar ou reproduzir até
128 canais de áudio diretamente do Mix Rack com um sistema Pro
Tools|HD®. Cross References point to related sections in
this guide and other VENUE guides.
Placa VENUE MADI Este opcional permite enviar ou receber
até 64 canais de áudio digital MADI. A placa VENUE MADI pode
ser conectada a qualquer dispositivo MADI compatível, como as
interfaces de áudio HD MADI para Pro Tools.

Avid can only assureand
compatibility andbutton
click the mouse provide support for menu choices and key Hold
Control-click commands:
down the Control key
Registration
:
hardware
Stage and
Rack
Right-click
software
Features it has tested and
Click with the right
approved. Additional Required Components
Convention Action
ol- Right-click Click with the right
Requisitos
Stage Operacionais
For complete
Racks used mouse
aresystemwith anbutton
requirements and aand
FOH Rack, list provide
of qualified
Review the enclosed Registration Information Card and fol- com-
all stage Requisitos
The followingde
File > Save
Conexão
componentsmouse must be purchased separately:
Choosebutton
Save from the
e on- puters, operating systems,
audio
low I/O
the for VENUE
instructions on it tohard
Profile drives,
systems.
quickly and
Up to third-party
register two Stage
your de-on-
Racks
purchase • Video Display (15-inch Fileor greater flat-panel VGA display
menu
low- The names
vices, of simultaneously,
visit: Commands, Options, and Settings that appear
can beBy
Temperatura
line. used
e Ventilação
registering, you becomesupporting
eligibleup
to to 96 total
receive theinputs.
follow- Conexões
The names de of
Energia
Commands, Options, and resolution).
Settings thatVGA
appear
on-screen are in a different font. recommended; 1024x768 minimum and
www.avid.com/compatibility
ing: Control+N
on-screen Hold down
are in a different font.the Control key
DVI supported. andnecessita
press the Ndekeysua própria conexão de
Audio I/OVENUE devem operar afastadas de fontes de calor e
AsThe
unidades Cada componente VENUE
following symbols
• Technical areinformation
support used to highlight
com ventilação adequada. • USB
força keyboard
para energia
The following and trackball/mouse
primária
symbols are eused
redundante(Windows compatible)
(se aplicável).
to highlight Certifique-
important information:
• Software update and upgrade notices Control-click Hold down the Control key
se de que sua fonte de energia está corretamente
important information:and click the mouse button dimensionada
individually selectable phantom power. são oferecidos para
Registration
Monitoração do
• Hardware warranty hardware e alertas
information automáticos Digital
para Snake Cable
o número (VENUEque
de unidades Profile
estãoSystems Only)Uma fonte de
conectadas.
•User Tips are
temperatura,
8 analog helpful
energia
output hints for
e outros
channels; gettingPara
elementos. the mais
expandable up toinformações,
48 analogveja
or alimentação
Right-click
User protegida
Tips are contra
Click
helpful surtos
with
hints de
thegetting
for right energia
the (não incluída) é
“Janelafrom
most
Review de Monitoração
your
the outputs de Hardware”, na página 240.
system.
enclosedper Registration Information Card and fol- • The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
digital Stage Rack. altamente
most recomendada.
from your mouse button
system.
low the instructions on it to quickly register your purchase on- a Digital Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
Armazenamento
line. By registering, from Avid orCommands,
assembleddaby yoursão
preferred vendor.
Synchronization
Important andyou
Notices become
Control
include I/O eligiblethat
information to receive the follow- As fontes
The de alimentação
names of VENUE
Options, andcapazes
Settingsde operar
that em 50 a
appear
ing:
A VENUE Profile deve ser armazenada e transportada somente a 60 Hz Important
em uma Notices
faixa de include
tensão
on-screen are in a different font.information
de 100 a 240 that
V.
•could affect
Snake your datato
connectors or enable
the performance of redundant
primary and (if
temperaturas
•your entre support
Technical -18 grausinformation
Celsius (O graus F) a 60 graus Celsius could affect
Optional your data or the performance of
Components
system. connection to a VENUE FOH Rack.
applicable) The following symbols are used to highlight
(140 graus F). Conexão FOH
your Link
system.
• Software update and upgrade notices
important
The information:
following components are optional, and must be
•Shortcuts
Operação Hardware warranty
show information
you useful keyboard or Apurchased
conexão entre a console VENUE Profile e o Mix Rack ou o FOH
separately:
Rack éShortcuts
User Tips show
realizada are you useful
porhelpful
meio de keyboard
cabo
hints forFOH orthe
Link
getting fornecido. Para cabos
System Components
mouse shortcuts.
A VENUE Profile deve ser operada somente em temperaturas ente 4
• USB flash disk (or other portable USB storage device for
reserva, entre
mouse
most fromemyour
contato
shortcuts. com a assistência técnica AVID ou seu
system.
transfer
revendedor of Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
VENUE.
graus Celsius (40 graus F) e 40 graus Celsius (104 graus F).
Included Components
Cross References point to related sections in • Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
Cross References
Important point
Notices vejato related sections in
with include information
Para mais informações, o Guia VENUE FOH that
Rack.
Durante a operação,
this os painéis
guide and other VENUE frontal e traseiro da VENUE Profile
guides. • Headphones 1/4-inch jack
All estar
devem VENUE Profileàsystems
expostos include
ventilação. the following:
Não feche as saídas de ventilação this
couldguide
affectand other
your dataVENUE guides.
or the performance of
• Dynamic
Todas as entradas or condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
de nenhum componente do
• VENUE Profile console sistema VENUE. your system. e saídas de áudio analógicas do sistema VENUE
Profile(for Talkback)
(exceto as de fones de ouvido) são balanceadas XLR ou 1/4
• Two (2) IEC power cables de polegada.
Não opere sob sol direto ou em ambientes com temperaturas • Footswitches (up to 2)
extremas. Shortcuts show you useful keyboard or
• Trackball mount (trackball not included) Todas mouse
as entradas e saídas digitais de áudio são AES/EBU (XLR),
shortcuts.
• (Lightpipe)
ADAT BNC cablesou (for connecting
S/PDIF (RCA) . Word clock between the
Água e•Umidade
VENUE Mouse Pad VENUE system and external digital devices)
Para mais informações sobre conectores de áudio e especificações, veja o
• VENUE Profile Guide Cross
• 25-pin References point(for
to related sections
to in
As unidades VENUE devem operar afastadas de fontes de umidade CapítuloD-Sub cables
26, “Especificações deconnecting
Áudio”. GPI devices)
• Two
e a salvo (2) console
de líquidos lights derramar. Se houver condensação
que possam this guide and other VENUE guides.
na unidade, ela deve
• Protective ser Cover
Dust deixada para secar em um ambiente com
ventilação por no mínimo uma hora antes de ser ligada. Conexões Multicanal
Níveis de umidade para armazenamento e operação Sistemas VENUE Mix Rack
For details on all VENUE systems and options, visit the Avid
Nível de umidade de armazenamento 5% a 95%, não condensada
Para o Mix Rack, um multicabo analógico (não incluído) é
Each Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes: website (www.avid.com).
recomendado para transportar as entradas do palco para a posição
Nível de unidade de operação 20% a 80%, não condensada
• System Restore CD de mix e retornar as saídas para a monitoração e amplificação
principal.
• ECx Ethernet Control Software Installer CD
Limpeza e manutenção Mix Rack Options
Sistemas VENUE Profile
Utilize •umiLok
panoUSB
secoSmart
para limpar a superfície
Key (for da VENUE
storing plug-in Profile quando
authorizations) I/O Options
necessário. Não aplique qualquer tipo de solução, limpadores
• Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok em A conexão entre o FOH Rack e o Stage Rack é realizada por meio de
spray ou abrasivos à superfície. AI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
um cabo Digital Snake (não incluído). Cabos podem ser adquiridos
diretamente dainputs
AVID ou do fornecedor de sua confiança. Veja as
• One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console especificações e requisitos dos cabos no Guia VENUE Stage Rack.
8 VENUE Profile Guide AO16 Analog Output Card that provides 16 analog line level
Each Stage Rack includes: outputs

digital I/O.

Compatibility
Avid can only assure compatibility and provide support for menu choices
All of our and
guides key
use commands:
the following conventions to indicate
System andRequirements and Conventions
:
Used in This Guide
System
hardware
Avid Requirements
can only software
assure compatibility and
it has testedand
andprovide
approved. support for Conventions
menu choices and Used
key in This Guide
commands:
Compatibility Convention Action
Compatibility
:
hardware and software it has tested and approved. All of our guides use the following conventions to indicate
Requerimentos do Sistema
For complete system e Compatibilidade
requirements and a list of qualified com- Convenções
All of our
Convention utilizadas
guides
File > choices
Save
use the neste
following
Action Guia
conventions to indicate
Avid
puters,can only assure
operating compatibility
systems, andand
hard drives, provide supportde-
for menu and key Choose Save from the
commands:
For
Avidcomplete
can onlysystemassure requirements
compatibility and listthird-party
and aprovide of qualified com-
support for menu choices and key File
: commands:
menu
hardware
vices, and
visit: software it has tested and approved. Todos
File os nossos guias utilizam
> Save Chooseas seguintes
Save from theconvenções para
A Avid apenas
puters,
hardware assegura
operating
and a compatibilidade
systems,
software hard
it has drives,
tested eand
and oferece suportede-
third-party
approved. para :
Convention Action
softwares evisit:
dispositivos testados e aprovados.
www.avid.com/compatibility indicar escolhas em menus
Control+N
Convention
File
Hold emenu
Action comandos
down de teclas:
the Control key
vices,
For complete system requirements and a list of qualified com-
ParaForverificar
complete os requisitos do sistema eand
system requirements a lista
a listdeof computadores
qualified com- File > Save and press
Choose thefrom
Save N keythe
puters, operating systems, hard drives, and third-party de- Control+N Hold down the Control key
e sistemas File > Save Choose Save from the
puters, operacionais,
operating systems,discoshard
rígidos e dispositivos
drives, de terceiros
and third-party de- Convenção
Control-click
File menu
Açãoand press
down the
Holdmenu the NControl
key key
vices, visit:
qualificados, visite: File
vices, visit: File > Save and click
Escolha the mouse button
Registration
www.avid.com/compatibility Control+N
Control-click Hold Save
Hold down no
down themenu
the ControlFile
Control key
key
www.avid.com/compatibility Control+N Hold
and a down
press the
the Control key
N key ebutton
Control+N
Right-click and
Segure click the
tecla
Clickpress
with the mouse
Control pressione a tecla N
Registration and the right
N key
Review the enclosed Registration Information Card and fol- mouse button
Control-click
Control-click
Right-click Segure
Clickadown
Hold tecla
with Control
the
the e clique
Control
right key o botão do
low the the
Review instructions
enclosedon it to quickly
Registration register your
Information purchase
Card and fol-on- Control-click Holdclick
downthe the Control key
mouse
and
mouse buttonmouse button
Registration
line. By registering, you become eligible to receive the follow- The names of Commands, and Options,
click the mouse button that appear
and Settings
Registration
low the instructions on it to quickly register your purchase on- Right-click
Right-click Clique com
Click witho the
botão direito do mouse
right
Registro
ing:
line. By the
Review registering,
enclosedyou become eligible
Registration to receive
Information Cardthe
andfollow-
fol-
on-screen
The namesare
Right-click of in a differentOptions,
Commands, font. and Settings that appear
Click with
mouse the right
button
Review
• the the enclosed
Technical supportRegistration Information Card and fol-
ing:
low instructions on information
it to quickly register your purchase on- The following symbols are
mouse
usedeto
button
highlight que aparecem na
low• the Os nomes dos comandos, opções configurações
Verifique
line.
• o instructions
By Cartãoupdate
Software
registering,
Technical
on
de you
support
it to quicklyde
Informações
and upgrade
become
information
register
Registro
notices
eligible
your (Registration
to receive
purchase on-
the follow- The namesinformation:
important of Commands, Options, and Settings that appear
line. By Card)
registering, you become eligible to para
receive the follow- tela estão em
The followingfontes diferentes.
symbols areOptions,
names of Commands, used to and
highlight
Settings that appear
Information
ing:
• Hardware incluso e
warranty siga as intruções
information rapidamente on-screen are in a different font.
ing: sua compra online. Com o registro, você se torna apto a important
on-screen information:
are in
registrar
• Technical User Tips area helpful
different font.
hints for getting the
receber:• Hardware support
warrantyinformation
information
• Technical support information The following
most from symbols
your are
system. used to highlight
Os seguintes símbolos são utilizados parathe
destacar informações
• Informações
• Softwarede update
Suporteand upgrade notices
Técnico
The following
User Tips symbols
important
are helpful
information:
arehints
usedfortogetting
highlight
importantes:
• Avisos de atualizações de
• Hardware warranty informationsoftware important information:
• Informações
• Hardware dewarranty
garantia deinformation
hardware Important
User Notices include information that
UserTips
User Tips are
Tips sãohelpful
are helpful
hintsauxiliá-lo
dicas para for getting
hints for getting
the
a extrair
the o máximo de seu
could
most affect
from
sistema.
Important your
your data
system.or the performance of
most from Notices include information that
your system.
your system.
Important
your system. Notices incluem informações que podem afetar
Important Notices include information that
seus dados
Important ou a performance
Notices de seuthat
include information sistema.
Shortcuts
could affectshow
youryou
datauseful
or thekeyboard or of
performance
mouse
your shortcuts.
system.
Shortcuts
Shortcuts apresentam
show you usefulatalhos úteisorde teclado ou mouse.
keyboard
your system.
mouse shortcuts.
CrossReferences
Cross
apontam
Referencespoint seções
to related
relacionadas neste Guia
sections
Shortcuts show you useful keyboard or in
ou em outros
Shortcuts showGuias VENUE.
you useful keyboard or
this
mouse
Crossguide and other VENUE guides.
shortcuts.
mouseReferences
shortcuts.point to related sections in
Cross References point to related sections in


Sobre
Stagewww.avid.com
Racks are used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage The following components must be purchased separately:
can beda
O website used
Avidsimultaneously,
(www.avid.com) supporting
é sua melhorup to 96
fonte detotal inputs.
informações recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
online para auxiliá-lo a extrair o máximo de seu sistema. Os seguintes DVI supported.
são Audio
algunsI/O
dos serviços e recursos disponíveis:
• USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
Product Registration: Registre seu produto online.
• 8and
Support analog output channels;
Downloads Contact expandable up to 48 analog
Customer Success or
(technical • The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
support):digital outputs per de
Baixe atualizações Stage Rack. e as mais recentes versões
software
dos manuais; navegue pelos documentos de compatibilidade
(Compatibility) para requisitos do I/O
sistema ou pesquise a Base de from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Synchronization and Control
Conhecimento online (Knowledgebase).
Optional Components
Training applicable) connection
and Education: Estude to a VENUE
por FOH Rack.
conta própria utilizando os
cursos disponíveis online ou encontre como estudar em uma classe The following components are optional, and must be
em um centro certificado de treinamento Avid. purchased separately:
System Components
Products and Developers: Aprenda sobre os produtos Avid; baixe
versões demo de softwares ou saiba sobre nosso parceiros e seus transfer of Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
aplicativos
Includedplug-inComponents
ou dispositivos de hardware. • Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
News
Alland Events:
VENUE Veja systems
Profile as últimas novidades
include da Avid ou registre-se
the following:
para um demo de produto.
(for Talkback)
Pro Tools Accelerated Videos: Assista a vídeos tutoriais gratuitos. • Footswitches (up to 2)
• Monitor
Accelerated Videosmount for VGA screen
são desenvolvidos para(screen notaincluded)
auxiliá-lo configurar e • MIDI cables (for connecting external MIDI devices)
rodar seus Pro Tools
• Trackball e os plug-ins
mount rapidamente.
(trackball not included)
Live Sound Webinars: Assista vídeos tutoriais gratuitos e webnars
• VENUE
específicos para aProfile
VENUEGuide
e aprenda com especialistas. • 25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
Para saber mais sobre
• Protective Dustesses e outros recursos disponíveis, visite o
Cover
website Avid (www.avid.com).
• System Restore CD
• ECx Ethernet Control Software Installer CD Mix Rack Options
• iLok USB Smart Key (for storing plug-in authorizations) I/O Options
• Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok AI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
• Two (2) IEC power cables mic/line level inputs
• One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console


digital I/O.

10
Chapter 2: Configuring and
Stage Rack Features Connecting
Additional Required ComponentsProfile
Capítulo
Stage Racks are 2:
usedConfiguração e allConexão
with an FOH Rack, and provide stage da VENUE
The following Profile
components must be purchased separately:
The chapter
chapter shows
shows how
how to
to connect
connect the
the components
components of
of a
a DVI supported.
To assemble
assemble the Video
Video Monitor
Monitor Mount:
Mount:
The
EsteAudio I/O
capítulo apresenta como conectar os componentes do VENUE ParaTomontar the
o suporte de monitor de vídeo:
VENUE Mix
VENUE Mix Rack
Rack and
and VENUE
VENUE Profile
Profile system.
system. • USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
Mix Rack
• 48e do sistema
inputs withVENUE Profile.
remotely controllable mic preamps and Remove the
1 Remove
1 the Video
Video Monitor
Monitor Mount
Mount components
components from their
from their
1 Remova os
packaging.
packaging.componentes do suporte de monitor de vídeo da
embalagem.
• 8 analog output channels; expandable up to 48 analog or
Unpacking
digital outputs and Assembling
per Stage Rack.
• The connection between (top)FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
(topo)
(top)
Desembalando e Montando a VENUE Profile
VENUE Profile a Digital Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
VENUE Profile U bracket
USuporte
bracketem U
from AvidArm
Mounting
Mounting or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Arm
 Synchronization
Remova todosall
Remove
 Remove

and Control I/O
alloscomponents
componentes
components da embalagem.
from
from the shipping
the shipping packaging.
packaging. Braço
 Coloque
• Snakea console
connectors Profile sobre uma
to enable mesaand ou redundant
outra superfície
Place the
Place the Profile console
Profile console on primary
a table
table oror other
other stable (if
stable surface
surface
estávelque permita
applicable) acesso totaltoon
connection aos
a
a conectores
VENUE FOH e suportes
Rack. dos Optional Components T-bolt
T-bolt (2)(2)
Borboleta
(2)
that
painéisthat leaves
leaves
frontal full access
full
e traseiro.access to
to the
the front
front and
and back
back panel
panel connectors
connectors
Locking Nut (2)
Porca (2) Nut
Locking
and mounts.
and mounts.
 Certifique-se de que todos os componentes estão livres de The following components are optional, and must be (2)
Components of the Video Monitor Mount
sacos plásticos,
Make sure
 Make

proteções
sure estofadas are
all components
all components ou outros
are of materiais.
free of
free any bags,
any bags, padding
padding oror purchased
Componentsseparately:
of the Video Monitor Mount
 System
Mantenha Components
cabos
other materials.
materials. e outros ítens incluídos organizados, tendo a Componentes do suporte de monitor de vídeo
• USB flash
suredisk
Make sure
2 Make your(or other
video portable
monitor is USB storage
powered off device for
and discon-
discon-
other 2 your video monitor is powered off and
certeza de mantê-los junto a seus componentes associados quando transfer
nected, and of Show
and lay
lay it data;
it face 512
face down
down on MB
on a or larger
a padded recommended)
padded table.
table.
Keep cables and
and other
other included
included items
items organized,
organized, making
making nected,
tirá-losda embalagem.
Keep cables 2 Certifique-se de que o speakers
monitor está desligado e monitoring
desconectado.
Included
sure to
to keep
keepComponents
them with
with their
their associated
associated component
component after
after un-
un- • Near-field monitor for mix position
sure them 3 Attach
3
Vire-oAttach your monitor
yourpara
com a tela baixoto
monitor to the
the Video
sobre Video Monitor Mount
Mount by
Monitor acolchoada.
uma superfície by doing
doing
packing. •either
Headphones with 1/4-inch jack
Allpacking.
VENUE Profile systems include the following: either of
of the
the following,
following, as as appropriate
appropriate forfor your
your video
video monitor:
monitor:
• Dynamic
3 Fixe seu monitoror ao
condenser
suporte com microphone and XLRprocedimentos
um dos seguintes mic cable
• VENUE Profile console 100mm
100mm (MIS-D100)
(MIS-D100) Attach
Attach the
the UU bracket
bracket to to the
the included
included
(for Talkback)
de acordo com seu monitor de vídeo:
Montagem do suporte de monitor de vídeo e
•
mounting
mounting plate using
plate (up
Footswitches usingto
the
the
2)
provided
provided hardware. To
hardware. To complete
complete thethe
Assembling the Video Monitor Mount 100mmassembly, remove
(MIS-D100)
removeFixethe 4 mounting
the 4o mounting
suporte em screws from
U à from the
deback
placathe of
of the
montagem
do suporte
• Monitor paramounttrackball
for VGA screen (screen not included) assembly, screws
back the
•and Trackball Mount utilizando
video o hardware
video monitor,
monitor, fornecido.
line
line up
up the Para completar
the holes
holes of
of the a montagem,
the mounting
mounting plate, retire
plate, and
and
Trackball mount (trackball not included)
os •4 BNC
use
use the
the
cables
parafusos
screws
screwsda(for
you
you
connecting
parte traseira
removed
removed to
to
Word
do
secure
secure
clock
monitor
the
the
between
de vídeo,
plate
plate to
to
the
the
thealinhe
back
back os
of
of
A VENUE Profile
Profile
•Profile
VENUE incluiaa um
includes
Mouse
includes Pad suporte
Video
Video Monitor
Monitorpara monitor
Mount
Mount for de vídeo
for your
your VGApara
VGA moni- furos VENUE
moni- systemdeand
aosmonitor.
da placa external edigital
montagem utilizedevices)
os parafusos retirados
your
your monitor.
monitores
tor, VGA
and de tela fina
a Profile
Trackball emount
um suporte
mount paramouse
for your
your mouseor
mouse orou trackball.
trackball. anteriormente para prender a placa à traseira
•tor, and
VENUE a Trackball Guide for trackball. • 25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to do
GPImonitor.
devices)
• Two (2) console lights screws
back
Traseira
back Parafusos
screws Mounting arm (top)
(top)
•Assembling dethe Video Monitor Mount Braço (topo)
Mounting arm
Protective
Montagem Dust
do suporte Cover
monitor de vídeo
screws
The Video
The
O suporte Video Monitor
do Monitor Mount
monitor Mount is
de vídeo is assembled
assembled by
é montado by attaching
fixando attaching a
um monitor a flat
flat
de
VENUE Profile
Parafusos
screws
Expansion Options
U bracket
Suporte
U bracketem U
Mounting plate
Mounting plate
Placa de montagem
panel
panel VGA
VGA monitor
monitor to
to the
the mounting
mounting arm.
arm. Both
Both 100mm
100mm
tela fina (LCD, plasma ou LED) ao braço de monitor. Suportes de and
and The following options can be added to VENUE Profile systems.
Racks,
100mm 75mm Software
VESA
e 75mm
75mm VESAVESA CDs,
(FDMI)
(FDMI)
(FDMI) iLoks,
video
são
video and standards
mounting
suportados.
mounting Cables are
standards are supported.
supported. Video
Video monitor
monitor
Monitor
ForFrente
details on all VENUE systems and options,
front
front visitdethe
vídeo
Avid
Each Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes:
Assembling the Video
Video Monitor Mount requires the following website (www.avid.com).
Attaching
Attaching a
a 100mm
100mm VGA
VGA monitor
monitor to
to the
the mounting
mounting plate,
plate, U
U bracket
bracket and
and
Assembling
A montagem the
do suporte para Monitor
monitor de Mount
vídeo requires
requer osthe following
seguintes Fixação de um monitor VGA 100mm
mounting
mounting arm, viewed
arm, viewed fromàthe
from
placa
the topdeedge
top
montagem,
edge thesuporte
of the
of monitor
monitor
em U e braço, vista
ítens: •items:
System Restore CD
items: a partir da borda superior do monitor.
• Um • monitor
ECx
•
• A VGA
A Ethernet
VGA
VGA deControl
flat
flat tela fina
panel
panel com compatibilidade
Software
display
display withInstaller
with 100mmCD
100mm orpara
or 75mm
75mmsuportes
mount-
mount- Mix Rack
75mm
75mm Options
(MIS-D
(MIS-D 75)
75) Use
Use the
the included
included U
U bracket.
bracket. Remove
Remove the
the ap-
ap-
de• 100mm ou 75mm 75mm (MIS-D 75) Utilize o suporte em U incluso. Remova os
ing compatibility propriate
propriate screws from the back
backeof your
your monitor and
and use them
• Um chave
Standalone Software Installer CD
ing compatibility
Phillips de tamanho médio parafusos da screws from
traseira do the
monitor ofutilize-os
monitor
para fixar use them
o suporte
I/Oto secure the U bracket to the back of the monitor.
• Uma • A
• iLok
• A medium
mesa
medium
USB Smart sized Phillips
KeyPhillips
ou áreasized
screwdriver
(for storing
similar,
plug-in authorizations)
livrescrewdriver
e plana, com uma toalha ou em U.Options
to secure the U bracket to the back of the monitor.
outra • A
• Plug-intable
• superfície
A table or similar
installer discs
or acolchoada
similar clear,
clear, flat
(if any) area
with
(grande
flat area owith a
a towel or
or other
pre-authorized
suficiente
with towelpara iLok pad-
deitar
other pad- Traseira
back
back
seu
• Two ded
monitor
ded surface
com
(2)surface (big
a (big enough
tela para
IEC power enough
cables to
baixo).safely lay your video monitor
to safely lay your video monitor Parafusos
screws
screws
face
face down)
down) Braço (topo)
Mounting
Mounting arm
arm
• One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console Parafusos
screws
screws
AO16 Analog Output Card that providesUUSuporte
16 analog line level
bracket em U
bracket
Each Stage Rack includes: outputs Monitor
Video de vídeo
monitor
front Video monitor
Frente
front
XO16 Analog
Attaching
Attaching
Fixação de a and
a 75
75 VGA
VGA
um monitor Digital Output
monitor
monitor
VGA75mm to
ao the UCard
to suporte
the U em Uthat
bracket
bracket provides
and
e and vista a 8
mounting
mounting
braço, analog
arm,
arm,
partir viewed
viewed
da borda
from
linefrom the
level
superior top edge
edge and
outputs,
dothe top
monitor. of the
of the monitor
8 monitor
AES digital outputs.
Segure
4AT16 o braço
A-Net de fixação
Output virado
Card that para baixo
provides 16 para que aof
channels extremidade
A-Net
(superior) esteja posicionada contra a traseira do
output compatible with Aviom® Personal Mixers and other suporte em U.
Certifique-se de que
Pro16™ Series devices. o braço está posicionado da maneira correta
e fixe-o ao suporte em U utilizando os quatro parafusos fornecidos.
Certifique-se
IOx Input anddeoutput
que os parafusos estejam
expansionConfiguring
card thatapertados
providesdeanforma
addi-firme11
Chapter
Chapter 2:
2: Configuring and
and Connecting
Connecting Profile
Profile 11
etional
segura.
8 channels of analog I/O and 8 channels of AES/EBU
digital I/O.
Capítulo 2: Configuração e Conexão da VENUE Profile 11

ing the four screws provided. Make sure all screws are tight-
1 Stand at the back of the console.
ened securely.
Fixando o Suporte de Monitor de Vídeo pela Utilização doVGA
2 Holding the Suporte deone
screen in Monitor de Vídeo
hand, loosen the lock nuts
Attaching that secure the Video Monitor Mount to the console.
Primeira Vezthe Video Monitor Mount the First Time
Para remover
3 Slide o suporte
the Video de monitor
Monitor de vídeo:back off the T-bolts.
Mount straight
ParaTofixar
attach the Video
o suporte Monitorde
de monitor Mount
vídeotoà console:
the console:
Tighten the atrás
14 Posicione-se lock nuts to secure the T-bolts.
da console.
1 From the back of the console, locate the Video Mount slot
1 Localize o slot
below the paraofothe
edge suporte de monitor
outermost backde vídeoextrusion.
panel na parte traseira
da console, abaixo da borda saliente do painel externo. 2ToSegure
attach othe
monitor com uma
assembled Videomão, afrouxe
Monitor as to
Mount porcas que fixam o
the console:
2 Take one of the T-bolts included with the Video Mount and suporte de monitor de vídeo à console.
1 Loosen the two lock nuts securing the T-bolts in place, along
2 Insira
insertuma dasthe
it into borboletas incluídas
wider opening no kit
at the farde
leftsuporte
end of de
themonitor
Video the extrusion at thedeback of the
de vídeo naslot.
maior abertura na estremidade 3 Deslize o suporte monitor deconsole.
vídeo para fora das borboletas.
Mount Slide the T-bolt to the rightesquerda
along thedaslot
ranhura
until de
it
montagem
stays in dethemonitor
track. de vídeo. Deslize a borboleta para a direita, 2 Position the Video Monitor Mount so that its base slots line
ao longo do slot, até que fique alinhada. 4 Aperte as porcas para fixar as borboletas.
up with the T-bolts, slide the Video Monitor Mount into posi-
tion,fixar
Para andotighten
suportethe
delock nutsde
monitor to vídeo
secureà the mount into place.
console:
Afrouxe as porcas
1Assembling que Attaching
and fixam as borboletas
the na saliência da traseira
Trackball
da console.
Mount
Posicione
2The o suporte
Trackball Mountde monitorade
provides vídeo
tray for de modo
your que asorranhuras
trackball a
Video Mount slot na sua base se alinhem às borboletas, deslize o suporte para a
mouse. It can be placed anywhere along the front of the con-
Location
Localização doof the
slot de Video
suporteMount slot de vídeo
de monitor posição e aperte as porcas para fixá-lo no lugar.
sole, and accommodates left- or right-handed operation. A
3 Take the second T-bolt, insert it into the opening at the left small hook underneath the Trackball mount lets you hang a
3 Insira a segunda borboleta na abertura à esquerda e deslize-a até
Montagem e Fixação do Suporte para
queand slide
fique it to becentímetros
a poucos a few inches
de away fromdathe
distância first T-bolt.
primeira borboleta. pair of headphones.
Trackball
4 Take the two silver lock nuts (thumb nuts) and thread them
4 Pegue as duas porcas e atarrache-as livremente sobre as Assembling the Trackball Mount
loosely onto the T-bolts (do not tighten them). O suporte para trackball oferece um local para utilização de seu
borboletas (não apertá-las).
5 Pick up the assembled Video Monitor Mount and hold it at
trackball ou mouse. Ela pode ser colocada em qualquer lugar ao
To attach
longo the Trackball
da frente Mount
da console e permite a utilização com a mão direita
5 Pegue o suporte
the bottom de monitor
of the de vídeo
VGA monitor, somontado
you can e segure-o
balance theabaixo
unit
do monitor, de modo que possa balançar a unidade com uma mão. ou esquerda.
1 Unpack theUm pequeno
Trackball gancho
Mount abaixo
and do suporte
components paratheir
from trackball
with one hand. permite que você pendure um par de fones de ouvido.
packaging.
6 Posicione
6 Positiona the
base
basedoofsuporte de mount
the video monitorunder
de vídeo abaixo
the back da
panel
saliência do painel
extrusion traseiro
and feed e passethrough
the T-bolts as borboletas
the twoatravés dasthe
slots on duas Montagem dotoSuporte
2 Make sure unplugde Trackball
any USB or headphone connections at
ranhuras na parte frontal do braço montado. Afrouxe as porcas de the front of the console.
front edge of the arm assembly. Loosen the lock nuts if neces-
bloqueio de necessário. Para fixar o suporte de trackball
sary.
System Requirements and Conventions
3 From the front of the Used in locate
console, Thisthe Guide
slot for the Track-
ball mount (located below the extrusion).
1 Tire o suporte de trackball e seus componentes da embalagem.
Compatibility
7 Aperte
7 as porcas
Tighten para
the lock fixar
nuts o suporte
thumb nuts tode monitor
secure de vídeo
the Video na
Mon-
posição.
itor Mount in position. 4 Take one of the T-bolts included with the Trackball Mount
Avid can only assure compatibility and provide support for 2menu choices and
Certifique-se key commands:
de remover qualquer dispositivo USB ou fones de
and insert
ouvido das itconexões
into the da
opening
frente at
dathe right end of the Trackball
console.
Parahardware
mover o monitor para os
it lados:
:
and software has tested and approved.

To move the monitor left or right: Mount slot. Slide the T-bolt to the left along the slot until it is
Convention Action
 For complete
Afrouxe
Loosen asthe system
porcas
thumb requirements
ligeiramente
nuts e and
slightly andslide
deslizea list
o theofVideo
qualified
suporte com-
deMonitor
monitor 3just to the left
Localize of the frontexistente
a reentrância panel USBna and headphone
frente da consoleports.
para a
File > Savedo suporte de
montagem Choose Save(localizado
trackball from the abaixo da saliência).
de Mount
vídeo para
puters, to thea esquerda
operating ou abeing
left systems,
or right, direita,
hard tomando
drives, and
carefully cuidado
to twistpara
third-party
not offnão
itde- ei- 5 Take the second T-bolt,Fileinsert
menuit into the opening at the right
deslocá-lo das T-bolts.
vices,ofvisit:
ther the borboletas. (Semount
(If the isso ocorrer,
comessimplesmente recoloque
off the T-bolts, simply
e continue). Quando estiver When
na posição desejada, aperte astighten
porcas. 4 Insira uma das borboletasinches
and slide it
Control+N
into place a few away from
na abertura the first T-bolt.
da extremidade
Hold down the Control key direita
reattach it and resume).
www.avid.com/compatibility in the desired position,
da reentrância
6 Take the two do suporte
silver lock de
andnutstrackball.
press(thumb
the N keyDeslize
nuts) a borboleta
and para a
thread them
the lock nuts. esquerda pela reentrância até que fique à esquerda das conexões
Para ajustar a altura do monitor: loosely onto the T-bolts (do not tighten them).
USB e de fones de ouvido
Control-click dodown
Hold painelthefrontal
Controldakey
console.
 To adjustostheparafusos
Registration
Afrouxe height of que
the monitor:
seguram o monitor ou suporte em U and click
7 Place the Trackball Mount inthe mouse so
position button
that you can feed
ao braço e deslize-o paraholding
baixo e the
paramonitor
cima, até Insira
5the a segunda
throughborboleta na abertura
the da
lip direita e deslize-a até
 Loosen the screws oraUaltura desejada.
bracket to the T-bolts
Right-click theClick
twowith
slots
theon
right of the Mount.
Aperte todos
Review os
thearm, parafusos
enclosed para
Registrationfixar o monitor
Information em and
Card sua nova
fol- poucos centímetros da primeira.
mounting and slide it down or up to the desired height. mouse button
posição.
low the instructions on it to quickly register your purchase on- If mounting on the right, be sure to line up the opening in
Tighten all screws to secure the monitor in its new position. 6 Pegue as duas
line. By registering, you become eligible to receive the follow- the mount
The names withporcas
the front
of Commands,
e panel
atarrache-as
Options,
livremente ports
USBSettings
and and Headphone sobre as
that appear
borboletas
so they(não apertá-las).
ing: on-screen areremain accessible.
in a different font.
• Technical support information 78 Posicione
Tighten o suporte
the lock de trackball
nuts to used dethe
secure modo que possa
assembled passar as duas
Trackball
The following symbols are to highlight
• Software update and upgrade notices borboletas através das
Mount to the console. aberturas existentes na aba do suporte.
• Hardware warranty information Se o suporte for montado do lado direito, certifique-se de alinhar a abertura
12 VENUE Profile Guide User Tips are
do suporte comhelpful hints
as conexões fore de
USB getting theouvido do painel frontal para
fones de
que fiquem
most acessíveis.
from your system.
8 Aperte bem as porcas para que fixem o suporte de trackball à

console.
your system.
The following
Stage Racksymbols are used to highlight
Features Additional Required Components
Utilização do Suporte de Trackball
UserI/O
audio
O suporte Tips
forare
de helpfulProfile
VENUE
trackball hints
podefor getting
systems.
ser theto twoeStage
Up
removido Racks
recolocado • Video Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display
canmost
be
rapidamente. from
used your system.
simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total inputs.
DVI supported.
Audio I/O desconcte dispositivos USB ou fones de ouvido do
Sempre
Important Notices include information that • USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
painel
•could frontal
48 inputs da remotely
with console antes de remover
controllable ou recolocar o
affect your data or the performance ofmic preamps and
suporte de trackball.
individually
your system. selectable phantom power. Digital Snake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
• 8 analog
Para remover output
o suporte dechannels;
trackball: expandable up to 48 analog or • The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
Shortcuts show you useful keyboard or a Digital Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
1 Segure o suporte de trackball com uma mão e solte as porcas que
mouse shortcuts. from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
o seguram em frente and
Synchronization à console.
Control I/O
2 BaixeCross
o suporte para removê-lo
References inteiramente
point to related da console.
sections in Optional Components
3 Recoloque as porcas nas borboletas e aperte-as para baixo para The following components are optional, and must be
segurá-las na posição. purchased separately:
System Components
Para recolocar o suporte de trackball:
Included
1 Afrouxe as duasComponents
porcas segurando as borboletas no lugar. • Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
All VENUE
2 Posicione Profilede
o suporte systems include
trackball the que
de modo following:
sua base se alinhe
às borboletas e deslize-o para
• VENUE Profile console sua posição.
(for Talkback)
3 Aperte as porcas para fixar o suporte em sua posição. • Footswitches (up to 2)


digital I/O.

Connections
Conexões for VENUE
para sistemas Mix
VENUE Mix Rack Systems
Rack
This section describes system and audio connections for VENUE Mix Rack systems. (For VENUE Profile systems, see “Connections
Esta
forseção
VENUEdescreve
ProfileasSystems”
conexõeson
depage
áudio e de sistema para sistemas VENUE Mix Rack. (Para sistemas VENUE Profile, veja “Conexões para
17).
sistemas VENUE Profile” na página 17).
To connect the Profile console to a Mix Rack:
Para conectar a console Profile ao Mix Rack:
 Connect one end of the FOH Link cable to the FOH Link port on the back panel of the Profile console. Connect the other end
 ofConecte
the FOH uma extremidade
Link do FOH
cable to the cabo Link
FOH port
Link àonporta FOH Link
the front no of
panel painel traseiro
the Mix da On
Rack. console
each Profile.
end, beConecte
sure to aalign
outrathe
extremidade à porta
notch in the
FOHconnector
Link existente no painel frontal do Mix Rack. Em cada extremidade, certifique-se de alinhar o entalhe
housing with the slot in the plug, and to rotate the collar until the connector is fully latched.do conector e a ranhura do plugue e
gire o anel de fixação até que o conector esteja firmemente preso.
Figura 2. Conexão FOH Link entre Profile (esquerda) e Mix Rack (direita)
Figure 2. FOH Link connection between Profile (left) and Mix Rack (right)
Conexões de Áudio
Audio Connections
O Mix Rack oferece 48 entradas analógicas mic/line, até 32 saídas analógicas nível de linha e uma variedade de entradas e saídas analógicas
e digitais.
Mix Rack Você pode utilizar
provides um multicabo
48 analog mic/line analógico
inputs, up(não incluído)
to 32 analog para fazer trafegar
line outputs, and amúltiplos canais
variety of deand
analog entrada e saída
digital audioentre o palco
inputs and e o
Mixoutputs.
Rack, ouYou
podecan
conectar
use an analog multicore snake cable (not included) to carry multiple stage inputs and outputs to and from theRack
microfones, instrumentos e outras fontes diretamente às entradas Mix Rack Stage e conectar as saídas Mix
Stage diretamente às
Mix Rack, or you can entradas demics,
connect seu sistema de amplificação
instruments principaldirectly
and other sources ou ao sistema de monitoração.
to Mix Rack Stage inputs, and connect Mix Rack Stage
outputs directly to the inputs on your house/mains systems, or monitor systems.
Stage I/O
Stage I/O
Utilize essa seção para identificar onde conectar as entradas e saídas de palco ao Mix Rack.
Use the following sections to identify where to connect stage I/O to Mix Rack.
FOH I/O
1–16
A
Entradas
Multicabo
Stage
do palco
17–32 B to PA,
Para
house/
amplificação
analog snake Inputs
mains,
principal,
analógico
33–48 C monitors
monitoração
zones
etc
Saídas para
D Stage Outputs
o palco
1–16
1-16
E
Figure 3. Mix Rack audio connectors and I/O slots (A–E) for stage inputs and outputs
Figura 3. Conectores de áudio do Mix Rack e slots de entradas e saídas (A–E) para entradas e saídas de palco.

Entradas de Palco
Stage Inputs 1–481 a 48
(Analog
(Entradas Mic/Line
audioanalógicas XLRMic/Line)
XLR
I/O for VENUE Inputs)
Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks
The Stage Input section provides 48 channels of analog mic/line inputsrecommended;
(XLR), to connect1024x768 minimum
stage input sources.resolution). VGAan-
Use a standard and
A seção Stage Input oferece 48 canais de entrada mic/line (XLR), para conectar fontes sonoras vindas do palco. Utilize um multicabo
alog snake cable to run lines from the stage to the Mix Rack (analog DVIcable
snake supported.
not included). Then connect the snake to Stage
analógico
Audio padrão
I/O (não incluído) para transmitir as linhas do palco para o Mix Rack. Conecte o multicabo às entradas 1 a 48.
inputs 1–48. (For instructions on applying phantom power and other• settings, see theand
USB keyboard guide that came with
trackball/mouse your console.)
(Windows compatible)
Saídas individually
de palco 1selectable
a 16 phantom power.
Stage Outputs 1–16 Digital Snake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
•analógicas
(Saídas 8 analog XLR
output channels; expandable up to 48 analog or
Line)
(Analog Line XLR Outputs) • The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
AThe
seção Stage
Stage OutputSection
Output ofereceprovides
até 32 canais
up to de
32saída (XLR),ofpara
channels conexão
stage outputa(XLR),
PA, amplificação
to connect principal, monitoração,
to house/mains, zonas adicionais
monitors, additionalou envio
from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
de material sonoro
Synchronizationa outros
and dispositivos.
Control
zones, or feeds to other devices. I/O
FOH I/Oapplicable) connection to a VENUE FOH Rack. Optional Components
FOH I/O
AsThe
seguintes seções
following descrevem
sections a seção
describe FOHI/O
the FOH I/Osection
do Mix Rack e como
of Mix Rack, utilizar
and how suas
to conexões e portas. and ports for mix position audio.
use its connectors
2-Track
Com Mic Phantom Power AES/EBU I/O transfer of Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
2-Track Digital • Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
Included Components
Com Mic Gain
Monitor
Outputs Format selector
Conventions
All VENUE ProfileUsed Comin
systems Mic This
include theGuide
following:
2-Track
MIDI I/O Input 2-Track Analog I/O • Dynamic
S/PDIF I/O or condenser microphone
Analog I/O 1–8 and XLR mic cable
All of•our
VENUE
guidesProfile
use theconsole
following conventions to indicate (for Talkback)
or menu• choices
Two (2)and
IECkey commands:
power cables
:
Convention Action • MIDI cables (for connecting external MIDI devices)
om- • BNC cables (for connecting Word clock between the
File >• Save
VENUE Mouse ChoosePad Save from the VENUE system and external digital devices)
File menu
Figure
Figura
•4.VENUE
FOH I/O
4. Conexões
Profile Guide
FOHconnectors on Mix Rack
I/O no Mix Rack • 25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
Control+N Hold
• Two (2) console lights down the Control key
and press the N key
MIDI• I/O Ports Dust Cover
Protective 2-Track Analog Inputs and Outputs
Portas MIDI I/O Entradas e saídas analógicas de 2-Track
The MIDI In and Out Ports provide
and click 16 channels
the mouse button of MIDI input TheVENUE Profile
2-Track analog Expansion
connections are used forOptions
input and output
Asand
portas MIDI In of
16 channels e Out
MIDIoferecem
output to aothe
sistema 16The
system. canais
MIDIMIDI
I/O de ofAs conexões
analog audioanalógicas de 2-Track
material. These são utilizadas
are balanced para
1/4-inch TRSentrada e
Racks,
entrada e 16
Right-click
ports are Software
canais
used in sendingCDs,
MIDIClick
deand iLoks,
saída.
with the
receivingand
Asright
portas Cables
MIDI I/OMIDI
Snapshot são utilizadas
mes- saída de material de áudio analógico. Os conectores são balanceados
connectors.
ol- para enviar einreceber mensagens
mouse buttonMIDI e receber MIDI Time Code de For1/4
de details on all VENUE systems and options, visit the Avid
de polegada.
sages,
EachandMix receiving
Rack MIDI
or FOH Time
Rack Code
includes: from external devices.
on- dispositivos externos. website (www.avid.com).
ow- The names of Commands,
• System Restore CDOptions, and Settings that appear
2-Track
EntradasDigital
e saídasInputs and
digitais de Outputs
2-Track
Com
Com Mic,
Mic,
on-screen areGain
Gain Control,
Control eControl
Phantom
in a different and Phantom Power
Power
font.
• ECx Ethernet Software Installer CD TheMix
As Rack
2-Track
conexões Options
digital connections are used for input and output
digitais 2-Track são utilizadas para entrada e saída de
The Com Mic connector
• Standalone andInstaller
controlsCD allow connection of a of digital audio material. Stereo AES/EBU or S/PDIF I/O con-
OThe
conector
following Mic Software
Comsymbols permite a conexão
are used de um microfone ou uma
to highlight material digital de áudio. Conectores estéreo AES/EBU ou S/PDIF
mic,
fonte deor a line
nível
• iLok level source.
de linha.
USB SmartOKey The
conector Com Mic input
Com plug-in
(for storing Mic is a female
é XLR/TRS fêmea e
authorizations) nectors are selectable
I/Oselecionados
são Options porwith
meiothe AES–SPDIF
do switch switch. Esses
AES–S/PDIF. These conectores
con-
XLR/TRS
aceita •pluguesconnector
XLR ou that
TRS.accepts
O XLR
controle or
de TRS
ganhojacks. Theopera
(Gain) Gain em nectors support 24-bit, 48 kHz digital signals. Input signals
suportam sinais digitais de 24-bit, 48 kHz. Sinais de entradas com
Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok Analog Mic/Line Input Card thatconverted
provides
control
passos Userdeoperates
3 dB.are
Tips in
Phantomstepspower
helpful of 3 dB.
hints pode
for Phantom thepoweraomay
ser aplicado
getting CombeMic
ap-por AI16
with other
outras sample
taxas de rates are
amostragem sample-rate
são convertidos para 16
to
4848analog
kHz.
kHz.
meio
plieddo toswitch
the Mic
Com Power.
mic
most from your system. with the Mic Power switch.
• One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console EntradasI/O
e Saídas Analógicas (1 a 8)
Analog
AO16 Analog (1–8)
Output Card that provides 16 analog line level
DoNão conecte
not connectum ansistema
intercom desystem
intercomunicação diretamente
directly to the Com à
Each Stage
Important
input, as Rack
entrada Com,
some includes:
Notices include
pois alguns
intercom information
sistemas
systems that
use autilizam uma
signalling sinalização
voltage Theoutputs
Os 88pairs
pares de entradas
of analog e saídas
line inputs analógicas
and outputs nívelfor
are used dehard-
linha são
por
could
•which
Twovoltagem
affect yourque
(2) damage
can IEC pode
data
power danificar
orcables
the the
FOH a placa
performance
IO card. of FOH I/O. utilizadas
ware inserts,para inserts
or for input de periféricos
andOutput
outputCard ou para
of program entrada e saída de
material8 from
XO16 Analog and Digital that provides analog
your system. material
theline
mixlevelda posição
position. Thesede mixagem. Os conectores são balanceados
Saídas de Monitoração de 1/4 outputs,
de polegada. andare balanced,
8 AES digital 1/4-inch
outputs. TRS connec-
Monitor Outputs tors.
Shortcuts show youareuseful AT16 A-Net Output Card that provides 16 channels of A-Net
AsThesaídas de monitoração
Monitor Outputs são keyboard
used or para
utilizadas
for output enviar o material
to a near-field mon-
para output compatible with Aviom® Personal Mixers and other
itorsmonitores
mouse near-field
systemou(not
shortcuts.
or a cue mix um included).
sistema deThese
mixagem auxiliar (não
are 1/4-inch
incluídos). Pro16™ Series devices.
balanced OsTRSconectores
connectors. são balanceados de 1/4 de polegada.
Cross References point to related sections in IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an addi-
this guide and other VENUE guides. tional 8 channels of analog I/O and 8 channels of AES/EBU
digital I/O.

Chapter 2: Configuring and Connecting Profile 15
Right-click Click with the right
ol- mouse button
on-
Outras Conexões do Mix Rack
low- The names of Commands, Options, and Settings that appear
(AC, Sincronização e Conexões Opcionais)
The following symbols are used to highlight
Conectores AC
User Tipsdeare
Os conectores AChelpful
aceitamhints for AC
cabos getting the para cada uma das
padrão,
most from
duas unidades deyour system. (redundantes) internas.
alimentação
As unidades de alimentação possuem seleção automática de
voltagem (100V a 240V, 50–60 Hz) e trabalham automaticamente
quandoImportant
um caboNotices include information
de alimentação modular that
padrão é conectado a
could affect your data or
uma tomada AC, em qualquer país.the performance of
your system.
Porta ECx
Shortcuts show you useful keyboard or
A portamouse
ECx permite conectar um cabo Ethernet RJ-45 para controle
shortcuts.
remoto do sistema desde um laptop ou tablet.
Cross
Para References point to related
mais informações, sections in
veja o Capítulo 30,“ECx.”
Portas USB
As portas USB no painel frontal do Mix Rack são USB 2.0, permitindo
conexão de iLoks, unidades de armazenamento e outros dispositivos
USB. (Uma porta USB adicional está localizada no interior do chassi
do Mix Rack. Utilize-a para conectar e proteger um iLok pré-carregado
para que esteja sempre disponível para o sistema Mix Rack.)
Conector FOH Link
A porta FOH Link conecta a console Profile ao rack do sistema (Mix

Rack ou FOH Rack em conjunção com um ou mais Stage Racks).
Word Clock I/O
As portas Word Clock In e Word Clock Out permitem integrar

dispositivos digitais externos com o Mix Rack.

Connections
Conexões para
Stage Racks for
are Sistemas
used VENUE
with VENUE
an Profile
Profile
FOH Rack, Systems
and provide all stage The following components must be purchased separately:
This section describes system and audio connections for FOH Rack and StageDisplay
Rack systems. (For
• Video (15-inch or VENUE Mix Rack systems,
greater flat-panel see
VGA display
can
Esta be used
seção
“Connections simultaneously,
descreve as conexões
for VENUE Mix desupporting
áudio
Rack e deup
Systems” to
on96
sistema total
para
page inputs. FOH Rack e Stage Rack. (Para sistemas VENUE Mix Rack, veja “Conexões
sistemas
14). recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
para Sistemas Mix Rack Systems” na página 14). DVI supported.
Audio I/O
VENUE Profile mic preamps and • USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
• 48 inputs with remotely controllable
FOH Link Cable The following components are optional, and must be

(for Talkback)
FOH Rack (Front) FOH Rack (Back)
• System Restore CD Digital Snake Cables
Stage Rack (Front)
Primary Snake AT16 A-Net Output Card that provides 16 channels of A-Net
Redundant Snake output compatible with Aviom® Personal Mixers and other
Figure 5. VENUE Profile system component connections IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an addi-
digital I/O.


Connecting
Conectando Profile
a Profile aoto
FOHtheRack
FOH Rack
Connecting Profile
The Profile console to the
is connected FOH
to the Rack
FOH Rack with the provided FOH Link cable.
A console Profile se conecta ao FOH Rack com o cabo FOH Link fornecido.
The Profile console is connected to the FOH Rack with the provided FOH Link cable.
To connect the control surface and the FOH Rack:
Para conectar a superfície de controle e o FOH Rack:
ToConnect
 connect the
the control
FOH Linksurface
cableand the FOH
to the FOH Rack:
Link port on the back of the Profile console, and to the FOH Link port on the front
Conecte
 panel o cabo
of the FOHFOH Link
Rack. Onà each
portaend,
FOH be
Link na to
sure parte traseira
align da console
the notch in theProfile e à porta
connector FOH with
housing Link no
thepainel frontal
slot in do FOH
the plug, andRack. Em cada
to rotate
 Connect the FOH Link cable to the FOH Link port on the back of the Profile console, and to the FOH Link port on the front
extremidade,
the collar certifique-se
until the de alinharisofully
connector entalhe do conector e a ranhura do plugue e gire o anel de fixação até que o conector esteja firmemente
latched.
panel of the FOH Rack. On each end, be sure to align the notch in the connector housing with the slot in the plug, and to rotate
preso.
the collar until theUsed
Conventions connector
inisThis
fully latched.
Guide
:
Convention Action
om-
Conventions Used in This Guide
File > Save Choose Save from the
- All of our guides use the following conventions to indicate
File menu
:
Control+N Hold down the Control key
Figura 6. Conexão FOH Link entre
andProfile
press (esquerda) e FOH Rack (direita)
the N key
Convention Action between Profile (left) and FOH Rack (right)
Figure 6. FOH Link connection
om- Control-click Hold down thefrom
Control
Figure
File 6. FOH Link connection
> Save Choose between
Save the key
Profile (left) and FOH Rack (right)
- Conectando
Connecting o Stage
theFileRack
Stage
and ao
click the
menu FOHto
Rack
mouse Rackthe FOH Rack
button
Connecting
The Stage Rack isthe
Right-click
Control+N Stage
Click
connected
Hold down Rack
withtothe
the FOHto
right
theControl the
Rack
key FOH
with the Rack
Digital Snake cable (purchased separately).
ol- O Stage Rack se conectamouse
ao FOHbutton
Rack por meio de um cabo digital (Digital Snake - vendido separadamente).
and press the N key
on- The Stage Rack is connected to the FOH Rack with the Digital Snake cable (purchased separately).
low- Toconectar
Para connectum
Control-click a Stage
StageRack
Rack to
ao the
FOH
HoldOptions,
down FOH
the Rack:key
Rack:
Control
The names of Commands, and Settings that appear
To Connect
connect
on-screen
1 areathe
Stage
in asend and
Rack
differentclick
snake to the
tofont.
the mouse
FOH
the button
Rack:
Stage 1 Out port of the Stage Rack, and to the Stage 1 In port on the FOH Rack.
1 Conecte o cabo vermelho (send) à porta Stage 1 Out do Stage Rack e à porta Stage 1 In do FOH Rack.
1 Right-click
2 Connect
Connect the send snake Click with the right
totothe Stage
Stage1 1Out
Outport
portofon
thethe
Stage
FOHRack,
Rack,and
andtotothe
theStage
Stage1 1InInport
portononthe
theFOH Rack.
ol- The followingthe return
symbols snake
are used the
to highlight Stage Rack.
Conecte o cabo
2important brancomouse
information: (return)button
à porta Stage 1 Out do FOH Rack e à porta Stage 1 In do Stage Rack.
on- 2 Connect the return snake to the Stage 1 Out port on the FOH Rack, and to the Stage 1 In port on the Stage Rack.
The connectors on Avid’s Digital Snake cable are color coded, so that the white cable connects to the white-outlined ports.
low- The names of Commands,
Os conectores Options, and
dos cabos Settings thatsão
appear
User
TheTips are helpful
connectors hints Digital
on Avid’s for Snake
getting
Digital theda
Snake
Avid codificados por cores, então os cabos brancos conectam as portas com contorno
cable are color coded, so that the white cable connects to the white-outlined ports.
on-screen
When are
the
branco. in a different
system font.
is powered up, the primary snake connection is indicated by a solid Active LED. If the Snake Signal LEDs flash,
a Snakethe
When connection could notup,
system is powered bethe
established.
primary snake connection is indicated by a solid Active LED. If the Snake Signal LEDs flash,
The following
Quando o sistemasymbols are
é ligado, used to highlight
a primeira conexão é indicada por um LED aceso (Active). Se os LED Snake Signal piscarem, a conexão não pôde
a Snake connection
important information: could not be established.
ser estabelecida.
If there are problems with the Snake connection,
Important Notices include information that double check that all the BNC connectors are fully secured.
could affect your
If there data orwith
the performance of
User Tips are
Se houver are problems
helpful hints thegetting
for Snake the
connection, double check that all the BNC connectors are fully secured.
your system.problemas com a conexão Snake, cheque se todos os conectores BNC estão plugados de modo firme.

mouse shortcuts.
Signal LED Signal LED
your system.
Signal
Cross References pointLED
to related sections in Signal LED
this guide and other VENUE guides. Redundant Snake
Shortcuts show you useful keyboard or connects here
mouse shortcuts. Redundant Snake
connects here

Connectors with white sleeves
attach to terminals with white labels
Connectors
(Avid Digital with
Snakewhite sleeves
Cable only)
attach to terminals with white labels
(Avid Digital Snake Cable only)
Redundant Snake
connects here
Redundant Snake
connects here
Figure 7. Detail of Digital Snake cable connection between Stage Rack (left) and FOH Rack (right)
Figure 7. Detail of Digital Snake cable connection between Stage Rack (left) and FOH Rack (right)
Figura 7. Detalhe da conexão do cabo Digital Snake entre o Stage Rack (esquerda) e o FOH Rack (direita)
18
18 Guia VENUE
VENUE Profile
Profile Guide
Connecting a Second Stage Rack
Conectando
Connecting aum Segundo
Second Stage Stage
Rack Rack
If a second Stage Rack is used, an additional Snake Card must be installed in the FOH Rack. See the Snake Card Guide for more
information.
Se umIfsegundo
a secondStage
StageRack
Rackéisutilizado,
used, an uma placa adicional
additional Snake
Snake Card mustCard deve serininstalada
• Video
be installed Display no FOHSee
(15-inch
the FOH Rack. Rack.
orthe Veja flat-panel
greater
Snakeo Card
Guia Guide
Snake
VGA Card
for para mais
display
more
informações.
To connect a second
information. Stage Rack: recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
DVI supported.
1 Using
ParaAudio aI/O
conectar BNC cable (included with the additional Snake card), connect the Word Clock Out port on the first Snake card to the
To connect aum segundo
second StageStage Rack:
Rack:
Word Clock In port on the second Snake card. • USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
Using a BNC
11Utilizando cable
um cabo (included
BNC with
(fornecido the additional
juntamente com aSnake card), connect
placa adicional Snakethe Word
Card), Clocka Out
conecte portaport
WordonClock
the first Snake
Out da card to
primeira theSnake
placa
Word
Card ClockWord
à porta In port onIn
Clock thedasecond
segunda Snake
placacard.
Snake Card. Digital Snake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
Synchronization and Control I/O Word Clock BNC cable

Word Clock BNC cable

Word Clock connection between Snake cards purchased separately:
2 Connect the second Stage Rack to the FOH Rack with a Digital Snake cable. See “Connecting the Stage Rack to the FOH Rack”
Word Clock connection between Snake cards transfer of Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
2on page 18.
Conecte o segundo Stage Rack ao FOH Rack com um cabo Digital Snake. Veja “Conectando o Stage Rack ao FOH Rack” na página 18.
Included
2 Connect Stage Rack to the FOH Rack with a Digital Snake •cable.
Components
the second Near-field monitor speakers
See “Connecting forRack
the Stage mix to
position monitoring
the FOH Rack”
The
on page primary
18.
O cabo and redundant
principal snake cables
e o cabo redundante must ter
devem be the same length.
o mesmo • Headphones with 1/4-inch jack
comprimento.
•The primary
VENUE and redundant
Profile console snake cables must be the same length.
(for Talkback)
Snake 1
• Two (2) console lights Snake 1 Word Clock BNC cable
Snake 2 Word Clock BNC cable
Snake 2
Snake Card 1
Each Mix Rack
Stageor FOH
Rack 1 Rack includes: website (www.avid.com).
• System Restore CD Snake Card 2
Snake Card 1
Stage Rack 1
• ECx Ethernet Control Software Installer CD Mix Rack Options Snake Card 2
• Plug-in installer discs (if any) withSnake
pre-authorized
1 iLok AI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
Snake
• One FOH Link cable for connection to a1VENUE console
AO16 Analog
FOH Output
Rack Card that provides 16 analog line level
Each Stage Rack includes: Snake 2 outputs
• Two (2) IEC power cables FOH Rack
Snake 2 Analog and Digital Output Card that provides 8 analog
XO16Snake
Primary
line level
Redundant Snakeoutputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.
Stage Rack 2 Primary Snake
Redundant Snake
Stage
Figure 8. Digital Rack
Snake outputwith
2 and word clock connections for fully redundant system
cable compatible with Aviom® Personal Mixers and other
2 Stage Racks
Figure 8. Digital Snake cable and word clock connections for fully redundant system with 2 Stage Racks
IOx Input
Figura 8. Cabo Digital Snake e conexões Word Clock para sistema redundante com 2 Stage Racks and output expansion card that provides an addi-
digital I/O.
Conexões de Áudio
Audio Connections
Stage Rack Rack
Stage
Stage Rack Input Cards
Stage Rack Output Card
Figure 9. Audio connectors on Stage Rack
Figura 9. Conectores
Analog Audio de áudio no Stage Rack
Inputs
(Balanced Female XLR Connectors)
Entradas de áudio
 Connect analógicas
analog (conectores
mic-level fêmea
or line-level XLRsources
input balanceados)
to any
of the input connectors on any SRI Card.
 Conecte fontes analógicas nível de microfone ou nível de linha a qualquer conector de entrada de qualquer placa SRI.
Analog Audio Outputs
Saídas de áudio analógicas (conectores macho XLR balanceados)
(Balanced Male XLR Connectors)
  Conecte
Connectdestinos analógicosoutput
analog line-level nível de linha (como(such
destinations amplificadores
as de potência, crossovers ou caixas acústicas) a qualquer conector de
saída da placa SRO.
power amplifiers, crossovers, or speakers) to any of the output
connectors on any SRO Card.
Entradas e saídas digitais
Se Digital I/ORack inclui um opcional de entradas e saídas digitias, veja “Entradas Digitais e Taxas de Conversão” na página 24.
seu Stage
If your Stage Rack includes a digital I/O option, see “Digital In-
puts and Sample Rate Conversion” on page 24.

FOH Rack
FOH Rack
Stage Racks are used with an FOH Rack, and provide all 2-Track
Com Mic Phantom Power
stage The following components must be purchased separately:
AES/EBU I/O
Monitor 2-Track•Digital
Video Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display
can be used simultaneously, supporting
Com Mic Gain up to 96 total inputs.Format selector
Outputs
Com Mic 2-Track
Input DVI supported.
S/PDIF I/O
Audio I/O MIDI I/O 2-Track Analog I/O Analog I/O 1–8
•IO 8 analog output channels; expandable up to 48 analog or
section • The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
IOx
section
(Optional)
Digital I/O 1–8 Analog I/O 9–16
Figure
Figura 10.10. Audio connectors
Conectores on FOH
de áudio no FOH Rack,
Rack, showingconectores
apresentando standard padrão
IO connectors (top) and
(alto) e opcionais optionalof
transfer IOx connectors
Show (bottom)
data; 512 MB or larger recommended)

Analog
Entradas Inputs
e saídasand Outputs
analógicas  Connect a 2-channel digital playback source to the 2-Track
Conecte umawith
 • Headphones fonte sonora jack
1/4-inch de 2 canais à entrada 2-Track
(Conectores balanceados 1/4” TRS) AES/EBU
AES/EBUor ou
S/PDIF input.
S/PDIF input.
(Balanced
All VENUE1/4-inch
Profile TRS Connectors)
systems include the following:
• VENUE
Connect Profile console
the analog inputs and outputs of external proces-  Connect a 2-channel digital recording device to the 2-Track


Conecte as entradas e saídas analógicas de processadores (for Talkback)
 Conecte umoutput.
gravador digital de 2 canais à saída 2-Track
AES/EBU or S/PDIF
externos a qualquer um dos 8cables
sors •
to Two
any (2)
of IEC
these 8power
analog output
pares deand input epairs.
entradas saídas(16analógicas
inputs AES/EBU ou S/PDIF
• Footswitches (upoutput.
to 2)
and output
(16 pares pairs are
de entradas
• Monitor mountavailable
e saídas
for VGAif the
então IOx option
disponíveis
screen is installed.)
se oincluded)
(screen not opcional IOx  These connectors support 24-bit, 48 kHz digital signals. In-
está insatalado).
• Trackball
 Connect mount
any analog (trackball
output not included)
destination (such as a recording put
signals
Estaswith other suportam
conexões sample rates are digitais
sinais sample-rate converted
24-bit, 48 kHz. Sinais
device 48•entrada
tode BNC cables
kHz. (for connecting
com outras Word clocksão
taxas de amostragem between the para
convertidos
• or broadcast
VENUE Mousefeed)
Padto any of the outputs in this section.
VENUE system and external digital devices)
 Conecte qualquer destino analógico (como gravadores ou 48 kHz.
• VENUE
 Connect
equipamentosany Profile
analog Guide
broadcast)sound sources
a qualquer das(such as a
saídas CD player)
dessa seção. to • 25-pin
Monitor D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
Outputs
any of
• the
Twoinputs in thislights
(2) console section. Saídas de Monitoração
 Conecte qualquer fonte sonora analógica (como um CD player) (Balanced 1/4-inch
(Conectores TRS Connectors)
balanceados TRS 1/4”)
aDigital
qualquer uma and
Inputs das Outputs
entradas -desta seção.only
IOx Option Connect a monitor amplifier or powered monitors to the
• Rack(s) (see next) VENUE
 Conecte
Monitor Profile Expansion
umconnectors.
Output amplificador de potência ouOptions
monitores amplificados
(AES/EBU
Entradas Connectors)
e Saídas Digitais - Apenas com o opcional IOx aos conectores Monitor Output.
(Conectores  The
The Monitor
followingOutputs
optionsand
can the Headphone
be added Output
to VENUE onsystems.
Profile the
Racks, AES/EBU)
 Connect Software
the CDs,digital
two-channel iLoks,inputs
and and
Cables
outputs of ex-
ternal processors to any of the 4 AES/EBU digital output and front
Forof the console
details on all are fed
VENUE by the
systemsSolo/Monitor
and options,bus
visit the
 As conexões Monitor Outputs e Headphone Output na frente Avid do
 Each
input MixasRack
Conecte
connectors or this
in FOH
entradas Rack includes:
e saídas de dois canais de processadores
section. websitesão
console (www.avid.com).
alimentados pelo bus Solo/Monitor bus.
externos a qualquer um
• System Restore CD dos 4 conectores de entrada e saída Com Mic Connector
 These connectors
AES/EBU nesta seção. support 24-bit, 48 kHz digital signals. In- Conector Com Mic
 Plug a dynamic or condenser microphone, or any compati-
• ECxwith
put signals Ethernet
otherControl
sample Software Installer CDconverted
rates are sample-rate Mix Rack Options
•kHz.
Standalone Software Installer ble intercom system microphone into this connector.
to 48Estes
 conectores suportam sinaisCD
digitais de 24-bit, 48 kHz.  Plugue um microfone dinâmico ou condensador ou qualquer
Sinais •deiLok
entradas
USB com outras
Smart taxasstoring
Key (for de amostragem são convertidos
plug-in authorizations) I/O Options
sistema de intercomunicação compatível neste conector.
para 48 kHz. Com Mic Gain
2-Track Analog Inputs and Outputs
• Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok
 Turn Analog
AI16 the
Controle de Mic/Line
Ganho
Com MicCom Input
Mic
knob Card overall
to adjust that provides
Com Mic16 analog
gain.
(Balanced
• Two
Entradas 1/4-inch
(2) IEC
e Saídas TRS Connectors)
power
2-Track cables mic/line level inputs
(Conectores
• Onebalanceados
 Connect aFOH Link
2-track TRS 1/4”)
cable
analog for connection
playback source to
to athe
VENUE console
2-Track  Gire o knob Com Mic para ajustar o ganho
analog inputs. MIDI
AO16Input
Analogand Output
Output Card that provides 16 analog line level
 Each Stageuma
Conecte Rackfonte
includes:
sonora analógica de 2 canais às entradas outputs
Entrada
 Connecte aSaída MIDI MIDI device to the MIDI In and MIDI
compatible
 Connect a 2-track analog recording device to the 2-Track
analógicas
• Two2-Track.
(2) IEC power cables Out ports. Snapshots receiveOutput
and send MIDI
analog outputs. XO16
 Analog
Conecte anddispositivo
um Digital MIDI Card thatcommands,
compatívelprovides
às portas
and
8 analog
MIDI In e
generate and respond to MIDI Time Code.
 Conecte um gravador analógico de 2 canais às saídas analógicas MIDI Out. Envia e recebe comandos MIDI e gera e responde a MIDI
2-Track Digital Inputs and Outputs
2-Track. Time Code.
(AES/EBU and S/PDIF Connectors) Word Clock
Entradas e Saídas Digitais 2-Track Word Clock
 Switch the
(Conectores 2-Tracke digital
AES/EBU S/PDIF)I/O between AES/EBU and S/PDIF Pro16™
If you Series devices.
are integrating digital devices with your VENUE system,
by moving the 2-Track Digital Format selector switch to the Se você
make está integrando
the necessary Word dispositivos digitaisand
clock connections a seu sistema
settings. VENUE,
For
 Escolha entradas e saídas digitais como formats
AES/EBUmay
e S/ IOx Input
faça as and output
conexões expansion de
e configurações card thatClock
Word provides an addi-Para
corresponding position. Only one of these digital details, see “Synchronizing External Digital Sourcenecessárias.
Devices”
PDIF movendo o seletor 2-Track Digital Format para a posição tional 8 channels of analog I/O and 8 channels of AES/EBU
be active at a time. ondetalhes,
page 25. veja “Sincronizando Dispositivos Digitais Externos”, na
correspondente. Apenas um desses formatos digitias pode estar digital 25.
página I/O.
ativo por vez. Chapter 2: Configuring and Connecting Profile 21

Conexões da Console Profile Talkback
Talkback
Profile Console Connections
A entrada
A TalkbackTalkback (XLR)isestá
input (XLR) on no
thepainel superior.
top panel.
Esta seção descreve as portas e os conectores da console VENUE
This section describes the ports and connectors on the VENUE
Profile. A maioria dos conectores estão no painel traseiro.
Profile console. Most connectors are on the Profile back panel. Conector para microfone Talkback
Talkback Mic Connector
FOH Link Plugue
Plug
 um
a dynamic microfone
or dinâmico
condenser mic into ou
this condensador
connector. neste
Power VGA conector.
Console Lights Footswitch Console Lights
System Requirements and Conventions Used in This Guide
Conventions Used in This Guide
Compatibility All of our guides use the following conventions to indicate
All of our guides use the following conventions
USB GPI to indicate Talkback Mic
Avid can only assure compatibility and provide support for menu choices and key commands:
connector
r menu choices and key commands:
VENUE Profile back panel and connectors :
: hardware and software it has tested and approved.

Painel traseiro e conectores da VENUE Profile Convention Action
Convention Action Talkback switch
VGA Display
om- File > Save
2-Track switch Choose Save from the Talkback level
puters,
Display
File
 VGAaoperating
> Save
Plug systems,
compatible Choose hard
Save drives,
VGA display from the
into andconnector.
this third-party de-
File menu
vices, visit: File menu Oscillator switch
 Plugue um monitor de vídeo VGA compatível neste conector.
www.avid.com/compatibility Control+N Hold down the Control key
USB Keyboard Hold
Control+N anddown
Trackball
the Control key On/Talk switch and press the N key Route to
and press the N key Selected
Teclado e Trackball USB
 Plug a compatible USB keyboard and Trackball (or mouse)
Control-click Hold
into the two available down
USB the Controlon
connectors keythe front the con- Talkback microphone connector and controls
and Talkback
click the mouse button
 Registration
Plugue um teclado USB e um trackball
button ou mouse USB
Controles e conector de microfone
sole (just below the and click
faders forthe mouse
inputs 17–24).
compatíveis nestes dois conectores USB disponíveis na frente da Talkback
Right-click Level Click with the right
Right-click
console
Review(embaixo Click
dos fades
the enclosed withentrada
de
Registrationthe right
17 a 24). Card and fol-
Information
l- Thede
Nível
 talkback
Talkbackgain formouse button
this connector is fixed at 20 dB.
Other
low theUSB Devices
instructionsmouse button
on it to quickly register your purchase on-
on- Outros
line.dispositivos USB you become eligible to receive the follow-
By registering, 
TheAdjust
namestalkback send level
of Commands, by pressing
Options, the Talkback
and Settings switch
that appear
ow- VENUE
The namesProfile providesOptions,
of Commands, USB portsand onSettings
the topthat
panel (near the
appear O Talkback/Osc
 the
in ganho para este conector
section andéturning
fixado em
the20 dB. knob.
level
ing: on-screen are in a different font.
meters)
VENUE andoferece
Profile
on-screen are onathe
in back
portas
different panel.
USB Use
font. these ports
no painel to connect
superior (próximoiLok
aos
• Technical
Smart
meters) eKeys, USBsupport
no painel flash information
disks
traseiro. or other
Utilize compatible
essas USB devices.
portas para conectar  Ajuste o nível de envio de talkback pressionando o switch
Talkback
The following
chaves• iLok,
Software symbols
updateare
dispositivos and
de used to highlight
upgrade
armazenamento notices
USB ou outros. Talkback naSwitch
seção Talkback/Osc e girando o knob de nível.
importantThe Profile console
information: provides
• Hardware warranty information USB 1.1 ports. For best perfor-  Activate talkback by pressing the Talkback switch.
Amance,
console useProfile
the fasteroferece
USB 2.0portas
ports USB
on the1.1.
MixPara
Rack mlehor
or Switch Talkback
User Tips are helpful hints for getting the
UserFOHTips are to
performance,
Rack helpful
utilizehints
connect as forflash
USB getting
portas USB the
disks 2.0 existentes
for data no Mix
transfer.
CAN most
Bus
 Ative ofrom your system.
Talkback pressionando o switch Talkback.
Rack
most ou your
from no FOH Rack para conectar dispositivos USB para
system.
transferência de dados.
FOH Link This XLR3-M connector is not functional.
CAN Bus
FOH Important Notices include information that
Link
FOH Link connects Profile to the Mix Rack or FOH Rack. One could affect your data or the performance of
could affect your data or the performance of Este conector XLR3-M não é funcional.
FOH Link cable is included with each Mix Rack and FOH Rack. GPI Connections
your system.
FOH Link
yourconecta
system. a Profile ao Mix Rack ou FOH Rack. Um cabo FOH
Link é fornecido com cada Mix Rack e FOH Rack. Conexões
VENUE GPI provides 8 channels of GPI input and output
Profile
Power through separate
Shortcuts 25-pin
show D-Subkeyboard
you useful connectorsor on the back panel.
Alimentação A VENUE Profile oferece 8 canais de entrada e saída GPI através de
mouse shortcuts.
Twomouse shortcuts.
male, 3-pin IEC power sockets with cable retaining clips conectores D-Sub de 25wiring
For specifications, pinos diagrams
no painel and
traseiro.
pinouts, see
Dois
aresoquetes
provided,macho IEC
one for de of
each 3 the
pinos com clipes
internal powerde retenção
supplies. Twode Chapter 29, “Control Surface Reference.”
cabos estão IEC
standard disponíveis, um para
power cables cada unidade
are provided de alimentação
with each console. ParaReferences
Cross especificações,
point todiagramas de fiação
related sections in e pinagem, veja o
Cross References point to related sections in Capítulo 29, other
“Referências da Superfície de Controle”.
interna. Dois cabos padrão IEC são fornecidos com cada console. this guide
GPI Applicationsand VENUE guides.
Footswitch
Footswitch 1e2 1 and 2 Aplicações
GPI inputs GPI
are connected to the outputs of a variety of switch-
Dois jaques fêmea 1/4” TS estão disponíveis para entrada de ing devices such as footswitches, momentary or latching
Two female 1/4-inch TS footswitch jacks are provided for Entradas GPI são conectadas a saídas GPI de uma variedade de
switches. Os footswitches podem ser normalmente abertos ou push-button switches, or logic outputs of a larger show con-
switch travados
fechados, input. Footswitches can be As
ou momentâneos. normally
funçõesopen
para or normally
esses jaques dispositivos seletores como footswitches, push-button momentâneos
trol system. Example applications of GPI inputs include re-
sãoclosed, latching
definidas or momentary.
na página Functions are assigned to
Options > Events. ou travados, ou saída de um sistema de controle maior.
mote toggling
Exemplos of a console
de aplicações function
de GPI such
incluem as Talkback,
a alteração muting
remota de uma
these jacks on-screen in the Options > Events page.
afunção
channel, or recalling a specific snapshot.
da console como Talkback, Mute de canal e a chamada de
Luzes da Console
uma cena (snapshot) específica.
Console Lights GPI outputs connect to compatible inputs found on a variety
Dois jaques XLR3-F para conectar as luzes de console fornecidas.
of external
Saídas GPIdevices such as LEDs,
são conectadas small relays,
a entradas de power sequenc- de
uma variedade
Two XLR3-F jacks to connect to the included console lights. ers, and logic inputs on show control systems.
dispositivos compatíveis externos, como LEDs, relés de pequeno
porte, seqüencers de energia e sistemas de controle de entradas.

System Requirements and Conventions Used in This Guide
• Hardware
Rack warranty information
Compatibility
Stage Features Additional
All ofUser
our Tips
guidesRequired Components
Exemplos areuse the following
helpful conventions
hints for getting the to indicate
Conventions Used in GPI
de aplicações de saídas incluem:
This Guide
Stagecan
Avid Racks are
only used compatibility
assure with an FOH Rack, and provide
and provide all for
support stage Ligando
menu
The most o Sistema
choices
from
following and key commands:
your system. must be purchased separately:
components
• ofDisparar
audio
our I/O
Allhardware uma
and
guides máquina
for software
VENUE
use itde playback
Profile
has deUp
systems.
tested
the following andefeitostosonoros
to two
approved.
conventions Stage quando
Racks
indicate
:

menu uma
can becena (snapshot)
usedand
choices específica
simultaneously,
key commands: é chamada.
supporting up to 96 total inputs. Convention Actionquando o sistema é ligado. Antes de
Os faders se movem
r recommended;
Important 1024x768
Notices includeminimum
informationresolution). VGA and
For complete system requirements and a list of qualified com- ligar o sistema, certifique-se de que that
todos os faders estejam
• puters,
:
Acender uma luzsystems,

quandohard
um drives,
fader éand
elevado acima de-
de um File
DVI> Save
supported.
could affect your Choose
data or Save
the from the of
performance
Audio operating third-party com seus cursos livres de obstruções.
limiarI/O
Convention
mínimo. Action
your
File menu
system. and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
m- vices, visit: • USB keyboard
File >•Save
48 inputs withChoose
remotely
Savecontrollable
from the mic preamps and
• Acender ou piscar um LED ouphantom
individually selectable
File menu
sinal luminoso
power.
como lembrete de Control+N
Ligue o sistema
Hold down the Control key
na seguinte sequência:
Digital Snake show
Cable and press
(VENUE the N Systems
key
um modo vital da console, como Solo in Place. Shortcuts you useful Profile
keyboard or Only)
Control+N Hold down the Control key
• Ligardigital
e desligar amplificadores
outputs perpress
Stagethe e key
outros sistemas adjacentes
Rack. 1•Control-click
The connection
mouse
Console VENUE between
shortcuts.
Profile FOHthe
Hold down Rack and key
Control Stage Rack requires
and N andThis
clickcable
the mouse
a Digital Snake cable. can bebutton
purchased directly
Registration
quando a VENUE Profile é ligada ou desligada.
Control-click Hold down the Racks:
2Right-click
Synchronization and Control I/OControl key Clicktowith
Cross References point the right
related sections in
Review the enclosedand
Registration Information
click the mouse button Card and fol- • Mix Rack mouse button
As low •the
funçõesSnake
GPI,connectors
assim on
instructions comototoenable
it as primary
registerand
configurações
quickly deredundant
your purchase (if
footswitch são
on- – ou this
– guide and other VENUE guides.
Right-click
realizadas utilizando
applicable) as Click
Eventswith
connection the
List
to right
na
a janela
VENUE Options
FOH > Events.
Rack. Para Optional Components
• names Stage Rack e depois FOH Rack
l- line. By registering, you become eligible to receive the follow- The of Commands, Options, and Settings that appear
mais informações, veja mouse
ing:
button
o capítulo 22, “Eventos”. on-screen are incomponents
a different font.
on- The following are optional, and must be
3 Computadores conectados para gravação e/ou reprodução
ow- • Technical
The names supportGPI
ofdispositivos information purchased separately:
Para conectar Commands, como and
Options, Settings
gatilhos that appear
da Profile: The following symbols are used to highlight
System
on-screen are in Components
• Software aupdate
different
andfont.
upgrade notices • USB de
4 Sistema flash disk (or other
monitoração
portable USB storage device for
de áudio
1 Conecte uma extremidade
• Hardware do cabo D-Sub de 25 pinos (não
warranty information transfer of Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
The following
à portasymbols arepainel
used traseiro
to highlight Cada
incluído)
Included
GPI IN no
Components
da Profile. • User Tipsunidade
Near-field de speakers
monitor
are helpful alimentação
hints for for temthe
mix
getting seu próprio
position interruptor
monitoring
important information: que deve ser colocado na posição On para ser ligado.
• most from yourwith
Headphones system.
1/4-inch jack
2 Conecte a outra
All VENUE extremidade
Profile systemsàinclude
saída GPI
theapropriada
following:no dispositivo
User Tips are helpful hints for getting the
externo. • Dynamic or condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
• VENUE
most Profile
from your console
system. (for Talkback)
Desligando
Important o Sistema
Notices include information that
Para conectar dispositivos cables
• Two (2) IEC power GPI para serem disparados pela • could
Footswitches (up
affect your to or
data 2) the performance of
Profile:• Monitor mount for VGA screen (screen not included)
Important Notices include information that • your
Desligue osystem.
MIDI cables (for
sistema connecting
na seguinte external MIDI devices)
sequência:
System
could
Requirements
• Trackball
affect mount
data (trackball notand
included) Conventions Used in This Guide
1 Conecte uma your
extremidade or the
doperformance
cabo D-Sub of de 25 pinos (não • BNC cables (for connecting Word clock between the
Compatibility
•
yourVENUE
system. Mouse Pad
incluído) à porta GPI OUT no painel traseiro da Profile. 1 Sistema
All de monitoração
ofShortcuts
our guides
VENUE useyou
system the de áudio digital
following
anduseful
external conventions to indicate
show keyboard ordevices)
• can
Avid VENUE
onlyProfile
assure Guide
compatibility and provide support for menu choices
• mouse and key
25-pinshortcuts. commands:
D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
2 Conecte 2 Computadores conectados para gravação e/ou reprodução
• Twoaand outra extremidade à entrada GPI apropriada no :
hardware
Shortcuts (2) console
software
show lights
it has
you useful tested
keyboard and
or approved.
dispositivo externo. Convention Action
• Protective
mouse Dust Cover
shortcuts. 3 Racks:
• File > Save
FOH Rack e depois Stage Rack
• Rack(s)
puters, (see systems,
operating next) hard drives, and third-party de- VENUE
– ou –
Profile
this guide and otherExpansion
Choose
VENUE Save from theOptions
guides.
Para especificações, diagramas de fiação e pinagem, veja o File menu
vices, visit:
Cross References point to related sections in • Mix Rack
Capítulo 29, “Referências da Superfície de Controle”. The following options can be added to VENUE Profile systems.
Racks, Software
this guide and other CDs,
VENUE
www.avid.com/compatibility iLoks,
guides.and Cables Control+N Hold down the Control key
4 Console VENUE Profileand press the N key
• System Restore CD Control-click Hold down the Control key
Registration
• ECx Ethernet Control Software Installer CD Configurando o Relógio do Sistema
Mix Rack Options
• Standalone Software Installer CD Right-click Click with the right
Review the enclosed Registration Information Card and fol- mouse button
low•the
iLok USB Smarton
instructions Key (for
it to storing
quickly plug-in
register authorizations)
your purchase on- I/O Options
Quando você trabalha com um sistema Venue pela primeira vez,
• By
line. Plug-in installer
registering, youdiscs (if any)
become with to
eligible pre-authorized iLok
receive the follow- certifique-se
The ofde que a hora, a dataand
e a zona dethat
fusoappear
horário do
AI16names
relógioAnalog Commands,
Mic/Line
do sistema
Options,
Input
estão Card thatSettings
ajustados provides 16 analog
apropriadamente. Essa
ing:• Two (2) IEC power cables on-screen are ininputs
mic/line level a different font.
configuração pode afetar a sincronização de dados com dispositivos
•• Technical
One FOHsupport information
Link cable for connection to a VENUE console de armazenamento portáties. Vejahighlight
“Transferindo Configurações,
The
AO16following symbols
Analog Output are used
Card that to
provides 16 analog line level
• Software update and upgrade notices Shows e Presets” na
important information: página 175.
• Hardware warranty information
• Two (2) IEC power cables A hora relógio
Tips do
aresistema pode ser apresentada na barra de Status
XO16User
Analog and helpful
Digitalhints for Card
Output getting the provides
that 8 analog
constantemente. Para mais informações, veja “Relógio do Sistema”
line most from
level 63. yourand
outputs, system.
8 AES digital outputs.
na página
Alterar oNotices
Important relógio include
do sistema enquantothat
information utiliza uma licença iLok
output(para
compatible
um your with
plug-in emAviom® Personal Mixers and other de
could affect data orperíodo de demonstração
the performance of ou aluguel
Pro16™ um Series devices.
plug-in) pode fazer expirar a autorização do plug-in.
your system.
8 VENUE Profile Guide digital I/O.
mouse shortcuts.
Capítulo
this guide 2: Configuração
and other VENUE guides.e Conexão da VENUE Profile 23
Enabling
Habilitando
Enabling a aSecond
um SecondStage
Segundo Stage
Stage Rack
Rack
Rack DigitalInputs
Entradas
Digital Inputs
Digitaisandand Sample
eSample
Conversão Rate
Rate de Taxa de
Enabling a Second Stage Rack Digital
Conversion Inputs and Sample Rate
Enabling aconfirm
Second Stagewith Rack Amostragem
Digital
Conversion Inputs and Sample Rate
ParaTohabilitar
enable and
ToEnabling
e confirmar
a Second
communication
a comunicação
Stage comthe
with Rack
o second
segundoStage
Stage Conversion
Digital Inputs
enable and confirm
Rack:
Rack:
communication the second Stage
To enable and confirm communication with the second Stage Conversion
This section describesand
how toSample Rate
connect and clock external dig-
Rack: Esta
This seção
section descreve
describes como
how conectar
to connect eand
and sincronizar
clock dispositivos
external dig-
To Rack:
enable and confirm communication with the second Stage
1 Put the system in Config mode.
Conversion
This section describes how
ital devices to VENUE systems.
digitais
ital externos
devices to VENUEao sistema
to
VENUE
systems.
connect clock external dig-
Rack:
To enable
Put and confirm
theo system in communication with the second Stage This
italsection
devicesdescribes
to VENUE how to connect and clock external dig-
systems.
1 1Coloque sistema noConfig
modo mode.
Config.
Rack: This
ital section
devices todescribes
If your how tothe
VENUEincludes
system systems. connect
VENUEand clock
MADI external
option, dig-
see the
Gothe
1 2Put to system
the Options page and
in Config mode. click the System tab. Se seu sistema inclui
theoVENUE
opcionalMADI
VENUE MADI,see
veja
theo Guia
2 Go to the Options page and click the System tab.
2 Vá 2para
Go a página
to the Options
Options e
pageclique
and aclick
abathe
System.
System tab. ital If your
devices system
to includes
VENUE
If your system
VENUE MADI Card systems.
includes thefor
guide VENUE
option,
MADI option, see the
more information.
1 Put the system in Config mode. VENUE VENUE MADI
MADI para
Card maisfor
guide informações.
more information.
2 3GoClick Edit.
to the Options page and click the System tab. If your
VENUEsystem
MADI includes
Card the
guideVENUE MADI
for more option, see the
information.
3 Click Edit.
2 3Go
3 CliqueClick Edit.
to the
em Edit.Options page and click the System tab. If your system
VENUE includes
MADI Card thefor
guide VENUE MADI option, see the
more information.
Select
3 4Click Enable Stage 2, and click Apply. The system restarts.
Edit. Overview
Visão Geral
4 Select Enable Stage 2, and click Apply. The system restarts.
Select Enable Stage 2, and click Apply. The system restarts.
Overview VENUE MADI Card guide for more information.
Overview
3 4Click Edit.
4 Selecione EnableStage
4 Select Enable Stage2,2 and
e clique
clickApply.
Apply.OThe
sistema reiniciará.
system restarts. Overview
The
Os types
tipos de of digital I/O
entradas and connectivity available varies de-
The types of digital I/Oe and
saídas digitais e aavailable
connectivity conectividade
varies disponível
de-
4 Select Enable Stage 2, and click Apply. The system restarts. Overview
The variar
pending
pode types
onof digital
your I/O components
system
dependendo and componenetes
dos connectivity available
and their
de varies de-e a
configuration:
seu
pending on your system components and their configuration:
sistema
The types ofon
pending digital
your systemI/O andcomponentsconnectivityand available varies de-
their configuration:
configuração deles:
The
Mixtypes
pending Rack onof The digital
your VENUE
system I/OMix andRack
components connectivity
providesand theiravailable varies (AES)
a pairconfiguration:
of digital de-
Mix Rack The VENUE Mix Rack provides a pair of digital (AES)
pending
Mix
2-Track
Mix Rack Rack on
inputs
O MixThe
your VENUE
system
and
Rack Mix
outputs.
VENUEThe Rack
components The
oferece provides
Mix and
Rack
um par a pair
their
can
de of
also digital
configuration:
entradas be e(AES)
ex- saídas
2-Track
Mix Rack inputs
The and
VENUE outputs.
Mix RackThe Mix Rack
provides a can
pair also
ofas be ex-(AES)
digital
2-Track
panded
digitais inputs
to
2-Track include andadditional
(AES). outputs.
O Mix Rack digitalMixI/O
também Rack (such
pode can seralso
an be XO16
expandido ex- para
panded
Mix
2-Track Rackto include
The
inputs VENUE additional
Mix Rack digital I/O
provides (such
a can
pair asalso
ofan XO16
digital (AES)
panded
incluir
card, to
entradas
to add 8and
include outputs.
e saídas
channels additional
digitaisThe
of analog Mix
digital
adicionaisRack
outputI/O (such
(como
and 8 as
uma be
channels ex-
anplaca
XO16 ofXO16,
card,
panded to add
2-Track toinputs8 channels
include and of analog
outputs.
additional The output
digitalMix Rack
I/O and
(such can8 aschannels
also
an be
XO16 ex-of
para
card,
digital adicionar
to 88channels
add output).
(AES) canaisMix deofsaídasanalog
Rack analógicas
also output
provides ande Word
88canais
channels
clock de I/O.
saídas
of
digital
panded
card,
digitais (AES)
to to
add
AES). output).
include
8 channels
Ooutput). Mix
Mixadditional
Rack of Rack
analog
tambémalsooutput
digital provides
I/O
possui (such
and Word
8 as
entrada anclock
channels eXO16 I/O.
saídaof I/O.Word
digital (AES) Mix Rack also provides Word clock
card,
FOH to
Clock.
digital addVENUE
(AES)
Rack 8 channels
output). FOHMixof Racks analog
Rack alsooutput
provide many
provides andWord 8 channels
digital inputs
clock ofand
I/O.
FOH Rack VENUE FOH Racks provide many digital inputs and
digital
FOH Rack
outputs, (AES)whichVENUE canFOH
output). beMix Racks
Rack provide
expanded also many
provides
further digitalclock
Word
by adding inputs
an IOx and
I/O. or
outputs,
FOH
FOH Rack
Rack which
VENUE
O FOHcanFOH be
Rack expanded
Racks
VENUE further
provide
oferece manyby
muitas adding
digital an IOxand
inputs
entradas eor saídas
Enabling the second Stage Rack outputs,
VENUE which
MADI can
card. be
FOH expanded
Rack alsofurther
provides by adding
Word an IOx
clock I/O. or
VENUE
FOH Rack
digitais, MADI
que VENUE card.
podem FOH
FOHserFOH Rack also
Racks
expandidas provide provides
com manyaby Word
digital
adição declock
inputs
uma I/O.and
placa
Enabling the second Stage Rack
Enabling the second Stage Rack
outputs,
VENUE which
MADI cancard.be expanded Rack further
also provides addingWord an IOx
clock I/O.IOx
or
5 Go totheOptions > Devices to view hardware status. The con- ou
VENUE VENUE
outputs,
Stage MADI
Rack MADI.
which card.
VENUE O FOH
can be
FOH Rack
expanded
Stage Rack também
Racks alsocanfurtheroferece
provides by Word
be expanded entrada
adding an
clock
by eadding
saída
I/O.orWord
IOx a
5Enabling second
Go to Options Stage
> DevicesRack
to view hardware status. The con- Stage Rack VENUE Stage Racks can be expanded by adding a
5 Go
nection
Enabling to Options
to the > Devices
second
the second Stage
Stagepara toRack
Rackver viewshould
hardware status. The
be displayed in con-
the Clock.
VENUE
Stage
DSI MADI
RackInput
Digital card.card
VENUE FOH toRack
Stage Racks
add also
8 canprovides
channels of Word
be expanded digitalclockby
(AES I/O.
adding
or a
5 Vá em Options
nection > Devices
totoOptions
the second StagetoRack o status do hardware. A conexão
should be displayed in con-
the DSI Digital Input VENUE card to add 8 channels of digitalby (AES or a
5 Go
para
nection
FOH to the>second
Rack graphic. Devices
Stageview hardware
Rack status.
should be The
displayed in the Stage
DSI Rack
ADAT) Digital
input, and Stage
Input card
by addingtoRacksaddacan 8DSO beDigital
channels expanded digitaladding
ofOutput (AES for
card or 8
5 o
FOH Gosegundo
Rack
nection theStage
graphic.
totoOptions Rack deve
> Devices
second Stage ser exibida
toRack
view no
be gráfico
hardware
should status.FOH
displayed inRack.
The con-
the ADAT)
Stage
DSI input,
Rack
Rack
Digital and card
VENUE
Stage
Input byRacks
adding
Stage
to Racks
add a 8DSO
VENUE can Digital
podem
channels be of Output
expanded
ser card
by
expandidos
digital (AES for
adding 8com
or for a a
FOH Rack graphic. ADAT) input,
channels of digitaland (AES by adding or ADAT) a DSO DigitalDSI
output. Output
cards card
also pro-8
nection
FOH Racktographic.
the second Stage Rack should be displayed in the adição
channels
DSI
ADAT) de
Digitalof uma
input, digital
Input
and placa
(AES
card
by DSI
or add
to
adding Digital
ADAT) a 8
DSO Input
output.
channels para
Digital DSI
of adicionar
cards card
digital
Output also
(AES 8 forcanais
pro-
or 8 de
channels
vide Wordof digital
clock I/O.(AES or ADAT) output. DSI cards also pro-
FOH Rack graphic. entradas
vide
ADAT)Word
channels ofdigitais
clock
input, and
digital I/O.(AES
by
(AES ou
adding
or ADAT)
ADAT) a DSO eoutput.
umaDigitalplaca
DSIOutputDSO card
cards Digital
also for
pro-Output
8
vide Word clock I/O.
para
channels
VENUE
vide 8 canais
Word of
digital
clock deI/O
digital saídas
I/O. (AES
(such digitais
orasADAT)the(AES DSI ou
output. ADAT).
card) DSIAcards
operates placa DSi
thetambém
atalso pro-
VENUE
oferece digital
entrada I/Oe (such
saída as
Word theClock.
DSI card) operates at the
VENUE
vide
VENUE Word digital I/O
I/O.(such
clock sample
system rate asof the 48DSI kHz. card)
Theoperates
DSI cardatprovides the
VENUE
VENUE system
digital sample
I/O (such rate as ofthe 48DSI kHz. Theoperates
card) DSI cardatprovides the
VENUE
auto-detection system sample
and sample rate of 48
rate kHz. The
conversion DSIinput,
on card provides
letting
As
VENUE entradas
auto-detection
VENUE digital
system eandsaídas
I/O
sample sample
(such digitais
rate asrate
ofthe48daDSI VENUE
conversion
kHz. card)
The (como
on
operates
DSI asatprovides
input,
card dathe placa DSI)
letting
auto-detection
you connect a and variety
wide sample of rate conversion
digital sources on input,
without letting
having
operam
you
VENUEconnect na
system taxa
a wide de
sample amostragem
variety rateof ofdigital
48 de
kHz. 48
sourceskHz
The do
without
DSI sistema having
card provides VENUE. A
auto-detection
toyoube connect
concerned and
a wide
withsamplevariety rate
synchronizationof conversion
digital sources
and onclockinput,
without letting
connections. having
toplaca DSI
be connect
concerned oferece with auto-detecção
synchronization e conversão
and clock de taxa de
connections.amostragem
auto-detection
you andwith
a wide sample
variety rate
of conversion
digital andon
sources input,
without letting
having
natoentrada,
be concerned permitindo synchronization
a conexão de uma clock
grande connections.
variedade de
you
to be connect
concerned a wide
with variety
synchronizationof digital sources and clock without
connections.having
Sample
fontes Ratesem
digitais Conversion
que sejaLatency necessário se preocupar com conexões
Sample
to be Rate Conversion
concerned with Latency
synchronization and clock connections.
e Sample
sincronização do relógio. Latency
Rate Conversion
When Rate
Sample sample rate conversion
Conversion Latency is enabled on DSI or other
When sample rate conversion is enabled on DSI or other
When Rate
Sample
VENUE
Latência sample
digital
da Conversãorate conversion
Conversion
inputs, de Latency
input
Taxa is
signal
de enabled
paths will
Amostragem on DSI incur oraother
small
VENUE
When digital inputs,
sample rate input signal
conversion is paths will
enabled on incur
DSI or aother
small
amount of latency. The following table illustrates thea sample
VENUE digital inputs, input signal paths will incur small
amount
When
VENUE of
samplelatency.
digital rateThe
inputs, following
conversion
input table
is enabled
signal paths illustrates
on
will DSI
incur the
oraothersample
small
amount
Quando a of latency.
conversão deThetaxa following
de
rate conversion processing delay at various sample rates. amostragemtable illustrates
está the
habilitada sample
na DSI
rate conversion processing
VENUE
amount
ourate
outra digital
of latency.
entrada
conversion inputs, Theinput
digital
processing dadelay
following signalat various
delaytable
VENUE, paths
oat sample
will
illustrates
sinal
various de incur
entrada
sample
rates.
the a rates.
small uma
sample
sofrerá
Minimum
amount ofAdditional
latency. Latency due to at Sample Rate Conversion
Detail of Devices page showing connection to second Stage Rack
rate
Minimum conversion
pequena latência.
Additional A The
processing
tabela
Latency following
due delay
seguinte
to Sample table
various illustrates
apresenta
Rate sampleo delay
Conversion the
rates.
dosample
processo
Minimum
rate conversion Additional Latency delay
processing due to at Sample
various Rate Conversion
sample rates.
Detail of Devices page showing connection to second Stage Rack
Detalhe da página
Detail Devicespage
of Devices mostrando a conexão
showing do segundo
connection Stage Rack
to second Stage Rack
deExternal
conversão para diferentes
Sample Rate taxasSRC de amostragem.
Process Delay
Minimum
External Additional
Sample Rate Latency due to SRC Sample Rate Conversion
Process Delay
Detail of Devices page showing connection to second Stage Rack External
Minimum SampleLatency
Additional Rate due to Sample SRC Process
Rate Conversion Delay
The
Oof second
segundo StageRack
Stage Rackprecisa
must beserenabled for the
habilitado na Devices
aba tab
Devices 32 kHz
External Sample Rate 1.50 ms
SRC Process Delay
Detail
The DevicesStage
second page showing connection
Rack must to second
be enabled for theStage Rack
Devices tab 32 kHz 1.50 ms
toThe second
display theStage Rack
correct must
number be
of enabled foroutput
inputplacas
and the Devices
cards tab
in 32 kHz Sample Rate
External SRC1.50 ms
Process Delay
topara
The
apresentar
display
secondtheStage o número
correct number
Rack must
correto
be inputdeand
of enabled for the
de cards
output entradas
Devices in e
tab 3244.1
kHz kHz 1.501.09 msms
to display
that unit.
saídas the
na unidade. correct number of input and output cards in 44.1 kHz 1.09 ms
that
toThe unit.
second
display theStage Rack
correct must be
number of enabled
input andforoutput
the Devices
cards tab
in 3244.1
kHz kHz 1.09
1.50 ms ms
that unit. 48 kHz
44.1 1.091.00 msms
to display
that unit. the correct number of input and output cards in 48 kHz 1.00 ms
48 kHz
44.1 1.00
1.09 ms ms
that unit. 4888.2
kHz kHz 1.000.848 ms ms
88.2 kHz 0.848 ms
4888.2
kHz kHz 0.848
1.00 ms ms
96 kHz
88.2 0.833
0.848 ms ms
96 kHz 0.833 ms
96 kHz
88.2 0.833
0.848 ms ms
96 kHz rate conversion (SRC) can
Sample 0.833 also msbe disabled (DSI card
Sample
96 kHzrate conversion (SRC) can0.833 also be msdisabled (DSI card
Sample
only). Thisrateprovides
conversion (SRC) can
the lowest also
possible be
inputdisabled
path (DSI latency, card
only).
Sample Thisrate provides
conversion the lowest
(SRC) possible
can also input
be disabledpath (DSIlatency, cardand
only).
but This
requires
A conversão provides
that
de taxa care the
be lowest
taken to possible
synchronize input path
the latency,
source
but requires
Sample that
rateprovides care de
conversion be amostragem
taken
(SRC) to
can
(Sample rate
synchronize the conversion
source and- SRC)
only).
other
pode
This
but ser
requires
devices
também that the
care
accordingly lowest
be
desabilitada taken
(see(apenastoalso
possible beinput
synchronize
“Synchronizing
disabled
path
na placa External the(DSI
DSI).
latency,
source card
IssoDigi- and
oferece
other
only).
but devices
This
requires accordingly
provides
that care the bede (see “Synchronizing
lowest
taken topossible
synchronize inputExternal
path
the Digi-
latency,
source and
menores
other
tal Source possibilidades
devices Devices”accordingly
on page latência
(see
25). no sinal de entrada,
“Synchronizing External mas requer
Digi-
tal
a Source
but
other requires Devices”
devices
sincronização
tal Source that on page
care
accordingly
adequada
Devices” be taken
on
25).“Synchronizing
(see
pageda 25). to synchronize
fonte e de outros the source
External
dispositivos and(veja
Digi-
other
tal SourcedevicesDevices” accordingly
on page (see
25). “Synchronizing
“Sincronizando Dispositivos Digitais Externos” na página 25). External Digi-
24 VENUE Profile Guide tal Source Devices” on page 25).
24 24
GuiaVENUE
VENUEProfile
ProfileGuide
Even whenRack
Stage SRC isFeatures
disabled, connecting an unsynchronized Using Word Clock
Additional Out from
Required the Stage Rack
Components
Mesmo quando
devicewhen
Even SRCoinput
to a DSI isSRC está desabilitado,
causes
disabled, conectar
SRC to automatically
connecting an um dispositivo
be re-en-
unsynchronized Utilizando
Using WordWord ClockOut
Clock Out from
do Stage
theRack
Stage Rack
não sincronizado a uma entrada da DSI faz que seja habilitado (Stage Rack with placa
DSI Card)
Even when
Stage
abled. This
device
SRC
Racks areis
lets input
to a DSI
disabled,
used with
audio causes connecting
an
continue
SRC
FOH an
Rack,
passing unsynchronized
and provide all stage
without interruption.
to automatically be re-en- Using
(Stage Word
The followingClock
Rack com Out
DSI)from
components the
must be Stage Rack
novamente
device ade
audiotoI/ODSIforma
for inputautomática.
VENUE causes SRC
Profile Isso
to permite
Up que
automatically
systems. o áudio
to two be continue
re-en-
Stage Racks (Stage
 ConnectRack with
the DSIClock
Word Card)Out provided on the DSI card to
abled. This lets audio continue passing without interruption. (Stage Rack
• Video with DSI
Display Card)or greater flat-panel VGA display
(15-inch
aabled.
trafegar
can be sem
This lets
used interrupção.
audio continue supporting
simultaneously, passing without
up to interruption.
96 total inputs. 
the Conecte o
corresponding
Connect Word Clock
digital
the Word Clock Out existente
device. Set thena
Outminimum
provided placa
external
on DSI ao dispositivo
device
the DSI to
card
To manually disable Sample Rate Conversion: 

recommended;
digital
Connect the Word 1024x768
correspondente. Configure
Clock Out o
provided resolution).
dispositivo
on externo
the DSI VGAto
como
card and
escravo
to
Para desabilitar slavecorresponding
the to the incoming word
digital clock Set
device. signal.
the external device to
To manually
1 Click the disablemanualmente
Sample a Conversão de Taxa de
Rate Conversion: DVI
(slave) supported.
do sinal Word Clock de entrada.
To Audio I/OInputs
manually
Amostragem:
tab and navigate to the input channel being
disable Sample Rate Conversion: the corresponding digital device. Set the external device to
slave to the incoming word clock signal.
fed from
1 Click a digital
the Inputs input.
tab and navigate to the input channel being slave to the
• USB incoming
keyboard andword clock signal.(Windows compatible)
trackball/mouse
• na
Click
1Clique
1fed 48 inputs
theaba
Inputs with
Inputs remotely
tabeand controllable
navigate
navegue até otocanal
the inputmic preamps
channel
de entrada and
being
alimentado External digital device Stage Rack
from
2 Click
a
the digital input.
channel’s button until
SRC OFF phantom it turns off.
pela
fed fromindividually
entrada digital.
a digital selectable
input. power. External Snake
digital device
Digital DSI Stage
Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Rack
card Only)
2 Click External digital device Stage Rack
• 8the channel’s
analog outputSRC OFF button
channels; until it up
expandable turns off.analog or
to 48 AES (or ADAT)
22Clique
Clickno botão
the SRC
channel’s OFF
SRCdoOFF
canal até que
button seitdesligue
until .
turns off. • The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
DSI card
Auto-Detecting
digital outputs per Stage Rack. AES (or ADAT) DSI card
Auto-Detecting
Auto-detecção AES (or ADAT)
The DSI card (or other VENUE digital card) automatically de-
Auto-Detecting from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Synchronization and Control I/O BNC
AThe
placa
tectsDSI DSI
card (ou
whether outra VENUE
an other
(or externalplaca digital
device VENUE)
connected
digital card) to automaticamente
a DSI inputde-
automatically is
The DSI
detecta• se card
um (or
Snake other
connectors
dispositivo VENUE digital
to enable
digital externo card)
primary automatically
and redundant
conectado à entrada de-
(if
input isestá
Set device to slave to BNC
synchronized
tects whether to
an the VENUE
external system.
device Here,
connected “synchronized”
to a DSI
tects whether
sincronizado coman
applicable)
means the device oexternal
sistema device
connection
is running VENUE.
to connected
a Aqui,
VENUE
at 48 kHz, to a DSI
“sincronizado”
FOH Rack.input
and“synchronized” is
significa
is clocked to the
Optional Components
incoming Word Clock
Set device to slave to
BNC DSI Word Clock Out
synchronized to the VENUE system. Here,
que o dispositivo
synchronized
VENUE system está
to(see rodandosystem.
a 48 kHz
the“Synchronizing
VENUE sincronizado
Here,
External ao sistema
“synchronized” incoming
Set deviceWord Clockto
to slave DSI Word Clock Out
means the device is running at 48 kHz, and isDigital
clockedSource
to the Using
The word
incoming clock
following from
Word Clock the DSI cardare
components to clock anDSI
optional,external
and device
Wordmust
Clockbe
Out
VENUE
means (veja
the “Sincronizando
device is running Dispositivos
at 48 kHz, andDigitais
is Externos”
clocked to the na
Devices”system
VENUE on page (see25). In this case, no
“Synchronizing sample Digital
External rate conversion
Source Utilizando
word Word
purchased
Using Clock dathe
placa
separately:
clock from DSIDSI paratosincronizar
card clock anum dispositivo
external externo
device
página
VENUE 25). Nesse
system caso, nenhuma taxa de conversão
(see “Synchronizing External Digital Source é requerida
Using Word
Using word clockClock
from theOut from
DSI card to the
clockFOH Rackdevice
an external
na System
is required
Devices”
entrada. onon Components
input.
page 25). In this case, no sample rate conversion • USB flash disk (or other portable USB storage device for
Word Clock
Devices” on page 25). In this case, no sample rate conversion
is required on input. Using
(Stage transfer
Rack with DSIOut
Card)from the FOH Rack
If
is the
Se external
required device
externois não
on input.
o dispositivo not synchronized, the VENUE
está sincronizado, system
o sistema
Using
VENUE (Stage
Word
Utilizando Clock
WordofClock
Show Out
Out from
data; FOHthe
do512 MB FOH
or
Rack Rack
larger recommended)
Rack with DSI Card)(Stage Rack
Connect with
the
• Near-field
(Stage Rack com DSIClock
Word Card)
monitor
placa Out on the
DSI)speakers for FOH Rack to the
mix position corre-
monitoring
If Included
automaticamente
automatically
the Components
se encarrega
external engages
device issample da conversão
rate de
conversion
not synchronized, thetaxa
on de amostragem
those
VENUE inputs
system

(Stage Rack with DSI Card)
If theifexternal
dessas device
entradas, mesmo is not
quesynchronized,
awas
conversão the VENUE
dedefeated.
taxa system sponding
 Connect digital device.
the Wordwith Set
Clock the external
Out on jack device to slave to the
the FOH Rack to the corre-
even sample rate
automatically conversion
engages sample manually
rate conversion onde amostragem
The
those SRC
inputs • Headphones
Connect the Word Clock
1/4-inch
Out on the FOH Rack to the corre-
Allsido
VENUE
automatically Profile
engagessystems include the following: 
 Conecte
incoming word o Word
clock Clock
signal.Out external
do FOH device
Rack ao dispositivo
thedigital
tenha
LED flashes anulada
onrate DSIsample
manualmente.
theconversion rateO
card, was
and a conversion
LED SRC
message on those
pisca
appears inputs
naon-screen
placa DSI e sponding digital
• Dynamic device. Set the
or condenser microphone andto slave to cable
even
uma
even
if sample
mensagem
if sample surge
rate na tela
conversion para
was
manually
indicar
manually
defeated.
essa
The SRC
condição.
defeated. The SRC sponding digital device.
correspondente. Set the
Configure o external device
dispositivo toXLR
externo
mic
slave to the
como escravo
• VENUE Profile
to indicate this condition.console incoming word clock signal.
LED flashes on the DSI card, and a message appears on-screen
LED flashes on the DSI card, and a message appears on-screen (slave)(for
incoming Talkback)
doword
sinalclock
Word signal.
Clock de entrada.
• OTwo
to indicatestatus (2)de
this IEC SRCpower
condition. não écables
afetado quando um canal de entrada External digital device(up to 2) Stage Rack
• Footswitches
to indicate
SRC this
status condition.
is not affected dowhen an input channel is reset
• é Monitor
resetadomount por meio for VGA comando
screen “Reset
(screen Strip”
not do botão
included) External digital device Stage Rack
via right-click “Reset Strip”whencommands. • MIDI
External cables
digital (for connecting external
device MIDIRack
DSI card
Stage devices)
direito
SRC
•SRCTrackballdo
status mouse.
is not
mount affected
(trackball an
not input
included)channel is reset AES (or ADAT)
status is not affected when an input channel is reset • BNC cables (for connecting WordDSI clock
card between the
via right-click “Reset Strip” commands.
ASample
conversão
•viaVENUE
rate da Mouse
taxa
conversion
right-click “Resetde
Pad
can amostragem
be enabled
Strip” commands. pode ser habilitada
or disabled manually ou VENUE system andAES (or ADAT)
external
DSI card
digital devices)
AES (or ADAT)
desabilitada
for digital
• VENUE
manualmente
inputs, as follows:
Profile Guide
para entradas digitais:
Sample rate conversion can be enabled or disabled manually • 25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
Sample rate conversion can be enabled or disabled manually
 Quando
for digital
• Two
When utilizando
inputs,
using(2) AES entradas
asinputs
console follows: on AES
lights DSI em placas
cards, sampleDSI,rate
a conversão
conver- de
for digital
taxa de inputs, aspode
amostragem follows:
ser habilitada ou desabilitada para cada
sion
 •can
When be enabled
Protective
using AESDust or Cover
inputsdisabled
on DSI forcards,
each sample
pair of inputs.
rate conver- incoming Word Clock
par de entradas.
 When using AES inputs on DSI cards, sample rate conver- Set device to slave to FOH Rack
sion

sion
•can
When
Quando
be enabled
Rack(s)
using (see
ADAT
can beutilizando
or(Optical)
next)
enabled orentradas
disabledinputs
disabled for
for each
ADAT
on pair
each
DSI of inputs.
cards,
pair of em
(Optical)
sample
inputs.
placas DSI,
VENUE Profile Expansion Options
incoming
Set deviceWord Clockto
to slave
incoming Word Clock FOH Rack
rate
 conversion
When using ADAT can be(Optical)
enabledinputs or disabled
on DSI forcards,
all 8 channels.
sample FOH Rack
aconversão
When using deADATtaxa (Optical)
de amostragem inputs onpode
DSI ser habilitada
cards, sample ou The following options can be added to VENUE Profile systems.
Enabling
Racks,
rate orSoftware
conversion disabling beSRCCDs, on iLoks,
anyor ADAT andchannel
for all enables
Cables or
desabilitada
rate conversion para can
todos
can be osenabled
8 canais.
enabled or
disabled
disabled for all
8 channels.
8 channels. BNC and options, visit the Avid
For details on all VENUE systems
disables all
Enabling orother
disablingADAT SRCchannels
on anyon thatchannel
ADAT DSI card. enables or
Each Mix
Enabling
Habilitar Rack or FOH
or disabling SRCRack on
emany includes:
ADAT channel enables or ou website (www.avid.com).
disables ou all desabilitar
other ADATSRC qualquer
on thatcanal ADAT habilita BNC
channels DSI card. BNC
Switching
disables
desabilita allinput
todosother
os
• System Restore CDSource
ADAT
outros between
channels
canais AES
ADATon and
that
na ADAT
DSI
placa card.
DSI. (Optical) Word Clock Out
ports retains
Switching the Source
input last samplebetween rate AESconversion
and ADATsetting for that Using word clock from the FOH Rack to clock an external Worddevice
Clock Out
• a
Alternar
Switching
ECxfonteEthernet
deSource Control
entrada entreSoftware
as Installer
AESportas AES CDe(Optical)
ADAT (Optical) Mix Rack Options Word Clock Out
ports type input
input retains andthe channel
last
between
(AESrate
sample channel and
pairs
conversion
ADAT
only). (Optical)
setting for that Using word clock from the FOH Rack to clock an external device
mantém a última
ports•retains theconfiguração
Standalone last sample de
Software conversão
Installer
rate CD de taxa
conversion de amostragem
setting for that Using word Word
clockClock
from
Utilizando dothe
FOHFOH Rack
Rack para to clock anum
sincronizar external device
dispositivo externo
input type and channel (AES channel
para aquela entrada e canal (pares de canais AES apenas). pairs only).
input•Automatic
iLokand
type USBchannel
Smart Key
detection and(for
(AES storing
channel
enabling plug-in
pairs
of authorizations)
only).
sample rate conver- I/O Options
Detecção
•sion is always
Plug-in
Automatic automática
in effect
installer
detection discs
ande habilitação
and (ifwill
enabling of da
any)engage
with conversão
sample rate
pre-authorized
sample rate de taxa
iLokde
conver-
conver-
Automatic detection and enabling of esample rate conver- AI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
amostragem
sion whenever estão
a sempre
mismatch is efetivas
detected acionarão
at a DSI a
input,conversão
even
•sion
Twois always
(2) IECin effect cables
power and will engage sample rate conver- mic/line level inputs
de taxa
sion
when de amostragem
issample
always in effect
rate andsempre
conversion will
is que sample
engage
manually fordefeated
detectada
ratefor alguma
conver-
that
sion
•sion
One whenever
FOHnaLink a mismatch
cableDSI,foris detected
connection at atoDSI input,
a VENUE even
console
diferença
input. whenever entrada
a mismatch ismesmo
detectedque
at a
a conversão
DSI input, de taxa
even
when sample rate conversion is manually defeated for that AO16 Analog Output Card that provides 16 analog line level
de amostragem
when sample rate tenha sido desabilitada
conversion manualmente
is manually defeated for thatpara
Each Stage entrada.
input. Rack includes: outputs
aquela
input.
Synchronizing
• Two (2) IEC power External cables Digital Source
Devices Dispositivos
Synchronizing
Sincronizando External Digital
Digitais Externos Source
Synchronizing
Devices External Digital Source line level outputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.
Devices
When
Quando an
umexternal device
dispositivo is running
externo at 48akHz
está rodando andeclocked
48 kHz to
sincronizado
VENUE,
àWhen disabling
external sample
Venue,andesabilitar israte
a conversão
device conversion
de taxa
running onamostragem
at 48dekHz those digitalnessas
and clocked in-
to
When an external
puts provides the device is running
lowest at 48 kHz and clocked to output compatible with Aviom® Personal Mixers and other
entradas
VENUE, digitais
disabling samplepossible
proporciona rate input
a menor path
latência
conversion latency.
onpossível no sinal
those digital in-de
VENUE,
entrada. disabling sample rate conversion on those digital in- Pro16™ Series devices.
puts provides the lowest possible input path latency.
Before samplethe
puts provides ratelowest
conversion is defeated
possible on latency.
input path any input con-
nected toconversão
a digital IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an addi-
Antes dasample
Before ratesource,
de taxathat
de source
conversion is device
amostragem
defeated must
onser
any be synchro-
desabilitada
input con- em
Before sample rate conversion is defeated on anyesse
input con- tional 8 channels of analog I/O and 8 channels of AES/EBU
qualquer
nected toentrada
nized (clocked) atconectada
a digital 48 inaone
kHz that
source, uma offonte
sourcethe digital,
following
device must ways: dispositivo
be synchro-
nected
deve ser to a digital source,
sincronizado a 48 thatem
kHz source
uma device
das must bemaneiras:
seguintes synchro- digital I/O.
nized (clocked) at 48 kHz in one of the following ways:
nized (clocked) at 48 kHz in one of the following ways:
Chapter Chapter
2: Configuring and Connecting
1: Introduction Profile255
Profile
to VENUE
Chapter
Capítulo 2: Configuring
2: Configuração and Connecting
e Conexão Profile
da VENUE 25 25
Profile
Utilizando
Using Saídas deAudio
Digital Áudio Digital
Outputsdo Sistema
from VENUE
the VENUE
System
 Conecte qualquer saída digital à entrada digital de um dispositivo
externo: utilizeany
 Connect as saídas
digital digitais
output todoaMix Rack
digital (se o
input ofsistema inclui
the external
uma placa Use
device: XO16), Stage
digital Rack on
outputs (se the
o sistema
Mix Rackinclui umasystem
(if the placa DSO)
also
ou includes
qualqueransaída
XO16digital
card), do FOH
Stage Rack.
Rack Configure
(if the system alsoo dispositivo
includes
externo
a DSO como
card)escravo
or any (slave)
digitalda entrada
output digital.
on the FOH Rack. Set the ex-
ternal device to slave to its digital input.
External digital device Stage Rack
DSI card DSO card

AES (or ADAT)
AES (or ADAT)

from DSO card
-or-
incoming digital signal FOH Rack
any FOH Rack
digital audio output
Utilizando
Using uma saída output
a digital digital para prover oclock
to provide clock para
to andispositivos
external externos
device
Utilizando
Using House
HouseClock
Clock
 Connect a “house” or other external master clock signal to
 Conecte um “house” ou outro sinal de clock master em Word
theInWord
Clock Clock
do FOH In Distribua
Rack. on the FOH Rack. clock
o mesmo Distribute thedispositivos
para os same
externos e configure-os como escravos (slave) desse slave
house clock to the external digital device, and set it to sinal to
de
the
entrada.incoming house word clock signal.
External digital device Stage Rack
DSI card
AES (or ADAT)

incoming Word Clock
FOH Rack
BNC
BNC
House clock source

Word Clock In
Utilizando um clock master (house) distribuído para sincronizar o sistema VENUE e os

Using aexternos
dispositivos distributed house (master) to clock a VENUE system and an
external device

Parte II: Descrição do Sistema
28
Capítulo
Chapter 3: 3:
Visão Geral da
VENUE Superfície
Profile de Controle
Control OverviewProfile
Painel
VENUE Superior da VENUE
Profile Profile
Top Panel DVI supported.
Audio I/O
The •following figure identifies the main sections ofconsole
the Profile • USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
console:
48ilustração
A seguinte inputs with remotely
identifica controllable
as seções mic da
principais preamps and
Profile:
• 8 analog output channels; expandable up to 48 analog or Meters
Bus Output Mains
System Components
Included Components
B D
• Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
(for Talkback)
A A
C
• iLok
Global USB Smart Key (for storing plug-in authorizations) I/O Options
Modifiers
A Input Channels 1–16 and 17–24
• Two (2) IEC power cables B Assignable Channel Sections (ACS)
C Output Masters Section
• One FOH Link cable for connection to D
a VENUE console
Master and Global Controls
Figure
Each11. VENUE
Stage RackProfile console
includes: outputs
Figura 11. Console VENUE Profile
Profile provides 24 bankable input channel strips in Input Channel sections, an Assignable
XO16 Analog Channel
and Digital Card(ACS),
Section
Output eight bankable
that provides 8 analog
A Profile oferece 24 réguas de canais de entrada agrupáveis em bancos na seção Input Channel, uma Assignable Channel Section (ACS), 8
output channel strips plus a Mains fader in the Output Masters section, aslevel
welloutputs,
as globaland
controls
AES and comprehensive metering.
réguas de canais de saída agrupáveis em bancos e um fader principal naline
seção Output Masters, 8assim digital outputs.
como controle globais e medidores.
Chapter 3: VENUE Profile Control Overview 29
digital I/O.
Capítulo 3: Visão Geral da Superfície de Controle Profile 29
Canais de Entrada e Faders
As seções de entrada oferecem 24 faders e outros controles para canais de entrada e FX Returns. Os canais de entrada estão organizados
Input
InputChannels
Channelsand
em duas seções:
andFaders
Faders
Input
Input
sections
sections
provide
provide
2424
faders
faders
and
and
other
other
controls
controls
for
for
Input
Input
Channel
Channel
and
and
FXFX
Returns.
Returns.
Input
Input
channels
channels
are
are
arranged
arranged
inin
two
two
sec-
sec-
As réguas dos canais de entrada 1 a 16 estão à esquerda da seção de saída master (Output Master Section), e as réguas dos canais de
tions:
tions:
Input
Inputchannel
channel
strips
strips
1–16
1–16are
are
toto
the
the
left
left
ofof
the
the
Output
OutputMaster
MasterSection,
Section,
while
while Input
Input
strips
strips
17–24
17–24
are
are
toto
the
the
right.
right.
Additional
Additional
entrada 17 a 24 estão à direita. Canais adicionais podem ser agrupados aos 24 faders utilizando os switches Bank A, B, C e D. Todos os 24
channels
channels are
are
banked
banked
totothe
the
2424
faders
fadersusing
usingthetheBank
Bank
A,A,
B,B,
CCand
andDD switches.
switches.
AllAll
2424input
inputchannels
channelsbank
bank together.
together.
canais de entrada podem ser agrupados.
Input
Input
faders
faders
1–16
1–16
can
can
also
also
bebe
assigned
assigned
toto
control
control
FXFX
Returns
Returns
1–8
1–8
oror
9–16,
9–16,
oror
the
the
output
output
EQEQ
(graphic
(graphic
EQ).
EQ).
Os faders 1 a 16 podem ser assinalados para controlar os FX Returns 1 a 8 ou 9 a 16, ou a equalização da saída (EQ gráfico).
Each
Eachinput
input
channel
channel
strip
strip
includes
includes
a channel
a channel
fader,
fader,
channel
channel
Select,
Select,
Mute
Mute
and
and
Solo
Solo
switches,
switches,
a rotary
a rotary
encoder,
encoder,
LCD
LCD
display
display
area
area
and
and
Cada canal de entrada inclui um fader de canal, switches Select, Mute e Solo, um controle rotativo, área no display LCD e Meter para nível do
meters
metersfor
for
channel
channel
level
level
and
and
gain
gainreduction.
reduction.The
Theencoders
encodersand
and
associated
associatedassignment
assignment switches
switches
access
access
Gain,
Gain,
Pan,
Pan,
HPF,
HPF,
Compressor
Compressor
canal e redução de ganho. Os codificadores e os switches associados a eles dão acesso a Gain, Pan, HPF, thresholds de Compressor e Gate
and
andGate
Gatethresholds
thresholds
and
andAux
Auxsends.
sends.Each
Eachbank
bank
ofof
eight
eight
input
input
channels
channelsprovides
provides a two-row
a two-rowLCD
LCD display
display
that
that
shows
e Aux. Cada banco de oito canais de entrada oferece um display LCD de duas linhas que mostra o nome do canal, o nome dos shows
channel
channel
parâmetros,
name,
name, parameter
parameternames,
names,values
valuesand
andother
other
data
data
valores ou outros dados referentes a ação em curso. asas
appropriate
appropriatefor
for
the
the
current
currentaction.
action.
Additional
Additionalinput
input
parameters
parametersare
arecontrolled
controlled
byby
selecting
selecting
one
one
oror
more
morechannels
channels
Parâmetros adicionais de entrada são controlados selecionando um ou mais canaistocomo
to
make
make
them
them
alvo do the
the
ACS.target
target
ofof
the
the
ACS.
ACS.
Clip
Clip
and
and
Safe
Safe
LEDs
LEDs
Bus
BusAssign
Assign
LEDs
LEDs
Meters
Meters
Encoder
Encoder
Switches
Switches Encoders
Encoders
and
and
LEDs
LEDs
LCD
LCD
Display
Display
Select
Select
Solo
Solo
Mute
Mute
Bank
BankA/B/C/D
A/B/C/D Faders
Faders
1–8
1–8 FXFX
Returns/GEQ
Returns/GEQ
Figure
Figure
Figura 12.12.
12.Input
Input
Controles controls
de controls
entrada(Input
(Input
(CanaisChannels
Channels
de entrada1–8
11–8
a shown)
8) shown)
LED ClipLED
Clip
Clip LED LED Safe
Safe
Safe LED
LED
Automation Safe, Solo Safe, ou Bank Safe
OThe
LED
The Bank
Bank
Bank Clip
Clip
Clip Indicator
Indicator
Indicator selights
acende
lights toto para indicar
indicate
indicatea meter umclip
a meter clip
clip
onde
on
ansinal
an Automation
AutomationSafe,
Safe,Solo
SoloSafe,
Safe,ororBank
BankSafe
Safe
em um Channel
Input
Input canal de or
Channel entrada
or
FXFX ou FXatReturn
Return
Return at
thethe na posição correspondente
corresponding
corresponding position
position inin O LED Safe indica o status da régua de entrada entre Automation
The
TheSafe
Safe
LED
LEDindicates
indicateseither
eitherananinput
inputstrip’s
strip’s
Automation
Automation safe
safe
no banco
anan de canais.
alternate
alternate bank
bank ofEsse
of indicador
channels.
channels. This obedece
This às obeys
indicator
indicator mesmas
obeystheregras
thesame
same de Safe, Solo Safe ou Bank Safe, dependendo da configuração do
apresentação de clip dos medidores dos canais de entrada (como status,
status,
switch Input Safe. Veja “Switches Input Safe” na página 65. the
Solo
Solo
safe
safe
status,
status,
or or
Bank
Bank Safe
Safe
status,
status,depending
depending onon
the
clipping
clipping threshold
threshold display
display rules
rulesasasthethe
Input
Input Channel
Channel meters
meters current
currentInput
Input
Safe
Safe
Switch
Switch setting.
setting.See
See
“Input
“Input Safe
Safe
Switches”
Switches”
onon
configuradas na página Options > Interaction). E oferece indicação
(as(as
setset
ininthe
theOptions
Options >>Interaction
Interaction page).
page).
It It
gives
gives
you
youananindi-
indi- page
page6565
do nível de sinal extremo de um layer atualmente oculto (“off- Modo Auto Safe Se o LED Safe está aceso, o canal não responderá
cation
cation
bank”). ofof
extreme
extreme signal
signallevel
level
in in
a currently
a currently hidden
hidden a mudanças de cena (snapshots). Se o LED está apagado, o canal
(“off-bank”)
(“off-bank”)
layer.
layer. Auto
AutoSafe
Safe
responderá Mode a If
Mode If
the
todastheSafe
asSafe
LED
LEDis is
alteraçõeslit,lit,
thethe
channel
channel
aplicáveis will
willnot
comandadas notre-re-pelas
spond
spond toto
Snapshot-driven
Snapshot-driven changes.
changes. If If
thetheLED
LED is is
mudanças de cena (sujeitas às atuais configurações Recall Safe, seoff,
off,
that
that
a função
channel
channel Recall
will
will Safe to
respond
respond está
to
anyhabilitada).
anyapplicable
applicable changes
changes driven
driven byby
Snapshots
Snapshots (subject
(subject toto
thethe
current
currentRecall
Recall Safe
Safesettings,
settings, if if
Recall
Recall
Safe
Safe
is is
enabled).
enabled).
3030 VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
SoloSafe
Solo SafeMode
ModeSe If otheLED Safe LED
Safe is flashing,
está aceso, o canal the channel will
não responderá Input Channel
Medidores Metering
de Canal de Entrada
anot respondde
comandos to Solo
solo commands
(ele não será (it mutado
will not be se muted
o botãoif de another
Solo de
será Input Channel
ChannelMetering
SoloSoloSafeSafe
Mode ModeIf the SafeSafe
If the LEDLED is flashing,
is flashing, thethechannel
channel willwill EachInput
Input Channel Metering
provides a gain reduction meter, input
outro canal solo
channel’s for acionado). Se o LEDIfestiver
button is pressed). the LED apagado, o canal
is off, that chan-
not respond
not respond to solo Ifcommands
tooutro
solo commands (it will
(it notnot
will be muted
be muted if another
if another Cada canaland
Additional de LEDs
entrada
Required oferece medidores
Components de stereo
redução de ganho
nelStage
Solo
silenciado
will Safe
be RackMode
quando
silenced Features
the
when forSafe LED
colocado
soloing isemflashing,
another Solo. the
channel. channel will Input
level meter, Channel toMetering
indicate EQ, Gate, and status.
Solo
channel’s Safe
channel’s
not soloMode
button
solo If the
button is Safe LED Ifisthe
pressed).
is pressed). flashing,
If LED
the is
LED the
off,
is channel
that
off, will
chan-
that chan-
Each
e Input
Input
Each
nível de Channel
Channel
Input Channel
entrada, Metering
provides
além de aLEDs
provides gain reduction
a gain
para reduction
indicar meter,
EQ, input
meter,
Gate input
e status
Solorespond
not
Stage Safe
respond
Racks Modeto solo
to
are If the
solo
used
commands
Safean
commands
with LED
FOH
(it
(it
will not be
is flashing,
will
Rack, notand the
be
muted
channel
muted
provide
if another
if will
another
all stage Input
level meter,
estéreo.
level
The Channel
and
meter,
following LEDs
and to
LEDs Metering
components indicate
to EQ,
indicate
must be Gate,
EQ, and
Gate,
purchased stereo
and status.
stereo
separately:status.
nel
Bank
Bank will
nel
Safe be
will
SafeMode
channel’s silenced
be
Mode silenced
Se
solo when
Ifobutton when
LEDSafe
the soloing
Safe
isLEDsoloing
está another
another
is piscando
flashing
pressed). If the channel.
channel.
rapidamente,
rapidly,
LED thethat
is off, o canal
chan- chan- Comp Each Input Channel provides a gain reduction meter, input
not
audio respond
channel’s
I/O for to
solo solo
button
VENUE commands
is pressed).
Profile (it will
systems. If thenot
Up LEDbetwo
muted
is off,
tobanco Stage if
thatanother
chan-
Racks EachGain
InputReduction Metera gain reduction meter, input
Channel provides
permanece
nelnelremains
will no
be topo
in placedo
silenced layer
on do
the
when fader
top quando
fader
soloing layer
anotherum when a
channel.diferente
different (A a •level
Video
Each meter, and(15-inch
Display
Input LEDsprovides
Channel to indicate
or greater EQ,
a gain Gate, and
flat-panel
reduction VGA stereo status.
display
meter, input
channel’s besolo If button
the Safe is pressed).
LED If
is flashing theup LED
rapidly,is
96off,
the that
chan- chan- level
Medidor meter,
de and
Redução LEDs to
de Ganho indicate EQ,
ereduction
CompressãoGate, and stereo status.
D)Bank
é
Bank
nel
Bank
can Safe
will
be
selecionado
(A–D)
Mode
Safe
used
is
silenced
Mode
(ele
selected
If the
simultaneously,
será when
(it
Safe soloing
LED
supporting
desvinculado
will be unlinked
another
is do
flashing channel.
rapidly,
to
agrupamento
from
total
console
the
em chan-
inputs.
bancos
bank- Comp
A Comp Gain
3-segment Gain
recommended;
level meter,
Reduction
Reduction
meter
and displays
1024x768
LEDs
Meter
to Meter
gain
minimum
indicate EQ, for the
resolution).
Gate, and channel
VGA
stereo and
status.
nel nel will be
remains silenced
inMode when soloing another channel.
da
ing).
nel
Bank remains
console).
If the Se
Safe
LED oplace
in
LED
is
place
off,
on
Ifestá
the the
onSafetop
the
theapagado,
fader
top
LED
channel
fader
ois layer
canal
flashing
follows
when
layer
segue whenoa agrupamento
rapidly,
banking.
different
a the
different
chan- compressor/limiter.
Comp
DVI Gain Green LEDs
Reduction
supported. are used for all segments.
Meter
Bank Bank
Audio
Bank(A–D)Safe
I/O Mode
is selected
(A–D) is If the Safe
(it will LED
betop is
unlinked flashing
from rapidly,
console the chan-
bank- A Um display
3-segment
Comp de 3
meter
Gainmeter
A 3-segment segmentos
displays
Reduction apresenta
gain
displaysMeter reduction a redução
for the de ganho
channel
gain reduction for the channel para o
por bancos.
nel
Bank remains
Safe Mode inselected
place
If theon
(itthe
Safe
will
LED
be fader
unlinked
is layer
flashing
from
when
rapidly,
console
a the bank-
different
chan- compressor/limiter.
nel remains in place on the top fader layer when a different compressor/limiter
Comp
•A USB Gain
keyboard
compressor/limiter. do
Reduction
Greencanal.
LEDs
anddisplays LEDs
Meter
are
trackball/mouse
Green LEDs verdes
used são
for utilizados
all
(Windows segments. para
compatible) todos
ing).
PressingIf the
ing).
Bank If LEDLED
the
a(A–D)
channelisis off, the
is off,
Safe channel
the
switch channel
for follows
bethe followsbanking.
Selected banking.
Channel tog- 3-segment meter gain are used
reduction forfor
allthe
segments.
channel
nel• remains
Bank
48 inputs
(A–D) inselected
is
with
selected on(it
placeremotely
(it
will
the top
will be
unlinked
controllable
fader
unlinked
from
layermic when
from
console
preamps bank-
and
a different
console bank- osComp/Lim
Asegmentos.
3-segment meter displays gain reduction for the channel
Pressionar
glesing). othe
switch
theindividually
current
If LED Safe
state ofde umchannel.
that
isselectable
off, the canal para
channel os canais
follows banking.selecionados compressor/limiter.
Gain
A Green LEDs
Reductionmeter displays
3-segment gain are used forfor
reduction allthe
segments.
channel
Bank
Pressing a(A–D)
channelis selected
Safe switch phantom
(itswitch
will
forbefor
the power.
unlinked
Selected from console
Channel bank-
tog- compressor/limiter. Green LEDs are used for all segments.
alteraing). If
Pressing
o estadothe LED
a channel
atual is
dooff,
Safe the
canal. channel follows
the banking.
Selected Channel tog- Digital
Comp/Lim Snake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
Comp/Lim
compressor/limiter. Green LEDs are used for all segments.
ing).
glesgles
the Ifanalog
• 8the the
current LED
state
current is
output off,
ofSafe
state the
that
of channel
channels; follows up
expandable
channel.
that channel. banking.
to 48 analog or
Pressing
Pressing
a channel
a channel Safe
switch
switch
for the Selected Channel tog-
for the Selected Channel tog- •Gain
The Reduction
Gain Reduction between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
connection
Comp/Lim
Bus glesAssignment
digital outputs per
Indicadores de Bus
the current state Indicators
Stage Rack.
of switch
that channel. Input
Comp/LimLevel
Gain Reduction
Pressing
gles a channel
the current Safe
state for the Selected Channel tog-
of that channel. Gain Reduction
Comp/Lim
Bus glesAssignment
Bus
These theAssignment
green current stateIndicators
LEDs indicate
Synchronization and ofIndicators
that I/O
Group
Control channel.
bus assignments, and can from
Gain Avid
Input or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Reduction
Level
Input Level
Estes LEDs verdes indicam os endereçamentos de bus, e também
alsoBus
showAssignment
VCA or Mute Group Indicators
membership for each channel. EQInput
In/OutLevel Gate LED
podem • apresentar
Bus
These
These green
Snake VCA
Assignment
green LEDs
LEDs
connectors ou Mute
indicate
indicate Group
toIndicators
Group
Group
enable bus para cada canal.
assignments,
bus
primary assignments,
and andand
cancan
redundant (if Input Level
By default, Group bus assignment is displayed.
Por
alsoBus
padrão,
show
also
These Assignment
show o endereçamento
VCA or
VCA
applicable)
green Mute
LEDs or Group
Mute
connection
indicateIndicators
de membership
Groupbusamembership
to
Group
éVENUE
apresentado.
for for
FOH each channel.
each
Rack.
bus assignments, channel.
and can
OptionalEQInput
In/OutComponents
EQ In/Out
Level Stereo GateGate
LEDLED
These
By default,
By green
default, LEDs
Group
Groupbus indicate
assignment
bus Group
assignment is bus assignments, and can
displayed.
is displayed.
also show VCA or Mute Group membership for eachand
channel. The EQ
following In/Out
components
and LEDs are optional, Gate and
LED
These
also showgreen LEDs
VCA indicate
or Mute Group
Group bus assignments,
membership can
for each channel. Input channel EQmeters
In/Out Stereo
Stereo Gate LED must be
By default,
alsodefault,
show VCA Group
LR bus
or Mute assignment is
Group membership displayed.
C/M for each channel. purchased separately:
EQ In/Out Gate LED
By Group bus assignment is displayed. Medidores
Input e LEDs
channel dos canais
meters andand deLEDs
LEDsentrada
Input
InputLevel
channel Meter
meters Stereo
System Components
By default, Group
LR LR
bus assignment is displayed.
C/MC/M • USB flash disk (or Stereo
other portable USB storage device for
1–8 Input channel meters and LEDs Stereo
Input
A Medidor
InputLevel
6-segment
Input Level
transfer
channel Meter
dometer
Canal
of de Entrada
Meter
Show data;
displays
meters and 512level
input
LEDs MB or larger
and recommended)
indicates clipping.
LR C/M
LR Input
Bi-color channel
LEDs meters
are used and
for LEDs
all segments, as shown in monitoring
the fol-
Included Components
Stereo 1–8
Pan 1–8
C/M
A UmInput
6-segment Level
• Near-field
meter Meter
monitor
displays
speakers
input
for mix
level and
position
indicates clipping.
LR C/M Input
A 6-segment
lowing displayLevel
table. de 6 Meter
meter
Clipping
displays
segmentos
is
input
apresenta
indicated
level and
oall
nível indicates
de light
entrada clipping.
e indica
• Headphones with 1/4-inch jack as shown in thered.
when LEDs
All VENUE Profile
Stereo
1–8
Pansystems include the following:
Pan 1–8
Stereo a Input
Bi-color
A LEDs
ocorrência
Bi-color Level
6-segment LEDs are
de Meter
used
clips.
are
meter for
used LEDsall segments,
for
displays bicolores
all levelsão
segments,
input asusados
and shown
indicatespara fol-
todos
fol- os
in clipping.
the
Busde
LEDs Assign indicator
indicação de BusLEDs
em umon an Input
canal Channel
de entrada A •6-segment
Dynamic meter
or displays
condenser input level
microphone andand indicates
XLR mic clipping.
cable
1–8 segmentos,
lowing
lowing table.
Bi-color
For table.
meterLEDs conforme
Clipping
Clipping
are
scales, isapresentado
used
see indicated
is indicated
for
“Channelall na
whenwhen
segments,
Meters” tabela
allas
on LEDs
all seguinte.
shown
page light
LEDs115. red.
light
in the O clip é
red.
fol-
• VENUE Profile
Stereo Pan console A 6-segment
Bi-color LEDsmeter are displays
used input level and indicates in clipping.
Group
Bus Bus
Assign
Bus Assignment
Stereo LEDs
indicator
Assign Pan LEDs
indicator on anon Input Channel
an Input Channel
indicado
lowing (forquando
Talkback)
table. todos
Clipping osfor
isLED all segments,
acendem
indicated whenemasallshown
vermelho.
LEDs
the fol-
light red.
Endereçamento
• Two (2) de
IECBuspower cables Bi-color LEDs are used for“Channel
all segments, asall
shown in thered.
fol-
IfBus
theBus LRBus
Stereo
LED
Assign
Pan
is lit, LEDs
indicator the input
on an channel feeds the Left and
Input Channel EQlowing
StatusFor
lowingPara
table.
•ForFootswitches
meter meter
LED
table.
Clipping
scales,
scales,
(up
Clipping
tois2)
see see
is
indicated
“Channel
indicated
when
Meters”
when
on
Meters” onLEDs
page
all LEDs
115.
page light
115.
light red.
Group

Group
• Assign
Bus Assignment
Monitor Assignment
mount
indicator foron
LEDs VGA screen
an Input (screen not included)
Channel For meter graduação
scales, seedesses
“Channel medidores,
Meters”MIDIonveja
page “Medidores
115. de
SeBus
Right o Main
LED vermelho
busses inLR está
either aceso,
L–R oro canal
L–C–R de entradamode
panning alimenta
(re- os • MIDI
For cables
meter (for connecting
scales, external devices)
Assign indicator EQsingle
A EQStatus Canal”
Status
red LED
LED na
LED páginasee
indicates 115.
EQ “Channel Meters”ason
In/Out status page
shown 115.
in the
 IfGroup
the
busses LRBus
the LED
•Ifprincipais
Trackball
LR LED
Left iseLEDs
Assignment
ismount
lit, the
lit,
Right
on an channel
input
(trackball
the Input Channel
input
tanto nonot feeds
included)
channel
modo theL–R
defeeds
pan LeftLeft
the andandno
quando For meter
Group
gardless ofBus
theAssignment
Stereo Pan LED status). • BNC
following cablesscales,
table.
see “Channel
(for connecting WordMeters”
clockonbetween
page 115. the
Right
L–C–R Main
Right
•If(independentemente
Group Main
Bus
VENUE
the busses
LR in
bussesis either
Assignment
Mouse
LED in
Pad
lit, doL–R
either
the or L–C–R
L–R
status
input or LEDpanning
doL–C–R
channel Stereo
feeds mode
panning
Pan).
the mode
Left (re-
and(re- EQ Status
A LED
single red LED LED
indicates

If the LR LED islit,lit, the input channel feeds the Left and EQ EQStatus
A single red
Status
VENUE LED
LED
system andEQ
indicates In/Out
EQ
external In/Outstatus
digital as shown
status as shown
devices) in the
in the
 Ifthe
gardless C/M
of
gardless ofLED
the is
Stereo
the Stereo Panthe input
LED
Pan channel
status).
LED feeds the C (center)
Right Main
•If VENUE
the busses
Profile
LR LED is lit,in either
Guide L–Rstatus).
the input or L–C–Rfeeds
panning mode (re- EQ
following Status
following table. LEDindicates
table.
bus
 Se

Right
from
o LED Main
the
C/M busses
panestá
in L–C–R in
aceso, either
mode,
o LEDL–R channel
canal
the Left
or L–C–R panning
orde
theentrada
M (mono) modeand
(re-
bus before
alimenta o bus C
A
Color •single
25-pin
A single
red LED
D-Sub
red vermelho
LED
cables
EQ Status
indicates
(forEQ In/Out
connecting status
to as
GPI shown
devices) in the
gardless
Ifthe C/M
•If do
the of
C/M the
LED Stereo
is
LED lit, thePan
isinlit, input
the status).
channel
input channelfeeds thethe
feeds C (center)
C (center) Um único LED indicaEQ In/Out status
a existência as shown in
de equalização the
conforme
theRight
pan.
(centro)
Main
Two
gardless (2)
of
Stereo
modo
busses
console
thedeStereo
channels either
lights
pan L–C–RPan L–R
LED
are summed or L–C–R
status).
ou o toM
bus the panning
mono
(mono)
mode
bus.
antes
(re-
do pan. aA
following
single red
following
tabela
table.
LED indicates EQ In/Out status as shown in the
table.
bus from
bus
gardless
If the
from
the of
C/Mpan
the
the in
pan L–C–R
in
Stereo
LED is L–C–R
Pan
lit, mode,
the or
mode,
LED
input the
or M (mono)
the
status).
channel M (mono)
feeds busbus
the Cbefore
before
(center)
ColorColor a seguir.
(none) EQ EQ
Not Status
in circuit
Status
Canais •estéreo
Protective
são Dust
somados Cover ao channel
bus mono. following table.
 IfaIf
thebus
pan. theLED
bus C/M
Stereo LED
(1–8) is lit,
is
channels lit, the
the
are are input
summed channel feedsthe
is feeding thecorre-
C (center)
the pan.
•If from
Stereo
the(see
panchannels
in L–C–R summed
theismode, ortothe
the
toMmono
the mono
(mono) bus.
bus.before
bus Color
(none)
Red EQ
Notcircuit
In Status
in circuit

bus
sponding
 Se
theGroup(s).
from
um
C/M
the LED
Rack(s)
LED de
isan
pannext)
Ifin lit,
L–C–R
bus
LED
(1
input
mode, channel
the Mfeeds
orchannel
off, the (mono)thefeeding
is not C (center)
bus before VENUE
(none)
Color Profile Not
EQ in Expansion
Statuscircuit Options
the
IfaIf pan.
bus LED
a bus Stereo
LED(1–8)channels
is
(1–8) isalit,
lit, 8)are
the está
channel
the aceso,
summed oristhe
channel isoM
to
feedingcanal
the mono
the
feeding alimenta
bus.
corre-
the o(s)
corre- Color EQ Status
thatbus
the from
pan.
Group. the
Stereo
The pan
Bus in L–C–R
channels
Indicators mode,
are summed
can also to
show (mono)
the
VCAmono andbus
bus.before
Mute (none)
Red(none)
Red In Not
circuit in
In circuit
circuit
grupo(s)
sponding correspondente(s).
Group(s). If an Se o LED está apagado, o canal não Not incancircuit
sponding
the pan. Group(s).
Stereo
If membership.
Racks, a bus If
channels
LED (1–8)
Software isLED
CDs,an is off,
lit,LED
are
the thethe
ischannel
off,
summed
iLoks,
channel
andto channel
is the is not
mono
feeding feeding
isthe
not feeding
bus.
corre- Stereo Channel
The following LED
options be added to VENUE Profile systems.
isCables

Group
está alimentando
If aGroup.
bus LED aquele
(1–8) isgrupo.
lit, the Os indicadores
channel deVCA
feeding bus também
theandcorre- (none)
Red Not
In in circuit
circuit
thatsponding
Group.
that The Bus
The
Group(s). Indicators
Bus IfIndicators
an LED can
is also
can
off, show
also
the VCA
show
channel and
is not MuteMute
feeding For details
Red Channel LED on all VENUE
In circuit systems and options, visit the Avid
 If a bus
apresentam
sponding
Each
Group Mix VCA LED (1–8)
ouorMute
Group(s).
Rack
membership. FOH Ifis lit,LED
Group
an
Rack
the
paraischannel
cada
off,
includes: the is
canal. feedingisthe
channel notcorre-
feeding Stereo
Stereo
A single yellowChannel LED a stereo input channel. The ste-
LED indicates
Group
that
Use membership.
Group.
the Bus The Bus
Assign Indicators
switches to can
route also
and show
assign VCA
the and
cur- Mute website
Red (www.avid.com). In circuit
sponding
that Group. Group(s).
The BusIfIndicators
an LED is off, can the
alsochannel
show VCA is not
and feeding
Mute reoStereo
channel ChannelLED flashes LEDif a 10 dB or greater offset is detected
•
Group System
rently Restore
membership.
selected CD
channels to busses (see “Assignable Channel A single
Stereo yellow LEDLED indicates a stereo input channel. TheThe ste-ste-
leftChannel
and right LED
Utilize os A single yellow indicates a stereo input channel.
that
Group
Use Group.
Use Busswitches
The
membership.
the the Bus
Assign
Bus Assign
de Bus Assign
Indicators
switches
switches can
to route para
also
to routeandandrotear
show
assign ethe
VCA
assign
assinalar
and Mute
cur-cur-
the
os between inputs.
•Section”
canais
Group ECx on page Control
atualmente
Ethernet
membership. 34). selecionados
Software para os busses
Installer CD (veja “Seção reo Stereo
LED
reo
Mix Stereo
channel
channel
A singleRack Channel
Channel
LED
yellow flashes
LED
Options LEDLED
flashesif a 10
if a dB
10 or
dB greater
or offset
greater is
offset
LED indicates a stereo input channel. The ste- detected
is detected
rently selected
rently Buschannels
theselected channels to busses to(see
to busses “Assignable
(see “Assignable Channel
Channel A single
de Use
Atribuição
•Section”
Standalone
Use the Bus
Assign
de Canalswitches
Software
Assign -Installer
ACS” na
switches toCD
route
página
route and
and
34).assign the
assign the cur-
cur- between
between
reo leftyellow
channel and
left and
LED
LED
rightrightindicates
inputs.
flashes inputs. a stereo input channel. The ste-
if a 10adB or greater offset is detected
Section”on page
on 34).
page 34). Color
UmA single
reo único
channel yellow Channel
LEDLED LED
amarelo
flashesStatus
indicates
indica
if a 10um stereo
dB canal
or input channel.
de offset
greater entrada The ste- O
estéreo.
is detected
VCA Membership
rently
Use the selected
Bus channels
Assign to busses
switches to (see and
route “Assignable
assign Channel
the cur-
• iLokrently
USB selected
Smart channels
Key tostoring
busses (see “Assignable Channel between
I/O Options left and right inputs.
Adesão
When VCA Section”
rently
VCA on
selected
Show page 34).(for
channels
Members to
mode busses
is
plug-in
(see
enabled,
authorizations)
“Assignable
Group Channel
indica-
reodo
LED
Color
(none)
channel
between
Color
canalleft LED
estéreo
and
Channel
Mono
flashes
rightpisca
Channel Status
ifse
a 10
inputs.
Status
umadBdiferença
or greaterde offset
10 is detected
dB ou maior é
VCAVCA

•Membership
Section”installer
Membership
Plug-in on pagediscs 34). (if any) with pre-authorized iLok detectada
between entre left andas right
entradas esquerda e direita.
inputs.
tors flashSection” on page
to indicate VCA 34).
membership. AI16
ColorAnalog Mic/Line Channel InputStatusCard that provides 16 analog
VCA
 When
Quando Membership
VCAo(2) Show
modo Members
VCA Show mode is enabled,
Members estáGroup indica-
habilitado, os (none)
Yellow
(none)
Color Mono
StereoMono Status
Channel
 •When
VCA Two VCA
Membership Show
IEC power Members
cables mode is enabled, Group indica- mic/line level inputs
indicadores
torsflash
tors de
to
flash grupo
indicate
to piscam
indicateVCA VCA indicando
membership.
membership. adesão ao VCA. Color
(none) Channel
Mono Status
MuteVCA
•When Membership
One
Groups VCA Link
FOH Showcable Members mode is enabled,
for connection to a VENUEGroup indica-
console Yellow
Yellow
(none) StereoStereo
Mono
 When VCA Show Members mode is enabled, Group indica- Gate Status
AnalogLED Output
tors flash to indicate VCA membership.
When VCA Show Members mode is enabled,
AO16
(none) MonoCard that provides 16 analog line level
Mute
Mute
 Groups
tors
When flash
the
Groups
Mute
Each to
Groups
Stage indicate
Mute
Rack GroupsVCA
includes: membership.
Show Members switch isGroup indica-
pressed, Yellow
outputs
Stereo
Gate Yellow
Status LED Stereo
thetors flash
Group to indicate
indicators VCA
flash to membership.
indicate Mute Group assign- A Gate
single
Yellow
Status
bi-color LEDLED shows the current Expander or Gate sta-
Stereo
 Mute
 •When
When
Quando Groups
Two
the (2)
Mute
the
o switch IEC power
Groups
Mute
MuteGroupscables
Show
Groups ShowMembers
Show Members switch is pressed,
switch is pressed, tus. For LED scales, see “Gate StatusCardLED”that on page 115.8 analog
MuteA Groups
ments. flashing LED indicates that Members
the channelé pressionado,
is assigned os GateAnalog
XO16
A single Status
bi-color and
LEDLEDDigital
shows Output
thethecurrent Expanderprovides
or Gate sta-sta-
the Group
the Group
indicadores
Mute
When indicators
de
Groups
thegrupo
Mute flash
indicators to
flash
piscam
Groups indicate
to indicate
indicando
Show oMute Group
Mute assign-
Group
endereçamento
Members switch isassign-
de Mute
pressed, Gate
A single Status
bi-color LEDLED shows current Expander or Gate
to the corresponding
 When
Mute Group (1–8). line
tus.Gate
For level
LED outputs,
Statusscales, LED and
see 8 AES
“Gate digital
Status LED”outputs.
on page 115.
ments.
Group. Um
ments.
the A the
A flashing
LED
Group
Mute
piscando
flashing Groups
LEDLED
indicatorsindicates
indica Showthat
que
indicates
flash to
Members
thethe
othat
canal
indicate
switch
channel
está is pressed,
is assigned
atribuído
channel
Mute Group para o
isassign-
assigned tus.
LED For
A single LED
Gate Status scales, see “Gate Status LED”
bi-color LED shows the current Expander or Gate sta- on page 115.

theWhen
Group the Mute Groups
indicators flash Show MembersMuteswitch
Groupisassign-
pressed, A single bi-color LED shows the current Expander or Gate sta-
Mute toGroup
to the
ments. correspondente
corresponding
the corresponding
A flashing Mute
LED Mute ato
(1Group8).indicate
Group
indicates (1–8).
(1–8).
that the channel is assigned tus.
AT16 For
A singleA-Net LED scales,
Output
bi-color LED see
Card “Gate
shows Status
that provides LED” on page or
16Expander
channels 115.
ofGate
A-Net
Stereo
the PanALED
Group
ments. indicators
flashing LEDflash to indicate
indicates Mute
that the Groupisassign-
channel assigned tus. For LED scales, see “Gatethe current
Status LED” on page 115. sta-
Um LED compatible
output bicolor apresenta with o status atual
Aviom® Personalde Expander
Mixers ou Gate.
and other Para
to the corresponding Mute Group (1–8).
ments. A flashing LEDMute
indicates that the channel is assigned tus. For LED scales, see “Gate Status LED” on page 115.
LED toLED
the
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
This corresponding
Pan
Pan Group
LEDLED when the channel
Pan
indicates (1–8).
is assigned to a stereo graduação desse
Pro16™ Series devices. medidor, veja “Led de status de Gate” na página
to the corresponding Mute Group (1–8). 115.
Groups bus.
Stereo Pan LED when the channel is assigned to a stereo
This LEDLED
Este Stereo
LED
This indicates
indica
Pan quando
indicates
LED wheno canal
theestá endereçado
channel para to
is assigned uma stereo
bus de IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an addi-
grupoStereo
Groups
Groups Pan
estéreo.
bus.bus.LED
This LED indicates when the channel is assigned to a stereo tional 8 channels ofChapter
analog3:I/O and Profile
8 channels
This LED indicates when the channel is assigned to a stereo VENUE ControlofOverview
AES/EBU31
Groups
This LED bus.
indicates when the channel is assigned to a stereo digital I/O.
Groups bus. Capítulo 3: Chapter
Visão Geral daVENUE
Superfície
3: VENUE
Chapter 3: Profile deControl
Controle
Control
Profile Profile
Overview 31
31 31
Overview
Groups bus.
Chapter3:1:VENUE
Chapter Introduction
Profile to Profile 531
VENUEOverview
Control
Input Encoders and Assignment Controls Pan
Codificadores
Input e Controles
Encoders de Atribuição
and Assignment Controls
Pan
Pan
Each input channel features one assignable input encoder that Pan assigns the encoders to control channel Pan if the chan-
caninput
be assigned tofeatures
control one
a variety of channel nelassigns
is mono,osor stereo channel balance if a Pan
stereo. Thechan-
oindica-
Each
Cada canal de channel
entrada apresenta umassignable inputfunctions
controle rotativoencoder
que pode
such
that
ser
Pan
Pan habilitathe codificadores
encoders para
to control controlar
channel o Pan se
if the canal é
as input
can bepara gain,
assigned HPF corner
to control frequency,
a variety of pan/balance/width, and mono,
tor LEDou o balanço
lights when estéreo
the do
pan canal,
is at se ele
center. é estéreo.
nel is mono, or stereo channel balance if a stereo. The indica-O indicador
atribuído controlar uma variedade dechannel
funçõesfunctions
do canal such
como
LED pisca quando o Pan está no centro
asspecific
ganho,input parameters
freqüência
gain, de corte
HPF ofdo
cornerbuilt-in
HPF, Dynamics processes.
pan/balance/widht
frequency, e parâmetros
pan/balance/width, and tor LED lights when the pan is at center.
específicos para os processadores
specific parameters de dinâmica
of built-in Dynamics embutidos.
processes. Comp Thrsh
The Encoder Assignment switches, located to the left of the Comp Thrsh
row of encoders, determine the function Comp
CompThrsh
Os The
switches Encoder
Encoder Assignment,
Assignment locatedàof
localizados
switches, the
the encoders
toesquerda dathe
left of on
linha Thrsh assigns the encoders to control the Threshold for
Input Channels. The LCD displays the current function (see Comp Thrsh habilita
the built-in os codificadores
Compressor/Limiter. para controlar o toggles
limiar do
de row
codificadores, determinam
of encoders, determinea função dessesofcontroles
the function nos canais
the encoders on Comp Thrsh assigns
compressor/limiter toPressing
control the
the encodersPressionar
incorporado. the
o
encoder
Threshold
codificador for
alterna
“Input
de Input
entrada. Channel LCD
O displayThe
Channels. LCD Display”
apresenta
LCD displayson page
a the 33).
função atualfunction
current (veja “Display
(see the effect in and out of circuit. If the LED is encoder
lit the effect is in
the built-in
entre Compressor/Limiter.
adicionar Pressing
ou retirar o efeito do circuito.the
Se o LED estátoggles
aceso, o
LCD“Input
de Canal de Entrada”,
Channel na página
LCD Display” on33)
page 33). circuit.
the effect
efeito estáinnoand out of circuit. If the LED is lit the effect is in
circuito.
circuit.
Gate
Gate Thrsh
Thrsh
Gate
GateThrsh
Thrsh assigns the encoders to control the Threshold for
Gate Thrsh habilita os codificadores para controlar o limiar do
the Thrsh
Gate built-in
Expander/Gate Expander/Gate.
incporporado.
assigns the encoders Pressing
Pressionar the encoder
o codificador
to control toggles
alterna
the Threshold the
entre
for
effect
adicionarin and
ou out
retirar of
o circuit.
efeito do If the LED
circuito. Se is
o lit
LED the effect
está
the built-in Expander/Gate. Pressing the encoder toggles the is
aceso, in
o cir-
efeito
Encoders está no
cuit.
effect incircuito.
and out of circuit. If the LED is lit the effect is in cir-
Encoders cuit.
LCD HPF
HPF
LCD
HPF
HPF assigns the encoders to control the HPF corner frequency.

HPF habilita os codificadores para controlar a freqüência de corte
doPressing
HPFHPF.
assigns the
theencoder
Pressionar toggles
o codificador
encoders the built-in
alterna
to control HPF
entre
the HPF in and
adicionar
corner out of cir- o
ou retirar
frequency.
Encoder Assignment Switches cuit. If the LED is lit, the filter is in circuit.
HPF do circuito.
Pressing Se o LED
the encoder estáthe
toggles aceso, o efeito
built-in HPFestá no out
in and circuito.
of cir-
Encoder
Input Assignment
encoders, Switches
assignment switches, and LCD cuit. If the LED is lit, the filter is in circuit.
Codificadores de entrada, switches de atribuiçãoand
e LCD
Delay
Delay
Input encoders, assignment
Rotary and Switch Functionality switches, LCD
Funcionalidade de Switches e Controles Rotativos Delay
O The
switch Delay
Delay habilita
switch os codificadores
assigns the encoderspara controlarthe
to control a quantidade
amount
Rotary and Switch Functionality
The rotary encoders on VENUE consoles are dual-function
deofdelay
delay no canal. Pressionar o codificador alterna entre
theadicionar
controls The Delayin the channel.
switch Pressing
assigns the the encoder
encoders toggles
to control the amountDelay
Os The rotarythat
codificadores provide
encoders onrotary
nas consoles
VENUE and
VENUEswitch
consoles functions.
sãoare
controles Indeaddition
dual-function dupla ouinretirar
and o delay
out of do circuito.
circuit. If the Se
LEDo LED
is está
lit, the aceso,
delay o in
is efeito está no
circuit.
to adjusting parameters by turning the encoder, you can tog- of delay in the channel. Pressing the encoder toggles the Delay
função que that
controls funcionam
providecomo switches
rotary ou controles
and switch functions. rotativos. Além
In addition circuito.
gle in and out of circuit. If the LED is lit, the delay is in circuit.
de to adjusting parameters by turning the encoder, you can tog-of
parameters
ajustar parâmetros (such as
girandotaking
o the high-pass
controle, você podefilter in or
alternar out
entre
parâmetros (como adicionar ou retirar Send1–21–2 to15–16
Send 15–16
circuit) by pressing
gle parameters (such the
as taking theoknob.
encoder filtro passa-altas
high-pass filter indoorcircuito)
out of Send a Send
pressionando o knob. Send
These1–2 to Send
switches 15–16
let you select one of two Aux sends in
circuit) by pressing the encoder knob.
Encoder LEDs Estes switches permitem selecionar uma de duas mandadas
odd/even
These pairs
switches let(Send
you 1–2 through
select SendAux15–16) orinVariable
LEDs dos Codificadores auxiliares em pares (Send 1–2one atéof two
Send 15–16) sends
ou Variable Group
Encoder LEDs
Two types of LEDs surround each encoder: Group sends in odd/even pairs (Send 1–2 through Send 7–8
enviados em
odd/even pares
pairs (Send(Send
1–21–2 até Send
through Send7–8 apenas).
15–16) or Variable
Dois tipos de LEDs cercam cada only).sends in odd/even pairs (Send 1–2 through Send 7–8
Two The LED
types of ring
LEDs around thecodificador:
surround encoder
each displays the relative posi-
encoder: Group
tion of its currently assigned parameter.
  Com
Withmandadas
only). mono sends, mono, o primeiro
the first press ofpressionamento
the switch selects dothe
switch
O The que
 LED LEDcircunda
ring around the encoder
o codificador displays
apresenta the relative
a posição posi-
relativa do seleciona
odd numbered send (1, 3, 5, or 7) and the second press selectsas
as mandadas ímpares (1, 3, 5 ou
 With mono sends, the first press of the switch selects the
7) e o segundo,
tion of its
Below currently
each assigned
encoder is an parameter.
indicator
parâmetro atualmente atribuído a ele.
 LED, which indicates pa- mandadas pares (2, 4,send6 ou(2,8).4,O6,switch se acende em verde para
thenumbered
odd even numbered
send (1, 3, 5, or 7) or 8). The switch lights green
rameter status
Below each (in/out),
encoder default
is an setting,
indicator LED,orwhich
other indicates
conditions
pa-re- as ímpares ou em amarelo para asand the
pares. second press selects
 foreven
the the numbered
odd-numbered send selection,
(2, 4, 6, or or8).yellow for the
The switch even-num-
lights green
 Abaixo de the
lated to cada codificador existe um LED indicativo de status
rameter statuscurrent encoder
(in/out), defaultfunction.
setting, or other conditions re- bered selection.
de parâmetros (in/out), configurações padrão ou outras condições  Com
for mandadas stereo,
the odd-numbered o primeiro
selection, pressionamento
or yellow for the even-num-do switch
lated to
relacionadasthe
Switchesàincurrent
função encoder function.
atual dosection
codificador.
the Encoder assign each of the following controla
bered ostereo-linked
nível para o par
selection.
 With de busses,
sends, the first epress
o segundo controlacon-
of the switch o pan
parameters to Encoder
the Inputsection
encoders: para o par de busses. O switch se acende em verde para
trols level for the bus pair, and the second press controls pancontrole
Switches in the assign each of the following  With stereo-linked sends, the first press of the switch con-
Os switches na seção Encoder habilitam os seguintes parâmetros defor
nível
theebus
em pair.
amarelo para
Thepair, controle de
switch pan.for level control, or
parameters to the Input encoders:
para os codificadores de entrada: trols level for the bus andlights green
the second press controls pan
Gain yellow
for forpair.
the bus pan The
control.
switch lights green for level control, or
Pressionar um codificador alterna entre habilitar ou desabilitar a
Gain
Gain Gain assigns the encoders to control input gain according to yellow
mandada.for an
Pressing pan
Quandocontrol.
o nível
encoder de envio
toggles está on
the send sendo apresentado
or off. When the no anel
send
the range available for this input (head amp gain for analog delevel
LEDsiseshown
a mandada
on the
está desabilitada,
LED ring and the
um LED
send
se acende. Quando
Gain
Gain assigns
habilita the encoders para
os codificadores to control input
controlar gain according
o ganho de entradatodo Pressing
a mandada an encoder toggles
está habilitada, theLEDs
os send off.isWhen
seonacendem
or off, a single LED
the send
no sentido horário
inputs,
the range digital gain for
available digital or(head
line inputs). Pressing and lights. When the send is on, all LEDs light in a clockwise se-
canal de acordo com afor this
gama input
disponível paraamp gain
essa for analog
entrada (ganho level
desdeisoshown
canto on the LED
inferior ring and
esquerdo até the send
o nível daismandada.
off, a single LED
holding the encoder initiatesorGain
line Guess, inPressing
which the quence from the lower left to the send level.
de inputs,
amplificação
digital para entradas
gain for digital analógicas e ganho
inputs). digital
andpara lights. When the send is on, all LEDs light in a clockwise se-
VENUE
entradas system
digitais ou automatically
nível de linha). sets a nominal
holding the encoder initiates Gain Guess, in which inputthe
gain level
quence from the lower left to the send level.
based on
VENUE the incoming
system signal.
automatically sets a nominal input gain level
Pressionar
based on the incoming signal. inicia o Gain Guess, em que o
e segurar o codificador
sistema VENUE automaticamente configura um ganho de nível de
entrada nominal
32 VENUE baseado
Profile Guide no sinal recebido.

the channel faders. It can still be controlled from the encoder Name display to show the source input which is feeding each
row, so the channel fader mirrors the setting. When Flip is en- channel. For example, “S1 17” indicates the channel source is
gaged,
Flip to Faders all channel name display backlights turn yellow, the Stage Rack
Switch 1, Input 17.
Source
same
Flip color as the flip switch. Channel name is displayed in
to Faders Source Switch
Quando habilitado,
the upper row of o the
parâmetro
LCD, with atualthedoflipped
codificador é mapeado
parameter dis- O switch Source, na seção Display, altera o nome do canal para
Stage
When Rack
os enabled, Features
the current encoder parameter Select
Additional Switch
fonte Required Components
para played faders
in thedo canal.
lower rowEle continua
(mirroring the effect is
podendo mapped
ofser to
Flipcontrolado
to Faders). The Sourcea switch
mostrar in entrada
de the Displayque section
alimenta changes the Channel
cada canal. Por exemplo,
the channel
pelos faders.portanto
codificadores, It can still os be controlled
faders de canal from the encoder
espelham o ajuste. Name
“S1 display
17” indica
The following to
Select switch show
que a the
fonte source
do input
canal
on each channel é which
Stage is
Rack feeding
1, Input each
17.
Stage Racks are used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage The components must beispurchased
used to target the
separately:chan-
Quando
row, soFlipFlipestá
the channelhabilitado,
to Faders fader
provides todos
mirrors osthe
fundos
a special mode dos
setting. nomes
When
when dosiscanais
Flip
working en-
with channel. For example, “S1 17” indicates the channel
nel in the Selected Channel sections, and to include the chan- source is
audio I/O
segaged,
tornam for VENUE
amarelos, a mesma Profile corsystems.
do switch UpFlip.
to two Stagedo
Oyellow,
nome Racks
canal Switch Select
all channel
stereo name
Aux sends. display
For backlights
information, seeturn
Chapter 10, the
“Aux • Video
Stage Rack Display
1, Input (15-inch
17. or greater flat-panel VGA display
can be usedna simultaneously, supporting up to 96 totalacionado
inputs. nel in Multi-Select and Multi-Assign functions. A lit Select
ésame
apresentado
color
Sendsas and linha
the flip superior
switch.
Variable do LCD, com o parâmetro
Channel name is displayed in
Groups.” recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
sendo apresentado
the upper row of the na LCD,
linha inferior
with the (espelhando o efeito dis-
flipped parameter de Flip to Oswitch
switch indicates the channel is selected. The name of the cur-
Select de cada canal é utilizado para marcar o canal nas
DVI supported.
Audio I/O
Faders). Select
seções Switch
rently Selected
selected channel
Channel ise displayed
para incluir inothe Channel
canal Name dis-
nas funções Multi-
played
Input in the lower rowLCD
Channel (mirroringDisplay the effect of Flip to Faders). •play
USBand
• 48 inputs with remotely controllable mic preamps and Select ekeyboard
Multi-Assign. andOtrackball/mouse
in the Selected Channel
switch (Windows
Selectdisplay.
aceso Whenque
indica compatible)
multiple
o canal está
Flip to Faders oferece um modo especial quando trabalhando The Select switch
channels
selecionado. are on each
selected,
O nome channel
the
do canal Channel is used
atualmente Name to display
target the
selecionado chan-
indicates
é apresentado
Flip
There to Faders
are a totalprovides
individually of threeaInput
selectable special
phantom modepower.
Channel when
LCDworking
displays, with
one nel in the Selected Channel sections, and to include the chan-
com mandadas auxiliares estéreo. Para mais informações, Digital
no display
which Snake
Channel
channel Cable (VENUE
Name
is the Profile
ACSe target. Systems Only)
no display Selected Channel. Quando
stereo
each for
• veja Aux
Inputs
8 analog sends.
1–8,
output For9–16information,
and 17–24. see Chapter 10, “Aux
o Capítulo 10,channels;
“Aux Sends expandable
e Variable up to 48 analog or
Groups”. nel in Multi-Select
múltiplos canais and Multi-Assign
estão selecionados, functions.
o display
A lit Select
Channel Name indica
Sends andoutputs
digital Variableper Groups.”
Stage Rack. qual deles
switch é o alvo
indicates the do ACS. is selected. The name of the cur-
channel
Each LCD provides two rows of data with six characters per a Digital Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
Display LCD de Canais de Entrada Solo
rently Switch
selected channel is displayed in the Channel Name dis-
row, per input channel. The upper and lower rows let you see from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Input Channeland
Synchronization LCD Display
Control I/O Switch
play and Solo
in the
The Solo switch Selected
toggles Channel
the solodisplay.
state ofWhen multipleWhen
that channel.
more
Existe um than
total onede 3type of channel
displays LCD dedata simultaneously,
canais de entrada, such para asos
• are
Snake connectors to enable primary and redundant (if channels
enabled, are selected,
the Solo the
switch Channel
LEDSolo Name
is lit.doWhen display indicates
channel
There a name
total in
of the
three lower
Input
canais 1 a 8, 9 a 16 e 17 a 24, respectivamente. row and
Channel fader
LCD dB level in
displays, the
one upper OOptional
switch Solo alterna
Components o modo canal.the channel
Quando is in
habilitado, o
applicable) connection to aData
VENUE FOHdepends
Rack. on the which channel
Solo Safe is the ACS target.
row
each forwhile
Inputs you adjust
1–8, 9–16the and fader.
17–24. display switch Solomode, the Solo switch LED flashes. Channel Solo
se acende.
Cadacurrent
LCD oferece
encoder duas linhas de dados com seis caracteres por
assignment. latches
The on a momentary
following components press, and automatically
are optional, and mustreleases
be if
Eachpor
linha, LCD provides
canal two rows
de entrada. of data
As linhas with six
superior characters
e inferior per a
permitem Quando foro2canal está
or no modo
andSolo Safe, o LED do switch Solo
SoloheldSwitch
purchased seconds
separately: more released.
row, per
visualização input
Input Encoder channel.
de maisAssignments The
de um tipo deandupper dadoand lower rows let you
de canal simultaneamente,
Values see pisca. Channel Solo é ativado com um toque momentâneo e
como
System
moreothannomeone
Components
do type
canalof nachannel
linha inferior e o nível do fadersuch
data simultaneously, em dB as na The
Solo switch toggles
automaticamente the solo state
desativado of that
quando channel. When
pressionado por dois
The current
superior
channel enquanto
name in encoder
você
the lowerassignment,
ajusta rowo and
fader. parameter
A apresentação
fader dB level orin
value
thede is dados
dis-
upper Mute
segundos
enabled, theSwitch
ouSolo
mais e depois
switch LEDliberado.
is lit. When the channel is in
Included
depende
played dain Components
atribuição
theadjust
top rowatual
the of dothecodificador.
input displays. There are
on two Solo •Safe
Near-field
mode, monitor
the speakers
Solo switch LEDfor mix position
flashes. monitoring
row while you fader. Data display depends the The Mute switch mutes the channel at theChannel Solo
(pre-fader) mute
statesencoder
current the top assignment.
row can be in: Parameter Value mode and Pa- Switch
•
latches onMute
Headphones
a momentarywith 1/4-inch
press, and jack
automatically releases if
All VENUE Profile systems include the following: point. Channel pre-fader pickoff is post-mute.
Atribuições
rameter eName
Valor dos
mode.Codificadores de Entrada held •forDynamic
2 seconds oror more andmicrophone
condenser released. and XLR mic cable
• VENUE Profile console O switch Mute silencia o canal pré-fader.
Input Encoder Assignments and Values (for Talkback)
A atribuição,
When necessary, o parâmetrothe display ou oabbreviates
valor atual do codificador
displayed functionsé Input Faders and Banking
apresentado
Theascurrent na
shown encoder linha superior
in the following
assignment, do
table.display de canais
parameter or value is dis- de entrada. Mute
Faders Switch
• Footswitches
de Entrada e (up to 2)
Bancos
Há • estados
dois Monitor para mount a for VGA
linha screenmodos
superior: (screen not included)
Parameter Value e Each channel fader
played • MIDI cables (forisconnecting
a 100mm motorized,
external MIDItouch-sensitive
devices)
Tablein
Parameter
the
4.Name.
Encodertop Assignment
row of the Displaysinput displays. There are two
The
Os Mute
fadersswitch mutesdethe
de canal channel
100mm sãoat motorizados
the (pre-fader) e mute
sensíveis ao
• Trackball mount (trackball not
states the top row can be in: Parameter Value mode and Pa- included) fader.
Switch
• VENUE Mouse Display
Pad toque.
point. Channel pre-fader pickoff is post-mute.
rameter Name mode. VENUE system and external digital devices)
Quando necessário, o display abrevia as funções apresentadas The Options > Interaction screen lets you enable touch-sensi-
como • VENUEna
Gain
mostrado Profile Guide
Input aGain • 25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
When necessary, tabela seguir.
the display abbreviates displayed functions
When necessary, the display abbreviates displayed functions
Ative
Input
telachannel
Options
Faders
> Interaction
selection.
and When
Banking
permite habilitar
enabled, a seleção
touching de canais
a channel
• Two (2) console lights sensível ao toque. Quando habilitada,
fader automatically selects that channel and makes tocar um fader de Se-
it the canal
as shown in the following table.
as shown
Tabela Pan in the
4. Exibições following
Inputdo
de Atribuição table.
Pan
Codificador
• Protective Dust Cover automaticamente
lected Channel seleciona esse canal.
Each channel fader is a 100mm motorized, touch-sensitive
TableComp
4. Encoder Assignment
Thresh Displays
• Rack(s) (see Compressor
next) Threshold
VENUE
fader. Profile Expansion Options
Os fader
The fadersdaonconsole
the ProfileProfile podem
console ser
can bemovimentados
moved even when mesmo
Switch Display
Gate Thresh Gate Threshold
The
quando
Options
não sentem
> Interaction
um
screen
toque. Isso
lets you
permite
enable
o uso dos faders
The they do
following not sense can
options a touch. This
be added allows
to VENUE oftouch-sensi-
use Profile
the faders
systems.
Racks, Software
Gain CDs, iLoks, and Cables
Input Gain quando estiver usando luvas, por exemplo. Também permite
tive
Forchannel
whileselection.
details wearing
on all VENUEWhen
gloves. Itenabled,
also lets
systems touching
you “throw” avisit
channel
a faderAvid
and
HPF Frequency que um fader seja “jogado” eand options,
permaneça onde theparou, e não
Each Mix RackInput
Pan or FOH
Pan Rack includes: fader have
websitevolte it stay
automatically where
selects
(www.avid.com). it lands,
that and
channel not snap
and
ao ponto em que foi tocado pela última vez. back
makes to
it the
the point
Se-
• System Restore
Delay InputCD Delay lected Channel
it was last touched.
Comp Thresh Compressor Threshold Controle de Bancos de Fader
Send (n) Aux (n) Level MixTheRack
Fader faders
Banking Options
on theControls
Profile console can be moved even when
Gate• Thresh
Standalone Gate
AuxThreshold
Software
(n) PanInstaller CD sends only) they do not sense a touch. This allows use
(stereo-linked Bank A–D Agrupa as réguas de entrada emof bancos.
the fadersAté quatro
• iLok USB HPF Variable
Smart Group (n) Level
Key (for storing plug-in authorizations) Bank
I/O A–D
OptionsBanks the Input strips. Up to
bancos (A a D) podem ser usados para acessar aaté
while wearing gloves. It also lets you four
“throw” banks (A through
fader
96 and
entradas a
Frequency
Variable Group (n) Pan (stereo-linked sends only D)have
can be used to access up to 96notinputs
• Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok partir dosit 24
stay where
faders it lands,
de canais and
de snapfrom
entrada. back the A24corresponde
to the
O Bank Input
point
Analog
Flip to Faders Aux (n) Level
AI16
Channel
aositcanais 1 aMic/Line
faders.
was last 24,Bank
o bank
touched.
Input
A is aosCard that
B channels
canais1–24,
25provides
a Bank 16isanalog
B
48 e assim channels
por diante.
Delay
• Two Input
(2) IEC Delay
power cablesand Pan (stereo-linked sends mic/line level
only) 25–48, and soinputs
on.
• (n)
One FOHAux Link(n)cable
Levelfor connection to a VENUE console FX Returns Habilita os canais de retorno de efeitos (FX Return) 1 a 8
Send Fader
AO16Banking Controls
Analog Output Card that provides 16 analog line level
Aux (n) Pan (stereo-linked sends only) FX Returns
para Banks
os faders FX Return
de entrada 1 a channels 1–8 tode
8, ou os canais Input faders
retorno de 1–8,
efeitos
Each Stage Rack includes:
Variable Group (n) Level 9outputs
or
Banka FX
16 Returns
A–Dpara 9–16
os faders
Banks the to
deInput
Input strips.faders
entrada 9–16.
9 ato16.
Up four banks (A through
Variable
• Two (2) IEC power Group (n) Pan (stereo-linked sends only
cables D) can be used to access up to 96 inputs from the 24 Input
Channel faders. Bank A is channels 1–24, Bank B is channels
Flip to Faders Aux (n) Level and Pan (stereo-linked sends line level outputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.
only) 25–48, and so on.
AT16 A-Net Output Card that3:
Chapter provides 16 channels
VENUE Profile of A-Net 33
Control Overview
FX Returns Banks FX Return channels 1–8 to Input faders 1–8,
or FX Returns 9–16 to Input faders 9–16.

digital I/O. Chapter 3: VENUE Profile Control Overview 33
Graphic EQEQ
Graphic
Graphic Habilita
Banks
EQ Banksbandas
bands of do
bands of equalizador
graphic
graphic EQEQto tográfico
thethe aos
faders.
faders. faders.
Graphic
Graphic
Equalizadores
EQs
EQs
cancan
gráficos
bebe
used
used
podem
onon
outputs
ser
outputs
utilizados
only.
only.ForFor
more
somente
more
nas
information,
saídas.
information,seesee Seção de Atribuição
Assignable
Assignable de Canal
Channel
Channel - ACS
Section
Section
Para mais informações, veja o Capítulo 17, “EQ”.
Chapter
Chapter
17,17,
“EQ.”
“EQ.”
TheThe
Assignable
AssignableChannel
Channel Section
Sectionprovides
provides
dedicated
dedicated routing,
routing,
A seção de atribuição de canal (Assignable Channel Section - ACS)
EQ,EQ,
Dynamics,
Dynamics,and and
insert
insert
controls
controlsforfor
thethe
currently
currentlyselected
oferece controles de roteamento dedicado, EQ, Dynamics e inserts selected
FX FX
Returns
Returns
1–8/9–16
1–8/9–16 channel.
channel.
para ACS
o canalACSsections
sections
selecionado include
include thethe
atualmente. Input,
Input,
Bus
A seçãoBusAssign,
ACSAssign,
Direct
inclui Direct
as seções
Out,
Out,
AuxAux
Sends
Sendsandand
Inserts
Inserts
sections,
sections,the
the
Selected
Selected
Channel
Channel
Input, Bus Assign, Direct Out, Aux Sends e Inserts, os medidores Me-
Me-e
display
ters
ters
and Selected
and
display, Channel,
display,and
and e as
thethe seçõesand
Dynamics
Dynamics Dynamics
andEQEQ e EQ.
sections.
sections.
The
TheACS
A seçãoACSsections
ACS sectionsfeature
feature
apresenta a light
cor adelight
colored
colored
fundo background
clara background
e cada seçãocolor,
color,
um LED
azul
and
and que,
each
each quando
section
section aceso,
features aindica
features blue
a blue que
LED a which,
LED seçãowhen
which, aplica-se
when lit,lit, ao
indi- canal
indi-
selecionado.
cates
cates
that
thatsection
section
applies
applies
to to
thethe
selected
selected
channel.
channel.
Input
Input
Input
Esta seção oferece LED de Clip, e controles para phantom power,
This
This
section
section
provides
provides
a Clip
a Clip
LED,
LED,
andand
controls
controls
forfor
phantom
phantom
pad de entrada, polaridade (fase), ganho e modo Safe.
power,
power,input
input
pad,
pad,
polarity
polarity
(phase),
(phase),
gain
gain
and
and
safe
safe
status.
status.
ClipClip
LEDLED
GEQ
GEQ
Bank
Bank
A–D
A–D 20–630
20–630 Hz Hz +48+48
V V 20 20
dB dB
PadPad
800–20kHz
800–20kHz
Input
Input
Polarity
Polarity
Input
Input
Switches fader
de fader
banking
banking
atribuição andandassignment
e habilitaçãoassignment
de faders.switches
switches
Global
Global
Switches Modifier
Modifier
de Modificações Switches
Switches
Globais
Input
Input
Gain
Gain
ToTo
thethe
À esquerda left
left
dosof of
thethe
Bank
Bank
switches A–D
dosA–D
switches
switches
bancos A aare
Dare
thethe
global
estão global
modifier
modifier
os switches de
switches.
switches.SeeSee
“Global
“Global
Modifier
Modifier
Switches”
Switches”on on
page
page41.
41.
modificações globais. Veja “Switches de Modificações Globais” na
página 41. Safe
Safe
Multi-Select (Shift)
Lets
Lets
youyou
select
select
multiple
multiple input
input
channels,
channels,
andand
lets
lets
youyou
select
select
multiple
multiple
items
items
in in
lists.
lists.
Multi-Select (Shift) permite a você selecionar múltiplos canais de Input
Input
controls
controls
Controles de Input
entrada e múltiplos itens em uma lista.
Default (Alt)
Default (Alt)
Lets
Lets
youyou
reset
reset
a parameter,
a parameter,
section,
section,
or or
channel
channel
to to
default
default
values.
values.
This
This
switch
switch
also
also
enables
enables
certain
certain
modes
modes such
such
as as
Direct
Direct
Direct Output
Output
Output
Default (Alt) Permite recompor um parâmetro, seção ou canal para
Show
Show VCAVCAMembers
Members mode.
mode.
os valores padrão. Este switch também habilita certos modos como The
TheDirect
Direct
Output
Outputsection
section
provides
provideslevel
level
andandin/out
in/out
control
control
A seção Direct Output oferece controle de nível e inclusão/exclusão
o Show VCA Members. for
dofor
thethe
sinalchannel
channel
para direct
direct
a saída output.
output.
direta do canal.
Fine (Ctrl)
Fine (Ctrl)
Lets
Lets
youyou
select
select
non-adjacent
non-adjacentitems
itemsin in
lists,
lists,
or or
adjust
adjust
rotary
rotaryencoders
encoderswith
with
greater
greater
resolution
resolutionforfor
finer
finer
control.
control.
Fine (Ctrl) Permite selecionar itens não adjacentes em uma lista, ou
ajustar os codificadores rotativos com maior resolução para controle
User
fino. This
User This
switch
switch
is currently
is currently
notnot
implemented.
implemented.
User Este switch não está atualmente implementado.

Direct
Direct Output
Direct
Output
Output
Bus Assigns
Bus
BusAssigns
Assigns
OsThe
The switches
BusBus Bus switches
Assigns Assigns
Assigns são
switches os
areare controles
thethe
primary primários
primary
routing
routing de roteamento
controls
controls
forfor
para
thethe ocurrently
canalselected
currently atualmente
selected
channel,selecionado,
channel,letting
letting
youpermitindo
you
busbus endereçá-lo
it directly
it directly
to to
diretamente
thethe
Mains
Mains
para
(L–R)
(L–R)
o bus
bus
bus principal
or or
to to
any
any
(L–R)
other
other
oumono
mono
para qualquer
or or
stereo
stereo
outro
group.
group.
grupo
mono ou estéreo.
L–RL–R C/Mono
C/Mono
Group 1–81–8
Group
Stereo PanPan
Stereo
BusBus
assign
assign
switches
switches
Switches Bus Assign
3434VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
Aux
Aux Sends The
The 6-character
6-character Selected
Selected Channel
Channel display
display shows
shows the the namename of
Aux Sends
of
Sends The
the 6-character Selected Channel display
the currently selected channel. The Selected Channel display
currently selected channel. The Selected shows the name
Channel display
of
The Aux Sends
Sends section
section provides
provides in/out
in/out and
and level
level control
control to the currently selected channel. The Selected Channel display
AuxAux
Aux Sends
The
The Sends
Aux
Sends
Aux Sends section provides in/out andavailable
level control
to
toor The The 6-character
Otemporarily
display
temporarily Selected
6-character reverts
revertsSelected
SelectedChannel
to a Channel
to Channel
parameter display
de 6display
a parameter caracteres
display
display
showsshows
mode
mode thethe
mostra any
any
name oname
nome
time
time of do
of an
an
route
route the
the currently
currently selected
selected channel
channel to
to any
any available mono
mono or temporarily
canal
the selecionado
currently
encoder is revertse,
selected
adjusted to
on athe
parameter
temporariamente,
channel. The
selected display
Selected
channel. mode
transforma-seChannelanyem time an de
display
display
Aux Sends
route the currently
The Aux Sends selected
section channel
provides to any available
in/outsection
and level mono toor
controlusing
Theencoder
the 6-character
currently
encoder
Selected
is selected
adjusted
is aadjusted
onChannel
on
Thedisplay
the selected
channel. shows
channel.
Selected Channelthe namedisplay of
AThestereo-linked
seção AuxAux Aux
Sends
stereo-linked
Sends bus. The
oferece
Aux
sectionbus. Aux Sends
controle
The
providesAux de nível
Sends
in/out and is banked
e inclusão/exclusão
section
level is banked
control tousing parâmetros
the temporarily
currentlyreverts
temporarily
qualquer
reverts
selected to to athe
momento
channel.
a
selected
parameter
parameter Theem channel.
que
Selected
display
umChannel
display mode
codificador
mode any any é ajustado
time
display
time an an
do
The Stage
routeroute
the
the Aux
Aux
Aux
the
Rack
stereo-linked
roteamento
the1–8
Sends
1–8 do
or
currently
Features
Aux
currently
Aux
section
Aux
bus.
or canal
Theswitches.
selected
9–16
provides
9–16
selected
Aux
selecionado Sends
channel
in/out
switches.
channel to tosection
para
and
any qualquer
anylevel
is banked
bus
available mono
control
available mono
using
auxiliar
toor or Additional
no canal
The
encoder
The is
Stereo
Required
selecionado.
Stereo LED
adjusted
LED lights
lightson solid
the
solid
Components
when
selected
when a
a stereo
channel.
stereo input
input or
or output
output is
is
temporarily
encoder
The reverts
is adjusted
Stereo to
LED lightsonatheparameter
selected display
channel. mode any ortime an is
mono
route
the
ouAux
the
1–8
estéreo.
stereo-linked or
currently
Aux
AAux
seção 9–16
Aux
bus.
selected
switches.
Sends
The Aux
channel pode
Sends
to ser
any agrupada
section em bancos
is banked
available mono using
or targeted.
targeted. The
The Solo
Solo LEDsolid when
flashes any a time
stereo a input
a channel
output
is
is in
in PFL,
stereo-linked
Stage
The Racks Aux
Variable
bus.
areGroups
used The
withAux
switch
Sends
an accesses
FOH section
Rack, and isprovide
Variable
banked
Groups
using
all stage
mode. The
encoder following
is adjusted
targeted. The onLED
components
Solo LEDthe flashes
must
selected
flashes
any
anybe time
purchased
channel.
time a
channel
channelseparately:
is in
PFL,
PFL, é
utilizando os switches Aux 1–8 ou Aux 9–16. OThe
LEDStereo
StereoLED acende-se
lights quando
solid when uma entrada
a stereo inputou orsaída
output estéreo
The
the
theaudio Variable
Aux 1–8
AuxVariable
The 1–8
I/O
orGroups
or Aux
for
Aux
Groups
VENUE
switch
9–16 accesses
switches.
9–16Profile
switches.
switch
Variable
accesses
systems.
Groups
stereo-linked Aux bus. The Aux Sends section is banked using
Variable
Up to two
mode.
Groups mode.
Stage Racks TheAFL
AFL or
or Solo
Stereo LEDin
Solo in Place
Place
lights mode.
mode.
solid when a stereo input or output is is
When D-Show is in
in Variable Groups
Groups mode,
mode, the
the controls
controls for endereçada.
AFL or
•targeted.Solo
Video Display
TheOin LED
Place Solo
(15-inch
Solo LED pisca
mode. quando
or greater
flashes um
flat-panelcanal VGAestá nos
display modos
Os
When
thecan
Aux
Whenbe
switches
D-Show
1–8
D-Show
used
Variable
is 9–16
is in
Groups
Variable
orsimultaneously,
Aux switches.
Variable
dãorouteGroups
supporting
acesso mode,
up
aoVariablethe
to 96
modoGroups controls
total
Variable
for
for
inputs.
Groups.
The
PFL,
Stereo
targeted.AFLTheLED
ou Solo
lights
Solo LED
in
solid
Place.
when
flashes anyaany time
stereo
time a channel
a input
channel or is
output
is in in is
PFL, PFL,
The
TheAux Variable
1–2
1–2 through Groups Aux switch
7–8 accesses
to Variable Groups
Groups 1–2mode. The dual, 10-segment,
recommended; 1024x768bi-color LED
minimum meters indicate input level
Aux
Variable
Aux 1–2
through
Groups
through
Aux
switch
Aux
7–8accesses
7–8
route
route
toVariable
to
Variable
Variable
Groups
Groups
1–2
mode.
1–2 AFL The
AFL
targeted. dual,
orThe
or Solo
The
Solo
dual,
10-segment,
in in Place
Solo
Place LED
10-segment,
bi-color
mode.
flashes
mode. any
bi-color
LED
time
LED a resolution).
meters
meters
indicate
channel
indicate is inVGA PFL,and
input
input
level
level
Quando
Whena D-Show
Thethrough D-Show
7–8 está noVariable
modo
is Variable
in Variable
Groups Groups,
mode, os controles
the controls para
forau- and clip status for the currently targeted or Soloed channel.
Variable
through isrespectively.
Groups switch The Variable
accesses Groups
Variable switch
Groups mode.also DVI
and supported.
clip status for the currently targeted or Soloed channel.
When
Audio
through
Aux I/O7–8
D-Show
os auxiliares
1–2 7–8
respectively.
in
Auxtoggles
1–2 Auxaté
respectively.
through Aux
7–8
The
7–8
The
route
Variable
Groups
são
mode, Groups
the
roteados
Variable
to Groups
Variable
switch
controls
para os1–2
switch
Groups
also
for
Variable
au-
also1–8
au- AFL
Oandor Solo
clip
display
The dual,
in Place
status
duplo for
de
10-segment,
mode.
the
10 currently
segmentos
bi-color LEDtargeted
e LEDs
meters or Soloed
bicolores
indicate channel.
indica
input nível
level de
Whentomatically
D-Show is in the
Variableinput encoders
Groups mode,to Variable
the Groups
controls for 1–8 The
Aux tomatically
Groups 1–2
1–2through
tomaticallya toggles
7–8 Aux the
7–8 input
route
respectivamente.
toggles the input
encoders
to Os to
Variable Variable
Groups
switches
encoders to
Groups
1–2
Variable
Variable GroupsGroups
1–8 • dual,
USBFor
entrada
10-segment,
keyboard
e status
Selected and
de
bi-color
clip
Channel para o
LED
trackball/mousemeters
canal
metering roteado
indicate
(Windows
scale,indicate
see ou em
input
“SelectedSolo.
level
compatible)
Channel
through
• 487–8
Aux(instead
1–2
(instead
through 7–8
inputs
of
through
of respectively.
Auxes
Auxeswith remotely
Aux1–8).
7–8
1–8).
respectively. The
route
The Variable
to Variable
Variable Groups
controllable
Groups mic
Groups switch
preamps
switch1–2 also
au-au-
and Theand
and clipclip
dual, For status
for for
Selected
10-segment,
status the the
Channel currently
bi-color
currentlymetering
LED targeted
scale,
meters
targeted orseeor“Selected
Soloed
Soloed input channel.
Channel
channel. level
automaticamente
(instead of Auxestambém1–8). alternam os codificadores dealso
entrada For Selected
Level Meters” Channel
on page metering
116. scale, see “Selected Channel
tomatically
through
tomatically toggles
individually
7–8toggles
respectively. the
the1–8 input
selectable
The
input encoders
phantom
Variable
encoders to
Groups
to Variable
power. switch
Variable Groups au-1–8
also1–8
Groups and Level
clipLevel
status Meters”
for the on page
currently 116.
targeted or Soloed channel.
para os Variable Groups (em vez de Auxes 1–8). Digital Snake
Para Cable
graduação
Meters” (VENUE
on page do Profile
medidor
116. Systems
Selected Only) Channel,
Channelveja
(instead
• 8of
tomatically
(instead of
analog Auxes
toggles
Auxes output 1–8).
channels;
the input
1–8). expandable
encoders up toGroups
to Variable 48 analog1–8 or ForFor Selected
Selected
“Medidores
Channel
Channelde Nível
metering
metering
do Canal
scale,
scale, see see
Selecionado”
“Selected
“Selected Channel
na página 116.
Level
•Dynamics
The Meters”
connection
For Selected Channel on page
between
on pagemetering 116.
FOH Rack and Stage
116. scale, see “Selected Channel Rack requires
(insteaddigital
of Auxesoutputs
1–8).per Stage Rack. Dynamics
Level
Dynamics
aLevel
Meters”
Digital Snakeoncable.
Dynamics Meters” page This
116. cable can be purchased directly
The Dynamics section provides dedicated controls
vendor.and and meter-
Synchronization and Control I/O Dynamics
from
Dynamics
The
Avid
Dynamics
or assembled
The Dynamics section provides
section
by your
provides
preferred
dedicated
dedicated
controls
controlsincluding
meter-
and meter-
ing for built-in and plug-in dynamics processors, a
Send 1–16
1–16 Aing
Dynamics
ing
for built-in
seção
for Dynamics and
built-in section
and
plug-in
oferece
plug-in
dynamics
controle
dynamics
processors,
dedicado
processors,e including para
mensuração
including
a
a
• Snake connectors to enable primary and redundant
Send
encoders (if
and The Dynamics
comprehensive set of provides dedicated
Compressor/Limiter controls
and and
Expander/Gate meter-
The comprehensive
Dynamics section
processadores de set of Compressor/Limiter
provides
dinâmica dedicated controls
incorporados ou and
em Expander/Gate
and meter-
plug-ins, incluindo
Send
LEDs
1–16
encoders
encoders
and
and Optional
comprehensive
ing for Components
built-in set of Compressor/Limiter and Expander/Gate
LEDs
LEDs 1–16 The controls.
Dynamics
abrangentes
ing controls.
for built-in andand
section
controles plug-in
provides dynamics
dedicated
de Compressor/Limiter
plug-in dynamics processors,
controls
processors, andincluding
includingmeter-
e Expander/Gate. a a
Send
Sendencoders
1–16 and controls.
comprehensive set of Compressor/Limiter and Expander/Gate
encoders and ing for
The built-in
following and plug-in
components dynamics
are processors,
optional,
comprehensive set of Compressor/Limiter and Expander/Gate and including
must be a
SendLEDs
1–16
LEDs
encoders and controls.
comprehensive
purchased
controls. set of
separately: Compressor/Limiter and Expander/Gate
LEDs
System Components controls.
Variable
Aux
Aux 1–8/Aux
1–8/Aux 9–16
9–16 Variable Groups
Groups
Aux 1–8/Aux 9–16 Variable Groups • Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
Included
Aux
Aux send
Components
send controls
controls
Aux Aux
send controls
1–8/Aux 9–16 Variable Groups • Headphones with 1/4-inch jack
Aux 1–8/Aux 9–16 Variable Groups
Insert
Aux
AuxInsert
Aux 1–8/AuxProcessing
send controls
Processing
9–16
send controls
Variable Groups • Dynamic or condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
Insert
• VENUE
Aux send
Controles
Processing
Auxcontrols
Send
Profile console Dynamics
Dynamics section
section and
(for Talkback)
Dynamics
and controls
controls
section and controls
The Insert Processing section
cablesprovides
provides controls
controls to
to bypass
bypass and Controles da seção Dynamics
Insert
The
Insert
The
• Two
InsertProcessing
Insert(2) IEC power
Processing
Processing
Processing
section
section provides controls
and
to bypass and • Footswitches
Dynamics (up to 2)
section and
select
select
Insert plug-ins
plug-ins
Processing on
on the
the currently
currently selected
selected channel.
channel. See
DynamicsSee Chapter
section 16,controls
“Dynamics.”
and controls
Insert•
select Processing
Monitor
plug-ins
The Insert
mount for VGA
on the section
Processing
screen
currently (screen
selected
provides
not
channel.
controls
included)
to bypass and • MIDI
DynamicsSee
Chapter
Veja cables
Chapter
section
16,
Capítulo
(for
“Dynamics.”
16,16, “Dynamics”.
connecting
“Dynamics.”
and controls external MIDI devices)
The Insert Processing
• Trackball mountsection provides
(trackball controls to bypass and
not included)
select plug-ins • BNC cables (for connecting
“Dynamics.”Word clock between the
AThe
seção Insert
Insert
select on on
thethe
Processing
Processing
plug-ins currently
oferece
section selected
controle
provides
currently channel.
para inserir
controls
selected ou não
to bypass
channel. plug-
and EQ
EQSee See Chapter
Chapter 16,16,
“Dynamics.”
ins no •canal
select
VENUE Mouse Pad
selecionado.
plug-ins on the currently selected channel. EQ VENUE system and external digital devices)
EQ See Chapter 16, “Dynamics.”
• VENUE Profile Guide The EQ
EQ section provides dedicated
section provides controls
tofor
GPIall built-in
built-in and
EQ•
EQThe
The
25-pin D-Sub
EQ section
cables
provides
(for connecting
dedicated controls
dedicated controls
for alldevices)
forband
all built-in
and
and
• Two (2) console lights Acompatible
seção EQ plug-in
plug-in EQ parameters including bandosin/out,
oferece EQ parameters
controle including
dedicado para todos fre-
parâmetros
EQcompatible
compatible
The EQ section
quency, plug-in EQ
Q, andprovides parameters including band
in/out,
in/out,
mode. dedicated controls for all built-in and
fre-
fre-
• Protective
Plug-Ins 1–4Dust Cover
Plug-Ins 1–4
dos
The EQequalizadores
quency, Q, and
section embutidos
mode.
provides oucontrols
dedicated em plug-in,
for allincluindo inclusão/
built-in and
quency, Q, and mode.
compatible plug-in EQ parameters including band in/out, fre-fre-
compatible
exclusão, plug-in
freqüência, EQ
Q e parameters
modo. including band in/out,
Plug-Ins 1–4 The EQ section provides dedicated controls for all built-in and
• Rack(s) (see next) VENUE
quency,
compatible Q, Profile
and
plug-in mode. Expansion Options
EQ parameters including band in/out, fre-
Plug-Ins 1–4
Plug-Ins 1–4 quency, Q, and mode.
Plug-Ins 1–4 quency, Q, and mode.
In/Out Select For details on all VENUE systems and options, visit the Avid
In/Out LED Select
RackLED
Each Mix Rack or FOHIn/Out includes:
LED
Select website (www.avid.com).
Insert
Insert Processing
Processing controls
controls
• System
Insert Restore
Processing CD
controls
In/Out
In/Out
Select
LED Select
LED
• ECx
Selected
Insert
Selected Ethernet
Processing Control
Channel
In/Out
controls
Channel Software Display
Meter,
Meter,
Select Installer CD
Display and
LEDs Mix Rack Options
Display andLEDs
Insert Processing controls LED
Selected
Insert •Processing
Standalone Channel Meter,CD
Software Installer
controls
and
LEDs
Controles Insert Processing
The Selected Channel display section include two 10-segment
Selected
The
SelectedSelected
• iLok
The USB
Selected Channel
Channel
Channel
Smart Key
Channel Meter,
display
Meter,
(for
display Display
section
Display
storing
sectionplug-inand
include and
two LEDs
includeauthorizations)
two 10-segment
LEDs
10-segment I/O Options
Selected
Selected Channel
Channel meters,
meters, a
a 6-character
6-character LCD
LCD display
display and
and LEDS
LEDS
Selected
Selected
Selected
• Status
The
for
Channel
Channel
Plug-in
Selected Meter
Channel
installer
andChannel
Meter,
Display
Solometers,
discs
display
state. any)Display
e6-character
a(ifLEDs with
section LCD and
include
LEDs
display andiLok
pre-authorized LEDS
two 10-segment
Thefor Status Channel
Selected and Solo display
state. section include two 10-segment AI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
for• Status
Selected and
Two Channel
(2) Solo
IEC state.
power cables
meters, a 6-character LCD display and LEDS EQ section
EQ section and
and controls
controls
The Selected Channel display section include two 10-segment mic/line da level inputs
ASelected ChannelChannel
seção Selected meters,inclui
a 6-character LCD display
dois medidores de 10and LEDS
segmentos, EQ section
Controles and EQ
seção controls
for for
Selected Status
• LCD
One
Status
display andand
deFOH
Channel
6Solo
Solo
Link state.
cable
meters,
state.
caracteres for connection
ae6-character
LED LCD to a VENUE
display
para estados de Soloand console
LEDS
e Status. EQ section and controls
EQAO16 Analog
See
section Output
Chapter
and 17,
controls Card that provides 16 analog line level
“EQ.”
for Status and Solo state. Veja
See Capítulo
Chapter 17,17, “EQ”.
“EQ.”
Each Stage Rack includes: LCD Display EQ outputsSee
section Chapter
and 17, “EQ.”
controls
LCD Display
Meters LCD Display
• TwoMeters
(2) IEC power cables
Meters LEDs
LEDs See See
XO16
Chapter
Chapter
Analog 17,17,
and
“EQ.”
“EQ.”
Digital Output Card that provides 8 analog
LCD Display
LEDs
LCD Display See Chapter 17, “EQ.”
Meters line level outputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.
Meters LCD LEDs
Display
Selected Channel LEDs
Selected Channel meters,
Meters meters, displays
displays and
and LEDs
LEDs AT16 A-Net Output Card that provides 16 channels of A-Net
Selected Channel meters, displays and LEDs LEDs
Selected Channel meters, displays and LEDs

Selected Channel meters, displays and LEDs Pro16™ Series devices.
Selected Channel meters, displays e LEDs
Selected Channel meters, displays and LEDs
Chapter
Chapter 3:
3: VENUE Profile Control Overview 35
IOx Input and output expansion VENUE Profile
card that
Chapter 3: VENUE
Control an
provides
Profile addi- 35
Overview
Control Overview 35
Capítulo 3: Chapter
Visão Geral da Superfície
3: VENUE de Controle
Profile Control Profile
Overview 35 35
Output
Output Masters
Masters
The Output Masters section includes eight bankable output channel strips, each with a fader, encoder and channel switches. The
A seção Output Masters inclui oito réguas de saídas de canal agrupáveis, cada uma com fader, codificador e switches de canal. Os fader
Mains
Mains fader provides
oferecem controle master level control
master sobre over
as saídas the Mains
principais (house) output.
(house).
Output Encoders
and switches
LCD Display Insert mode
Select Multi-Assign/Show VCA Members
AFL Select Mains
Mute Mute Mains
Output Fader Mains fader

bank switches
Faders
Figura 13. Controles de saída
Figure 13. Output controls
Faders Mains Switches Mute, AFL e Select

Mains Fader Mute, AFL and Select Switches
O fader Mainsfader
The Mains oferece controle
provides de nível
a single único
level parafor
control a the
saída Mains
current Sobre the
Above os faders
faders,areestão os switches
the Mute, AFL and Mute, AFL e Select,
Select switches, which que
atual.
Mains output. mute, solo, and select Auxes or Groups assigned to the Output à
silenciam, solam ou selecionam auxiliares ou Groups atribuídos
seção Output.
section.
Faders Output
Output Faders Output Encoders e Display
Os oito faders Output controlam o nível para Aux 1–8, Aux 9–16, Output Encoders and Display
The eight
busses Output
Personal Faders
Q, Matrix controle level
e Group, VCAs.for Aux 1–8, Aux 9–16, Os oito Output Encoders ajustam controles adicionais de bus de
Personal Q, Matrix and Group busses, and VCAs. The eight
saída, Output
como GroupEncoders
pan, fonteadjust additional
de matriz e nívelOutput bus
da fonte con-
PQ, assim
Switches de Agrupamento Output Fader comosuch
trols parâmetros
as Groupdepan,
plug-ins (quando
Matrix sourcenoand
modo
PQ Inserts).
source level, as
Output Fader Bank Switches well as plug-in parameters (when in Inserts mode).
Os faders e codificadores Output podem ser agrupados em bancos O display LCD Output Masters possui duas linhas e é capaz de
para o bus
The desejado
Output fadersutilizando os switches
and encoders Output
are banked to Faders.
the desired bus mostrar
The 6 caracteres
Output em display
Masters LCD cada uma, por bus de
is a two-row saída.that
display O display
is
using the Output Faders switches. apresenta
capable of nome,
showingparâmetro ou valor
6 characters que row,
in each estãoper
sendo controlados
output bus.
Aux 1–8 Atribui os Output Faders para os níveis de Aux 1–8. na seção
The Output
display showsMasters.
the name, parameter or value currently be-
Aux 1–8 Assigns the Output Faders to Aux 1–8 levels. ing controlled in the Output Masters section.
Aux 9–16 Atribui os Output Faders para os níveis de Aux 9–16. Os switches Prev Page e Next Page acendem para indicar funções
Aux 9–16 Assigns the Output Faders to Aux 9–16 levels. adicionais
The dependendo
Prev Page and Nextdo parâmetro
Page switchesselecionado do plug-in
light to indicate addi-ou da
Personal Q’s Atribui os Output Faders para os níveis de saída do saída. functions depending on the selected output or plug-in
tional
mixer. Q’s Assigns the Output Faders to PQ mixer output
PQ Personal parameter. When lit, pressing either switch scrolls the Output
levels. Quando acesos, pressioná-los permite a rolagem dos Output
Encoders to the previous or next output or plug-in parameters.
Matrixes Atribui os Output Faders para os níveis de saída do Matrix Encoders para a anterior ou a próxima saída ou para o anterior ou
Matrixes Assigns the Output Faders to Matrix mixer output
mixer. The Inserts
próximo Mode switch
parâmetro puts the
do plug-in. Os encoders in Inserts
switch Inserts Modemode, in os
colocam
levels. which the Output encoders select and adjust plug-ins.
codificadores no modo Inserts, em que selecionam e ajustam plug-
Groups Atribui os Output Faders para os níveis dos Group. Quando ins.
no Groups AssignsGroups,
modo Variable the Output
este Faders to Group
switch atribui levels. Faders
os Output When inpara
Variable Groups mode, this
controlar os Variable Groups. switch assigns the Output Faders
to control Variable Groups.
VCAs Atribui os Output Faders para os VCAs.
VCAs Assigns the Output Faders to VCAs.

Talkback/Osc
Talkback/Osc
Talkback/Osc
Master
Master
Controles and
andGlobal
Master Global
Controls
Controls Talkback/Osc
Master and eGlobal
GlobaisControls
Master and Global Controls
Talkback/Osc
TheThe
Os controls
controls
controles innesta
in
this
thissection
section
seção provide
provide
comprehensive
comprehensive
proporcionam andand
controle amplo flexi-
eflexi-
flexível
Global
Global andand master
mastercontrols
controls areare
located
locatedin in
sections
sections withwitha dark
a dark The controls
controls in this section provide comprehensive
Stage Rack Features bleAdditional
ble
dacommunication
The comunicação,inRequired
communication thiscontrol,
control,
section
incluindo Components
including
including
provide
entrada (XLR), and
a top-mounted
a top-mounted
comprehensive
Talkback Talk-
and flexi-
Talk-
flexi- de
switches
Controles
Globalmaster
Global
background, and
background,
andand e include
andglobais
master
master include estão
controls
thethe
controls localizados
are located
Snapshot,
areSnapshot,
locatedViewin
innas
View seções
sections
Modes,
Modes,
sections com
with afundo
a
Console
with dark
Console
dark ble communication control, including a top-mounted
roteamento
back
back
bleinput
input e(XLR),
controle
(XLR),
communication Assign deswitches,
Assignnível.
switches,
control, andand
includinglevel
alevel control. Talk-
control.
top-mounted Talk-
escuro,
Stage
Config, e
Config, incluem
background,
Racks
Mute
background, Mute as
and
are seções
include
used with
Groups/Function,
Groups/Function,
and Snapshot,
the
an
include the Snapshot, View
Snapshot,
FOH Rack,
Monitoring Modes,
Monitoring View
andand
View Console
Modes,
provide
andTalk-
Talk-
Modes, allConfig,
Console
stage
Console The
back following components must beand
Mute Groups/Function, Monitoring eMonitoring
Talkback/Osc no quadrante back input (XLR), Assign switches, and level control.
input (XLR), Assign switches, level control.
Config,
audio
back/Osc
back/Osc
Config, I/OMute
sections
sections
Mute Groups/Function,
for VENUE
in in Profile
thethe upper
Groups/Function, upper systems.
right
right Up to two
quadrant
quadrant
Monitoring and
of
andof
theTalk-
Stage
the Racks
control
Talk- control • Video Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display
superior
can bedireito
back/Osc used da superfície
sections in the
simultaneously, de supporting
upper controle.
right Além
quadrant
up disso,
to of
96 os switches
the
total control
inputs.
surface.
surface.
back/OscIn Inaddition,
addition,
sections the
inthe global
the global
upperModifier
Modifier switches
switches
right quadrant forfor
of Multi-Se-
the Multi-Se-
control recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
de surface.
modificaçõesIn
globaisthe
addition,
para Multi-Select,
global Modifier
Default efor
switches
Fine estão
Multi-Se-
lect,
lect,
Default
Default
surface. In andandFine
Fine
addition, are
theare
located
located
global
localizados próximos aos fader de entrada 1 a 16. next
next
to
Modifier to
input
input
switchesfaders
faders
for 1–16.
1–16.
Multi-Se- DVI supported.
Audio
lect, I/O and
lect, Default
Default and Fine
Fine are are located
located nextnext toto input
input faders
faders 1–16.
1–16.
Global•Modifiers
48 inputs with remotely controllable mic preamps and
Global
GlobalModifiers
Modifiers
Global individually
Modifiers selectable phantom power.
AThe
Global
seção
Modifiers
Modifiers está localizada àtoesquerda dos faders de entrada
TheModifiers
Modifiers section
• 8 analog outputsection ischannels;
located
is located to
thethe
leftleft
expandable of of
Input
upInput
tofaders
48faders1–8,
analog 1–8,
or
1and
a The
8,provides
and
Thee provides
oferecethe
Modifiers
Modifiers os
theswitches
section is
Multi-Select,
Multi-Select,
section is Multi-Select,
located to
Default,
located Default,
to Default,
the left
Fine
the Fine
left of
andand
of Fine
Input
User
Input eswitches.
User User.
faders 1–8,
switches.
faders 1–8, • The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
and
and provides
provides thethe Multi-Select,
Multi-Select, Default,Default, Fine
Fine and
and User
User switches.
switches. a Digital Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
Snapshots from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Talkback/Osc
Talkback/Osc
Snapshots
Snapshots Talkback/Osc
Talkback/Osc
Talkback/Osc
Snapshots
Snapshots
A seção
• Snapshots oferece os
Snake connectors to switches Store, Recall,
enable primary Previous, Next
and redundant (if Mute
Mute Groups/Function
Groups/Function
eTheThe
Snapshots
Snapshotssection
section
provides
provides Mute Groups/Function
Optional Components
Preview, juntamente
applicable) com toStore,
aStore,
um codificador
connection Recall,
VENUE Recall,
SelectPrevious,
FOH ePrevious,
Next,
Next,
um display
Rack. LCD Mute
Mute Groups/Function
Groups/Function
de 6The
andand Snapshots
Preview
The Previewmode
Snapshots
caracteres. section
mode provides
switches,
switches,
section along
along
provides Store,
with a Recall,
with
Store, Select
a Select
Recall, Previous,
encoder
encoder Next,
and
Previous, anda a
Next, Provides
Provides MuteMuteGroup
Group assignment
assignment andand
selection
selection
in in
default
default
and Preview
Preview mode
mode switches, along
along with
with a
a Select
Select encoder
encoder and
and a The following
Oferece
Provides Mute components
endereçamento
Group are optional,
e seleção
assignment Mute and
and must
Group bemodo Mute
nodefault
6-character
6-character
and Snapshot
Snapshot
LCD
LCDdisplay.
display.
switches, a Mute
MuteGroups
Groups
Provides mode,
Mute mode,or or
Group can can
bebe andtoselection
switched
switched
assignment to
provide
provide
selection in
eight
in eight
Func-
Func-
default
6-character
6-character Snapshot
Snapshot LCD
LCD display.
Groups,
purchased
Mute ou
Groups pode ser
separately: comutada para oferecer oito switches de
display. tion
tion
switches
Mute switches
Groups (F mode,
(F
keys)
keys)
mode, or
in
orincan be
be switched
Function
Function
can mode.
mode.
switched to
Theprovide
toTheglobal
global
provide eight
CancelFunc-
Cancel
eight Func-
System Components função
tion (F
• switches
USB keys)
flash no
(F modo
disk (orin
keys) in Function.
other O switch
portable
Function global
USBThe
mode. storageCancel
globaldevicetambém
for
Cancel
switch
switch
tion
está is also
is also
switches
localizado located
located
(F
nessa in
keys) this
in this
seção. section.
section.
Function mode. The global Cancel
switchtransfer
is also of Show
located data;
in 512
this MB or
section.
switch is also located in this section. larger recommended)

(for Talkback)
Snapshots
Snapshots
Snapshots
Snapshots
Snapshots • Footswitches (up to 2)
Para
For
For mais
more
more informações,
information,
information, veja
seesee o Capítulo
Chapter
Chapter
21,21, 21, “Snapshots”.
“Snapshots.”
“Snapshots.” • MIDI cables (for connecting external MIDI devices)
• Trackball
For mount (trackball not included)
For more
more information,
information, see
see Chapter
Chapter 21,
21, “Snapshots.”
“Snapshots.” • BNC cables (for connecting Word clock between the
View
ViewModes
Modes Mute
Mute
Groups/Function
Groups/Functionsection
section
ViewView
ModesModes
View Modes • 25-pin
Seção
Mute Mute
Mute D-Sub cables
Groups/Function
Groups/Function
Groups/Function
(for connecting to GPI devices)
section
section
The
The
View
• View
Mode
Two Mode
(2) switches
switches
console (Inputs,
(Inputs,
lights Outputs,
Outputs,
Filing,
Filing,
Snapshots,
Snapshots,
Os The View
switches Mode
View switches
Mode (Inputs,
(Inputs, Outputs,
Outputs, Filing, Snapshots, Mute
Mute Groups
Groups
Patchbay,
Patchbay,
The ViewPlug-ins)
Plug-ins)
Mode display
display
switches thethe Outputs, Filing,
corresponding
(Inputs,corresponding pages Snapshots,
pages
Filing, Snapshots, Mute
Mute Groups
Groups
• Protective
Patchbay, Plug-ins) Dust Cover the
apresentam as páginas correspondentes Mute Groups
Patchbay,
on-screen.
on-screen.
Patchbay, Plug-ins)
Pressing
Pressing
Plug-ins) display
a View
adisplay
View Mode
Mode corresponding
the switch
switch
repeatedly
repeatedly
corresponding pagescycles na
cycles
pages Mute
MuteGroups
Groupsletlet
youyouquickly
quicklymute
mute multiple
multiple channels
channels
at at
thethe
tela. Pressionar
on-screen.
through
through thethe
on-screen. o switch
• Rack(s)Pressing
(see
individual aView
next)
individual
Pressing View
a tabs Mode
tabs
View Mode
ofMode
of repetidamente
that switch
that
page.
page.
switch For
For percorre
repeatedly
example,
example,
repeatedly aspress-
cyclesabas
press-
cycles VENUE
Mute
Mute
same
same Groups
Groups
time.
Mute time.You
Groups Profile
let you
permite
Youcan
letcan Expansion
quickly
facilmente
create
you create
and
and
quickly mute
silenciar
recall
recall
mute upup Options
multiple channels
tomúltiplos
to
eight
multiple eight canais
Mute
Mute at
aothe
Groups
channels mesmo
Groups
at the
individuais das páginas. Por exemplo, pressionar o switch Patchbay
ingthrough
ing
thethe
through the
the individual
Patchbay
Patchbay switch
switch
individual tabs
once
once
tabs of that
that page.
displays
ofdisplays
thethe
page. For example,
Patchbay
Patchbay
For page.press-
page.
example, press- same
tempo. time.
comprising Você
comprising
same time. You
pode
one
one
You can
orcan
or
morecreate
criar
moree and
utilizar
channels.
create recall
até
channels. up
oito to
Muteeight Mute
Groups Groups
constituídos
and recall up to eight Mute Groups
umaRacks,
vezthe
mostra a página Patchbay. Pressionar Patchbay novamente The following options can be added to VENUE Profile systems.
ing
Pressing
Pressing Software
Patchbay
ing thePatchbay
Patchbay
Patchbay again CDs,
switch
again
switchcyclesiLoks,
once
cycles
oncethrough and
displays
through
displays Cables
the
variousPatchbay
various
the tabs
tabs
Patchbay page.
within
within
page. comprising
de um ou mais
comprising one
one or
or more
more channels.
canais. channels.
percorre as várias abas existents na página Patchbay. For details on all VENUE systems and options, visit the Avid
Pressing
theEach
the Patchbay
Patchbay
Patchbay
Pressing again cycles through
through various
various tabs
tabs within SeeSee
Chapter
Chapter
15,15,
“Muting
“Mutingand and
Mute
MuteGroups.”
Groups.”
page.
Rackpage.
MixPatchbay againRack
or FOH cycles
includes: within
website
See (www.avid.com).
Chapter 15,
the Patchbay page.
the Patchbay page. Veja
See Chapter 15, “Muting
o Capítulo “Muting and
and eMute
15, “Muting MuteGroups.”
Mute Groups.”
Groups.”
• System Restore CD Function
Function Switches
Switches
Function
Switches
Function Switches
Function
Switches
• ECx Ethernet Control Software Installer CD Mix
In In
Rack
Function
Function
Options
mode,
mode,this
this
section
sectionprovides
provides eight
eightMain
MainFunction
Function
• Standalone Software Installer CD In
In Function
No modoThe
switches.
switches.
Function The mode,
Function,
default this
esta
default
mode, section
assignments
thisassignments
section provides
seção oferece
forfor
thethe
provides eight
8first
switches
first
eight Main
four
four Function
Main
Function
Main Function.
Function
Function
• iLok USB Smart Key (for storing plug-in authorizations) I/O
As
switches Options
switches.
switches
switches. The
atribuições
include
includedefault
The padrão
Preview
Preview
default assignments
para
modeos on/off
mode
assignments for
primeiros
on/off the
for(F1), first
quarto
(F1),
the four
Variable
Variable
first four Function
switches
Groups Function
Groups
Function
• Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok switches
incluem
(F2),
(F2),
Copy
Copy
switches include
Preview
(F3)
(F3)
and
include Preview
mode
and
Paste
Paste
Preview mode
on/off
(F4).
(F4).
mode on/off
(F1),
on/off (F1),
Variable
(F1), Variable
Groups
Variable Groups
(F2), Copy (F3)
Groups
e(F2),
Paste
(F2), Copy
Copy(F4).(F3) and
and Paste
(F3)inputs Paste (F4).
(F4).
View
View
Modes Function
Function switches
switchescancan
be be
assigned
assignedto to
perform
perform anyany
number
number
• Modes
One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console Os switches Function podem ser assinalados
View View
Modes
View Modes
Modes of Function
AO16 of
actions
actions
Function
Analog
switches
using
using
the
switches
Output thecan
Events
Events
can
Card
be
be assigned
window.
that window.
assigned
provides
to
For
to perform
For
more
16more
perform anypara
any
information, executar
number
information,
analog number
line level
of
seeseequalquer
actions
ofChapter
Chapter
actions número
using
22,22, the Events window. For more information,Para
de
“Events.”
using “Events.”
the ações
Events utilizando
window. For a janela
more Events.
information,
Console
Console
Each
Console
StageMode
Mode
Mode
Rack includes: outputs
mais informações, veja o Capítulo 22, “Eventos”.
Console Mode see Chapter 22, “Events.”
see Chapter 22, “Events.”
Console Mode
The
The
Config
Config
Mode
Mode
switch
switch
toggles
toggles
thethe
system
system
between
between
Config
Config Cancel
Cancel
Oand
switch Config Mode Cancel
The
and
The Config
Show
Show Mode alterna
Mode
modes.
Configmodes. switch entre
switch osthe
toggles
toggles modos
the Config
system
system e Show.
between
between Config
Config Cancel
Cancel
and
and Show
Show modes.
modes. This
This
switch
switch cancels
cancels
thethecurrent
current operation,
operation, such
such
as as
Multi-Select
Multi-Select
orEste
This
or switch
A-Net cancela
switch
Multi-Assign
Multi-Assign
This
AT16 switch cancels
modes.
modes.
cancels
Output a operação
the
the
Cardcurrent
current corrente,
operation,
operation,
that provides como
16such
such asos
as
channels modos Multi-
Multi-Select
Multi-Select
of A-Net
Select
or ou Multi-Assign
Multi-Assign modes.
or Multi-Assign
output compatible modes.
with Aviom® Personal Mixers and other
Console
Console
Mode
Mode
Console Mode
Console IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an addi-
Console Mode Mode
tional 8 channels ofChapter
analog 3:I/O
Chapter 3: and Profile
VENUE 8 Profile
VENUE channels ofOverview
Control
ControlAES/EBU
Overview3737
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring Meters
Meters
Meters
ATheThe
seção Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring section
oferece
section provides level
codificadores
provides level encoders
de nívelfor
encoders for
thethe
para as Moni-
saídas
Moni-
Meters
The Monitoring section provides level encoders for the Moni- The The Meter
Meter section
section includes
includes thethe following:
following:
Monitor
tortor (monitores
(near
(near field
field near-field)
monitors)
monitors) eHeadphone
and
and Headphone.
Headphone outputs.
outputs.
tor (near field monitors) and Headphone outputs. AThe Meter
seção section
Meter includes the following:
inclui:
Monitoring
Controles controls
Monitoring
BusBus Masters
Masters Mains
Mains
Monitoring controls Bus Masters Mains
Monitoring controls Meters
Meters
Monitor bus delay can be set on-screen in the Options > Bus- Meters
Medidores
OMonitor
delay dobus
Monitor busdelay can pode
busMonitor
be set on-screen
delay can be ser
in the
configurado
set on-screen
Optionsna
inon-screen
> Bus-
the Options página
> Bus-
sesses page.
page. Bus Output Meters
Options > Busses.
ses page. Bus
Bus Output
Output Meters
Meters
Bus Output Meters
Porta USB e LEDs System Status Eight
Eight BusBus Output
Output meters
meters provide
provide selectable
selectable metering
metering of of Out-
Out-
USB
USB Port
Port and
and System
System Status
Status LEDs
LEDs Oito
put
medidores
Eight Bus
busses.
Bus Output
Output meters proporcionam
provide selectable mensuração
metering of Out-
USB Port and System Status LEDs put busses.
selecionável
put busses. dos busses Output.
Estes
These LEDs
TheseLEDsindicam
LEDs status
indicate
indicate deand
power
power energia
and e dostatus.
system
system sistema.
status. Esses
These
These controles
controls
controls
These
estão LEDs indicate
localizados no power
canto and system
superior status.daThese controls
areare located
located in in
thethe upper
upper leftleft
corner ofesquerdo
corner of
thethe control
control superfície
surface. de
surface. Mains
Mains
Mains
are located in the upper left corner of the control surface.
controle. Mains
The
Os
The Mains
Mains meters
medidores
meters provide
Mains constant
proporcionam
provide constant level indication
indicação
level of of
constante
indication thethenível
do
The Mains meters provide constant level indication of the
da
housesaída
house Mains
(Mains)
(Mains) (house).
output.
output.
house (Mains) output.
Para
ForFor more
more mais informações,
information,
information, seesee veja o13,
Capítulo
Chapter
Chapter 13, 13, “Metering”.
“Metering.”
“Metering.”
For more information, see Chapter 13, “Metering.”
TopTop panel
panel USBUSB port
port andand status
status LEDs
LEDs
Painel
Topsuperior
panel com
USBporta
port USB
andestatus
LEDs de status
LEDs
For
Para
For more
more information,
mais seesee
informações,
information, Chapter
Chapter 28,28,
veja “Troubleshooting.”
o Capítulo 28,
“Troubleshooting.”
For more information, see Chapter 28, “Troubleshooting.”
“Troubleshooting.”
38 38VENUE
VENUE Profile
Profile Guide
Guide
Capítulo
Chapter 4: Comandos Básicos e Modos
4: Basic Commands and Modes
Chapter 4:
Stage Rack Features Basic Commands and Modes
Additional Required Components
can be used simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total inputs. Dicas
Tool Tips
Control
Visão Overview
geral dos Controles Tool
DVITips
supported.
With
Com o the mouse
mouse ou oortrackball,
trackball,posicione
place theo cursor
cursosover
sobrea screen
um item na
Control
Most featuresOverview
Audio I/O
and controls that are used during a performance tela para
•item
USB to ver auma
keyboard
see breve
and
brief explicação
insobre ele no display.
banner.
A maioria dos
48 recursos
• available
inputs witheboth
controles
remotely usados durante
controllable uma
mic performance
preamps and With the mouse trackball/mouse
orexplanation
trackball, place the(Windows
the banner
cursor compatible)
over a screen
are
Most from
features tanto
and controlsthethat
console andduring
are used on-screen. Changes
estão disponíveis
individually na console
selectable quando
phantom na tela. a performance
power. item to see a brief explanation in the banner display.
made on onefrom
are available are immediately
both the reflected
andin the other,Changes
letting Digital Snake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
Alterações
• use
realizadas
8 analog
em
output
um são console
imediatamente
channels; expandable
on-screen.
refletidas
upandto 48
no outro,
analog or
you
made on almost
one usarany combination
are immediately of console
reflected in the de screen
other, con-
letting
permitindo a você quase qualquer combinação controles de • The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
trols digital
to mix.outputs per Stage Rack. Cursor
you euse
console telaalmost any combination of console and screen con-
para mixar. a Digital Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
trols to mix. Cursor
The software screen
Synchronization and is not required
Control I/Oparainmixar
order to mix a perfor-
A tela do software não é necessária uma performance,
mance,
poisThe as all essential mixing controls are estão
provided aon the
• software
todos screenessenciais
os controles
Snake connectors is not required
to enable in order
deprimary
mixagem andtoredundant
mix perfor-
à disposição
(if Tool Tip
console.
na console. However,
Entratano, the screen
a telamixing is essential
é essencial when
para are setting
configuração up and Optional Components
mance, as all essential
applicable) connection to controls
a VENUE FOH Rack. e
provided on ajustes
the
Tool Tip
configuring
do sistema antes the
de system
uma before
performance.a performance.
console. However, the screen is essential when setting up and Barra de status
Status apresentando
bar showing uma dica
Tool Tip
configuring the system before a performance. Status bar showing Tool Tip
Controles e Visualizações Exclusivasand
no Software Status Messages
Software-Only Controls Displays
System Components
Software-Only Controls and Displays
Mensagens
• USB
Status de Status
flash disk (or other portable USB storage device for
Messages
The banner display alerts you to certain operating conditions
Muitos
Manyajustes e opções
configuration de configuração
settings estãoare
and options disponíveis apenas
only available transfer of Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
such as Multi-Select and Multi-Assign modes.
na tela, incluindo
on-screen, a configuração
including hardwarede hardware, busses,
configuration instalação
settings,
Many configuration settings and options are only available busses, OThe banner
banner display
alerta você alerts
sobre you to condições
certas certain operating conditions
de operação, como os
de plug-ins
plug-in einstallation,
diagnóstico de sistema.
and system Para mais informações,
diagnostics. For more veja
infor- modos
such asMulti-Select
Multi-Selecte Multi-Assign.
and Multi-Assign modes.
on-screen, including hardware configuration settings, busses, • Headphones with 1/4-inch jack
“System”
mation,na see
página 57.
“System” on page 57.
All VENUE
plug-in Profile systems
installation, include
and system the following:
diagnostics. For more infor-
mation,
• VENUEsee “System”
Profile
Banner na Tela do Software on page
console 57.
(for Talkback)
Software
• Two (2)Screen Banner
IEC power cables Display
A tela do software
Software ofereceBanner
um banner no canto inferior esquerdo,
The MonitorScreen
• software mountprovides
screen Display
for VGAascreen
banner(screen
displaynot included)
in the lower left
para manter na linha de visão da mixagem a visualização do • MIDI cables (for connecting external MIDI devices)
corner.
The• This
Trackball
software display
mount
screen is provided
(trackball
provides a to
notmaintain
included)
banner line-of-sight
display in
parâmetro que está sendo ajustado (como o nível dos faders the mix-
lowerou
left
o • BNC cables (for connecting Word clock between the
ing
limiar •deby
corner. showing
compressão).theOPad
This display
VENUE Mouse currently
isbanner adjusted
também
provided parameter
oferece
to maintain textos(such
com as
line-of-sightdicas
mix- VENUE system and external digital devices)
fader
e mensagens
ing level
deorstatus.
compression threshold)
adjustedasparameter
you make(such
changes
as to
• by showing
VENUE the Guide
Profile currently
• 25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
the parameter.
fader level(2) The banner threshold)
orconsole
compression display also
asprovides
you makeTool Tip text
changes to
• Two lights
andparameter.
the status messages.
The banner display also provides Tool Tip text
and status messages.
Banner display Mode display
Banner display
Banner showing current state of the system Mode display
display
Banner
Banner display showing
apresentando current
o estado state
atual do of the system
sistema
• Standalone Software Installer CD Console and Software Screen Linking
• iLok USB Smart Key (for storing plug-in authorizations) Console
I/O and
Options
The software Software
screen is linkedScreen Linking
to console actions by default. For
• Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok Link entre aselecting
example, Console ean
a Tela
inputdochannel
Softwareon the console changes
The software
AI16 screen is linked
Analog Mic/Line to console
Input Card actions by
that provides 16default.
analog For
• Two (2) IEC power cables the screen
example,
mic/line to the
selecting
level Inputs
inputs page,
an input and selecting
channel on the an output
console bus
changes
Achanges
tela do software
the screen
é acoplada
to the
às ações
Outputs
do You
page.
console
can
por padrão. Por
customize
• One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console the screen
exemplo, to the Inputs
selecionar page,de
um canal and selecting
entrada an output
na console bus a tela
altera
AO16
how Analog
the
changes system
the OutputtoCard
targets
screen that provides
channels
the 16 analog
to best match yourline level
working
para a página de entradas doOutputs
softwarepage. You
(Inputs), ecan customize
selecionar um bus
destyle.
how For more
the para
saída, system information, see
targetsdechannels
a página “Interaction”
to best match
saídas (Outputs). on page 64.
yourpersonalizar
Você pode working
• Two (2) IEC power cables astyle.
formaFor
como
moreo sistema interage
information, seecom canais paraon
“Interaction” melhor
page combinar
64.
com seu estilo de trabalho. Para mais informações, veja “Interaction”
na página 64.
Chapter 4: Basic Commands and Modes 39
IOx Input and output expansion
Chapter 4:card
Basicthat provides
Commands anModes
and addi- 39
digital I/O.
Capítulo 4: Comandos Básicos e Modos 39
Config Mode and Show Mode System Lock
There are two main operating modes, Config Mode and Show System Lock locks out all manual changes (console and screen
Mode. Use Config mode to set up your system and options; actions), allowing the operator to safely step away from the
Modo Config
use Show mode e
toModo Show
mix your performance. System
system. AudioLock
continues to pass but is not affected by console
controls until the operator disables System Lock.
Config Mode and Show Mode System
System Lock
Lock trava todas as alterações manuais (ações no console
Existem
Configdois modos de operação principais: Config e Show. Use o
Mode
modo Config para configurar e ajustar seu sistema e opcionais; use e na tela),
(System Lock permitindo ao operador
is not available se afastarsoftware.)
in the Standalone do sistema com
Config
There
Config
o Config
modo mode
Show
Mode
are two
Mode
provides
para mixar
and
main operating
and
access
uma
Show
to
modes,
Show
the
Mode
Config Mode
Mode
configuration
performance.
and Show
settings
System Lock Lock
System
System
segurança. O
locks out all manual changes (console and screen
Lock
áudio continua a trafegar mas não é afetado pelos
Mode. Use Config mode to set up your system and options; actions), allowing the operator to safely step away from the
that are typically performed as part of system controles da console até que o operador desabilite a função System
There
use are two
Show modemain operating
to mix your modes, Configsetup
performance. Mode(before
and Show System
system. Lock
Audiolocks out all to
continues manual changes
pass but is not (console
affected and screen
by console
There are two main operating modes, Config Mode Lock.
Modo Config
mixing).
Mode. For
Useexample, you must
Config mode to setbe
upinyour
Config mode
system to and
and
Show
do any
options;
System Lock
actions),
controls
locks
allowing
out all manual
the operator to
changes
safely
(console
step away
and
from
screen
the
of Mode. Use Config mode to set up your system and options;
the Show
following: actions), until the operator
allowing disables
the operator System
to safely stepLock.
away from the
use mode to mix your performance. system.
(System Audio
Lock nãocontinues to
está to pass but
disponível is not affected
nanotversão by console
Standalone
Config
O modo
use Show Mode
Config oferece
mode acesso
to mix youraos ajustes que são normalmente
performance. system.
(System Audio continues pass but is affected by console do
• Choose a Main mix format (L–R+M, or L–C–R) LockLock
controls
System
software). buttonis
until not
the
on available
operator
the >in the System
Optionsdisables
SystemStandalone
page Lock.software.)
realizados como parte das configurações do sistema (antes da controls until the operator disables System Lock.
•Config
Config
mixagem).
mode
Mode
Designate
Por
provides
the number
exemplo,
access to
você and
the configuration
devemono/stereo
estar no modoformat settings
of
Config avail-
para as
Config Mode (System Lock is not available in the Standalone software.)
Locking andisUnlocking the
that are typically
ableações:
seguintes performed as part of system
auxes and groups, combine two mono channelssetup (before
into (System Lock not available in theSystem
Standalone software.)
Config
mixing). mode provides you
For example, accessmustto the
be inconfiguration
Configinput settings
modechannel
to do any
one stereo
Config mode input
provideschannel,
access ortosplit
the aconfiguration
stereo settings
• of
that are
the
Escolher
into
that
typically
following:
aretwo um formatoperformed as part of system
channels. as part of system setup L–C–R).
mono performed
typically para a mix principal (L–R+M setup
ou (before
(before To engage System Lock:
• •mixing).
mixing).
Indicar
• Choose
Install
For
For
example,
mono/estéreo
a Main mix
example,
plug-ins
you
you
must
eformat
omust
númerobe
be
in
(L–R+M,Config
de or
in Config
mode
auxiliares to do
mode toe do
L–C–R) any
grupo
any System
Go
1 Botãoto Lock
the
System button
Option
Lock >on the Options
Systems
na página Optionspage.> System page
> System
of the following:
disponíveis, combinar dois canais mono em um canal de
of •the
•entrada following:
Designate
Assignestéreo the number
plug-insouindividir and
the software mono/stereo
racks format of avail-
• Choose a Main um canal
mix format estéreoorem
(L–R+M, dois mono.
L–C–R) 2 Click
Systemthe
Locking Lock
Lock andbutton
button in Options
the System
Unlocking
on the >the section.
System
System page
able auxes and groups, combine two mono channels into Travando e destravando
button on theo Options
sistema> System page
• •Instalar
• Choose
Route
• one
a Main
plug-ins.
side-chain
Designate the
mix format
inputs
number
(L–R+M,
to plug-ins
andormono/stereo
or L–C–R)
format of avail-
System Lock
• •Atribuir
Initialize
stereo
plug-ins
• Designate input
aosnumber
the
(or reset)
channel,
racks doand
hardware
split
software. a
mono/stereo
devices
stereo
and format channel
input
options of avail- 3 In the dialog that appears, click Lock.
Locking
Para habilitar and
To engage o System Unlocking
Lock: the System
• Rotear able
into
able
auxes and
two paralelos
sinais
auxes mono groups,
channels.
and groups,
combine
plug-ins. two mono channels into
para combine two mono channels
into LockingSystem Lock:
and Unlocking the System
On the console, the LCDs for each 8-channel fader bank dis-
• •Inicializar
Change
• one
Install
one
Matrix
stereo
ouplug-ins
stereo
andchannel,
input
reiniciar PQ Source
input dispositivos
orpickoff
channel, or de
split pointsinput
a stereo
hardware
split a stereoeinput
channel
opcionais.
channel 1 Go to the Option > Systems page.
1ToVáSystem
à página OptionLock:> Systems.
engage System
• •Alterar
into
Change
• into ostwo
Assign two
mono
Master
pontos
plug-ins
mono
Insert
de channels.
points
inserção de Matrix
in the software
channels. e PQ.
racks
play Locked.
To engage System Lock:
• •Alterar os pontos
• Install plug-ins
Customize de inserção
console and software master.interaction 2 Click the Lock button in the System section.
Go tono
211Clique the OptionLock > Systems page.
On-screen, anbotão
Unlock na seção
button appearsSystem.
in the lower right corner
• •Personalizar
• Install
• Assign
Move
plug-ins
Route side-chain
a interação
plug-ins
channels to in
inputs
entreto
the software
different
plug-ins
console e software.
racks
fader strips 3
Go to the
In the
Option
dialog that
> Systems
appears,
page.
click Lock.section.
• Mover canais
• Initialize
Assign para
plug-ins diferentes
(or reset) in the réguas.
software
hardware racks and options
devices in 2front
32Na
Click
Click
of the
a dimmed
caixathe
Lock button
deLock
diálogo
background
button
image.
in the System
in the clique
que surgir, Systemem section.
Lock.
• •Realizar
• Route
Perform side-chain
system
testes testsinputs to
doplug-ins
and diagnostics
e diagnósticos sistema. On the console, theown LCDs forclick
each 8-channel fader bank
Change
• Route Matrix
side-chain and PQ Source
inputs to pickoff points
plug-ins
• Initialize (or reset) hardware devices and options
3 InYou the
can dialog
add that
your appears,
custom
3 In the dialog that appears, click Lock.
imagesLock.
to display in place ofdis-
•Some
Initialize
Change (or
Masterreset)
Inserthardware
points devicesaudioand options Naplay System Locked.
the default VENUE logo. See “Customizing the System System
console, os LCDs dos bancos de faders mostram
Config mode operations interrupt throughput.
•Algumas
Changeoperações
Matrix and noPQmodoSourceConfig interrompem
pickoff points o áudio On the console, the LCDs for each 8-channel fader bank dis-
Locked.
• Change
Customize Matrix
consoleandand PQ Source
software pickoff points
interaction On Lock
the Display”
On-screen, console, on page
the LCDs 41for
for information.
each 8-channel fader bank dis-
• Mode
Change Master Insert points play Systeman Unlock
Locked. button appears in the lower right corner
Show
Modo Show
• Change
Move channelsMaster Insert pointsfader strips
to different play System Locked.
in tela,
front of botão
a dimmedUnlock background image.
• Customize console and software interaction ToNaunlock um the system surge no
(disengage canto
System inferior direito, em frente a
Lock):
• Customize
Perform console
system testsand
and software
mode interaction
diagnostics On-screen,
uma imagem ande Unlock
fundo button
esmaecida.appears in the lower right corner
OShow
modo mode is the main operating
Show channels
• Move é o modotoprincipaldifferentde fader
for the system soft-
operação
strips para o software  Do
On-screen, an Unlock button appears in the lower right corner
Youofcan
either
in front addfollowing:
ofa the
dimmedyour background
own custom images image.to display in place of
doware.•All
sistema. mixing
Move Todos and
channels
os routing
recursos features
to different
de arestrips
fader
mixagem available,
interrupte audio
based on
roteamento estão in front of a dimmed background image.
the default
your •
Some Config
Perform systemmode operations
tests and diagnostics throughput. • Press Você
and holdVENUE
pode adicionar
the logo.suas
Cancel See “Customizing
button próprias
on the imagensthe System
console para
for twoserem
•settings
disponíveis,
Perform made
baseados in
systemnasConfig
tests mode.
configurações
and feitas no modo Config.
diagnostics You can add your own custom images
mostradas
Lock
seconds. Display” noonlugarpage do
41 logo
for VENUE.toVeja
information. display in place of a
“Customizando
You can add your own custom images to display in place of
Show Mode
Some Config mode operations interrupt audio throughput. Tela
the de System
default VENUE Lock”,
logo.naSeepágina 41 para mais
“Customizing informações.
the System
Alternando entre
Some o Modo
Config Config
mode e o Modo
operations Show audio throughput.
interrupt –the
–Toorunlock default VENUE logo. See “Customizing the System
Toggling Between Config Mode and Lock the system
Display”
Lock Display”
on(disengage
page 41 forSystem
on page 41 for o
Lock):
information.
information.
Show mode
ShowMode
Mode is the main operating mode for the system soft- Para destravar o sistema (desabilitar System of Lock):
Show
Para colocarMode
Show o sistema no modo Config ou no modo Show, realize
• Click Unlock in the lower
 Do either of the following:
right corner the screen.
ware. All mixing and routing features are available, based on To unlock the system (disengage System Lock):
um dos seguintes
mode isprocedimentos
Show the main operating mode for the system soft-
your settings ismade in Config mode. ToExecute
unlock
•The Press the
um
Unlockand system
hold
dos the(disengage
seguintes
button Cancel
is hidden
System
button
a fewon
procedimentos:
after
Lock):
the console
seconds. Touchfor
thetwo
To Show
put themodesystem the
intomain
Configoperating modemode,
mode or Show for the
dosystem soft-
one of the  Do either of the following:
ware. All mixing and routing features are available, based on  Do seconds.
mouseeither of the following:
or keyboard to bring it back.
following:
Acione
ware.oAllswitch Console
mixing andMode
routing(localizado
featuresnaareparte centralbased
available, superior,
on • Press and hold the Cancel
your settings made in Config mode. • Aperte e segure o botão Cancelbutton on the
da console porconsole for two
dois segundos
abaixo da
Toggling
your seção
settings Insert
Between
made Processing).
in Config
Config Quando
mode. Mode o LED
and do switchestá – or
• – and hold the Cancel button on the console for two
Press
 Press the Console Mode switch (located near the top center seconds.
aceso,Show
of the
o sistema
Mode
console,
está no modo Config.
above the Insert Processing section). When the
System
– ou• –Click Status
seconds.Unlock inwhile the lower Locked
right corner of the screen.
Toggling Between – or –
ouToggling
–switch – LED is lit, the systemConfig
Between Config
is in ConfigMode
Modemode.and
and – or –
GPI All console GPIbutton
inputsisand outputs are disabled while the
Show Theem Unlock hidden aftercorner
a few seconds. Touch the
To put theModesystem into Config mode or Show mode, do one of the • Click
• Clique Unlock
Unlock in
nothe lower
canto right
inferior
rightdireito
of the screen.
cornerdaoftela.
–Show
or – Mode system • is Click Unlock
locked. in the lower
mouse or keyboard to bring it back.
the screen.
following:
 Clique duas vezes no display Mode da barra de status, localizada The Unlock button is hiddendepois
after a de
few seconds. Touch the
To put the system
Double-click
no canto
into Config
the Mode displaymode or Show
in the mode,
Statusnear do one of
Bar,the
located in the Footswitches O botão
The AllUnlock
Unlock button
Footswitch é ocultado
is hidden
inputsafter a fewalguns
are disabled segundos.
seconds.
while Touch Toque
the
the sys-
 putinferior
ToPress the direito
thesystem
Console da
into tela
Mode do software.
switch
Config mode (located
or Show mode, dotop
onecenter
of the mouse
o mouse or keyboard
ou o to bring
trackball para it back.
trazê-lo de volta.
following:hand corner of the screen.
lower-right
following:
of the console, above the Insert Processing section). When the tem System mouse Status
is locked. or keyboard while
to bring Locked
it back.
 PressLED
switch the Console
is lit, theMode
systemswitch
is in (located near the top center
Config mode. Status doconsole
All Sistema Quando
GPI Travado
inputs and outputs are disabled while
 Press the Console Mode switch (located near the top center
GPI
System
Events All Status
Event triggers while
and Locked
actions that include console orthe
of the console, above the Insert Processing section). When the
of –the
orconsole,
– above the Insert Processing section). When the
System
system is Status
locked. while Locked
GPI/Footswitch functions are disabled while the system is
switch LED is lit, the system is in Config mode. GPITodas
GPI as entradas
All console e saídas
GPI inputs andGPI estão are
outputs desabilitadas enquanto
disabled while the o
switch LED is lit, the system is in Config mode. locked.All consoleAll GPI inputs and outputs
 Double-click the Mode display in the Status Bar, located in
GPI
Footswitches
sistema
system está Footswitch
travado.
is locked. inputs are are disabled
disabled while
while the the
sys-
– or – system is locked.
– or –
lower-right hand corner of the screen. tem is locked.
 Double-click the Mode display in the Status Bar, located in FootswitchesTodas
Footswitches as entradas
All Footswitch de footswitchestão
inputs desabilitadas
are disabled while the sys-
 Double-click the Mode display in the Status Bar, located in Footswitches
Events All EventAlltriggers
Footswitch
and inputs
actionsare disabled
that includewhile the sys-
console or
lower-right hand corner of the screen. enquanto o sistema
tem is locked. está travado.
lower-right hand corner of the screen. tem is locked.
GPI/Footswitch functions are disabled while the system is
All Event
EventsTodos
Events
locked. triggers
os triggers de and actions
ações thatque
e eventos include console
incluem or do
funções
Events All Event triggers and actions that include console or
console ou GPI/Footswitchestão
GPI/Footswitch desabilitadas
functions are disabled while enquanto
the systemo is
sistema
40 VENUE Profile Guide GPI/Footswitch functions are disabled while the system is
está travado.
locked.
locked.

MIDIMIDI
e MTC
and MTC
Global Modifier
Switches Switches
de Modificações Globais
Enquanto
andothe
While
MIDI sistema
MTC está
system travado:
is locked:
Stage Rack Features Additional
VENUE Profile Required
Global provides a setComponents
A VENUE Modifier
Profile ofereceSwitches
• Snapshots continue to be recalled via MTC, either inter- of global modifier switches:
uma série de switches de modificações
•While the system
As cenas is locked:
(Snapshots) geradas internamente ou externamente Multi-Select (Shift), Default (Alt), Fine (Ctrl) and User. These
Stagenally
Racksorare
externally
used withgenerated.
an FOH Rack, and provide all stage globais: Multi-Select
The following
VENUE
(Shift),
components
Profiletoprovides
Default
must be(Alt), Fine switches:
purchased (Ctrl) e User. Estão
separately:
continuam a ser chamadas
• Snapshots continue toviabe
MTC.
recalled via MTC, either inter- are located
localizados the left aof
à esquerda
set of
dosthe
global
input
faders
modifier
defaders
entrada.
audio
• The I/Osystem
for VENUE
continues Profileto systems.
respond to Upsnapshot
to two Stagechanges Racks
via
Multi-Select (Shift),(15-inch
Default (Alt), Fine flat-panel
(Ctrl) and VGA
User.display
These
nally or externally generated. • Video Display or greater
can
• O sistemabe used
incoming simultaneously,
MIDI respondendo
continua supporting
program change up
a mudanças to
commandsde 96 total
if theinputs.
cenaSnap-
via
are located to the left of the input faders
• The
comandos system
shots continues
MIDIRespond
program to respond
change
option is recebidos
selected to snapshot
sethe
on changes
a opção
Options > via
Snapshots
Snap- DVI supported.
Respond incoming
Audio está
shots MIDI program
I/O selecionada
page. na páginachange commands
Options if the Snap-
> Snapshots. Multi-Select
shots Respond option is selected on the Options > Snap- • USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
• 48Theinputs
system continues
with remotely to controllable
send MIDI program mic preamps changes and Default
• O sistema
shots page. continua a enviar commandos MIDI program changes Multi-Select
when a snapshot
individually is recalled
selectable phantomif the power.
Snapshots Send option
quando
• The uma cenacontinues
system é chamada se a MIDI
to send opçãoprogram
Snapshots Send está
changes Digital Snake
Fine Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
• 8 is analog
selected on thechannels;
output Options > Snapshots
expandable page.
up to 48 analog or Default
selecionada na página Options > Snapshots.
when a snapshot is recalled if the Snapshots Send option • The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
• digital
The system outputscontinues
per Stage to Rack.
send MIDI messages stored User
Fine
is selected on the Options > Snapshots page. a Digital Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
• O sistema within continua a enviar
snapshots, mensagens
provided the MIDI MIDIdata
armazenadas
type is scoped.com
•Synchronization
Theesystem continues to send MIDI messages stored from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
as cenas, os tipos de
and dados
Control MIDI são
I/O delimitados. User
within
MTCsnapshots,
can be disabled providedusingthe theMIDI
CHASE data
MTC type is scoped.
button on the
MTC pode ser
Snapshots desabilitado
page. usando and
Also, the sending o botão CHASE
receiving MTC na
of MIDI Optional
Modificadores
Global modifiers Components
globais
applicable) connection to aCHASE
MTC
página
data can bebedisabled
turnedOusing
Snapshots.
can bythe
envio
off e oVENUE MTC
recebimento
deselecting
FOHbutton
the MIDI
Rack. on the
de options
dados MIDI
on
também
Snapshots
the Options podem ser desligados,
page.> Also,
Snapshots page. desmarcando
the sending and receiving of a opção
MIDI MIDI Global These
The
Esses switchescomponents
following
switches
modifiers provide
oferecemfrequently
atalhos used shortcuts
are optional,
utilizados mustthatbe can beque
andfrequentemente
na página
data can be Options
turned off > Snapshots.
by deselecting the MIDI options on appliedser
podem
purchased to aplicados
console
separately: actions
a ações and nasoftware
console ou screen interactions.
interações com a tela
These switches provide frequently used shortcuts that can be
System Components
the Options
Customizing > Snapshots
the
Customizando a Tela de System Lock
System page. Lock Display do software.
applied to console actions and software screen interactions.
transfer of Show
Multi-Select data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
You can manually
Customizing add one or
the System moreDisplay
Lock custom images to display Multi-Select Switch Switch
VocêIncluded
podeSystem
during Components
manualmente
Lock, rather adicionar
than the uma defaultouVENUE mais logo imagens
back- • Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
personalizadas
You can
ground. manually ao display
add one durante
or more o System
custom Lock,
images toem vez
display do Multi-Select
The Multi-Select
O switch Switch
Multi-Select
• Headphones
(Shift) switch lets you select multiple Input
(Shift)
with permite
1/4-inch jackselecionar múltiplos canais de
All VENUE
background comProfile systems
o logorather
VENUE. include the following: Channels and then apply an action to all selected channels.
during System Lock, than the default VENUE logo back- entrada
• para
Dynamic depois
or realizar
condenser uma ação
microphone emandtodos XLR os mic
selecionados.
cable
The Multi-Select
Multi-Select is (Shift)
useful switch
for batch letsrouting
you select
and multiple
assignment Input
of in-
Multiple
ground.• VENUE images are console
Profile displayed one after the other for 20 sec- Multi-Select é útil para roteamento e sinalização em bloco de canais
Channels
put (for Talkback)
and then apply an action to all selected channels.
channels.
Múltiplas
onds in imagens
a random são apresentadas,
order. (Pressing the uma após
Spacebar a outra,
advances em
to de entrada.
intervalos
Multiple
the next de 20 segundos,
images
image are displayed
immediately.)em ordem aleatória.
one after (Pressionar
the other for 20 sec-a barra Multi-Select is useful (up
• Footswitches for batch
to 2) routing and assignment of in-
de • Monitor
espaços avançamount for VGA para
mediatamente screen (screen not included) putMost channel functions support Multi-Select (or Multi-Assign)
channels.
onds in a random order. (Pressing theaSpacebar
próxima imagem).
advances to Muitas
• MIDI funções
cables (forde connecting
canal suportam external Multi-Select
MIDI devices) (ou Multi-
• Trackball mount (trackball not included) as noted
Assign) throughout
como observado thisaoguide.
longo For details,
deste guia.seePara
“Selecting and
detalhes,
theTonext image
installimagens immediately.)
custom personalizadas
System Lock images: Most •channel
BNC cables
functions(for connecting
support Word clock
Multi-Select (or between the veja
Multi-Assign)
Para instalar
• VENUE Mouse Pad ao System Lock: Targeting Channels”
“Selecionandosystem Canais”and on page
na external 48.
página 48.
1 Copy a .bmp or .jpg image file to a USB key disk or CD-ROM.
as notedVENUEthroughout this digital devices)
guide. For details, see “Selecting and
To install
• customProfile
VENUE System GuideLock images: •
Targeting 25-pin D-Sub
Channels” cables
on page (for
48. connecting to GPI devices)
1 Copie
(For um
optimalarquivo de imagem.bmp
results image resolution ou .jpgshould
para um be pen
1024drive USB
x 768; Switch Default
ou CD-ROM.
1 Copy • Two
a .bmp Para
(2) melhores
console
or .jpg resultados,
lights
imagecan filebeto used, a
a USBbut imagem
keywill
diskbedeve ter
or centered
CD-ROM.or1024 x Default Switch
smaller or larger images
768 pixels; imagens menores ou maioresshould podembe ser1024
utilizadas,
x 768;mas OThe
switch Default
(For optimal
• Protective
scaled, results image
Dust
respectively.) Cover resolution
Default Default (Alt)(Alt)
Switch oferece
switch um modo
provides a quickrápido
way to dereset
restabelecer
a controlum
serão centralizadas ou redimensionadas respectivamente. controle a seusetting
valor padrão (outhezerar o ajuste). Éequivalent
o equivalente
smaller or larger
• Rack(s) images
(see next)can be used, but will be centered or VENUE
to its default Profile (or Expansion
“zero” Options
setting). It is to, e
2 Put the system into Config mode. pode
The substituir
Default a tecla
(Alt) switch with,Alt no
provides teclado.
scaled, respectively.)
2 Coloque o sistema no modo Config. and interchangeable the aAltquick
keyway to reset
on the a control
keyboard.
Go to the page. to The
its default
following setting (or “zero”
options can bethe setting).
added It is equivalent
to VENUE to,
Profile systems.
Racks,
3
2 Put Software
the system Options >CDs, iLoks,
into Config System mode. and Cables Exemplos de utilização do Default
3 Vá à página Options > System. and interchangeable
For details on all with,
VENUE the Alt
systems keyandon the keyboard.
options, visit the Avid
4 Ctrl-click theor Shutdown button. Examples of Using Default
3 GoEach toMix Rack
the Options >FOHSystemRack includes:
page. website (www.avid.com).
Para restabelecer um fader para 0 dB:
4 Ctrl-click
5 Copy no
• Systemthebotão Shutdown.
Restore CD your USB key disk to the following lo- Examples
To reset a of Using Default
4 Ctrl-click theimage from
Shutdown button. fader to 0 dB:
cation on the system drive:
• ECx Ethernet Control Software Installer CD 1 Aperte
Mix e
Rack segure o switch
Options Default.
55Copie
Copyathe imagem
imagedo penyour
from driveUSB
ou key
disco para
disk o seguinte
to the local
following Press
lo-no To 1reset and hold the Default switch.
•User Data\D-Show\Images
Standalone a fader to 0 dB:
drive do sistema: UserSoftware Installer CD
Data\D-Show\Images 22Pressione
cation on the system drive:
I/O Options
1 Press Press the oSelect
switchswitch
Selecton
and hold the Default switch.
dothe
canal que deseja
channel resetar.
you want to reset.
• iLok USB Smart
6 Double-click Key (for
the Return storingicon
to D-Show plug-in authorizations)
on the Desktop to re-
User Data\D-Show\Images
6 Clique duas vezes
• Plug-in
start VENUE installer
software. discs Return
no ícone (if any)to D-Show
with no desktopiLok
pre-authorized para
2 Para
Pressrestabelecer
the um único parâmetro de you
EQ: want 16
reinicializar o software VENUE . AI16
To reset aSelect
Analog singleswitch
Mic/Line on theCard
Input
EQ parameter: channel
that provides to analog
reset.
6 Double-click the Return to D-Show icon on the Desktop to re-
start VENUE software.  Segure
 Hold
 theo Default
switch switch
Defaultand
e pressione o codificador
press the encoder ou for
or switch switch
• One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console To reset a single EQ parameter:
daquele parâmetro.
that parameter.
 Hold the Default switch and press the encoder or switch for
ToPara
resetresetar
that parameter. um parâmetro
a parameter using onlyutilizando apenas
the keyboard o teclado e o
and trackball,
• Two (2) IEC power cables trackball ouon-screen
mouse,Output
Alt-click o controle ne tela. 8 analog
XO16Alt-click
Analog the
and Digital control.Card that provides
Tolevel
line resetoutputs,
a parameter
andusing
8 AESonly the keyboard
digital outputs. and trackball,
Alt-click the on-screen control.

digital I/O.
Switch Fine
Fine Switch Páginas e abas do Software
O switch Fine (Ctrl) permite ajustar controles (exceto os faders) na Software Screen Pages and Tabs
The Fine
console (Ctrl)
ou na telaswitch lets you adjust
com resolução controls
máxima. (except for
Por exemplo, sefad-
por Visualizando Páginas
ers) on the console or on-screen with maximum resolution.
padrão um controle ajusta um parâmetro em unidades de 1dB, o
For Fine
example, if by default
Viewing Pages
switch permite ajustes ema unidades
control adjusts
de 0.1 adB.
parameter in Para visualizar uma página, siga um dos seguintes
units of 1 dB, the Fine switch allows adjustment in units of procedimentos:
To view a page, do one of the following:
Para ajustar
0.1 dB. um controle com resolução máxima:
 Press
 a View
Pressione umMode
switchswitch.
View Mode.
 Aperte e segure
To adjust o switch
a control with Fine enquanto move o controle. O display
fine resolution: – or –
associado ao controle apresentará as alterações de valores na – ou –
 Press correspondente
resolução and hold the Fine
. switch while moving a control. The  Click the page name at the top of the screen.
display associated with the adjusted control will show the val-  Clique no nome da página no topo da tela.
Modos Momentary
ues change e Latching
at the corresponding resolution. When additional tabs are available for a page, go to those tabs
Quando
by abas
pressing theadicionais estão View
corresponding disponíveis para uma
Mode switch againpágina,
to vá
O switch Fine suporta o funcionamento momentâneo e o a essas
cycle abas the
through pressionando
tabs on thato page,
switch
or View Mode their
by clicking correspondente
names
Momentary and Latching Modes
travamento. novamente para navegar por elas, ou clique no nome delas na tela.
on-screen.
The Fine switch supports momentary and latching operation.
Momentary No modo momentâneo, o switch Fine permanece
acionado enquanto você o segura. Click page name to display
Momentary In momentary mode, the Fine switch stays in ef-
fect for as long as you hold down that modifier switch.
Latching No modo de travamento, o switch Fine permanece
acionado atéInque
Latching você explicitamente
latching mode, the Finedesligue seu estado
switch stays ativo.
in effect until
you explicitly clear its active state.
Para usar o switch Fine no modo Momentary:
To use the Fine switch in Momentary mode:
1 Aperte e segure o switch Fine.
1 Press and hold the Fine switch.
2 Ajuste um canal, parâmetro ou processador.
2 Adjust a channel, parameter, or processor.
3 Solte o switch Fine.
3 Release the Fine switch.
Para usar o switch Fine no modo Latching:

To use the Fine switch in latching mode:
1 Pressione duas vezes
1 Double-press o switch
the Fine Fine.The
switch. O LED do switch
switch se acende.
LED lights.
Viewing pages
Visualizando páginas
Select or ou
2 2Selecione adjust one or
ajuste ummore
ou channels, parameters,
mais canais, or pro-ou
parâmetros
cessors.
processadores.
3 Press the Fine switch again to exit latching mode.
3 Pressione o switch Fine novamente para sair do modo Latching.
User
User
O switch Userswitch
The User está reservado para
is reserved for uso futuro.
future use.

Overview
Visão Geral de of Software
Páginas Pages
do Pages
Software
Filing
Filing
Overview
Overview ofofSoftware
Software Pages Filing
Filing
The software screen provides the following pages and tabs. Load, save, and transfer shows and presets, and access the con-
Carregue,
Load,
Load, salve etransfer
transfira shows epresets,
presets, e acesse o arquivo
ATheThe
tela software
do software
screen
software screen
provides
Rack oferece
provides
thethe
following
as seguintesfollowing
páginaspages
e pages
andand
abas. tabs.
tabs. solesave,
save,
and
History.and
transfer shows
shows
andand
presets, andand
access
access
thethe
con-
con-
Stage Features Additional
History
sole
sole
Required Components
da console.
History.
History.
Inputs
Inputs
Stage
Inputs Racks are used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage
Inputs The following components must be purchased separately:
Select,I/O
audio name, configure,
for VENUE and systems.
Profile adjust parameters
Up to twofor input
Stage chan-
Racks
Selecione
Select,
Select,
nelsbe
can nome,
name,
andname,
FX
used configure
configure,
configure,
Returns. e and
and
simultaneously,ajuste
adjust parâmetros
adjust
parameters
supporting para
parameters
for
up to 96 os
for
inputcanais
input
total chan-de
chan-
inputs.
entrada eand
retornos de efeitos (FX Returns). recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
nelsnels
and FX FX
Returns.
Returns.
DVI supported.
Audio I/O
purchased
Filing (Load separately:
tab)
Filing (aba Load)
System Components Filing
Filing
•(Load
(Load
USB tab)tab) disk (or other portable USB storage device for
flash
transfer
Veja
See of Show
o Capítulo
Chapter data;
20, 512
andMBFileorManagement.”
“Gerenciamento
20, “Shows larger recommended)
de Arquivos e Shows”.
Included Components •SeeNear-field
See
Chapter
Chapter
20,20,
“Shows
monitor“Shows
andand
FileFile
speakers Management.”
for Management.”
mix position monitoring
Inputs page (analog input shown) Snapshots
Snapshots
Inputs
Inputs
pagepage
(analog
(analog
input
input
shown)
shown)
AllInputs
Página VENUE Profile systems
(apresentando include the
entradas analógicas)) following: Snapshots
Snapshots
See Chapter 7, “Inputs • Dynamic
Store
Armazene orsnapshots,
anderecall condenser
carregue microphone
cenas and e and
access the
(snapshots) XLR
Recall
acesse amic
Safe cable
window.
janela Recall
• VENUE Profile consoleand Input Routing.” Store
Store
and and
recall
recall
snapshots,
snapshots,
andand
access
access
thethe
Recall
Recall
Safe
Safe
window.
window.
See See
Chapter
Chapter
7, “Inputs
7, “Inputs
andand
Input
Input
Routing.”
Routing.” Safe. (for Talkback)
• Veja
Twoo (2)
Capítulo 7, “Entradas
IEC power cables e Roteamento de Entradas”.
Outputs • Footswitches (up to 2)
Outputs
Outputs
Outputs • MIDI cables (for connecting external MIDI devices)
Select, name, configure,
• Trackball and adjust
mount (trackball parameters for outputs.
not included)
Select,
Select,
name,
name,
configure,
configure,
andand
adjust
adjust
parameters
parameters
forfor
outputs.
outputs. • BNC cables (for connecting Word clock between the
Selecione nome, Mouse
• VENUE configure e ajuste parâmetros para as saídas.
Pad VENUE system and external digital devices)
Snapshots page
Snapshots
Snapshots
page
page
Página Snapshots
See Chapter 21, “Snapshots.”
• Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok AI16 Veja
SeeAnalog
See o Mic/Line
ChapterCapítulo
Chapter
21,21, 21, “Snapshots”.
“Snapshots.”
“Snapshots.”
Input Card that provides 16 analog
• Two
Outputs (2) IEC power cables
page mic/line level inputs
Outputs
Outputs
page
• One page
FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console
Página Outputs
See Chapter 8, “Outputs and Output Routing.”
Each
SeeStage
Veja
See Rack
Chapter 8, includes:
oChapter
Capítulo8,8,“Outputs
“Saídas
“Outputs andeand
Roteamento
Output
Output de Saídas”.
Routing.”
Routing.” outputs


tional 8 channels of analog I/O 4:
Chapter and 8 channels
Basic Commandsofand
AES/EBU
Modes 43
digital I/O. Chapter
Chapter
4: Basic
4: Basic
Commands
Commands
andand
Modes 43 43
Modes
Patchbay
Patchbay Options
Options
Patchbay Options
Patchbay
Patchbay Options
Options
Label your
Label your channels
channels and
and assign
assign input
input and
and output
output patching.
patching. Configure system,
Configure system, routing
routing and
and metering
metering options,
options, set
set interac-
interac-
Rotule
Label seus
Label
your canais
your e faça
channels
channelsando assign
roteamento
and assign
inputde
input
andentradas
and
output epatching.
outputsaídas.
patching. Configure
Configure
Configure
tion, assystem,
opções
system,
hardware de sistema,
androuting
routing
general andand roteamento
metering
metering
preferences, eplug-ins,
options,medição,
options,
install setset ajuste as
interac-
interac-
and
tion, hardware and general preferences, install plug-ins, and
preferências
tion,
tion,
hardware de
hardware interação,
andand
general de preferences,
general hardware install
preferences, e gerais,
install instale and
plug-ins,
plug-ins,plug-ins
and e
access the
access the Events window.
window.
acesse a Events
janela Events.
access
access
thethe
Events
Events
window.
window.
Patchbay (Outputs
Patchbay (Outputs tab)
tab)
Patchbay
Patchbay
Patchbay (Aba(Outputs
(Outputs
Outputs) tab)tab)
See Chapter 12, Options page

Options page (System
(System tab
tab for
for VENUE
VENUE Mix
Mix Rack
Rack system
system shown)
shown)
See Chapter
Veja 12, “Patchbay.”
o Capítulo “Patchbay.”
12, “Patchbay”.
SeeSee
Chapter
Chapter
12,12,
“Patchbay.”
“Patchbay.” Options
Options
page
page
(System
(System
tabtab
for for
VENUE
VENUE
MixMix
Rack
Rack
system
system
shown)
shown)
Página Options (Aba System para a VENUE Mix Rack)
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins See
See Chapter
Chapter 6,
6, “Options.”
“Options.”
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins SeeSee
Chapter
Chapter
Veja 6, “Options.”
6, “Options.”
o Capítulo 6, “Options”.
Configure and
Configure and arrange
arrange plug-in
plug-in racks
racks by
by assigning
assigning plug-ins;
plug-ins;
Configure
Configure
patch/route
patch/route andand
arrange
and
and arrange
manage
manage plug-in
plug-in
racks
plug-ins.
plug-ins. racks
by by
assigning
assigning
plug-ins;
plug-ins;
Configure e organize os racks de plug-ins; roteie e gerencie os plug-ins.
patch/route
patch/routeand
and
manage
manageplug-ins.
plug-ins.
Plug-In
Plug-In page
page
Plug-In
Plug-In
Página page
Plug-Inpage
See
See Chapter
Chapter
Veja 18, “Plug-Ins.”
18,
o Capítulo “Plug-Ins.”
18, “Plug-Ins”.
SeeSee
Chapter
Chapter
18,18,
“Plug-Ins.”
“Plug-Ins.”
44 VENUE
44 VENUE Profile
Profile Guide
Guide
44 44VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
Chapter
Capítulo 5: 5: Navigating
Navegação and Selecting
e Seleção de Canais Channels
Chapter 5: Navigating and
Stage Racks are used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage
Selecting Channels
FX Returns
• Video Banking
Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display
Banking Input Channels
can be used simultaneously, and
supporting FX
up to 96 total inputs. Bancos FX Returns 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
recommended;
Designando
Returns Canais de Entrada e FX Returns TheDVI FX Returns switches bank FX Return channels 1–8 or 9–16
supported.
emAudio I/O
Bancos to
Osinput
•FX
faders
switches
Returns
FX 1–8 or 9–16,
Returns respectively.
designam o retorno de efeitos 1–8 ou 9–16
Many • VENUE configurations utilize more physical inputsand para USBos faders de Banking
keyboard and trackball/mouse
entrada 1–8 ou 9–16,(Windows compatible)
respectivamente.
Banking
48 inputs
than input
Input
faders. To
Channels
with remotely
navigate to
and
controllable
channels
micFX
beyond
preamps
the num- When only one FX Return bank is selected, other input faders
individually selectable
VENUEphantom power.
Returns
Muitas
ber
das configurações utilizam mais entradas físicas do
of physical faders, the system provides channel banking
The FXbanked
Digital
remain
Quando
Returns
Snake
apenason
switches
Cable
their
um
bankProfile
(VENUE
current
banco
FX Return
FX input
channels
Systems
Returnschannels. 1–8
Only)
The
é selecionado,
or 9–16
Input
os outros
que faders de entrada.
• 8 analog output Para navegarexpandable
channels; pelos canaisupalém
to 48do número
analog or to input faders 1–8 or 9–16, respectively.
faders
bank de
button entradas
flashescontinuam
to indicatedesignados
which
Rackbank a seus canais
is currentlyde
as-entrada
decontrols.
faders, o sistema
Manydigital
VENUE oferece
configurationscontroles
utilize
outputs per Stage Rack. de agrupamento
more physical de canais
inputs • The connection between FOH and Stage Rack requires
atuais.
signed toonly
these
a Digital channels.
Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
em bancos.
than input faders.navigate
To navigate to channels beyond the num- When one FX Return bank is selected, other input faders
The Bank switches the display of input channels on from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
ber of physical
Synchronization faders,
and the system
Control I/O provides channel banking remain banked on their current input channels. The Input
the console. O bank
To botãoFXInput bank pisca para indicar qual banco está atribuído a
Returns:
Os switches
controls.Bank gerenciam a apresentação dos canais de entrada bank canais.
button flashes to indicate which bank is currently as-
esses
• •Input
Snake
na console: connectors
channel bankstoare
enable primary
accessed usingand
theredundant
Bank A, B, (if
C,
 signed to these
Press the channels.
FX Returns 1–8 or FX Returns 9–16 switch.
• The applicable)
Bancos
and Dde connection
canaisnavigate
switches, located to
de entradas
to a
theVENUE
são of
left FOH Rack.
acessados
the input usando os
faders. on Optional Components
Bank switches the display of input channels Para designar os FX Returns nos bancos:
•switches
the Bankare
console.
FX Returns A, B, C e D, using
accessed localizados
the FX à Returns
esquerda1–8 dosand
faders The
To FX
The Returns
following
bank are banked to are
components
FX Returns: theoptional,
input faders.
andBank
mustswitch
be A,
de entrada. B,CPressione
or D flashes in order to indicate
•9–16 switches, located are
between input faders 1–8 and purchased o switch
separately: FX Returns 1–8 the current
ou FX Returnsbank assign-
9–16.
• Input
Retornos channel
de efeitosbanks accessed
são acessados using
usando theosBank A, B, FX
switches C,
 Press the FX Returns 1–8 or FX Returns 9–16 switch.
ment of other input faders.
System
9–16.
and 1–8
Returns Components
D switches,
e 9–16,located to theentre
localizados left of
osthe input
faders defaders.
entrada • USB flash disk (or other portable USB storage device for
Os FX Returns são designados para os faders de entrada. Os
•1–8
•Input Channels
e 9–16.
FX Returns are and FX Returns
accessed canFX
using the be Returns
put in Bank Safe
1–8 and The FX Returns
transfer of are
Show banked
data; to
512the
MBinput faders.
or larger Bank switch A,
recommended)
switches Bank A, B, C ou D piscam para indicar achannels
designação correta
• Canais
mode,deleaving
9–16
Included entradathem
switches,e located
retornos
Components de efeitos
accessible
between podem
regardless
input ofser
the
faders colocados
currently
1–8 and no ToB,bank
dos •C or Input Channels
D flashes
Near-field
outros faders
while
in order
monitor
de
keeping
to FX the
indicate
speakers
entrada. for
Return
mix current
position bank on the
assign-
monitoring
modo Bankbank.
Safe, deixando-os acessíveis independentemente input faders:
selected
9–16. ment of other input faders.
doVENUE
All banco selecionado atualmente.
Profile systems include the following:  Press any unlit Bank switch (A, B, C, D).
• Input Channels and FX Returns can be put in Bank Safe Para• designar
Dynamiccanais de entradas
or condenser enquantoand
microphone mantém os cable
XLR mic canais FX
• VENUE ProfileBanking
console Return
To bank nos faders
Input de entrada
Channels while keeping FX Return channels on the
Input
Bancos Channel
demode,
Canaisleaving them
de Entrada accessible regardless of the currently (for Talkback)
selected
• Two bank.
(2) IEC power cables Toinput
returnfaders:
input faders to Input Channel banking, do one of the
The Bank A, B, C and D switches affect all input faders. • Footswitches
 Pressione
following: qualquer (upswitch
to 2) Bank (A, B, C, D) apagado.
Os switches Bank mount
• Monitor A, B, C efor
D afetam todos(screen
VGA screen os faders
notdeincluded)
entrada.  Press any unlit Bank switch (A, B, C, D).
 Press the lit FX Returns switch (1–8 or 9–16).
Input Channel
• Trackball mountBanking
(trackball not included)FX Returns Para• BNC
retornar aos(for
cables canais de entrada,
connecting siga between
Word clock um dos the
seguintes
1–8/9–16 To return
– input faders to Input Channel banking, do one of the
procedimentos:
– or
The Bank A, B, C and D switches affect all input faders. following:
• VENUE Profile Guide 
Press the flashing
• 25-pin
Pressione oD-Sub
Press the lit
Bank
cables
switch switch
FX Returns
FX Returns
(A, B, (1–8
aceso
switch
C, D).
(for connecting toouGPI
(1–8 or 9–16).
devices)
9–16)
• Two (2) console lights FX Returns
1–8/9–16 – or
– ou – – Graphic EQ Frequency Bands
Banking
VENUE
WhenPressione Profile
a built-in Graphic
o switch Expansion
EQ
Bank is inserted
(A, on aOptions
 Press the flashing Bank switch (A, B, C, D).
B, C, D) que currently
está targeted
piscando
output or bus, its frequency bands can be selected using the
The following
Banking options can be added to Bands
VENUE Profile systems.
Racks, Software CDs, iLoks, and Cables Graphic EQ Graphic
Designando switches. EQ
Bandas deThis Frequency
Frequencia
replacesdo EQ Gráfico
Inputs 1–16 with either
bank of EQbuilt-in Graphic EQ is inserted on EQ
bands shown
When a (www.avid.com). for each Graphic bank switch
a currently targeted
Each Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes: website
Quando um 800-20
equalizador gráfico embutido é inserido em uma saída ou
(20-630 Hz, kHz).
output or bus, its frequency bands can be selected using the
• System Restore CD bus designado, suas bandas de frequência podem ser selecionadas
Graphic EQ
utilizando switches.Graphic
os switches This replaces Inputs Isso
EQ switches. 1–16coloca
with either
nos faders
• ECx Ethernet Control Software Installer CD Mix
bank
SeeRack
of
Chapter
EQ
Options
17, “EQ.”
bands shown for each Graphic EQ bank switch
de entrada cada grupo de bandas de EQ apresentadas nos switches
Graphic
(20-630EQ Hz,(20-630
800-20Hz, 800-20 kHz).
kHz).
•Bank
iLokA–D GEQ
USB Smart Key (for storing plug-in authorizations) I/O Options
20–630 Hz
• Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized
800–20kHziLok See Chapter
Veja 17, “EQ.”
o Capítulo 17, “EQ.
Input•fader
Twobanking
(2) IECand
power cables switches
assignment mic/line level inputs
Bancos de faders de entrada e switches de atribuição GEQ
• Bank
One FOH
A–D Link cable for connection to a VENUE console
20–630 Hz
To bank Input Channels to the input faders: AO16 Analog Output Card that provides 16 analog line level
ParaEach
designar Rack
canais de entradas nos bancos dos 800–20kHz
faders de
 PressStage includes:
the appropriate Bank switch (A, B, C, or D). outputs
entradas
Input fader banking and assignment switches
 To bank Input
Pressione Channels
o switch to theapropriado
do banco input faders:
(A, B, C ou D). line level outputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.
 Press the appropriate Bank switch (A, B, C, or D).
Chapter 5: Navigating and Selecting Channels 45

digital I/O.
Capítulo 5: Navegação e Seleção de Canais 45
Modo
Bank
BankBank
Safe Safe
SafeMode Parafor
Mode Switches
forInput
Input Input
Safe
Safe Safe
Switches
Switches
2 Na seção Input Safe Switches, clique para habilitar Act as Bank
2 In
2 In
thethe
Input
Input
Safe
Safe
Switches
Switches
section,
section,
click
click
to to
enable
enable
ActAct
as as
Safes.
Bank Safe Mode for Input Safe Switches 2 In
Bank
Bank the
Safes. Input Safe Switches section, click to enable Act as
Safes.
Bank
O Bank
Bank
modo Safe
BankSafe
Safe
mode
mode
Safe iséMode
auma
isglobal for
a global
Input
opção Input
Input
Safe
Safe
global de Safe
switch
switch
Input Switches
option
option
Safe available
available
disponível na 2 In the
Bank Input Safe Switches section, click to enable Act as
Safes.
in Bank
in
thethe
página Safe
Option >mode
Option
Option is a globalpage.
> Interaction
> Interaction
Interaction. Input
page.Safe switch option available Bank Safes.
Bank
in theSafeOptionmode is a global Input
> Interaction page.Safe switch option available
WhenWhen
in theBank
Bank
OptionSafe Safemode
> mode is
Interaction
Quando o modo Bank Safe está habilitado, enabled,
is enabled,
page. inputinput channels
channels
canais de and and
entradaFXFX Re- Re-
e FX
When
turns
turnscan Bank
can
be be
Bank Safe
Bank mode
SafedSafed is
using enabled,
using theirtheir
Returns podem ser designados seguramente utilizando os switches input
InputInput channels
SafeSafeswitches
switchesandon FX
on
the Re-
the
When
turns Bank Safe mode isusing
enabled, input channels and FX Re-
Input Safe can
console,
console, na
or orbeon-screen.
console Bank
on-screen. ou Safed
na
Bank tela.
Bank Canais
Safed their
Safed Input
com
channels
channels Bank Safe
remain switches
Safed
remain onseon on
mantém
the the the
toptop
turns
nofader
topo
fader das
console,
layercan
layerof be
camadas
orthe
of Bank
on-screen.
the
consoleSafed
de faders
console Bankusing
regardless their
na console,
Safed
regardless of Input
channels
the
of the Safe
current switches
independentemente
remain
current activeonbank,
active on
the the
top
bank,
console,
doletting
banco ativo,or on-screen.
permitindo Bank
a“lock”
você Safed channels
“travar” remain on the top Choices
Choices
Opções for for
para Input
os Input
SafeSafe
switches Switches
Switches
Input Safe in
na the
in the
Options
página Options
> >Interaction
Options >Interaction
Interaction
page
page
faderyou
letting layer
you of the console
temporarily
temporarily “lock” regardless
the the of a
location the
location localização
ofcurrent
of
keykey inputdechan-
active
input canais
bank,
chan-
denelsfader
entrada layer
chave of the console regardless of the current active bank, Choices for Input Safe Switches in the Options > Interaction page
letting
nels
(such you
(such as as a(como
atemporarily
lead leadvocal, vocal
vocal, “lock”
pulpitprincipal,
pulpit themics
mics microfones
location
and and of keyor
similar)
similar) deinput
púlpito
or e
chan- On-screen,
On-screen,
Choices forthe the
Safe
Input Safe
switches
Safe switches
Switches atinat
thethe
thetoptop
of of
each
>each fader
fader
display
display
similares) ou FXto Returns para manter acesso imediato enquanto Na tela, os switches Safe no topo deOptions
cada fader Interaction page
apresenta a letra
FXletting
nels
FX
returns you
(such
returns toas temporarily
amaintain
lead vocal,
maintain “lock”
immediate pulpit
immediate the location
mics
access and
access while ofworking
while key
similar) input
or
working withchan-
with On-screen,
the
Bthe
letter
letter
para B the
B to
indicar to Safe switches
indicate
oindicate
modo Bank
Bank
Bank Safeatmode.
the
Safe
Safe.
top(See
mode.
(Veja
of each
(See fader display
“On-Screen
“On-Screen
“Apresentação naDis-
Dis- do
Tela
trabalha
nels com
(such canais em diferentes camadas. On-screen, the Safe switches atpage
the top of each fader display
FX returns
channels
channels onon aas aamaintain
lead
todifferent
differentvocal,
layer. pulpit
immediate
layer. mics andwhile
access similar) or
working with the
play
play
ofletter
of
Safe B
Safe to
Switchindicate
SwitchStatus”Bank
Status”
onon Safe
page
Status do Switch Safe ” na página 47.) mode.
47.)47.) (See “On-Screen Dis-
FX returns to maintain
channels on a different layer. immediate access while working with the
playletter
of SafeB to indicate
Switch Bankon
Status” Safe
page mode.
47.) (See “On-Screen Dis-
Por
Forexemplo,
channels
For
example, imagine
example, on aimagine
imagine um16
different total
16
total deinput
layer.
total 16input
canais
channels de entrada
channels assigned designados
assigned to tofourfour play of
YouYouSafe
cancan Switch
alsoalso Status”
useuse
thethe
Eventon
Event page
List
List
to to47.)
configure
configure
paraFor4 bancos (A aimagine
D) de uma console imaginária deassigned
4 faders . Você também pode utilizar uma Event the the
ListSafe
Safe
paramode.
mode.
configurar
banks
banks example,
(A (A
through
through D)D) of of 16an
an total
imaginary input
imaginary channels
4-fader
4-fader console. to four
console. You
ForFor can
omore
more
modo also use
information,the
information, Event
Safe. Paraseemais
see List
Chapter to22,
Chapter configure
22,
informações, the o
“Events.”
“Events.”
veja Safe mode. 22
capítulo
For
banks example,
(A padrão
through imagine D) 16an
of total input channels
imaginary assigned to four
4-fader console. Youmore
For can also use the Event
information, see List to configure
Chapter 22, the Safe mode.
“Events.”
Layout de canais
Default
Defaultchannel
channel para
layout
layoutofor
exemplo
for
a 4-fader de
a 4-fader4 faders
example
example “Eventos”.
banks (A through D) of an imaginary 4-fader console. Using
Using ForBank
Bank more information,
Safe
Safe see Chapter 22, “Events.”
Default channel layout for a 4-fader example
BankBank channel
Default Fader Fader 1 1 forFader
layout a Fader 2 2 example
4-fader FaderFader 3 3 Fader Fader 4 4 Using Bank
Utilizando Safe
Bank Safe
Bank
A A
Fader 1 Fader 2 Fader 3 Fader 4 To Using
To
Bank
Bank Bank
SafeSafe Safe
channels:
channels:
Bank ChCh 1 1 1 ChCh
Fader 2 2 2 ChCh
Fader 3 3 3 ChCh
Fader 4 4 4
Fader Para habilitar
To Bank SafeBank Safe a canais:
channels:
A Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4 1 Make
B B A ChCh 5 5 ChCh 6 2 6 ChCh 7 3 7 ChCh8 4 8 To Make
1 sure
Bank sure
you
Safe you
have
have
enabled
channels: enabledBank
Bank
Safe
Safe
mode
modeforfor
thethe
Input
Input
1 Make
1 switches.
Safe
Safe sure you have enabled Bank Safe mode for the Input
switches.
B Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8 1 Certifique-se de que você habilitou o modo Bank Safe para os
1 Make
switches.
C C B ChCh 9 5 9 ChCh 106 10 ChCh 117 11 ChCh1212 8 switches Input Safe.
2 Select
2 Select
Safe one one
or or
switches. more
more
input
inputchannels.
channels.
C Ch 9 Ch 10 Ch 11 Ch 12
D D C ChCh 139 13 ChCh 1410 14 ChCh 1511 15 ChCh1612 16 2 Select one or more input channels.
D 2Selecione
32Press
3 Press
thethe
Select um
Safe
one ouswitch
Safe
or mais
switch
more canais
ininput
in
thethe de entrada.
Inputs
Inputs
area
channels.area
of of
thethe
Selected
Selected
Chan-
Chan-
Ch 13 Ch 14 Ch 15 Ch 16 Press the Safe switch in the Inputs area of the Selected Chan-
nel3nel
section.
section.
O Channel
canal 6D
Channel do
6 onBank
6 on Bank B está
Ch
Bank13 habilitado
B isBthen
is then Ch
Bank 14com
Bank Safed. Bank
Safed. Safe. Selecionar
ChSelecting
15
Selecting Ch
thethe 16
various
variousos Press the Safe switchSafe
in thenaInputs
Pressione
3 3nel section. o switch área area of the
Inputs daSelected Chan-
seção Selected
vários
banks bancos
Channel
banks gives 6
givesresultam
on
thethe Bank
following no
B
following seguinte:
is then
results: Bank
results: Safed. Selecting the various Channel.
nel section.
Channel
banks 6 on
gives the Bank B is then
following Bank Safed. Selecting the various
results:
Channel
LayoutChannel layout
de canais layout
comwith with
o canalBank6Bank Safe Safe
habilitado enabled
enabled
com Bank onSafe
on
channel
channel 6 6
banks gives the following results:
Channel layout with Bank Safe enabled on channel 6
BankBank layout
Channel Fader Fader
with1 Bank
1 Fader SafeFader 2 2 Fader
enabled onFader 3 3 6Fader
channel Fader 4 4
Bank Fader 1 Fader 2 Fader 3 Fader 4
A A
Bank ChFader
Ch
1 1 1 ChCh 6 6 2 ChCh
Fader 3 3 3 ChCh
Fader 4 4 4
Fader
A Ch 1 Ch 6 Ch 3 Ch 4
B B A ChCh 5 5 1 ChCh 6 6 ChCh 7 7 3 ChCh8 8 4 Safe
Safe
switch
switch
B Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8
C C B ChCh 9 9 ChCh 6 6 ChCh 117 11 ChCh1212 Safe switch
5 8 Selected
Selected
Channel,
Channel,
Input
Input
Safe
Safe
switch
switch
C Safe switch
Ch 9 Ch 6 Ch 11 Ch 12 Selected Channel, Input Safe switch
D D C ChCh 139 13 ChCh 6 6 ChCh 1515 11 ChCh1616 12 4 Press
4 Press
a Bank
a Bankswitch
switch
(A,(A,
B, B,
C or
C or
D)D)
to to
navigate
navigate
to to
a different
a different
Selected
Switch Input Channel, Input
Safe na seção Safe
Selectedswitch
Channel
D Ch 13 Ch 6 Ch 15 Ch 16 4 Press
bank.
bank. a Bank
Notice
Noticethat switch
that
thethe (A, B, you
channel
channelC or
you D)Bank
BanktoSafed
navigate
Safed to a different
remains;
remains;corre-
corre-
Perceba
NoteNote que
thatthat oschannels
D channels canais
Ch 13 2,2,2,10
10, 10,
and eand
14
Ch146não
14
nono aparecem
longer Chappear
longer mais
15appear onna
ontheconsole
Ch 16
the
con-con- 4 PressNotice
a Bank switch (A, B, C or though
D)though
to navigate to a on
different
(embora continuem acessíveis na tela). 4 bank.
sponding
sponding
Pressione umthat
channels
channels onthe
switchon channel
other
other
de back (A,you
banks, B, CBank
banks, Safed
not
ou D) not remains;
present
para present
navegar corre-
on
thetheum
para
soleNote
sole that channels
(though
(though they they remain2, 10,
remain and
accessible 14 no
accessible longer
on-screen).
on-screen). appear on the con- bank. Notice
sponding that
channels the
onchannel
other you Bank Safed
not remains; corre-
Note that channels 2, 10, and 14 no longer appear on the con-
console,
console,
banco areare
still
still
diferente. accessible
accessible
Observe que obanks,
on-screen.
on-screen.
canal emthough
que vocêpresent on
habilitou othe
Bank
sole (though they remain accessible on-screen). sponding
console,
Safe channels
are osoncanais
otheron-screen.
still accessible
permanence; banks, though notdepresent
correspondentes outroson the
bancos,
Quando
Whensoleum
When an canal
(though
an
inputinput de channel
they entrada
channel remain or or ou
FX FX
FX Return
accessible
Return
Return éis desabilitado
ison-screen).
removed
removed from
from do
Bank Bank
Bank console,
apesar are still
de não accessible
presentes on-screen.
na console, continuam acessíveis na tela.
Safe,
Safe,o the
Whencanal
Safe, ande
the
input
inputentrada
inputchannel
channel que
channel that normalmente
orwould
that FX Return
would normallydeveria
is removed
normally constar
appear
appear from naquele
in inthatBank
that Toggling
TogglingBank
Bank Safe
SafeOn-Screen
On-Screen
fader
fader
nolocation
When
Safe,
fader
banco
aninput
the
location
selecionado
input
onon channel
channel
the the
automaticamente
currently or FX
that
currently Return
would
selected
selectednormally
bank
reaparece.
is bank
removed appear from
automatically in Bank
automatically that Toggling Bank Safe On-Screen
Alternando Bank Safe na Tela
Safe, the input channel that would
fader location on the currently selected bank automatically
re-appears.
re-appears. normally appear in that To Toggling
To
Bank
Bank
Safe Bank
Safe Safe
channels
channels On-Screen
on-screen:
on-screen:
O recurso
fader Bank
location Safeon está
thedisponível
currentlyapenas selected para
bank canais de entrada
automatically To Bank Safe channels on-screen:
re-appears. 1Para
Makehabilitar canais para Bank Safe naSafe
tela:
(canais
BankBankde
Safesaída
Safe
re-appears. is onlynão
is only podem
available
available ser protegidos
forforInputInput pelo
channels
channelsBank Safe).
(Output
(Output O status
chan-chan- To Make
1 Banksure
sure
you
Safe you
have
have
enabled
channels enabled
Bank
Bank
on-screen: Safe
mode
mode
forfor
thethe
Input
Input
de Bank Safe para todos os canais é armazenado com o arquivo Make
1 switches.
Safe switches.
nelsBank
nels
cannotSafebe
cannot is beonly
Bank Bank available
Safed).
Safed). Bankfor
Bank Input
SafeSafe channels
status
status forforall(Output
all
channels
channels chan-
is is Make sure you
1Certifique-se
1 Safe havevocê
de que enabled BankoSafe
habilitou mode
modo forSafe
Bank the Input
para os
Show. Bank Safe is the
only available switches.
nels
stored
stored cannot
with
with the be Bank
Show Show file.file. for
Safed). Bank Input
Safechannels
status for(Outputall channels chan- is switches Input Safe.
Safe switches.
nels
stored cannot
with be Bank
the Show Safed).
file. Bank Safe status for all channels is
Habilitando e Usando o Modo Bank Safe
stored with the Show file.
Enabling
Enabling
and
and
Using
Using
Bank
Bank
Safe
Safe
Mode
Mode
Enabling
O modo and
Bank Safe Using
pode Bank Safe
ser habilitado Mode
na tela, na página Options >
Enabling
Bank
Bank
Safe
Safe
modeand
mode Using
cancan
be be Bankon-screen
enabled
enabledSafe Mode
on-screenfrom
from
thethe
Options
Options
> >
Interaction.
Bank Safepage.
Interaction
Interaction mode
page.can be enabled on-screen from the Options >
Bank Safe mode
Interaction page.can be enabled on-screen from the Options >
Para Interaction
habilitar o modo
page.
Bank Safe na tela:
To To
enable
enableBank
BankSafe
Safe
mode
modeon-screen:
on-screen:
1 Vá To enable
à página Bank Safe
Options mode on-screen:
>>Interaction.
1 Go
To Go
1 to to
thethe
enable Options
Options
Bank Safe Interaction
> page.
Interaction
mode page.
on-screen:
1 Go to the Options > Interaction page.
1 Go to the Options > Interaction page.
46 46VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
4646GuiaVENUE
VENUE Profile
Profile Guide
22Clique
Click nos
the botões
channelSafe
Safedos canaison-screen,
buttons na tela, localizados
located atno
thetopo
topde • • Dividir uma
Splitting régua
a stereo estéreo
strip(s)
cada régua de canal de entrada.
of each input channel strip.
• Abrir um arquivo Show salvo em um sistema VENUE que utilize
• Opening a Show
uma console file that was saved on a VENUE system
diferente.
Stage Rack Features Additional Required
that used a different Components
console.
Safe buttons Prioridade para Substituição de Designações Bank Safe
Stage Racks are used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage The following
Priority components
for Replacing Bank Safemust be purchased separately:
Assignments
audio I/O for VENUE Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks As seguintes regras são aplicadas para resolverVGA
qualquer conflito
• Video Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel display
can be used simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total inputs. The following
potencial rules
entre as apply to resolve
designações Bankany
Safepotential
de collisions
canais:
between Bank Safed channel assignments:
DVI supported.
Audio I/O • • Input
Canais de entrada
channels sempres
always substituem
replace FX Returns
any FX Returns that habilitados
are
• USB keyboard
para Bank and
Safe notrackball/mouse
fader (Windows
correspondente. compatible)
Bank Safed in that corresponding fader position.
• • Um canal de entrada de número mais baixo sempre
A lower numbered input channel always replaces a
Digital Snakeum
substitui Cable (VENUE
canal Profile
de entrada deSystems
número Only)
mais alto no fader
• 8 analog output channels; expandable up to 48 analog or higher numbered input channel in that corresponding
correspondente.
fader position.
Toggling digital
Alternando Bank outputs
Safe
Bank Safe Tela per
Stage Rack.
naon-screen
Além disso:
In addition:
Safe
LED e Switch LEDand
Synchronization
Indicações and Indication
Control
Safe I/O
MakeStereo
Make O status
StereoThe do canal
Bank Safe status esquerdo
of the leftéchannel
herdadois pelo recém-
inher-
• Snake
The Safe connectors
LED at the top oftoeach
enable primary
input and redundant
strip flashes rapidly to(if criado canal
Optional estéreo.
Components
applicable)
Oindicate
LED Safe no topo
Bank connection
deenabled
Safe is cada réguato a VENUE
de entrada
on that FOH Rack.
channel.pisca rapidamente ited by the newly created stereo channel.
para indicar que o Bank Safe está habilitado naquele canal. O status do canalareestéreo é aplicado a be
cada
When a Bank Safed channel is targeted, the Safe switch in the
Split
The
Split StereoThe
following
Stereo components
Bank Safe status optional,
of and
the stereo must
channel is ap-um dos
canais monoseparately:
purchased recém-criados.
Quando um canal
Input section alsoéflashes
designado para Bank Safe, o switch Safe na
rapidly. plied to each of the newly created mono channels.
System
seção Components
Input também pisca rapidamente. • USB flash disk (or other portable USB storage device for
Bank Safe e Backup Personality
On-Screen Display of Safe Switch Status Bank Safetransfer
andof Show
Backupdata; 512 MB or larger recommended)
Personality
Apresentação na Tela do Status do Switch Safe • Near-field monitor speakers
Safefor mix position
ativo emonitoring
Included Components
The channel Safe switches at the top of each strip of the
O canal habilitado para Bank continua
Channel Bank Safe remains in effect and available if Bank Safe
disponível se
o modo Bank Safe está habilitado.
• Headphones with 1/4-inch jack Isso garante controle de fader
Os switches
on-screen
All VENUE Safe
faders no topo
light
Profile de include
cadathe
to indicate
systems régua dos Safe
current faders
the following: na of
status tela se mode is engaged.
constante This ensures
e ininterrupto, para consistent andde
os raros casos uninterrupted
uma reinicialização
acendem para indicar o status correnteis de Safe for
de cada canal. fader •control
Dynamic or condenser
during the rare microphone
case of a system and XLR mic cable
reset.
each •channel. When lit,
VENUE Profile console that channel enabled the cur- do sistema.
Quando acesos, o canalmodeestá (Automation,
habilitado para o modo Input Safe (for Talkback)
rent Input Safe Switch Solo, or Bank Safe).
• Two Solo
(Automation, (2) IEC
ou power cablesCada switch Safe na tela indica
Bank Safe). Modified Bank Safe functionality is available
Each on-screen Safe switch indicates the current Input Safe • Footswitches
A funcionalidade (up to 2)Bank
Modified Safe estáwhile the Backup
disponível quando o
o modo • atual de Input
Monitor mount Safeforatravés do uso(screen
VGA screen de uma notletra no switch
included) Personality
Backup is active.
Personality Specifically:
estáconnecting
ativo. Especificamente:
Switch mode through use of a letter in the lit switch. For ex- • MIDI cables (for external MIDI devices)
aceso.• Por exemplo,
Trackball mount os switches
(trackball Safe
notthe apresentados
included) na tela • Input Channel layout does not unexpectedly change
ample, on-screen
a letra Safe
B se switches show letter B if Banke Safe • BNC cables (for connecting Word clock between the
apresentam
mode • isVENUE
enabled Mouse
and
o modo Bank Safe está
Padchannel is Bank Safed.
habilitado o canal • when
O layout
the dos canais
backup de entradaisnão
personality é alterado
activated inesperadamente
or de-activated.
está habilitado para ele.the VENUE system and external digital devices)
quando o Backup Personality é ativado ou desativado.
• VENUE Profile Guide • • Input
• Os
Channel Safe LEDs automatically revert to display-
25-pin
LEDsD-SubSafe cables (for connecting
dos canais de entradatoautomaticamente
GPI devices) são
ing Bank Safe status.
• Two (2) console lights revertidos para mostrar o status do Bank Safe.
• Protective Dust Cover • • The
O Safe switch
switch Safein na
the seção
Selected ChannelChannel
Selected Inputs section
Inputs pisca
Bank Safe (two channels enabled) rapidamente
flashes rapidly se um ou
if one or mais
morecanais estão
channels arehabilitados
Bank Safed.em Bank
Bank Safe (dois canais habilitados)
Safe. the flashing Inputs Safe switch clears the Bank
• Pressing
Special Cases Affecting Bank Safe • Pressionar o all
switch Inputs Safe que está piscandoislimpa o status
Casos Especiais que Afetam o Bank Safe Safe status of Bank Safe status
The following optionssafed channels.
can be added to VENUE Profilenot re-
systems.
Racks,
Special rulesSoftware CDs,are
and conditions iLoks, and Cables
automatically applied to Bank de Bank Safe de todos os canais salvos. O status de Bank Safe
Forstored upon
details resuming
on all VENUE
não é restaurado
normal
systems
quando
operation,
and options,
se retoma
norvisit
can the
a operação
it beAvid
normal, nem
Condições
Safe e regras especiais
status são following:
automaticamente aplicadas ao
Each Mixwhenever you do
Rack or FOH the
Rack includes: re-enabled
website for any
pode(www.avid.com). channel while the Backup Personality
ser re-habilitado para nenhum canal enquanto o Backup
status Bank Safe sempres que você:
• Bank
• Systemto GEQ faders
Restore CD is Personality
active. está ativo.
• •Utilizar
Move ochannels
modo GEQor shuffleSoftware
• ECx Ethernet Control channelInstaller
layout CD
Mix
You Rack
cannot Options
change the current Input Safe Switch mode while
• •Mover canais
Change the ou
• Standalone
embaralhar
system o layout dos canais
configuration
Software Installer CD
Você não pode alterar o modo Input Safe atual enquanto o Backup
the
Personality está ativo. is active.
Backup Personality
• Alterar a configuração do sistema
GEQ Fader Mode After Resuming
Modo •GEQPlug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok Após Retomar aNormal Operation
Operação Normal
Selecionar
Selecting
• Twoao GEQ
modo depower
fader
(2) IEC associação
bankcables de faders
overrides Bank GEQ
Safe. substitui
Returning o Bank
to Any changes
mic/line to Bank
level inputsSafe status made while the Backup Per-
Safe. Retornar
any fader bank a qualquer banco
(thus exiting de Fader
GEQ fadersmode)
(saindorestores
assim dothemodo Quaisquer alterações no status de Bank Safe realizadas enquanto o
• One FOH Linkdecable for connection to a VENUE console sonality is active will persist
Backup Personality está ativo whenirãonormal operation
permanecer resumes.
quando a operação
GEQ) restaura
previous inputo layout,
layout entradas
including anterior,
Bank incluindo
Safe status. Thiso applies
status de
Bank Safe. Isto aplica-se aos canais 1–16 na VENUE Profile. You can Analog
AO16
normal continue Output
é retomada. workingCard that providesknowing
uninterrupted 16 analog lineSafe
Bank level
to channels 1–16 on VENUE Profile.
status will not be reset to its state prior to when the Backup
• Two
Movendo (2) IEC power
ou Realocando cables
Canais Você podewas
Personality continuar trabalhando initerruptamente sabendo que o
activated.
Moving or Shuffling Channels XO16 Analog and Digital Output Card that provides 8 analog
status do Bank Safe não será resetado ao estado anterior ao Backup
line level outputs,
Personality and 8 AES digital outputs.
ter sido ativado.
Os
Bankcanais
Safedcom Bank shuffle
channels Safed realocam-se-se
accordingly when quando é realizada
any operation
qualquer operação que resulte em reordenação dos canais de
is performed that results in a re-ordering of input channels, in- AT16 A-Net Output Card that provides 16 channels of A-Net
entrada, incluindo as seguintes:
cluding the following: output compatible with Aviom® Personal Mixers and other
• •Inserir
Inserting or Removing
ou remover a Blank
uma régua Strip
vazia
• •Mover umaa régua
Moving strip IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an addi-
digital I/O. Chapter 5: Navigating and Selecting Channels 47
Multi-Select
Agrupando
Banking
Banking
a Seção Output Section
theOutput
the Output Section Multi-Select (Shift) (Shift)
Banking the Output Section Multi-Select
Multi-Select permite
lets selecionar
you select múltiplos
multiple canaisinpara
channels aplicar
order
toto
uma
apply
Outputs are controlled using the Output faders and Encoders.
Outputs arecontrolled
controlledusing
using theOutput
Output fadersand Multi-Select
Multi-Select
ação lets
a todoslets you
elesyou(Shift)
emselect multiple
uma única channels
etapa. in order apply
Banking
As Outputs
saídas são
are the Output
controladas utilizando
the Section
os faders
faders deand Encoders.
saída e os
Encoders. Multi-Select
an action to select
them in onemultiple
an action to them in one step. step. channels in order to apply
Outputs are controlled using the Output faders and Encoders. anMulti-Select
action to themyou in one step.
decodificadores.
The Mains fader provides constant access to the house output
The Mainsare
fader providesusing
constant access to the house output Para selecionarlets múltiplos select multiple
canais desde channels
a console:in order to apply
Outputs
The Mainsbus,controlled
fader provides the Output
constant faders and Encoders. To
an select
action multiple
to them channels
in one from the console:
step.
(Mains) and does not follow access
Outputtofader
the house output
banking. To select multiple channels from the console:
O fader Mains
(Mains) oferecem
bus, and doesacesso constante
not follow ao bus
Output para
fader PA (Mains) e
banking. To select multiple channels from the console:
(Mains) bus, and does not follow Output fader banking.
The Mains fader provides constant access to the house output 1 1Aperte
Press ande segure
hold theo botão Multi-Select
Multi-Select switch(localizado
(located next próximo
to theaos
não segue a designação dos faders de saída. 1 Press and hold the Multi-Select switch (located next to the
To bank the Output faders tofollow
controlOutput
Auxes,fader
PQs, Matrix mixers, switches
1 To
inputselect
Press Bank).
and
Bank O the
multiple
hold switch
switches). pisca
channels
The parathe
from
Multi-Select
switch indicar
switch
flashes otomodo
console:
(located Multi–Select.
next
indicate to the
Multi–Se-
To(Mains) bus,
bank the and faders
Output does not
to control Auxes, PQs, banking.
Matrix mixers, input Bank switches). The switch flashes to indicate Multi–Se-
To
Para bank
Groups the
(or
designar Output
Var faders
Groups),
os Groups),
faders de to
or control
VCAs: Auxes, PQs, Matrix mixers, input
lect Bank
mode. switches).
hold theThe switch flashes to(located
indicatenextMulti–Se-
Groups (or Var or saída
VCAs:para controlar auxiliaries, PQs, 1 Press
lect mode.
2 Pressione
and Multi-Select switch
Select em cada canal que você deseja incluir na
to the
Groups
mixers (or Var
Matrix, Groups),
grupos or VCAs:
(oufaders
grupos Var) ouin
VCAs: lect mode.
ToPress
 bank the
the Output
corresponding toswitch
control Auxes, PQs, Matrix
the Output Fadersmixers,
sec- input
seleção Bank switches). The switch flashes to indicate Multi–Se-

 Press the corresponding switch in the Output Faders sec- 2 Press Select on each channel you want to include in the se-
 Groups (orcorresponding
Press the Var Groups), orswitch
VCAs: in the Output Faders sec- Press
2 lect Select on each channel you want to include in the se-
mode.
tion.
tion. Press
2 lection. Select on each channel you want to include in the se-
 Pressione
tion. o switch correspondente na seção Output Faders. lection.
 Press the corresponding switch in the Output Faders sec- 3 Solte o botão Multi-Select.
lection.
2 Press Select on each channel you want to include in the se-
3 Release the Multi-Select switch.
tion. Release the Multi-Select switch.
3 lection.
3 Releaseathe
4 Realize Multi-Select
designação switch. ou outra função (por exemplo,
de roteamento
4 Perform a routing assignment or other function (for exam-
4 Perform
pressione
Releaseathe
3Perform a
um routing
switch assignment
Bus
Multi-Select Assign em
switch.or um
otherdosfunction (for exam-
canais incluídos).
4 ple, pressa aé routing
Bus Assignassignment
switch onorone
other function (for exam-
Select
Select A operação
ple, press realizada
Bus Assign em todos
switch on os
one ofofthe
canais the included
selecionados.
included chan-
chan-
Select ple, press
nels). Thea Bus Assign
operation switch
is applied on one
to all of the
selected included
channels. chan-
nels). The operation is applied to all selected channels. exam-
4 Perform a routing assignment or other function (for
nels). The operation is applied
Select Vocêa pode
ple, press utilizar
Bus Assign a teclato
switch on all
Shift
one selected
the channels.
noofteclado ou o switch
included chan- Multi-
nels). You
YouSelect
The canuseuse
(Shift)the
the para
canoperation Shift key on
selecionar
is applied
Shift key on to the keyboard
múltiplos
theall orthe
selectedcanais.
keyboard theMulti-Se-
orchannels.Multi-Se-
You can use switch
lect(Shift)
(Shift) the Shift key onmultiple
the keyboard or the Multi-Se-
lect switch totoselect
select channels.
multiple channels.
lect (Shift) switch to select multiple channels.
You can use the Shift key on the keyboard or the Multi-Se-
To exit
Para sair Multi-Select
do modoswitch mode, do one of the following:
Multi-Select:
To exit lect (Shift)
Multi-Select mode, to do
select
onemultiple channels.
of the following:
Output To exit Multi-Select mode, do one of the following:
Output  Press Cancel.
banks
Output 
 Press Cancel.
banks
banks
To
 Pressione
exitCancel.
Press Cancel. mode, do one of the following:
Multi-Select
Output – –oror– –
banks – Press
–ou or
– – Cancel.
Bank switches for Output channels  Press the Select switch on a channel that is currently not se-
Bank switches for Output channels  Press the Select switch on a channel that is currently not se-
– or –
 Press
Bank switches for Output channels lected.the Select switch on a channel that is currently not se-
Pressione
lected.

lected.
o botão Select em um canal que não está selecionado.
 Press the Select switch on a channel that is currently not se-
Selecionando Canais
Bank switches for Output channels
Selecting andTargeting
Selecting Targeting Channels To select
lected. multiple channels on-screen:
Selecting and and Targeting Channels
Para
To selecionar
select múltiplos
multiple canais
channels na tela:
on-screen:
Channels To select multiple channels on-screen:
Press and hold the Multi-Select switch (or hold Shift on the
CadaEach
régua de canal
VENUE da Venue
channel possui
striphas
has um switch
achannel
channel deswitch.
Select seleção de
The 

 Press and hold the Multi-Select switch (or hold Shift on the
Selecting
Each
canal.
Each
VENUE
O VENUE
Selectswitch and
channel
Select
switch
Targeting
strip
torna-o
channel
targets strip
that objeto
a
das Channels
Select
fortarefas
has a channel
channel
switch. The
deorroteamento
Select
routing switch. Theou
processing as-
 Aperte
keyboard)
To select
Press ande multiple
segure
hold ochannels
the
and click
botão Multi-Select
on-screen:
Multi-Select
the fader switch
strips
switch (ouShift
(or hold
on-screen.
segure
on Shift
the no
Select switch targets that channel for routing or processing as- keyboard)
teclado) e and click
clique nas the fader
réguas nastrips
tela. on-screen.
processamento.
Select Quando um único canal isérouting
selecionado, ele se torna keyboard) and click the fader strips on-screen.
Eachswitch
signment.
VENUE targets
Whenchannel that
a asingle
singlechannel
strip has afor
channel selected
channel or processing
ititbecomes
Select becomes
switch.the as-
the
The  Press and hold the Multi-Select switch (or hold Shift on the
umsignment.
canal-alvo,When
que pode ser channel
ajustado is selected
desde a console ou pelathe
tela. To select an 8-channel bank
signment.
targeted When
channel,
Select switch
targeted
a single
targets
channel, which
which that channel
cancan be
channel is selected
adjusted
be adjusted
it
from
for routing
from em
becomes
thethe console
or processing
console oror
as- Tokeyboard)
Paraselect an and
selecionar umclick
8-channel the
bancobank 8 on-screen:
fader
de stripsnaon-screen.
canais
on-screen: tela:
Canais também
targeted podem
channel, ser selecionados
which can be adjustedclicando
from the suas réguas
console or To select an 8-channel bank on-screen:
on-screen.
signment.
on-screen. Channels
When
Channels a can
single
can also
also bebe
channel selected
is by
selected
selected by clicking
it
clickingbecomestheir
their the  Click the bank name below the on-screen fader strips.
na on-screen.
tela. 
 Click the bank name below the on-screen fader strips.
fader
targeted Channels can also be selected by clicking their
strips on-screen.
channel, which can be adjusted from the console or ToClique
select
Click noan
the
Shift-click
nome
bank do additional
namebanco
8-channel bankabaixo
below das or
on-screen:
the réguas
on-screen de faders
fader strips.na tela.
totoselect
select banks channels.

fader strips on-screen. Shift-click additional banks or channels.
fader strips on-screen. Shift-click para
Shift-click to selecionar
select bancos
additional ou canais
banks or adicionais.
channels.
Para on-screen.
selecionar um Channels canum
canal, siga also beseguintes
dos selected by clicking their
procedimentos:  Click the bank name below the on-screen fader strips.
ToTo select
fader
select a achannel,
strips channel,dodoone
on-screen. oneofofthe
thefollowing:
following: Shift-click to select additional banks or channels.
To select a
 Pressione channel,
o switch do one
Select na of the following:
régua do canal na console
 Press the Select switch on the console channel strip.

 Press the Select switch on the console channel strip.
 To select
Press theaSelect
channel, do one
switch of the
on the following:
console channel strip.
– ou –– –oror– –
– Press
or – the Select switch on the console channel strip.
 Click anywhere in the on-screen channel fader strip, except
 Clique

 Click
– orem – qualquerin
anywhere lugar da régua de
the on-screen canal fader
channel na tela, exceto
strip, nos
except
 Click anywhere in the on-screen channel fader strip, except Click to select
ononthe
botões thefader,
Mute, fader,
Solo mute,
ou Safe
mute, solo
solo orsafe
ouorno safe buttons.
fader.
buttons.
Click to select
banks of 8
Click
bankstoofselect
8
on the fader, mute, solo or safe buttons.
 Click anywhere in the on-screen channel fader strip, except Clicking a bank display to select multiple channels banks of 8
on-screen
Clicando em
Clicking um banco
a bank paratoselecionar
display múltiploschannels
select multiple canais na on-screen
tela
on the fader, mute, solo or safe buttons. Clicking a bank display to select multiple channels on-screen select
Click to
banks of 8
ToToselect
selectallallinput
inputchannels
channelsororallalloutput
outputchannels
channelson-screen:
on-screen:
Para
To selecionar
Clicking
select aall
bank
inputtodos
display os canais
to select
channels de entrada
multiple
or all output ou on-screen
channels todos
channels os canais de
on-screen:
saída na tela:
 Double-click
 any bank name below the on-screen fader
 Double-click any bank name below the on-screen fader
 To select
Double-clickall input
any channels
bank nameor all output
below thechannels on-screen:
on-screen fader
strips
strips ininthe
the Input
Input ororOutputs
Outputs screen.
screen.
Clique
strips in duas
the vezes
Input em
or qualquer
Outputs nome
screen. de banco
Double-click any bank name below the on-screen fader abaixo das réguas
Click to select channel deTofader
removenasatelas Inputfrom
channel ou Output.
a selection:
Click to select channel
Click to select channel Tostrips
removein the Input or
a channel fromOutputs screen.
a selection:
To remove a channel from a selection:
Para

 Control-click (or Fine-click)
remover um canal de uma seleção: a highlighted channel.
Click to select channel  Control-click (or Fine-click) a highlighted channel.
 To remove a channel
Control-click from a selection:
(or Fine-click) a highlighted channel.
See“Screen
See “Screen
Control-click
Control-click (ou Controls”
Controls”
(or onon
Fine-click) umpage 5050for
acanal
page
Fine-click) foradditional
additional
selecionado.
highlighted on-screen
on-screen
channel.
Clicking on-screen to select a channel See “Screen Controls” on page 50 for additional on-screen
Clicking on-screen to select a channel features.
Clicking on-screen to select a channel
Clicando na tela para selecionar um canal. features.
features.
Veja
See “Controles
“Screen de on
Controls” Tela”
pagena 50 página 50 para
for additional recursos
on-screen
Clicking on-screen to select a channel adicionais na tela.
features.

48
48 Guia VENUE
VENUE Profile
Profile Guide

Multi-Assign
Multi-Assign
Multi-Assign Type
TypeporText
Busca Text Search
Search
Digitação de Texto
The Multi-Assign switch in the Output section is used to route Type Text search lets you use the keyboard for fast navigation
The Multi-Assign
O switch switch
Multi-Assign na seçãoinOutput
the Output section
é usado is usedmúltiplos
para rotear to route OType TextType
recurso search
Textlets you use
permite the okeyboard
utilizar for fast
teclado para navigation
rápida navegação
multipleRack
Stage channels to the selected output bus. to a channel, orRequired
Additional to quickly go to a specific snapshot or event.
Components
canais para um
multiple busFeatures
de to
channels saída
theselecionado
selected output bus. para um canalorou
to a channel, to irquickly
rapidamente
go to a a uma cena
specific ou aorum
snapshot evento
event.
Multi-Assign Type Text
You can
específico.
Search
enter
Vocêthe
podefirst characters of a channel name or the ab-
You can enter the firstdigitar os primeiros
characters caracteres
of a channel name ordo the
nome
ab- de
Toendereçar
assign oneum
or more channels to para
an Aux, The following
solute channel components
number mustthat
to target be purchased
channel onseparately:
theesse
ACS. (See no
Para
TheToMulti-Assign ou mais
assign one orswitch
more canais
in the Output
channels umGroup,
to ansection
Aux,
or VCA:
auxiliar,
is used
Group, grupo
or to route ou
VCA: um
Type canal
solute
Text ou o número
channel
search number
lets youabsoluto
use thedo
to target canal
that
keyboard para
for marcar
channel the ACS.canal
onnavigation
fast (See
VCA:1 Presschannels
multiple one of the
to following switches
the selected outputin the Output Fader as-
bus. •also
toACS
also
“Selecting
(Veja
Video também
Display
“Selecting
a channel,
and
or toand
Targeting
“Selecionando
(15-inch orto
Targeting
quickly go
Channels”
Canais”
greater
Channels”
a specific
onpágina
na
flat-panelpage
VGA
on page
snapshot
48.)
48).
display
48.)
or event.
1 Press
can one simultaneously,
be used of the following supporting
switches inup thetoOutput
96 totalFader as-
inputs.
signment section: You canrecommended; 1024x768
enter the first minimum
characters resolution).
of a channel name orVGA and
the ab-
signment section:
1 Pressione um dos seguintes switches na seção Output Fader: Para buscar
ToDVI
search e selecionar
for and selectum canal pelo
a channel by nome:
name:
To Audio
assign one or more channels to an Aux, Group, or VCA: solute supported.
channel
To search fornumber to target
and select that by
a channel channel
name:on the ACS. (See
• AuxI/O 1–8
• Aux 1–8
• 1 Press also Go
1•11Vá àsto
USB the Inputs,
“Selecting and
keyboard Outputs,
Targeting
and or
ouPatchbay
Channels”
trackball/mouse page.48.)
on page
(Windows
Aux 1–8
•• 48
Aux
one
Aux
9–16
of thewith
inputs
9–16 following
remotelyswitches in the Output
controllable Fader and
mic preamps as- Go páginas
to Inputs,
the Inputs, Outputs
Outputs, or Patchbay.
Patchbay page. compatible)
• signment
Aux 9–16section:
• individually
Groups selectable phantom power. 2 Type the first few letters, channel number, or full name of
• •Groups• Groups
Aux 1–8
Type Snake
2search
To2Digital
Digite the
for
as andfirst few letters,
Cable
select
primeiras (VENUE
a channel
letras, channel
Profile
by name:
número number,
canal or
Systems
de
the channel. For example, type “s” to go to the first channel
full
Only)
ou nome name of
completo
• VCAs
• VCAs •• 8VCAs
analog output channels; expandable up to 48 analog or dothecanal.
channel.
•beginning
1 Go The Por
connection
to the
For example,
exemplo,
Inputs,
with the between
Outputs,
digite
letter s or
type
“s”
FOH
“s” toir go
para
Rack
Patchbay
(such
para
and
to othe
page.
as Snare).
first channel
Stage Rack requirescom
primeiro canal
• Aux 9–16outputs per Stage Rack.
digital nome iniciado
beginning with porthe
essa letra,
letter (comoasSnare).
s (such Snare).
2 Press the Multi-Assign switch near the Output encoders. The a Digital Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
2 Press the
2 Pressione Multi-Assign
oMulti-Assign
switch switch near the
Multi-Assign Output encoders. The
•flashing
Groups switchpróximo
and thedos codificadores
banner display atOutput.
the 2 Type
3 Press
3 from
thethe
Press Avid
first
Tabfewkeyletters,
to cycle channel
through number, or full
and select anynameotherof
flashing
O piscar Multi-Assign
do switch
Synchronization e o and
bannerswitch
Control and theno
apresentado
I/O banner displayesquerdo
canto inferior at the
the Pressione
3channels
channel. aortecla
the Tab
For
assembled
key Tab
example,
beginning
to cycle
with parabythrough
your preferred
thatnavegar
type “s” to go
letter
and vendor.
select
etoselecionar
(such the
anyoutros
other canais
first channel
as Snare Top, Snare
•lower
VCAs left of the screen indicate Multi-Assign mode is enabled. channels com beginning with that letter (suchTop,as Snare Top, Snare ou
lower
da tela left ofque
indicam the oscreen
modoindicate Multi-Assign
Multi-Assign mode is enabled.
está ativado. iniciados essa letra (como Snare Snare Bottom
• Snake connectors to enable primary and redundant (if beginning
Bottom, or with the
Strings). letter s (such as Snare).
2 Press thetheMulti-Assign switchonnear the Output encoders.
want to The Bottom,
Strings). or Strings).
3 Press
3 Press
Select switches
the Selectconnection
applicable)
the channels
switches ontothe channels
a VENUE
you
youRack.
FOH
assign
want to assign Optional Components
Pressione
3flashing os switches
Group, Select
to the Multi-Assign
Aux, switch
or VCA. dos
andcanais que você
the banner deseja
display atdirecionar
the 3 Press the Tab key to cycle through and select any other
para toAux,
theGroup
Aux, Group, VCA.or VCA. To search for and selectuma a list item by name(ou (ornúmero):
number):
lower left of theou screen indicate Multi-Assign mode is enabled. Para
The
channels buscar
following
To search e selecionar
beginning
for components
and with that
select a listlista
are
letter
itempor(such
nome
optional,
by nameasand(ormust
Snare Top,beSnare
number):
4 Select any other output to confirm the previous assignment 1 Go or
purchased
Bottom, to the Snapshots, Events or Filing page. Or, click to open
separately:
Strings).
4 Select any other output to confirm the previous assignment Goàs topáginas
the Snapshots, Events or Filing page. Ou,Or, click
43Selecione
Press thequalquer
and proceed Select outra saída
toswitches
assigning para
onchannels
the confirmar
channels
to theyouo endereçamento
newwant to assign
selection. To e 11any
Vá Snapshots, Events ou Filing. cliqueto openabir
para
System
and proceed Components
proceda comthe o
to assigning channels to the new selection. To
direcionamento deexit
canais para a nova seleção. any• Presets
USB flash
Presets
window
disk (or
window
(built-in
(built-in
Dynamics
other portable
Dynamics USBor storage
or
EQ presets,
EQ presets, deviceInput
for
Input
to confirm
the Aux, Group, or VCA.and
assignment Multi-Assign mode, pressPara
the qualquer
To Channel
search
janela
forpresets,
and
Presets
or Scope
select a
(Dynamics
list Sets).
item by
ou
name
EQ embutido,
(or number):
Input Channel
confirm the assignment and exit Multi-Assign mode, press the Channeltransfer of Show data;
presets, or Scope Sets). 512 MB or larger recommended)
confirmar
flashing o endereçamento
Multi-Assign switch.e sair do modo Multi-Assign, pressione ou Scope Sets).
flashing
Select
o4switch anyMulti-Assign
other output switch.
to confirm
piscando.the previous assignment •toNear-field firstmonitor speakers for page.
mix positionclickmonitoring
IncludedMulti-AssignComponents
que está 1 Go2 Type thetheSnapshots, Events
few letters orornumber
Filing
2 Type the first few letters or number of the desired item.
of theOr,desired toitem.
open
and 5 proceed
To cancel tothe
assigning channels
assignment to theofnew
do either the selection.
following:To 2 Digite
any Presets as primeiras
window (built-in
• Headphones letras
with 1/4-inch ou números
Dynamics do item desejado.
jack or EQ presets, Input
5 To cancel the assignment do either of the following:
All•VENUE
Para
5confirm cancelar
the Profile
o
assignment systems
and include
direcionamento,
exit the following:
siga
Multi-Assign um
mode,dospress
seguintes
the 3 Press the Tab key to cycle through and select any other items
Press the Cancel switch (in the Mute Groups/Function 3 Press
Channel• begin the Tabor
presets,
Dynamic key
or to cycle
Scope
condenser through
Sets). microphone and select
and XLR any other items
mic cable
• Press the Cancel switch (in the Mute Groups/Function
procedimentos: that
Pressione with the
a tecla same letters.
flashing Multi-Assign
• VENUE Profile switch.
console
section), or press the ESC key on your keyboard. 3that begin
(for with
Talkback) the Tabsame para navegar e selecionar outros canais
letters.
section), or press the ESC key on your keyboard. Type thecom
2 iniciados first afew letters
mesma or number of the desired item.
letra.
• or – o(2)
Two
To –cancel theIEC power cables
assignment do either of the following:
•5Pressione
– or – switch Cancel (na seção Mute Groups/Function), ou •
ChannelFootswitches
Numbers (up to
and 2) Names
• Monitor mount for VGA screen (screen not dialog
included) 3 Press
Channelthe Tab key to cycle
Numbers and through
Names and select any other items
a tecla •ESC
• Press no
Click teclado.
theCancel
Cancelinswitch
the (in the
on-screen Mute Groups/Function
Multi-Assign box. Nomes• MIDI e Números de Canais
cables (for connecting external MIDI devices)
• Click Cancel in the on-screen Multi-Assign dialog box. that begin with the same letters.
•section),
Trackball mount
or press the(trackball
ESC key not included)
on your keyboard. VENUE SC48 channel numbers are “absolute” channel num-
VENUE
• BNC SC48
cableschannel numbers are
(for connecting Word“absolute”
clock betweenchannelthe num-
– ou –• VENUESee Chapter Mouse8, “Outputs
Pad and Output Routing.” Os números
bers. Renaming dos canais
changes dathe VENUE SC48name
displayed são absolutos.
associatedRenomeá-
with
– or –See Chapter 8, “Outputs and Output Routing.” bers. VENUE
los Renaming
altera o nome changes
system the displayed
and external digitalname associated with
devices)
Channel
each Numbers
channel, butassociado
and
the Names
absolute a cada canal,number
channel mas o número remainsabsoluto
•
• Click
• Clique VENUE
Cancel
Cancel Profile Guide
in thedeon-screen
na caixa Multi-Assign
diálogo Multi-Assign nadialog
tela. box. doeach
canalchannel,
• 25-pin permanece.but the
D-Sub cables absolute channel number
(for connecting remains
to GPI devices)
fixed.
• Two (2) console lights fixed.SC48 channel numbers are “absolute” channel num-
VENUE
•See Chapter
Veja
Protective8,Dust
“Outputs
o Capítulo 8, Coverande Output
“Saídas Routing.”
Roteamento de Saídas”. ParaRenaming
bers. buscar e selecionar
changes the um canaldisplayedpor seu
To search for and select a channel by absolute number:
namenúmero absolute:
associated with
eachTo channel,
search forbut andthe absolute
select a channel channel numbernumber:
by absolute remains
VENUE
 Type
fixed.
Profile
Digitea number
um on theExpansion
número no teclado
keyboard para
to selectOptions
selecionar
the corresponding o canal
 Type a number on the keyboard to select the corresponding
correspondente.
channel.
channel.
To For
search for and
details on allselect
VENUE a channel
systems by and
absolute
options,number:visit theselecionar
Avid
A busca
Type TextType
searchText can também
also bepode usedser utilizada
to select para
snapshots and
Each Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes: website
 Type
Type Text search
(www.avid.com).
cenas
aevents.
number (snapshots) can
on the keyboard also
e eventos be used to
(events).
to select select snapshots and
the corresponding
• System Restore CD channel. events.
Type Text search can also be used to select snapshots and
• Standalone Software Installer CD Targeting
Targeting Plug-In Inserts
Options Plug-In Inserts
Direcionando
I/O
events. Inserts de Plug-Ins
• iLok USB Smart Key (for storing plug-in authorizations)
Selecting a single channel targets that channel in the ACS.
• Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok Selecting aum
Selecionar single channel
único canal targets that
direciona essechannel
canal aoin the ACS.
ACS.
AI16 Analog
This lets you Mic/Line Input
enable Inserts Card to
Mode that
useprovides
the Output16 analog
encoders
Thispermite
Isso lets youhabilitar
enable Inserts
o modo Mode to para
Inserts use the Output
utilizar os encoders
codificadores
• Two (2) IEC power cables Targeting
mic/line level
a fim
to adjust
Plug-In
inputs
de ajustar
plug-ins
Inserts
to adjust plug-ins inserted on that channel.
Output os plug-ins
inserted on thatdesse canal.
channel.
Selecting
AO16For a single
Analog channel
moreOutput targets
Card
information, that
thatSee
see channel
provides
Chapter16
18, in“Plug-Ins.”
the line
analog ACS.level
Each Stage Rack includes: This
outputs Para
letsFor
you mais
more
enable informações,
information, see veja
Inserts Mode See o Capítulo
to Chapter
use 18,18,
the Output “Plug-Ins.”
“Plug-Ins.”
encoders
• Two (2) IEC power cables to adjust plug-ins inserted on that channel.
lineFor
level
moreoutputs, and 8 see
information, AESSee
digital outputs.
Chapter 18, “Plug-Ins.”


tional 8 channels ofChapter
analog5:I/O and 8 channels
Navigating of AES/EBU
and Selecting Channels 49
digital I/O.
Ajustando Codificadores na Tela
Adjusting
Adjusting On-Screen
On-Screen Encoders
Encoders
Controles
Screen
Screen na Tela
Controls
Controls
Você
YouYou pode
cancan ajustar
adjust os codificadores
on-screen
adjust rotary
on-screen rotativos
encoders
rotary by na teladirectly
by dragging
encoders dragging arrastando
directly
diretamente
over thethe sobre knob.
on-screen o knob.
Ajustando Os Faders Na Tela over on-screen knob.
Adjusting On-Screen
Adjusting Faders
On-Screen Faders
Para ajustar um codificador rotativo na tela:
Você pode
YouYou
cancanmover
move os faders
on-screen
move naindependently
faders
on-screen faderstela independentemente
or in
independently or ganged ou
in ganged To adjust an on-screen
To adjust rotary
an on-screen encoder:
rotary encoder:
agrupados.
fashion.
fashion. Clique
11Click
1 Clicknoon
on knob
the para
knob
the soque
knob fique
that it isitdestacado.
so that highlighted.
is highlighted.
Para ajustar um único fader na tela: 22Drag up up
to turn thegira
encoder clockwise;
To adjust a single
To adjust fader
a single on-screen,
fader do one
on-screen, of the
do one following:
of the following: 2 Drag
Arrastar parato cima
turn the encoder emdrag
clockwise;
o codificador down
drag
sentido downto turn
toarrastar
horário; turn
the encoder
para
thebaixo counter-clockwise.
gira
encoder o codificador no sentido anti-horário.
counter-clockwise.
 Arraste
Drag
 Dragaofader
fader indathe
a fader inrégua de canal
on-screen
the localizado
channel
on-screen channelstrip na parte
section
strip atde
section atbaixo
the the
dabottom
tela.
bottom of the screen.
of the screen.
– ou––or– –or –
 Select a channel
 Select andand
a channel move its fader
move in the
its fader on-screen
in the selected
on-screen selected
 Selecione um canal e mova o fader nos controles do canal
channel controls.
channel controls.
selecionado na tela.
Dragging overover
Dragging an encoder on-screen
an encoder on-screen
Arrastando sobre um codificador na tela
Adjusting
Adjusting
Ajustando Values
Na TelaOn-Screen
Values
Valores On-Screen
Fader in in
Fader In addition to typing
In addition numeric
to typing numericvalues in text
values boxes,
in text youyou
boxes, cancan
selected channel
selected channel
Além de digitar valores numéricos nas caixas de texto, você pode
adjust parameter
adjust parametervalues andand
values numeric option
numeric settings
option settings
section
section ajustar valores e opções numéricas na tela arrastando diretamente
on-screen by by
on-screen dragging directly
dragging over
directly thethe
over corresponding texttext
corresponding
sobre a correspondente caixa de texto.
box.
box.
Fader in in
Fader
channel stripstrip
channel section
section Para ajustar um valor na tela arrastando:
To adjust a value
To adjust on-screen
a value by dragging:
on-screen by dragging:
1 Clique na caixa de texto para selecionar o valor.
1 Click in the
1 Click texttext
in the boxbox
to select thethe
to select value.
value.
Arrastando um fader na tela
Dragging a fader
Dragging on-screen
a fader on-screen Arrastar para
22Drag
2 up up
Drag to to cima
increase aumenta
thethe
increase o drag
value; valor,
value; arrastar
down
drag para baixo,
to decrease
down to diminui
thethe
decrease
Para o valor.
To movimentar
move nafaders
multiple
To move
tela
multiple
múltiplos faders
on-screen
faders
agrupados:
in ganged
on-screen fashion:
in ganged fashion: value.
value.
1 Select
1 Selecionemultiple
1 Select channels
multiple
múltiplos on-screen
channels
canais na by by
on-screen
tela Shift-clicking.
Shift-clicking.
(Shift-click).
2 Move the fader on one of the selected channels.
2 Move the fader on one of the selected channels.
2 Mova o fader de um desses canais.
TheThe
faders on on
faders thethe
selected channels
selected willwill
channels move in ganged
move fash-
in ganged fash-
Os faders dos canais selecionados se movimentarão de forma
ion.ion.
AnyAnyoffset between
offset thethe
between faders is maintained
faders until
is maintained at least
until at least
agrupada. Qualquer diferença entre os faders é mantida até que,
oneoneof the
of faders
the is minimized
faders is (moved
minimized (movedto –INF)
to or maximized
–INF) or maximized
finalmente, um dos faders seja minimizado (movido para–INF) ou
(set(set
to +12
maximizado to +12dB).dB). para +12 dB).
(ajustado
Adjusting a parameter
Adjusting value
a parameter by dragging
value overover
by dragging its text boxbox
its text
Ajuste de um parâmetro arrastando sobre a caixa de texto.
Selected
Selected
channels
channels
Arrastando
Dragging múltiplos
multiple
Dragging faders
faders
multiple na tela
on-screen
faders on-screen
50 50
VENUE Profile
VENUE Guide
Profile Guide
To copy and paste channel settings on-screen:
Screen Shortcuts ToPara
copy
1 Do
copiar
and
one
e colarchannel
ofpaste
ajustes de canal pela tela:
the following:settings on-screen:
Atalhos
Screen deShortcuts
Tela
The on-screen Fader display provides the following right-click •To
1 1Do copy
one
Siga
and
umofdos
paste
the
Right-click channel settings
following:
on a channel
seguintes fader in on-screen:
the fader display across
procedimentos:
Screen
Stage
shortcuts. RackShortcuts
Features Additional
the lower Required
ofhalf Components
The on-screen Fader display provides the following right-click
Os faders na tela oferecem os seguintes atalhos quando clicados Do one
•1 Right-click the
on aof the screen
following:
channel and
fader inchoose Copy.
the fader display across
shortcuts.
The on-screen • Clique com half
o botãoadireito emfader
um choose
fader
theda parte inferior da tela
com o botão
Stage are Fader
direito
Racks display
do mouse:
used with an provides
FOH Rack,theand
following
provideright-click
all stage the
– or
The lower
• following
–Right-click of the
on screen
channel
components and
must be in Copy.
fader
purchased display across
separately:
shortcuts. e escolha Copy.
audio I/O for VENUE Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks – or
•• –theDisplay
lower
Right-click
Video
half ofthe
within the screen
(15-inchupper
and choose
channel
or greater
Copy.
display
flat-panel and display
VGA choose
can be used simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total inputs. –•ou Copy.
– or
– –
Right-click within the upper channel display and choose
Copy.
• Right-click
DVI supported. within the upper channel display and choose
Audio I/O • Clique com o botão direito na area superior do canal e escolha
Copy.
Copy.
Copying channel settings
Right-clicking a fader and
on-screen from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Synchronization Control I/O Copying channel settings
Right-clicking a connectors
fader on-screen You do
Copying not need
channel to select the channel before copying its set-
settings
Clicando•com
Snake
o botão to enable
direito sobre um fader primary and redundant (if Copiando ajustes de canal
Seeapplicable)
also “Fader
Right-clicking a faderand Encoder
on-screen
connection toShortcuts”
a VENUE on page
FOH 54.
Rack. Optional
tings
You do notComponents
on-screen.
need to select the channel before copying its set-
Veja
See também
also “Fader“Atalhos de Faders
and Encoder e Codificadores”
Shortcuts” on page 54.na página Você
Thetings donão
following precisa
on-screen.
You not selecionar
need to select
components arethe o canal
channel
optional, antes
before
and debecopiar
copying
must seus
its set-
54.
ResetSee
Fader to 0and Encoder Shortcuts” on page 54. 2 Select one or more
ajustes destination
na tela. channels. You can only paste
also “Fader tings
purchased on-screen.
separately:
toSelect
2 selected
onechannels.
or more destination channels. You can only paste
Reset
System
Reset Fader
Fader
Resets the to
fader
to 0
0 Components
position to zero. • USB flash disk (or other portable USB storage device for
2Selecione
to2selected um ou
channels.
Select one
onorthe mais
more canais de channels.
destination destino. Você só
Youor
canpode
anycolar
only pasteem
Reset Fader to 0
Resets the fader position to zero.
3 Right-click
canaistransfer
lower
selecionados.
fader strip on-screen, on
of Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
to selected
non-control channels.
Restabelece a posição do fader para zero. 3 Right-clickarea of the
on the destination
lower channel,
fader strip and choose
on-screen, Paste
or on any
Included
Reset Components
Resets Selected
the fader position
Inputto Strips
zero. • Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
to Selected
non-control Strip(s).
area
Right-click of
on The
the
the status fader
lower displays
destination shows
channel,
strip a message
and
on-screen,choose
or oncon-
Paste
any
3 Clique com o botão direito em um fader da parte inferior
3 da tela
Reset
Reset Selected
Selected Input Input
Strips Strips • Headphones
firming with 1/4-inch jack
All VENUE
Resets Profile systems
every parameter on theinclude the
selected following:
channel(s) to default toou em the
Selected
non-controlPaste
Strip(s).
alguma areaoperation.
The
área status
of sem
the displays
controle
destination showsdo
definido
channel, a and
message
canal decon-
choosedestino
Paste e
Reset
settings.
• every
VENUE
Selected Input
Profile console
Strips to•Selected
firming Dynamic
escolha Paste
the Pastetoor condenser
Selected
operation.
Strip(s). The statusmicrophone
Strip(s). O display
displays and
de XLR
shows mic
status cable
mostra
a message uma
con-
Resets parameter on the selected channel(s) to default
Restabelece todos os parâmetros do canal selecionado para os (for Talkback)
mensagem
Parameters
firming the confirmando
and
PasteChannel a operação.
operation. Types
valores
• padrão.
settings.
Resets every
Two parameter
(2) IEC power on the selected channel(s) to default
cables
• Footswitches
Parameters and (up to 2) Types
Channel
settings.
Copy and Paste
• Monitor mountChannel
for VGA screen (screen not included) Input channels
Parametros can only
e Tipos be copied or pasted to other Input
de Canais
• MIDI
Parameterscables (for connecting external MIDI devices)
Copy and Paste Channel channels. Output and Channel
channels Types
can only be copied or pasted to
Copy and Paste
• Trackball mountChannel
(trackball not included)
Channel settings can be copied in their entirety from one
Input channels can only be copied or pasted to other Input
• channels
BNC cables (for connecting Word clock between the para
Canais
other
channels. de entrada
Output podem
of channels
the same
only cansercopied
type copiados
(such
only ou colados
ascopied
be Aux, Group,
or apenas
PQ,
topasted to
Os Copy
ajustes
•
channel
Channeland
and
de
VENUE Paste
canal
pasted
settings
podem
Mouse Pad
tobe
can one Channel
ser copiados
or more
copied
em sua
channels
in their
totalidade
from
entirety
de um
the console
from one
Input
outros
channels
VENUE
canais de
can
system and
entrada.
be
external
Canais
or pasted
digital
de saída devices)
podem
other
ser
Input
copiados ou
Matrix).
other When
channels pasting
of the channel
same type settings:
(such as Aux, Group,
channels. Output channels can only be copied or pasted to PQ,
canal para um ouProfile
• VENUE mais canais
Guidepela console ou pela tela. colados paraD-Sub
outroscables
canais(for
do connecting
mesmo tipoto (como Aux, Group, PQ,
or on-screen.
channel
Channelandsettings
pasted to one
can beor more in
copied channels from the
their entirety console
from one • 25-pin GPI devices)
Matrix).
•other When
Settings pasting
common
channels channel
to
of the settings:
the source
same type and destination
(such channel
• Two and
or on-screen.
channel (2) console
pasted lights
to one or more channels from the console
Matrix). Quando colando configurações deascanal:
Aux, Group, PQ,
Você também pode armazenar e carregar ajustes
You can also store and load settings as Input Channel Pre-como Input are always
•Matrix). When
Settings pasted.
pasting
common channel
to the sourcesettings:
and destination channel
or•on-screen.
Protective
Channel Dust Para
Presets. Cover informações, veja o Capítulo “Presets
sets. For also
YouCanais
can information,
andsee “Input Channel Presets” on Pre- • • Copied
are settings
always
Settings with
pasted.
•Configurações
common nothe
comuns
to corresponding
aossource
canais parameter
andfonte in the são
e de destino
destination channel
• de destore
Entrada” load settings
na página as Input
54. Channel
Rack(s) (see
page
sets.
You54.
Forcan
next)
information, see “Input
also store and Channel
load settings as Presets” on
Input Channel Pre-
VENUE
sempre
• Copied Profile
settings withExpansion
coladas.
destination
are alwayschannel
pasted.are correspondingOptions
no ignored. parameter in the
• • Ajutes copiados
destination
Settings channel
in settings
the sem parâmetros
are
destination ignored.
channelcorrespondentes no in
with no correspond-canal de
page
Por padrão, 54.
os For
sets. botões de funcãosee
information, 3 e“Input
4 (F3 Channel
e F4) estão programados
Presets” on The•destino
Copied
following options
serão
with no
can be
ignorados.
corresponding
added to VENUEparameter the
Profile systems.
paraRacks,
By default, Software CDs, iLoks,
Function switches 3 and 4and Cables
(F3 and F4) are pro- ing parameters are left unchanged.
Copypage
e Paste,
54. respectivamente. destination
• Settings in channel are channel
ignored.
grammed
By default,for Copy and
Function Paste, 3respectively.
switches and 4 (F3 and F4) are pro-
• For details
Ajusteson nothe
all
canaldestination
VENUE systems
de destino sem with no visit
andparâmetros
options, correspond-
the Avid
correpondentes
Each Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes: ing
• parameters
Settings
permanecem
website in theare left unchanged.
destination
inalterados.
(www.avid.com). channel with no correspond-
grammed for Copy
By Utilizando
default, FunctionandList,
Events Paste,
Copy
switches respectively.
e and
3 Paste4 podem
(F3 andserF4)atribuídos
are pro- a Copying
•Using
Systemthe Events
RestoreList,
CD Copymais and Paste can be assigned to ingand Pasting
parameters areMono and Stereo Channel
left unchanged.
qualquer
grammed foracionador.
Copy andPara informações, veja o Capítulo
Paste, respectively. Settings
Copiandoand
e Colando Ajustes de Canais Mono e Estéreo
•any
Usingtrigger.
the For more
Events List,information,
Copy see
and Paste Chapter
can beCD 22,
assigned to Copying Pasting Mono and Stereo Channel
22,“Eventos”.
ECx Ethernet Control Software Installer Mix Rack Options
Settings
“Events.”
any trigger. For
Using the Events more information,
List,Installer
Copy and see Chapter 22,
Paste can be assigned to YouCopying
canpode and
copycopiarPasting
a mono Mono and Stereo Channel
• Standalone Software CD Você umchannel and paste
canal mono e colaritssuas
settings to one or para
configurações
Para copiar e colar
“Events.”
any ajustes
trigger. For de canal
more pela console:
information, see Chapter 22, Settings
more stereo channels. Mono settings are its
applied equally toor
• iLok
To copy USB Smart
and paste channelKeysettings
(for storing
from plug-in authorizations)
the console: I/O
um
You ou
canOptions
mais
copy canais
a monoestéreo.
channel and paste settings to one
“Events.” the
Os
more left
You andcopy
ajustes
stereo
can right
mono achannels
são Mono
channels.
mono ofsettings
theigualmente
aplicados
channel stereo
and aredestination.
applied
paste its The
aossettings
canais
equally ste-
esquerdo
to one or e
to
1 1To • Plug-in
Pressione
copy andoSelect
pasteinstaller
switch Select
channeldiscs
do (if any)
canal
settings de with
onde
from thepre-authorized
você iLok
quertocopiar.
console: Analog Mic/Line Input Card
Press the switch on the channel you want copy. AI16
direito
reo
the do destino
destination
left and
more stereo estéreo.
channel
right channels
channels. O
ofcanal
retains
Mono its
the dethat
current
stereo
settings
provides
destino
arebalance
destination.
applied
16
estéreo analog
mantém
and ste-toseus
width
The
equally
To•copy
1 Press
Twoand
theto
(2) paste
Select
IEC power
channel
switch
cables
settings
on the channelfromyouthewant
console:
to copy. mic/line
ajustes
settings. level inputs
balance e width.retains its current balance and width
Press F3
2 2Pressione F3 copy.
para copiar. reo destination
the channel
left and right channels of the stereo destination. The ste-
1 Press the Select switch on the channel you VENUE
• One FOH Link cable for connection to a want toconsole
copy. settings.
reo destination channel retainsprovides
its current balance and level
width
2 Press F3 to copy. YouAO16
Vocêcan Analog
também
also copyOutput
pode Card
copiar
a stereo umthatcanaland
channel estéreo 16
paste analog
e its
colar osline
ajustes
settings to a um
Press the Select switch on one or more destination channels
3 3Pressione
Each Stageo switch
Rack Select
includes: de um ou mais canais de destino (o settings.
outputs
ou mais canais mono. As configurações do canal esquerdo do canal
(the Press
2 channel F3 orto copy. one
You or
can more
also mono
copy achannels.
stereo The left
channel channel
and paste settings
its settings of to
the
canal
3 Press
ou the Selectchannels
os canais switch
em queon toone
você which
quer you want
or more
colar to paste
destination
os ajustes the cop-
channels
copiados).
• Two (2) IEC power cables de
stereo origem
orsource
estéreo
arecopy são
applied aplicadas
to the mono aos canais
channel(s). mono de destino. O
ied
(the3settings).
channel
Press theor channels
Select switch toonwhich
one or you
morewant to paste the
destination cop-
channels one You
XO16 more
can mono
also
Analog and channels.
a stereo
Digital The
Output left
channel channel
Cardand paste
that itsThe
settings
provides
mono
8ofanalog
settings theto
Canal mono
destination de destino
channel mantém
retains seu
its current ajuste
pan de pan.
setting.
Pressione
4 ied F4 paraorcolar.
settings). O display de status mostra uma mensagem stereo
onesource
or morearemono
applied to the
channels. mono
The leftchannel(s).
channel The mono
settings of the
4 Press F4 to paste. The status displays shows a message con-cop-
(the channel channels to which you want to paste the line level outputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.
confirmando a operação.
ied settings). destination channel
stereo source retains to
are applied its the
current
mono pan setting. The mono
channel(s).
firming thetoPaste
4 Press F4 operation.
paste. The status displays shows a message con- AT16 A-Net Output
destination channelCard thatitsprovides
retains current 16 panchannels
setting. of A-Net
firming theF4Paste
4 Press operation.
to paste. The status displays shows a message con- output compatible with Aviom® Personal Mixers and other
firming the Paste operation. Pro16™ Series devices.

digital I/O. Chapter 5: Navigating and Selecting Channels 51
Capítulo
Chapter 5: 5: Navegação
Navigating and eSelecting
Seleção Channels
de Canais 51
51
Settings Excluded from Copy and Paste Insert Blank Strip
TheInsert Blank StripStrip
Settings
Input ChannelsExcluded
The followingfrom Copy
Input and Paste
channel parameters are Insert Blank command lets you insert one or more
Settings
notInput
copied
Ajustes
Excluded
or pasted
NãoChannels
Incluídos The
from
Em(the
Copiar
Copy
current
e Colar
following Input
and
settings Paste
of theparameters
channel destinationare Insert
blank
The(or
Insert Blank
“spacer”)
Blank
Insert
Strip
Blankstrips
Strip Strip anywhere
command among
lets youyour input
insert one chan-
or more
channels
not are retained):
copied or pasted (the current settings of the destination nels. In addition, blankstrips
stripsanywhere
are automatically inserted when
Input Channels The following Input channel parameters are Theblank
Insert(or “spacer”)
Blank Strip command lets youamonginsertyour
one input
or more chan-
Canais
• de Entrada
Patchbay
channels are Os seguintesincluding
assignments,
retained): parâmetros de Outs
Direct canais de entrada O nels.
you comando
use In InsertStereo
theaddition,
Make Blank
blank Strip
command
stripspermite
are to inserir uma
convert
automatically ou mais
twoinserted
mono in- réguas
when
not copied or pasted (the current settings of the destination blank (or “spacer”) strips anywhere among your input chan-
não são copiados ou colados (os ajustes do canal de destino são em
put branco
channels (ou
into espaçadoras)
a single stereoemchannel,
qualquer lugar two
preserving entre
the os canais
• Channel Name
• Patchbay
channels assignments, including Direct Outs
are retained): nels. In addition, blank strips are automatically inserted whenin-
you use the Make Stereo command to convert mono
mantidos): de entrada.
channel layout. Além disso, réguas em branco são automaticamente
Hardware
• Channel
• Patchbay and software including
Name
assignments, insert (plug-ins)
Directassignments
Outs and you put
usechannelsMakeinto
thequando a single
Stereo commandstereo tochannel,
convert preserving
two mono the
in-
inseridas você utiliza o comando Make Stereo para converter
• •Atribuição
in/out
Channel state.
• Hardwarede Patchbay,
Name incluindo Direct Outs put channel
doischannels
canais layout.
into
de a single
entrada monostereo
em channel,
and software insert (plug-ins) assignments and Blank strips are strictly placeholders (no audio or any type or um canal preserving
estéreo, the
preservando o
• •Nome do canal
in/out state.
Hardware and software insert (plug-ins) assignments and
channel
layout
processing layout.
dos
Blank strips
canais.
take are place), andplaceholders
strictly therefore consume(no audio no or
additional
any type or
• Output Channels
Atribuições
in/out
deThe
state.
following
inserts Output
de hardware channel
e software parameters
(plug-ins) e processing overhead or DSP resources.
processing
Blank strips take place), and therefore consume or anyadditional
no
arestatus
not copied
Output or pasted (the current
habilitado/desabilitado.
Channels The following settings
Output of theparameters
channel destina- Réguas emare strictly
branco sãoplaceholders (no audio
unicamente espaços reservados type
(sem oráudio
tionare
channels are retained): ouprocessing
processing
qualquertake overhead
place),
tipo de or
and DSP resources.
therefore
processamento) consume
e, no
portanto, additional
não consome
Output not copiedThe
Channels or pasted
following(theOutput
currentchannel of the destina- Use blank strips to create obvious divisions between groups of
settingsparameters
Canais saída Osareseguintes
dechannels parâmetros de Outscanais de saída processing
processamentooverhead adicional
or DSP ouresources.
recursos DSP.
are•tion
Patchbay
not copied assignments, (theincluding
retained):
or pasted Direct
current settings of the destina- instruments,
Use blank or to
strips optimize
to create the bankdivisions
obvious placement of inputs
between on of
groups
não são copiados ou colados (os ajustes do canal de destino são the console.
• channels
tion Channel
• PatchbayName
are assignments,
retained): including Direct Outs Use instruments,
blank stripsem or to optimize
to branco
create obvious the bank
divisions placement of inputs of onde
mantidos): Utilize réguas para criar divisõesbetween groups
óbvias entre grupos
Hardware
• Patchbay
• Channel and software including
assignments,
Name insert (plug-in)
Directassignments
Outs and the console.
instrumentos
instruments, orou to para
optimizeotimizar o as
the bankposicionamento
placement of em
inputsbancos
on das
Blank strips are saved and loaded part of the Show file.
• •Atribuição
in/out
• Hardware
Channel de Patchbay,
status
Name incluindo
and software Direct
insert Outs assignments and the
(plug-in) entradas
Blank console.
strips da console.
remain available
• ••Nome do canal Blank strips are saved and during
loaded Backup
as part of Personality
the Show file.
GEQ settings
in/out
Hardware status
and software insert (plug-in) assignments and mode.
• •Atribuições
Output
de inserts de hardware e software (plug-ins) e Blank
membership (the assignment of channels to an
Blank
Réguas strips
strips
emare remain
savedsão
branco available
and salvas during
loadedeascarregadasBackup
part of the como Personality
Show file. de um
parte
• GEQ
in/out settings
status
status habilitado/desabilitado. mode.
arquivo Show. Réguas em branco permanecem disponíveis durante
Blank strips remain available during Backup Personality
• •Ajustes
Aux,
GEQ Group,
settings
• Output VCA, Matrix
GEQ membership or assignment
(the PQ). of channels to an Blank o modoStrips
mode. Backupon the Console
Personality.
• •Endereçamento
Aux,
Output Group, de canais
VCA, MatrixparaorAux,
PQ). Group, VCA, Matrix ou Blank Strips onLCD thechannel
Console
To copy membership
PQ). GEQ settings,(the assignment
use the copy/paste ofGEQchannels to an
shortcut or ARéguas
blank strip has no
em Branco na Console name display, and all of its
Aux,
useTo Group,
GEQ VCA,
Presets. Use Matrix
the or
Replace PQ).
with Mix (members) From Blank Strips on the Console
copy GEQ settings, use the copy/paste GEQ shortcut or physical
A blank strip has no LCD channelinactive.
controls and indicators are name display,Blank and
stripallfad-of its
command
Para to
copiar replace
ajustes output
GEQ membership
settings, use for
o an Aux,
atalho Group,
copy/paste ers are
Uma set
régua to the
vazia bottom
não tem (–inf)
nome position
de canal ande always
todos os revert
seus tofad-
To use
copyGEQGEQPresets. Useuse
settings, thetheReplace with Mix
copy/paste GEQ(members) From A blank
shortcut or physical
stripcontrols
has no LCD and indicators
channel name are inactive.
display, Blank ofcontroles
and allstrip its
VCA, Matrix
de command
GEQ or replace
PQ. Replace with Mix this
GEQ ou GEQ Presets. Utilize owith
comando e ers
indicadores são inativos. Os faders das andréguas em revert
branco são
to positionset iftomoved.
use Presets. Use theoutput
Replace membership for an Aux,
Mix (members) Group,
From physicalarecontrols theandbottom (–inf)
indicators position
are inactive. always
Blank strip fad- to
(members)
VCA, Matrix From para
or PQ. substituir endereçamentos de saída ajustados na posição -inf e sempre voltam a ela se movimentados.
command to replace output membership for an Aux, Group, ers this position
are set to the ifbottom
moved.(–inf) position and always revert to
Make para Aux, Group,VCA,
Selected Mono Matrix ou PQ. Stereo/Make
Strips Blank Strips On-Screen
VCA, Matrix or PQ. this position if moved.
Réguas em Branco na Tela
Selected Stereo Strip Mono
MakeMake Selected MonoStereo/Make
Strips Stereo/Make Blank
Selected Mono Strips Selected Stereo Blank stripsStrips
appearOn-Screen
as a simple gray strip with no fader, but-
Make
Strip Selected
MonoSelectedStereoMonoStrip Mono
Strips Stereo/Make Blank
Réguas
tons or Strips
em
meter. AOn-Screen
branco aparecem
blank strip cancomo uma régua em
begray
right-clicked cinza sem fader,
Combines two selected mono channels into a single stereo Blank strips appear as a simple strip withto
noreveal
fader,itsbut-
Selected
channel, Stereo
or splits Strip Mono botões
context ou medidores.
menu. Ela pode ser clicada com o botão direito para
Combines
Combina two aselected
dois canais
selected stereo
mono channel into
channels
mono selecionados
into atwo
em um canal
mono
single stereo
stereo ou Blank tons or
strips
apresentar meter.
appearA as
blank
seu menu. strip gray
a simple can be right-clicked
strip to reveal
with no fader, but- its
channels.
channel,VENUE must
orestéreo
splits be in Config
aselecionado
selected stereo mode
channelto change
into twothe ste- context menu.
divide um canal
Combines two selected em dois
mono channels canais
into mono.
a single Amono
VENUE tons
stereo or meter. A blank strip can be right-clicked to reveal its
reochannels.
status of aVENUE
channel. must para
be inalterar
Config
deve estar or
channel, nosplits
modoa selected
Config stereo omode
channel intototwo
status change
estéreo
mono theum
de ste- context menu.
canal.
reo status
channels. of a channel.
VENUE must be in Config mode to change the ste-
Move Selected Strip
reo status of a channel.
Move Selected Strip
Move
Moves Selected
a selected Strip
strip from its current position to a new loca-
Move
Move
tion. uma Selected
régua Strip
selecionada de sua posição
Moves a selected strip from itsstrip,
When you move a channel currentother para outra.are
channels
position
Quando
to a new loca-
umamovedrégua
(and derenumbered)
canal é movida,lower outros
or highercanais
to são movidos (e
accommodate
tion.a When
Moves selected you move
strip froma channel
itsbaixo
current strip, other to
position channels
ao new are
renumerados) para cima e para para acomodar novoloca-
canal.
themoved
moved(and channel.
renumbered) lower or higher to accommodate
A tion.
VENUE When
deve youestarmove a channel
no modo Config strip, other channels
para mover réguas deare canais.
the moved
moved (and channel.
VENUE mustrenumbered)
be in Configlower modeor tohigher to accommodate
move channel strips.
Para
themover
moved uma régua de canal:
channel.
VENUE must be in Config mode to move channel strips.
To move a fader strip:
Coloquemust
1 VENUE o sistema
be inno modomode
Config Config.to move channel strips.
To move
1 Put a faderinstrip:
the system Config mode. Blank Strip
2 ToSelecione
move ofader
athe canal que você desja mover.
strip:
1 Put system in Config
2 Select the channel you want to move. mode. Blank Strip
Blank strip in position 16, Right-click menu shown
3 13NaPut the
tela, system
clique
2 Select the
On-screen,
com ino Config
botão
channel you
right-click
mode.
direito
want
on the
da régua de destino (para
to move. strip (where you
destination
onde Régua vazia na posição 16, apresentando Blank
o menuStrip
do botão direito
Blank strip in position 16, Right-click menu shown
você quer mover o canal selecionado).
2 Select
want the channel
to move you want
theright-click
selected to move.
channel).
3 On-screen, on the destination strip (where you Blank strip in position 16, Right-click menu shown
want
4 34Escolha to
Move
On-screen,
Choose move
Move the
Selected selected
right-click
Selected Strip
on the
Strip channel).
Here nofrom
menuthe
destination
Here pop-up.
strip (where
pop-up menu.you
want to move the selected channel).
4 Choose Move Selected Strip Here from the pop-up menu.
As cenas cannot
Snapshots (Snapshots) nãorecall
store and podem armazenar
custom e carregar
console channel
4 Choose Move Selected
posicionamentos Strip Here from
customizados the pop-up menu.
da console.
position.
Snapshots cannot store and recall custom console channel
position.cannot store and recall custom console channel
Snapshots
position.


Adicionando Réguas em Branco Split Stereo O comportamento ao dividir uma faixa estéreo em duas
faixas mono é o seguinte:
Réguas em branco
• Se uma régua em branco está localizada imediatamente após
Stage
Adding Rack podem ser inseridas manualmente, mas também
Features Additional
o canal Required
estéreo, whenComponents
o canal direito do apar estéreo
stripocupará essa
serBlank
criadasStrips
Split Stereo The behavior splitting stereo into
podem automaticamente quando você utiliza o comando
two posição
mono e a
strips is régua em branco é automaticamente
as follows: must be purchased separately: removida.
Make Stereo.
Stage Racks are used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage The following components
Blank strips can be inserted manually, and are also created au- Nenhum outro canal é deslocado.
• If a blank strip is located immediately adjacent to the
tomatically when you use the Make Stereo command.
Inserindo
• • Video
Se não há régua
Display em branco
(15-inch localizada
or greater imediatamente
flat-panel VGA displayapós o
can beRéguas em Branco Manualmente
used simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total inputs. (previously)
canal stereo
estéreo, channel,
todos os the à
canais right channel
direita do of the
ponto de ste-
inserção
reo pair
são occupies
deslocados this
uma position
posição and
para the
a blank
direita e strip
o is au-
canal direito do
Manually
Para Inserting Blank Strips
adicionar DVI supported.
Audio I/O manualmente uma régiua vazia: tomatically
par estéreoremoved.
é inserido.No other channels shuffle.
• 48 inputs with
blankremotely controllable mic preamps and •• USB
If nokeyboard and
blank strip is trackball/mouse (Windows
located immediately compatible)
adjacent to the
1To manually
Habilite add aConfig.
o modo strip:
Removendo Réguas
(previously) emchannel,
stereo Branco all channels to the right of
1 Enable Config mode. Digital Snake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
2 Clique the split point shuffle one position to the right and the
• 8com o botão
analog outputdireito em uma
channels; régua deup
expandable canal
to 48de entrada
analog or Réguas em branco podem serFOH
removidas manualmente.
onde você deseja
2 Right-click an inserir
input a régua
channel vazia
strip e
at escolha
the Insert
location Blank
where Strip.
you • The connection between Rack and Stage Rack requires
right channel of the stereo pair is inserted.
Por exemplo,
want seavocê
to insert blankquer uma
strip andrégua
choosevazia na Blank
Insert posição 16,For
Strip. clique a Digital Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
Removendo Manualmente Réguas em Branco
com o botão
example, direito
if you wantno canal 16.
to Control
have a blank from Avid
Removing or assembled
Blank Strips by your preferred vendor.
Synchronization and I/O strip at channel strip 16,
right-click on channel 16. Para remover uma régua em branco:
Você também
• Snake pode selecionar
connectors uma régua
to enable emand
primary branco e escolher
redundant (if Blank strips can be removed manually.
Insert Blank Strip para
applicable) adicionar
connection várias
to a réguas
VENUE em
FOH branco.
Rack.
You can also select a blank strip and choose Insert Blank Strip Optional Components
 Clique com o botão direito na régua em branco que você deseja
to insert multiple blank strips. Manually
remover Removing
e escolha
The following Blank Strips
Remove
components Blank Strip.
are optional, and must be
Todos os canais à direita do ponto de inserção (incluindo o canal
clicado com o to
botão direito) purchased separately:
All channels the right of são movimentadas
the insertion pointuma posiçãothe
(including para ToPara remover
remove todas
a blank as réguas em branco:
strip:
Systemchannel)
aright-clicked
direita. Components
are shuffled one position to the right. • USB flash disk (or other portable USB storage device for
 Right-click the blank
transfer Showstrip
data;you
512wish to larger
remove and choose
Clique com oof
botão direito em MB or
qualquer recommended)
régua em branco e escolha
Este commando estará indisponível se a combinação do
This command will be unavailable if the combined number Remove Blank Strip.
Included Components Remove All Blank Strips.
número de réguas de entrada e das réguas em branco for
of input channel strips plus blank strips equals or exceeds
igual ou Profile
superiorsystems
a 96. Para maisthe
informações. Veja “Limites • Headphones with 1/4-inch jack
All96.
VENUE
For more information, include
see “Limits following:
and Guidelines for ToAs
remove
réguasallem
blank strips:
branco são removidas e todos os canais à direita são
e Guias para Réguas Em branco”, na página 53. • Dynamic or condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
•Blank Strips”
VENUE on page
Profile 53.
console deslocados
 Right-click
uma posição para
any blank strip a esquerda.
and choose Remove All Blank
(for Talkback)
Para inserir
• Two várias réguas
(2) IEC em branco:
power cables Strips.
• Footswitches
To insert multiple blank strips: Limites e Guias para (up to 2)em Branco
Réguas
11Coloque
Put theosystem
sistemainto
no modo
Config Config.
mode. Blank• strips
MIDIarecables (for connecting
removed external
and all channels MIDI
to the devices)
right are shuf-
• Trackball mount (trackball not included) O número máximo de réguas de faders é 96. Essas 96 posições
fled one position
• BNC cablesto(for
theconnecting
left. Word clock between the
Create aseleção
multi-selection
Pad of channels. podem ser de qualquer combinação de canais de entrada mono
22Crie •uma
VENUE Mouse
de vários canais. VENUE system and external digital devices)
ou estéreo, assim como de réguas em branco (FX Returns são
• VENUE
3 Right-click onProfile
one ofGuide
the selected channels and choose In- Limits and Guidelines
• 25-pin
consideradosD-Sub cablesfor Blank
(fore
separadamente Strips
connecting
não são to GPInessa
incluídos devices)
conta).
3 Clique com o botão direito em um dos canai selecionados e
• Two
sert Blank (2) console
Strips lights
at Selection.
escolha Insert Blank Strips at Selection. The
• Protective Dust Cover O maximum number
número máximo deofréguas
fader strips is 96. These
em branco 96 positions
que podem ser usadas
A blank strip is inserted in place of each selected channel strip, can be comprised of any combination of mono
varia dependendo da configuração corrente do sistemaor stereoeinput
do número
Uma régua vazia(see
• Rack(s) é inserida
next) no lugar de cada uma das réguas
shifting all channels accordingly and maintaining the VENUE
channels,
de Profile
canaisasestéreo
well blankExpansion
asutilizados
strips. (FX Returns
na configuração. Options
are
Esseconsidered
número pode ser
selecionadas, deslocando todos os canais de acordo e mantendo
multi-selection. calculado
separate andcomo:
are not included in this count.)
a multiseleção. The following options can be added to VENUE Profile systems.
Racks, Software CDs, iLoks, and Cables (96 – número de canais de entrada no System Configuration) +
TheFor details
maximum
número onnumber
all VENUE
de canais systems
of blank
estéreo and
strips options,
that can bevisit
usedthe Avid
varies
Automatically
Inserindo Inserting Blank
Automaticamente Strips
Réguas Emusing Make
Branco Stereo Make
Utilizando
depending on the current system configuration and the num-
Stereo
VENUE automatically
• System Restorecreates
CD blank strips when you use the Por
ber ofexemplo:
stereo channels used in the configuration. This number
Make•Stereo command in order to preserve the current chan- • beUma
can configuração
calculated as: de 96 canais com 96 canais mono não pode
A VENUEECx Ethernet Control
automaticamente criaSoftware
réguas Installer
em branco CDquando você MixterRack Options
réguas em branco.
nel layout. Similarly,
utiliza •o comando Make blank strips may
StereoInstaller be
para preserverautomatically
o layout dosre-
canais.
moved
De modo
Standalone
when you
similar,
Software
use the
réguas em Split
brancoStereo
CD
command to revert
são automaticamente a ste-
removidas
• – the
(96 Uma configuração
number dechannels
of input 48 canais
incom 48 canais
System mono pode ter
Configuration)
• iLok USB Smart Key (for storing plug-in authorizations) I/O48
Options
+ Numberréguas emchannels
of stereo branco.
reo strip
quando to its
você usatwo contributing
o comando Splitmono
Stereochannels.
para reverter uma régua
estéreo • para
Plug-in
doisinstaller discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok
canais mono.
• Uma configuração de 48 canais com 4 canais estéreo pode ter
ForAI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
52 réguas em branco (52 = 96 – 48 + 4)
example:
Two (2) IEC power is
Make•Stereo A blank strip automatically inserted at the lo-
cables mic/line level inputs
cation
Make previously
Stereo Uma occupied
régua em by theéright-side
branco channel inserida
automaticamente of the no • A 96 channel configuration with 96 mono channels can
local previamente
newly-formed ocupado
stereo pair.pelo
Therecanal direito
is no no recém-formado
shuffling of the remain-par have
AO16 0 blank
Analog strips.Card that provides 16 analog line level
Output
estéreo.
ingEach
inputNão háRack
deslocamento
channels
Stage dos
as a result
includes: ofcanais de entrada remanescentes
this operation. •outputs
A 48 channel configuration with 48 mono channels can
resultante dessa operação have 48 blank strips
• A 48 channel configuration with 4 stereo channels can
have 52 blank strips (52 = 96 – 48 + 4)

digital I/O.
Atalhos de Faders e Codificadores Para salvar um canal como Input Channel Preset:
Fader
Fader
and
and
Encoder
Encoder
Shortcuts
Shortcuts To To
store
store
a channel
a channel
as as
an an
Input
Input
Channel
Channel
Preset:
Preset:
OsThe
faders e codificadores nafaders
tela oferecem atalhos com ofol-
botão 11 Configure
Configure
Configure
1 anan
um Input
Input
canal Channel
de Channel
ascomo
entrada as
desired.
desired.
desejado.
The
on-screen
on-screen
channel
channelfaders andand
encoders
encoders
provide
provide
thethe fol-
direito
lowing
para
lowing
restabelecer
right-click
right-click
parâmetros
shortcuts
shortcuts
to reset
individuais
to reset
individual
e parameters
individual
de réguas
parameters and
de
and 2 Click
Click
thethe
canal. 2 2Clique o Channel
Channel
ícone Presets
Presets
Channel icon
icon
Presets (the
(o(the
folder
folder
ícone icon
de icon
located
pasta located
to to
localizado à
channel
channel
strips.
strips. thethe
right
right
of of
the the
Channel
Channel
Routing
Routingindicator
indicator
andand
+/–+/–
buttons).
buttons).
direita do indicador Channel Routing e dos botões +/–).
Fader and Encoder Shortcuts To store a channel as an Input Channel Preset:
1 Configure an Input Channel as desired.
The on-screen channel faders and encoders provide the fol-
lowing right-click shortcuts to reset individual parameters and 2 Click the Channel Presets icon (the folder icon located to
channel strips. the right of the Channel Routing indicator and +/– buttons).
Channel
Channel
Presets
Presets
Right-clicking
Right-clicking
channel
channel
strip
strip
Controles do Botão Direito na Tela
controls
controls
on-screen
on-screen Channel
Channel
Ìcone Presets
Presets
Channel icon
Presetsicon
inpágina
na the
in the
Inputs
Inputs
Inputspage
page
Reset
Reset
Parameter
Parameter 3 Specify
3 Specifya folder
aa
folder
in in
which
which
Reset Parameter 3 Especifique pasta em quetodeseja
to
save
save
thethe
preset,
salvarpreset,
if the
o preset,if se
the
currently
acurrently
atualmente
selected
selecionada não é apropriada, clicando no seletor Folder eselec-
selected
folder
folder
is not
is notappropriate,
appropriate,by by
clicking
clicking
the the
Folder
Folder selec-
selecione
To To
Para reset
reset
an an
on-screen
restabeleceron-screen
fader
um fader fader
or encoder
ou or encoder
to its
codificadortonaits
default
default
tela value,
value,
para do do
seu oneone
valor tortor
andand
selecting
selecting
uma pasta diferente.a different
a different
folder. Channel
folder. Presets
of the
of the
padrão: following:
following:
Right-clicking channel strip controls on-screen
4 Click
4 Click
Channel New.
New.
Presets icon in the Inputs page
 Right-click
 Right-click
thethe
control
control
andand
choose
choose
Reset.
Reset. 4 Clique New.
Reset Parameter
Clique com o botão direito sobre o controle e escolha Reset. 3 Specify a folder in which to save the preset, if the currently
– or
– or
– –
selected folder is not appropriate, by clicking the Folder selec-
–To
ou – an on-screen Folders
Folders
 reset
Alt-click
 Alt-click
thethe fader or encoder to its default value, do one
control.
control. tor and selecting a different folder.
of the following:
 Alt-click no controle. 4 Click New.
 Reset
Reset Channel
Channel
Right-click the control and choose Reset.
Reset Channel
– or –
To To
reset
reset
an an
entire
entire
channel
channel
strip
strip
to to
itsits
default
default
settings:
settings: Folders
 Alt-click
Para the control.
restabelecer completamente uma régua para seus valores
 Right-click
 Right-click
thethe
on-screen
on-screen
channel
channel
fader
fader
andand
choose
choose
Reset
Reset
padrão:
Strip.
Strip.
Reset Channel
 Clique com o botão direito sobre o fader do canal na tela e escolha
Reset Strip.
To reset an entire channel strip to its default settings: Input
Input
Channel
Channel
Presets
Presets
window
window
Janela Input Channel Presets

Input
InputChannel
ChannelPresets
Presets
Right-click the on-screen channel fader and choose Reset
To To
preview
preview
andand
recall
recall
a saved
a saved
Channel
Channel
Preset:
Preset:
Strip.
Input
Inputchannel
channel configuration
configuration (input
(inputname,
name, gain,
gain,
fader
faderlevels,
levels, Para verificar e carregar um Channel Preset salvo:
Input Channel Presets 1 Navigate
1 Navigate
to to
thethe
Inputs
Inputs
page
page
forfor
thethe
desired
desired
channel.
channel.
Chan-
Chan-
sendsendlevels
levels
andandbusbus
routing)
routing) can can be be
stored
storedandand
recalled
recalled as as
In-In-
Navegue
1 nel
nel Presets
Presetsaté
cancanaonly
página
only be be Inputs
loaded
loaded
intopara
into a osingle
a singlecanal desejado.
channel
channel aChannel
at aattime.
time.
putputChannel
Channel Presets.
Presets.
Input
InputChannel
Channel Presets
Presets
cancan
be be
previewed,
previewed,
Presets
Input apenas
Channel podem
Presets ser carregados em um canal por vez.
window
Input
Asrecalled
recalled Channel
and
configurações andtransferred
de Presets
transferred
canais just
dejust
likelike
entradasother
other VENUE
(nomeVENUE
dapreset
preset
entrada,files,
files,
let-let-
ganho, 2 Click
2 Click
thethe
Channel
Channel
Presets
Presets
icon.
icon.
nível
ting doyou
ting fader,
you nível configure
quickly
quickly daconfigure
mandada e roteamento
channels
channels fromfrom de
among bus)
among podem
a library
a library ser
of of Clique no
To2preview andícone Channel
recall a savedPresets.
Channel Preset:
armazenadas
Input channel e carregadas
configuration como(inputInput Channel
name, gain,Presets. Os Input
fader levels, 3 If
3 necessary,
If necessary,
click
click
thethe
Folders
Folders
icon
icon
and
and
select
select
thethe
appropriate
appropriate
favorite
favorite setups.
setups.
Channel
send levelsPresets
and podem ser verificados,
bus routing) can be stored carregados e transferidos
and recalled as In- Navigate
1Channel
Channel toPresets
thefolder
Presets Inputs
folder page
from
from for
the the
the desired
pop-up
pop-upmenu.channel. Chan-
menu.
3 Se necessário, clique no ícone Folders e selecione a pasta de
do mesmo
WhenWhen an modo
an
Input como
Input outros
Channel
Channel is arquivos
stored
is stored de
or or preset
recalled VENUE,
recalled
as a
as permitindo
preset,
a preset, all all
pa-panel Presets can only be loaded into a single channel at a time.
put Channel Presets. Input Channel Presets can be previewed, 4Channel
Do
4 DoanyPresets
any
of of
thetheapropriada
following:
following: np menu pop-up.
arecalled
você rapidamente
rameters
rameters areare configurar
affected
affectedexcept
exceptcanais
the the de uma
following:
following: biblioteca
and transferred just like other VENUE preset files, let- de ajustes
2 Click
• To the
• To Channel
preview
preview anan Presets
existing icon.
existing
Channel
ChannelPreset,
Preset,
click
click
its its
name
name
in in
favoritos. 4 Siga um dos seguintes procedimentos:
ting• you
Patchbay
• Patchbay
quicklyassignments,
assignments,
configure including
including
channels Direct
from Direct
amongOuts
Outs
a library of
favorite
• setups.
Hardware
• Hardware andand
software
software insert
insert(plug-in)
(plug-in)assignments
assignments andand
• thethe
Channel
Para Channel
3 If necessary, click Presets
verificar thePresets
um window.
Folders
Channelwindow.
icon and
Preset select the
existente, appropriate
clique no nome dele
Quando um canal de entrada (Input Channel) é armazenado ou Channel•naTo
• To janela
load theChannel
load
Presets the
folder Presets.
currently
currently
fromselected
selected
the Channel
pop-upChannelPreset,
menu. Preset,
press
press
Enter
Enter
in/out
in/outstate.
state.
recarregado como preset, todos os parâmetros são afetados,
When an Input Channel is stored or recalled as a preset, all pa- • or Para
or
click carregar
click
thethe o Channel
Close
Close
box
box Preset
(X)(X)
in in selecionado,
thethe
Channel
Channel pressione
Presets
Presets
window Enter
window
exceto: 4 Do any of thena following:
rameters are affected
Selecting
Selecting
a channelexcept
a channel theautomatically
preset
presetfollowing:
automatically loads
loads
thethe
saved
saved
outitle
title bar. caixa Close (X) na barra de título da janela Channel
clique
bar.
• ToPresets.
preview an existing Channel Preset, click its name in
• Atribuições de Patchbay, incluindo Direct Outs
• settings
settings
Patchbay into
into
thethe
selected
assignments,selected
channel.
channel.
including Depending
Depending
Direct Outson on
thethe
stored
stored
• • the
To
• Tocancel
Para
cancelwithout
cancelar
Channel
withoutchanging
changing settings,
settings,
click
click
Cancel.
Cancel.
window. de ajuste, clique Cancel.
sem alterações
Presets
• •Atribuições
settings
settingsde
this inserts
this
maymay de hardware
dramatically
dramatically e software
change
change (plug-in)
channel
channel
Hardware and software insert (plug-in) assignments and level e
level status
andand
dein/out
habilitado/desabilitado. •To
To Torename,
load duplicate,
rename, the currently
duplicate, selected
overwrite
overwriteor Channel
or
delete
delete
aouPreset,
Channel press
a Channel Enter
signal
signal
routing.
routing.
state. UseUse
caution
caution
when
when
previewing
previewing
Input
Input
Channel
Channel Para renomear, duplicar, sobrescrever apagarPreset:
Preset:
um Channel
Presets
Presets
with
witha live
a live
source.
source. or click the Close box (X) in the Channel Presets window
Preset:
 Right-click
 Right-click
Selecionar
Selecting um preset
a channel presetdeautomatically
canal automaticamente
loads the saved carrega title bar. thethe
preset
preset
namenamein in
thethe
Channel
Channel Preset
Preset
window
window
os ajustes salvos para o canal selecionado. Dependendo andand
choose
choose
Rename,
Rename, Duplicate,
Duplicate,
Delete, or or
Delete, Overwrite.
Overwrite.
settings into the selected channel. Depending on the stored • Clique
 To cancel
comwithout
o botão changing settings,
direito no nome do click
presetCancel.
na janela Channel
dos ajustes salvos, isso pode alterar dramaticamente o Preset e escolha Rename, Duplicate, Delete ou Overwrite.
settings this may dramatically change channel level and
roteamento e o nível do sinal. Seja cauteloso quando verificar
signal routing. Use caution when previewing Input Channel To rename, duplicate, overwrite or delete a Channel Preset:
presets de canais de entrada com uma fonte ao vivo.
Presets with a live source.  Right-click the preset name in the Channel Preset window
and choose Rename, Duplicate, Delete, or Overwrite.
54 54VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
The following describe how different types of channel data is
handled when storing or loading Input Channel Presets.
Input Channel Presets e Compatibilidade
Channel Names and Presets
A seguinte seção descreve como diferentes tipos de dados de
Stage
canais
New presets
Rack Features
são manuseados quando
automatically armazenando
inherit the currentouInput
carregando Input
Channel
Channel Presets.
Name, or you can give them a custom name in the Presets
window.
audio Thefor
I/O default
VENUEchannel number (such as “Ch 16") is
Presets e Nomes de Canais Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks • Video Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display
used
canfor
bethe preset
used name if the supporting
simultaneously, channel hasup
antoempty (null)
96 total inputs.
name.
Os novos presets automaticamente herdam o nome atual do canal DVI supported.
Audio I/O
de entrada, ou você pode dar-lhes um nome personalizado na janela
LoadingOMono
Presets. and Stereo Channel Presets • USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
• 48 inputs de
número canal
with padrão
remotely (como “Ch 16”)
controllable mic épreamps
utilizadoand
para
o nome do preset se o canal tem o nome vazio.
You canindividually selectablePresets
load mono Channel phantom
into power.
stereo channels, and Digital Snake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
stereo• Channel
Carregando 8 analog Presets
Presetsoutput into monoeexpandable
channels;
de Canais Mono channels.
Estéreo up to 48 analog or
Loading Mono to Stereo Mono settings are applied equally to a Digital Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
Você pode carregar Channel Presets mono em canais estéreo e
theSynchronization
left Presets
and right channels of the stereo destination. The ste- from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Channel estéreo
and em canais
Control mono.
I/O
reo destination channel retains its current balance and width
settings. Mono para Estéreo Os ajustes mono são aplicados
Carregando
igualmente aos canais direito e esquerdo do destino estéreo. O
Loading
canal Stereo to
de destino estéreo When loading
Mono mantém a stereo
seus ajustes preseteinto
balance a
width. The following components are optional, and must be
mono Input Channel, the left channel settings in the stereo purchased separately:
Carregando Stereo para
preset are applied Mono
to the mono Quando carregar
destination um preset
channel. Theestéreo
para
System
monoumdestination
Components
canal mono,channel
os ajustes do canal
retains esquerdo
its current do setting.
pan preset estéreo
são aplicados ao canal de destino mono. O canal de destino mono
Included
mantém
Channel seus Components
ajustes de pan atuais.
Compatibility • Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
All VENUE
When storing Profile
Compatibilidade systems
de canais
and loading include
Input the following:
Channel presets, remember
the following:
(for Talkback)
Quando armazenar e carregar Input Channel Presets, lembre-se do
• Two
 Group bus(2) IEC powerare
assignments cables
not applied if the settings in the
seguinte: • Footswitches (up to 2)
preset• do not match
Monitor thefor
mount current console(screen
VGA screen Bus Configuration
not included)
 Roteamentos
Aux• send demount
Trackball
level orbus
pannão são aplicados
(trackball
settings not
for se as aux
included)
individual configurações
pairs are do • BNC cables (for connecting Word clock between the
preset•não concidirem
not applied if the
VENUE com
stored
Mouse a atuallink/unlink
stereo
Pad configuração de does
state bus da console
not VENUE system and external digital devices)
match the current link/unlink state. For example, assume the
 Os •ajustes
VENUE deProfile
pan ouGuide
nível de mandada para pares auxiliares • 25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
stored preset has Aux 1–2 linked, but the current console con-
não são aplicados
• Two se o status
(2) console lights stero link/unlink não coincidir com
ofiguration
atual has these
status
• Protective
Auxes Por
link/unlink. unlinked.
Dust Cover
When
exemplo, the preset
suponha que iso re-
preset
armazenado possui Aux 1-2 linkados, mas a configuração (they
called Aux 1 and Aux 2 will retain their current settings atual da
console
• Rack(s)
will not (see next) all other Auxes are updated to the
be updated),
não. Quando owhile
preset é carregado, Aux 1 e Aux 2 mantém VENUE Profile Expansion Options
suas configurações
preset settings. atuais (não são atualizados) enquanto os outros
Racks,
auxiliares sãoSoftware
atualizadosCDs, iLoks,
para os and
ajustes dosCables
presets.
Transferring Input Channel Presets
Each MixInput
RackChannel
or FOH Presets
Rack includes: website (www.avid.com).
Transferidno
Input• Channel
System Restore CD available as Built-In Presets in the
Presets are
Input Channel
Transfer ofPresets
tab Ethernet estão
the Filing disponíveis
page. como Built-In
This letsInstaller
you transfer Presets na
CD your
aba
• ECx
Transfer da página
Control
Filing
Software
page. Isso permite a você transferir
Mix Rack Options
Channel Presets
• Standalone to a USB key
Software disk or
Installer other storage device
CD ou outro dispositivofor
seus Channel Presets para um pen drive de
backup and transfer to other systems. I/O Options
backup• eiLok USB Smart
transferi-los paraKey (for sistemas.
outros storing plug-in authorizations)
Input• Channel
Plug-in installer discs
Presets are (if any) on
supported with
allpre-authorized iLok
systems running AI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
Input
VENUE
Channel Presets
software
são
2.5power
suportados
or later,
em todos os sistemas rodando
including the Standalone soft-
• Two (2) IEC cables mic/line level inputs
o sofwtares VENUE 2.5 ou superior, incluindo a versão Standalone.
ware.• One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console
Para mais informações, veja o Capítulo 20, “Gerenciamento
ForStage
Each more Rack
information, see Chapter 20, “Shows and File outputs
de Arquivos eincludes:
Shows”.
Management.”


digital I/O.
Chapter 6: Options
Capítulo
Chapter
Chapter6: Options
6:
6: Options
Options
The Options page provides several tabs. Of these, the System
and Devices tabs are where most system configuration settings System
and options are enabled and customized: • Video Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display
A página
can beOptions oferece várias abas.
used simultaneously, Dessas,
supporting upnas abas
to 96 totalSystem
inputs.e (System Configuration)
•The
The
TheOptions
Options
System page
pageprovides
screen provides
provides several
several
the tabs.
tabs.Of
Of these,
these,the
theSystem
System recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
Devices é que a maioria dos ajustes e primary
opções tools
de by which
configuração do System
and
sistemaand Devices
you Devices tabs
tabs
configure
Audioé habilitada
I/O are
are where
where
mixing, most
most
routing,
e customizada: system
system
and configuration
configuration
processing settings
settings
options. System
The System
DVI supported.
System page lets you allocate DSP resources used for rout-
(System Config)
• •and
Aand
Theoptions
tela options
System
Devicesare
areenabled
enabled
oferece
screen asandandcustomized:
customized:
ferramentas
provides básicas paraand
status, diagnostics, configurar
op-
ing• and
USBprocessing,
(Systemkeyboard
(System
configure
and Mains and(Windows
trackball/mouse
Configuration)
Configuration)
Aux/Group busses,
compatible)
• 48 inputs with remotely controllable mic preamps and reset the system (clear console), and quit (shut down VENUE).
astions
opções
• • The
The
for de
System mixagem,
System
hardwarescreen
screen roteamento
provides
providesthe
components. e primary
the processamento.
primarytools
toolsbybywhich
which A página System page permite alocar os recursos de DSP utilizados
• A tela individually
you Devices
youconfigure
configure
selectable
oferece
mixing,
mixing,
phantom
status,
routing,
routing,
power. e opções para
diagnósticos
and
andprocessing
processingoptions.
options. The
paraTheSystem
Digital System
roteamento
Snake page
page
Cable lets
elets you
youallocate
allocate
processamento,
(VENUE ProfileDSPDSP resources
resources
configurar
Systems used
usedfor
busses
Only) forrout-
rout-e
Mains
Thiscomponents
•chapter
8 analog de
shows hardware.
output
youchannels;
how to manage expandable up toimportant
the most 48 analog or ToAux/Group,
access
ing
ingand and the resetar
SystemoConfig
processing,
processing, sistema
configure
configure (limpar
page: Mains
Mains aand
console)
and Aux/Groupe sair busses,
Aux/Group (desligar
busses, a
• • The
TheDevices
Devicesscreen
screenprovides
providesstatus,
status,diagnostics,
diagnostics,andandop-op- • The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
System digital outputs
and Devices per Stage
settings, andRack.
describes the settings avail- VENUE).
reset
reset the
thesystem
system(clear(clear
tions
tionsfor
forhardware
hardware components.
components.  Go a to the
Digital Options
Snake cable. pageconsole),
console),
and
This click
and
andquit
cablethe
quit(shut
canSystem
(shut down
tab.
be purchased
downVENUE).
VENUE).
directly
Este
ablecapítulo
in othermostra
Options como gerenciar os ajustes mais importantes
screens.
de System e Devicesand e descreve os ajustes disponíveis nas outras Para from
acessarAvida or assembled
página System by your preferred vendor.
Config:
Synchronization
This
Thischapter
chaptershowsshowsyou Control
youhow howI/Ototomanage
managethe themost
mostimportant
important ToToaccess
accessthe the System
System Config
Config page:
page:
telas da página Options. Basics of Editing System Settings
System
System
• Snake and
and Devices
Devicessettings,
connectors settings,
to enable and
and describes
describes
primary andthe
thesettings
settingsavail-
redundant avail-
(if
Overview of Options Go
 Vá Go
Optionalà to tothe
páginatheOptions
Optionspage
Options
Components epage
cliqueand
andnaclick
click
aba the theSystem
System. Systemtab. tab.
able
ableapplicable)
ininother
otherOptions
Options
connection screens.
screens.
to a VENUE FOH Rack. Settings available in the System screen can only be edited
Visão geral de Options
The Options page provides the following tabs: while in Config mode.
Noções
The
Basics
Basics Básicas
following dos
ofofEditing
Editing Ajustes
components System deare
System Configuração
optional,
Settings
Settings de Sistema
and must be
• “System” on page 57
Overview
Overview
A página of
Options oferece ofOptions
Options
as seguintes abas: purchased
Changing
separately:
the system configuration will restart the system
Os ajustes
Settings
Settings disponíveis
available
available ininthena
the tela
System System
System screen podem
screen cancan ser
only
only editados
bebe edited
editedapenas
• System
•• “Busses”
“System”on Components
na page
página 6057
no
•software
modo
USB flash anddisk
Config. may (or other portable
interrupt audio. USB storage device for
The
TheOptions
Optionspage pageprovides
providesthe thefollowing
followingtabs: tabs:
• ••“Pickoffs”
“Busses” na onpágina
page 61 60 while
while inin Config
Config mode.
mode.
• ••“Snapshots”
•“Pickoffs”
• “System”
“System” naon onpage
página
on
page57
page61
57
62 In Config mode,asthe
Alterar Edit button
configurações becomes
do sistema available
irárestart to let
reiniciar you
osystem
software
• Near-field monitor speakers for mix position system e
restartmonitoring
• Included
• •“Snapshots”
• “Busses”
Components
“Busses”on napage
on página
page60 6062 change
Changing
Changing
settings.
pode
the
When
thesystem
interromper
system
a System
o
configuration
configuration
áudio. Config
will
will
setting is
the
changed,
the
the
• All
•• “Misc”
“Misc” na
•VENUE
on página
• “Pickoffs”
page 6363
Profile
“Pickoffs” onon systems
page
page61 include the following:
61
software
softwareand
• Headphones andwith
maymayinterrupt
interruptaudio.
1/4-inch
Apply button becomes available at the right of the screen to
audio.
jack
• ••“Interaction”
“Interaction” na onpágina
page 64 64
letNo
Edit
InInmodo
you confirm
Config
Config Config,
mode,and
mode, o the
botão
apply
theEditEdit fica disponível
changes.
button
button becomes para
becomesavailable pemritir
available que
totolet
letyouvocê
you
• •••“Devices”
•VENUE
•“Devices”
“Snapshots” Profile
“Snapshots”
na on
página
on page 59
console
on page
page
59 6262
altere (for Talkback)
ajustes. Quando um ajuste System Config éisalterado, othe
botão
• •••Chapter
•Capítulo
•Two
“Misc” (2)22,
“Misc” IEC
onon“Eventos”
power
page
page 6363cables change
change
Apply fica
settings.
settings.
disponível
When
When a
à direita
aSystem
System
2) da tela
Config
Config setting
setting is
changed,
changed, the
• •••Plug-Ins 22, “Events”
(veja “Instalando e64Autorizando Plug-Ins” na página Edit
• Footswitches
Apply
Apply button
button becomes (up
becomes toavailable
available atatpara
the permitir
theright
rightofoftheathe
você
screenconfirmar
screen toto
•Monitor
“Interaction” mount
“Interaction” ononfor
pageVGA
page 64 screen (screen not included) a aplicar as mudanças.
•151)Plug-Ins (see “Installing and Authorizing Plug-Ins” on let•
letyouMIDI
youconfirm cables
confirmand (for connecting
andapply
applychanges.
changes. external MIDI devices)
•page
• •Trackball
151) mount
“Devices”
“Devices” ononpage (trackball
page 59
59 not included)
System • Configuration
BNC cables (for tab of connecting
the Options Word page clock between the
•• •VENUE
Chapter
Chapter Mouse
22,
22,
Para visualizar a página Options: Pad
“Events”
“Events” VENUE system and external digital devices)
In ShowEdit
Edit mode, the Edit button is unavailable. This protects
To display
•• •VENUE the Options
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins Profile
(see page,
Guidedo one
(see“Installing
“Installing and ofAuthorizing
and the following:
Authorizing Plug-Ins”
Plug-Ins”on on • 25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
 Pressione switch Options na seção View Mode.
o 151) these settings from being changed during a performance
 Press• Twopage
page
the (2)151)
console
Options switchlightsin the View Mode section. System
SystemConfiguration
Configurationtab tabofofthetheOptions
Optionspagepage
(since changes
Aba System to these
Configuration na settings
página Optionscan interrupt audio).
• –Protective Dust Cover
– ou– –or InInShow
Showmode, mode,the theEditEditbutton
buttonisisunavailable.
unavailable.This Thisprotects
protects
ToTodisplay
displaythe theOptions
Optionspage, page,dodoone oneofofthethefollowing:
following:
Click thethe Options tabna on-screen.
ToNoVENUEmodo
change
these
these aShow,
settings
settingsProfile
System o Config
from
from botão
being Expansion
beingEdit
option:fica indisponível.
changed
changed during
duringOptions Isso protege essas
a aperformance
performance
 Clique
 Pressna
Press aba
the Options
Options
Options tela. ininthe
switch
switch theView
ViewModeModesection.
section. configurações detoserem alteradas durante uma audio).
performance (pois
1 Put
(since
(sincechanges
changes intoConfig
these
these settings
settings cancaninterrupt
interrupt audio).
The the
alterações
system
following nessesoptionsajustes
mode.
canpodem
be added to VENUE
interromper o Profile systems.
áudio).
Racks,
– –oror– –Software CDs, iLoks, and Cables
Para visualizar
To display diferentes
different tabsabas of thena Options
página Options:
page, do one of the For todetails on all VENUE systems
2 Go ToTochangethe Options
change a aSystem
System page
Config and
Config click and
option:
option:
options,tab.
the System visit the Avid
following:
Each
 Click Mix
Click theRack
the or FOH
Options
Options tabtabRack includes:
on-screen.
on-screen. Para
websitealterar uma opção System Config:
(www.avid.com).
 Pressione o switch Options repetidamente para navegar pelas 3 Click 1 1Put
Put Edit.
the
thesystem
systemininConfig Configmode. mode.
 Press• System
the OptionsRestore CD repeatedly to cycle through avail-
switch
abas disponíveis 1 Coloque o sistema no modo Config.
ableToTo
•display
display
tabs. different
differentControl
tabs
tabsofofthe theOptions
Options page,
page,do doone
oneofofthe
the 4 Change athe
System Config, Main Bus, Inputs or Bus Configu-
ECx Ethernet
following:
following:
Software Installer CD Mix
2 2GoGoRack
toto Options
theOptions
Options page
page and
andclick
clickthetheSystem
System tab.
tab.
– ou– –or
• –Standalone Software Installer CD ration
23Vá option.
à página
3Click
Click Edit.Options e clique na aba System.
Edit.
 Press
Pressthe theOptions
Optionsswitch switchrepeatedly
repeatedlytotocycle cyclethrough
throughavail-
avail-
5 Click Apply to confirm and apply your new settings.
Clique
Click
able the
able na
tabs.
tabs. aba desejada
desired tab at the no topalto
of theda Options
página Options (System,
page (System, 34Clique
4Change
Change Edit.a aSystem
SystemConfig, Config,Main MainBus, Bus,Inputs
InputsororBus BusConfigu-
Configu-
Busses, • Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok
Busses,Pickoffs,
Pickoffs,Snapshots,
Snapshots,Misc, Misc,Interaction,
Interaction, Devices,
Devices, Events
Events AI16
ration
rationAnalog
option.
option.Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
ou – –oror – –
orPlug-Ins).
Plug-Ins). Altere as
4mic/line levelopções
inputs System Config, Main Bus, Inputs ou Bus
5 5Click
ClickApply
Configuration. Applytotoconfirm
confirmand andapply
applyyouryournew newsettings.
settings.
• One
Click
Click theFOH
the Link
desired
desired tab cable
tab atatthefortop
the connection
top ofofthe to a VENUE
theOptions
Options page console
page(System,
(System,
A aba
The Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins tab não
is está
not disponível
available in na versão
the Standalone do
Standalone AO16 Analog Output Card that provides 16 analog line level
Busses,
Busses, Pickoffs,
software.Pickoffs,Snapshots,
Snapshots,Misc, Misc,Interaction,
Interaction,Devices,
Devices,Events
Events
Each Stage Rack includes: Clique Apply para confirmar e aplicar os novos ajustes.
5outputs
ororsoftware.
Plug-Ins).
Plug-Ins).
The
ThePlug-Ins
Plug-Instab tabisisnotnotavailable
availableininthe theStandalone
Standalone
software.
software.
Chapter
AT16 A-Net Output Card that provides 16 6: Options
channels 57
of A-Net
Chapter Options 57
Chapter6:6:Options 57
digital I/O.
Capítulo 6: Options 57
System Configuration Settings FX Returns
System
Ajustes Configuration
System Configuration Settings FXFX Returns
Returns
The System Configuration section shows the current alloca- Choose the number of FX Return channels you need (8 or 16).
System
tion
Configuration
of system
The System
Settings
resources. section
Configuration
FX Returns
shows the current alloca- FX Choose the number of FX Return channels you need (8 or 16).
ASystem Configuration
seção System Settings
Configuration mostra a distribuição atual dos Returns
Escolha o número de canais FX Return de que você precisa (8 ou 16).
tion
The of sistema.
system
System
recursos do resources. section shows the current alloca-
Configuration Graphic
Choose the EQs
number of FX Return channels you need (8 or 16).
TheIn Show mode, the System Config area is display-only. In
System Configuration Choose the number of FX Return channels you need (8 or 16).
tion of system resources. section shows the current alloca- Graphic
Graphic EQsEQs
tion Config
InofShow mode,
system mode, you
thecan
resources. edit Config
System the system
areaconfiguration to In
is display-only. allo- Choose the number of Graphic EQs needed for output pro-
No modo Show, a area System Config é de exibição somente. No Graphic EQs
cate
Config
In Show
modo resources
mode,
mode,
Config, vocêthefor
you
podemixing
can
System and
edit theprocessing.
editarConfig system configuration
de sistemaInallo-
area is display-only.
a configuração to para cessing.
ChooseEQs
Graphic
Escolha You
othe can choose
number
número to haveEQs
deofGraphic
Graphic 0, 8,de
EQs 16,que
needed or 24
for Graphic
output
você precisaEQs.
pro-para
InConfig
Show
cate mode,
resources theforSystem
mixing Config
and area is
processing.display-only. Inallo- Choosing
cessing. You anumber
lower
can
mode, you
distribuir recursos paracan edit the
mixagem system configuration to
e processamento. Choose the
processamento number
de choose toleaves
of Graphic
saída. Você have EQs
pode more
0, 8, 16,
needed
escolherDSP for
orfor
entreplug-ins.
24output
Graphic 16EQs.
0, 8,pro- ou 24
Config mode, ayou
To change
cate resources forcan
System edit the
and system
Configuration
mixing configuration to allo-
setting:
processing. Choose
Graphicthe
Choosing
cessing. number
EQs.
You acan
lower
Escolherofnumber
chooseGraphic
números
to have EQs
leaves 0,needed
more
menores orfor
DSP
8, 16,deixa 24 output
for
mais pro-
plug-ins.
DSP
Graphic disponível
EQs.
cateTo
Para resources
alterar um for
ajustemixing
System and processing.
Configuration:
change a System Configuration setting: cessing.
para You can
plug-ins. choose to have 0, 8, 16, or 24 Graphic EQs.
1 Put the system in Config mode. DSPs Available
Choosing a lower number for Plug-Ins
leaves more DSP for plug-ins.
To1 change Choosing
DSPs aAvailable
lower number for leaves
Plug-Ins more DSP for plug-ins.
Put thea system
Systemin Configuration
Config mode. setting:
Coloque
1To change
2 Clicko asistemaEditno
System
the modoon-screen.
Config.setting:
Configuration
button DSPs
TheDisponíveis
amount of para DSP Plug-Ins
available for plug-ins depends on the
1 Put the system in Config mode. DSPs Available for Plug-Ins
2 Click the Edit button on-screen. DSPsnumber
TheAvailable
amountof Mix Engine
of DSP
for cards installed
available
Plug-Ins for plug-ins in your FOHon
depends or Mix
the
1 Put the system
3 Choose a new in Config formode.
2 Clique no botão Edit setting
na tela.
2 Click the Edit button on-screen.
Input Channels or Graphic EQs. A Rack,
Thequantidade
number and
amount ofthe deDSP
Mix
of DSP
current
Enginedisponível
system
cardsfor
available para
settings
installedplug-ins
plug-ins for depende
Input
independs
your doMix
Channels,
FOH onorthe número
FX
3 Choose a new setting for Input Channels or Graphic EQs. de placas Mix Engine instaladas no FOH Rack ou no Mix
2 Click the Apply
4 Click Edit button on-screen.
to confirm the settings. The amount
Returns,
Rack, and
number of
ofand
Mix DSP
theGEQs. available
current
Engine Tocards for
increase
system plug-ins
the amount
settings
installed depends
infor
your of
InputFOHon
DSP theMix e
Rack
oravailable
Channels, FXdos
3 Escolha
3 Choose um anovo
newajuste
settingpara
forInput
InputChannels
Channels ouorGraphic EQs.
Graphic EQs. ajustes
number
for
de
of sistema
plug-ins,
Returns, Mix Engine
andreduce
para
GEQs. thecards
To
Input Channels,
installed
number
increase of in
theInput
FX
your
amount
Returns
FOH
Channels or e GEQs.
Mix
DSPoravailable
ofChannels,Graphic
Para
4 Click Apply to confirm the settings. Rack, and the current system settings for Input FX
3 Choose a new setting for Input Channels or Graphic EQs. aumentar a quantidade de DSP disponível para plug-ins, reduza o
Rack,
forand
EQs,
Returns,orthe
addcurrent
plug-ins,
and GEQs. system
additional
reduceTo the Mix settings
number
increase Engine
the for Input
cards.
of amount
Input Channels,
Channels
of DSP FX
or Graphic
available
4 Click
4 Clique Apply
Apply to confirmar
para confirm the settings.
o ajuste. número de Input Channels ou Graphic EQs, ou adicione placas Mix
4 Click Apply to confirm the settings. Returns,
EQs,
for and
or add
plug-ins, GEQs. To
additional
reduce theincrease
Mix Engine
number theof amount
cards.
Input of DSP available
Channels or Graphic
Engine adicionais.
for plug-ins, reduce the number
EQs, or add additional Mix Engine cards. of Input Channels or Graphic
EQs,Main
or add Bus Settings
additional Mix Engine cards.
Ajustes Main
Main Bus SettingsBus
The Main Bus Settings let you configure the Main mix bus. See
Main
The
BusMain
Settings
Os“Configuring
ajustes
Main Bus Aux,Bus permitem
Group,
Settings let and
you configurar
Variable
configure o Busses”
Group
the bus
Main mixMain. Veja
onSee
bus.
Main Bus Settings
Designating the number of Input Channels “Configurando
page
“Configuring
The Busses
80.Bus Settings
Main Aux,
Aux, Group, Group
let youand e Variable
Variable
configure Group”
theGroup na página
Main Busses”
mix See80.
bus.on
Designating the number of Input Channels The Main Bus
page 80.
“Configuring Settings let you configure the Main mix bus.
Aux, Group, and Variable Group Busses” on See
Mix Engines
Designating the number of Input Channels “Configuring Aux, Group, and Variable Group Busses” on
page 80.
Mix Engines
Designating the number of Input Channels page 80.
The Mix
Designando Engine
o número setting
de Input is determined
Channels by the number of DSP
Mix Engines
MixEngine
The MixCards
Engines detected
Engine settinginis the system rack
determined (Mix
by the Rack, or
number of DSP
MixThe
Engines
FOH Rack).
Engine
Mix Mix
Cards
Engine Rack comes
detected
setting thesupplied
isindetermined with
system by
rack
thetwo
(Mix Mix Engines
Rack,
number orDSP
of
The Mixcan
and
FOH
Engine Engine
Cards setting
Rackisin
be expanded
Rack). Mix
detected determined
with
theone
comes by the
additional
supplied
system with
rack number
Mix
two
(Mix Mixofor
Engine
Rack, DSP
(total of
Engines
OEngine
ajuste Cards
Mix Engine é determinado
detected pelo número de placas DSP
3,
and
FOH maximum).
can beMix
Rack). FOH in
expanded
Rack thecomes
Rack
with
comes system
one rack
with
supplied (Mix
three
additional
with Mix
twoRack,
and or
can
Engine be(total
ex- of Main Busses options in the System page
Engine Cards detectadas no rack do sistema (MixMix
RackEngines
ou FOH Opções Main Busses na página System
FOH Rack).
panded
3,
andOcan Mix
to
maximum). Rack
include
FOH comes
up to
Rack 5supplied
Mix
comes with
Engine
with two
cards.
three Mix
and Engines
can be ex- Main Busses options in the System page
Rack). MixbeRack
expanded with onecom
vem equipado additional
duas Mix Mix Enginee (total
Engines of
pode ser L–RBusses
plusoptions
Monoin the System page
and can be
panded expanded
to
3, maximum). include
FOH with
up one
to 5 additional
Mix Engine Mix Engine
cards. (total of Main
L–R plus Mono
expandido com uma MixRack comes
Engine with three
adicional andtrês,
(total de canmáximo).
be ex- O
L–R
Main plus
Busses Mono
options in the System page
3,panded
FOH maximum).
Channels FOH Rack
to include
Rack vem equipado tocomes
upcom Mixewith
5três podethree
Engine and can be
cards.
ser expandido ex-incluir
para This default setting provides a stereo bus, plus one mono bus.
panded to include L–R plus Mono
até cinco placas
Channels Mix up to 5 Mix Engine cards.
Engine. Este
L–RThisvalor padrão
default
plus Mono oferece
setting um bus
provides estéreo
a stereo mais
bus, um
plus bus
one mono.
mono bus.
Choose the total number of Input Channels you need. This
Channels L–C–R
This default setting provides a stereo bus, plus one mono bus.
number
Channels
Channels represents
Choose the mono of
total number input processing
Input Channelschannels (not
you need. This L–C–R
This default setting provides a stereo bus, plus one mono bus.
L–C–R
hardware
number
Choose the input jacks);
represents mono
total number each stereo
ofinput
Input channel channels
processing
Channels usesneed.
you two mono
(not
This This setting enables L–C–R mode, which lets you mix in
L–C–R
Este
Choose
Escolha othe
channels.
hardware
number total
número number
total
input
represents jacks);
mono of
de canaisInput
each
input Channels
deprocessing
entrada
stereo you
de
channel need.
que
uses você
channels This
precisa.
two(not
mono Thisajuste habilita
“3-across-the-front”
L–C–R setting enables o L–C–R
modo L–C–R,
mode. que permite
mode, which lets youmixer no modo
mix in
Este
numbernúmero representa
represents
channels. mono os canais
input de processamento
processing channels de
(notentrada “3-across-the-front”.
hardware
• Youinput jacks); each
can configure stereo channel
a VENUE Mix Rackuses two to
system mono
use 16, “3-across-the-front”
This setting enables L–C–R mode. mode, which lets you mix in
mono (não input
hardware jaques de entrada
jacks); each no hardware).
stereo channel Cada
uses two canal
mono estéro This Changing
setting enables theL–C–R
Main Bus mode
mode, willlets
which restart
youthe
mixsystem
in soft-
channels.
24, 32,
• You can48, or 64 input
configure processing
a VENUE channels.
Mix Rack system to use 16, “3-across-the-front” mode.
utiliza dois canais mono. Alterar
ware
o modo
and may
Changing
Main Bus
interrupt
themode.
Main
reiniciará o software do sistema e
Bus audio.
mode will restart the system soft-
channels. 24,can32, 48, or 64 input processing channels. “3-across-the-front”
• •You
You canconfigure
configure a aVENUE
VENUE Mix Rack
Profile systemtotouse
system use16,
16,24, pode causar interrupção do áudio.
• You can configure a VENUE Mix Rack system to use 16, ware andthe
Changing may
Maininterrupt audio.
Bus mode will restart the system soft-
• Você 24,pode
32,
• You 32,
48,48, or
configurar
can 64, 64 input
80, orum
configure 96 processing
asistema VENUE channels.
ProfileMix
input processing
VENUE systemRacktopara
channels use utilizar
(higher
16, 24,
ToChanging
change the
theMain
Main Bus
Busconfiguration:
mode will restart the system soft-
24,24,
32,32,48,48or 64 input processing channels. ware and may interrupt audio.
Para alterar as configurações Main Bus:
16,
• Yousettings
32, 48,
can ou
require
64,
configure64
80, orcanais
two
a96VENUE de processamento
Stage
input Racks).
processing
Profile system de
channels entrada.
to use (higher
16, 24,
Toware
change the
mayMain
andsystem Bus configuration:
interrupt audio.
• •VocêYou pode
can
settings
32, configurar
80, oraum
48,configure
64,require two
96 sistema
VENUE
input VENUE
StageProfile
Racks).
processing Profile
system topara
channels useutilizar
16,
(higher
To
1 Put the
24,16,
change the Main
in Config
Bus
mode.
configuration:
Choosing
24,
32,32,
48,48, a 64,
64, lower
80, 80ornumber
ou96 96 of processing
canais
input Input
de Channels
processamento
channels leaves demore 1 1Coloque
DSP
entrada
(higher Put theo system
sistemainnoConfig
modo Config.
mode.
settings require two Stage Racks). To change
2 Go tothe theMain Bus configuration:
Options page and click the System tab.
(configurações
for plug-ins,
Choosing
settings require maiores
while
a lower two exigem
choosing
numberStage dois Channels
aInput
higher
ofRacks). Stage
numberRacks). reduces
leaves theDSP
more 1 Put the system in Config mode.
2VáGo to the Options
à página epage and
naclick the System tab.
amount
Choosing of
for plug-ins, DSP
while
a lower available
choosing
number forInput
of aplug-ins.
higher number
Channels leavesreduces 1 2Put
moretheDSP the
3 Click Edit.Options
system in Config clique
mode. aba System.
Escolher uma número menor deforcanais denumber
entrada deixa mais 2 Go to the Options page and click the System tab.
DSP
Choosing
foramount
plug-ins, lower
of DSP
whilenumber
available
choosing of Input Channels
a plug-ins.
higher leaves more
reduces DSP
the 3 Click Edit.
2 3Go to the
Click
4Clique Options
to
Edit. choosepage andBus
a Main click the System tab.
mode.
disponível
foramount para
On
plug-ins, plug-ins,
VENUE
while Mix enquanto
choosingRack a escolher
systems,
higher um número
choosing
number the
reduces maior
highest
the reduz
3 Click Edit.
of DSP available for plug-ins. 4 Click to choose a Main Bus mode.
aamount
quantidade number
On
of DSPde DSP
VENUE disponível
of input
Mix processing
available Rack parachannels
systems,
for plug-ins. plug-ins.
choosing(64)the letshighest
you use 3 Click Edit.Apply; the system restarts.
5 Click
4 Clique
4 Click topara escolher
choose a Mainum modo Main Bus.
Bus mode.
On “extra”
number
VENUE input
of Mix processing
input processing
Rack channels
systems, channels for(64)
choosing advanced
thelets youmon-
highest use 5 Click Apply; the system restarts.
EmVENUE
sistemas VENUE Mix Rack,choosing
escolherthe o maior 4 Click to choose a Main Bus mode.
número de
On itor
number mixing
“extra” Mix
ofinput
input Rack
workflows.systems,
processing
processing For more information,
channels
channels for
(64) highest
advanced
lets yousee
mon-
use
canais of deinput
processamento de entrada (64) permite utilizar Click Apply;
5 Clique
5 Apply;the systemreinicia.
o sistema restarts.
number
“Multiple
itor mixing
“extra” processing
Input and Output
workflows. channels
For (64)
Assignments
more lets you
information, in theuse
see 5 Click Apply; the system restarts.
canais deinput processing
processamento channels
de entrada for advanced
“extra” para mon-mixagem
“extra” input workflows.
Patchbay”
“Multiple processing channels for advanced in mon-
itor mixing
avançada onmonitoração.
deInput page
and112.Output
For more Assignments
Para information,
mais informações,the
see veja
itor mixing workflows.
Patchbay”
“Multiple Inputon page
and For more
112.
Output information,
Assignments in see
the
“Múltiplos Roteamentos de Entrada e Saída no Patchbay”
“Multiple
na páginaInput
Patchbay” 112. and Output
on page 112. Assignments in the
Patchbay” on page 112.

58 Guia
58 VENUE Profile
VENUE Guide
Profile
Bus Configuration Para alterar a configuração de bus Aux/Group:
Bus Configuration Settings To change the Aux/Group Bus Configuration:
Os Bus
ajustes
The Configuration
Bus Configuration
Bus Configuration Settings
permitem
Settings let youescolher as configurações
choose the Aux and
Tothe
1 1Put change
Coloque thein
system Aux/Group
o sistemaConfig
no modoBus
mode. Configuration:
Config.
de StageAux
busses Rack Features
e Group/Var Group. Veja “Configurando Busses Aux, Additional Required Components
Group/Var 1 Put
thethe system inon-screen.
Config mode.
GroupThe BusGroup busses configuration.
Configuration
e Variable Settings
Group” na página
See “Configuring
80. let you choose the Aux and 2 Click Edit button
2 Clique no botão Edit na tela.
Aux, Group,
Stage Racksand
Group/Var are Variable Group
used busses
Group with an Busses”
FOH Rack,on page
and
configuration. See 80. all stage
provide
“Configuring The following components must be purchased separately:
2 Click
3 Click the Edit
to select button
a Bus on-screen.option.
Configuration
audio I/O for VENUE Profile systems. Up to two Stage
80.Racks 3• Clique
Aux, Group, and Variable Group Busses” on page Videopara selecionar
Display uma
(15-inch or opção
greaterBus Configuration.
flat-panel VGA display
can be used simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total inputs. 3 Click
4 Click tothe
Apply; select a Busrestarts.
system Configuration option.
4 Clique
4DVI
Apply; o sistema reiniciará.
supported.
Click Apply; the system restarts.
Audio I/O
Devices
Bus configuration settings in the System page Digital Snake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
Devices
Devices
• configuração
Ajustes de 8 analog output channels;
de bus na expandable up to 48 analog or
página System The Devices page lets you view system connections, trouble-
• The
shoot connection
hardware and between FOHsystem
Rack and Stage Rack requires
Busdigital
configuration
outputssettings in theRack.
per Stage System page The Devices
A página Devices pagereset
lets VENUE
you view components.
system connections, trouble-
a Digital Snakepermite
cable. visualizar
This cableconexões do sistema,
can be purchased solucionar
directly
shoot
problemas hardware
de or and
hardware reset VENUE system components.
e resetar componentes do sistema.
from Avid
To display assembled
the Devices tab: by your preferred vendor.
• Snake connectors to enable primary and redundant (if  Para
To apresentar
Clickdisplay
Optionsthe aDevices
aba Devices:
> Devices. tab:
 Click Options > Devices.
 Clique Options > Devices.

(for Talkback)
Devices tab of the Options page
• VENUE Profile Guide You Devices
can usetab
• 25-pin
ofpage
this the Options
D-Sub cables
page
to view component
(for status
connecting after
to GPI diagnos-
devices)
Aba Devices
tics or na página
troubleshooting.Options
• Two (2) console lights You can use this page to view component status after diagnos-
• Protective Dust Cover ticspode
Você or troubleshooting.
utilizar essa página para verificar o status de components
To reset VENUE system hardware components:
• Rack(s) (see next) depois
VENUE de umProfile
diagnósticoExpansion
ou resolução de Options
problemas.
Tothe
1 Put reset VENUE
system in system
Config hardware
mode. components:
Para
The resetar os components
following options can de hardware
be added do sistema
to VENUE VENUE:
Profile systems.
Racks, Software CDs, iLoks, and Cables Put
1 to
2 Go the
the systempage
Options in Config mode.
and click the Devices tab.
Each Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes: Coloque
1website
2 Go toothe
sistema no following
Options
(www.avid.com).
3 Right-click any of the modo Config.
page and click the Devices
hardware tab.
components:
2•Vá
3Console
à sections
Right-click
página any ofe the
Options following
clique hardware components:
na aba Devices.
• ECx Ethernet Control Software Installer CD Mix• Rack
• Racks (Mix Options
ConsoleRack, FOH Rack or Stage Rack)
sections
• Standalone Software Installer CD 3 Clique com o botão direito em qualquer um dos seguintes
• Racks
4 Choose Reset.(Mix Rack, FOH Rack or Stage Rack)
components
I/O Optionsde hardware:
• 4 Seções
Chooseda console
Reset.
• Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok •
Simulating aRack,
AI16Racks (Mix
Analog Mic/Line
VENUEFOH Rack
Input ou Stage
Card Rack) with
that provides
Configuration 16 analog
the
Standalone
Simulating
4 Escolha
Software
Reset. a VENUE Configuration with the
Standalone
AO16
With theAnalog
VENUEOutputSoftware
Card that
Standalone provides
software, you 16
cananalog line
use the De-level
Each Stage Rack includes: Simular
outputs
vices pagethe
uma
to simulate
configuração
a VENUE system
VENUE
of any
com foropur-Software
With
Standalone VENUE Standalone software, yousize
can use the De-
• Two (2) IEC power cables poses of preparing
vices page toand shows and
simulate training. See “Simulating a pur-
XO16 Analog DigitalaOutput
VENUE system
Card thatofprovides
any size 8for
analog
VENUE
Com Configuration”
o software VENUE on page 224.
poses
line ofoutputs,
level preparing and 8Standalone,
shows
AESand você See
training.
digital pode
outputs. utilizar a página
“Simulating a
Devices
VENUE para simular um sistema
Configuration” on pageVENUE
224. de qualquer tamanho com
oAT16
objetivo deOutput
A-Net prepararCard
shows
thate provides
treinamento. Veja “Simulando
16 channels of A-Netuma
Configuração VENUE”with
output compatible na página
Aviom® 224.Personal Mixers and other

digital I/O. Chapter 6: Options 59
Chapter 6: Options 59
5 Click Apply to reconfigure the osystem, or click Cancel tosair
exitsem
Other Options and Settings 5 ClickApply
5 Clique Applypara reconfigurar
to reconfigure thesistema or Cancel
system, ou para
click Cancel to exit
Outras Opções e Ajustes without oschanging
ajustes dosystem settings.
Other Options and Settings alterar sistema.
without changing system settings.
ForPara
moremais
information, see Chapter
informações, o 10, “Aux 10,
Sends andSends e
Busses
Busses For more information, see veja Capítulo
Chapter 10, “Aux “Aux
Sends and
Busses Variable Groups.”
Variable Groups”.
Variable Groups.”
The Busses
A página page
Busses lets you
permite customize
customizar characteristics
características foros
para thebusses
Aux,
The Busses page lets you customize characteristics for the Aux, Solo and Solo
Operações Monitor Operations
e Monitor
Aux,Solo,
Solo,Matrix,
Matrix and
e Main.
Main busses.
Solo, Matrix, and Main busses. Solo and Monitor Operations
These
Esses settings customize Solo andoperação
Monitor (cue) bus modeSolo e
Theseajustes
settingspersonalizam
customize Soloa and Monitordos busses
(cue) bus mode
and operation.
Monitor (cue).
and operation.
Solo controls in the Options > Busses page

Solo controls in the Options > Busses page
Type Solo mode choices include PFL (Pre-Fader Listen), Stereo
Type Solo
Controles mode
Solo na choices
página >include
OptionsandBusses PFL (Pre-Fader Listen), Stereo
Busses tab of the Options page AFL (After-Fader Listen), Solo-In-Place.
Busses
Aba Busses tab of Options
na página the Options page AFL (After-Fader Listen), and Solo-In-Place.
Auxiliaries and Variable Groups Type As
Level opções
Trim do modo
Mirrors Solo incluemof
the functionality PFL
the(Pré-Fader
Solo/PFLListen), Stereo
level con-
Auxiliaries
Auxiliaries e Variableand Variable Groups
Groups Level
AFL Trim Mirrors
(After-Fader thee functionality
Listen) Solo-In-Place. of the Solo/PFL level con-
trol on the control surface.
These options let you designate bus link status, pick off source, trol on the control surface.
EssasThese options let you designate busdo
link status, pick off source, Espelha
Level Trim Sets a função
of thedo controle de
andnível Solo/PFL
out- na
andopções permitem
stereo pan indicar
behavior status
for Auxiliaries bus,
(Aux fonte escolhida
Send busses). e Monitoring the level Headphone Monitor
and stereo pan behavior for Auxiliaries (Aux Send busses).
comportamento de pan estéreo de busses auxiliares (Aux Send). superfície
puts. de Sets
Monitoring the level of the Headphone and Monitor out-
controle.
Links When enabled, this option links the corresponding bus- puts.
Links Links When habilitado,
Quando enabled, thisessa
option links the
opção corresponding
vincula osAux bus-
busses Sets a Ajusta
Monitoring
Delay o nível
delay for das saídasheadphones
time-aligning Headphone e Monitor.
and near-field
ses into bus pairs. Control changes affect both mono bus-
ses into bus pairs. Control changes affect both mono Aux bus- Delay Sets a delay for time-aligning headphones and near-field
correspondents em pares
ses, and the Follows de Pan
Channel busses.
optionAlterações de controle
becomes available. monitors to the house system.
ses, and the Follows Channel Pan option becomes available.
afetam ambos os busses Aux, e a opção Follows Channel Pan fica monitors
Delay Definetoumthe house
atraso system.
para alinhamento do tempo dos headphones
disponível.
Pickoff These options let you designate the pre-fader pickoff e monitoresGroups
Auxes/Var near-field em AFL
Follow relação
Putsao sistema
the de for
controls PA. an Aux
Pickoff These options let you designate the pre-fader pickoff Auxes/Var Groups Follow AFL Puts the controls for an Aux
point feeding each bus. Choices include pre-EQ, pre-mute, Send or Variable Group Send on the input channel encoders
point feeding each bus. Choices include pre-EQ, pre-mute, Send or Variable Group AFL
SendColoca
on the osinput channel deencoders
Pickoff Estas opções
and pre-fader permitem
(post-mute). designar o ponto de alimentação Auxes/Var
whenever Groups
the Follow
AFL switch is pressed on thatcontroles
Aux or Var Aux Send
Group
and pre-fader (post-mute).
(pickoff) pré-fader para cada bus. As opções incluem pré-EQ, pré- ouwhenever
Variable the AFL
Group switch
Send nos iscodificadores
pressed on that
dosAux or Var
canais de Group
entrada
bus.
Mute e pré-fader
Follows (pós-Mute).
Channel Pan Each channel can be panned indepen- bus. que o switch AFL é pressionado naquele bus Aux ou Var
sempre
Follows Channel Pan Each channel can be panned indepen- Group.
AFL Follows Auxes/Var Groups Soloes the Aux (or Variable
dently within each linked bus pair, or configured to follow the
dently
Follows within each
Channel Pan linked
Cada bus pair, or
canal configured
pode ser to follow the
posicionado AFL Follows Auxes/Var Groups Soloes the Aux (or Variable
channel pan by enabling the Follows Channel Pan option. Group) bus that is currently assigned to input encoders.
independentemente
channel pan by no pan dentro
enabling de cada
the Follows par de
Channel Panbusses,
option. ou Group)
AFL bus
Follows that is currently
Auxes/Var assigned
Groups Coloca to Aux
o bus input
(ouencoders.
Variable Group)
configurado para seguir o posicionamento habilitando a opção atualmente
Auto Cancelassociado
Soloing a aos codificadores
channel de entrada em
strip automatically Solo.
takes any
To change
Follows the Pan.
Channel Aux bus configuration: Auto Cancel Soloing a channel strip automatically takes any
To change the Aux bus configuration: currently soloed channels out of solo.
currently
Auto Cancel soloed
Colocarchannels
uma réguaoutdeofcanal
solo.em Solo automaticamente
1 Put a
Para alterar the system in Config
configuração mode.
do bus Aux: desabilita
Input o Solo
Priority de outros
Makes soloedcanais.
inputs temporarily replace soloed
2 Go to the Options page and click the Busses tab. Input Priority Makes soloed inputs temporarily replace soloed
2 Go to the Options page and click the Busses tab. output busses on the AFL/PFL bus.
1 Coloque o sistema no modo Config. output
Input busses
Priority Fazon
osthe AFL/PFL
canais bus. em Solo temporariamente
de entrada
3 Click Edit.
3 Click Edit. substituir
Mix os busses
to Monitors de saída
Mirrors em Solo no bus
the functionality of AFL/PFL.
the Mix to Moni-
2 Vá Mix to Monitors Mirrors the functionality of the Mix to Moni-
4 àConfigure
página Options e clique na
the following aba Busses.
settings: tors switch on the control surface.
4 Configure the following settings: tors
Mix toswitch on Espelha
Monitors the control surface.do switch Mix to Monitors na
a função
• To link two mono Aux busses into a bus pair, select the
3 Clique•Edit.
To link two mono Aux busses into a bus pair, select the superfície
Cue de controle.
on Mains Fader Puts control of the Monitor bus level to
Link option for the corresponding pair. Cue on Mains Fader Puts control of the Monitor bus level to
Link option for the corresponding pair. the Mains fader.
• Specify
4 Configure the panning
os seguintes for channels routed to Aux bus pairs
ajustes: theon
Cue Mains
Mainsfader.
Fader Endereça o controle de nível do bus Monitor
• Specify the panning for channels routed to Aux bus pairs
• Parawith
vincular dois busses
the Follows ChannelAux
Panmono em um par, selecione a
option. para o fader Mains.
with the Follows Channel Pan option.
opção Link para o par correspondente.
• Click to select the pickoff point for each bus (Pre-EQ,
• Especifique
• Click too select
pan dosthecanais
pickoffroteados
Pre-Mute, or Pre-Fader).
point for each
para osbus (Pre-EQ,
pares de bus
Aux com a opçãoorFollows
Pre-Mute, Channel Pan.
Pre-Fader).
• Clique para selecionar o ponto de alimentação de cada bus
(pré-EQ, pré-Mute ou pré-fader).

Para configurar ajustes de Solo na tela: Pickoffs
To configure Solo settings on-screen: Pickoffs
1To
Váconfigure
Go to Solo
à1 página settings
the Options
Options on-screen:
page
e clique naand
abaclick the Busses tab.
Busses. Pickoffs
A página Pickoffs
The Pickoffs permite
page controlar
lets you controlo the
ponto depickoff
bus alimentação do in-
point on bus
nas réguas de entrada, assim como uma fonte específica e pontos
1 Go to the Options page and click the Busses tab.
2 Configure settings as needed:
2 Configure os ajustes como necessário: The put strips,
Pickoffs as well
page lets as
youspecify source
control andpickoff
the bus insert points
point for
on output
in-
Stage Racks are used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage de inserção
busses. para
The busses
Pickoffs de
pagesaída.
also A página
provides Pickoffs
master também
control oferece
for De-
2 Configure settings as needed: putThe following
strips, as well components must
as specify source andbeinsert
purchased
pointsseparately:
for output
o controle
lay Delay Compensation.
Compensation.
Paraaudio I/O
To adjust
ajustar for VENUE
Monitor
Monitor BusBusProfile
Delay,systems.
Delay: Up
do one of tofollowing:
the two Stage Racks busses. TheDisplay
• Video Pickoffs(15-inch
page alsoorprovides master control
greater flat-panel for De-
VGA display
can be used simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total inputs. lay Compensation.
To adjust Monitor
 Adjust Bus Delay,
the Delay do one
encoder of the following:
on-screen. recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
 Ajuste o codificador Delay na tela. DVI supported.
Audio
 Adjust I/O
thethe
 Click Delay encoder
Delay value on-screen.
shown on-screen, and manually enter
 Clique o valor de Delay apresentado na tela e manualmente insira • USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
a•new
48 value.
inputs with remotely controllable
 Click the Delay value shown on-screen, andmic preamps
manually and
enter
o novo valor.
a new value. Digital Snake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
To toggle
• 8 analogDelay on or off:
Para alternar entreoutput channels;
Delay ligado expandable up to 48 analog or
e desligado: • The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
digital
To toggle to outputs
Delay
 Click perDelay
on or off:
toggle the StageInRack.
switch on-screen.
 Clique o switch Delay In na tela.
 Click to toggle the Delay In switch on-screen. from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Delay settings
Synchronization and are retained
Control I/Owhen toggled off or on.
Os ajustes de Delay são mantidos quando ligado ou
•Delay
Snakesettings are retained
connectors whenprimary
to enable toggled off
andorredundant
on. (if
desligado. Optional Components
For more information, see “Solo and Monitor Busses” on
page
Para mais
For more 119onformações,
information, veja and
see “Solo “Busses SoloBusses”
Monitor e Monitor”
on na The following components are optional, and must be
página
page 119 119. purchased separately:
Matrixes
System Components
Matrixes
Matrixes
The Matrixes section lets you link and unlink Matrix to form AbaPickoffs tab of
transfer ofthe
ShowOptions page
Pickoffs da página Optionsdata; 512 MB or larger recommended)
AThe stereo
seção Matrix busses. para Pickoffs tab ofoptions
Pickoff the Options
• Near-field monitor page
are explained
speakers throughout this guide
for mix position where rel-
monitoring
IncludedMatrixes
Matrixes Components
permite
section associar
lets you link ande desassociar
unlink Matrix a Matrix
to form
formar
stereo busses
Matrix Matrix
busses. estéreo. As opções
evant.
• options Pickoff
Headphones são explicadas
with 1/4-inch jack this guide where rel-forem
ao longo deste guia onde
AllLinks
VENUEWhen enabled,
Profile systemsthese options
include thelink corresponding mono Pickoff
following: relevantes.
are explained throughout
LinksMatrix
Links Quando busses into stereo-linked
habilitada, essaoptions
opção link pairs.
associa Control
busses changes
Matrix then evant.
mono
•When
VENUE enabled,
Profilethese
console corresponding mono Settings for Delay Compensation
affect bothem mono Ajustes(for Talkback)
Delay Compensation
correspondents
Matrix paresMatrix
estéreobusses.
associados. Alterações no controle
• busses
Two (2)intoIECstereo-linked
power cablespairs. Control changes then Settings for Delay Compensation
afgetam ambos os busses • Footswitches (up to page
2) provides three settings for Delay
affect both mono MatrixMatrix
busses.Mono. The Options > Pickoffs
For more
• Monitor information
mount for VGA onscreen
these features
(screen see
notChapter
included)11, A página Options > Pickoffs oferece três ajustes deInserts.
compensação de
• MIDI cables
Compensation: (for connecting
Off,page
Mixprovides
Only, and external MIDI
Mixsettings
and devices)
Para“Matrix
mais and Personal
informações Q Mixers.” The Options
delay (Delay > Pickoffs
Compensation): Off, Mix three
Only e Mix and for Delay
Inserts.
•For
Trackball
more on sobre
mount (trackball
information these esses recursos,
not included)
features veja 11,
see Chapter o Capítulo
• BNC cables (for
11,“Mixers Matrix e Personal Q.” Compensation:
Off No DelayOff, Mixconnecting
Only, and
Compensation
Word
Mix and
is applied.
clock between the
Inserts.
•“Matrix
VENUE and Personal
Mouse Pad Q Mixers.” VENUE system and external digital devices)
Panning/Center Divergence Off Nenhum delay de compensação é aplicado.
• VENUEDivergence
Profile Guide Off No• Delay
Only Compensation
25-pin D-Sub cables is applied.
(for connecting to GPIfordevices)
Panning/Center Mix VENUE automatically compensates delays in-
Panning/Center
The Panning Divergence
section provides control over center channel di- Mix Only A VENUE automaticamente compensa delays ocorridos
• Two (2) console lights curred by the use of Groups routed to the Mains busses.
Mix Only VENUE automatically compensates for delays in-
AThe vergence
seção Panning
Panning when the
oferece
section Main Bus
controle
provides is set
sobre to aL–C–R mode.
divergência See
do “Main
canal pelo uso de Groups roteados para os busses Mains.
• Protective Dust Cover control over center channel di- curred
central quando Mixbyand
theInserts
use of VENUE
Groups automatically
routed to the Mains busses.for delays
compensates
Bus
vergence wheno(see
Center Main Bus está
Divergence
the Main ajustado
Options” onpara
pageo 85.
modo L–C–R. Veja
next) Bus is set to L–C–R mode. See “Main
• Rack(s)
“Opções de Divergência do Bus Central” na página 85. VENUE
Mix and
incurred Profile
Inserts
by VENUE A VENUE
the use of Expansion
automaticamente
plug-ins as well Options
as thosecompensa
incurred bydelays
the
Bus Center Divergence Options” on page 85. Mix and Inserts automatically compensates for delays
To set Center Divergence: ocorridos
use of pelo
Groups uso de
routed plug-ins,
to the assim
Mains como
busses.aqueles ocorridos pelo
incurred
Thede
uso by the use
following
Groups of plug-ins
options
roteados can asadded
parabeos well
bussesas
tothose
VENUE
Mains.incurred
Profileby the
systems.
ParaRacks, Software
ajustar Center CDs, iLoks, and Cables
Divergence:
To set value or drag in the Center Divergence text box and useFor
Centera Divergence:
 Enter of details
Groupson routed to the systems
all VENUE Mains busses.
and options, visit the Avid
Each
press
 Insira Mix
um Rackou
Enter.
valor or arraste
FOH Rack a includes:
caixa de texto Center Divergence e website (www.avid.com).
Enter a value or drag in the Center Divergence text box and
pressione
press•Enter.Enter. Restore CD
System
Stereo Group Panning
• ECx Ethernet Operation
Control Software Installer CD Mix Rack Options
Stereo Group Panning Operation
• Standalone
Stereo SoftwareOperation
GroupGroup
Panning Installer CD
The Stereo Panning Operation options provide differ-
A opção • iLok
StereoUSB Smart
Group Keyfor
Panning (for storing
Operation plug-in
oferece authorizations)
diferentes níveis I/O Options
The ent levels
Stereo of
Group flexibility how
Panning Operation channels
optionscan be routed
provide differ-to
de flexibilidade
• Plug-inpara
Groups. a forma
installer discscomo os canais
(if any) podem ser roteados
with pre-authorized iLok
entgrupos.
levels of flexibility for how channels can be routed to AI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
em
Groups. mic/line level inputs
To
• change
One FOHStereo
LinkGroup
cable Panning Operation:
for Operation:
connection to a VENUE console
Para alterar Stereo Group Panning
To change
1 Put Stereo Group
the system inPanning
Config Operation:
mode.
Each Stage
1 Coloque Rack no
o sistema includes:
modo Config. outputs
1 Put
2• the system
Click in Config
to select mode.
or Expert mode.
Simplecables
Two (2) IEC power
22Clique
Clickpara selecionar
to select Simpleosormodos
Expert Simple
mode. ou Expert.
For more information on these options, see “Simple and Ex- line level outputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.
Para
For pert
more Operational
mais informações
information Modes”
sobreon
on these page opções,
essas
options,93. veja and
see “Simple “Modos
Ex- de AT16 A-Net Output Card that provides 16 channels of A-Net
pert Operational Modes” on page 93. 93.
Operação Simple e Expert” na página

Chapter 6: Options 61
Snapshots Aux Mon and Aux FX
Snapshots
The Snapshots page provides several snapshot preference set- Aux Mon
These and Aux
settings FXclassify individual Aux Sends (including
let you
Snapshots
tings to optimize Snapshot operation. Aux Monbus
linked e Aux FX as monitor sends (“Mon”) or as effects sends
pairs)
Snapshots
Snapshots
The Snapshots page provides several snapshot preference set-
Aux Mon and Aux FX
Aux
TheseMon and
settings letAux FX
you classify individual Aux Sends (including
(“FX”), which lets you scope each type separately from the
A tings
página Snapshots
to optimize
The Snapshots oferece
Snapshot
page vários ajustes
operation.
provides several de preferências
snapshot de
preference set- Estes bus
linked
These ajustes
pairs)
settings permitem
asyou
let monitor classificar
sends
classify individualmente
(“Mon”)
individual AuxorSends
as effects Aux
sendsSends
(including
The Snapshots page provides several Snapshots
These settings page.
let you classify individual Auxmandadas
Sends (including
Snapshots para otimizar a operação comsnapshot
tings to optimize Snapshot operation.
cenas. preference set- (incluindo
(“FX”),
linked bus pares
which letsassociados
pairs) you
as de bus)
scope each
monitor sends typecomo
separately
(“Mon”) from de
or as effects the monitor
sends
tings to optimize Snapshot operation. linked
(“Mon”) busoupairs)
de as monitor
efeitos (“FX”), sends (“Mon”)
permitindo que orvocê
as effects
acesse sends
cada
This option
Snapshots
(“FX”), page.
which islets
for you
organizing
scope each Auxtype
Sends and Var Group
separately from the Sendstipo
separadamente
(“FX”), which letsnayou
for snapshot
página
scope Snapshots.
each type separately from the
control only, and does not directly affect Aux bus
Snapshots page.
Snapshots
This optionpage.
is for organizing Aux Sends and Var Group Sends
operation.
Essa
for opção serve para
snapshot organizar Auxnot
Sends e Varaffect
Group Sends
bus para
This option control only,
is for organizing andAuxdoes Sendsdirectly
and Var Group Aux Sends
This optionde
controles is for
cenasorganizing
apenas, Aux
e nãoSends
afeta and Var GroupaSends
diretamente opção de
operation.
for snapshot control only, and does not directly affect Aux bus
for MTC
busses (MIDI
snapshot Timeonly,
auxiliares.
control Code) and does not directly affect Aux bus
operation.
operation.
MTC
MTC (MIDI
The(MIDI
MIDITime Time
Time Code)
Code
Code) options let you control MTC operational
modes, frame
MTC (MIDI Time Code) rate, and Start Time.
MTC
The MIDI(MIDI TimeTimeCodeCode)
options let you control MTC operational
A opção MIDI Time Code permite controlar modos operacionais,
modes,
Modes
The
frameMIDI Available
frame
rateTime rate,
e Star Code MTC
and
Time modes
Start
options
do MTC. letare
Time. youMTC Off, MTC
control MTC operational
Read (slave),
The MIDI Time Code options let you control MTC operational
and MTC Generate (master).
modes, frame rate, and Start Time.
modes, frame rate,
Modes Available MTC andmodes
Start Time.
are MTC Off, MTC Read (slave),
Modes Os modos MTC disponíveis são MTC Off, MTC Read (slave) e
and MTC
Frame
Modes Generate
Rate This (master).
option
Available MTC modes are sets the MTC
frameOff,rateMTC
that Read
is used when
(slave),
MTC Generate
Modes Available(master).
MTC modes are MTC Off, MTC Read (slave),
generating MTC.
and MTC Generate (master).
Snapshots tab of the Options page and
Frame MTCRateGenerate
This option (master).
sets the frame rate that is used when
Frame Rate Esta opção ajusta o frame rate utilizado quando
generating
Start
Frame Time
Rate This
MTC. option
This option sets setsthe
the frame
start time
rate that
that is
is used
used when
when
Snapshot
Snapshots tab ofGeneral
the OptionsPreferences
page gerando
Frame Rate o MTC.
This option sets the frame rate that is used when
generating
generating MTC. MTC.
Snapshots tab of the Options page generating
Start Time This MTC.option sets the start time that is used when
Snapshot
Snapshots
Aba Snapshots da General
The following
tab of the
página Preferences
settings
Options
Options are available
page in the Snapshots page. Start Time Esta opção ajusta o time inicial utilizado quando gerando
generating
Start TimeMTC.
This option sets the start time that is used when
Snapshot General Preferences oMIDI
StartMTC.
Time This option sets the start time that is used when
Snapshot
The
Center
Snapshot General
following
Last settings
Recalled
General Preferences
are available
Snapshot
Preferences in the the
Manages Snapshots
displaypage.
of the generating MTC.
generating MTC.
Snapshots
The listsettings
following so that are
theavailable
last recalled snapshot
in the is always
Snapshots page. cen- MIDIDesignates
MIDI Define othe channel
canal on which
pelo qual snapshotsassend
são recebidas or receiveMIDI
informações
The following settings are available in the Snapshots page.
Manages the display of the snap-
OsCenter
teredLast
seguintes Recalled
ajustes
vertically, Snapshot
estão
lettingdisponíveis na página
you maintain displaySnapshots.
of adjacent Bank
MIDI
MIDI Select
Bank e Program
Select and Change
Program de snapshots.
Change information.
Snapshots MIDI
Designates the channel on which snapshots send or receive
Center
Center in list
Last
shotsLastthe so that the
Recalled
list.
Recalled
last recalled
Snapshot Managessnapshot is always
the display
Snapshot Manages the display of the
cen-
of the
tered
Center vertically,
Last
Snapshots Recalledletting
list so youlast
Snapshot
that the maintain
Gerencia display
recalled of adjacent
asnapshot
apresentação snap-
da
is always lista
cen- MIDI Bank
See
DesignatesVejaSelect
Chapter
the and
o Capítulo23,Program
channel 23, which Change
“Synchronization.”
on“Sincronização.” information.
snapshots send or receive
Snapshots list so that the last recalled snapshot is always cen- Designates the channel on which snapshots send or receive
deshots
cenas
tered in de
theforma que ayou
list. letting
vertically,
Crossfade última cena display
maintain carregada esteja sempre
of adjacent snap- MIDI Bank Select and Program Change information.
tered vertically, letting you maintain manter
display of adjacent snap- MIDI Bank
See
Snapshots Select
Chapter
Send23,and ProgramThis Change
on“Synchronization.”
Channel option information.
sets snapshots to send
centralizada
shots in theverticalmente,
list. permitindo a visualização das Snapshots Send on Channel Esta opção ajusta o snapshot para
shots
cenas in the list.
Alladjacentes
snapshotsna lista. a Crossfade setting that determines how
provide BankSeeSelect
enviar and23,
comandos
Chapter Program
Bank Change
Select commands
e Program
“Synchronization.” on apor
Change selected
um canal
Crossfade See Chapter 23,Channel
“Synchronization.”
Snapshots
MIDI
MIDI Send on
selecionado.
channel. This Thisauma
Issoprovides
oferece option sets
forma
quick snapshots
andrápida
easy way to send
e fácil
to send
de enviar
a
long scoped faders will crossfade to the stored values in that
Crossfade
Crossfade
All snapshots provide Bank Select and Program Change commands on a selected
Crossfade
snapshot when it isarecalled.
Crossfade setting
The that> determines
Options how
Snapshots page um comando
Snapshots
MIDI
Snapshots
MIDI
Send
command on cada vez
Channel
Send on every
Channeltime que
This um snapshot
option
a snapshot
This
sets
is
option sets
é without
fired, acionado,
snapshots
snapshots
sem ser
tohaving
send
to send
long
All scopedSnapshot
faders
snapshots will
provide acrossfade
Crossfadetosetting
the stored values in that
that determines how MIDI
Bank channel.
necessário
to embed This
Selectembutir
aand provides
um MIDI
Program
MIDI program a quick
Program
Change
change and easy
Change
commands
within way
em
each a to
oncada send
selected
snapshot. a
snapshot.
provides
All snapshots provideGeneral Preference
a Crossfade settings
setting for optimizing
that determines how Bank Select and Program Change commands on a selected
Todas asscoped
snapshot
long cenas
when oferecem
it is will
faders um
recalled. ajuste dethe
The Options
crossfade to Crossfade que determina
> Snapshots
stored values page
in that MIDI
MIDIcommand
channel. This everyprovides
time a snapshot
a quick isandfired,
easywithout
way tohaving
send a
crossfades
long scoped between
faders snapshots.
will crossfade to the stored values in that MIDI channel.Send This onprovides a quick and easyestarway habilitado
to send a para
como faders
provides com ação
Snapshot de grandes distâncias seformovimentarão OSnapshot
Snapshot
toMIDI
embed Send every
a MIDI program Channel
on Channel change não
does precisa
not
within need
eachtowithout
be turned
snapshot. on in
snapshot when it General Preference
is recalled. settings
The Options optimizing
> Snapshots page MIDI
command
command every
time a snapshot is fired, having
snapshot
para
crossfades
Default
when
os valores it is recalled.na
armazenados
Defines
between
Time a
The
(fader)
snapshots.
Options
cena
Crossfade
> Snapshots
que está sendo
time to
page
carregada.
apply to all enviar
toorder
embed
outros
to send tipos
a MIDI
detime
other dados
types
program
a snapshot
ofMIDI
MIDI
change
que isestão
data
within
fired,embutidos
that
each
without having
nas cenas,
embedded
aresnapshot. in
provides Snapshot General Preference settings for optimizing to embed a MIDI
A página
providesOptions > Snapshots
Snapshot oferece os ajustes
General Preference settingsSnapshot General
for optimizing como
Snapshot note
snapshots,Send onprogram
on/off
such ou
as note
change
MMC.on/off
Channel does notwithin
needeach
or MMC. to besnapshot.
turned on in
new snapshots.
crossfades between snapshots.
Preference
crossfadespara
Default Time otimizar
between
Defines a crossfades
snapshots. entre cenas.
(fader) Crossfade time to apply to all order to send
Snapshot Send other types of MIDI
on Channel dataneed
does not that to embedded
arebe turned oninin
Snapshot Send on Channel does Esta
not need
opção to be turned on in para
new snapshots.
Pan, Balance
Default & Widtha Enables
Time Defines pan, balance
(fader) Crossfade timeand widthto
to apply onall Snapshots
snapshots,
Snapshots
order to send Respond
such other totoChannel
as note
Respond typeson/off
Channel orThis
of MIDI MMC.
data that ajusta
option are as cenas
setsembedded
snapshots to
in
order to
responder send other
a incoming types of
comandos BankSelect MIDI data
Selectand that
e Program are embedded in
Default
Default Time
Time
scoped
new
Defines
Define
channels
snapshots.
em a (fader)
totempo deCrossfade
crossfade.crossfade time
a serto apply to
aplicado all
a todas respond to
snapshots, such as noteBank on/off or MMC. ProgramChange
Changerecebidos
com-
asnew
novas
Pan, cenas.& Width Enables pan, balance and width on
snapshots.
Balance pelo canalRespond
snapshots,
Snapshots
mands on
MIDI
such selecionado
as note on/off This
to Channel
the selected
or MMC.
MIDI channel.option sets snapshots to
scoped channels
For more
Pan, Balance to crossfade.
& information,
Width Enablesseepan,
Chapter 21, and
balance “Snapshots.”
width on respond
Snapshots to incoming
Respond toBank Select
Channel andoption
This Program setsChange
snapshotscom- to
Snapshots
MIDI Respond to Channel This option
Resguarda sets snapshots
(desliga) as MIDI to MIDI
saídas
Pan,
Pan, Balance
Balance & &Width Enablespan,
WidthHabilita
scoped channels to crossfade.
pan,balance
balance eand width
width oncanais
nos MIDISnapshot
mands
respond on tothe
Snapshot Output
selected
incomingOutput Safe channel.
MIDI
Safe
Bank Safes
Select (shuts
and off) VENUE
Program Change com-out-
para crossfade.
scoped
Forchannels to crossfade.
more information, see Chapter 21, “Snapshots.” respond
da VENUE to incoming
quando Banksão
cenas Select and Program
chamadas. Isso notChange
não com-
afeta sending
o envio de
PRE put
mands when
on the snapshots
selectedare recalled.
MIDI This does
channel. affect
comandos
mands on the Bank Select
selected e Program
MIDI Change
channel.
Safes (shuts off)com
VENUEa opção
MIDI Snapshots
For more information, see Chapter 21, “Snapshots.”
MIDI Snapshot
of Bank Select Output Safe
and Program Change commands with theout-
Snap-
TheFor
PRE Paramore
maisinformation,
options informações,
in seeveja
Chapter
the PRE section olet 21,specify
Capítulo
you “Snapshots.”
21, “Snapshots”.
which parame- Send
put
MIDI
on
when Channel.
snapshots
Snapshot OutputareSafe
recalled.
Safes This
(shutsdoes
off)not affectMIDI
VENUE sendingout-
MIDIshots Send
Snapshot on Channel
Output Safeoption.
Safes (shuts off) VENUE MIDI out-
ters
PRE are recalled with Snapshots whose scope includes Pre set- ofput
Bank
when Select and Program
snapshots ChangeThis
are recalled. commands
does notwithaffectthe Snap-
sending
PRE
PRE
The options put when snapshots are recalled. This does not affect sending
tings. Clickintothe PRE whether
toggle section let you specify
recalled Input which
snapshotparame-
data in- shots Send
of Bank on Channel
Select and Program option.
Change commands with the Snap-
ters
The are recalled
options in with Snapshots
the PRE section whose
let youscope includes
specify which Pre set-
parame- of Bank Select and Program Change commands with the Snap-
cludes the following: shots Send on Channel option.
AsThe options
opções
tings. Click
in the
na seção PRE
to toggle
PRE section especificar
permitem
whether
let you specify
recalled Input
which
quais parame-
parâmetros
snapshot são shots Send on Channel option.
ters •are recalled
Gain, Pad,with Snapshots
andSnapshots
Phase whose scope includesdata
Pre in-
set-
ters are
carregados recalled
com aswith
cenas cujo whose
âmbito scope
inclui includes
ajustes Pre. Pre set-
cludes
tings. the following:
Click to toggle whether recalled Input snapshot data in-
Clique
tings.para alternar
• Click
+48V se os
to(phantom
toggle dados
power)de
whether entrada
recalled de cena
Input incluem:
snapshot data in-
• cludes
cludes
•
Gain, the
Gain,Pad
the
• HPF
following:
Pad,
e and Phase
Phase
following:
• ••+48V
• +48V (phantom
Gain,(phantom
Pad, andpower)
Gain, Pad, and Phase
power)
Phase
• •HPF
• HPF
+48V (phantom power)
Delay is stored as a unique (discrete) data type for each
• +48V (phantom power)
channel.
• HPF
O Delay
• HPF
Delay é armazenado
is stored como
as a unique um único
(discrete) data tipo
type de
for dado
each para
cada canal.
channel.
channel.
channel.

62 VENUE
62 Guia Profile
VENUE Guide
Profile
Misc Routing Osc, 2-Track e Talkback
Misc kcabklaT dna kcarT-2 ,csO gnituoR Routing Osc, 2-Track and Talkback csiM
AThe
página Miscellaneous
ro ,Miscellaneous
stup ,rooferece
ni kcarT-2 page licsOvárias
talprovides ngoutras
ehtutility otconfigurações.
issaand yother
abhctsettings.
aP eht esU Utilize
Use
.sgthe eos rPatchbay
nittPatchbay
ehto dto para
ytilituatribuir
naassign the ivorOscillator,
sedOscillator, suoentradas
p egap 2-Track lecsiM2-Track
enalinputs, hT ou
eor
Stage Rack Features
.redaf nrut eR XF ro tup nI na ot tupni kcabklaT
Additional
Talkback
Talkback para to
input umRequired
fader
an de or
Input
Components
entrada ou FXfader.
FX Return Return.
,rotallicso etuor ot snottub etuoR neercs-no eht esu nac uoY Você
You canpode
use utilizar os botões
the on-screen Route
Route na telatopara
buttons direcionar
route os sinais
oscillator,
audio I/O for VENUE Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks Oscillator, 2-Track e signals
Talkback
.stuptuo ot slangis kcabklat dna kcart-2 • Video
2-track andDisplay
talkback (15-inch topara
or saídas.
greater
outputs. flat-panel VGA display
Para direcionar
DVI as saídas Oscillator, 2-Track ou Talkback na tela:
supported.
:neAudio
ercs-nI/O
o stuptuo kcabklaT ro ,kcarT-2 ,rotallicsO eht etuor oT To route the Oscillator, 2-Track, or Talkback outputs on-screen:
rehti•e n48
i ninputs
ottub ewith eht kcilc ,controllable
tuoR remotely egap csiM > smic
noitpreamps
pO eht nIand
1
1 1InNa
thepágina
OptionsOptions
> Misc > Misc,
page, clique
click no botão
the Route Route
button das seções
in either
.snselectable
oitces kcabphantom
klaT ro ,kpower.
carT-2 ,rotallicsO eht Oscillator,
the 2-Track
Oscillator, ou Talkback.
2-Track, or Talkback sections.
individually
• 8 analog output channels;:gexpandable
niwollof ehtupfoto
re48
htianalog
e oD 2 or 2 2Do either dos
of the following:
• Siga
Theum seguintes
connection procedimentos:
between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
ot kcilc ,tuptuo derised eht detceles ydaerla dah uoy fI • • • aIfDigital
Se você
you had já selecionou
already
Snake
a saída
selected
cable. thedesejada,
This cabledesired clique para
can be output,
purchasedclickconfirmar
to
directly
o
eht ni( edom oT etuoR deyalpsid yltnerruc eht mrifnoc modo
confirm de
the roteamento apresentado (no canto inferior esquerdo
from Avid or currently
assembleddisplayed Route To vendor.
by your preferred mode (in the
Synchronization and Control da tela).
.)neercI/O
s eht fo renroc tfel rewol lower left corner of the screen).
• Vá à página Outputs e clique para selecionar uma saída (ela
ti( tu•ptSnake
uo na connectors
tceles ot kcito
lc enable
dna egaprimary
p stuptuand
O ehredundant
t ot oG • (if • Go to the
pisca Outputs page
brevemente, e a and click
página to select
Outputs an outputfocada
permanece (it na
-of sniamer egap stuptuO eht esiwrehto ,ylfeirb sehsalf
Optional
flashes
Components
briefly,
seleção atual otherwise
de canal dethe Outputs page remains fo-
saída).
.)lenna hc tuptuO detceles ylt nerruc eht no dessuc cussed
The on the
following currently selected
components Output
are optional, channel).
and must be
Misc tab of the Options page Na caixa de
3purchased egaque
diálogo de confirmação p snosurge,
itpO ehclique
t fo batRoute
csiM para
separately:
-noMisc
Aba c otdaepágina
tuoR kOptions
cilc ,sraeppa taht golaid noitamrifnoc eht nI 3 3 In the confirmation dialog that appears, click Route to con-
confirmar o endereçamento ou Cancel para cancelar sem alterações
gnSystem
ahc tuohtiw Components
-Oscillator lecnac ot lecnaC kcilc ro tnem ngissa ruoy mrif firm • USB
no your
flash disk or
assignment
roteamento
(or other portable USB storage
atual click Cancel to cancel withoutrotdevice
alchang-
licsO for
Oscillator . gnituor tnerruc eht gni ing the transfer
current of Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
routing.
Lets you choose the tone, frequency, and level for the built-in ni-tliub eht rof level dna ,ycneuqerf ,enot eht esoohc uoy steL
Included Components • Near-field monitor
Para mais informações. Veja speakers for mix
o Capítulo 12, position monitoring
“Patchbay.”
oscillator,
Permite ”and
.yabroute
escolher Pit
“ ,to
hcataonda,21an
retavailable
a pahC eesoutput.
frequência ,neoitoam
nível
rofnido
erooscilador
m roF .tuptuosee
For more information, elbaChapter
liava na12,
ot t“Patchbay.”
i etuor dna ,rotallicso
embutido, e roteá-lo
All VENUE para
Profile a saída
systems disponível.
include the following: System
Signal Lets you choose the type of oscillator tone to use. u Clock
•.esDynamic
ot enot orrotcondenser
allicso fo emicrophone
pyt eht esoohand c uoXLR
y stemic
L lancable
giS
Choices include sine, variable kcolC metsyS System Clock
Signal Permite escolher o tipo desine,
ondaand noise.
a ser usada pelo oscilador. .esion d na ,enis elbairav ,enis edulcni s eciohC
(for Talkback)
Ajuste a data e a hora de seu sistema
• Two
As opções (2) IEC
incluem power
senóides, cables
.metsys eht rof emit de
senóides variáveis naruído.
et a d eht steS Sets the date and time for the system.
Frequency Lets you set the oscillator frequency. • Footswitches .ycneu q (up
erf to rot2)allicso eht tes uoy steL ycneuqerF
• Monitor mount for VGA screen (screen not included) Hora • do MIDI Dia cables
no Display (for de Status external MIDI devices)
connecting
Frequency Permite ajustar a frequência yalpnot dososcilador.
smode,
iD utato tSassign
ni yaDthe fo eoscil-
miT
Route• Enables
Trackball RoutemountOsc(trackball
to Selected included) -Time
licso•eof tDay
hBNC in
saStatus
ngiscables doDisplay
ot ,e(for m detceleS otWord
connecting csO eclock tuoR sbetweenelbanE ethe tuoR
lator •signal
VENUE to the currently
Mouse Pad selected output channel(s). Você.)pode (lennescolher
sVENUE ahsystem
c tuptu para
o d e que
t c e l eas yhora
l t n e rdo
r u cdia
e h tseja
o t l aapresentada
n g i s r otal no
renroHabilita
Route c thgir roew modo
ol ehRoute
t ni yaOsc d foto em Selecte,
it wohspara ot esdirecionar
oohc nac u oosinal
Y Youcanto can inferior
choose direito to show and
datime external
tela, ofna dayárea digital
in the devices)
de lower
display rightde corner
status. Essa
doyaosciladorlanpara
lps•idVENUE oitpo o(s)
Profile
sihTcanal(is)
aera yade
.Guide lpssaída
id sutselecionado(s).
atS eht ni neercs eht fo ofapresentação
the • screen
25-pininD-Sub the Status
opcional cablespodedisplay
(forser area.
connecting
configuradaThisto optional
GPI
paradevices) displayde 12
formato
-2-Track
rof ru•oh Two 42 (2)
ro )console
MP/MA(lights ruoh 21 rehtie rof derugifnoc eb nac canhoras (AM/PM) oufor
be configured 24either
horas:12 hour (AM/PM) or 24 hour kcarTfor- -2
2-Track
• Protective
Lets you set the level DustandCoverinput source for the :2-Track swollof analog
sa tam mat
golan asa follows:
kcarT -2 eht rof ecruos t u p n i d n a l e v e l e h t t e s u o y s t e L
Para apresentar a hora na área de Status:
and digital
Permite • Rack(s) inputs,
ajustar (see and
next)
o nível eroute themdeto entrada
a fonte
:aera sutatS ehpara
the desired
t ni yas
paraoutputs.
ad saídas
as entradas
fo emitdesejadas.
wohs oT
VENUE
. s t u p tuo deProfilerised eht otExpansion
To show time of day in the Status area:
meht etuor dna ,Options st upni latig i d dna
analógicas e digitais 2-Track, e roteá-las
2-Track Level Lets you activate 2-Track input and set 2-Track aVá
k1cThe rT-à 2página
tes dnaOptions
following tupni k>ccan
options aMisc.
rT-be 2 eadded
tavitcatouVENUE oy steL Profile leveL ksystems.carT-2
Racks, Software CDs,.eiLoks, gap csiM and > sCables
noitpO eht ot oG 1 1 Go to the Options > Misc page.
input level.
2-Track Level Permite ativar a entrada 2-Track e ajustar o nível de . l ev e l tupAvidni
2For Nadetailsseçãoon Systemall VENUEClock,systems habiliteand a opção options, Show visit Time the in Status
suEach
tatS nMix
entrada. i emiRack
T wohor S eFOH
ht elb a n e , n o
Rack includes: i t c e s k c o l C m e t s y S e h t n I 2 2 In the System
website (www.avid.com). Clock section, enable the Show Time in Status
2-Track Input Selects which 2-Track input (analog,.or nodigital)
itpo aeris A si Area.
Area)latoption.
igid ro ,golana( tupni kcarT-2 hcihw stceleS tupnI kcarT-2
fed to the monitors and output busses.
2-Track Input Seleciona qual entrada 2-Track (analógica ou digital) .sessub tuptuo dna srotinom eht ot def
33 Selecione umfor format para o horário time: apresentado: 12 or hour24 (AM/
42 ro•)MECx
alimenta P/M
os Ethernet :ebusses
A( ruoh 21eControl
monitores mit deSoftware
y
de a lp sid eh
saída. t rof tamCD
Installer rof a tceleS 3 Mix
Select
PM) ou
aRack
format
24 hour.
Optionsthe displayed 12 hour (AM/PM)
Route• Enables Route 2-Track
Standalone Software Installer CD to Selected mode, to assign the
.ruoh e h
hour. t n g i s s a o t , e d o m d e t c e l e S o t k c a r T - 2 e t u o R s e l b a n E e t u oR
2-Track signal
Route •Habilita to
o modo the currently
2-Track(for selected
to Selected, output channel(s).
para direcionar o sinal . ) s ( l e n n a h c t u p t u o d e t c e l e s y l t n e r r u c e h t o t l a n g i s k c a r T -2
iiLok
skcar npara pUSB
-gulo(s) t Smart
fo sutaKey
ehcanal(is) tde
s eh t revstoring
enehwplug-in nwohs sauthorizations)
i yad fo emiT AI/O
Time hora Options
of day do isdia shown é apresentada
whenever the sempre status que of theo status
plug-in dosracks racks de
2-Track saída selecionado(s).
ecalp•er Plug-in
yliraropinstaller
met )ynadiscs fi( se(if
gasany)
sem swith utatspre-authorized
kcar ni-gulp ;KO iLok
si is plug-ins
OK;
AI16plug-in
está OK;status
Analograck
mensagens de(ifstatus
Mic/Line messagesInput Card that
de racks dereplace
any) temporarily plug-ins (se
Talkback existentes) temporariamente substituem provides o horário 16 k ca
para analog
balertá-lo
klaT do
Talkback .suta(2)
• Two ts kIEC
car npower
i-gulpcablesot u o y t rela o t yal p sid yad fo e mit time of daylevel
mic/line display to alert you to plug-in rack status.
inputs
status do rack de plug-ins.
Talkback
• One Level
FOH Lets youcable
Link activate Talkback and
for connection to set Talkback
a VENUE in-
console -ni kcabklaT tes dna kcabklaT etavitca uoy steL leveL kcabklaT
Talkback
put level. Level Permite ativar o Talkback e yajustar aleD lennahC o nível de AO16 Analog
Channel DelayOutput Card that provides 16 analog.leline vel tlevel
up
Channel Delay
entrada.
-Talkback
tuo d•naTwo tDim lbacSets
niLevel
up(2) eIEC ilppthe
power adim
no level,
a llcables stinu y which
alpsidiseh the
t teamount
s uoy steofL fo tnyou
Lets uoma eh
Permiteset thet sidisplay
definir
hcihw ,unitslevel midall
as unidadeson
ehapplicable
de exibição
t steS leveLinput miD kcabkout-
em todosand
laT
os controles
Talkback
attenuationDim Level
applied Ajusta
to the o nível
mix de
on atenuação
the
yaled eht tes ot elbissop ti sekam sihT .slortnoc yaled tupoutput aplicada
bus when à mix
Talk- no - k
putl XO16
a T n e h Analog
w
delay controls. s u b tand
u p t Digital
u o e h t nOutput
o x i m e Card
h t o t that
d e i l provides
p p a n o 8 analog
delay ttajustar
i t a u n e a
aplicáveis de delayThis makes itepossible
de entradas saídas. Isso to set the possível
torna
bus
backdeissaída quando o Talkback está
activated. ativo.
:gniwollof eht fo yna no desab basedline
o daley level
on baseado outputs,
any of the em: and
following:8 AES digital outputs. . d e t a v i t c a s i k c a b
)sdnocesillim ni( emit yaled • • AT16 tempo
• delay de delay
time (en milissegundos)
(in milliseconds)
RouteHabilita
Route Enableso Route
modo Talkback
Talkback toto Selected, para direcionar
Selected mode, to assign othe
sinal eh• isA-Net
sa ot ,eOutput
t ngdistância dda deCard
omfonte eleSthat
tc(em ot kprovides
pés klaT e16
cabmetros)
ou tuochannels
R selbanEofetA-Net uoR
Talkback
Talkbackpara o(s))to
signal scanal(is)
rethe
temcurrently
rode
teesaída
f nselected
i( eselecionado(s).
cruos output
eht ot echannel(s).
cnatsid • •s(ldistance
)output
.• hc tto
nnacompatible
enúmero u pthe
t u o source
de amostrasdwith
e t c e l (in
Aviom®
e s y feet
l t n e ror
r u meters)
Personal
c e h t o tMixers
l a n g i s and
k c a bother
k laT
y a l e d f o s e l p m a s f o r e b m un • Pro16™
• number Series devices.of delay
of samples

36 snoitpO :6 retpahC digital I/O. Chapter 6: Options 63
Tap
Tap
Tap
Tempo
Tempo
TapTempo
Tempo Interaction
Interaction
Interaction
Interaction
Lets you
Permite set the
definir, globalesystem
habilitar tempo,
desabilitar toggleglobal
o tempo systemdotempo
sistema, The Interaction page permite
lets youconfigurar
configureobehaviors for thede Se-
Lets
Letsyou
youset
setthe
theglobal
global
system
systemtempo,
tempo, toggle
togglesystem
system tempo e
tempo A The
página
The Interaction
Interaction
Interactionpage
pagelets
letsyou
youconfigure
configure comportamento
behaviors
behaviorsfor
forthe seções
theSe-
Se-
on/off, por
escolher andapresentá-lo
choose to display
em BPMtempo
ou in BPM or ms.
milissegundos. Selected
lected Channel
Channel (ACS),
(ACS) switches
sections, Input
Input Safe,
Safe Lights,
Switches, Meter,
Lights,Ethernet
on/off,
on/off,and
andchoose
choosetotodisplay
displaytempo
tempoininBPMBPMororms.
ms. lected
lectedChannel
Channel(ACS)
(ACS)sections,
sections,Input
InputSafe
SafeSwitches,
Switches,Lights,
Lights,
e LCDEthernet,
Meter, Display. and LCD Display.
Turna on
OnLiga the global tempo sync by clicking the no
Onswitch
switchON Meter,
Meter,Ethernet,
Ethernet,andandLCD
LCDDisplay.
Display.
On OnOnTurn sincronização
Turnononthe
theglobal global
globaltempo
tempode tempo,
sync
sync clicando
bybyclicking
clicking the
theOn
Onswitch
switch
directly belowabaixo
imediatamente the encoder
do so that para
codificador it is lit
que (on).
se acenda (on).
directly
directlybelow
belowthetheencoder
encodersosothat
thatit itisislitlit(on).
(on).
Tempo Sets aum

TempoDefine system
valor tempo
de tempo value
de using the
sistema encoderoor
utilizando by typ-ou
encoder
TempoSets
Tempo Setsaa
system
system tempo
tempo value
value
using
using the
theencoder
encoder
oror
byby
typ-
typ-
ing a value
digitando um directly
valor into the Tempo
diretamente no field.
campo Tempo.
ing
inga avalue
valuedirectly
directlyinto
intothe
theTempo
Tempofield.
field.
Lets you
UnitsPermite
Units choose Beats
escolher Beats Per
PerMinute
Minute(BPM)
(BPM)orou
Milliseconds
Milliseconds
UnitsLets
Units Lets
youyou
choose
chooseBeats
BeatsPer
PerMinute
Minute(BPM)
(BPM)
oror
Milliseconds
Milliseconds
as
comothe units
unidade for
paradisplayed
os values.
valoresvalues.
apresentados.
asasthe
theunits
unitsfor
fordisplayed
displayed values.
Units On/Off
Units
Units On/Off
On/Off
Tap Tempo
Controles Tap controls
Tempo in the Options
na página Options> > Misc page
Misc
Tap
TapTempo
Tempo controls
controlsinin
the
the
Options
Options >>
Misc
Misc
page
page
Para
For mais
more informações,
information, seeveja
“Tap“Tap Tempo
Tempo para Plug-ins”
for Plug-ins” on na
For
Formore
moreinformation,
information,see
see“Tap
“TapTempo
TempoforforPlug-ins”
Plug-ins”onon Interaction tab of the Options page
página 213.
page 213. Interaction
Interaction
Aba tab
Interaction tab
naofpágina
ofthe
the
Options
Optionspage
Options page
page
page213.
213.
Assignable Channel Selection
Mouse Assignable
Assignable
Assignable Channel
Channel
Channel Selection
Selection
Selection
Mouse
Mouse
Mouse Options in this section set the mechanism by which channels
Options
Optionsinin
this
this
section
section
set
set
the
the
mechanism
mechanism
byby
which
which
channels
channels
Velocidade e Ajustes do Mouse Astargeted
are opções nesta
on theseção definem
Selected Chanosections
mecanismo(alsopelo qualasos
known canais
the
Pointer Speed and Mouse L/R Settings are
aretargeted
targetedon
onthe
theSelected
SelectedChan
Chan sections
sections(also
(alsoknown
knownasasthe
the
Pointer
PointerSpeed
Speedand
andMouse
MouseL/R L/RSettings
Settings são definidos nas seções Selected Chan (também conhecidas como
ACS, or Assignable Channel Section).
Você
Youpode personalizar
can customize thearesponse
velocidade de resposta
speed do trackball
for the trackball (or (ou ACS,
ACS, oror
Assignable
Assignable Channel
Channel Section).
ACS ou Assignable Channel Section).Section).
You
Youcan
mouse) can
docustomize
customize
na thetheresponse
eresponsespeed
speed
for
forthe
thetrackball
trackball(or(or
mouse)e and cursor
on-screentela, reverter
cursor, a ação
and reverse esquerda/direita
the left/right assign-dos
mouse)
mouse)
botões do and
andon-screen
on-screen
trackball na cursor,
página cursor,
and
and
Options reverse
> reverse
Misc. the
theleft/right
left/right assign- ToTo
assign- customize console and screen interaction:
Para personalizar
Tocustomize
customize a interação
console
console and entreinteraction:
andscreen
screen console e tela:
interaction:
ment of the Trackball buttons, from the Options > Misc page.
ment
mentofofthe
theTrackball
Trackballbuttons,
buttons,from
fromthe
theOptions
Options> >Misc
Miscpage.
page. 1 Go to the Options page and click the Interaction tab.
1 1Go
Gototothe
theOptions
Optionspage
pageand
andclick
clickthe
theInteraction
Interactiontab.
tab.
Para personalizar a velocidade (Pointer Speed): 1 Vá à página Options e clique na aba Interaction.
To customize Pointer Speed: 2 Set the following Assignable Channel Selection options:
ToTocustomize
customizePointer
PointerSpeed:
Speed: 2 2Set
Setthe
thefollowing
followingAssignable
AssignableChannel
ChannelSelection
Selectionoptions:
options:
1 1VáGo
à página
to the Options
Options >> Misc.
Misc page. 2 Defina as seguintes opções Assignable Channel Selection:
1 1GoGototothe
theOptions Miscpage.
Options> >Misc page. Change Target By
Change
ChangeTarget
TargetByBy
Doum
2 2Siga anydos
of the following:
2 2Do anyofseguintes
Doany ofthe procedimentos:
thefollowing:
following: Change Target By
• •Para ajustar a velocidade
To adjust cursor speed, click do cursor, clique
the Pointer no menu
Speed pop-uppop-up The Change Target By options let you specify whether the fol-
TheTheChange
ChangeTarget
TargetByByoptions
optionsletletyou
youspecify
specifywhether
whetherthe
thefol-
fol-
• •ToToadjust
Pointer adjust
Speed cursor
cursor speed,
speed,click
click
the
thePointer
Pointer Speed
Speed pop-up
pop-up lowing actions
Change target a channel
Target By on the ACS. More than
asone
menu and choose a higher value for faster response, ormais
e escolha um valor alto para resposta a A lowing
opção
lowing actions
actionstarget
target permite
a achannel
channel on onespecificar
the
theACS. como
ACS.More
Morethan
thanseguintes
one
one
menu
rápidamenuand and choose
choosea ahigher
higher value
valuefor
forfaster
faster
response,
response,orora a option can be selected simultaneously.
lowerouvalue
um valor
for abaixo
slower para resposta
response. mais lenta. ações
option
option atingem
can um canal
canbebeselected
selected no ACS. Mais de uma opção pode ser
simultaneously.
simultaneously.
• Paralowerlower value
value
reverter afor fora aslower
ação slowerresponse.
response. dos dois botões do
esquerda/direita selecionada simultaneamente:
• Touching Input Faders
•trackball,
To reverse
• •ToToreverse
theSwitch
clique
reverse the
left/right
theleft/right
assignment of the two Trackball
Buttons.
left/right assignment
assignmentofofthe thetwo
twoTrackball
Trackball • • • •Engaging
Touching
Touching
Tocar Input
os Input InputFaders
Faders
Input Solos
Faders
buttons, click to enable Switch Buttons.
buttons,
buttons,click
clicktotoenable
enableSwitch
SwitchButtons.
Buttons. • • •Habilitar
Engaging
EngagingInput Solos
Input
InputSolos
Solos
• • • •Touching
Tocar
Touching
Touching
Output
os Output
Output
Output
Faders
Faders
Faders
Faders
• • Engaging
Habilitar Output
OutputSolos
Solos
• • Engaging
EngagingOutput
OutputSolos
Solos
TargetingChanges
Targeting Changes View
ViewMode
Mode
Targeting
TargetingChanges
ChangesView
ViewMode
Mode
A opção
The Targeting
Targeting Changes
Changes ViewView
Mode Mode atualiza
option a apresentação
updates the na
The
TheTargeting
TargetingChanges
ChangesView ViewMode
Modeoption
optionupdates
updatesthe
the
tela para display
on-screen mostrarto a show
páginathe dospage
canais
for especificados. Quando essa
the channel targeted.
on-screen
on-screendisplay
displaytotoshow
showthethepage
pagefor
forthe
thechannel
channeltargeted.
targeted.
opçãothis
When é desmarcada, a apresentação
option is deselected, na tela
the on-screen nãodoes
display é atualizada
not
When
When
quando this
this
option
option
um canal is is
deselected,
deselected,
é especificado. the
theon-screen
on-screen display
display
does
does
not
not
update when a channel is targeted.
update
updatewhen
whena achannel
channelisistargeted.
targeted.

6464 VENUE
VENUEProfile
ProfileGuide
Guide
Meter
Meter Ethernet
EthernetControl
Control
As configurações de medição
Metering settings providedisponibilizam
the followingasoptions
opçõesfor
de meter
indicação
bal- Os ajustes Control
Ethernet Ethernetsettings
Control permitem configurar:
let you configure the following:
Stagepeak
ballistics, Rack Features
e clip.
listics, peak, and clip indication.
Network SettingsEstes
NetworkSettings ajustes
These configuram
settings o ECx Ethernet
let you configure Control
ECx Ether-
Ballistics Esta This
Ballistics opção permite
option letsescolher entre
you choose RMS RMS
or ePeak
Peak para os
ballistics para
net controlar
Control toremotamente a VENUE
remotely control sobreover
VENUE umaarede Ethernet
wireless sem
Ether-
audio I/O
medidores for VENUEdeProfile systems. Up to two Stage Racks
for theda superfície
control surface controle e da tela.
and on-screen meters. fio.
•net
network.
InputInput
ClipClip
Margin or and
Margin Output ClipClip
Output Margin
MarginEstas
Theseopções
optionsdefinem
set the Control
Control Settings Estes
Settings
DVI supported. These ajustes
settings configuram o VENUE
let you configure Link
VENUE para
Link
Audio
o nível,
level, I/O
emrelative
relaçãotoao
thenível máximo(full
maximum (fullscale)
scale), em at
level, que um clip
which é
a clip integrá-la a um
to integrate a sistema Pro
Pro Tools Tools. with VENUE.
system
reportado em um canal. Quando um clip é detectado, todo o medidor • USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
is •reported on with
48 inputs a channel. When
remotely a clip is detected,
controllable the entire
mic preamps and
do canal torna-se vermelho. Para
For mais
more informações
information aboutsobre ECx Ethernet
ECx Ethernet Control,
Control, see veja
channel meter turns
individually red. phantom power.
selectable
DigitalChapter
oSnake Cable
Capítulo
30, 30,(VENUE
“ECx.”“ECx”. Profile Systems
aboutOnly)
Para informações
For information sobre Link,
VENUE o VENUE
• 8 analog output channels; expandable
ou saída:up to 48 analog or Link,veja
Para definir
To set
a margem de clip
Inputoutputs
or Output
de entrada • Thesee the Liveo Recording
connection guia Live Recording.
between FOH .Rack and Stage Rack requires
Guide
digital perclip margin:
Stage Rack.
1 Clique na caixa
1 Click Below dB
in thededBdiálogo MaxBelow Maxfor
edit box Input Clip
emInput Clip Margin
Marginou
or Lights
Lights
Output Clip Margin.
Synchronization
Output and Control I/O
Clip Margin.
Configurações
Console and Console e LED/Display
LED/Display permitem
settings let ajustar
you adjust the obright-
brilho dos
2 Insira um valor
2 Enter ou arraste
a value or dragpara alterarthe
to change o valor
value and pressEnter.
e pressione Enter. seguintes
Optional itens:
Components
ness of the following items:
Theinserido
O valor enteredévalue is interpreted
interpretado como um as avalor
relative
em dBdBrelativo
value from the
a partir Console
The LightsAjusta
Lights
following
Console Adjusto brightness
componentsbrilhoare
das lâmpadas
optional,
of andexternas
external beligadas aos
must connected
lights
do máximo
maximum (em (where
que “Max” é considerado
“Max” is considered+20 dBVU).
+20 PorFor
dBVU). exemplo,
exam- conectores
purchased Console Lights
separately: do painel traseiro.
to the Console Lights connectors on the back panel.
comple,
a margem
with thedo clipeClip
Input de Margin
entradaset(Input Clipbelow
to 6 dB Margin)
maxajustada
(the de-
System
parafault),
6 dB abaixo
Components
do máximo
peak levels within(valor
6 dB padrão),
of maximumpicos level
com 6will
dB trigger
de nívela LEDs
LEDsand Displays Ajusta
and Displays Adjust obrightness
brilho dos displays
of LED LED displays
and LCD e LCD da
máximo
clip vão disparar uma indicação de clip.
indication superfície de controle.
on the control surface.
Clip Clip
HoldHold
TimeTime
e Peak
andHold HoldEstas
PeakTime Time opções especificam
These options quanto
specify how Displays
clipsAll
e VENUE
picos Profile
extensos systems
são include
mantidos. O the following:
padrão é de 2 segundos para Displays
long clips and peaks are held. Default is 2 seconds for both • Dynamic or condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
clipsClip
e•picos.
VENUE
and PeakProfile
hold.console Estas opções permitem personalizar o comportamente dos LCDs da
These options
(for let you customize the behavior of the control
Talkback)
superfície de controle.
• Two (2) IEC power cables surface LCDs.
Switches Input Safe • Footswitches (up to 2)
Input Safe mount
• Monitor Switches
for VGA screen (screen not included) Viewing
• MIDIAngle Esta
cables opção
(for permite
connecting configurar
external MIDI osSelected
displays LCD
Viewing Angle This option lets you configure thedevices)
Os switches Input Safe
• Trackball permitem
mount controlar
(trackball not três funções independents
included) Selected Channel e Snapshots para visualização otimizada.
Channel and Snapshots LCD displays for optimum viewing.
The Input Safe Switches let you control three independent • BNC cables (for connecting Word clock between the
de Safe:
• Automation
VENUE Mouse Safe,
Pad Solo Safe e Bank Safe. Apenas uma
Safetrês
functions: VENUE system and external digital devices)
dessas funções Automation
Safe pode serSafe,
vistaSolo Safe, and Bank
ou controlada Safe.
por vez. Show
ShowChannel
Channel Strip
Strip Value
Value While
While Moving Fader Estaoption
Fader This opção de-
define
• VENUE
Only ProfileSafe
one of these Guide
functions can be viewed and controlled que25-pin
• D-Sub cables (for
otermines
é apresentado
what is displayed inconnecting
no display Channel
the to Name
Name
Channel GPI devices)
quando um fader é
display
at•aAutomation
Act as time. Quando selecionada, essa opção ajusta
Safes lights
Two (2) console ajustado. Quando selecionado (padrão), o display Channel Name se
when a fader is adjusted. When selected (default), the Chan-
os switches Safe da console
• Protective Dust Cover e os botões Safe dos canais da tela altera do nome do canal para o valor (nível). Quando desmarcado,
When selected, this option sets the nel Name display switches from showing channel name to
paraAct as Automation
alternar o status deSafes
Automation Safe do canal correspondente. o display Channel Name não mostra os valores quando um fader é
• Rack(s)
Paraconsole Safe(see next) and on-screen channel Safe buttons to
switches
mais informações, veja o Capítulo 21, “Snapshots”. VENUE
showing the
ajustado. Profile Expansion
value (level) when a fader isOptions
adjusted. When de-
toggle the Automation Safe status of the corresponding chan- selected, the Channel Name displays do not show values
The
when following
a fader options
is can be added to VENUE Profile systems.
adjusted.
Act Racks,
as Solo
nel. Software
ForSafes
more Solo CDs,
Safe
information, iLoks,
é aplicado and Cables
apenas
see Chapter aos
21, Input Channels
“Snapshots.” Show VCA Contribution Esta opção permite apresentar na tela um
e FX Returns. Quando selecionada, essa opção ajusta os switches segundo botão transparentesystems
For details on all VENUE em cada and options,
régua visit
de fader que the Avid
representa
Show VCA Contribution This option lets you display a second-
SafeEach
Act
para Mix
as Rack
Solo oorstatus
Safes
alternar FOH Rack
Solo Safe includes:
applies
de Solo Safeonly to Input
do canal Channels
correspondente. website
um ganho (www.avid.com).
efetivo no canal (ganho do canal mais ganho associado
Vejaand
“Operação de
FX Returns.
• System Bus Solo”
When
Restore na páginathis
CD selected, 121.
option sets the Safe ary,
de transparent
VCA, faderPara
se houver). cap mais
on each on-screen fader
informações, strip that e
veja “Atribuindo
switches to toggle Control
the Solo Software
Safe status of the CD
corresponding represents the effective
Utilizando VCAs” na página 86.gain of the channel (channel gain plus
• ECx Ethernet
Quando
Installer
selecionada,
Mix Rack
associated VCAOptions
gain, if any). For more information, see “As-
Act channel.
as Bank Safes
See “Solo
• Standalone Bus Operation”
Software Installer on essa
CD
opção ajusta os
page 121.
switches Safe de Input Channels e FX Returns para alternar o status signing and Using VCAs” on page 86.
BankAct• as
iLok
Safe dosUSB
Bank Smart
canais.
Safes Key
Bank(for
(OWhen Safestoring
mantém
selected, plug-in
this authorizations)
os canais
option setsnothe
topo das
Safe I/O Options
camadas dos of
switches faders,
• Plug-in Input imune ao agrupamento
Channels
installer discs (ifand
any)FX em
Returns
with bancos).
to toggle
pre-authorized Para
thatmais
iLok AI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
informações,
channel’sveja
Bank“Modo Status.
Bank Safe Para
SafeSwitches Input Safe” na
• Two (2) IECSafe
power cables(Bank keeps channels at the mic/line level inputs
página 46.
top
• fader layer,Link
One FOH immune
cableto
forinput banking.)
connection to For more informa-
a VENUE console
tion, see “Bank Safe Mode for Input Safe Switches” on page 46. AO16 Analog Output Card that provides 16 analog line level


Events
Events
The Events tab of the Options page lets you use the Event List
A aba Events na página Options permite utilizar uma Event List para
to customize
personalizar the function
as funções of switches,
dos switches, footswitches
footswitches and Gen-
e dispositivos
eral Purpose Interface (GPI)-connected devices. For informa-
GPI (General Purpose Interface) conectados. Para informações, veja
tion, see22,
o Capítulo Chapter 22, “Events.”
“Eventos.”
Options > Events page

Página Options > Events
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
The Plug-Ins tab of the Options page is used to install plug-ins
A aba Plug-Ins da página Options é utilizada para instalar plug-ins no
on the
sistema VENUE
VENUE. system.
A aba Theestá
Plug-Ins Plug-Ins tab is apenas
disponível available
emon com-
sistemas
pletecompletos.
VENUE VENUE systems only.disponível
Não está It is not available
na versãoinStandalone
the Stand- do
alone software.
software.

Roteamento de Sinal
67
Chapter 7: Inputs and Input Routing
Capítulo7:
ChapterEntradas e Roteamento
7: Inputs and Inputde Entradas
Routing
This chapter shows how to do the following: 5 Click Apply. The system restarts with the new Input Channel
• Configure inputs (system settings for input channels), configuration.
name channels, Make Stereo and Split to Mono) • Video Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display
Estecan
capítulo
This mostra
bechapter
used como:
simultaneously,
shows how to dosupporting up to 96 total inputs.
the following: 55Clique Apply.
ClickAudio OThe
sistema
Apply.will
recommended; be reinicia
interrupted
system
1024x768 com
when
restarts athis
with
minimum nova
the configuração
configuration
new deand
canais
change
InputVGA
resolution). Channel
• Configurar
• Assignentradas
input sources to Input
(ajustes Channelspara
do sistema in the Patchbay
canais
• Configure inputs (system settings for input channels),
de de entrada.
is applied.
configuration.
DVI supported.
entrada)
Audio
• I/O
Route input channels to Mains, Groups, and Aux Sends,
• Atribuir
name channels,
fontes Make Stereo
de entrada and
paraoutput Split tode
os canais Mono)
entrada no O audio
• Configuring
USBAudio
keyboard é interrupted
and
FXbe interrompido
whenquando
trackball/mouse
Returns (Windowsessacompatible)
alteração
change de
• 48toinputs
Matrix mixers
with and other
remotely controllablebusses, and
mic preampsto plug-ins
and will this configuration
Patchbay
• Assign input sources to Input Channels in the Patchbay configuração é realizada.
•individually
Adjust input channel phantom
parameters is applied.
• Rotear canais
• Route deselectable
input entrada para
channels to Mains,
power.
Mains, Groupsand
Groups, e Aux
Aux Sends,
Sends, VENUE
Digital Mix Rack
Snake Cableand ProfileProfile
(VENUE systems provideOnly)
Systems up to 16 stereo
mixers Matrix
• 8 analog e outros
output busses
channels; de saída, além
expandable upde
toplug-ins
48 analog or Configurando
FX returns. FX
YouReturns
can choose to use either 8 or 16; choosing
to Matrix mixers and other output busses, and to plug-ins •Configuring FX Returns
The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
• Ajustar parâmetros
digital outputs dos
per canais de entrada
Stage Rack. fewer FX Returns leaves more DSP available for plug-ins. For
• Adjust input channel parameters a Digital
Sistemas SnakeMix
VENUE cable. This
Rack cable can
e Profile be purchased
oferecem até directly
1616FXstereo
Returns
Configuring Inputs VENUE
details,Mix
from
estéreo.
see
Avid
Rack and
or
VocêYou
Profile
“Configuring
assembled
pode optar
FX
by
por to
systems
Returns”
your
provide
on page
preferred
utilizar 8 ou 816;
up to
69.
vendor.
Synchronization and Control I/O FX returns. can choose use either orescolher menos FX
16; choosing
Configurando
Two types of Entradas
inputs are available: Input Channels and FX Re- Returns
fewer FXdeixa mais leaves
Returns DSP disponível
more DSP para plug-ins.
available for plug-ins. For
• Snake connectors to enable primary and redundant (if Combining Input Channels (Make Stereo)
Configuring
turns. Inputsto a VENUE FOH Rack.
applicable) connection Optional
details, Components
see “Configuring FX Returns” on
Combinando Input Channels (Make Stereo)
page 69.
Dois tipos de entradas estão disponíveis: Input Channels e FX Pairs of mono input channels can be combined to make stereo
Two types of inputs are available: Input Channels and FX Re- The following components are optional, and must be
Input
Returns. Channels channels, whose deleft and right sides are then
ser controlled
turns.
Pares de canais
Combining
purchased Input
separately:
entrada mono
Channels podem
(Make Stereo)bypara
combinados
formar canais
one input estéreo,
channel em que os lados direito e esquerdo são
strip.
System
Input Input Channels
Channels Components
are used to control inputs from stage and mix • USB
Pairs flash
of mono
controlados disk (or
por input
uma other
channels
única portable
réguacan
debe USBdestorage
combined
canal device
to make
entrada. for
stereo
position
Input Channels(local) audio inputs, from Pro Tools, or from bus-fed transfer of Show data;right
512 sides
MB orare
larger recommended)
channels, whose
To combine left and
two mono input channels then
into controlled
a single stereo by
Input plug-ins.
Channels são utilizados para controle das entradas de áudio Para
Included Components • combinar
one input
channel: dois
Near-field
channel canais
monitor mono emfor
strip.speakers ummix
único canal estéreo:
position monitoring
do palco
Input e da posição
Channels de mixagem,
are used to controldo Pro Tools
inputs from ou de and
stage plug-ins
mix
Input
alimentados
position channels
por can be
bus.audio
(local) monofrom
inputs, or stereo.
Pro Each or
Tools, mono
from channel
bus-fed • Headphones with 1/4-inch jack
1 Put the system into Config mode.
All VENUE Profile systems include the following: Coloque
1To o sistema no modo Config.
combine two mono input channels into a single stereo
controls one input, and each stereo channel controls two in-
plug-ins. • Dynamic or condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
• VENUE
Os Input
puts channels Profile
in tandem. podem console
Inputserchannels
mono oucan estéreo.
appearCadaon anycanal mono
of the inchannel:
2 Select two mono channels by doing either of the following:
(for Talkback)
2 Selecione dois canais mono seguindo um dos seguintes
controla
• uma
Input Two entrada,
channels
(2) IEC cane cada
be mono
power canal
cables estéreo
or stereo. controla
Each duasmaximum,
mono entradas.
channel • On
the the console, press
put channel strips. Up to 96 mono input channels, Put
procedimentos:
1 system
• Footswitches into
(up to 2) and
Config hold the Multi-Select switch,
mode.
Canais •deMonitor
controls
are entradas
available, podem
one input, and
depending
mount serVGA
for configurados
each stereo
on your
screen systemparaand
channel
(screen qualquer
controls
rack
not régua de
two in-
configura-
included) • • Na then press Select
console, on each
pressione e of the two
segure o mono channel
switchdevices) strips e
Multi-Select
canal de entrada. Até um máximo de 96 canais de entrada mono MIDI
2 Select twocables
mono (for connecting
channels external
by doing MIDI
either of the following:
puts
tion.inInput
tandem. Inputare
channels channels
displayedcanin appear
bankson onany
the of
16the in-
control pressione
you want Select em cada uma das réguas de canais mono que
to combine.
estão •disponíveis,
Trackball mount
dependendo(trackballdas not included)
configurações de racks e do
put channel strips. Up tostrips.
96 mono input channels, maximum, ••você
BNC cables
On deseja
the (for connecting
console, press and hold
combinar. Word clock
the between switch,
Multi-Select the
surface input channel – or –
• VENUE
sistema. Canais de Mouse Pad são apresentados em bancos nas 16
entrada
are available, depending on your system and rack configura- – ou –VENUE
then press system
Select and
onexternal
each of thedigital
twodevices)
mono channel strips
réguas• deVENUE
canais Profile
de entrada da superfície de controle. • • •Na On-screen, go to the Inputs pageuma
and click
tion. Input channelsGuide are displayed in banks on the 16 control youtela,
25-pin vá
want àtopágina
D-Sub combine.
cables Inputs
(for e clique
connecting GPI adevices)
torégua faderselecionar
para strip to
FX Returns select the first mono channel, then hold Shift
o primeiro canal mono, segure Shift e clique para selecionar and click o
• Twoinput
surface (2) console
channellightsstrips. – orto – select the second mono channel you want to combine.
FX Returns segundo canal mono que você deseja combinar.
Effects Return
• Protective Dust channels
Cover (or FX Returns) are used to control sig-
• On-screen, go to the Inputs page and click a fader strip to
Canaisnals from
FX• Effects bus-fed
Rack(s)Return plug-ins,
(ou FX Returns) fromsãoexternal hardware,
utilizados or from
para controlar 3 Right-click either of the selected mono channels on-screen
Returns (see next) 3VENUE
Clique com
select Profile
the o first
botão monoExpansion
direito em umthen
channel, dosOptions
canais
hold cono
Shift andna tela e
click
Pro Tools.
sinais dos plug-ins alimentados por bus, de dispositivos externos ou and to choose Make Selected Mono Strips Stereo.
escolha Make
selectSelected
the second MonomonoStrips Stereo.
channel you want to combine.
Effects
do Pro Tools.Return channels (or FX Returns) are used to control sig- The following options can be added to VENUE Profile systems.
Racks,
FX Returns
nals
Software
from bus-fedare alwaysCDs,
plug-ins,
iLoks,
stereo, and
from
and
appear
external
Cables
on input channel
hardware, or from 3 Right-click
For details on either
all VENUE of the selected
systems mono
and channels
options, visit on-screen
the Avid
strips
FX Returns
Pro 1–8
são
Tools. and
sempre 9–16. Up
estéreo, toe 16 stereo
aparecem FX
nas Returns
réguas arecanais
de available.
de and choose Make Selected Mono Strips Stereo.
entrada 1–8 e 9–16. Até 16 FX Returns estéreo estão dispoiníveis.
FX• Returns
System are
Restore
alwaysCDstereo, and appear on input channel
Configuring
• ECx1–8Ethernet
Configurando
strips Input Input
Up toChannels
Control
Channels
and 9–16. Software
16 stereo Installer
FX ReturnsCDare available. Mix Rack Options
To set othe
Para definir number
número deofInput
available Input Channels:
Channels:
• iLok USB Smart
Configuring InputKey (for storing plug-in authorizations)
Channels I/O Options
• Plug-in
1 Coloque installer
o sistema discsConfig.
no modo (if any) with pre-authorized iLok AI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
To
2•set
Go
Twothe number
to (2)
the IEC of available
Options
powerpage and
cables Input Channels:
click the System tab. mic/line level inputs
Two mono inputs about to be combined into one stereo channel
2 Vá à•página Options
One FOH e clique
Link na aba
cable for System. to a VENUE console
connection Duas entradas mono sendo combinadas em um canal estéreo
13 Put theEdit.
Click system into Config mode.
3 Clique
24 Go
Each Edit.
to the
Stage
Choose Options
Rack
the page
of and
includes:
number click the
channels fromSystem tab.Channels
the Input outputs
Two mono inputs about to be combined into one stereo channel
pop-up menu.
3 •Click
TwoEdit.
(2) IEC power cables
4 Escolha o número de canais no menu pop-up Input Channels. XO16 Analog and Digital Output Card that provides 8 analog
4 Choose the number of channels from the Input Channels line level outputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.
pop-up menu.
AT16 A-Net Output Card thatChapter 7: Inputs
provides and Input
16 channels A-Net 69
of Routing
Chapter 7: Inputs and Input Routing 69
digital I/O.
Capítulo7: Entradas e Roteamento de Entradas 69
Each selected channel is combined with the next-highest se-
Each
Cada selected
canal channeléiscombinado
selecionado combinedcom withothe next-highest se- Assigning Input Sources to Channels
lected
Each channel,
selected even is
channel if combined
the selected thepróximo
channels
with selecionado
are not
next-highest contigu-
se- Assigning InputSources Sources to Channels
Each selected channel is combined with the next-highest se-
lected
(superior), channel,
ous. Blank
lected
mesmo
channel, strips
even
que
even
os if the
canais
areifcreated
selected channels
selecionados
and inserted
the selected channels
não
where
are not
sejam contigu-
contíguos.
necessary
are not contigu- to Designando
Assigning
Assigning Fontes
Input Input de Entrada
Sources toa Canais
Channels
to Channels
lected channel, even if the selected channels
Réguas em branco são criadas e inseridas onde necessário para
ous. Blank strips are created and inserted where are not
necessary contigu-
to Inputs sources are assigned to Input Channels or FX Returns
maintain
ous. channel
Blank strips are layout
createdinand thatinserted
bank. Parameter values from
where necessary to Inputs sources are assigned to Input Channels or FX Returns
ous.
manter
maintain Blank
o layuot strips
dos
channel are created
canais
layout daquele
in that and inserted
banco.
bank. Os where
valores
Parameter necessary
devalues fromto Inputs
parâmetros in thesources
Patchbay.
are Available
assigned to input sources
Input for Input
Channels Channels
or FX Returns or
the leftmost
maintain channelchannel
layout ofin
each in Inputs
Fontes sources
de entrada
the Patchbay. are são
assigned
Available inputto sources
designadasInputpara
Channels
Inputor
for Input FX Returns
Channels
Channels ou
or FX
do canal
the esquerdo
maintain
leftmost channelde
channel cada parthat
layout
of each
pair
são
in pair
are Parameter
bank. applied
aplicados
that bank.
are em to
Parameter
applied to
bothos
values
ambos
both
chan-
from
values canais
chan- from inFX
the Returns include:
Patchbay. Available input sources for Input Channels or Input
Returns
in the no Patchbay.
Patchbay.
FX Returns include: Fontes
Available de
input entrada
sources disponíveis
for Input para
Channels or
onels,
ethe andpan
leftmost
controle
the and
nels,
the
leftmost
pan control
channel
the torna-se
channel
pan control
eachbecomes
ofcontrole
of each
pair are aapplied
Balance/Width
Balance/Width.
becomes pairaare applied to both
Balance/Width
control.
to both chan-
chan- FXChannels
control. Returns include:
nels, and the pan control becomes a Balance/Width control. FX• Stage ou
Returns FX
inputs Returns
(Mix Rack
include: incluem:
stage I/O, or Stage Rack)
nels, and channels
Combined
Canais
the pan control
combinados sãoare shownbecomes
apresentados in thea patchbay
Balance/Width
patchbayas left control.
and • • ••Stage
•
Stage inputs (Mix Rack stage I/O, or Stage Rack)
Entradas
inputs
Local FOH
Stage
de(Mix
palcoRack
inputs
inputs (Mix
(entradas
(2-Track
Rack stage
e saídas
stage sources,
I/O, Mix Rack
or Stage ou Stage Rack)
Rack)Oscillator)
I/O, Talkback,
or Stage Rack)
Combined channels are shown in thenopatchbay as como
left and lados
• • Entradas
Local FOH inputs
locais (2-Track
(fontes sources,
2-Track, Talkback,
Talkback, Oscillator)
Oscillator)
right
Combined
esquerdo sides of
e direitothe
channels Input
are Channel
shown in name.
the FX
patchbayReturns
as are
left andalways • Local FOH inputs (2-Track sources, Talkback, Oscillator)
Combined
right sides the do
of channels
Inputnome
are do Input
shown
Channel name. Channel.
in the FX FX Returns
patchbay
Returns as
areleft and
always são
• •• •Saídas
Pro
Pro
Tools
Local FOH
do
Tools
outputs
Proinputs
(HDx
Tools(HDx
outputs
or FWx)
(2-Track
(HDx sources, Talkback, Oscillator)
ou FWx)
or FWx)
stereo,
right
sempre sidessoofthey
estéreo, the cannot
portanto be combined
Input Channel
não podem name.ser or
FXsplit.
Returns are
combinados always
ou divididos.
right
stereo, sides
so theyof the Input
cannot be Channel
combined
stereo, so they cannot be combined or split.
name.
or FX Returns
split. are always • • •Saídas
• •Pro Tools
Plug-In outputs
outputs
de
Pro Tools
Plug-In Plug-Ins (HDx or
outputs (HDx or FWx)
outputs
FWx)
stereo, so they cannot be combined or split. • Plug-In outputs
• Plug-In outputs
Para
To designar
assign umasource
an input fonte de
to anentrada
Input aChannel
um canal Input
or FX Channel ou
Return:
To assign an input source to an Input Channel or FX Return:
ToFX Return:
assign an input source to an Input Channel or FX Return:
1 ToGoassign
to thean input source
Patchbay page to
and anclick
InputtheChannel
Inputsor FX Return:
tab.
1 Go to the Patchbay page and click the Inputs tab.
1 1GoVá to the
àthe
páginaPatchbay
Patchbaypage and
epage
clique click the
naclick
aba the Inputs
Inputs. tab.
21 ToGo toleft
theof Patchbay
the channel and
grid, click theChannels
Inputs tab.tab or the
2 To the left of the channel grid, click the Channels tab or the
Stereo Input Channel in the Patchbay
Stereo Input Channel na página Patchbay Input Input page To
2 FX the
Returnsleft tab.
of the channel grid, click the Channels tab or the
Stereo Input Channel in the Patchbay Input page To the tab.
2 2ÀReturns
FX esquerda leftdo
ofgrid
the de
channel
canais, grid, click
clique natheabaChannels
Channels tab
ouornathe
aba
Stereo Input Channel in the Patchbay Input page FX Returns tab.
OnStereo Input Channel
the console, in the Patchbay
the channel Input LED
St (Stereo) page lights to indicate FX
3 FX Returns
Returns.
Click the tab. FOH, or Pro Tools tab to display the desired
Stage,
Na Onconsole, o LED the
the console, St (stereo)
channeldoSt canal se LED
(Stereo) acende indicando
lights que
to indicate 3 Click the Stage, FOH, or Pro Tools tab to display the desired
On that
theaconsole,
channelthe is achannel
stereo channel.
St (Stereo) LED lights to indicate
esse é um
On
that athecanal stereo.
console,
channel is athe channel
stereo channel.St (Stereo) LED lights to indicate 3 type Clickofthe
3 Click
input sources.
Stage, FOH, or Pro Tools tab to display the desired
that a channel is a stereo channel. type
type of nathe
of input
3 Clique input aba Stage,
sources.
sources. FOHor
Stage,FOH, ouPro Tools tab
ProTools paratomostrar
display the desired
o tipo desejado
that a channel is a stereo channel. type ofin input sources.grid to assign an input source to an In-
Todividir
split aum stereo de
4 Click
fonte dethe channel
entrada.
Para canalchannel
estéreointo two canais
em dois mono channels:
mono: 4 Click in the channel grid to assign an input source to an In-
To split a stereo channel into two mono channels: 4 put
ClickChannel or FX Return.
in the channel grid to assign an input source to an In-
To split a stereo channel into two mono channels: put4 Click
Channel in the
or channel
FX grid
Return. to assign an input source to an In-
1 To
Putsplit
theasystem
stereo intochannel intomode.
Config two mono channels: 4 Clique no grid deReturn.
canais para designar uma fonte de entrada para
1 Coloque
1 Put the o sistema
system no intomodo Config.
Config mode. put Channel or FX
put Channel or FX Return.
Put the
2 1Select the system into Config
stereo channel you mode.
want to split. um Input Channel ou FX Return
2 Select the stereo channel you want to split.
22Selecione
Select the o canal
stereoestéreo
channel que
you deseja
wantdividir.
to split.
Select thethe
3 2Right-click stereo channel
selected channelyou want to split.Split Selected
and choose
3 Right-click the selected channel and choose Split Selected
Right-click
Stereo
33Clique Stripothe
com selected
tobotão
Mono. channel and choose Split SelectedSplit
3 Right-click
Stereo Strip to Mono.the selected channel and chooseeSplit
direito no canal selecionado escolha
Selected
Selected
Stereo Strip
Stereo Stereo Strip
to Mono.
Strip to to
Mono. Mono.
Each selected stereo channel is split, placing the channels next
Each selected stereo channel is split, placing the channels next
Cadato each
Each canal other
selectedestéreo on selecionado
stereo the console
channel and
is split, in the Patchbay.
placing
é isdividido, e osthecanaisBlank
channels strips
next
resultantes
toEach
each selected
other onstereo channel
the console and split,
in theplacing
Patchbay.the channels
Blank next
strips
toare
each
colocadosdeleted
other to
onmaintain
próximos theum console
ao channel
outroand na in layout.
the Patchbay.
console e no Blank strips
patchbay. Réguas
to each other on the console
are deleted to maintain channel layout. and in the Patchbay. Blank strips
em
arebranco
deleted sãoto excluídas
maintainpara manter
channel o layout de canais.
layout.
are deleted to maintain channel layout.
Assigning input sources in the Patchbay Inputs page
Naming
Nomeando Channels
Canais
Assigning input sources in the Patchbay Inputs page
Naming Channels Assigning input sources in the Patchbay InputsInputs
page
Naming Channels
Naming Channels
Naming Channels
Assigning
Designando
The Inputs input
fontes
tabdesources
ofentrada in
nathe Patchbay
página
the Patchbay showsInputs
Patchbay page source and
the input
The Inputs tab of the Patchbay shows the input source and
Input Channel and FX Return channel names can be changed
Os Input
nomesChannel
dos Input
andChannel e doschannel
FX Return FX Return podem
names can ser
be changed destination
alterados The Inputs tababove
of thethe grid. Input
Patchbay source
shows is alsosource
the input shownand below
fromChannel
Input the Inputsandpage or fromchannel
FX Return the Patchbay.
names can be changed A The
aba
the
Inputs
destination
Inputs
channel
destination
tab
above
name
above
ofthe
do the thegrid.
Patchbay
in
Patchbay
the
grid.
Input shows
mostra
Inputs
Input
source
a fonte
and
source
the
isde
Patchbay
is also
input
also source
shown
entrada
Inputs
shown o and
below
epage.
below destino
Input
na from
aba Channel
Inputs da and
página FX Return
Patchbay. channel
the Inputs page or from the Patchbay. names can be changed destination above the grid. Input source is also shown belowdo
from the Inputs page or from the Patchbay. the channel name in the Inputs and Patchbay Inputs
sobre o grid. A fonte de entrada também é apresentada abaixo page.
from the Inputs page or from the Patchbay. the channel name in the Inputs and Patchbay Inputs page.
the channel
nome do canal name in the Inputs
nas páginas Inputseand Patchbay
Patchbay Inputs page.
Inputs.
Toalterar
Para change o the name
nome de umof an Input
canal Channel
Input or ou
Channel FX FX
Return channel:
Return:
To change the name of an Input Channel or FX Return channel:
To change the name of an Input Channel or FX Return channel:
1 To
Gochange the name
the Patchbay of an
page and Input
clickChannel
the Inputsor FX Return channel:
tab.
1 àGo
1 Vá the Patchbay
página Patchbaypage andna
e clique click
abathe Inputs tab.
Inputs.
1 Go the Patchbay page and click the Inputs tab.
Go the
2 1Target thePatchbay
channel page
whoseand clickyou
name thewant
Inputstotab.
change by
2 Target the channel whose name you want to change by Input source assignment shown in the Inputs page
22Selecione
pressing o canal
its
Target the Selectdo
channel qual deseja
switch
whose orname alterar
selecting
you it oon-screen.
want nome pressionando
to change by Input source assignment shown in the Inputs page
o Input
2 Target
pressing itsthe channel
Select whose
switch or name you
selecting it want to change by
on-screen. source assignment shown in the Inputs page
switch Select ou selecionando-o na tela. A Input
singlesource
input assignment
source can shown in the Inputs
be assigned page
to multiple Input Chan-
pressing its Select switch or selecting it on-screen. Designação
A de fonte
single input de entrada
source canapresentada
be assignedna página Inputs Input Chan-
to multiple
3 pressing its Select
Double-click switch orname.
the channel selecting it on-screen. A nels
single or FX
input Returns
source (you
can can
be fan out
assigned atosource to
multiple multiple
Input chan-
Chan-
3 Double-click the channel name. A single
nels or FX input
Returns source
(you can
can be
fanassigned to multiple
out a source Inputchan-
to multiple Chan-
Double-click
33Clique duas vezes theno
channeldo name.
3 Double-click thenome
channelcanal.
name. nels).
nels
Uma Gain
orfonte
FX
nels Gain
nels).
decontrol,
Returns (you
entrada
or FXcontrol,
phantom
can ser
pode
Returns phantom
(you can fan
power
fandesignada
out
power
andpara
a source
outand
pad
a source
settings
tovários
multiple are
chan-
Input
to multiple
pad settings
Channels
are chan-
ounels).
FX
linked
nels). Returns
Gainacross (você
the
control,
Gain control, pode
channels.
phantom distribuir
phantom
Each
power umaChannel
Input
and fonte
pad
padpara vários
or FX
settings canais).
areReturn
linked across the channels. Eachpower
Input and
Channel settings are
or FX Return
Controle
may
linked be deby
fed
across ganho,
theonly phantom
one input
channels. power
Eachsource
Inpute (multiple
ajuste
Channelde sources
pad
or FXsão vinculados
cannot
Return
maylinked across
be fed the channels.
by only input Each
oneChannel source Input Channel or FX Return
aosrouted
be
may canais.
be fed by toCada Input
a single
only onechannel).
input source FX(multiple
ou (multiple sources
Return sources
pode ser cannot
alimentado
cannot
be may be fed
routed to abysingle
only channel).
one input source (multiple sources cannot
beapenas
routed porto auma
singlefonte (várias fontes não podem ser roteadas para
channel).
um beúnico
routed to a single channel).
canal).
Assigning Bus-Fed Plug-Ins, Osc/Talkback/2-Track
Changing the name of an Input Channel in the Inputs page Assigning Bus-Fed Plug-Ins, Osc/Talkback/2-Track
Changing
Alterando thedename
o nome of an
um Input Inputna
Channel Channel in the Inputs page
página Inputs Assigning Bus-Fed
Assigning Plug-Ins,
Bus-Fed Osc/Talkback/2-Track
Plug-Ins,
Changing the name of an Input Channel in the Inputs page Atribuindo
Bus-fed Plug-Ins,
plug-ins be patchedOsc/Talkback/2-Track
canOsc/Talkback/2-Track
to Input Channels and FX Re-
4 Changing the name
Type a new nameofand
an Input
pressChannel
Enter onin the
theInputs page key-
computer Bus-fed plug-ins can be patched to Input Channels and FX Re-
4 Type a new name and press Enter on the computer key- turns from
Bus-fed the can
plug-ins Plug-In Rack (see
be patched “UsingChannels
to Input Plug-Ins and
as a FX
BusRe-
Pro-
Digite
Type a um
44 board. new novo
name nome
and presse pressione
Enter on the Enter no teclado
computer key- do Bus-fed
turns from plug-ins can be
the Plug-In patched
Rack to Input
(see “Using Channels
Plug-Ins as aand
BusFX Re-
Pro-
4 Type a new name and press Enter on the computer key-
board. Plug-ins
cessor”
turns fromonalimentados
page
the por
160).Rack
Plug-In bus
(see podem
“Using ser designados
Plug-Ins as a Buspara
Pro- Input
computador.
board. turns on
cessor” from the
page Plug-In aRack
160). (see “Using Plug-Ins as a“Utilizando
Bus Pro-
board. Channels ou FX
cessor” on page 160).
Returns partir do Plug-In Rack (veja
When naming channels in the Patchbay, you can dou- cessor”
Plug-Ins on page
um 160).
When naming channels in the Patchbay, you canclicar
dou- duas You can Como
also route Processador Bus” na página
the built-in Oscillator, 160).input, and
Talkback
Quando
ble-click
When nomerar canais
the channel
naming channels inno
name thePatchbay,
shown você
in the
Patchbay, pode
columns
you can canof dou-
dou- the You can also route the built-in Oscillator, Talkback input, and
When
ble-click
vezes no naming
the channels
channel
nome do in the Patchbay,
nameapresentado
canal shown in thenas you
columns
colunasof the
dothegrid 2-Track
You sources
can also routetotheinput channels
built-in (see “Routing
Oscillator, Talkbackthe Oscilla-
input, and
grid and
ble-click type
the a name;
channel press
name Tab
shown onin the keyboard
the columns toofgo
theto Youtambém
2-Track
Você can alsopode
sources route the built-in
to input
rotearchannels
o Oscillator,
Oscillator, Talkback
(seea“Routing
entrada input,
the Oscilla-
Talkback and
e fontes
ble-click
egrid and um
digitar the
type a channel
name;
nome. name
press
Pressione Tabshown nointeclado
on the
Tab the columns
keyboard to goirof
para the
topara
the o 2-Track sources
tor” on page 128).to input channels (see “Routing the Oscilla-
next
grid andchannel and
typetype
a name; Shift+TabTabto
presspress ongothe
tokeyboard
thekeyboard
previous
to gochannel.
togothe 2-Track
tor” sources
on page
2-Track para 128).
canaisto input channels
de entrada (veja(see “Routingothe
“Roteando Oscilla- na
Oscillator”
grid
próximo
next and
channel eaShift+Tab
canal and name;
Shift+Tab paraTab
to on
to the
ir para
go the previous to
o anterior. channel.to the tor” on page 128).
nextnext
channel and Shift+Tab to go to the previous channel. tor” on
página page 128).
128).
channel and Shift+Tab to go to the previous channel.

Routing Channels to Aux Sends
Routing Input Channels
Input channels and FX Returns can be routed to Aux sends us-
Routing
Routing
Roteando Channels
Channels
Canais para Auxto to
Aux
Sends Aux Sends
Sends
Routing
Routing
Input
Roteando Input
channels Input
and FXChannels
Channels
Returns can be routed to the Mains, ing the input encoders, using the ACS, or on-screen.
Groups/Var Canais
Groups, de Entrada
Auxes, Matrix mixers and PQ busses. Input
Input
channels
channels
and and
FX FX
Returns
Returns
cancanbe routed
be routed
to Aux
to Aux
sends
sends
us- us-
Input channels e FX Returns podem ser endereçados para mandadas
Input
Input
channels
channels
Rackand and
FX FX
Returns
Returns
cancan
be routed
be routed
to the
to the
Mains,
Mains,
Stage Features ing
To Additional
ing
the
route
Aux the
inputinput
channels
utilizando Required
encoders,
osencoders,
to Auxusing
sends
codificadores Components
using
the
dethe
ACS,
using ACS,
theorinput
entrada, on-screen.
or on-screen.
ACSencoders:
ou na tela.
Input channelsGroups,
Groups/Var
Groups/Vare FX Returns
Groups, podem
Auxes,
Auxes,
Matrixsermixers
Matrixendereçados
mixers PQpara
andand PQ os busses
busses.
busses.
Routing
Mains,
Stage Channels
Groups/Var
Racks are Groups, toanthe
Auxes,
used with FOH Mains
mixers
Rack, and
Matrix
ande provide
PQ. all stage Pressfollowing
1 The an Encoder assign Send
components switch
must 1–2 through
be purchased 15–16.
separately:
Groups Busses ToPara
route rotear
To route channelscanais
channels to para
Aux
to Aux mandadas
sendssendsusing Aux
using
thethe utilizando
inputinput
encoders:os codificadores
encoders:
Routing
Routing Channels
Channels •• Video
de The first
entrada: press (15-inch
Display of an Auxor Send switch
greater assigns VGA
flat-panel level control
display
RoteandobeCanais
can channels para Bussesto
used simultaneously,
to
the
Mains theMains
Mains
e Groups and andtotal inputs. 1 Press
1 ofPress
an an Encoder
Encoder assign
assign SendSendswitch
switch 1–21–2 through
through
The15–16. 15–16.
Input and FX Returnssupporting up to
can be routed to96
the Mains the
recommended; odd-numbered 1024x768 send to the
minimum encoders.
resolution). switch
VGA and
Groups
Groups Busses
Busses • The
•
1 PressioneThe
lights firstfirst
greenpress
um topress
dosof an
of Aux
an
switches
indicate Aux
Send
an deSendswitch
switch assigns
assigns
atribuição deselection.
odd-numbered levellevel
control
codificadores control1–2
and channels
Input Groups busses using the
e FX Returns podemBus serAssigns section of
endereçados paratheosACS.busses DVI supported.
Audio
Input
Input I/O
channels
channels and andFX FX
Returns
Returns can canbe routed
be routed to the
to the
MainsMains a • 15–16.
of
The the
of the
odd-numbered
second odd-numbered
press of an send
Auxsendto
Send the
to the
encoders.
switch encoders.
assignsThe The
switch
level switch
con-
Mains e Groups utilizando a seção Bus Assigns do ACS.
and
To andGroups
• 48
route Groups
one busses
inputs
or busses
more using
with using
thethe
remotely
input Buscontrollable
channels Bus
Assigns
to Assigns
Mains section
section
mic
and of the
of busses
preamps
Groups the
ACS. ACS.
and • • USB
lights
trol
keyboard
A lights
primeira
ofgreen
thegreen toand
vez que
even-numbered
trackball/mouse
indicate
to o switch
indicate an ansend é
odd-numbered (Windows
pressionado
odd-numbered
to the encoders.
compatible)
atribui
selection.
selection.
The o controle
de
• switch
The
• The nível
second dos
second números
press press
of an of ímpares para o codificador. O switch
con-se
Para
on therotear um ou mais
console:
individually canaisphantom
selectable para busses power. Mains e Groups na lights yellow to Aux
an Aux
Send
indicate Sendswitch
an switch assigns
even-numbered assigns levellevel
con-
selec-
DigitalacendeSnake emCableverde (VENUE
para indicar Profile Systems
a seleção do Only)
número ímpar.
console:
To route
To route8one one
or troltrol
tion. of the
of theeven-numbered
even-numbered send sendto the
to theencoders.
encoders. TheThe
1 Do• either analogof more
or more
outputinputinput
channels
channels
channels; to Mains
to Mains
expandable andupand
Groups
toGroups busses
48 analog busses
or • • The A segunda vez que o switch é Rack
pressionado atribui
Racko requires
controle de
the following:
on the
on the console:
console: switch connection
switch lights
lights between
yellowyellow to FOH
indicate
to indicate an andeven-numbered
an Stage
even-numbered selec-
• To digital outputs per Stage Rack. nível dos números pares para o codificador. O switch se selec-
acende
1 Siga umselect a single channel,
dos seguintes procedimentos:press its Select switch. ation.
Digital
tion. Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
em amarelo para indicar a seleção do número par.
• •Para
1 Do1 Do either
either
To select
of
selecionar the
of
multiple
the
following:
following:
um único canal,press
channels, pressione
Select on seuthe switch
firstSelect.
chan- from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
• Synchronization
•ParaTo
• To
nel, selectselect
athe
selecionar
hold
and
single
vários Control
a Multi-Select
singlechannel,
channel,
canais,I/O
presspress
its
pressione
switch Select
its Select
(located switch.
Select switch.
to the noleftprimeiro
of
•canal,
•To
• Snake
the segure
select
Toinput o switch
connectors
select
multiple
multiple
faders), Multi-Select
to enable
channels,
thenchannels,
presspress
the (localizado
primary
press
Select
Select and
Select
on on à esquerda
redundant
the
switches the
first
onfirst
chan- dos
(if
thechan-
Encoders
faders
nel,nel,
other
de
hold entrada),
applicable)
holdthethe
channels.
e
connectionpressione
Multi-Select
Multi-Select to a
switch os
VENUE
switch switches
(located FOH
(located Select
Rack.
to theto the os outros
leftleft
of of
Optional Components
canais. Encoders
Encoders
thethe inputinput faders),
faders),thenthenpress
press
thethe SelectSelect
switches
switches on on thethe The following components are optional, and must be
2 To route to Mains, press the L–R (left and right) and/or Aux
otherotherchannels.
channels. purchased separately:
Para rotear
2 C/Mono para Mains, pressione
(center/mono) switch inothe switchBusL–R (left/right)
Assigns section e/ou
so C/ Sends
2 System
Mono
that2 (center/mono)
To isTo
routeroute
lit. Components
to Mains,
to napress
Mains, seção
press Bus
the the
L–R Assigns
L–R para
(left(left
and and que
right) fique
right)and/or aceso.
and/or AuxAux
C/Mono
C/Mono (center/mono)
(center/mono) switch
switch
in the
in the BusBus Assigns
Assigns section
section so so SendsSends transfer of Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
– ou––or –
thatthat
is lit.
is lit.
 To route to a Group bus, press a Groups 1–8 switch.
– or–rotear
 Para –or – para um bus Group, pressione um switch Groups 1–8. • Headphones with 1/4-inch jack
The L–R, C/M and • Dynamic or condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
To
 •To
route route
VENUE to ato a 1–8
GroupGroup
Profile
Busbus,
bus, Assign
console press aLEDs
press Groups on each
a Groups 1–81–8 channel
switch.light
switch.
OLED Bus Assign L–R, C/M ou 1–8 Bus se acende em cada canal Encoder (for Talkback)
assignment switches for input channels
to indicate routing to the corresponding busses.
para indicar
• Twoo(2) roteamento
IEC power aocables
bus correspondente.
TheThe L–R, L–R,C/M C/Mandand 1–81–8BusBusAssign
AssignLEDs LEDson on eacheach channel
channel light 2 For• each
light Footswitches
channel you (up wantto 2) to assign to the selected Aux
to•indicate
to indicate Monitorrouting mount
routing tofor
to the theVGA screen (screen
corresponding
corresponding busses. not included)
busses. Encoder
Encoder
Switches assignment
deassignment
atribuiçãoswitches
de switches for input
codificadoresforpara
input
channels
channels
canais de entrada
• MIDI cables (for
Send bus, press its channel encoder so connecting external
that itsMIDI “On”devices)
indicator
• Trackball mount (trackball not included) 2 For
2 For
each
LED •lights. eachchannel
channel you youwant wantto assign
to assign to the
to the
selected
selected AuxAux
Mains 2 Para cada canal que você deseja endereçar ao bus the
BNC cables (for connecting Word clock between Aux Send,
• VENUE Mouse Pad Send Sendbus, bus,
press press
VENUE system its channel
its channel
and até encoder
encoder
external so that
so that
devices)“On” indicator
its “On”
its “On” indicator
3 pressione
To set theseu Auxcodificador
Send level, doque odigital
either LED of indicador
the following: se acenda.
• Mains
VENUE Profile Guide LED LEDlights.
lights.
Mains • 25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
• Turn the encoder on each channel.
• Two (2) console lights 3 3 Para
3 To To
set set ajustar
the the
AuxAux o Send
Send nível
level, dodoAux
level, do
eitherSend,
either ofsiga
of the the um
following: dos seguintes
following:
• Press the Flip to Faders switch, then adjust the channel
procedimentos:
Groups • • fader.
Turn
•Gire
Turn the the
encoder
encoder
o codificador ondeoneach
cadaeach
channel.
channel.
canal.
• Rack(s) (see next) • VENUE•Pressione
• Press PressthetheProfile
oFlip
Flip switch
to Faders Expansion
Flip
to Faders to Faders
switch,
switch, thenethen Options
ajuste
adjust o the
adjust faderthe do
channel canal.
channel
Groups
Groups To routefader.
fader.
channels to Aux Sends busses using the ACS:
The rotear
Para following canais options can be added
para mandadas Auxto VENUE Profile
utilizando o ACS: systems.
Do either
1 For detailsof ontheallfollowing:
VENUE systems and options, visit the Avid
To route
To route channels
channels to Auxto Aux SendsSendsbusses
busses using usingthetheACS: ACS:
Each Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes: 1website
•Siga um(www.avid.com).
To select dos seguintes
a single procedimentos:
channel, press its Select switch.
1 •
Do1 Do either
Para eitherof theof the
selecionar following:
following:
• System Restore CD Stereo Pan • To select multipleum único canal,
channels, presspressione
Select on seu switch
the first Select.
chan-
• • nel,
ToPara
• To select
hold
selecionar
select
athe
single vários
a Multi-Select
single channel, canais,
channel, press
switch
pressione
press
its Select
its Select
(located
Select
switch.
to theswitch. no
left of
primeiro
Bus
Assign switches Stereo
StereoPan Pan
Mix Rack
canal, segureOptionso switch Multi-Select (localizado à esquerda dos
Switches Bus Assign
• Standalone Software Installer CD • the
To
• select
To select
input multiple
multiple
faders), channels,
then channels,
presspress
thepressSelect
SelectSelecton onthethe
switches first
onfirst
chan-
thechan-
faders de entrada), e pressione os switches Select os outros
nel,
othernel,
hold holdthe
channels. the
Multi-Select
Multi-Select switch
switch(located
(located to the
to the
left left
of of
To route
Para rotear
BusBusAssign
channels
• Assign
iLok USB
canais
switches
to Mains
Smart
para
switches MainsKeyouor Groups
(for storing
Groups
on-screen:
naplug-in
tela: authorizations) I/Ocanais.
Options
thethe inputinput faders),
faders), then thenpress
press
thethe Select
Selectswitches
switches on onthethe
• Plug-in
1 Select one orinstaller discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok
more channels. 2 In the Aux Sends section, press the Aux 1–8 or 9–16 switch
2AI16
Naotherother
Analog
seção channels.
channels.
AuxMic/Line
Sends, Input pressione Cardo thatswitch provides
Aux 1–8 16 ouanalog
9–16 para
1 To route
To route
Selecione channels
umchannels
ou to Mains
mais
tocanais.
Mainsor Groups
or Groups on-screen:
on-screen: to bank it to the corresponding pairs of Aux Sends.
2 Go to the Inputs page. mic/line
designá-lo level
para inputs
o par correspondente de Aux Sends.
1 Select
1 Select oneone or more
or more channels.
channels. 2 In 2 the
In theAuxAux Sends Sends section,
section, press
press
thethe AuxAux 1–81–8or 9–16
or 9–16 switch
switch
à•página
2 3VáClick One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console 3 Press an Aux Sends encoder to enable that send.
the Bus Inputs.Assign buttons to route to those busses. to AO16
bank
to bank it toit the
Analog to Output
the
corresponding
corresponding
Card thatpairspairs
of Aux
provides of 16
AuxSends.
Sends.line level
analog
2 Go2 Go to the
to theInputsInputspage.page. 3 Pressione um codificador Aux Sends para habilitar essa
Each Stage Rack includes: Rotate the encoder to adjust that send level.
4 mandada.
outputs
botõtes Bus 3 Press
3 Press an an AuxAux Sends Sends encoder
encoder to enable
to enable thatthat send.send.
3 Clique
3 •For
3 Click
nos
Click information
the the
Bus Bus
Assign onAssign
Assign buttons
para rotear
configuring
buttons to theroute
route
to to
para Mains
system those
to
esses busses.
those as L–R
busses.
busses.
Two (2) IEC power cables
plus Mono, or as L–C–R, see “Configuring Aux, Group, and 4 4XO16
Rotate
4Gire oAnalog
Rotate the the
codificadorand
encoder
encoder Digital
to adjust
para to Output
adjust
ajustar that Card
othat
send
nível that
send
da level. provides 8 analog
level.
mandada.
Para informações sobre configurações dos Mains como L–R line level outputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.
ForFor information
Variable information on configuring
Group Busses” on configuring
on pagethe 80. the
system
For system
moreMains Mains as L–R
informationas L–R
plus Mono, ou como L–C–R, veja “Configurando Busses Aux,
plusconfiguring
on plus
Mono,Mono, or as
orL–C–R,
Groupas L–C–R, see see
“Configuring
see“Configuring Aux, Aux,Group,Group,andand
Group e Variable” na busses,
página 80. “Configuring
Para mais informações Aux, Group, sobre AT16 A-Net Output Card that provides 16 channels of A-Net
Variable
and Variable Group
Variable Group Busses”
Group Busses”on
Busses” page
onon page
80.
page
configuração de busses Group, veja “Configurando Busses80.
For
80. For
more more information
information
on configuring
Aux,onGrou
configuring Group
e Variable Group
busses,
busses,
Group” seepágina
na see
“Configuring
“Configuring
80. Aux, Aux,
Group,Group,
andand Variable
Variable GroupGroupBusses”
Busses”on page
on page 80.80.
Chapter 7: Inputs and Input Routing 71
tional 8 channels of analog I/O
Chapter and
Chapter 7:8 Inputs
7: Inputschannels
andand of
Input AES/EBU
Input
Routing 71 71
Routing
digital I/O.
Configurando Busses Aux (Aux Sends) 5 Pressione o switch Multi-Assign novamente para confirmar a ação.
Configuring Aux Busses (Aux Sends) 5 Press the Multi Assign switch again to confirm the action.
O sistema
VENUE VENUE pode
systems serbeconfigurado
can configuredpara ter 88ou
to have or16
16busses Aux
Aux busses – ou––or –
comoasparte dathe
part of configuração de bus Aux/Group.
overall Aux/Group Busses Mono
bus configuration. auxiliares
Aux
mono podem ser vinculados em pares (par e ímpar) para funcionar Select another
Selecione VCApara
outro VCA to confirm thea current
confirmar assignment
atribuição but re-
atual de VCA mas
buses can be linked in odd/even pairs to function in stereo (see
em estéreo (veja “Configurando Busses Aux e Variable Group” na manter o modo
main in MultiMulti-Assign
Assign mode para
for outro VCA. targeted VCA.
the newly
“Configuring Aux and Variable Group Busses” on page 95).
página 95).
For more
Para mais information
informações on VCAs,
sobre including
VCAs, using VCAespill,
veja “Atribuindo see
Utilizando
Routing
Roteando Channels
Canais toGroups
para Variable Variable Groups “Assigning
VCAs” and86.
na página Using VCAs” on page 86.
Para To
acessar as mandadas
access Variable
Variable Group Group:
sends: Roteando Entradas para Direct Outputs
Routing Inputs to Direct Outputs
1 1 Make sure
Certifique-se dethe
quesystem is configured
o sistema for Variable
está configurado Groups
para o modo Todos os Input Channels e FX Returns possuem saídas diretas
All Input channels and FX Returns have Direct Outputs,
mode.
Variable (See “Configuring
Groups. Aux, Group,
(Veja “Configurando Bussesand
Aux,Variable
Group eGroup
Variable (Direct Outputs), que podem ser atribuídas para saídas de hardware,
which can be assigned to hardware outputs, used as inputs to
Busses”
Group” on page
na página 80.)80.) utilizadas como entradas para os plug-ins e enviadas para o Pro Tools.
plug-ins,
Direct Outsand
são sent to Prono
atribuídas Tools. DirecteOuts
Patchbay, podemareser
assigned in thedo
controladas
2 Select one or more input channels. Patchbay, and can be controlled from the ACS or on-screen.
2 Selecione um ou mais canais de entrada. ACS ou na tela.
3 Press the Variable Groups switch in the Aux Sends section of
3 Pressione
the ACS.o Or,
switch
clickVariable
the VarGroups
Groupsna seçãoinAux
button theSends do ACS.
on-screen Bus Para habilitarand
To enable e ajustar
adjustDirect
DirectOutputs:
Outputs:
Ou, clique o botão Var Groups na seção BusAssign na tela (na página
Assign section (on the Inputs page for the selected channel). 1 Select the input or FX return channel.
Inputs do canal selecionado). Os Variable Groups 1–8 estão agora 1 Selecione o Input Channel ou FX Return.
Variable Groups 1–8 are now mapped to the ACS Aux Send
mapeados para a seção Aux Send do ACS, e para os codificadores 2 Press the Direct Output encoder to toggle it in and out on
section, and
configuráveis 1–8.from the assignable input encoders 1–8. Pressione o encoder
2 the selected channel.Direct Output para alternar entre habilitá-la/
4 Press an encoder to enable the selected (Var Group) Aux
desabilitá-la no canal selecionado.
4 Pressione um codificador para habilitar a mandada auxiliar (Var 3 Rotate the Direct Output encoder to adjust the output level.
Send.
Group) selecionada . 3 Gire o codificador Direct Output para ajustar o nível de saída.
5 Rotate the encoder to adjust send level.
5 Gire o codificadors para ajustar o nível da mandada.
6 For more information, see Chapter 10, “Aux Sends and Vari-
able
6 Para Groups.”
mais informações, veja o Capítulo 10, “Aux Sends e Variable
Groups.” Codificador Direct encoder
Direct Output Output
Routing
Roteando Canais Channels to Matrix
para Busses Matrix e PQ and PQ Busses For more
Para mais information
informações on routing
sobre and assigning
roteamentos Direct Out-
e atribuições Direct
Outputs, veja
puts, see “Direct
“Direct Outputs”on
Outputs” napage
página
85.85.
Matrix and PQ source assignments determine input signal
Designações de fonte Matrix e PQ determinam roteamento do sinal
routing to each of the Matrix and PQ mixers. Matrix and PQ
de entrada para cada um dos mixer Matrix e PQ. Cada mixer Matrix
e PQsource inputs12
pode incluir can include up to 12 inputs per mixer.
entradas. Utilizando Dynamics e EQ Embutidos
Using Built-In Dynamics and EQ
Matrix and PQ signal routing is performed from the Matrix
O roteamento de sinal de Matrix e PQ é realizado nas abas Matrix e
and PQ tabs of the Outputs page 11,
(see“Mixers
Chapter 11, “Matrix and Cada
Eachcanal
InputdeChannel
entrada has
possui um processor
built-in Dynamicsdeprocessors,
dinâmica, aum filtro
PQ da página Outputs (veja o Capítulo Matrix e Personal
Personal Q Mixers”). passa-altas
High-Pass eFilter
um equalizador
and a 4-banddeEQ;
4 bandas;
each FXcada FX Return
Return has a possui
Q”).
em equalizador
built-in 2-banddeEQ.
2 bandas. Se o canal
If the channel é estéreo,
is a stereo os controles
channel, the pro-do
processador
cessor controls are linked and apply to both the left andosright
são associados e têm efeito sobre ambos lados
Atribuindo Canais a VCAs
Assigning Channels to VCAs (direito e esquerdo) do canal.
sides of the channel.
Canais podem can
Channels ser be
atribuidos
assigned a
to VCAs
VCAspara controle conjunto
for consolidated controlde
of Utilizando Dynamics em Canais
vários deles.
multiple channels. Using Dynamics on Channels
Em cada canal, um Compressor/Limiter e um Expander/Gate estão
Para atribuir um ou mais canais a um VCA:
To assign one or more channels to a VCA: disponíveis. Controles para todosand
A built-in Compressor/Limiter os Expander/Gate
processadores are de dinâmica
avail-
embutidos estão
able on each disponíveis
Input Channel.naControls
seção Dynamics
for all of do
theACS, e a curva
built-in dy-
1 Pressione
1 Pressothe
switch
VCAVCA para to
switch agrupar
bank os
thefaders de Faders
Output saída aos VCAs.
to VCAs. denamics
entrada e saída é are
processors apresentada nathe
provided in tela.ACS Dynamics section,
2 Selectothe
2 Selecione VCAVCA
(1-8)(1-8)
queyou
vocêwish to assign
deseja atribuirtopressionando
by pressing its Se-
seu and an input/output curve appears on-screen.
lect switch.
switch Select.
3 Press the Multi Assign switch near the Output encoders.
3 Pressione o switch Multi-Assign próximo aos codificadores Output.
While
Quando engaged, the
habilitados, Multidos
os LED Assign and output
switches Select switch
Multi-Assign e Select
LEDs flash.
piscam.
4 Press the Select switch on the inputs or outputs you want as-
4 Pressione o switch Select nas entradas ou saídas que você deseja
signed to the currently targeted VCA. Use the Input and Out-
atribuir ao VCA selecionado. Utilize os switches de bancos de faders
put Fader
de entrada bankpara
e saída switches to as
acessar access thede
réguas desired
canaischannel strips.
desejadas.

Compressor/Limiter Para ajustar os controles Expander/Gate pelo ACS:
Compressor/Limiter To adjust Expander/Gate controls from the ACS:
Para habilitar o Compressor/Limiter embutido no canal 1 Selecione um canal pressionando o switch Select.
1 Target a channel by pressing its Select switch.
Stage Rack Features
selecionado:
To engage the built-in Compressor/Limiter on the selected Additional Required Components
channel: 2 2Pressione o switch
Press the Select Select
switch nextpróximo do switch
to the Exp/Gate In eswitch
do medidor
and
 Pressione o switch Comp/Lim In na seção Dynamics do ACS. Exp/Gate
meter in In
thenaACS
seção Dynamics
Dynamics do ACS.
section. TheO switch
switch lights
se acende para
to indi-
audio I/O
 Press forComp/Lim
the VENUE Profile systems.
In switch UpACS
in the to two Stage Racks
Dynamics sec- indicar controle sobre o Expander/Gate, e os VGA
LEDs indicadores
•cate
Video Display
control (15-inch
of the or greater and
Expander/Gate, flat-panel
indicator display
LEDs below
can be
Para tion. used simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total inputs.
habilitar o Compressor/Limiter embutido em qualquer canal abaixo de cada codificador seminimum
acendemresolution).
para mostrar queand
esses
recommended;
each encoder light 1024x768
red to show that these controls areVGA
mapped
de entrada: controles estão
DVI supported. mapeados para funções Exp/Gate.
Audio I/O the built-in Compressor/Limiter on any input channel: to Exp/Gate functions.
To engage
1 Vá ao banco dos canais desejados. • USB keyboard
Utilizando and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
EQ em Canais
1 Bank to the desired channels.
Using EQ on Channels
2 Pressione o switch
2 Press the CompComp Thrs para
Thrs switch atribuirthe
to assign osinput
codificadores
encodersde
to
Digital
Um filtroSnake Cablee um
passa-altas (VENUE Profilede
equalizador Systems
4 bandas Only)
estão disponíveis
• para
entrada 8 analog output channels; embutido.
o Compressor/Limiter expandable up to 48 analog or emA built-in
cada High-Pass
Input Filter
Channel e and
um 4-band EQ are
equalizador deavailable
duas on each
the built-in Compressor/Limiter. • The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rackbandas
requiresestá
digital outputs per Stage Rack. Input Channel
disponível and aFX
em cada 2-band EQ Controles
Return. is availablemodulares
on each FXdeRe-cada
3 Aperte
3 Pusho codificador configurável
the assignable encoder ondeeach
cadachannel
canal em
youque você
want the processador
turn. Modular EQ controls
embutidoforestão nathe
all of seção EQ do
built-in EQACS, e a curva
processors arede
deseja aplicarCompressor/Limiter
o Compressor/Limiter
Synchronization
built-in and Control I/O embutido.
engaged. resposta
in the ACSda equalização
EQ section,éandapresentada na tela.curve appears
an EQ response
• Snake connectors to enable primary and redundant (if on-screen.
Para ajustar o threshold do Compressor/Limiter para um canal: Um de dois tipos
Optional de EQ pode ser selecionado para o EQ embutido,
Components
To adjust the Compressor/Limiter
applicable) threshold
connection to a VENUE FOHfrom a channel:
Rack.
em uma
One of base por types
two EQ canal:can
um be
equalizador digital
selected for the paramétrico
built-in EQ,de
onlargo
a
1 Na1seção Encoder
In the Assignment,
Encoder Assignmentpressione
section,opress
switch Comp
the Thrsh.
Comp Thrsh espectro
The ou um
following equalizador
components analógico
are modelado.
optional, and must be
per-channel basis: a full-spectrum parametric digital EQ or an
switch. purchased separately:
analog-modeled EQ.
2 Gire o codificador configurado para ajustar o valor do threshold do Para utilizar o EQ embutido em um canal EQ:
System Components
2 Turn the assigned
Compressor/Limiter rotary encoder to set the Compres-
embutido.
sor/Limiter threshold value. To use the built-in
transfer of ShowEQ on a channel,
data; 512 MB do
or one of recommended)
larger the following:
1 Selecione o canal pressionando seu switch Select.
ParaIncluded Components
ajustar os controles Compressor/Limiter pelo ACS: 1 •Target
Near-field monitor
the channel byspeakers
pressingfor
itsmix position
Select switch.monitoring
To adjust Compressor/Limiter controls from the ACS: 2 Siga um dos seguintes
• Headphones procedimentos:
with 1/4-inch jack
All VENUE
1 Selecione um Profile systems include
canal pressionando the following:
o switch Select. 2 Do any of the following:
1 Target a channel by pressing its Select switch.
• VENUE Profile console • •Para habilitarthe
To engage o filtro passa-altas
channel High-Pass(High-Pass Filter),
Filter, press the pressione
HPF
2 Pressione
2 •Press
o switch Select próximo dothe
switch e do medidor Comp/ o(for Talkback)
switch
switch HPF
in thenaEncoder
seção Encoder Assignment.
Assignment section.Ligue ou HPF
Toggle desligue
Twothe
(2)Select switch
IEC power next to
cables Comp/Lim In switch in
Lim In na seção Dynamics do ACS. O switch se acende para indicar • oFootswitches
efeito em cada (up to
canal2)pressionando seu codificador.
in/out on each channel by pressing its encoder; adjust Ajuste a
the ACS
• sobre Dynamics
Monitor section. The switch lights to indicate
mount for VGA screen (screen not included) con-
controle o Compressor/Limiter. • frequência
MIDI do
cables filtro
(for girando o
connecting codificador.
external
HPF frequency by rotating its encoder. MIDI devices)
trol of the Compressor/Limiter.
• Trackball mount (trackball not included) • Para habilitar os equalizadores de 4 bandas ou 2 bandas,
•• BNC cables the
(forbuilt-in
connecting Word clock between the
Expander/Gate To engage
pressione o switch EQ In4-band or inferior
na parte 2-band EQ,seção
da press the
Equalizer
• VENUE Mouse Pad VENUE systematand
Expander/Gate EQ In switch
no ACS. theexternal
bottom ofdigital devices)
the ACS Equalizer section.
• VENUE
Para habilitar Profile Guideembutido no canal selecionado:
o Expander/Gate • 25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
For more
Para information,
mais seeveja
informações, Chapter 17, “EQ.”
o Capítulo 17, “EQ.”
To• engage
Two (2) console
the built-inlights
Expander/Gate on the selected channel:
Pressione o switchDust
• Protective Exp/Gate
CoverIn na seção Dynamics do ACS
 Press the Exp/Gate In switch in the ACS Dynamics section.
Para habilitar o Expander/Gate embutido em qualquer canal de VENUE Profile
Using Inserts
Utilizando Expansion
on
Inserts em Channels
Canais Options
entrada:
To engage the built-in Expander/Gate on any input channel:
Racks, Software CDs, iLoks, and Cables You can use software plug-in inserts or hardware inserts on
1 Bank to the desired channels. Você pode usar
For details on allinserts
VENUE desystems
softwares
andplug-ins ouvisit
options, de hardware
the Avid em
1 Vá ao banco dos canais desejados. any Input Channel or FX Return.
Each Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes: qualquer Input Channel ou FX Return.
2 Press the Gate Thrs switch to assign the input encoders to
• built-in
the System Gate
Restore CDThrs para atribuir os codificadores de
Expander/Gate.
entrada Utilizando Inserts de Plug-In
Using Plug-In Inserts em Canais
on Channels
• ECx Ethernet Controlembutido.
para o Expander/Gate Software Installer CD Mix Rack Options
3 Push the assignable encoder on each channel you want the
• Standalone
3 Empurre Software
built-ino Expander/Gate
codificador Installer CD
configurável
engaged. de cada canal em que você Os plug-insare
Plug-Ins estão organizados
arranged em racks
in virtual virtuais,
racks, whichque permitem
allow signalsenviar
to
deseja•aplicar
iLok USB Smart Key (for
o Expander/Gate storing plug-in authorizations)
embutido. osbesinais
I/O deand
Options
sent to e para
fromcada
eachplug-in
plug-incomo sewere
as if it fossem processadores
an external pro-
externos. Os plug-ins
cessor. Plug-Ins can podem
be usedser utilizados
in two ways: de duas formas:
as inserts, como
or as ef-
To• adjust
Plug-in
theinstaller discs (if threshold
Expander/Gate any) withfrom
pre-authorized
a channel: iLok AI16 Analog
inserts, Mic/Line
efeitos Input Card that provides 16 analog
Para ajustar o threshold do Expander/Gate para um canal: fects inoua como
Send/Return em uma disposição
arrangement. Send/Return.
1 •InTwo (2) IEC power
the Encoder cables section, press the Gate Thrsh
Assignment mic/line level inputs
• One FOH Link cable
1 Na seção Encoder Assignment,
switch. forpressione
connection to a VENUE
o switch console
Gate Thrsh. Insert O The
Insert plug-in é inserido
plug-in no ponto
is patched dethe
in at inserção
insert em umon
point Input Channel
an Input
AO16
ou AnalogCada
FX Return. Output Card
Input that provides
Channel pode ter 16
atéanalog
quatro line level
plug-ins.
Channel or FX Return. Each Input Channel may have up to
2 Turn
Each theRack
Stage assigned rotarypara
includes: encoder to oset thedo
Expander/Gate outputs
2 Gire o codificador configurado ajustar valor threshold do four plug-in inserts.
threshold
Expander/Gate value.
• Two (2)embutido.
IEC power cables Send/Return O sinal é enviado ao plug-in por um dos busses do
XO16 Analog
sistema and Digital
(geralmente Output Card thatde
providespara
8 analog
Send/Return Signalum Aux
is sent Send)
to theeplug-in
roteadoovervolta umsys-
any of the Input
Channel ou
line level FX Return.
outputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.
tem busses (usually an Aux Send) and routed back to an Input
Channel or FX Return.
A-Net
AT16mais Output Card thatutilização
provides de
16 channels of disposição
A-Net
Para informações sobre plug-ins na
output compatible
Send/Return, veja with Aviom®
“Utilizando Personal
Plug-Ins Como Mixers
um and other em
Processador
For more information on using plug-ins in a Send/Return ar-
Bus” na página
Pro16™ Series 160.
devices.
rangement, see “Using Plug-Ins as a Bus Processor” on
page
IOx 160.and output expansion card that provides an addi-
Input
digital I/O. Chapter 7: Inputs and Input Routing 73
Inserting
InsertingPlug-Ins
Plug-InsononChannels
Channels ToTo
assign a hardware
assign insert
a hardware toto
insert anan
input:
input:
YouInserting Plug-Insonon
can insert plug-ins Channels
Input Channels and FX Returns di- 1 Go
To to the Inputs
assign pageinsert
a hardware and target
to an the channel where you
input:
1 1Go
YouYou
rectly can can
from insert
insert
the plug-ins
plug-ins
Inputs pageononInput
or Input
from Channels
Channels
the Plug-In andandFXFX
Rack. Returns
Returns di-di- want totoassign
Go the
to theInputs
the page
Inputs and
page
hardware andtarget
target
insert. the channel
the where
channel you
where you
You from can insert plug-ins onorInput Channels andRack.
FX Returns di- 1 Go
want toto the Inputs
assign page and
the hardware target the channel where you
insert.
rectly
Inserindo
Inserting Plug-Ins the
Plug-Ins Inputs
em Canais
on page
Channels from
rectly from the Inputs page or from the Plug-In Rack. the Plug-In ToParawant
assign to
atribuirassign theinsert
um insert
a hardware hardware
to an insert.
de hardware a uma entrada:
input:
rectly from the18, Inputs page or from the Plug-In Rack. 2 In want
the to assign
Inserts the hardware
section of the Inputsinsert.page, do one of the fol-
See Chapter “Plug-Ins.” In the Inserts section of the Inputs
You can See Chapter
insert 18,
plug-ins “Plug-Ins.”
on Input Channels and FXeReturns di-
2 Go2 to
1lowing: In the Inputs
Inserts page
sectionandoftarget the page,
the Inputs channel
page, dodoone
where
oneofofthe
youthefol-
fol-
Você podeSeeinserir Chapter plug-ins em Input
18, “Plug-Ins.” Channels FX Returns 1 2VáIn
lowing: à página Inputs
the Inserts e selecione
section of the o o canal
Inputs em do
page, queonevocêofdeseja
the fol-um
See Chapter want lowing:
to assign the hardware insert.
rectly
diretamente
To insertfrom the
a pela
plug-in on 18,
Inputs
página a page“Plug-Ins.”
Inputs
channel:oroufrom
pelothe Plug-In
Plug-In Rack.Rack. •lowing:
insertClick the Hardware Insert pop-up menu and choose an in-
de hardware.
ToTo insert a plug-in onon a channel: • sert
•Click
ClickthetheHardware
destination Hardware Insert
directlyInsert pop-up
from pop-up menu
menu
thepage,
menu. andandchoose
choose ananin-in-
insert a plug-in a channel: 2 In the Inserts section of the Inputs do one
1 GoToSee to the aInputs
insert
Chapter plug-in
18, page
on and target the channel where you
a“Plug-Ins.”
channel:
“Plug-Ins.” •sert
Click the Hardware
destination Insert
directly frompop-up
the menu
menu. andof the fol-
choose an in-
1 1Go Veja
to o Capítulo
the Inputs 18,
page and target the channel where you 2 Na seção
lowing: Inserts da página
sert destination directly Inputs:
from the menu.
want Go
1 Go
want to
to thethe
to insert
to
Inputs
the Inputs
insert the
page
plug-in. and target the channel
page and target the channel where you
plug-in.
where you
• – –oror– sert destination directly from the menu.
Clique
–
– or –the
no menu pop-up Hardware Insert e escolha um destino
want to insert the plug-in. •• Click
Click Hardware Insert dopop-up
menu. menu and thechoose
Insertsan in-
To insert
Para inserir
2 Inwantthe to
aumplug-in
plug-in
insert
Inserts
on ema channel:
um
the plug-in.
section of thecanal:
Inputs page, do one of the fol- –de
•sert
Click –the
orinsert
the
Hardware
diretamente
Hardware
Insert
Insert
button
button
to go to
toto
gofrom
toto the Inserts
page
page
In the Inserts section of the Inputs – ou – •
of destination
Click
the the
Patchbay, directly
Hardware
and from
Insert
assign thethe
button menu.
insert go the
the Inserts
Patchbay. page
2Go2 to
1lowing: In the InputsInserts pagesection andof target
the the page,
Inputs channel
page, dodoone
where
oneofofthe
you the fol-
fol-
1 Vá
want
à página
2
lowing:In the Inputs
to insert
lowing:
Insertsesection
the
selecione
plug-in.
o canal
of the Inputsem page,
que você deseja
do one inserir
of the fol- • – or•Clique
Click
ofofthethe
the Hardware
Patchbay,
noPatchbay,
botão and
and
Insert
assign
Hardware assign
button
the
Insertthe
to go
insert
insert
para from
ir
to the
from
para
– of the Patchbay, and assign the insert from the Patchbay.
the
a
Inserts
the
página
page
Patchbay.
Patchbay.
Inserts
• Click
um plug-in.
lowing: one of the four Plug-In Insert pop-up menus and do Patchbay, e atribua o insert pelo Patchbay.
• choose
•Click
Click one
a one ofofthethe four Plug-In
from Insert ofpop-up menus and • Click the Hardware Insert button to go to the Inserts page
2 In the Inserts
•choose
Click
plug-in
onesection offour
the Plug-In
directly
of thedirectly
four Inputs
Plug-In
oneInsert
page,
Insert
pop-up
the
do one
pop-up ofmenus
Plug-In the
menus
Rack and
fol-
and Click to Click to
choose a plug-in
a plug-in directly fromfrom oneoneof the
of thePlug-In
Plug-In Rack
Rack of the Patchbay, and assign
to the insert from the Patchbay.
Na seção Inserts da página Inputs:
2lowing: submenus. assign
Click
Click to goClick
to the
to
Click to
choose a plug-in directly from one of the Plug-In Rack
• •–Clique
or
submenus.
Click
em um dos quatro menus pop-up Plug-In Insert e escolha
submenus.
– submenus.
one of the four Plug-In Insert pop-up menus and
assign
Click
assignto Patchbay
goClick
to to
go the
Patchbay
to
the
assign go to the
Patchbay
um– or plug-in
– diretamente de um dos submenus Plug-In Rack. Patchbay
– or –one
– ou – – or – a plug-in
• choose
Click of the directly
four Plug-InfromInsert
one ofbuttons
the Plug-In
to goRack
to the Click to Click to
•submenus.
•Click one ofofthe four Plug-In Insert
to buttons totogo totothe
• CliquePlug-InClick
•Plug-In
em
Click one
one
Rack,
um and
dos the
ofand
four
route
quatro
the route
Plug-In
the
botões
four Plug-In
signal Insert
Plug-In
Insert
thebuttons
plug-in
Insert
buttons
para go
using
to go
the
irtopara
the
assign go to the
Patchbay
Plug-In Rack,
Rack, and route thethe signal
signalto tothetheplug-in
plug-in using
using
o Plug-In
Plug-In Rack,
Rack e roteie
controls. o sinal para
– or – Plug-In Rack, and route the signal to the plug-in using o plug-in utilizando os Assigning a hardware insert in the Inputs page
Plug-In
controles Plug-IndoRack
Plug-In
Rack controls.
Rack.
controls. Assigning a hardware insert in in
thethe
Inputs page
• Click one ofRack
Plug-In the four Plug-In Insert buttons to go to the
controls. Assigning a hardware insert Inputs page
TheAssigning
name ofa the hardware
hardware insertinsert
in the destination
Inputs page appears in the
Plug-In Rack, and route the signal to the plug-in using TheThe name
Atribuindonameum of the
insert
of dehardware
the hardware
hardware nainsert
página
insertdestination
Inputs
destination appears
appears ininthethe
on-screen Hardware Insert button.
Plug-In Rack controls. The name
on-screen of the hardware
Hardware Insert insert destination appears in the
button.
Click to Click to on-screen
Assigning a hardwareHardwareinsertInsert button.
in the Inputs page
Click
assign
Click to to goClick
to
Clickto to
the O on-screen
nome de destino Hardware do insert
Insertde hardware surge no botão Hardware
button.
assign
Click
assignto Plug-In
goClick
to to
go thethe The
to Setting
Insert
name nathe tela.
of theHardware
hardware Insert Locationappears in the
insert destination
assign Rack
Plug-In
go Setting
to the on-screen
Plug-In Setting thethe Hardware
Hardware Insert
Insert Location
Location
Rack YouSetting Hardware
can choose thethe Insert
Hardware
location button.
ofInsert Location
the hardware insert in the sig-
Plug-In
Rack
Click to Click to
Rack Ajustando
You can a
chooseLocalização
the do
location Insert
of de
the Hardware
hardware insert ininthe sig-
nal You
path, can choose
relative to the
the location
four plug-inof the hardware
inserts, for insert
each the
channel. sig-
Assigning a plug-in insert assign
in the Inputs page go to the You can choose the location ofLocation
theinserts,
hardware insertchannel.
in the sig-
Plug-In nal
Setting
nal
AVocê path,
hardware the
path, relative
relative
insert does to
Hardware the
to the four
Insert
four plug-in
plug-in for
inserts, each
for each channel.
Assigning
Atribuindo a plug-in
um insert
Assigning insert
de plug-in
a plug-in nain
insert thethe
página
in Inputs
Inputs
Inputspage
page pode
path, escolher a not need to do
localização be currently
insert assigned to
de hardware nado cadeia
TheAssigning
name ofa the plug-in
plug-in insertinsert appears
in the Inputs pagein the on-screen Rack A nal
hardware
A
this. hardware
relative
insert
insert
to
does the
does not four
not need plug-in
need totobebe inserts,
currently
currently
for each channel.
assigned
assigned totododo
The name ofofthe plug-in insert appears inin the on-screen Youde sinal,
Acan
hardware em relação
chooseinsert aos
the location quatro
does notofneed inserts
the hardwarede plug-ins, para
insertassigned
to be currently cada
in the sig-tocanal.
do
The name the plug-in insert appears the on-screen this.
O Plug-In
nome doInsert
The name plug-in display.
aparece
ofdisplay. no display Plug-In
the plug-in insert appears in the on-screenInsert na tela. Umthis.
nal this.insert de hardware não precisa estar
path, relative to the four plug-in inserts, for each channel. atribuído para isso.
Plug-In
Plug-In
Assigning Insert
Insertinsert
a plug-in display.
in the Inputs page
Plug-In Insert display. To set the hardware insert location:
A To
hardware
set the insert
hardware doesinsert
not need to be currently assigned to do
Utilizando Inserts de Hardware Em Canais Para
To ajustar
set the ahardware
localização dolocation:
insert insert de hardware:
location:
Using Hardware Inserts on Channels
The name of the plug-in insert appears in the on-screen this.
1 GoTo tosetthe theInputs
hardware page and location:
insert target the channel where you
Using
Using
Plug-In Hardware
Insert display. Inserts
Hardware Inserts on on Channels
Channels 1 1Go Go tosetthe
to the Inputs
Inputs page and target the channel where you
Você pode
YouUsing inserir
can insert procesadores
Hardware
external externos
Inserts
processors in onna signal
the cadeia
Channels de sinal
chain of de
InputInput want 1 Vá
1 Go
to
à página
to the
hardware
Inputs
Inputs e page
selecione
page
and
insert target
o canalthe
location.
and target emchannel
the que vocêwhere
channel desejayou
where ajustar
you
want
want to set the hardware insert location.
Channels
You cane FX Returns.
insert external processors in the signal chain of Input Toaset thetohardware
localização set do theinsert
hardware
insertde insert location.
location:
hardware.
You can
channels andinsert external processors in the signal chain of Input 2 In
FX Returns. want to set the
the Inserts hardware
section of theinsertInputs location.
page, click the hardware
You canand insert external processors in the signal chain of Input
Using
channels Hardware
channels and FXFX Inserts
Returns.
Returns. on Channels 2Go2InIn
1insert tothethe Inserts
indicator Inserts
Inputs sosection
section
pageitand
that of the
of
lights Inputs
target
the thepage,
Inputs
red. click
channel
page, the
click
where hardware
the you
hardware
Saídas
channels também
and FX permitem
Returns. inserts
Outputs also provide hardware inserts. For more informa- de hardware. Para mais 2 Na
2
insert Inseção
the Inserts
Inserts
indicator so da página
section
that it of Inputs,
the
lights Inputs
red. clique o
page, indicador
click the do insert de
hardware
want insert
to set indicator
the hardware so thatinsert
it lights
location.
red.
You can informações,
Outputs
insert
Outputs also veja
provide
external
also “Utilizando
provide hardware
processorshardwareinInserts
inserts.
the
tion, see “Using Inserts on Output Busses” on page 82.
em
signal
inserts. ForBusses
Formore
chain
more de Saída”
informa-
of Input
informa- hardware,
insert que
indicator se acende
so that em
it vermelho.
lights red.
channels na página
Outputs
tion,and seesee
FX 82.
also
“Using provide
Inserts
Returns. hardware
onon Output inserts.
Busses” For more
onon
page informa-
82. 2 In the Inserts section of the Inputs page, click the hardware
tion, “Using Inserts Output Busses” page 82.
tion, see “Using Inserts on Output Busses” on page 82. insert indicator so that it lights red.
Assigning Hardware Inserts to Inputs
Atribuindo
Outputs
Assigning Inserts
also de Hardware
provide
Hardware hardwarea Entradas
Inserts inserts.
totoInputs For more informa-
Assigning Hardware Inserts Inputs
YouAssigning
tion,assign
can Hardware
see “Using Inserts
hardware Inserts
on
inserts Output to Inputs
Busses”
to Input on page
channels and 82.FX Re-
VocêYou
turnspode
You can atribuir
can assign
directly assign inserts
from thede
hardware
hardware hardware
Inputs inserts
inserts
pagetoatoInput
Input
or Input
from Channels
channels
channels
the eand
FX
and
Patchbay. Returns
FXFX Re-Re-
Youdirectly
diretamente
turns
Assigning canpelaassignfrom
Hardware hardware
página theInputs
Inputs
Inserts inserts
ou pelo
page
to toPatchbay.
Input
or from
Inputs channels
the and FX Re-
Patchbay.
turns directly from the Inputs page or from the Patchbay.
turns directly from the Inputs page or from the Patchbay.
You can assign hardware inserts to Input channels and FX Re-
Click to set
turns directly from the Inputs page or from the Patchbay. HW Insert
Click to set
Click to set
location
HW Insert
Click
HW to set
Insert
location
HW Insert
location
location
Click to set
HW Insert
location
Setting a hardware insert location in the Inputs page
Setting
Ajustandoa ahardware
Setting insert
alocalização
hardware location
insert
do location
insert in in
thethe
de hardware Inputs
na page
Inputs
página page
Inputs

7474 VENUE Profile
VENUE Guide
Profile Guide

Activating and Bypassing Inserts
Activating and Bypassing
Inserts
Setting Input Gain
Setting Input de
Gain
Ativação e Bypass de Inserts Ajustando o Ganho Entrada
After hardware and plug-in inserts are assigned, they can be Gain can be controlled from individual channel strips or from
After hardware and plug-in inserts are assigned, they can be Gain can be controlled from individual channel strips or from
Após inserts de and
activated hardware e de from
bypassed plug-in serem
the fromatrubídos, eles podem
the ACS section or the O ganho
the ACSpode ser controlado pelas réguas individuais de canal ou
section.
Stage
ser ativadosRack
activated andFeatures
bypassed
ou deixados
corresponding empage
Input
from the
bypass from
desde
controls.
the ACS
a seção section
ou dos or the
controles Additional
the
pela ACS ACS.
seção Required Components
section.
corresponding Input page
da página Input correspondente. controls.
To activate or bypassProfile
Paraaudio I/Oou
ativar fordeixar
To activate
VENUE ema
or bypass
plug-in
a bypass
insert Up
systems. from
um insert
plug-in insert
tothe
deACS
two
from the
section:
Stage
ACS
Racks
plug-in pela
section: • Video Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display
can be
seção1ACS: used simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total
Target the channel by pressing its Select switch. inputs.
recommended;
Gain 1024x768 minimum resolution).
Pan VGA and
1 Target the channel by pressing its Select switch. Gain Pan
DVI supported.
2 Press
Audio I/O
1 Selecione umany of the
canal Plug-In switches
pressionando in theSelect.
seu switch Insert Processing sec-
2 Press any of the Plug-In switches in the Insert Processing sec- Compressor Gate Threshold
tion to activate or bypass the corresponding Insert. The switch • USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows
Compressor
Threshold compatible)
Gate Threshold
tion
• 48toinputs
activate or bypass
with remotelythecontrollable
corresponding
micInsert.
preampsTheand
switch Threshold
2 Pressione qualquer
lights when um dos
the insert switches Plug-In na seção Insert
is activated. HPF Delay
lights when theselectable
individually insert is activated.
phantom power. Delay Only)
HPF Cable (VENUE Profile Systems
Processing para ativar ou deixar em bypass o Insert correspondente. Digital Snake
• 8seanalog
O switch acende output channels;
insert expandable up to 48 analog or
To activate or quando
bypass aohardwareestá ativado.
insert from an input channel or • The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
To activate or bypass a hardware insert from an input channel or Encoders (1–24)
FX digital
Return:outputs per Stage Rack. Encodersdirectly
a Digital Snake cable. This cable can be purchased (1–24)
FX Return:
Para ativar ou deixar em bypass um insert de hardware:
1 Go to the Inputs page and target the channel. from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Synchronization and Control
1 Go to the Inputs page andI/O
target the channel.
1 Và à página Inputs e selecione o canal.
2• Click
Snakethe In/Out switch
connectors for the
to enable HW insert
primary (at the top (if
and redundant of the
2 Click the In/Out switch for the HW insert (at the top of the
Inserts section)connection
applicable) on the channel. The switch
to a VENUE FOHlights
Rack.when the in- Optional Components
2 Clique no switch
Inserts In/Out
section) dochannel.
on the insert deThe
hardware
switch(no altowhen
lights da seção
the in-
sertnois canal.
Inserts) in-circuit.
O switch se acende quando o insert está no
sert is in-circuit. The following components are optional, and must be
circuito. purchased separately:
Name display
System Components • USB flash
Assignment disk (or
switches forother portable
input channel
Name display
USB storage device for
encoders
Assignment switches for input channel encoders
Adjusting
Adjusting Input
Input Controls
Controls transfer
Switches of Show
de atribuição data; 512
de codificadores de MB ordelarger
canais entradarecommended)
Ajustando Controles de Entrada
Included Components • Near-field monitor
Clip LED speakers for mix position monitoring
Clip LED
Input Gain • Headphones with 1/4-inch jack
AllInput
Input VENUEGain
Gain Profile systems include the following: +48 V
+48 V
20 dB Pad
20 dB Pad
Input GainProfile
• VENUE is adjustable
consolefrom the rotary encoders on each In- Input Polarity
O InputInput
GainGain
(ganhois adjustable
de entrada)from the rotary
é ajustado pelo encoders onrotativo
codificador each In- (for Talkback)
Input Polarity
put channel and FX Return. Mic inputs have a gain range from
de cada • Input
put Two (2)
channel IEC
andpower
Channel eFX cablesMic
FXReturn.
Return. inputsde
Entradas have a gain range
microfone from
possuem
+10 dB to +60 dB. Analog line inputs and digital inputs have a • Footswitches (up to 2)
ganho+10•deMonitor
+10
dB todB+60
amount
+60
dB.dB. Entradas
Analog
for VGAline de linha
inputs
screen analógicas
and
(screendigital e entradas
inputs
not included)have a
gain range from • MIDI cables Gain
(for connecting external MIDI devices)
digitais possuem
gain ganho–20
range from –20
dB todB
de –20 +18
dB to +18
dB. dB.
a +18
dB. Gain
• VENUE
Gain
Gain Guess Mouse
Guess Pad
Feature VENUE system and external digital devices)
Gain Guess Feature Safe
Safe
Theautomatizada
A função automated Gain Gain Guess function
pode ser canpara
utilizada be used
ajustarto um
set a nom-
The
• Two automated
(2) console Gain Guess
lights function can be used to set anível
nom-
inalpara
nominal levelum forcanal
a channel
baseadobasedno on its incoming
sinal recebido. signal. When
Quando você Input de
Controles controls
entradainnothe
ACSACS
inal level
• Protective for a channel
Dust based on its incoming signal.
Cover rotativo para aumentar o ganho, o When Input controls in the ACS
pressiona
you epress
segura andum codificador
hold a rotary encoder assigned to input gain,
you press and hold a rotary encoder assigned to input gain, To adjust input gain
sistema• analisa
the Rack(s)
systemo(see sinal
samplesnext)
recebido e automaticamente
incoming ajusta o ganho
signals and automatically sets VENUE
Para
Toajustar Profile
adjustoinput
ganho defor
gain for
a channel:
Expansion
entrada de um canal:
a channel: Options
the system samples incoming signals and automatically sets
e o pad para a referência de 0dB quando o codificador
the channel gain and pad for a 0 dB reference when the en- é solto. O 1 Do one of the following:
the channel 1 Do one of the following:
GainRacks,
Guess
coder segue
isSoftware ogain
released. modo and
Gain
padde
atual
CDs,
formedição
iLoks,
Guess
a 0 dB reference
andthe
follows (Peak
Cablesou when
current RMS). the en-
Meter mode
Siga
1The um dos seguintes
following options can procedimentos:
be added to VENUE Profile systems.
• In the Encoder Assignment section, press the Gain switch
coder is released. Gain Guess follows the current Meter mode • • In
Na
For details the
onEncoder
seção Encoder
all VENUE Assignment
Assignment, section,
systems andpressionepress
options, the Gain
o visit
switch switch
theGain
Avid para
(Peak or RMS). to assign gain control to the rotary encoders.
(Peak
Indicadores or
de RMS).
Ganho
Each Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes: atribuir
to o controle
assign gain
website (www.avid.com). de ganho
control toaos
the codificadores
rotary rotativos.
encoders.
– ou – or –
• System Restore CD – or –
QuandoGain
GainGainIndicators
é mostrado nos codificadores de entrada, os LEDs se
Indicators • Selecione
• Target the o canal pressionando
channel by pressingseuitsswitch
Select Select.
switch.OGain
controle
acendem• ECxparaEthernet
indicar Control
que o ganhoSoftware
está Installer
ajustadoCD para seu valor- Mixde• Rack
Target Options
ganho theparachannel
o canalby pressing its
é atribuído paraSelect switch. Gain
o codificador
control for the channel is assigned to the Gain rotary en-
rotativo
padrãoWhen
• (+10 Gain
dB para
Standalone is displayed on the input
entradas Installer
Software analógicas CDe 0encoders,
dB entradas the digitais).
encoder’s Gaincontrol
na seçãofor the
ACSchannel
Input. is assigned to the Gain rotary en-
When Gain is displayed on the input encoders, the encoder’s coder in the ACS Input section.
indicator
Alterações LED são
de ganho lights to indicate
sinalizadas pelothat the
anel degain
LEDs isque
set to the de- coder in the ACS Input section.
indicator
• iLok USBLED lights
Smart to (for
Key indicate that
storing the
plug-ingain is set circunda
to the de- I/O Options
authorizations)
fault value
o codificador (+10 dB
e o valor for analog
do ganho inputs, and
é apresentado no0 dB for do
display digital
canalin- 2 Ajuste
2 Adjusto ganho
gain girando
by turningo codificador rotativo
the assigned atribuído.
rotary encoder.
fault value (+10 dB for analog inputs, and
• Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok0 dB for digital in- 2 Adjust
quando Gain change is indicated by the encoder ring LEDs, and AI16
ajustado.
puts). Analoggain by turning
Mic/Line Inputthe assigned
Card rotary encoder.
that provides 16 analog
puts). Gain change is indicated by the encoder ring LEDs, and
• Two
gain (2) is
value IEC powerincables
shown the channel display when adjusted. mic/line level inputs
gain value is shown in the channel display when adjusted.


Chapter
tional 8 channels of analog I/O and 87: Inputs andofInput Routing 75
Chapter 7:channels AES/EBU
Inputs and Input Routing 75
digital I/O.
ParaToajustar o ganho
set input gain de entrada
using utilizando
the Gain Guessofeature:
recurso Gain Guess: Para ajustarwidth
To adjust a largura de um canal
of a stereo estéreo
channel na tela:
on-screen:
To set input gain using the Gain Guess feature: To adjust width of a stereo channel on-screen:
1 Press and
1 Pressione hold the
e segure o assigned rotary
codificador encoder
rotativo while ao
atribuído the ganho
chan- Select one
11 Selecione umorou
more
maischannels.
canais.
enquanto
nel o and
canalhold
está
is receiving
1 Press recebendo
input
the um
signal. The
assigned sinal. O LED pisca
LEDencoder
rotary flashes to para
theindicar
indicate
while level
chan- 1 Select one or more channels.
2 In the Inputs page, adjust width by turning the on-screen
a análise
nel is do
sampling. sinal. input signal. The LED flashes to indicate level
receiving 2 Na página Inputs, ajuste a largura girando o codificador rotativo
rotary
2 In the encoder.
Inputs page, Turning the
adjust width
– ousampling.
– Width
Width da tela. Girar o codificador emencoder
sentido clockwise
by turning
horário moves
thealtera
on-screen
a largura
– or – the width
 Clique Guess na tela. orotary
Width
para to encoder.
estéreo full stereo,
máximo, eand
emcounter-clockwise
Turning the encoder
sentido moves
clockwise
anti-horário, para the
moves
o estéreo
– or – width
reverso.toA reverse
the width to full stereo.
posição centralThe
stereo, andcenter
representa position
mono. represents
counter-clockwise moves mono.
the
 Click Guess on-screen.
2 Solte o codificador rotativo. O ganho será ajustado assim que o
 Click Guess on-screen.
width to reverse stereo. The center position represents mono.
Release
sinal1 de entradatheatingir
rotary0encoder
dB (se oto the current
modo Peak estágain guess. Gain
selecionado) ou High-Pass Filter
0 dBwill
1 RMS be(se osomodo
setthe
Release the RMS está signal
incoming
rotary encoder selecionado).
to thereaches
current0 gain
dB peak (if Gain
guess. Peak High-Pass Filter
mode
will beisset
selected) or 0 dB RMS
so the incoming (if RMS
signal mode
reaches 0 dBis selected).
peak (if Peak High-Pass
Um Filter
filtro passa-altas de 4ª ordem pode ser habilitado em cada canal
A built-in 4th-order High-Pass Filter can be engaged on each
Ajustando
mode is Right Offsetor
selected) em0 Canais
dB RMS Estéreo
(if RMS mode is selected). de entrada. A faixa de frequência de corte do HPF vai de 20 Hz a
input channel.
A built-in The HPF
4th-order corner Filter
High-Pass frequency range
can be is from
engaged on20 Hz
each
500 Hz.
Setting Right Offset on Stereo Channels to 500channel.
input Hz. The HPF corner frequency range is from 20 Hz
Em Input Channels estéreo e FX Returns, o controle Gain afeta
Setting
ambos Right Offset on Stereo Channels to 500 Hz.
On os canais
stereo (esquerdo
Input Channelse direito).
and FX O recurso
Returns,Right Offsetcontrol
the Gain permite Para habilitar o HPF embutido pelos codificadores Input:
alterar o ganho do canal direito em relação aoThe
esquerdo entre –20 To engage the built-in HPF from the Input encoders:
affects both
On stereo the left
Input and right
Channels andchannels.
FX Returns, Right
the Offset
Gain fea-
control
dB e +20 dB, dentro dos limites gerais de ganho. 1ToNa seçãotheEncoder
engage Assignment,
built-in HPF from the pressione o switch HPF para
Input encoders:
1 In the Encoder Assignment section, press the HPF switch to
ture letsboth
affects you the
offsetleftthe gain
and of the
right right channel
channels. relative
The Right to fea-
Offset the
atribuir o controle do filtro para os codificadores rotativos.
left
ture channel
lets you by –20
offset dB
the to
gain +20
of dB,
the within
right the
channeloverall gain
relative to lim-
the assign
1 In theHPF control
Encoder to the rotary
Assignment encoders.
section, press the HPF switch to
Para ajustar o Right Offset para um canal estéreo na tela:
its.
left channel by –20 dB to +20 dB, within the overall gain lim- assign HPF control to the rotary encoders.
22 Pressione o codificador
Press a channel rotativo de
rotary encoder to um canal
insert the para
filter inserir
in thato filtro
1 Váits.
à página Inputs e selecione o canal estéreo. naquele
channel. canal.
2 Press a The O LED
rotary
channel “On” do
encoder
rotary codificador rotativo
“On”toindicator
encoder LED
insert the se acende
lights
filter quando
when
in that
To adjust channel gain offset for a stereo channel on-screen: othe
HPF está no
HPF isThe
channel. circuito.
in circuit.
rotary encoder “On” indicator LED lights when
2 Ajuste o ganho
To adjust do canal
channel gain direito usando
offset for o codificador
a stereo Right Offset
channel on-screen:
1 Go to the Inputs page and target the stereo channel. the HPF is in circuit.
da tela. 33 Ajuste
Adjusta the
frequência
HPF cornerde corte do HPFbygirando
frequency turningo codificador
the assigned rotativo
ro-
1 Go to the Inputs page and target the stereo channel.
2 Adjust the right channel gain using the on-screen Right Off- atribuído.
tary
3 encoder.
Adjust the HPF corner frequency by turning the assigned ro-
Indicação
set de the
Nívelright
encoder.
2 Adjust de Diferença
channel Estéreo (Stereo
gain using Offset)
the on-screen Right Off- tary encoder.
set encoder.
Phantom Power
O Led Stereo abaixo do canal pisca quando a diferença nos níveis de Phantom Power
Stereo Level Offset Indication
sinal entre os canais esquerdo e direito é igual ou maior a 12 dB. Phantom
Phantom power Power
de 48V pode ser aplicado a qualquer entrada Stage
Stereo Level Offset Indication 48V phantom power canInput
be applied toou
any
The Stereo LED below the channel meter flashes when the dif- analógica atribuída a um Channel FXanalog
return.stage input
Pan/Balance assigned
48V phantom to an power
input channel or FX return.
can be applied to any analog stage input
ference in signal
The Stereo level the
LED below between themeter
channel left and rightwhen
flashes channels is
the dif-
assigned to an input channel or
Para aplicar phantom power a uma entrada: FX return.
12 dB oringreater.
ference signal level between the left and right channels is
O Pan ajusta o posicionamento panorâmico (para canais de entrada To apply phantom power to an input:
12 dB or greater.
mono) e o balanço estéreo (para Input Channels estéreo e FX 1ToNo patchbay,
apply phantom atribua
power uma
to anentrada
input: de palco a um canal. Veja
1 In the patchbay, assign a stage input to a channel. See “As-
Pan/Balance
Returns). “Atribuindo Fontes de Entrada a Canais” na página 70.
signing
1 In theInput Sources
patchbay, to Channels”
assign a stage input on to
page 70.
a channel. See “As-
Pan/Balance signing Input Sources to Channels” on page 70.
ParaPan adjusts
ajustar channel pan
pan/balance pelos(for mono input channels) and stereo
codificadores: 22 Selecione
Target the o channel
canal pressionando
by pressingseu its switch Select.
Select switch.
balance (forchannel
Pan adjusts stereo input channels
pan (for mono and FX
input returns).and stereo
channels)
2 Target the channel by pressing its Select switch.
1 Na seção(for
balance Encoder
stereo Assignment, pressione
input channels and FX oreturns).
switch Pan para 33Pressione
Press the o+48Vswitch +48Vin
switch nathe
seçãoACSInut do ACS.
Input O switch
section. se acende
The switch
atribuir o controle de pan/balance aos codificadores
To adjust channel pan/balance from the encoders: rotativos. quando
lights
3 othe
Presswhen phantom
phantom
+48V power
switch é aplicado.
power
in theis ACS
applied.
Input section. The switch
To adjust channel pan/balance from the encoders: lights when phantom power is applied.
1 In the
2 Ajuste Encoder Assignment
o pan/balance do canalsection,
girandopress the Pan switch
o codificador to
rotativo If Se
an alguma
input is entrada
moved toéa movida
differentpara um canal
channel, diferente,
the gain, pad, os
assign
1 In the
atribuído. pan/balance control to section,
Encoder Assignment the rotary encoders.
press the Pan switch to If ajustes
and inputdeis ganho,
anphantom pad
power setting
moved e phantom
will move
to a different power sãoinput.
with the
channel, movidos
gain, pad, com
assign pan/balance control to the rotary encoders. a entrada.
and phantom power setting will move with the input.
2 Adjust the channel pan/balance by turning the assigned ro-
Stereo Width
tary
2 encoder.
Adjust the channel pan/balance by turning the assigned ro- 20dBdB
20 PadPad
tary encoder.
O Width ajusta a largura da imagem estéreo de Input Channels 20 dB Pad
A 20 dB pad can be applied to any analog Stage input assigned
Stereo
estéreo Width
e FX Returns controlando conjuntamente posições de pan Um pad de 20 dB pode ser aplicado a qualquer entrada Stage
to andB
A 20 input
pad channel or FX Return.
can be applied to any analog Stage input assigned
paraStereo Width
os canais esquerdo e direito em direções opostas. analogica atribuída a um Input Channel ou FX Return.
Width adjusts the stereo image of stereo input channels and to an input channel or FX Return.
FX returns
Width
O Width pode by controlling
adjusts
ser ajustado gangedofpan
the stereointeiramente
image positions
stereo
para input of themono,
channels
L–R, para leftand
and
ou To apply
Para a 20
aplicar umdB pad
pad deto
20adBStage
em umainput:entrada Stage:
right
FX channels,
returns by in opposite
controlling directions.
ganged pan positions of the
para L–R revertido. Esse controle não está disponível em canais left and To apply a 20 dB pad to a Stage input:
1 Target the channel by pressing its Select switch.
right channels, in opposite directions.
mono. 11 Selecione o channel
canal pressionando
Width can be adjusted from full L–R, to mono, to full reversed Target the by pressingseu its switch Select.
Select switch.
2 Press the 20 dB Pad switch in the ACS Input section. The
L–R.
Width Width controls
can be adjustedarefrom
not full
available
L–R, toon monotochannels.
mono, full reversed 2 Pressione
2switch
Presslightso when
the 20 switch 20
the
dB Pad dB is
pad
switchPad na seção
applied
in the to the
ACS Input
Input doinput.
Stage ACS.The
section. A luz se
L–R. Width controls are not available on mono channels. acende quandowhen
switch lights o padthe
é aplicado à entrada
pad is applied Stage.
to the Stage input.
The Gain Guess feature turns the Pad on or off as needed to
O Gain
The recurso
accommodate Gain Guess
incoming
Guess feature liga
signal
turns ou
Paddesliga
level
the on or offoasPad conforme
needed to
necessário para
accommodate acomodar
incoming signalo level
sinal de entrada recebido.

7676Guia VENUE
VENUE Profile
Profile Guide
Inversão de Polaridade de Entrada (Phase) Channel Solo
Input
Input Polarity (Phase)
(Phase) Invert
Invert Channel
Channel Solo
Solo
A polaridade do sinal de qualquer Input Channel ou FX pode ser Três modos Solo estão disponíveis: Solo In Place (SIP), Pré-Fader
Stage
The
invertida.
The EmRack
polarity
canais
polarity Features
of any
any input
ofestéreo, channel
apenas
input or
or FX
o canal
channel return
return signal
esquerdo
FX can
can be
é invetido.
signal be Additional
Three
Listen Solo
Three(PFL) Required
Solo emodes are
After-Fader
modes Components
are available:
Listen
available: Solo
(AFL),In
Solo InePlace (SIP),
várias
Place Pre-Fader
opções
(SIP), estão
Pre-Fader
inverted.
inverted. With
With stereo
stereo channels,
channels, only
only the
the left
left channel
channel is
is in-
in- Listen
disponíveis(PFL),
para
Listen (PFL), and After-Fader
andconfigurar
After-Fader Listen
asListen (AFL),
operações and several
bus. Osoptions
de several
(AFL), and canais
options
verted. The
arefollowing components must bebus
Para inverter
verted. a polaridade de um canal: are available
também podemfor
available serconfiguring
for configuring Solo
implicitamente bus operation.
Solocolocados Channels
em Solo
operation. can
como parte
Channels can
audio I/O for VENUE Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks de um
also VCA.
be implicitly soloed as part of a VCA.
• also
VideobeDisplay (15-inch
implicitly soloedorasgreater
part offlat-panel
a VCA. VGA display
can be used
1 Selecione simultaneously,
o canal pressionando supporting
seu switch up to 96 total inputs.
Select.
To invert
To invert the polarity
the polarity of a
of a channel:
channel: recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
DVI Veja
See o Capítulo
See Chapter
Chapter
supported. 14,14,
14, “Busses
“Solo
“Solo Solo e Monitor”.
and Monitor
and Monitor Busses.”
Busses.”
Target
1 Target
Audio
2 Pressione
1 I/O the channel
channel
o switch
the byinversion”
“polarityby pressing (Ø)
pressing its Select
its Select switch.
na seção Input do ACS.
switch.
• To
USB keyboard
solo andem
trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
A luz se acende
2• Press
quando
48 inputs a polaridade
with remotely
the polarity inversion
está invertida.
controllable
(Ø) switch mic preamps
in the andsec- Para
ACS Input solo a
a channel:
Tocolocar um canal
channel: Solo:
2 Press the polarity inversion (Ø) switch in the ACS Input sec-
tion. The
The switch
individually lights
lights when
switchselectable the
the polarity
phantom power.is
is inverted. Press the
 Press the channel’s Solo switch. The Solo switch lights solid
tion. when polarity inverted. o channel’s Solo switch. The Solo
se switch
Only) lights solid


Safe Digital
 Snake
Pressione CableSolo
switch (VENUE
do canal.Profile Systems
O switch acende para indicar
• 8 analog output channels; expandable up to 48 analog or to indicate
tooindicate the channel
theexplicitamente is explicitly
channel is explicitly soloed.
soloed.
que canal está colocado
• The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requiresem Solo.
O switch
Safedigital outputs
Safe alterna per Stage
os modos Rack.
Automation Safe, Solo Safe ou Bank
Safe
Safe entre ligados e desligados, A função do switch Safe no ACS é
Channel Mute Mute
Channel
Channel
from Avid orMute assembled by your preferred vendor.
determinada
The Safepelo
The Safe
Synchronization switch
switch
switch and InputAutomation
toggles
Control
toggles SafeI/Oatribuído
Automation naSolo
Safe,
Safe, página
Solo Safe,
Safe,Options
or
or Bank
Bank >
Interaction.
Safe
Safe on/off.
on/off. The
The current
current function
function of
of the ACS
the and Safe
Safe switch
ACSredundantswitch(ifis de- Para
is de- explicitamente colocar um canal em Mute (silenciar):
• Snake connectors to enable primary To
To explicitly
explicitly mute
mute a a channel:
channel:
termined
termined
applicable)
by the
by the current Input
current Input
connection
Safe
to a Safe
VENUE
switch
switch assignment
FOHassignment
Rack.
in the
in the Optional Components
Quando o modo
Options Safe é habilitado para o canal selecionado, a luz do  Pressione
Press theo swich
Mute
 Press the Mute switch Mute
switchdoononcanal.
the O switch se
the channel.
channel. The
Theacende
mute para
mute indicar
switch
switch
Options > > Interaction
Interaction page.

page. 
switch Safe no ACS se acende se esse modo Safe é o atualmente que
The o
lightscanal
followingestá
solid to explicitamente
components
indicate the are colocado
optional,
channel is emandsilêncio.
must
explicitly
lights solid to indicate the channel is explicitly muted. be
muted.
atribuído
When ao switch Input Safe. O statusthe Safe do canal também é
When a a Safe
Safe mode
mode is is enabled
enabled for for the currently
currently selected
selected chan-
chan- purchased separately:
indicado pelo estado aceso ou apagado do LED Safe de cada régua Canais
Channelspodemcan be ser in
be muted
muted silenciados
in ways: de
three ways: três with
explicitly maneiras:
with the
System
nel,
nel, the
de canal.
the ACS
ACSComponents
Safe
Safe switch
switch lights
lights ifif that
that Safe
Safe mode
mode is is the
the cur-
cur- • USB Channels
flash disk
explicitamente
can (or other
com o implicitly
three
portable
switch Mute
explicitly
USB storage the
device for
rently assign Input Safe Switch mode. Channel safe status is channel mute
channel mute switch;
switch; implicitly as a
as ado canal;
result
result of
implicitamente
of another
another chan-
chan-
rently assign Input Safe Switch mode. Channel safe status is transfer of Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
como resultado
nel being
being soloed, deandoutro
as a canal ter
a member
member of sido
a Mute
Mutecolocado orem
Group or VCA.Solo;
also
also indicated
indicated by
by the
the lit
lit or
or unlit
unlit state
state of
of each
each channel
channel strip
strip Safe
Safe nel soloed, and as of a Group VCA.
ParaIncluded
configurar os Components
switches Safe para os modos Automation, Solo • Near-field
eFor
como monitor
membro speakers
de um for mix
Mute Groupposition
ou monitoring
VCA. Para mais
LED. more information
For more information see see Chapter
Chapter 15, 15, “Muting
“Muting andand Mute
Mute
LED.
ou Bank, veja “Switches Input Safe” na página 65. informações,
• Headphones veja1/4-inch
with o Capítulo 15, “Muting
jack e Mute Groups”
Groups”
Groups”
To
To configure
configure the
the Safe
Safe switches
switches for
for Automation,
Automation, Solo
Solo or
or Bank
Bank • Dynamic or condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
Para alternar
• VENUE o status Safeconsole
Profile de um canal: Channel Level
mode,
mode, see see “Input
“Input Safe Safe Switches”
Switches” on on page
page 65. (for Talkback)
65. Channel
Channel Level Level
1 Selecione o canal pressionando seu switch Select. • Footswitches
O nível do canal pode (upser
toajustado
2) pelos faders Input ou FX Return
• toggle
Monitor Channel level can benaadjusted from the
the Input or
or FX
FX Return
To
To toggle themount
the currentfor
current VGA
Safe
Safe screen
state
state of
of aa(screen
channel:
channel: not included) e utilizando
Channel os faders
level
• MIDI cables can
(forbe tela. Os
adjusted
connecting canais
from
external selecionados
Input
MIDI devices) também
Return
2 Pressione
• o switch
Trackball Safe
mount na seção
(trackball Input
not do ACS.
included)O switch se acende faders
podem
faders serand using
ajustados
and using the on-screen
pelo
the Flex
on-screen faders.
Channel.
faders. The
The currently
currently selected
selected
Target the
1 Target
1 the channel
channel by by pressing
pressing its its Select
Select switch.
switch. • BNC cables (for connecting Word clock between the
quando channel(s)
channel(s) can can also
also be
be adjusted
adjusted from from the
the Flex
Flex Channel.
• oVENUE
canal está Mouse no modo
Pad Automation Safe, pisca no modo Solo VENUE system and external digital devices)
Channel.
Safe, 22e pisca
Press
Press rapidamente
the
the Safe
Safe switch
switchquando
in
in the
theem Bank
ACS
ACS Safe.
Input
Input section.
section. The
The switch
switch Níveis de Input Channel também podem ser afetados por VCAs.
• VENUE Profile Guide Input
• 25-pin
Para
Inputmaischannel
D-Sub levels
informações,
channel levels can
cables veja
can also
(for
also be
be affected
connecting
“Atribuindo
affected etoby
GPI
by VCAs. For
devices)
Utilizando
VCAs. more
VCAs”
For morena
lights
lights solid
solid when
when the the current
current channel
channel is is Automation
Automation Safe,Safe,
Delay flashes
• Two when (2) console
the lights
channel is Solo Safe, and flashes rapidly information,
página 86.
information, see
see “Assigning
“Assigning and
and Using
Using VCAs”
VCAs” on
on page
page 86.
86.
flashes when the channel is Solo Safe, and flashes rapidly
•
when
when Protective
in Bank
in Bank Dust
Safe.
Safe. Cover
Um delay variável pode ser aplicado a qualquer Input Channel ou FX Channel
Channel FadersFaders
Return. O alcance do delay é de 0 a 250 milissegundos. VENUE
ChannelProfile Faders Expansion Options
Delay
Delay OsChannel
ChannelFaders
Channel
The
Fadersprovide
Faders
following
oferecem
provide
options can be
controle
channel
channel level de
addedlevel
nível from
control
control
to VENUE
dos –
from
Profile
canais
– (–INF)de
(–INF)
systems.
ParaRacks, Software
aplicar delay CDs,
a um canal iLoks,
pela and Cables
console: (–INF)
to a
+12+12
dB.
todetails
+12 dB.
dB.
Use Use
the os faders
faders on da console ou na tela para
on the console, or on-screen, to
the console, or on-screen, ajustar
to ad-
A For onUse
all the faders
VENUE systems
canais.and options, visit the Avid
ad-
A variable
variable delay
delay can
can be
be applied
applied to
to any
any Input
Input Channel
Channel or
or FX
FX individualmente oschannel
just individual níveis de levels.
Each Mix Encoder
Rack or FOH Rack includes: just individual
website channel levels.
(www.avid.com).
1 Na seção
Return.
Return. The
The delay
delayAssignment,
range
range is pressioe
is from
from 0
0 to o milliseconds.
to 250
250 switch Delay para
milliseconds.
atribuir• oSystem
controleRestore
de delay
CDaos codificadores rotativos. Para maisinformation
For more
more informações
on sobre agrupamento
input and
and debanking,
output fader
fader faders de
For information on input output banking,
To
• apply delay entrada e saída em bancos, veja o Capítulo 5, “Navegação e
To delay to
ECx Ethernet
apply to a channel
Control
a from
from the
channelSoftware console:
theInstaller
console:CD Mix see Chapter
Rack
see Chapter 5, “Navigating
Options
5, “Navigating and
and Selecting
Selecting Channels.”
Channels.”
2 Pressione o codificador rotativo atribuído para aplicar delay ao Seleção de Canais.”
• Standalone
In the Software
Encoder Installer
Assignment CD
section,
quandopress
delaythe Delay
1
canal.1OInLED
thedoEncoder
codificador se acende
Assignment section, press Delay switch
é aplicado.
the switch
to
to assign
• assign delay
iLok USB control
Smart
delay to
Key to
control the
(for rotary
storing
the encoders.
rotaryplug-in authorizations)
encoders. I/O Options
3 Ajuste
• o codificador
Plug-in atribuído
installer discs aoany)
(if delaywith
parapre-authorized
ajustar a quantidade
iLok
2 Press
2
desejadaPress the
the assigned
de delay assigned rotary
rotary encoder
para o canal. encoder to
to apply
apply delay
delay to
to the
the chan-
chan- AI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
nel. The
nel. The encoder
encoder indicator
indicator LED
LED lights
lights when
when delay
delay is
is applied.
applied. mic/line level inputs
3 Adjust the assigned Delay encoder to set the desired amount
3 Adjust the assigned Delay encoder to set the desired amount AO16 Analog Output Card that provides 16 analog line level
of
of channel
Each delay.
Stage Rack
channel includes:
delay. outputs


Chapter 7:
7: Inputs
Inputs and
and Input Routing 77
Input Routing 77
Digital
Fontes Input
Digitais Sources
de Entrada
EmOn systemsque
sistemas
Digital
that includeuma
Inputincluem
a DSI (Digital Stage Input) card, the
Sources placa DSI (Digital Stage Input), os
following
seguintes additional
ajustes settings
e displays and displays
adicionais are provided.
estão presentes.
On systems that include a DSI (Digital Stage Input) card, the
following additional settings and displays are provided.
Lock LED
SRC Off
Source
Lock LED
SRC Off
Source
Input de
Controles controls
entradafor a DSI
para channel
um canal DSI
Lock LED Indicates lock status for the channel, and mirrors
Lock Indica for
LEDcontrols
Input o status de lock de um canal, e espelha o mesmo
a DSI channel
the same LED on the DSI card.
LED na placa DSI.
Lock LED Indicates lock status for the channel, and mirrors
SRC Off Toggles Sample Rate Conversion on or off for that
SRCthe
Offsame LED
Alterna on the DSI
a Sample Ratecard.
Conversion entre ligada e desligada
channel, and mirrors the same LED on the DSI card. A lit SRC
para aquele canal, e espelha o mesmo LED na placa DSI. Um switch
Off
SRCswitch indicates
Off Toggles thatRate
Sample SRCConversion
is disabled. on or off for that
SRC apagado indica que o SRC está desligado.
channel, and mirrors the same LED on the DSI card. A lit SRC
ADAT (Source) Enables the ADAT Optical port as the active in-
Off(Source)
switch indicates
ADAT Habilita athat
portaSRC is disabled.
ADAT Optical como fonte de entrada
put source on the DSI card. When lit, the DSI card is clocking
ativa na placa DSI. Quando aceso, a placa DSI card está travada e
and
ADATlistening
seguindo (Source) to
a entrada corresponding
Enables
ADAT the ADAT ADAT
Optical
correspondente; input;
portwhen
quando as thedark,
apagado, the
active in-
o canal
channel
put
está is receiving
source
recebendo onsinal
the da
DSIinput
card.from
entrada AESthe
When corresponding
lit,
correspondente. AES
the DSI card is input.
clocking
and listening to corresponding ADAT input; when dark, the
Direct
Direct Outs
channel Outs
is aresempre
estão also available
receiving onthe
disponíveis
input from DSI-fed
nos channels,
canais andinput.
their
alimentados
corresponding AES pelo
DSI,pickoff
e seuspoint can de
pontos be specified in the
alimentação patchbay.
podem ser especificados no
Direct Outs are also available on DSI-fed channels, and their
patchbay.
pickoff point can be specified in the patchbay.
Using Input Direct

Utilizando Input Direct
Input Direct mode lets you completely bypass the built-in dy-
Using Input Direct
namicsInput
O modo and Direct
EQ processing, and all inserts
permite colocar on input em
completamente channels
bypass
os and
processadores
InputFXDirect
returns.de dinâmica
This
mode mode
lets e EQ, the
you routes e todos
completely input ossignal
bypass inserts de Input
directly
the built-in dy-
Channels
from
namics eand
the FX
TopReturns.
EQ Estepickoff
ofprocessing,
Channel modo endereça
toinserts
and all o input
the channel
on sinal de
fader. entrada
channels
diretamente do ponto
and FX returns. de mode
This alimentação
routes mais alto do
the input faderdirectly
signal de canal.
from
To the Top
bypass of Channel
all processing onpickoff tochannel
an input the channel
or FXfader.
return:
Para colocar em bypass todos os processadores em um Input
1 Target
Channel theReturn:
ou FX channel by pressing its Select switch.
To bypass all processing on an input channel or FX return:
2 Go to the Inputs page.
1 Selecione
1 Target o canal
the pressionando
channel seuits
by pressing switch Select.
Select switch.
3 Click the Input Direct button in the Config section of the In-
2 àGo
2 Vá to the Inputs page.
putspágina Inputs.
page for the selected channel. The button flashes to indi-
cate
3 Input
Click theDirect modebutton
Input Direct is active.
in the Config section of the In-
3 Clique no botão Input Direct na seção Config da página Inputs
puts page for the selected channel. The button flashes to indi-
do canal selecionado. O botão pisca para indicar que o modo Input
cateestá
Direct Input Direct mode is active.
ativo.
Input Direct
Input Direct
Input button
Direct
Input
Botão InputDirect
Directbutton

Chapter 8: Outputs and Output Routing
Chapter
Capítulo
Chapter 8:
8: Outputs
8: Saídas and
and Output
e Roteamento
Outputs Routing
de Saídas
Output Routing
Stage
This chapter Racksshows
are used
howwith anthe
to do FOH Rack, and provide all stage
following: The following
3 Click Edit. components must be purchased separately:
audio
• This I/O
Configure for VENUE Profile systems. Up to busses
two Stage Racks
chapterandshowsnamehow Mains,
to dooutputs and
the following: •3Video
ClickDisplay
Edit. (15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display
Este This
capítulo
can
This be ensina
used
chapter
chapter como:
simultaneously,
shows
showsandhow
how to supporting
to do
do the up to
the following:
following: 96 total inputs. ClickEdit.
3 33Clique
Click Edit.
Edit.
• •Configurar
Assign outputs
• Configure
•• Configure e and
nomear
Configure and
busses
name
Mains,
and name
to hardware
Mains,
saídas
name Mains,
outputs
e
outputs
busses
Mains, outputs
outputs and
in the
and busses
and busses
busses DVI supported.
Patchbay
• Audio
Atribuir I/Osaídas
• Assign e busses
outputs para to
and busses ashardware
saídas de hardware
outputs in theno
•• Assign
•Patchbay
Route Assign outputs
outputs
Patchbay
and busses
to Mains,
outputs and busses
Groups,to hardware
to hardware
Aux Sends, outputs in the
and Matrix
outputs in the • USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
• Rotear
mixers Patchbay
saídas para Mains, Groups, Aux Sends e mixers Matrix
Patchbay
• individually
Route outputs to Mains, Groups,power.
Aux Sends, and Matrix
• •Usar •• inserts
Using Route outputs
plug-in
Route
mixers
selectable
de plug-ins
to
inserts,
outputs EQphantom
eand
to Mains,
Mains, gráficos
Groups,
using nas
Graphic
Groups, saídas
Aux
Aux Sends,
EQ and
and Matrix
on outputs
Sends, Matrix Digital Snake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
• Atribuir
• 8mixers e endereçar
analog
mixers
outputDirect Outputs
channels; expandable up to 48 analog or Setting theconnection
Main bus configuration
• Assign and route Direct Outputs • The between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
• Ajustar • digital
Using plug-in de
parâmetros
outputs inserts,
per Stageand
canais de using
saída Graphic EQ on outputs
Rack.
• •Usar •• Using
Adjust Using plug-in
plug-in
output inserts,
inserts, and using
and using Graphic
Graphic EQ
EQ on
on outputs
outputs a Digital Snakebuscable.
bus This cable canBusses.
be purchased directly
• VCAsAssign andchannel parameters
route Direct Outputs Select the
4 Ajustando
Setting
Setting
configuration
athe
configuração
the
Main do for
Mainthe
configuration Main
• Assign
• Assign and
andandroute
route Direct Outputs
DirectI/O
Outputs Setting the Main
from Avid Main bus
bus configuration
configuration
or assembled by your preferred vendor.
•Synchronization
Use VCAs output
• Adjust Control
channel parameters 4
ClickSelect
Apply.the configuration foros
thebusses
Main Busses.
• Adjust
Adjust output
output channel
channel parameters
parameters
5 4 Selecione aThe system restarts
configuração para with the new Main bus con-
Main.
• 4 Select
4 Select the
the configuration
configuration for
for the
the Main
Main Busses.
Busses.
•• Snake connectors to enable primary and redundant (if
Use VCAs figuration.
Configurando
• Use
Use VCAs
• applicable)
VCAs Saídas 5 Click Apply. The system restarts with the new Main bus con-
5Optional Components
connection to a VENUE FOH Rack. 5
5 ClickApply.
Clique
Click Apply.
Apply.
figuration.
O sistema
The
The systemreinicia
system restartscom
restarts withasthe
with novas
the newconfigurações
new Main
Main bus con-do
bus con-
Configuring
Os seguintes tipos deOutputs
busses de saída estão disponíveis: Mains,
bus
Groups
The
Main.
figuration.
figuration.
following components are optional, and must be
Configuring Outputs
Groups (ou Variable Groups), Auxes, mixers Matrix e Personal Qs.
The following types of output busses are available: Mains,
Groups
Configuring
System Outputs
Components Eight Group busses are available. These Group busses can be
Groups
Groups
Groups (or Variable Groups), Auxes, Matrix mixers, and globally configured to be mono or stereo as part of the system
MainsThe following types of output busses are available: Mains, Eight Groupof busses
The following types of transfer Showare available.
data; 512 MBThese Group
or larger busses can be
recommended)
Personal
The Qs.
following
Groups (or Variable of output
types Groups), busses
outputAuxes, are
are available:
bussesMatrixavailable: Mains,
mixers,Mains,
and Aux/Group
Eight
Eight Group
Groupbus configuration.
busses
busses are
arebe See “Configuring
available.
available. These
These Group
Group Aux, Group,
busses can be
Groups (or Variable Groups), Auxes, Matrix mixers, and Oito • busses
globally
Near-field Group
configured estão
monitor to disponíveis.
mono or
speakers for Esses
stereo
mix partbusses
asbusses
position the can
Group
ofmonitoring be
podem
system
Included
Os busses
GroupsMain
Personal(or Components
podem ser
Qs.Variable configurados
Groups), Auxes, nos formatos
Matrix L–R+M
mixers, and ou and
ser Variable
globally
globally Group
configured
configured
globalmente Busses”
to
to
configuradosbe
be on
mono
monopage
para or
or80.
stereo
stereo
serem
Aux/Group bus configuration. See “Configuring Aux, Group,
as
as
monopart
part ouof
of the
the system
system
estéreo como
Personal
L–C–R.
Personal Qs.
Os busses
Qs. Main são controaldos pelos controles dedicados • Headphones with 1/4-inch jack
Mains
All VENUE
e fader Profile
Mains na seçãosystems
Output. include the following: Group
Aux/Group
partes de umabus
Aux/Group
andoutputs
Variable canGroup
configuration.
configuração
bus configuration.
Busses”
be controlled
deon See
bus
See
from page
“Configuring
Aux/Group.
“Configuring
the80.
VejaAux,
Aux,
faders and encoders
Group,
“Configurando
Group,
and
•
Busses Variable
Dynamic
Aux, Group
and Variable Group
or
Group Busses”
condenser
e Variable on
Busses”Group” page
microphone
on page 80.
na 80. and
página 80.XLR mic cable
TheMains
• VENUE
Main bussesProfile
can beconsole
configured in L–R+M or L–C–R for- in the Output section.
Mains
Configurando os busses Main
Group
Group
(foroutputs
Talkback)
outputs
can be controlled from the faders and encoders
can be
mats.•TheTwo Main busses
(2) IEC are cables
power controlled from the dedicated Group
Saídas outputs
Group podem be controlled
can ser controlled from from the
the faders
faders and
and encoders
encodersna
The Main busses can be configured in L–R+M or L–C–R for- in•See
the Output
Footswitches
Chapter 9, (up tocontroladas
section.
“Groups.” 2) pelos fader e codificadores
Mains
The
The
• controls
Main
Main
Monitor and
busses
busses
mountfader
can
can inVGA
be
be
for the Output
configured
configured
screen section.
in
in L–R+M
L–R+M
(screen notor
or L–C–R
L–C–R
included) for-
for- in
seção
in the
the Output
Output.
Output section.
section.
mats. Main
Os busses The Mainpodem busses are controlled
ser configurados parafrom the como:
operar dedicated • MIDI cables (for connecting external MIDI devices)
mats.
mats. The
The Main
Main busses
busses are
areincontrolled
controlled from
from the
the dedicated
dedicated See Chapter 9, “Groups.”
• Trackball
Mains controls mount
and (trackball
fader thenot included)
Output section.
Mains
Configuring
Mains controls
the
controls and
Main
and
Posiciona fader
fader in
Busses
in the
the Output
Output section.
section. Auxes • BNC See
VejaChapter
See cables
o Capítulo
Chapter 9,
9, “Groups.”
(for connecting
9, “Groups.”Word clock between the
“Groups.”
L–R plus Mono Mouse
• VENUE Pados sinais entre os canais esquerdo VENUE system and external digital devices)
e direito para o busthe
TheConfiguring
L–R,
Maine somaBussesos sinais para um bus mono Up to Auxes
Auxes 16 Aux busses are available. The number of available
• VENUE
Main bussesProfile
Configuring
independente.
can be
the
Configuring the Main Busses
Guide
configured
Main Busses
to operate as either: Auxes
• 25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
Aux busses is set as part of the system Aux/Group bus config-
• Two (2)busses consolecanlights Up to 16 Aux busses are available. The number of available
L–R The
plusMain Pans signals
Monobusses be between
configured theto operate
left as either:
and right chan- AtéUp16
uration.
Up busses
toSee AuxAux
16“Configuring
bussesestão disponíveis.
Aux,
are Group,The
available. O número
and
The Variable
number de busses
ofGroup
available Aux é
L–C–RThe
The Main
Posiciona
Main
• the
Protective os
busses can
sinais
can
Dust be
be configured
entre os
configured to
canais
to operate as
esquerdo,
operate as either:
direito
either: e Auxtobusses
16 Aux busses
is set as partare available.
of the system number
Aux/Group of available
bus config-
nels to L–R bus, andCover
sums signals to a separate mono bus. ajustado
Busses”
Aux on
Aux como
pageis
busses
busses parte
is80. asda
set as
set part
partconfiguração
of the
of the system de bus
system Aux/Group
Aux/Group
Aux/Group bus
busdoconfig-
sistema.
config-
central.
L–R plus Mono Pans signals between the left and right chan- uration. See “Configuring Aux, Group, and Variable Group
• Rack(s)
L–R
L–R
nels
plus
plus
to
Mono
Mono
the
(seePans
L–R
next)signals
Pans
bus, signals
and sums
between
between
signals
the
the
to
left
left
a
and
and right
separate right
mono
chan-
chan-
bus.
VENUE
Veja
uration.
uration.
Busses”
See
See
on
Profile
“Configurando Busses
“Configuring
“Configuring
page 80.
Expansion
Aux,
Aux,
Aux,
Group
Group,
Group, Options
e Variable
and
and
Group”Group
Variable
Variable
na página
Group
L–C–R
nelsPans signals across left, center and right channels. 80.
Aux bus outputs can be controlled from the Output faders.
nels to
to the
the L–R
L–R bus,
bus, and
and sums
sums signals
signals toto aa separate mono bus.
separate mono bus. Busses” on
Busses” on page
page 80. 80.
Racks,
O
L–C–R áudio Software
Pans pode ser
signals CDs,
across iLoks,
interrompido
left, and
ou
center ter Cables
andseus níveis
right alterados
channels. Aux bus outputs can besee controlled from the Sends
Output faders.
AudioPansmay signals
be interrupted or may change levels during this As For
saídasmoreoutputs
information, Chapter 10, “Aux and
L–C–R
L–C–R Pansesse
durante signals across
across left,
procedimento left,decenter
center and
and right
configuração.right channels.
channels. For
Aux
Aux busdos
details
bus onbusses
outputsall VENUE
can
canAuxbe
bepodem
systems ser and
controlled
controlled controladas
from
from thepelos
options,
the visitfaders
Output
Output the Output.
Avid
faders.
faders.
configuration
Each Mix Rack procedure.
orbeFOH Rack includes: Variable
website Groups.”
(www.avid.com).
Audio may interrupted or may change levels during this For more information, see Chapter 10, “Aux Sends and
Audio
Audio maymay be interrupted
be procedure.
interrupted or
or may
may change
change levels
levels during
during this
this Paramore
For
For moremais informações,
information,
see Chapter
Chaptero Capítulo
10,
10, “Aux
“Aux 10,Sends
“Auxand
Sends Sends e
and
• System Restore
configuration CD Variable Groups.”
To configure the Main busses:
configuration procedure. Variable Groups.”
configuration
Para configurar
• ECx os busses
Ethernet procedure.
Main: Software Installer CD
Control Variable
Mix Rack Groups
Variable
Variable Groups.”
Groups.”
Options
1 Put
To the systemthe
configure into Config
Main busses:mode.
To• configure
To
1 Coloque
Standalone
configure
o sistema the Software
thenoMain
Main
modo
Installer CD
busses:
busses:
Config. When Variable
Variablethe Groups
system Groups
is in Variable Groups mode, the 8 Group
2 Go Put
1 •toiLokthe
the system
Options into
page Config
and mode.
click the System tab. Variable
I/O
busses Options
operate
Groups
in much the same way as Aux busses.
Put
1 Put
1 theUSB
the
Smart
system
system
Key
into
into
(for storing
Config
Config mode.plug-in authorizations)
mode. When o
Quando the systemestá
sistema is inno Variable Groups mode,
modo Variable Groups, theos8oito
Group
busses
2 Vá 2à•página Options e clique
pagena aba System. When
When the
the system
system is in Variable
is insimilar
Variable Groups
Groups mode, thethe 8 8 Group
GoPlug-in
to the installer
Options discs (if
andany) with
click thepre-authorized
System tab. iLok busses
Group
AI16
When set operate
operam
Analog
to de
Variable in much
modo
Mic/Line Groups the
Input same
mode,aos
Card way
busses
that
the asmode,
Output Aux
Aux.
provides busses.
16
section
Group
analog
has 16
2 Go
2 to
to the Options page and
and click
click the System tab.
the System busses
busses operate
operate in in much
much the the same
same way way asas Aux
Aux busses.
•GoTwo the Options
(2) IEC power page
cables tab.
mic/line
available Aux level inputs
busses and 8 available Variable Group busses,
busses.
When set
Quando to Variable
ajustada para Groups
o modo mode,
Variable the Groups,
Output section
atoseção has 16
Output
• One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console letting When
When youset send
set to independently
to Variable
Variable Groups
Groups controllable
mode,
mode, the the signalssection
Output
Output all 24
section has
has 16
16
available
possui
AO16 16 Aux
Analog bussesbusses
Output and
AuxCarde 88thatavailable
busses
provides Variable
Variable Group
Group
16 analog busses,
disponíveis,
line level
busses in the Aux
available
available system.
Aux busses
busses and
and 8
8 available
available Variable
Variable Group
Group busses,
busses,
Each Stage Rack includes: permitindo
letting youenviar
outputs sinais independentemente
send independently controláveis
controllable signals to all 24para
letting
letting you
you send
send independently
independently controllable
controllable signals
signals to to all
all 24
24
todos
busses
Variable os 24
in
Groups busses
the system.
mode do issistema.
set as part of the system Aux/Group
busses
busses
XO16 in
in the
Analog system.
theand
system.
Digital Output Card that provides 8 analog
bus configuration. See “Configuring Aux, Group, and Variable
Variable
Oline
modolevel Groups
Variable
outputs, mode
and 8éisAES
Groups set digital
as part
ajustado comoof the system
parte
outputs. Aux/Groupde
da configuração
Group Busses”
Variable
Variable on page
Groups
Groups mode
mode 80.is set
set as
is Veja as part
part of of the system
theGroup,
system Aux/Group
Aux/Group
busbus Aux/Group
configuration. do sistema.
See “Configuring “Configurando
Aux, Busses and Aux, Group e
Variable
bus
bus
AT16
Variable configuration.
configuration.
A-Net
Group” Output
na See
See
Card
página “Configuring
“Configuring
that
80. provides Aux,
Aux,
16 Group,
Group,
channels and
andofVariable
Variable
A-Net
Group Busses” on page 80. 8: Outputs and Output Routing
Chapter 79
Group Busses”
Busses” on
Groupcompatible
output page
on with 80.
page Aviom®
80. Personal Mixers and other
Pro16™ Series devices. Chapter 8: Outputs and Output Routing 79
Chapter
Chapter 8:
8: Outputs
Outputs and
and Output Routing 79
Output Routing 79
digital I/O.
Capítulo 8: Saídas e Roteamento de Saídas 79
Matrix Mixers and Personal Qs Data
Data Cleared
Cleared When
When Changing
Changing BusBus Configurations
Configurations
Matrix
Matrix
Mixers Mixers
Matrix
Matrix eMixers
Personaland
Mixers and
Qs
andPersonal
Personal
PersonalQsQs
Qs Data
Data
Cleared
Dados
Data Cleared
When
Apagados When
nas Changing
Changing
Alterações Bus
BusConfigurations
Configurations
de Configuração de Bus
Matrix Mixers andPersonal
Personal Qsare available. Data Cleared When Changing BusConfigurations
Cleared When Changing Bus Configurations
Eight
Eight Matrix
Matrix mixers
mixers and
and 88 Personal Q
Q mixers
mixers are available. When
When the
the bus
bus configuration
configuration is
is changed,
changed, all
all settings
settings are
are
Eight
Eight
Matrix
Matrix mixers
mixers and and 8 Personal
8 Personal
Personal QQmixers
Qmixers
mixers are are
available.
available. WhenWhen
When the
thethe
abus bus
bus configuration
configuration isischanged,
ischanged,
changed, all all
settings
settings are are
OitoEight
Each
Eachmixers Matrix
Matrix
Matrix
Eight Matrix
Matrix mixers
mixer
mixer is aaand
e oito
is
mixers and8 8Personal
mixers
discrete
discrete 12-in/1-out
12-in/1-out
Personal Q
Q estão
(mono)
(mono)
mixers are
areavailable.
disponíveis.
submixer,
submixer,
available.Cada cleared
Quando
cleared
When (or
(or the toconfiguration
configuração
set
set to
bus default)
default) de
from
configurationfrom bus is échanged,
the
the alterada,
current
current all settings
alltodos
console
console os are
ajustes
settings
settings
settings are das
Each
mixer Each
Each Matrix
Matrix
matrix
Matrix é mixer
ummixer
mixer isisaisadiscrete
submixer adiscrete
12-in/1-out
12-in/1-out
12-in/1-out (mono)
(mono) (mono)
(mono) submixer,
submixer,
distinto, com
submixer, a cleared
cleared (or
configurações
cleared (or(or
set set
setto
da
toto
default)
default)
console
default) from
e from
de
from the
todos
thethe
current
as current
cenas
current console
console settings
armazenada,
console settings
settings de todos
with
with the
theMatrix
Each ability
abilitymixer
to
to link
link isadjacent
adjacent
a discreteMatrix Matrix mixers
mixers(mono)
12-in/1-out into submixer, and
into stereo
stereo and from
from all
cleared all
(orstored
stored
set to snapshots,
snapshots,
default) from for
forthe all
all Groups.
Groups.
current console settings
withwith
the
habilidade theability
dePQabilitytototo
associar link linkadjacent
mixers adjacent
Matrix Matrix
Matrix mixers
adjacentes mixers
em intointo
stereo
pares estéreo. and
stereo osand
and fromfrom
grupos, allsão
all
stored
stored
snapshots,
apagados snapshots, forfor all all
(ou substituídos Groups.
Groups.
pelos valores-padrão).
with
pairs.
pairs.
with the
Each
Eachtheability
PQ mixer
mixer
ability tolinkis aaadjacent
is
link discrete
discrete
adjacent Matrix
Matrixmixers
12-in/2-out
12-in/2-out into
intostereo
(stereo)
mixers(stereo) sub-
sub-
stereo andfromfromallallstoredstoredsnapshots,
snapshots,for forallallGroups.
Groups.
Cada
pairs.mixer
pairs.
pairs.Each
Each PQPQ
Each éPQ
PQ um
mixersubmixer
mixer
mixer distinto
isisaisadiscrete
adiscrete
12-in/2-out
12-in/2-out
12-in/2-out (stereo).
(stereo)
(stereo)
(stereo) sub-sub-
sub-
mixer.
mixer.
pairs. Each PQ mixer is a discrete 12-in/2-out (stereo) sub- Linking
Linking Aux
Aux Busses
Busses
mixer.
mixer.
mixer. Associando
Linking
Linking Aux Busses
Aux BussesAux
Busses
mixer. Linking
Linking Aux
Aux Busses
Busses
AsMatrix
fontes
Matrix mixerde entrada
mixer and dos
and Personal
Personal Q mixers Q inputMatrix
input sourcese Personal
sources can Q
can includepodem
include up incluir
up toto You
You cancan link
link odd/even
odd/even bus bus pairs
pairs andand pan pan input
input signals
signals intointo
até 12
Matrix
Matrixentradas,
Matrix mixermixer
mixer selecionáveis
and and
and Personal
Personal QQ de qualquer
input
Qinput
inputsources combinação
sources can can
include deup
include busses
up
tototo YouVocê
Youcan pode
can
link associar
link
odd/even pares
odd/even bus de
bus busses
pairs
pairsand and ímpar/par
pan paninputinput esignals
posicionar
signals
signals intointosinais
12
12 inputs,
inputs,
Matrix selectable
selectable
mixer andPersonal
from
from any
Personal any Q inputsources
combination
combination sources can
of
of Aux,
can include
Aux, Group
Group
include up or
up You
or to those
those
You can
bus
bus link
pairs.
pairs.
can link odd/even
Aux
Aux bus
bus
odd/even bus
pairs
pairs
bus pairs
are
are
pairs and
linked
linked pan
andAux on
on input
a
a
pansão global
global
input signalsinto
basis,
basis, and
and
into
Aux,
1212Group
12
inputs,
inputs,
inputs, ou Mains
selectable
selectable acrescidos
selectable from from
from anyany de
any até 8 Input of
combination
combination
combination Channel,
of Aux,
ofAux,
Aux, FX
Group
Groupreturns
Group de
ororor those entrada
those
those bus bus
bus nesses
pairs.
pairs.
pairs. Aux pares.
Aux
Aux bus bus Pares
pairspairs
are de
are bus
linked
linked on on
a associados
global
a global
basis,
basis, na
and base
and
Mains
Mains busses
busses selectable
12 inputs, plus
plus upup to tofrom
88 unique
unique input
input channels,
any combination channels, FX
FX returns
of pré
Aux, returns
Group or appearappear
thoseas asbus
linked
linked
pairs.on
on allbus
all
Aux pairs
channels.
channels.
bus pairsare linked
For
For
are on
information
information
linked on a aglobalonbasis,
on
global basis,and
linking
linking and
ouMains
entradas
Mains busses de
busses hardware.
plusplus
up up Os
to to pontos
88unique
8unique
unique de
inputalimentação
inputchannels,
channels, FX eFXpós-fader
returns
returns appearglobal
appear e aparecem
asaslinked
aslinked
linkedon oncomo
all associados em todos os canais. Para
orMains
or hardware
hardware
Mains busses
busses plus
inputs.
inputs.
plus upuptoand
Pre-
Pre- and
to uniqueinput
post-fader
post-fader
8atribuídos tap
tap
input channels,
for
forPickoffs
Matrix
Matrix
channels, FXandreturns
and
FX PQ
PQ
returns appear
Auxes,
Auxes,
appear see
see “Linking
as“Linking
linked on allall
Aux
Aux
on
channels.
channels.
channels.
alland
and Variable
Variable
channels.
For
ForFor
information
information
information
Group
ForGroup Busses
Busses
information
ononon
for
linking
for
linking
linking
Stereo
Stereo
on“Associando
linking
para as fontes
ororhardware
orhardware
hardware Matrix
inputs.
inputs.e PQ
Pre- são
Pre-and and post-fader
post-fader na
tapaba
tap
forforMatrix
Matrix da
and página
andPQPQ Auxes,informações
Auxes, seesee sobre
“Linking
“Linking associação
Aux Auxand and de
Variable
Variablebusses
Group
Group Aux,
Busses veja
BussesforforStereo
Stereo
inputs. Pre-theand post-fader oftap
thefor Matrix and
andPQ Auxes,
sources
sources are
are assigned
or hardware
Options. assigned
inputs. in
in the
Pre- Pickoffs
Pickoffs
and tab
tab of
post-fader the
tap Options
Options
for Matrix page.
page. Auxes,see
PQ Operation”
Operation”
Busses Aux
see “Linking
on
on epage
page Aux
95.
95.
Variable
“Linking Aux andandVariable
Group para
Variable Group
GroupBusses
Operação Bussesfor
Estéreo” forStereo
naStereo
página
sources
sources
sources are are
are assigned
assigned
assigned inininthe the
the Pickoffs
Pickoffs
Pickoffs tab tab
tabofofof
the the
the Options
Options
Options page.
page.
page. Operation”
Operation”
Operation” on on
pagepage
95. 95.
sources are assigned in the Pickoffs tab of the Options page. Operation”on
95. onpage
page95. 95.
User
User Source
Source input
Atribuições input
deinput assignments
assignments
entrada are
are stored
personalizadas storedsão in
in Snapshots
Snapshots as as em
User User
User Source
Source
Source input
input assignments
assignments
assignments are
areare
stored
stored
stored ininarmazenadas
Snapshots
inSnapshots
Snapshots asasas Naming Channels
part
part of
of
Snapshots their
their distinct
distinct
como parteMatrix
Matrix or
or PQ
PQ
dos tipos are data
data
de dadostype.
type.
stored Matrix ou PQ. Nomeando Canais
part
User Source
part
of their
of their
input
distinct
distinct
assignments
Matrix
Matrix or PQ
or PQ
datadata
type.
in Snapshots
type.
as Naming
Naming
Naming Channels
Channels
Channels
part of their distinct Matrix
part of their distinct Matrix or PQ data type. or PQ data type. Naming
Output
Output channel
Channels
channel names names can can be be changed
changed from from thethe Outputs
Outputs page page
AsMatrix
Matrix
saídas mixer
mixer
dos and
and PQ
mixers PQMatrix
mixer
mixer outputseoutputs
PQ sãoare
arecontroladas
controlled
controlled from from the
pelos the
faders Output
OsOutput
Output channel
nomes channel
dos names
names
canais can
de canbebebe
changed
saída changed
podemfrom from
ser the the
Outputs
alteradosOutputs page
pela page
página
Matrix
Matrix
Matrix mixermixer
mixer and and
and PQ PQmixer mixer outputs
outputs are are
controlled
controlled fromfromthe the or
or Output channel names can be changed from the Outputspage
from
from channel
the
the Patchbay.
Patchbay.names can changed from the Outputs page
deoutput
output
saída;
Matrix faders;
faders;
as entradas
mixer andPQ
matrix
matrix mixer
inputs
inputs
Matrix
PQ mixer sãooutputs
are
are controlled
controlledare
controladas
outputs arecontrolled
from
from
pelos
controlledthe
the from
fromthe
encoders
encoders
codificadoresthe Outputs
ororor
fromfrom theou thepelo Patchbay.
Patchbay.
Patchbay.
output
output
output faders;
faders;
faders; matrix
matrix
matrix inputsinputs
inputs are are
arecontrolled
controlled fromfrom thetheencoders
encoders orfrom
fromthe thePatchbay.
Patchbay.
when
when
quando aauma
output particular
particular
matrix
faders; matrix
matrix
particular
matrix is arecontrolled
is selected.
inputséselected. controlledfrom
selecionada. fromthe theencoders
encoders
whenwhen a particular
a particular matrix
matrix is selected.
is selected. To
To change
change the
the name
name of of
when a particular matrix
when a particular matrix is selected. is selected. Para
ToToTo alterar
change
change the o nome
the
namenamedean
of
an
uman
an
of
Output
Output
canal
Output
Output
channel:
channel:
Output:
channel:
channel:
See
See Chapter
Chapter 11,
11, “Matrix
“Matrix and
andMatrix
Personal
Personal QQ Mixers.”
Mixers.” change the name of an Output channel:
Veja o Capítulo 11, “Mixers e Personal Q.” 11 GoTo change
Go to
to the the name
the Outputs
Outputs page
page of an
or Output
or the
the Patchbay channel:
Patchbay page.
page.
See See
See Chapter
Chapter 11, 11,
“Matrix
“Matrix and and
Personal
Personal Q Mixers.”
Q Mixers.”
SeeChapter
Chapter11, 11,“Matrix
“Matrixand andPersonal
PersonalQQMixers.”Mixers.” 111Go
1Vá
GoGo
to
àto to
the
página
thethe
Outputs
Outputs
Outputs
Outputs page page
ou or
page àoror
the the
página
1 Go to the Outputs page or the Patchbay page.
the Patchbay
Patchbay
Patchbay.
Patchbay page.
page.
page.
22 Target
Target the
the channel
channel whose
whose name
name you
you want
want to
to change
change byby
Configuring Aux, Group, and Variable Group 2 2Target
Target
2Target thethe
channel
channelwhose
whose name
nameyouyou
want
wanttototo
change
changeby by
Configuring
Configuring
Configurando
Configuring Aux,
Busses Aux,
Aux,
Aux, Group,
Group,
Group andand
e Variable Variable
Variable
Group Group
Group pressing
pressing itsthe
22Selecione
its ochannel
canal
Select
Select whose
cujo
switch
switch nome
or
or name
vocêyou
selecting
selecting quer
it
it want
alterar
on-screen.
on-screen.tochange
changeby
pressionando seu
Busses
Configuring Aux,Group,
Group,and andVariable
VariableGroupGroup pressing
Target
pressing
pressing
the channel
itsitsits
Select
Select
whose
switch
name
switch
you
or or
want
selecting
selecting
by
ititon-screen.
iton-screen.
on-screen.
Busses
Busses
Busses switch
pressing SelectitsSelect switch
switchoror
ou selecionado-o
Select selecting
na tela.
selecting it on-screen.
Busses
Auxes
Auxese Groups
Auxes and (ou
and Groups
Groups (orVariable
(or VariableGroups)
Variable Groups) compartilham
Groups) share
share the availablebusses
os
the available sys-
sys-
33 Double-click
Double-click
3 Double-click
Double-click
3Double-click
the
the channel
the
channel
the
channel
channel
name.
name.
name.name.
Auxes
Auxes and andGroupsGroups (or(orVariable
Variable sys-sys- 333Clique thethechannel name.
disponíveis
Auxes and no sistema.
Groups Opções deGroups)
Groups)
configuração share
share
the the
available
incluem: available Double-click
duas vezes nochannel
nome do name.
canal.
tem
tem busses.
busses.
Auxes and Groups(or
Configuration
Configuration (orVariable
options
options
Variable Groups)
include
include
Groups) share
the
the
share thetheavailable
availablesys-
following:
following: sys-
tem tem
tem busses.
busses.
busses. Configuration
Configuration
Configuration options
options
options include
include
include the
thethe
following:
following:
following:
8 88 tem+busses.
Auxes 8+ Stereo Configuration
Groups Divide options
os busses include the following:
disponíveis nobusses
sistema
Auxes
Auxes + 88 Stereo
Stereo Groups
Groups Divides
Divides the
the available
available system
system busses
88Auxes
entre 8Auxes
8Auxes ++8+8Stereo
busses 8Aux
Stereo
monoGroups
Groups
e 8 Divides
Divides
busses
Divides the
Group
thethe
available
available
stereo.
available system
system
system busses
busses
between
between
8 Auxes 88 mono
mono Stereo
+ 8 StereoAux Groups
Aux busses
busses and
Groups and 88 stereo
Divides stereo Group
Group busses.
the available systembusses
busses. busses
between
between
between 88mono8mono
mono Aux Aux
Aux busses
busses
busses and and
and 88stereo
8stereo
stereo Group
Group
Group busses.
busses.
busses.
between 8 mono Aux busses and 8 stereo Group busses.
1616
16Auxes
Auxes
Auxes + 8++Mono
88 Mono
Mono Groups
Groups
Groups Divide os busses
Divides
Divides the disponíveis
the available
available system
systemno sistema
bus-
bus-
16
entre1616
Auxes
16 Auxes
busses
Auxes + 8+8Mono
8Aux
Mono Groups
mono Groups
e8 Divides
Divides
busses
Divides the
Group
thethe
available
available
mono.
available system
system
system bus-bus- Changing
bus-
ses
ses 16 Auxes+16
between
between + 8Mono
16 MonoGroups
mono
mono Aux
Aux
Groupsbusses
busses and
and
Divides 88 mono
the mono Group
Group
available busses.
busses.
system bus- Changing thethe namename of of an
an Output
Output channel
channel in in the
the Outputs
Outputs page
page
ses ses
sesbetween
between
between 161616
monomono
mono Aux Aux
Aux busses
busses
busses and
andand 88mono
8mono
mono GroupGroup
Group busses. Changing
busses.
busses.
Changing
Alterando
Changing the
othe the
name
nome name
name ofofan
de um of
anan
Output
canal Output
Output
Output channel
nachannel
página
channel ininOutputs
the
inthethe
Outputs
Outputs
Outputs pagepage
page
ses between 16 mono Aux busses and 8 mono Group busses. 44 Type Changing
Type aa new
new the name
name
name of
and
and an Output
press
press channel
Enter
Enter on
on in
the
the the Outputs
computer
computer page
key-
key-
1616
16Auxes
Auxes
Auxes ++ 8+ Variable
88 Variable
Variable Groups
Groups
Groups (24(24
Bus)
(24 Bus)Divide
Bus) os busses
Divides
Divides the disponíveis 4 Type
the available
available Typea new
a newname name and and
presspressEnterEnteron on
the the
computer
computer
16 16
nosystemAuxes
sistema
16 Auxes
Auxes + 8+8Variable
entre
+ 8Variable
Variable
16 Groups
busses Groups
Aux
Groups (24 (24
mono
(24 Bus)Bus)
Bus) e Divides
8 Divides
busses
Divides the the
available
available
Variable
the Group
available 4 4Type
44 Digite
board.
board. Type a anew
um
new name
novo
name and
nome
and press
press Enter
e pressione
Enter onon the
the computer
Enter no key-
computer
key-
key-
teclado
key- do
system busses
16 Auxesbusses + between
between
8 Variable 16
16Groups
mono
mono(24 Aux
AuxBus)busses
busses and
and 88 the
Divides mono
mono Vari-
Vari-
available board.
board.
system
mono system busses
(habilita
system busses
busses o between
between
modo
between 16 16
Variable
16mono
mono Aux
Groups).
mono AuxAuxbussesbusses
busses and and
and 88mono
8mono
mono Vari-
Vari-
Vari- computador.
board.
board.
able
able Group
Group
system busses
busses
busses (enables
(enables
between 16Variable
Variable
mono Aux Groups
Groups bussesmode).
mode).
and 8 mono Vari-
ableable
Group
Group busses
busses(enables
(enables Variable
Variable Groups
Groups mode).
mode). When
When namingnaming channels
channels in in the
the Patchbay,
Patchbay, double-click
double-click the the
able
able Group
Group busses
busses (enables
(enables Variable
Variable Groups
Groups mode).
mode). When
When naming
naming channels
channels ininthe
inthethe
Patchbay,
Patchbay, double-click
double-click the the no
O áudio pode ser interrompido ou ter seus níveis alterados When
Quando
channel
channel naming
name
name channels
nomeando
next
next to
to the
thecanais
grid
grid to
tonoPatchbay,
Patchbay,
edit
edit
When naming channels in the Patchbay, double-click text;
text; double-click
pressclique
press Tab
Tab duas
on
on the
thethe
vezes
the
Audio
Audio may may be be interrupted
interrupted or or may
may change
change levels
levels during
during this
this channel
channel name name next next
to the
to the
grid grid
to edit
to edit
text;text;
press
press
Tab Tabon on
the the
Audio
Audio
durante may may
bebebe
esse interrupted
interrupted
procedimento orormay
or
de may change
change
configuração. levels
levels
during
during
thisthis nometo
channel
keyboard
keyboard dogo
name
to gocanal
tonext
to the
thepróximo
to the
next
next ao grid
grid
channel
channel para
totoedit
and
and editar
text; press
Shift+Tab
Shift+Tab oTab
texto;
to
to go
go pressione
onon the
to
to
Audio
configuration
configuration may interrupted
procedure
procedure may change
Audio may be interrupted or may change levels during this levels during this channel name next to the grid edit text; press Tab the
keyboard
keyboard
Tab
keyboard noto go
to
tecladogo
to the
to the
paranext next
ir channel
para channel
o and
próximo andShift+Tab
Shift+Tab
canal e tototogogototo
go
to go
to
Shift+Tab para
configuration
configuration
configuration procedure
procedure
procedure the
the previoustochannel.
previous
keyboard gogototothe
channel.
to the next
next channel
channel andand Shift+Tab
Shift+Tab to
Para configuration
configurarthe os busses procedure
Aux/Group/Variable the ir
the para
previous o
previous anterior.
channel.
channel.
To
To configure
configure the Aux/Group/Variable
Aux/Group/Variable Group Group:
Group busses:
busses: the
theprevious
previouschannel.
channel.
ToToTo
configure
configure
configure the the
the Aux/Group/Variable
Aux/Group/Variable
Aux/Group/Variable GroupGroup
Group busses:
busses:
busses:
To
Put
1 11Coloque configure
Put thetheo system
system the
sistemainto Aux/Group/Variable
into Config
Config
no modo mode.
mode.
Config. Group busses:
1 1Put
1PutPut
the
thethe
systemsystem
system intointo
into Config
Config
Config mode.
mode.
mode. Assigning
Atribuindo Busses
Busses Para toSaídas
Hardware De Hardware Outputs
22 Go
Go to to the
the Options
Options page page and
and click
click the
the System
System tab. tab. Assigning
Assigning
Assigning Busses
Busses
Busses tototoHardware
Hardware
Hardware Outputs
Outputs
Outputs
2 2VáGo à
2 2Go
página
Go
tototo
the the
the
Options
Options
Options
Options
e clique
pagepage
page
na
and and
and
aba
click
click
System.
click
thethethe
System
System
System tab.tab.
tab.
Assigning
Mains,
Mains, Groups
Groups (or
(or
Busses
Variable
Variable Groups),
to
Groups),
Hardware
Auxes,
Auxes, Matrix
Matrix
Outputs
mixer
mixer out-
out-
2 Go to the Options page and click the System tab. Mains,
Mains,
Mains, Groups
Groups
Groups (ou
(or (orVariable
Variable
Variable Groups),
Groups),
Groups), Auxes,
Auxes,
Auxes, saídas
Matrix de
Matrix mixers
mixer
mixer out-Matrix
out-
33 Click
Click Edit.
Edit. Mains,
ClickClickEdit.Edit. puts
puts andGroups
and
Mains, PQ
PQ
Groupsmixer
mixer (or(orVariable
outputs
outputs
Variable can
canGroups),
be Auxes,
be assigned
Groups),assigned
Auxes, toMatrix
to any mixer
any hardware
Matrixhardware
mixer out-
out-de
3 Clique
3 3
3 Click Edit.Edit. e
putssaídas
putsandand PQ de PQ mixers
mixermixer PQ
outputs podem
outputs can canser
be beatribuídas
assigned
assigned to a
toqualquer
anyanyhardware saída
hardware
3 Click Edit.
44 Select
Select aa bus
bus configuration.
configuration. puts
putsand
output
output on
on
andthe PQ
the mixer
mixeroutputs
system.
system.
PQsistema. Available
Available
outputs can
can bebeassigned
output
output totoany
destinations
destinations
assigned any hardware
include:
include:
hardware
hardware
output
output on on do
the the
system.
system. Destinos
Available
Available de saída
output
output disponíveis
destinations
destinations incluem:
include:
include:
4 4Select
Select
4Select a abus
abusbus
configuration.
configuration.
configuration. output on the system. Available output destinations include:
4 Selecione uma configuração
4 Select a bus configuration. de bus. •• Stage
Stage
output onaudio
audiothe outputs
outputs
system. Available output destinations include:
• • Stage
•Stage
Stage audioaudio outputs
outputs
•
•• FOH
FOH Saídas
• Stage audio
(local)
(local) de
audio outputs
áudio
audio
audio Stage
outputs
outputs
outputs
• • FOH
•FOH
FOH (local)
Saídas (local)
deaudioaudio
áudio outputs
outputs
FOH (local)
•• •Pro
• FOH
Pro Tools
Tools(local)
(local) audio
recording
recordingaudiooutputs
outputs
inputs
inputs
• •• Pro
•ProEntradas
ProTools Tools de
recording gravação
recording inputs do Pro Tools
inputs
• ProTools Toolsrecording
recordinginputs inputs
To
ToPara
assign
assign aa bus
atribuir busuma
or
or mixer
mixer
saída output
output
bus outo
tomixer
aa hardware
hardware
para umaoutput
output from
saídafrom
de the
the
hardware
ToToTo
assign
assign
assign
Patchbay:
Patchbay: a abus
abus
bus
orormixer
or mixer
mixeroutput
output
output totoatoahardware
ahardware
hardwareoutput
output
output fromfrom
from thethe
the
pelo
To
Patchbay:Patchbay:
assign
Patchbay: a bus or mixer output to a hardware output from the
Patchbay:
Patchbay:
Selecting
Selecting aa bus
bus configuration
configuration 11 Go
Go to
to the
the Patchbay
Patchbay page
page and
and click
click the
the Outputs
Outputs tab.
tab.
Selecting
Selecting
Selectinga abus
abus
bus
configuration
configuration
configuration
111Go
1Vá
GoGo
to
àtoto
the
páginathe
the Patchbay
Patchbay
Patchbay
Patchbay page
epage
page andand
clique
andclick
na click
click the
aba the
Outputs
Outputs
Outputs.
the Outputs tab.tab.
tab.
Selecionando uma
Selecting a configuração
bus de bus
configuration 1 Go to the Patchbay page and click the Outputs tab.
55 Click
Click Apply.
Apply. The
The system
system restarts
restarts with
with the
the new
new bus
bus configura-
configura- 22 To
To the
the left
left ofof the
the channel
channel grid,
grid, click
click the
the Mains,
Mains, PQ, Mtx (Ma-
PQ, Mtx (Ma-
5 5Click
Click
5ClickApply. The
Apply. The
system
systemrestarts
restarts
with
with
thethe
newnew
bus
bus
configura- 2 2To
2 To
configura- trix), the the
left left
ofofthe
ofthe
the
channel
channel grid,
grid,
clickclick
thethe
Mains,
Mains,
PQ,PQ,
MtxMtx(Ma-(Ma-
tion.
tion.
5 ClickApply.
Apply.The
The system
system restarts with
restarts withthe
thenew
newbus
busconfigura-
configura- 22To
À To
trix), the
esquerda
Aux
Aux or
theorleft
Grp
Grp
left do channel
grid
(Groups)
(Groups)
of the detab.
tab.
channel grid,
grid,click
canais, clickthe
clique theMains,
nas abas PQ,
Mains, Mains,Mtx(Ma-
PQ,Mtx PQ, Mtx
(Ma-
Clique
5 tion.
tion.
tion.
Apply. O sistema reinicia com as novas configurações de trix),
trix),
trix),Aux
(Matrix), or
Aux
Aux Aux
oror
Grp
ou (Groups)
Grp
Grp Grp(Groups)tab.
(Groups).
(Groups) tab.
tab.
bus. tion. trix), Aux or Grp (Groups) tab.
80
80 VENUE
VENUE Profile
Profile Guide
Guide
80
8080VENUE
VENUE
VENUEProfile
Profile
ProfileGuide
Guide
Guide
3 Click in the channel grid to assign a bus or Matrix/PQ mixer 3 In the Bus Assigns section, press the L–R (left and right) or
3 Click in the
3 Click inchannel grid grid
the channel to assign a busa or
to assign busMatrix/PQ mixer
or Matrix/PQ mixer 3 In3the
In Bus
the Assigns section,
Bus Assigns presspress
section, the L–R
the (left and and
L–R (left right) or or
right)
Clickno
3 3output
Clique in the
grid channel
(listed on
de the grid
left)
canais toaassign
to
para auma
hardwarebusoutput
or Matrix/PQ
(listed mixer
de bus across3 3InNa
C/Monothe Bus Assigns section,
(center/mono) switchpress the
so that L–R (left
L–Rand
it is lit. (leftright) or
output (listed
output on
(listedthe
on left) to aatribuir
the left) hardware
to
saída
output
a hardware (listed
output
ou mixer
across
(listed across
seção Bus Assigns, pressione
C/Mono o switch
(center/mono)
C/Mono switch
(center/mono)
and right)
so that
switch
ou
it is lit.
so that it is lit.
output
Matrix/PQ (listed on the left) to a hardware output (listed across
the top). (listadas à esquerda) a uma saída de hardware (listadas C/Mono (center/mono) switch so that it is lit.
C/Mono (center/mono) para que fique aceso.
the top).
the top).
the top).
ao alto).3 Click in the channel grid to assign a bus or Matrix/PQ mixer 3 In the Bus Assigns section, press the L–R (left and right) or
output (listed on the left) to a hardware output (listed across C/Mono
Left-
(center/mono) switch so that it is lit.
Center/Mono
Left- Center/Mono
Stage
the Racks
top). are used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage The be Center/Mono
Rightfollowing components mustCenter/Mono
Left- Left- purchased separately:
RightRight
audio I/O for VENUE Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks Right
recommended;
Left- 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
Center/Mono
Assigning an output in the Patchbay Outputs page DVIRight
supported.
Audio
Assigning I/O
an output
Assigning in theinPatchbay
an output Outputs
the Patchbay page page
Outputs Groups
Assigning an output in the Patchbay Outputs page Groups
Groups
Atribuindo uma saídaOutputs
The Patchbay na página page
Patchbay Outputs
shows the name micof the bus or and • USB
Groupskeyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
The The• 48Patchbay
Patchbay inputs with
Outputs remotely
Outputspagepageshows controllable
the name
shows the of the
name preamps
of bus
the or
bus or
The
mixer Patchbay
and its Outputs page
destination. The shows the name
destination is of the
also bus or be-
displayed
A mixer
página
mixerindividually
and its
Patchbay
and its selectable
destination.
Outputs
destination. The phantom
mostra destination
Theodestination
nome power.
is also
do bus displayed
ou mixer
is also ebe-
displayed seube- Digital Snake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
mixer
low the and
Assigning its
channel destination.
an output
nameininthe The
the destination
Patchbay
Outputs pageisand
Outputs also
page displayed
Patchbay be-
Out- Groups
destino.
low the• O
low
low the
destino
8channel
analog também
name
output in é apresentado
the Outputs
channels; abaixo
page
expandable and do
up nome
Patchbay
to 48 do
analogcanal
Out- or
channel name in the Outputs page and Patchbay Out-Out- • The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
the channel name in the Outputs page and Patchbay
puts page.
The Patchbay Outputs page shows the name of the bus or
nas páginas
putsputspage. Outputs e Patchbay
digital outputs per Stage Rack. Outputs.
puts page.page. a Digital Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
mixer and its destination. The destination is also displayed be- Stereo Pan
from Avid or assembled by yourStereo Pan Panvendor.
preferred
Stereo
low the channel
Synchronization and name in the
Control I/O Outputs page and Patchbay Out- Stereo Pan
puts page. Bus Assign switches
• Snake connectors to enable primary and redundant (if Bus Assign
Bus Assignswitches
switches
Switches
Bus Assign deswitches
atribuição de bus
applicable) connection to a VENUE FOH Rack. 4 Optional
Move the channel’s Components fader to set the Stereo GroupPan output level.
4 Move4 Movethe channel’s
the channel’s faderfaderto set totheset Group
the Groupoutput level.level.
output
Nome e destino
Output nameOutput na página Patchbay
and destination Outputs Outputs page
in the Patchbay 4 4Move
Mova the channel’s
o fader do fader
canal para are to set
ajustarthe Group
o nívelandoutput
de saída level.
do
Output name
Output and destination in the Patchbay Outputs page The following components optional, must be Group.
Output namename and destination
and destination in theinPatchbay
the Patchbay Outputs
Outputs page page Group BusRouting
Assign switches
Indication on Output Encoders
Group Routing
purchased
Group Indication
separately:
Routing Indication on Output
on do Encoders
Output Encoders
Group Routing
Indicação de Indication on Output Encoders
System Components Output4 Move
• encoder
USB the Endereçamento
flash channel’s
indicator
disk (or LEDs
other to setGroup
faderportable
indicate theMain
USB
nos output
Group Codificadores
bus assign-
storage devicelevel.
for
de
Endereçando
Routing Group Saídas
Outputs Group to the aos Busses Saída
Output encoder indicator LEDs indicate Main bus assign-
Routing
Output name
Routing
Routing Group
Group Outputs
and destination
Group Outputs
Outputs to
to the
in the Patchbay
toOutputs
the the page OutputOutput
ments as encoderencoder
follows:
transfer
indicator
ofindicator
Show data; LEDs LEDs
512
indicate Main
indicate
MB or Main largerbus
bus assign-
assign-
recommended)
Mains
Mains
Mains Busses
Busses
ments
ments
as follows:
Group
ments
as Routing
as follows:
follows: Indication on Output Encoders
Mains Mains
Included BussesBusses
Components Os LEDs indicadores
• Near-field
OffdoGroup routing
dos codificadores
monitor
toseMains
speakers for Output
is turned off.
indicammonitoring
mix position as atribuições
You can route Group outputs to the Main busses from the con- Off bus
Group
Output Main
Group como
routing
encoder to
routing segue:
Mains
indicator
to Mains is turned
LEDs off.
indicate
is turned Main bus assign-
Você
You Routing
pode
can endereçar
route GroupGroup saídas
outputs Outputs
Group
to the para to the
os busses Main pela
Off
• Headphones
Off Group routing towith
Mains 1/4-inch
is turned jackoff. off.
YouAllYou
canVENUEcan
route route
Profile
Group Group
systemsoutputs
outputs include
to thetoMain
the
the
Main
busses
Main fromfrom
busses
following:
busses from
the con-
the the
con- con- ments as follows:
sole or ou
console on-screen.
naon-screen.
tela. Yellow Group
•Endereçamento
Dynamic output is routed microphone
or condenser to the Mains and L–R XLRbus. mic cable
sole Mains Busses
sole sole
or on-screen.
or Yellow Group
OffYellow output
Group outputis routed
do Group to the
para
is routed Mains
Mains
to L–R
está
the Mains bus.
desligado.
L–R bus.
or on-screen.
• VENUE Profile console Yellow Group output is routed to the Mains L–R bus.
Off (for
Group Talkback)
routing to Mains is turned off.
To route acan
Group output tooutputs
the Main busses from the ACS: Green Group output is routed to the Mains C/M bus.
Para • Two
endereçar
You (2)umaIEC
route power
saída
Group cables
Group para toos busses
the Main Main pelo
busses ACS:the con- Green
from • Group output
AGroup
saída is
do (up routed
Group 2) to
está the
to Mains C/M bus.
To route a Group
To route
To route a
output
a Group
Group output
to the
output
to theto Main
the Main
Main
busses from
busses
busses from
the
from
the
ACS:
the ACS:
ACS:
Amarelo
Green Green
Footswitches
Group output output
is is routed
to
routed toendereçada
the the Mains
Mains paraC/M
C/M o bus
bus. Mains L–R.
bus.
sole
• or on-screen.
Monitor mount for VGA screen (screen
1 Press the Groups switch in the Output Fader assignment sec- not included) Yellow
Red Group Group
output output
is(for
routed is routed
to both the to the Mains
MainsMIDI L–R
L–R bus bus.
and the
• MIDI
Group cables
output is routedconnecting
toendereçada
both external
the Mains L–R devices)
bus and
Press
1 11Pressione theoGroups
1 Press switch
the switch
GroupsGroups in
nathe
switch inOutput
seção Fader
the Output
Output assignment
Fader
Fader para
assignmentsec- sec-
atribuir
sec- o Red
Red Red AGroup
saída output is está
routed to both the Mains L–R bus the
and the
Press
tion the Groups
•to Trackball
assign controlswitch
mount in the
of (trackball
Group Output
levels
not to Fader assignment
the faders.
included) Verde
Mains Group
C/M bus.do Group
output is routed to both the Mainspara o bus
L–R busMains
and C/M.
the
controle to dos
tion tion níveis
assign Group
control of aos
Groupfaders.levels to the faders. Mains • BNC
C/M
Green
Mains cables
bus.
Group (for
output connecting
is routed toWord
the clock
Mains between
C/M bus. the
tion To to to assign
assign
route a control
Group control
of oftoGroup
Group
output thelevels levels
Main to to faders.
the
busses the faders.
from the ACS: Mains C/MC/M bus. bus.
• VENUE Mouse Pad VermelhoVENUE A saídasystem and external
do Group digital devices)
está endereçada para ambos os busses
1• Press
VENUE the Profile
GroupsGuide switch in the Output Fader assignment sec- To route
Red
ToMains
route
•
aGroup
L–R
a
25-pin
Groupoutput
e
Group
outputistorouted
Mains
output
D-Sub C/M. to
cables
the Main
the to
Main
(for
busses
both
busses
connecting theon-screen:
Mains
on-screen:
to GPI L–R bus and the
devices)
To route
To route a Group a Group
output output
to the to Main
the Mainbussesbusses on-screen:
on-screen:
tion to assign control
• Two (2) console lights of Group levels to the faders. Mains C/M bus.
1 Go to the Outputs page and select the channel fader strip tor
1 Go1to Go thetoOutputs
the Outputs pagepage and select
and the channel
select the faderfader
channel stripstrip
tor tor
1 Para
theGoGroup
to endereçar
the Outputs
you wanta saída
page
to route de select
and umthe
to Group
the
Main para
channel
busses.os busses
fader strip Main
tor na
• Protective Dust Cover the Group you want to route to the Main busses.
the the
tela:
Group Group you you
want want
to to
route route
to to
the
To route a Group output to the Main busses on-screen: the
Main Main busses.
busses.
• Rack(s) (see next) 2 VENUE
Click the Bus Profile
Assign buttons Expansion on-screen toOptions toggle the bus as-
2 Click
2
1 Go the
Clickto Bus Assign
the Outputs
Bus Assign buttons
page buttons
andon-screen
on-screen
select tochannel
the toggle the
to toggle bus as-
thestrip
fader bustor
as-
2 1Click
Vá à página Outputs e selecione a régua toggle
signment the forBusthe Assign
selected buttons
Group. on-screen to de canal the dobus as-
Group que
Groups switch signment for the selected Group.
Groups switch
Groups switch Thesignment
the
signment
deseja Group
following
for the
endereçarfor
you the
selected
para selected
wantos
options to
can Group.
route
be added
Group.
busses to
Main.the Main busses.
to VENUE Profile systems.
Racks,
Groups Software
switch CDs, iLoks, and Cables
2 Click the Bus Assign buttons on-screen to toggle the bus as-
Each Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes: 2website os botões Bus Assign na tela para alterar a atribuição de
Clique (www.avid.com).
Groups switch signment for the selected Group.
Assigning
•
Assigning
Groups
System
Groups
to the Output
Restore
to the CD
Output
faders
faders
bus do Group selecionado.
Atribuindo Groups aos
Assigning faderstoOutput
Groups
Assigning Groups to the Output fadersthe Output faders
2 Select
• ECxeach Group that
Ethernet you Software
Control want to assign to CD
Installer the Main bus- Mix Rack Options
2 Select each Group that you want to assign to the Main bus-
2 Select each Group that you
Select
2Selecione
2 ses by each Group
cada Groupthatque
you wantwant
deseja to assign
toatribuir
assign to tobusses
the
aos the Main
Main bus-
Mainbus-
• pressing
ses by pressing
their
Standalone
their
Select
Software
Select
switches.
Installer
switches. CD
ses
pressionando
ses by by pressing
seus
pressing
Assigning their
Groups their
switches Select
toSelect switches.
Select.
switches.
the Output faders
2• Select each
Plug-in Groupdiscs
installer that(if
you want
any) to pre-authorized
with assign to the Main
iLokbus- AI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
ses by pressing their Select switches.
• One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console Assigning a Group output to the Main busses from the Output page
Assigning
AO16 a Group
Analog
Assigning output
Output
a Group toCard
the Main
output busses
thatMain from16
provides theanalog
Output pagelevel
line
Assigning a Group output to thetoMain
the busses
busses from from the Output
the Output page page
XO16 Analog
Assigning and Digital
a Group output toOutput Card
the Main thatfrom
busses provides 8 analog
the Output page
line level
Atribuindo outputs,
uma andpara
saída Output 8 AES digital
os busses outputs.
Mains na página Output

IOx Input and output expansion card that

Chapter 8: Outputs andprovides an addi-
Output Routing 81
Chapter
tional 8 channels of analog 8: and
I/O
ChapterOutputs
8: 8 and Output
channels
Outputs and of Routing
AES/EBU
Output 81 81
Routing
Chapter 8: Outputs and Output Routing 81
digital I/O.
Chapter
Chapter 8: Outputs and
1: Introduction Routing5 81
OutputProfile
to VENUE
Using
UsingInserts
Insertson onOutput
OutputBusses Busses •ofthe
of Click the Hardware
thePatchbay, and
Patchbay, Insertthe
andassign
assign button
the tofrom
insert
insert go
from tothe
the Inserts
thePatchbay.page
Patchbay.
Using Inserts on Output Busses of the Patchbay, and assign the insert from the Patchbay.
You
Youcan
canuse
usesoftware
softwareplug-in
plug-ininserts
insertsand
andgraphic
graphicEQ
EQon
onMains,
Mains, • Click the Hardware Insert button to go to the Inserts page
Using
You
Groups,can Inserts
use
Auxes, software
and on Output
plug-in
Matrixes.
Groups, Auxes, and Matrixes. inserts andBusses
graphic EQ on Mains, • Clique
of the botão Hardware
noPatchbay, Insert
and assign the para
insertir from
à página Inserts do
the Patchbay.
Utilizando Insertsand
Groups, Auxes, em Busses Output
Matrixes. Patchbay, e atribua o insert
Click
Clicktoto pelo Patchbay.
assign
Click
Clicktoto
You can use software plug-in inserts and graphic EQ on Mains, assign
Click to go
gototothe
theto
Click
assign Patchbay
Patchbay
go to the
Using
Você Plug-In
Groups,
Using Auxes,
Plug-In
pode utilizar Inserts
and
inserts de on
oneOutput
Matrixes.
Inserts
plug-ins gráficoBusses
Output
EQ Busses
em Mains, Groups,
Click to Patchbay
Click to
AuxesUsing Plug-In
e Matrixes. Inserts on Output Busses assign go to the
You
Youcan caninsert
insertplug-ins
plug-inson onOutput
Outputbussesbussesdirectly
directlyfromfromthethe Patchbay
Using
You
Outputs
Usando
Outputs can
page.
Inserts Plug-In
insert
page. Inserts
plug-ins on on
Output
de Plug-In em Busses Output Output
busses Busses
directly from the
Outputs page. Assigning
You can insert plug-ins on Output busses directly from the Assigningaahardware
hardwareinsert
insertininthe
theOutputs
Outputspage
page
Você
To pode ainserir
insert
ToOutputs
insert plug-inplug-ins
aplug-in ononan em busses
anoutput
output bus: Output diretamente pela
bus: Assigning a hardware insert in the Outputs page
page. The
páginaToOutputs.
insert a plug-in on an output bus: Thename
nameofofthethehardware
hardwareinsertinsertdestination
destinationappears
appearsininthe
the
11 GoGototothe theOutputs
Outputspage pageand andtarget
targetthethebus
buswhere
whereyou youwant
want Atribuindo
The
on-screen um
name
Assigning insert
a of
Hardware de hardware
the
hardware hardware
Insert na página
insert
button.
insert in the Outputs
destination
Outputs page appears in the
on-screen Hardware Insert button.
to 1
To Go
insert
toinseris
Para to
the
insert
insert um the Outputs
plug-in.
theaplug-in
plug-inem
plug-in. page
on um and
an output target
bus:
bus Output: the bus where you want on-screen Hardware Insert button.
to insert the plug-in. The name
O nome of thedo
do destino hardware
insert de insert destination
hardware appears
aparece no in the
botão Hardware
22In1 Go
Inthe to the Outputs
theInserts
Inserts section
sectionof pagetheand
ofthe targetpage,
Outputs
Outputs the bus
page, dodoonewhere you
oneofofthe want
thefol-
fol- Setting
Setting
Insert nathe
on-screen Hardware
theHardware
tela. Hardware Insert
Insert
Insert Location
button.Location
1 Vá toà página
2 In insert
Outputs
the plug-in.
the Inserts
e selecione o bus em que deseja inserir o
section of the Outputs page, do one of the fol- Setting the Hardware Insert Location
lowing:
lowing:
plug-in. You
You can
canchoose
choose the
thelocation
location ofofthe
the hardware
hardwareinsert
insertininthe
thesig-
sig-
•lowing:
2• Click
In theone
Click one ofofthe
Inserts the four
fourInserts
section Inserts
of pop-up
pop-upmenus
the Outputs menus
page, and
doand
onechoose
of theaafol-
choose Ajustando
Setting
You can
a the
localização
choose Hardware do Insert de Hardware
Insert Location
nal
nal path,
path, relative
relative tothe
to thelocation
the four
fourplug-in of the
plug-in hardware
inserts,
inserts, for insert
foreach
each in the sig-
channel.
channel.
•
2 Na lowing:
seção Click
plug-in Inserts
plug-in one of
directly the
from
da página
directly fouroneInserts
fromOutputs: of the pop-up
Plug-In menus
Rack
one of the Plug-In Rack submenus. and choose a
submenus.
AA nal path,insert
hardware
hardware relative
insertdoes to not
does the four
notneed need plug-in
to be inserts, for
currently each channel.
assigned totodo
• –Clique plug-in
em um directly
dos frommenus
quatro one ofpop-up
the Plug-In
Inserts Rack
e submenus.
escolha um Você
Youpode escolher
can choose thea localização
location oftodobeinsert
the currently
hardware assigned
de hardware
insert inna thedo
cadeia
sig-
–or• ––Click one of the four Inserts pop-up menus and choose a
or A
this.
denal
this. hardware
sinal, em insert
relação does
aos not
quarto need to
plug-ins bedecurrently
inserts, assigned
para cada tocanal.
do
plug-in diretamente de um dos submenus Plug-In Rack. path, relative to the four plug-in inserts, for each channel.
– or –one of
plug-in this.
– ou•–• Click
Click one directly
ofthe
thefour from
four onebuttons
Inserts
Inserts of the Plug-In
buttons totogo Rack
gototo thesubmenus.
the Plug-In
Plug-In Um A insert
hardware de hardware
insert does não notprecisa
need to estar atribuído para
be currently isso.to do
assigned
• Clique •–Rack,
Rack, Click
em
or – and one
um
and of
route
dos
route the
the
quatro
thefour Inserts
signal
botões
signal to
to thebuttons
plug-in
Inserts
the para
plug-in to go
using
ir ao
usingto the
Plug-In
Plug-In Plug-In
Rack,
Plug-In To
Tosetset
this.
the
the hardware
hardware insert
insert location:
location:
Rack
e endereceRack, and
controls.
o route
sinal the osignal
para plug-into utilizando
the plug-inosusing Plug-In
controles do Para
To ajustar
set theahardware
localização do insert
insert de hardware:
location:
Rack controls.
• Click one of the four Inserts buttons to go to the Plug-In 11 GoGototothetheOutputs
Outputspage pageand andselect
selectthethechannel
channelwhere
whereyou you
Plug-In Rack
Rack.controls. 1 Go to the Outputs page and select the channel where you
Rack, and route the signal to the plug-in using Plug-In wantTo
want to
set
toset
the
set the hardware
hardware
hardware insertinsert location.
location:
insert location.
1 Vá à página Outputs e selecione o canal em que deseja ajustar a
Rack controls. want to set
localização dothe hardware
insert de page insert location.
hardware.
22 Go
1Inthe
In toInserts
the
theInserts Outputs
section
sectionof ofthe theand selectpage,
Outputs
Outputs the
page,channel
click
clickthe where
the hard-
hard- you
Click
Clicktoto Click
Clicktoto
assign go
gototothe warewant
2
ware In to
the
insert set the
Inserts
indicator
insert Inserts
indicator hardware
section
so that ofinsert
itthe
lights location.
Outputs
red. page, click the hard-
da so that Outputs,
it lights red.
assign
Click to theto
Click
Plug-In
Plug-In 2 Na seção página clique no indicador de insert
assign go to the ware insert indicator so that it lights red.
Click to
Rack
Rack
Plug-Into
Click
de2hardware
In the Inserts section of thevermelho.
que se acende em Outputs page, click the hard-
Assigning
Assigning
Atribuindo
aaPlug-In
Plug-In
um Insert
Insert
Insert
de plug-in
inpágina
na in
the
theOutputs
assign Outputspage
Outputs page Rack
go to the ware insert indicator so that it lights red.
Assigning a Plug-In Insert in the Outputs page Plug-In
The
Thename
nameofofthetheplug-in
plug-ininsert
insertappears
appearsininthe
theon-screen
on-screenRack
O Plug-In
nome
Thedo plug-in
name
Insert
Assigning
Plug-In of inserido aparece
the Insert
button.
a Plug-In
Insert plug-in
button. insert
in the Outputs pagePlug-In
noappears
botão in the Insert na tela.
on-screen
Plug-In Insert button.
The name
Para
For of the plug-in
instruções insert
completas appears
sobre in theveja
plug-ins, on-screen
o Capítulo
Forcomplete
completeinstructions
instructionson
onplug-ins,
plug-ins,see
seeChapter
Chapter18,
18,
18,For
Plug-In“Plug-Ins.”
Insert button.
complete instructions on plug-ins, see Chapter 18,
“Plug-Ins.”
“Plug-Ins.” Click
Clicktotoset
set
“Plug-Ins.” HW Insert
HWClick
Insert
Usando Inserts de Hardware
For complete em Busses
instructions Output see Chapter 18,
on plug-ins, location
to set
Using Hardware location
HardwareInserts
Using“Plug-Ins.” Insertson onOutput
OutputBusses
Busses HW Insert
location
Click to set
Você Using Hardware
pode inserir Inserts
processadores externosonnaOutput
cadeia de Busses
sinal dos HW Insert
You
Youcan insert
busses can
Output. Osexternal
insert external processors
processors
sinais dessas ininthe
fontes thesignal
são signalchain
roteados de eofof
chain Out-
Out-
para os location
putUsing
You can
busses.
put busses.
conectores
Hardware
insert
Signals
de Signalsexternal
from
entradasfrom
Inserts
processors
these sources on
in
theseanalógicas
e saídas areOutput
the signal
routed
sources areerouted to Busses
chain
and
digitaistodoand ofRack
from
Mixfrom Out-
(FOH put
I/O)busses.
analog
analog or
ou do Signals
ordigital
FOH
digitalI/O
Rack.
I/O from theseon
connectors
connectors sources
onthe
the MixareRack
routed
(FOH to I/O)
and from
or
You can insert external processors inMix
the Rack
signal(FOH
chain I/O) or
of Out- Setting
Settingaahardware
hardwareinsert
insertlocation
locationininthe
theInputs
Inputspage
page
the
the analog
FOH
FOH or digital I/O connectors on the Mix Rack (FOH I/O) or
Rack.
Rack. Setting a hardware insert location in the Inputs page
put busses. Signals from these sources are routed to and from Ajustando a localização de um insert de hardware na página Inputs
Atribuindo Inserts
the FOH Rack.de Hardware às Outputs Activating and Bypassing Inserts
analog or digital I/O connectors on the Mix Rack (FOH I/O) or Activating
Setting a hardware andinsertBypassing
location in the Inserts
Inputs page
Assigning
Assigning
the FOH Hardware
Hardware
Rack. Inserts
Inserts toto Outputs
Outputs Activating
Ativação e Bypass and
de Bypassing
Inserts Inserts
Você Assigning
pode atribuir inserts deInserts
Hardware hardwaretopara os busses Output After
Outputs Afterplug-in
plug-ininserts
insertsare areassigned
assignedtotoan anOutput
Outputbus, bus,they
theycan canbebe
diretamente
You
Youcan canassignpelashardware
assign páginas
hardware Outputs
insertsou
inserts Patchbay.
totoOutput
Outputbusses
bussesdirectly
directly Activating
After plug-in
activated
activated and andare
inserts
andbypassed
bypassed Bypassing
fromassigned
from the to an
theconsole
console Inserts
Output
or bus, they
oron-screen
on-screen usingcan be
using
Assigning Hardware Inserts to Outputs Após atribuirand
activated
inserts de plug-ins
bypassed from
a um
the
bus Output,eles podem ser
console or on-screen using
from
fromYou the can
the assign
Outputs
Outputs hardware
page
pageor orfrominserts
from the to Output
thePatchbay.
Patchbay. busses directly the
the corresponding
corresponding Output
Output page
pagecontrols.
controls.
Para atribuir umOutputs
insert depage
hardware para um bus: ativados
After ou colocados
plug-in inserts em
are bypass
assigned pela
to console
an Output oubus,
na tela
they usando
can beos
from the or from the Patchbay. the corresponding Output page controls.
You can assign hardware inserts to Output busses directly controles
activatedcorrespondentes
and bypassed from na página Output.or on-screen using
the console
ToToassign
assign aahardware
hardware insert
insert to aabus: To
Toactivate
activate ororbypass
bypassan anOutput
Output bus insert:
buscontrols.
insert:
1 Vá àfrom
página the Outputs
Outputs epage ortofrom
selecione obus:
bustheem Patchbay.
que deseja atribuir um the corresponding Output page
To assign a hardware insert to a bus: To ativar
Para activateou or bypass
colocar em an Outputum
bypasse businsert
insert:do bus Output:
insert
11 Go Godetoto
hardware.
the
theOutputs
Outputspage
pageand andtarget
targetthe thebus
buswhere
whereyou
youwant
want 11 Target
Targetthe
thebus busby bypressing
pressingits itsSelect
Selectswitch.
switch.
Go
1assign
totoassign
To to
assignthethe
the Outputsinsert.
ahardware
hardware
hardware page
insert
insert. and
to atarget
bus: the bus where you want To Target
1 activate theorbus by pressing
bypass an Output its bus
Select switch.
insert:
2 Na to seção Inserts da página insert.
Outputs page: 22 Selecione
1Press
Pressany
anyof oofbus
the pressionando
thePlug-In
Plug-Inswitches, seu or
switches, switch
orclick Select.
click the
theHW HWIn/Out
In/Out
assign the hardware
• 2 Clique
2 In 1 Go
the
In the no to the
Inserts Outputs
menu
Inserts section page
of the and
pop-upofHardware
section target
Outputs
the Outputs the
page,
Insert bus
do where
one
e escolha
page, of
do oneum you
the want
fol-
destino
of the fol- 2
1
button Press
Target any
the
on-screen. of
bustheby
The Plug-In
pressing
switch switches,
its
lights Select
button on-screen. The switch lights when the Insert when orswitch.
click
the the
InsertHW In/Out
isisacti-
acti-
to
2
lowing: assign
In the the
Inserts
diretamente do menu. hardware
section insert.
of the Outputs page, do one of the fol- 2 Pressione
button
vated.
vated. (Hardware qualquer
on-screen.
(Hardware insets
insetsum
The dos
switch
cannot
cannot switches
belights
be bypassed Plug-In,
when
bypassed the
from
fromou clique
Insert
the
the isno
Profile
Profilebotão
acti-
lowing: Press any of the Plug-In
lowing: HW 2 In/Out
vated.
console; na
(Hardware
use the tela. Oinsets
switch
on-screen seswitches,
acende
cannot
control be
or clickothe
quando
bypassed
instead.) from
HW
insert the
In/Out
está ativado.
Profile
•2• Click
In thethe
Click the Hardware
Hardware
Inserts section Insert
Insert
of thepop-up
pop-up
Outputs menu
menu and
page, dochoose
and choose
one anan fol- console;
of the buttonde
(Inserts
use the on-screen
on-screen.
hardware The control
nãoswitch
podem
instead.)
lights when
serinstead.)
colocadosthe Insert
em bypassis acti-pela
– ou – insert
• Click the Hardware
destination Insert
directly from pop-up
the menu
menu. and choose an console; use the on-screen control
insert
lowing: destination directly from the menu. vated.Profile;
console (Hardware Em vezinsets cannot
disso, use obe bypassed
controle from the Profile
na tela.)
insert destination directly from the menu. console; use the on-screen control instead.)
––or • ––Click the Hardware Insert pop-up menu and choose an
or
– or –
insert destination directly from the menu.
82 – or –
82 VENUE
VENUEProfile
ProfileGuide
Guide

Inserting the Built-In Graphic EQs on Output
Busses
Inserting
Inserindo the Built-In
um EQ Gráfico Graphic
Embutido nos EQs on
Busses Output Output
Inserting the Built-In Graphic EQs on Output
Busses
Um Busses
A built-in 31-band Graphic EQ can be inserted on any of the
equalizador gráfico de 31 bandas pode ser inserido em qualquer Output
Stage AdditionalFaderRequired Components
Output
dos tipos deRack
bus
A built-in types.
bus Features
31-bandA maximum
Output. Graphic
Um máximo of 24
EQ deGraphic
can EQs on
be inserted
24 areany
equalizadores avail-
of the
gráficos Output
able, Adepending
built-in 31-band
on the Graphic
how detheyEQ can be inserted
are Foron of the assignment
any in- Output
Fader
está Output bus types.
disponível, A maximum
dependendo of configured.
como 24 Graphic
estão EQs more
are avail-
configurados. Para switches
Stage Racks
Output aretypes.
bus used A
with an FOHof
maximum Rack, and provide
24 Graphic all stage
EQs are avail- Fader
assignment
formation
mais able, on
informações configuring
depending sobre and
howusing
a configuração
on the Graphic
they are o usoEQs,
dos see
e configured. Graphic
For moreEQs,
in- assignment
switches
vejaaudio
able,I/O
“Graphic for
EQ VENUE
depending
para on Profile
the
Outputs”how
nasystems.
they
página Up
are to two Stage
configured.
146. ForRacks
more inswitches
“Graphic EQ for Outputs” on page 146.
formation on configuring and using Graphic EQs, see • Video Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display
can be used simultaneously,
formation supporting
on configuring and up to 96EQs,
using Graphic totalsee
inputs.
“Graphic EQ for Outputs” on page 146. recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
Para “Graphic
inseriraum EQ for
Graphic Outputs” on page 146.
To insert Graphic EQEQ
onem
an um bus bus:
Output Output: DVI supported.
Audio I/O
To insert
Target theabus
Graphic EQ on an
by pressing Output bus: Output
• USBFader controls and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
keyboard
1 1Selecione
To o bus
insert
• 48 a Graphic
inputs EQ onits
pressionando seu
an
with remotely
Select
Outputswitch.
botão Select.
bus:
controllable mic preamps and
1 Target the bus by pressing its Select switch. Output Fader controls
2 In theindividually selectable
Outputs page, phantom
click the 31-Band power.
Graphic Equalizer tab. 2 Move a fader
Output Fader to change the level of its assigned output.
controls
1 Target
2 Na página the bus
Outputs, by pressing
clique its SelectGraphic
na aba 31-Band switch. Equalizer. Digital Output
Controles SnakeFader
Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
2 •In8the Outputs
analog page,
output click the
channels; 31-Band Graphic
expandable analogtab.
Equalizer
up to 48 or 2 Move a fader to change the level of its assigned output.
3 Click
2 InthetheGraphic
OutputsEQ pop-up
page, clickmenu and choose
the 31-Band an available 2 Move
Equalizer tab. To•create
The a fader to changeFOH
connection the level
Rack of itsStage
assigned
Rackoutput.
Graphic a level offsetbetween
between linked and requires
Clique
3 mono digital
ornostereo
outputs
menu perGraphic
pop-up
Graphic
Stage Rack.
EQ. EQ e Graphic
The entire escolha um equalizador
EQ is 2 Movimente um fader para alterar oAux nívelbus
daor Variable
saída. Group
3 Click the Graphic EQ pop-up menu and choose andis-
available busTo a create
Digital
output Snake
faders:
a level cable.
offset This
between cable can
linked be
Aux purchased
bus or directly
Variable Group
gráfico3 mono
played Click ou Graphic
the
on-screen.
estéreo. EQ
O Graphic
pop-up EQ
menuinteiro
and échoose
apresentado na
an available To create afaders:
level offset between linked Aux bus or Variable Group
mono or stereo Graphic EQ. The entire Graphic EQ is dis- from
bus Avid
output or assembled by your preferred vendor.
tela.Synchronization and Control I/O Para
1 Press criar uma diferença de nível entre os faders do bus associado
mono or stereo Graphic EQ. The entire Graphic EQ is dis-
played on-screen. bus one
outputof the following switches in the Output Fader as-
faders:
played on-screen. Aux
signmente dosection:
1 Press bus
oneVariable Group: switches in the Output Fader as-
of the following
• Snake connectors to enable primary and redundant
GEQ (if
1 Press one of the following switches in the Output Fader as-
applicable) connection to a VENUE FOH Rack. pop-up
GEQ Optional
•signment
Aux 1–8section:Components
GEQ 1 Pressione um dos seguintes switches na seção de atribuição
signment section:
pop-up • Aux• Aux
9–161–8
pop-up Output
The • Fader:
following
Aux 1–8components are optional, and must be
• purchased
•Aux
• Groups Aux1–89–16
(when in Variable Groups mode)
separately:
Graphic • • Aux
Aux 9–16 9–16
System Components EQ
Graphic 2 •
•
Do• one
Groups
USBofflash
Groups
• Groupsthe
(when
disk (orin other
following:
(quando
(when
Variable
noinmodo
Groups
portable
Variable
Variable
mode)
USB storage device for
Groups)
Groups mode)
Faders
EQGraphic transfer
Do oneone of
of the Show data;
following: 512 MB or larger recommended)
EQ
Faders
•2 Touch linked bus output fader while moving the
2• Do one of the following:
Included Components Faders 2 Siga um dosone
Near-field
other.
• Touch seguintes
linked procedimentos:
monitor speakers for mix position
bus output fader while moving monitoring
the
• • •Hold
•Headphones
ToqueTouch
other.em one
um linked
fader
with bus
associado
1/4-inch outputao
jack fader
bus de
the Start (Win) key on the keyboard and move one
while
saída moving
enquantothemove
All VENUE Profile systems include the following: outro.
other.
• VENUE Profile console • •linked
Dynamic
•Segure
Hold
•(for
Aux
Hold athe
or
bus
tecla
the
condenser
fader
Start (Win)
Start
Start (Win)
(Win)
microphone
on-screen.
key
noon
key teclado
and XLR
the keyboard
on theekeyboard
mova um and mic
and
move
fader
cable
one
associado
move one
aolinkedTalkback)
bus Aux Aux nabus
tela.fader on-screen.
• Two (2) IEC power cables The offsetlinkedbetween Auxthe busfaders
fader ison-screen.
maintained until the offset
causes aoffset
faderbetween
to reach the its maximum or minimum value.
• Monitor mount for VGA screen (screen not included) A The
diferença
• MIDI
The offsetentre
cables os
between faders
(for
faders
connecting
the faders
is maintained
é mantida até que
isexternal
maintained
until
um
MIDI dosthe
devices)
until the
offset
faders atinja
offset
Output bus selected (Group 1) seucauses
valor amáximo
fader toou reach its maximum or minimum value.
mínimo.
• Trackball mount (trackball not included) causes
Graphic EQ EQ
apresentado • BNCa cables
fader to reach
(for its maximum
connecting or minimum
Word clock betweenvalue.
the
Graphic displayednainpágina Outputs
Output Polarity (Phase) Invert
Mousethe Outputs
Output buspage
selected (Group 1)
• VENUE Pad Output bus selected (Group 1) VENUE system and external digital devices)
Inversão de Polaridade de Saída (Phase)
Graphic EQ displayed in the Outputs page
• VENUE Profile Guide Output Polarity (Phase) Invert
Graphic EQ displayed in the Outputs page The polarity Output Polarity (Phase) Invert
• 25-pinofD-Sub cables bus
any output (for signal
connecting
can betoinverted.
GPI devices)
With
Ajustando Controles
• Two (2)
Adjusting OutputOutput
console lights
Controls A The
polaridade
stereo outputs doof sinal
polarity(stereo de qualquer
anyGroup
output busses)
bus signalbus
onlyOutput
canthebe pode
left ser invertida.
channel
inverted. is
With
Em The
saídas
inverted. polarity
estéreo of any output
(busses Groupbus signal
stereo) can
apenas be inverted.
o canal With
esquerdo
Adjusting
• Protective Output
Dust Cover Controls stereo outputs (stereo Group busses) only the left channel is
Adjusting
Outputs
As saídas are controlled
são controladasOutput
from the Controls
Output faders, encoders
(see next) pelos faders, codificadores e switches
and é invertido.
stereo outputs (stereo Group busses) only the left channel is
inverted.
VENUE
inverted. Profile Expansion Options
• Rack(s)
switches.
Outputs are controlled from the Output faders, encoders and To invert
Output. the polarity of an output bus:
Outputs are controlled from the Output faders, encoders and Para inverter a polaridade de um bus Output:
switches. The
To following
invert optionsofcan anbe added to VENUE Profile systems.
Racks,
switches.Software CDs, iLoks, and Cables 1 Target thethe
Todetails
invert bus polarity
theallby pressing
polarity of an
output
its Select
output
bus:switch.
bus:
Output Levels For on VENUE systems and options,
Output Levels 1 Selecione o bus pressionando seu
1 Target the bus by pressing its Select switch. switch Select.visit the Avid
Each Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes: 2 Press
website the(www.avid.com).
1 Target polarity
the businversion
by pressing(Ø) itsswitch
Select inswitch.
the ACS Input sec-
Para Output
controlar osLevels
níveis de saída pelos faders Output:
Output
• System
To control Levels
Restore
output levelsCDfrom the Output faders: tion. The switch
Press
2 2Pressione lightspolarity
theopolarity
switch when the
inversion polarity
(Ø)
inversion (Ø) isnain
switch inverted.
the ACS
seção InputInput sec- O
do ACS.
2 Press the polarity inversion (Ø) switch in the ACS Input sec-
switch
tion. se
The acende
switch quando
lights a polaridade
when the é
polarity invertida.
is inverted.
To• control
1 1Pressione
Press ECx
oneum
To control
Ethernet
ofoutput
the
output
Control
levels
dosfollowing from
seguintes Software
switches
switches
levels from
Installer
the Output
in na
the Outputthe CDdeFader
faders:
seção
Output
faders:
atribuição
as- Mixtion.Rack
The switchOptions lights when the polarity is inverted.
Output •
signmentFader:
Standalone
Presssection: Software Installer CD
one of the following switches in the Output Fader as- Output
Output Solo Solo
• 1Aux •Aux
1–8 one of the following switches in the Output Fader as- I/O
1 Press
iLok USB Smart Key (for storing plug-in authorizations) OutputOptions Solo
signment section:
• Aux
• 1–8
9–16 section:
signment ToParaOutput
control Solo
the solo
controlar status
o status deofSolo
an output
de um bus bus:Output:
• •Personal
•Aux
• Plug-in
Aux 1–8
Qs
9–16
• Aux 1–8
installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok AI16
To Analog
control theMic/Line
solo Input
status of Card
an that bus:
output provides 16 analog
• •Matrixes
•Personal
• Two
Aux(2)9–16
QsIEC power cables 1 Press one of the
To control
mic/line level
the solo
switches
inputs status inofthe
1 Pressione um dos switches da seção Output. anOutput
output bus: section.
• •Groups • Aux 9–16
•Matrixes
• One FOH Qs Link cable for connection to a VENUE console 2 In 1the 1 Press one of the switches in the Output section.
Output
• VCA Personal Press one section, press anin
of the switches AFLtheswitch
Output to section.
toggle the solo
• Personal Qs AO16 Analog Output Card that provides 16 analog line status
level de
• Matrixes
• Groups 2 Na
status seção
of the Output, pressione
corresponding o
outputswitch
2 In the Output section, press an AFL switch to bus. AFL para alternar
toggle othe solo
Each Stage Rack
• Matrixes includes: outputs
Solo2 In the
do of Output
bustheOutput section, press
correspondente. an AFL switch to toggle the solo
•
• •VCA Groups status corresponding output bus.
•Two (2) IEC power cables
Groups status of the corresponding output bus.
You can set Output banking to follow AFL selection, and
• VCA XO16 Analog and Digital Output Card that provides 8 analog
Você
viceYou
versa.
canpode
For ajustar
setmore
Output o agrupamento
information
banking Solo em
onfollow
to bus
AFL bancos
operation,
selection,Output
and para
see
• VCA line level Yououtputs,
can set and
Output8AFL
AES digital
banking to outputs.
follow AFL selection, and
seguir
Chapter a seleção
14, “Solo
vice versa. and Monitor
For more e vice-versa.
information Busses.” Para mais
on Solo bus operation, see informações
sobre a operação
vice versa. For more Solo do bus, veja
information on Soloo Capítulo 14, “Busses
bus operation, see
Chapter
AT16 A-Net 14, “Solo
Output Card and
thatMonitor
provides Busses.”
16 channels of A-Net
Solo e Monitor.”
Chapter 14, “Solo and Monitor Busses.”
IOx Input and output expansion card that

Chapter 8: Outputs andprovides an addi-
Output Routing 83
digital I/O. Chapter 8: Outputs and Output Routing 83
Output
OutputMute
Mute TheTheLeft,
Left,Right,
Right,and
and Center/Mono
Center/Mono busses
busses can
canbebe
controlled
controlled in-
in-
Output Mute dependently
dependently ororin in
tandem.
tandem. YouYoucan cancreate
create
Os busses Left, Right e Center/Mono podem ser controlados ananoffset
offsetbetween
between
ToTocontrol
controlthe
themute
mutestatus
statusofofananoutput
outputbus:
bus: anyanyofofthe
theMain
Mainbus bus levels,
levels,
and
andit itwill
willbebepreserved
preservedwhen
whencon-
con-
independentemente ou em cooperação.
Para
11controlar
Bank
Bankthe oOutput
thestatus
OutputMute deto
faders
fadersum bus
tothe
the Output:
desired
desired
type
typeofofoutput:
output: trolling
trollingany
anycombination
combination ofofthe
the
MainMain busses.
busses.The
The
Você pode criar diferenças entre os níveis de qualquer bus Main, e offset
offset
be-
be-
isso
tween será
tween the preservado
thebusses
busses quando
is ismaintainedcontrolando
maintained until
until qualquer
atatleast
least
one combinação
oneofof
the
the
busses
bussesdos
2 2InIn
1 Escolhathe
the
Output
Output
o banco desection,
section,
faders press
pressapara
Output aMute
Mute
o switch
switch
tipo tototoggle
desejadotoggle
de the
the
saída: busses
is Main. Aordiferença
isminimized
minimized ormaximized. entre os busses é mantida até que um dos
maximized.
mute
mutestatus
statusofofthe
thecorresponding
correspondingoutput
outputbus.
bus. busses atinja seu máximo ou mínimo.
2 Na seção Output, pressione um switch Mute para alternar o status
Linking
LinkingMains
Mains
de For
Formore
Mute moreinformation
do businformation ononMute
Muteoperation,
operation,see
Output correspondente. seeChapter
Chapter15,
15, Associando Mains
“Muting
“Mutingand
andMute
MuteGroups.”
Groups.”
You
You can
can
link
link
any
any
ofof
the
the
three
three
Mains
Mains
faders
faders
for
for
grouped-control
grouped-control
Para mais informações sobre operações de Mute, veja o capítulo Você
of pode
oflevel
level
andassociar
and mute.qualquer um dos três faders Mains para controle
mute.
15, “Muting e Mute Groups.” em grupo de nível e Mute.
Output
OutputDelay
Delay
Output Delay delay To
Tolink
Para link
control
control
associar o ofofthe
theMains
controle Mainsbus
busoutput
dos níveis output
de levels:
saídalevels:
do bus Mains:
AAvariable
variable delaycan
can
bebe
applied
applied
toto
any
any
ofof
the
the
Main
Main
busses
busses
(L,(L,
RR
and
andC/M),
C/M),Aux
Auxbus
busoutputs,
outputs,and
andMatrix
Matrixmixer
mixeroutputs.
outputs.(Vari-
(Vari- 1 1InIn
the
theOutputs
Outputspage,
page,click
clickthe
theon-screen
on-screenchannel
channelLink
Linkbut-
but-
Um delay variável pode ser aplicado a qualquer bus Main (L, R e Na for
1 tons
tons página
forany
anyOutputs, cliqueof
combination
combination nos botões
ofLeft,
Left, Link
Right,
Right, dos
oror canais na tela
Center/Mono
Center/Mono out-para
out-
able
ableGroup
Groupoutputs
outputsdodonot
nothave
havethis
thisvariable
variabledelay
delayfeature.)
feature.)
C/M), saídas Aux e saídas de mixer Matrix. (Saídas Variable Group qualquer
put
putstrips
combinação
stripstotoassign
de
assigncontrol
réguas
controlofofthe
de saída Left,
thecorresponding
Right
correspondingbusses
ou Center/
bussestotothe
the
não possuem esse recurso de delay variável.) Mono para atribuir o controle dos busses correspondentes ao fader
ToToapply
applydelay
delaytotoananAux
Auxbus:
bus: Mains
MainsFader.
Fader.
Mains.
Par1aplicar
1Target
delay
Target
the a Aux
umbus
theAux bus Aux:
busby
bypressing
pressingitsitsSelect
Selectswitch.
switch.
1 Selecione
2 2Press othe
Pressthebus
ACSAux
ACS pressionando
Delay
Delayrotary seu switch
rotaryencoder
encoder Select.
totoengage
engagethethedelay.
delay.
3 3Adjust
Adjust
2 Pressione othe
thedelay
delayvalue
value
codificador bybyturning
rotativo turning
the
theDelay
ACS Delay Delay
para rotary
rotaryencoder.
habilitar oencoder.
delay. Link
Link
The
The amount
amount ofof
delay
delay
available
available
depends
depends
ononthe
the
type
type
ofof
output,
output,
3 Ajuste o valor do delay girando o codificador rotativo Delay.
asasfollows:
follows:
A quantidade
• •Up de
Uptoto delay
500
500msmsdisponível
for
forMains depende
Mainsand do mixers
andMatrix
Matrixtipo de saída:
mixers
• • •Até
Up 500 ms
Uptoto250 para
250ms Mains
msfor
forAux e mixers
AuxSends
Sends Matrix
• Até 250 ms para Aux Sends
Mains
Mains fader
Seletores faderLink
link doLinkselectors
faderselectors
Mains nainpágina
in
the
theOutputs
Outputspage
Outputs page
Adjusting
AdjustingMain
MainBus
BusControls
Controls 2 2Move
Movethe
theMains
Mainsfader
fadertotochange
changethe
thelevel
levelofofthe
theassigned
assigned
2 Movimente o fader Mains para alterar o nível dos busses
Ajustando Controles do Bus Main busses.
busses.
associados.
Mains
MainsBus BusOutput
OutputLevels
Níveis de Saída do Bus Mains
Levels
Mute
Mainsdo Bus
Mains Bus Mains
Bus Mute
Mute
The
TheMains
Mainsbus
busoutput
outputlevels
levelsare
arecontrolled
controlledfrom
fromthethesingle
single
Os Mains
níveis
Mains de saída
Fader
Fader do bustoMains
located
located tothe são
theright controlados
rightofofthe por faders.
theOutput
Output um único fader
faders. OThe
Thestatus
mute de
mute Muteofdos
status
status ofthe busses
theMain Main
Mainbusses éiscontrolado
busses iscontrolled pelo
controlledfrom switch
from the Mute
the
Mains localizado à direita dos faders Output.
localizado
Mute
Mute switchacima
switch do above
located
located fader
aboveMains.
the
the Quando
Mains
Mains Fader.um
Fader. dos at
When
When busses
at
least
leastMain
one é
one
colocado
ofofthe embusses
theMain
Main Mute enquanto
bussesis ismuted outros
mutedwhile (não (unlinked)
whileothers
others associados)
(unlinked)arenão são, o
arenot,
not,
Select
Select
switch
the Mutemute
theMains
Mains pisca.
mute switch
switchflashes.
flashes.
Mute
Mute
Para
To controlar
Tocontrol
control
the omute
the status Muteofde
mutestatus
status busses
ofthe
theMainMain:
Mainbusses:
busses:
1 InInthe
1 1Na theOutputs
página Outputs page,
Outputs, page, click
cliqueclick
the
nos theon-screen
on-screen
botões channel
Link doschannel
canaisLink
Linkbut-
but-
na tela para
qualquer
tons
tonsfor combinação
forany
anycombination de réguas
combination ofofLeft,de
Left, saída
Right,
Right, Left,
oror Right ou out-
Center/Mono
Center/Mono Center/
out-
Mono
put paratoatribuir
putstrips
strips toassign ocontrol
assign controle
controlofofdos
the busses
the correspondentes
corresponding
corresponding busses ao
bussestoto
thefader
the
Mains.
Mains
MainsFader.
Fader.
2 2Press
2 Pressthe
PressionetheMute
Muteswitch
switch
o switch tototoggle
Mute toggle
parathe
themute
mute
alterar ostatus
statusofofthe
status theas-
dos as-
busses
Fader
Fader selecionados.
signed
signedbusses.
busses.
Mains
Fader MainsFader
Fader
e controles and
and
Mainscontrols
controls
na seção in in
the
the
Output Output
Output
section
section
8484 VENUE
VENUEProfile
ProfileGuide
Guide

Delay do Bus Mains
Mains Bus Delay
Mains Bus Delay Direct
Direct Outputs
Outputs
Um delay variável (de 0 a 500 ms) pode ser aplicado a qualquer
A variable delay (from 0 to 500 ms) can be applied to any of Direct
Additional
Outputs
Required Components
busStage
Mains.
A
the
Rack Features
variable
Mains delay
busses.(from 0 to 500 ms) can be applied to any of All input
Todos channels
os canais and output
de entrada buses
e busses feature
de saída Direct Outputs.
apresentam o recurso
the Racks
Mainsare busses. All input
Direct channels and output buses feature Direct Outputs.
Outputs.
Stage used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage The following components must be purchased separately:
Para aplicar delay a um bus Main: Available destinations for Direct Outputs include:
audio I/O for VENUE
To apply delay to a Main Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks
bus: Available destinations for Direct Outputs include:
• Video Display
• Stage
Destinos (15-inch
audio
disponíveisoutputsor greater
para Direct flat-panel
Outputs incluem:VGA display
Tobe
can apply delay
used to a Main bus:
simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total oinputs.
1 Selecione
1 Targeto thebusMain
Mainbusem que you
vocêwant
deseja aplicar
delay delay recommended;
• audio1024x768
outputs minimum resolution). VGA and
where to apply by re- • Stage
FOH audio outputs
pressionando
1 Target repetidamente
the Main bus o switch
where youSelect
want na
to seção
apply
peatedly pressing the Select switch in the Mains section, Mains,
delay ou
byorre-
by • DVI
Saídas de áudiooutputs
supported. Stage
•
• FOH audio
Pro Tools recording inputs
Audio I/O pressing
selecionando-o na tela. the Select switch in the Mains section, or by
peatedly
selecting it on-screen. • • USB
Saídas de áudio FOH
• keyboard
Pro and trackball/mouse
Tools recording inputs (Windows compatible)
selecting it on-screen.
• 48 inputs with remotely controllable mic preamps and • Entradas
• Plug-ins
de gravação do Pro Tools
2 Ajuste o valorthe
2 Adjust doDelay
Delayvalue
girando turning
o codificador rotativo Delay
Delay na • Plug-ins
• Plug-ins
individually selectable by the on-screen
phantom power. ro-
tela. 2tary
Adjust the Delay value by turning the on-screen Delay ro-
encoder. Digital Snake Cable
Each output (VENUE
destination Profile
may be fedSystems Only)
by only one Direct Output
• 8 encoder.
analog output channels; expandable up to 48 analog or Each output destination may besignals
fed by only onebeDirect Output
tary • signal
Cada (multiple
Thedestino
connection Direct
de saída
betweenOutput
pode
FOHserRack cannot
alimentado
and routed
apenas
Stage Rack to aum
por
requires
digitalDivergence
Opções Center outputs per Stage
para Rack. Mains
os Busses signal
single (multiple
output). Direct Output signals cannot be routed to aser
sinal Direct
a Digital Outputcable.
Snake (vários
Thissinais
cableDirect
can beOutput não directly
purchased podem
Main Bus Center Divergence Options single output).
endereçados
Main Bus Center from Avid para uma única
or assembled bysaída)
your preferred vendor.
Quando os busses
Synchronization Main estãoDivergence
and Control configurados
I/O Options
para o modo L–C–R
When the Main To route a channel or bus to a Direct Output:
(Left-Center-Right), o busses
ajusteareCenter
set to L–C–R (Left-Center-Right)
Divergence determina a Para
Toendereçar um canal
route a channel ou bus
or bus to apara umOutput:
Direct Direct Output:
• Snake
When
mode, theconnectors
the Main
Center to are
busses enable
Divergence set primary
to L–C–R and redundant (if
(Left-Center-Right)
quantidade de sinal posicionado nosetting
canal determines
central amount
enviado para of
a 1 Target the channel or bus you want to route to a Direct Out-
Optional Components
saída mode,
Center.the Center
center-panned Divergence
signal sent to thesetting determines
center output. amount of 1 Target
put the channel
by pressing
1 Selecione o canalitsou or bus
Select
bus queyou
switch.want to route to a Direct Out-
deseja endereçar para um Direct
center-panned signal sent to the center output. put
The by pressing
following its Select
components switch.
are optional, and must be
 When Center Divergence is set to 100%, a channel panned Output pressionando seu switch Select.
 Quando o ajuste Divergence
de Center Divergence é 100%, um canal 2 In the Directs page of the Patchbay, click the tab for the
to When
 centerCenter is output
is sent to the center set to 100%,
only. a channel panned purchased separately:
posicionado para o canal central é enviado apenas para a saída 2 In the or
channel Directs pageyou
bus type of the
are Patchbay,
routing. click the tab for the
System
to center isComponents
central.
sent to the center output only.
 When Center Divergence is set to 0%, a channel panned to
2 Na• página
channel
Directs
USB flash
or busdisk do
(orPatchbay,
type other
you
clique na aba do tipo de canal ou
areportable
routing.USB storage device for
bus3 que deseja
Click in the
transfer endereçar.
channel
of Show grid
data; to MB
512 routeorthe channel
larger or bus (listed
recommended)
When
center
 Center
is sent Divergence
equally is set
to the left to 0%,
and rightaoutputs
channelonlypanned to
(phan- 3 Click in the channel grid output
to route(listed
the channel or bus (listed
Included
 Quando
center
tom o ajuste Components
is sent
center). de Centerto
equally Divergence
the left andé 0%, umoutputs
right only (phan- 3 Clique no grid de canais para endereçar o canal ou bustop).
canal posicionado on
• the left)
Near-field to an available
monitor speakers for mix across
position the
monitoring
(listados à
on the left) to an available output (listed across the top).
para otomcanal central é enviado igualmente para as saídas esquerda
center). • Headphones
esquerda) para umawithsaída1/4-inch jack(listada ao alto).
disponível
A Center
All VENUE

e direita somente Divergence
Profile systems
(phantom setting between 0%
include the following:
center). and 100% sends a
A Center Divergence
center-panned
 channel setting between
to the left, 0%and
center, andright
100%outputs
sends a • Dynamic or condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
center-pannedcenterchannel
channelto the left, (for Talkback)
 Umwith theCenter
ajuste Divergence more
entre 0%center,
prominent
e 100% and
as theright
envia umoutputs
value in-
canal
• Two
with the (2) IEC
center power cables
posicionado
creases no canal channel
towards moreas
central para
100%. prominent as the value
saídas esquerda, in- e
central • Footswitches (up to 2)
• com
direita, Monitor
creases otowards
canalmount
central
100%.formais
VGAproeminente
screen (screen not included)
conforme o valor se • MIDI cables (for connecting external MIDI devices)
aproxima
• set
To de Center
100%.mount
Trackball (trackball not included)
Divergence: • BNC cables (for connecting Word clock between the
To
• set Center
VENUE Divergence:
Mouse Pad VENUE system and external digital devices)
1 Go the
Para ajustar Options
o Center > Busses tab.
Divergence:
1• GoVENUE Profile >Guide
the Options Busses tab. • 25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
2 In the Panning section, click in the Center Divergence field
1 Vá a•aba TwoOptions > Busses.
(2) console lights
2 Indrag
and the Panning
up/downsection, click in the Center
to increase/decrease (or typefield
Divergence
the value in a
• Protective
and drag Dust Cover
up/down to increase/decrease the value (or type in a
new value).
2 Na seção Panning, clique no campo Center Divergence e arraste
• Rack(s)
new
para cima value).
ou
(see next)
para baixo para aumentar ou diminuir o valor (ou digite
3 Press Enter or Return on your keyboard to confirm the set-
um novo valor)
3 Press Enter or Return on your keyboard to confirm the set-
ting. The following options can be added to VENUE Profile systems.
Racks,
ting.
Software CDs, iLoks, and Cables
3 Pressione Enter ou Return no teclado para confirmar o ajuste. For details on all VENUE systems and options, visit the Avid
Each Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes: Assigning a Direct Output in the Patchbay Directs page
Main Bus Automatic Delay Compensation Atribuindo um Direct
Assigning Output
a Direct na página
Output in theDirects do Patchbay
Patchbay Directs page
Compensação
Main
• SystemAutomática
Bus de Delay no
Automatic
Restore CD Bus Main
Delay Compensation 4 Select the pickoff point for the Direct Output by clicking the
VENUE systems automatically compensate Select
to the pickoffofpoint for the Direct
busoOutput by clicking the
Installerfor
CDdelays incurred
4
4 Selecione
letter o ponto
the right de alimentação
the channel para
or Directand
name Output clicando
choosing
• ECx Ethernet
VENUE
O sistema systems
VENUE
Control Software
automatically
automaticamente compensate
compensa for delays
os atrasos incurred
causados
Mix Rack
letter to the
Options
right of the channel or bus name and choosing
by the use of Groups and insertion of plug-ins in the signal nafrom
letra the
à direita
pop-updo menu.
nome do canal ou e escolhendo do menu
• Standalone
pelo uso de Groups Software
e inserts Installer
de CD
plug-ins o sinal dos busses Main.to
by the use of Groups and insertion of plug-ins in
path to the Main busses. Delays are automatically applied the signal pop-up.
from the pop-up menu.
• são
DelayspathiLok
to USBMain
the Smartbusses.
Key (for
automaticamente storing
aplicados
Delays are plug-in
aos authorizations)
sinais que
automatically chegam
applied to I/O Options
signals arriving at the Main busses from multiple destinations
aos busses
•
signals Main
Plug-in de vários
installer
arriving at thedestinos
discs
Main(if para
any)
busses manter
with
from o alinhamento
pre-authorized
multiple iLokde
destinations
to maintain the proper time alignment. AI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
tempotoapropriado.
• maintain
Two (2) IECthepower
propercables
time alignment. mic/line level inputs
• One aFOH
Monitorando Link cable
Mixagem Main for connection to a VENUE console
Monitoring the Main Mix AO16 Analog Output Card that provides 16 analog line level
Monitoring the Main Mix outputs
VocêEach
YouStage
podecan Rack
send
enviar includes:
a the Main mix
mixagem Main(the
(o signal present on
sinal presente nosthe Main
busses
You can send the Main mixfor
(the signalto
present on Selecting um
a Direct Output pickoffDirect
pointOutput
in thenaPatchbay Directs page
Main busses)
busses)
• Two to para
(2) oMonitor
IEC
the bus Monitor
power cables
bus para endereçar
routing esse
the busthe
monitor Main
para
busos
for Selecionando ponto de alimentação página Directs do Patchbay
XO16 Analog
Selecting and Output
a Direct Digitalpickoff
Output Card
point that
in the provides
Patchbay 8 analog
Directs page
headphones.
busses) Veja
to “Enviando
the Monitor a
busMixagem
for Main
routing para
to the o Bus Monitor”
monitor
headphones. See “Sending the Main Mix to the Monitor Bus” bus for 5 In the ACS, press the Direct Output encoder so that its indi-
line
5 No level
ACS, outputs,
pressione and 8 AES digital
o codificador outputs.
na página 123.
headphones.
on page 123. See “Sending the Main Mix to the Monitor Bus” 5 In
cator the
LEDACS, press
stays the Direct Direct
lit (on). Output Output parasoque
encoder o indicador
that its indi-
on page 123. LED fiqueLED
cator aceso.
stays lit (on).
6 Turn the Direct Out encoder to set the Direct Output level.
6output
Gire
6 Turno compatible
codificador with
Out Aviom®
the DirectDirect Personal
Out para to
encoder ajustar
set theo Mixers
nível
Directdeand other
Direct
Output Output.
level.

digital I/O. Chapter 8: Outputs and Output Routing 85
Capítulo 8: Saídas
Chapter e Roteamento
8: Outputs deRouting
and Output Saídas 85
85
Up
Up to
to 12
12 dB
dB of
of gain
gain can
can be
be added
added to
to the
the Direct
Direct Output
Output signal.
signal.
Até 12todB
Direct
Direct
Up 12dedBganho
Output
Output gainpode
oflevel
level is
iscan seradded
adicionado
displayed
displayed
be in the
in to ao sinal
Selected
thethe
Selected
Direct para osignal.
Channel
Channel
Output Direct
dis-
dis- Personal Q Mixers
Output.
play,
play,
Up to
O
and
and
Direct 12
nível Direct
controls
controls
Output are
dB of level
gain
Output
areis é
provided
provided
can
apresentado
displayedon-screen
on-screen
be added intothe in
no
in the
theSelected
Direct
display
theOutput Selected
Patchbay,
Patchbay,
Channel In-
In-
dis-
signal. Personal
Mixers
Eight Personal
Personal Q
Q(PQ)
Personal Mixers
Q (PQ)
Qmixers are available for sending up to
Channel, e controles são fornecidos na tela nas páginas Patchbay, Eight mixers are available for sending up to
puts,
puts,
play,and
and
Directand Outputs
Outputs
controls
Output
Inputs e Outputs.
pages.
pages.
levelare
is provided on-screen
displayed in the in theChannel
Selected Patchbay, In-
dis- Personal
eight
Eightdiscrete
eight discrete
Personal
Q
stereo
stereo
Mixers
mixes
mixes
Q (PQ) of
of input
mixers input channels or
channelsfor
are available busses
busses to
or sending any
toup
any
to
puts, Outputs are
pages.
Oito mixers Personal Q (PQ) estão disponíveis para envio de oito
play, and controls provided on-screen in the Patchbay, In- available hardware output or bus-fed plug-in.
available
eight
mixagens
Eight hardware
discrete
estéreo
Personal output
stereo mixes orof
distintas
Q (PQ) de
mixers bus-fed
input
canais
are plug-in.
channels forEach
Each
de entrada
available PQ
PQbusses
orsending
busses
ou is
isto
upa
aany
to para
puts,
Direct
Ponto and Outputs pages.
Output Direct
de Alimentação Pickoff Points
Output 12 x 2 mixer with assignable input sources including Group
Direct Output Pickoff Points eight discrete stereo mixes of input channels or busses to aany por
qualquer
12 x 2 mixer
available saída
withdisponível
hardware assignable
output de hardware
input
or ou
sources
bus-fed plug-in
including
plug-in. Each alimentado
PQGroup
is
Direct Output Pickoff Points busses
bus.
busses
12 ormixer
x Cada
2or
available Aux
Aux busses,
PQbusses,
with
hardware the 3
the 312
output Main
é um assignable
mixer x2
Main
or busses
com
busses
input
bus-fed (L–C–R
fontes de
(L–C–R
sources
plug-in. or
or L–R+M)
entrada
including
Each and
assinaláveis
L–R+M)
PQ isand
Groupa
The
OsThe pickoff
pontos points for
for the
de alimentação
pickoff points the Direct
paraDirect Output
o sinalOutput signal são
Direct Output
signal are selecionados
are selected in
selected in
Direct Output Pickoff Points incluindo
any
any of
of
busses up
up
or busses
to
to
Aux8
8 Group ou Aux,
user-selectable
user-selectable
busses, the 3 os 3 busses
channels.
channels.
Main busses Main
(L–C–R (L–C–R
or
12 x 2 mixer with assignable input sources including Group L–R+M)ou L–R+M)
and
nathe
página
the
The Directs
Directs
Directs
pickoffpage
pagedo
of Patchbay.
of
pointsthe
the Os seguintes
forPatchbay.
Patchbay.
the Direct The
The pontos
following
following
Output de alimentação
signalpickoff
pickoff
are points
points
selected in e atéofoito canais selecionados pelo usuário.
any
busses upAux
or to 8busses,
user-selectable
the 3 Mainchannels.
busses (L–C–R or L–R+M) and
estão
are
are
the
Thedisponíveis
available
available
Directs forpara
for
pickoffpage each
each
points cada
type
type
of for
the thetipo
of
of de canal
channel
The or
channel
Patchbay.
Direct oubus:
or
Output bus: are
bus:
following
signal pickoff points
selected in Each of
Each of these
these PQ
PQ mixers
mixers can
can be
be remotely
remotely controllable
controllable by
by op-
op-
any of up to 8 user-selectable channels.
are
the available
Directs
Pickoffs for for Outs
page each
of thetype of channel
Patchbay. or bus: pickoff points
The following Cada of
tional
tional
Each umthese
PQ
PQ desses
Controller
Controllermixers PQ
units,
units,
PQ mixers podem
which
which
can ser adjustment
allow
allow
be remotely remotamente
adjustment of controlados
of
controllable PQ
PQ
by op-
Pickoffs for Direct
Direct Outs
are available for each type of channel or bus: por unidades
mixer
mixer
tional
Each levels
levels
ofPQthese adicionais
from
from
PQ the
the
Controller PQ
stage.
stage.
units,
mixers Controller
canwhich allowque
be remotely permitemofajustes
adjustment
controllable PQop- dos
by
Pickoffs
Channel for Direct Outs
Channel Type
Type Available
Available Pickoff
Pickoff Points
Points níveis de mixagem a partir do palco.
mixer
tional levels from theunits,
PQ Controller stage.which allow adjustment of PQ
Pickoffs
ChannelforType
Direct Outs Available Pickoff Points If
If no
no PQ
PQ Controllers
Controllers are
are used,
used, the
the PQ
PQ mixers
mixers areare still
still avail-
avail-
Input
Input Top
Top of
of channel
channel mixer levels from the stage.
Channel Type Available Pickoff Points able
able Se
If noforPQ
for use
PQuseControllers
as stereo não
as stereo Matrix
Controllers são
Matrix usados,
mixers
mixers
are used, the PQ at os
the
at mixersmixers
console.
the console. PQ continuam
are still avail-
Input Insert
Top ofreturn
Insert return
channel disponíveis para uso como mixers Matrix estéreo na
Pre/post
Pre/post
Insert
fader
fader able
If no for
PQuse as stereoare
Controllers Matrix
used,mixers
the PQatmixers
the console.
are still avail-
Input Top of return
channel PQ inputconsole.
PQ input levels
levels and
and PQ
PQ input
input pan
pan are
are controlled
controlled fromfrom the
the Out-
Out-
Pre/post
Insert fader
return
able for use as stereo Matrix mixers at the console.
FX Returns
FX Returns Top of return
Top of return put
put encoders.
PQencoders.
input levels Adjacent
Adjacent
and PQPQ PQ inputs
inputs
input can
pan can be linked
be linked or
are controlled or unlinked.
unlinked.
from the Out-
Pre/post
Pre/post fader
fader Níveis de output
The entradaofPQ e posicionamento são controlados pelos
FX Returns Pre/post fader
Top of return putmaster
The
PQ master
encoders.
input output
levels andofPQ
Adjacent each
eachPQPQ
PQ
input mixer
mixer
inputs
pan areis controlled
iscontrolled
can controlled
be linked fromfrom
from
or the
theOut-
unlinked.
the
Pre/post fader
codificadores
Output faders.
Output. Entradas PQ adjacentes podem ser associadas
Output faders.
The encoders.
master output
FX Returns
Outputs
Outputs Topof
Top
Top ofofbus
return
bus put
ou desassociadas. Aofsaída
Adjacent each PQ mixer
PQ master
inputs de iscada
can controlled
be linked
mixerorfrom
PQ the
unlinked.
é controlada
Pre/post
Pre fader Output
The masterfaders.
output of each PQ mixer is controlled from the
Outputs Topfader
Pre fader
of bus pelosSeefaders Output.
Post
Post fader See Chapter
Output Chapter 11, “Matrix and Personal Q Mixers.”
faders. 11, “Matrix and Personal Q Mixers.”
Outputs Pre fader
Top fader
of bus
Post fader SeeVeja
Chapter 11, “Matrix
o Capítulo and Personal
11, “Mixers Matrix e Q Mixers.”
Personal Q.”
Pre fader
Configurando
Configuring
Configuring Pontos de Alimentação
Direct
Direct Output Direct Output
Output Pickoff
Post faderPoints
Pickoff Points See Chapter 11, “Matrix and Personal Q Mixers.”
Configuring Direct Output Pickoff Points Assigning and Using VCAs
Para configurar osDirect
pontos de pickoff
alimentação Direct Output para
To
To configure
configure the
Configuring
Inputs:
Direct Output
the Direct Output
Outputpickoff point for
for Inputs:
point Points
Pickoff Inputs: Assigning
VCA controls
andthe
controls emulate
emulate the
Using VCAs
operation of
of traditional
traditional Voltage
Voltage
VCA operation
1To configure
1 Go
Go to
to the
the Direct Output
the Options
Options page
page and
pickoff point
and click
click the
for Inputs:
Pickoffs tab.
the Pickoffs tab.
Atribuindo
Assigning
Controlled
e Utilizando
and
Amplifiers Using VCAs
VCAs
Controlled emulate(VCAs).
Amplifiers
VCA controls (VCAs). Up
Up to
to eight
the operation eight VCA
VCA faders
faders
of traditional are
are
Voltage
To
1 Vá configure
1 àGo
página
to the the Direct
Options
Options Output
e clique
page pickoff
na aba
and point
Pickoffs.
click the for Inputs:
tab. available for remote control of
2 Under
2 Under Input
Input Strip
Strip Fader
Fader Pickoff
Pickoffs
Point, click
Pickoff Point, Pre-Fader or
click Pre-Fader or available
VCA
Controlesfor
Controlled
controlsremote
VCA control
Amplifiers
emulate
emulam the of input
(VCAs). input
Up to
operation
a operação channel,
channel,
eight
of
dos VCA FX return,
FXfaders
return,
traditional
tradicionais areor
Voltage or
amplificadores
1 Go to the Options page and click the Pickoffs tab.
Post-Fader. output
output channel
channel
available for fader
fader
remote
controlados Amplifiers
Controlled gain.
gain.
control
por voltagem of input
(Voltage
(VCAs). channel,
UpControlled FX return,
Amplifiers
to eight VCA faders -are or Até
VCAs).
2 Em Input Strip Fader Pickoff Point, clique Pre Faderorou
2 Under
Post-Fader.Input Strip Fader Pickoff Point, click Pre-Fader Post
oito faders
output
available VCA
channel
for estão disponíveis
fadercontrol
remote gain. of input para channel,
controle remoto de ganho
FX return, or de
Fader.
Post-Fader.
2 Under Input Strip Fader Pickoff Point, click Pre-Fader or VCAs control level of the assigned channels only. They do
InputVCAs control
Channel, FX level of
return
output channel fader gain. the
ou assigned
canais de channels
saída. only. They do
Post-Fader. not act
not act as
VCAs as a
a summing
control level of output
summing output bus.
bus. channels only. They do
the assigned
Matrix Mixers notVCAs
VCAs controlam
actcontrol
as level oofnível
a summing apenas
output
the bus. dos
assigned canaisonly.
channels assinalados.
They do Eles
Mixers
MatrixMatrix
Mixers VCAs
VCAs remotely
remotely
notnão
actatuam
control
comothe
control
as a summing
thebus fader
fader gain
gain of
de saída.
output bus.
of each
each channel
channel as-
as-
Eight
Eight Matrix
Matrix mixers
mixers are
are available
available for
for sending
sending upup to
to eight
eight signed
VCAs to
signed to the
the VCA
remotelyVCA fader,
fader, but
control the do
but do not change
notgain
fader change the
the position
of each channel of
position as-the
of the
Matrix
Oito mixers
mono mixesMixers
Matrix
of estão
input disponíveis
channels para
and enviar
busses tooito
anymixagens
eightmono
available faders on
VCAs on those
controlam channels.
remotamente The accumulated
onot
ganho gain of a channel
mono
Eight mixes
Matrixofmixers
input are
channels andfor
available busses to any
sending available
up to faders
signed
VCAs tothose
the VCA
remotely channels.
fader,the
control The
but do ofdos
accumulated
fader change
gain faders
gain
the
each of ade
channel cada
channel
position canal
of the
as-
dehardware
canais mixes
deoutput
entradaore bus-fed
or busses para qualquer
plug-in. plug-in alimentado por assinalado
belonging toao fader
several VCA,but
VCAs mas
is não
limited alteram
to a posição dos faders
hardware
mono output
Eight Matrix of input
mixers bus-fed
are plug-in.
channels and
available forbusses to any
sending up toavailable
eight belonging
faders
signed on to
to the several
thoseVCA VCAs
channels.
fader, is
The limited to +12
doaccumulated dB.
+12 the
not change dB.
gain of a channel
position of the
bus ou saída de hardware disponível. desseson canais. O ganho
hardware
mono mixesoutput or bus-fed
of input channelsplug-in.
and busses to any available belonging
faders to several
those VCAsacumulado
channels. is limited
The
de+12
to
accumulated
umgain
canal
dB. pertencente a
of a channel
Each
Each Matrix
Matrix is
is a
a 12-in/1-out
12-in/1-out mono
mono mixer
mixer with
with assignable
assignable in-in- vários VCAs é limitado a + 12 dB.
hardware
Cada Matrix output
é um or
mixerbus-fed
mono plug-in.
12-in/1-out com fontes de3 belonging to several
Assigning ChannelsVCAs is
tolimited
VCAsto +12 dB.
put
put sources
sources
Each including
including
Matrix Group busses
Group busses
is a 12-in/1-out monoor or Aux busses,
Aux with
mixer busses, the
the 3 entrada
assignable Main
Main
in-
assinaláveis
busses incluindo
(L–C–R busses Group ou Aux, os 3 busses Main Assigning Channels
Atribuindo Canais a VCAs to VCAs
busses
put (L–C–R
Eachsources
Matrix isor
ora L–R+M)
L–R+M)
including and any
any of
and mono
Group
12-in/1-out busses up
ofmixerto
upAux
or 8 user-selectable
to with
8busses,
user-selectable
the 3 Main
assignable in-
(L–C–R ou L–R+M) e até oito canais controlled
selecionados pelotheusuário. To assign channels to VCAs:
channels.
channels.
busses
put Matrix
Matrix
(L–C–R
sources orinput
input
L–R+M)
including levels
andare
levels
Group are
anycontrolled
busses oforup
Aux 8from
from
to busses, the
Os níveis de entrada do Matrix são controlados pelos codificadorestheOutput
Output
user-selectable
3 Main Assigning Channels to VCAs
To assign channels to VCAs:
encoders when a Para atribuir um canal a VCAs:
To assign channels to VCAs:the Output faders section.
encoders
channels.
busses
Output when
(L–C–R
quando um a Matrix
Matrix
or Matrix
input é
L–R+M)
Matrix
is selected.
and Adjacent
is selecionado.
selected.
levels are Adjacent
anycontrolled
of up
Entradas
Matrix
Matrix
to 8from theinputs
inputs
Output
user-selectable
adjacentes da 1 Press
1 Press the
the VCAs
VCAs switch
switch in
in the Output faders section.
can
can be linked
be linked
encoders
channels. whenor unlinked.
or aunlinked.
Matrix Matrix is selected.
input levels Adjacentfrom
are controlled Matrix theinputs
Output To assign channels to VCAs:
Matrix podem ser associadas ou desassociadas. Press the
1 Pressione VCAs switch
o switch intothe Output faders section.
can be linked 21Select
2 Select the
the VCA
VCA youVCA
you want
wantna seção
to target
target defor
faders
for Output.
assignment.
assignment.
encoders whenoraunlinked.
Matrix is selected. Adjacent Matrix inputs 1 Press the VCAs switch in the Output faders section.
Odd/even pairs of Matrix mixers can be linked to form stereo
Odd/even pairs of Matrix
Pares
can ímpar/par
be linked or mixersmixers
deunlinked. Matrixcan be linked
podem to form stereo
ser associados para 2 Select the VCA you want to target for assignment.
Press
32Press
3 the Multi-Assign
Selecione
the Multi-Assign switch
o VCA para oswitch to the
qual deseja
to theatribuir
right of
right ofuma
the seleção.
the Output sec-
Output sec-
Matrix
Matrix output
output
Odd/even busses.
busses.
pairs The
The
of Matrix master
master
mixers output
output
can be of each Matrix mixer
formar um bus estéreo de saída Matrix. A of eachmaster
linked
saída Matrix
to mixer
formdestereo
cada 2 Select the VCA you want to target for assignment.
tion.
tion.
3 Press the Multi-Assign switch to the right of the Output sec-
is
mixercontrolled
isMatrix
controlled
output
Matrix
Odd/even from
from
épairs ofthe
the
busses.
controlado Output
Output
The
pelos
Matrix faders.
faders.
master
faders
mixers output
Output.
can of eachtoMatrix
be linked mixer
form stereo
33 Pressione
tion. o switch Multi-Assign
Press theSelect
Multi-Assign switch à esquerda
to the right of dathe
seção Output.
Output sec-
is controlled
Matrix outputfrom theThe
busses. Output faders.
master output of each Matrix mixer 4 Press
4 Press the
the Select switches
switches on
on the
the input
input channels,
channels, FX FX returns,
returns,
See
VejaChapter
See Chapter 11,
o Capítulo “Matrix
11,the
“Matrix
11, and
“Mixers Personal
andfaders.
Personal
Matrix Q
Q Mixers.”
Mixers.”
e Personal Q.” tion.
or output channels you want to assign to the VCA.
is controlled from Output or
44 output
Press the
Pressionechannels
Select you want
switches
os switches ontothe
Select assign
deinput
Inputtochannels,
the VCA.FX
Channels, FXreturns,
Returns ou
See Chapter 11, “Matrix and Personal Q Mixers.” 4Output
or Press Channels
output
the channels
Selectque você
you
switches deseja
want
on to
the atribuir
assign
input to ao
the VCA.
channels,VCA.FX returns,
Press the
5 Press
5 the flashing
flashing Multi-Assign
Multi-Assign switch
switch to to confirm
confirm thethe assign-
assign-
See Chapter 11, “Matrix and Personal Q Mixers.” or output channels you want to to
assign to the VCA.
ment,
ment,
5 Pressor
or press
press
the the
the
flashingCancel
Cancel switch
switch
Multi-Assign to cancel
cancel
switch to the
the assignment.
assignment.
confirm the assign- a
5 Pressione o switch piscante Multi-Assign para confirmar
ment,
5 or press
Press the ou
atribuição, the
flashing Cancel switch
Multi-Assign
pressione to cancel
switchpara
o switch Cancel the
to confirmassignment.
the assign-
cancelar.
ment, or press the Cancel switch to cancel the assignment.
86
86 VENUE
VENUE Profile
Profile Guide
Guide
86
86 Guia VENUE
VENUE Profile
Profile Guide
The effective gain of any channel is equal to the combination By default, channel VCA indication is on. You can turn off
Channel Strips Show VCA Contribution Turning Channel VCA Indication On and Off
of its individual channel fader, plus any (all) VCA level VCA indication in the Options > Interaction page.
Channel Strips Show VCA Contribution Turning Channel VCA Indication On and Off
Thechanges
effective
Réguas de Canalthat
gain affect
of anythat
Apresentam achannel.
channel is equal
Atuação to the combination
do VCA ByLigando
default,e channel
Desligando VCA indication
Indicação de VCAis on. You can turn off
of itsThe
individual
effective channel
gain of any fader, plus any
channel (all) VCA
is equal combination VCABy
to thelevel indication in the Options
default, channel > Interaction
VCA indication is on.page.
You can turn off
Input
Ochanges
ganhoof its and
efetivo output
de um
individual channels
canal
channel display
éfader, à the
igual plus net(all)
combinação
any effect de
VCAof seu
VCA level
levelfader PorVCA padrão, a indicação
indication in the doOptions
VCA está>ligada. Você pode
Interaction page.desligá-la na
that affect that channel.
Stage
(effective
individual
changes
Rack
com as Features
gain)
that on-screen.
alterações
affect that de This lets
nível
channel. deyouVCAkeep trackque
(todas) of what
afetam all Additional
página Options >Required
Interaction. Components
esse currently
Input canal. assigned
and output VCAsdisplay
channels are doingtheto netchannels
effect ofand VCAbusses
level at
all times.
Input
(effective and output
gain) on-screen.channels display
This lets you the keepnet effect
track of VCA
of what alllevel
Inputaudio
e I/O for
Output VENUEmostram
Channels Profile systems.
o efeito doUpVCAto two
(ganhoStage Racksna
efetivo) Show VCA Contribution
(effective
currently gain)VCAs
assigned on-screen. This to
are doing lets you keep
channels andtrack of what
busses at all • Video Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display
tela.can
Issobe used
permite simultaneously,
acompanhar supporting up to 96 total inputs.
currently
On-Screen
all times. assigned VCAsoare
VCA Indication
quedoing
os VCAs estão fazendo
to channels com soat
and busses recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
canaisalle times.
busses em todos os momentos. Displays settings in the Options > Interaction Showpage.
VCA Contribution
DVI supported.
Audio I/O
VENUE displays effective gain as a second, transparent fader Show VCA Contribution
On-Screen
Indicação VCA VCA
na tela Indication •ToUSB
Displays
turnkeyboard
channel VCA
settings in the and indication off or on:
trackball/mouse
Options (Windows compatible)
> Interaction page.
cap• on-screen
48 inputs in withthe fader displays of bothmic the Inputs and Out-
On-Screen VCA remotely
Indication controllable preamps and
AjustesGodeto
1Displays visualizações
the innathe
Options
settings página Options
> Options
Interaction > Interaction.
page. page.
> Interaction
putsindividually
VENUE pages. effective
displays selectable
gain phantom
as a second, power.
transparent fader To turn channel VCA indication off or on:Systems Only)
A VENUE apresenta o ganho efetivo como um segundo botão de Digital Snake Cable (VENUE Profile
VENUE
cap on-screen displays
inoutput
the effective gainexpandable
asboth
a second, transparent fader In theou section, click de
tooff
enable
or on:(or disable) Show VCA
fader, • 8 analog
transparente,
Selected Channel nafader
tela
When
displays
channels;
nasthe
of
visualizações
currently
the Inputs
up
de faders
selected
to 48 and
das
channel
Out-
analog
páginasor
is un-
Para
1 Go
2To
• The
ligar
turn
to the
Displays
desligar
channel VCA a indicação
Options >between
connection
indication
Interaction
FOH
VCA:
page.
Rack and Stage Rack requires
puts cap on-screen
pages. in the fader
Inputs e Outputs. displays of both the Inputs and Out- Contribution.
der VCA control, the net effect of all its assigned VCAs is Go to the
1a Digital SnakeOptions
cable. > This
Interaction
cable can page.be purchased directly
puts pages. 2 1InVátheà página
DisplaysOptions
section, > Interaction.
click to enable (or disable) Show VCA
shownChannel
Selected in the form
Whenofthe a transparent fader cap.
currently selected channel is un- from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Selected Channel Quando
Synchronization o canal I/O
and Control selecionado está sob controle do Contribution. 2 In the Displays section, click to enable (or disable) Show VCA
der oVCA
VCA, control,
Selected
efeito deChannel
todostheosnetVCAeffect
When theofcurrently
atribuídosall éitsmostrado
assigned
selected VCAs
na formais deisum
channel un- 2 Showing
Na VCA clique
seção Displays, Memberspara habilitar (ou desabilitar) Show VCA
• Snake connectors to enable primary and redundant (if Contribution.
shown der VCA
in the control,
form
botão de fader transparente. of the
a net effect
transparent of all
fader its
cap. assigned VCAs is Contribution.
applicable)
shown in the form connection to a VENUE
of a transparent faderFOH cap.Rack. Optional
Showing
To view VCA VCAComponents
Members
membership:
1Showing VCA Members
Mostrando
The following Membros VCA
components are optional, and faders
must be
Press the VCA switch to bank the Output to VCAs.
Channel level To purchased
view VCA membership:
separately:
Para
2To ver
Press
view aand
adesão
VCA hold aothe
VCA:
membership:Default (Alt) switch, then press the Multi
System Components
Channel level
1 Press
• USBthe VCAflash switch
disk (ortoother
bankportable
the OutputUSBfaders to device
storage
Assign switch in the Output section. The Multi Assign switch
VCAs. for
1 1 Press
transfer
Pressione the
o VCA
of Show
switch switch
data;
VCA to512
para bank MBthe
atribuir or
osOutput
larger
faders faders to
recommended)
Output VCAs.
para VCAs.
Channel level LEDand
2 Press lightsholdto the
indicate Multi
Default Assign
(Alt) mode.
switch, then press the Multi
Included Components • Near-field
2 Press and monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
Assign switch inhold the Default
the Output (Alt)The
section. switch,
Multi then press
Assign the Multi
switch
Pressione
2 VCA e segure
assignments areoshown
switchinDefault
each (Alt), e strip
channel presione o switch
LCD with a
Effective gain (VCAs) LED • Headphones
Assign
lights switch
to indicate inwith
the 1/4-inch
Output
Multi Assign jack
section.
mode. The Multi Assign switch
All VENUE Profile systems include the following: Multi-Assign
flashing na seção
number Output.
(the numberO switch Multi-Assign
indicates the VCA se
to acende
which para
LED olights
• Dynamic
indicar modotoMulti-Assign.
orindicate Multi
condenser Assign mode.
microphone and XLR mic cable
Effective gain (VCAs) VCA each channel
assignments isare
assigned).
shown in each channel strip LCD with a
(for Talkback)
• Two (2) IEC power cables Effective gain (VCAs) flashing
VCAnumber
assignments (the number
are shownindicates
in eachthe VCA to
channel which
strip LCD with a
As •atribuições
Footswitches VCA (up sãotoapresentadas
2) em cada LCD de régua de
Effective gain (VCA contribution) shown on the selected channel
• Monitor mount for VGA screen (screen not included) canal com um número piscante (o número indica o VCA awhich
each flashing
To exit
channel Shownumber
is VCA (the number
Members
assigned). mode:indicates the VCA to que cada
• MIDI
each cablesis(for
channel connecting external MIDI devices)
assigned).
Inputs and Outputs
• Trackball mount Pages In thenot
(trackball Inputs and Outputs pages,
included) canal está
 Press associado).
the Multi Assign switch, or Cancel.
Effective
Ganho gain
efetivo (VCA do
(atuação contribution)
VCA) shown on
apresentada theselecionado
selected channel • Show
To exit BNC cables
VCA Members(for connecting
mode: Word clock between the
red “ghost” fader caps appear no canal
below the fader displays of
• VENUE
Effective gainMouse Pad
(VCA contribution) shown on the selected channel Para VENUE
Tosair
exit do system
modo
Show VCA Show and
VCAexternal
Members Members:
mode: digital devices)
channels
Inputs that are
and Outputs currently
Pages In theassigned
Inputs andto one or more
Outputs VCAs.
pages,  Press the Multi Assign switch, or Cancel.
Using VCAs

Inputs•andVENUE
Outputs Profile
PagesGuide
Nas páginas Inputs e Outputs, um botão • 25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
Inputs and
red “ghost” Outputs
fader Pages In
caps appear the the
below Inputs and
fader Outputs
displays of pages,  Press the Multi Assign switch, or Cancel.
vermelho
• Two “fantasma”
(2) consolede fader
lights aparece abaixo da visualização de  Pressione o switch Multi-Assign ou Cancel.
red
channels “ghost”
that arefader caps
currently appear below theorfader displays
VCAs. of
faders nos canais atribuídos aassigned
um ou mais to one
VCAs. more
Using VCAs
To adjust the levels of VCA members:
• Protective
channels thatDust Cover assigned to one or more VCAs.
are currently Utilizando
Using VCAs
VCAs
1 Press the VCAs switch to assign control of the VCAs to the
To VENUE Profile of VCAExpansion Options
Channel levels adjust the levels members:
Output
Para ajustar faders.
os níveis dos membros do VCA:
Effective To following
adjust theoptions
levels of VCA
gain (VCAs) The
1 Press the VCAs switch can bemembers:
to assignadded to VENUE
control of theProfile
VCAs to systems.
the
Racks,
Channel Software CDs, iLoks, and Cables
levels 2 Move the fader for the VCA whose members you want to ad-
1For
Output1 details
Pressione
faders.
Press theon all VENUE
o VCAs
switch VCAssystems
switch para and
atribuir
to assign options,
o controle
control visitdos
of the the VCAs
VCAs Avid aos
to the
Effective
Channel levels just.
gain (VCAs) faders
website
OutputOutput.
(www.avid.com).
faders.
Effective 2 Move the fader for the VCA whose members you want to ad-
• gain
System
Effective gainRestore CD
(VCA contribution)
(VCAs) shown in the on-screen fader displays
just.
2 To Move
2 solo
Movimente thethe osfader
members
fadersforof
the
dos VCA whose
a VCA:
membros quemembers you want to ad-
deseja ajustar.
• ECx
The Ethernet
opacity of theControl
ghost caps Software Installer
vary with CD VCA levels:
the actual Mixjust.Rack Options
 Press the Solo switch on the VCA channels whose members
Effective gain (VCA contribution) shown in the on-screen fader displays
•• Standalone
Ganho efetivo
Lighter caps Software
(atuação do VCA)
indicate Installer
apresentado
smaller CD
na visualização
amounts de displays na tela
of VCA gain. ToPara
solocolocar em Soloofmembros
the members a VCA: de um VCA:
Effective gain (VCA contribution) shown in the on-screen fader displays you want to solo so that the Solo switch is lit.
The opacity
•• iLok of the
USB caps
Brighter ghost caps
Smartindicate vary
Key (forlarger with
storing the actual VCA levels:
plug-inofauthorizations)
amounts VCA I/OTo Options
solo the members of a VCA:
A opacidade
The do botão
opacity of “fanstasma”
the ghost caps varia
vary de acordo
with the com gain.
actual oVCA
nívellevels:
de   Press the Solo switch on the VCA channels whose members
Pressione o switch Solo nos canais VCAfollows
dos membros que deseja
• •Lighter
Plug-in caps indicate
installer smaller
discs amounts
(if any) of VCA gain. iLok
with pre-authorized Input channel
Press solo mode (PFL or AFL) the current set-
atuação VCAs: you want
AI16
colocar
 tothe
Analog
em soloSolo
so switch
that
Mic/Line
Solo, para on
thefique
Input
que the
Solo
Card VCAthatchannels
switch
aceso. is lit.
provides whose members
16 analog
•TwoLighter
• •Brighter caps
caps indicate
indicate
(2) IEC power cables smaller
larger amountsamounts
of VCAof VCA
gain. gain. ting on
you want the Options
to inputs > Busses page.
solo so that the Solo switch is lit.
mic/line level
• • Botões
•One FOHmais
Brighter claros
caps
Link cableindicam
indicate
for largerporções
amounts
connection menores
to aof VCAde
VENUE ganho Input channel
gain.
console O modo
solo mode (PFL or AFL) follows the current set-
Solo dos Input Channel (PFL oufollows
AFL) segue os ajustes
Input Input channel > solo mode (PFLor or AFL) thecurrent
current
de VCA. ting on the
AO16 dachannel
Options
Analog
página solo
Output
Optionsmode
Busses
Card (PFL
page.
that
> Busses. AFL)
provides follows
16 analog the line levelset-
• EachBotões
Stage Rackmaisincludes:
brilhantes indicam porções maiores de ting setting
outputs on theon the Options
Options > Buses
> Busses page.page.
ganho de VCA Input channel solo mode (PFL or AFL) follows the current
XO16setting on the
Input
Analog and Options
channel solo>mode
Digital Buses(PFL
Output page.
Cardor AFL) follows the
that provides current
8 analog
line levelsetting on the
outputs, andOptions
8 AES>digital
Buses outputs.
page.

output compatible with Aviom® Personal
Chapter 8: Outputs Mixers andRouting
and Output other 87
Chapter 8: Outputs andprovides
Output Routing 87
IOx Input and output expansion card that an addi-
digital I/O.
Para silenciar (Mute) membros do VCA:
 Pressione o switch Mute switch dos canais VCA cujos membors

deseja silenciar. O LED Mute dos canais atribuídos ao VCA pisca
para indicar que estão implicitamente silenciados pelo VCA.
VCA Spill
Você pode “distribuir” (“spill”) um VCA para ter seus canais atribuídos
à seção Input. VCA Spill permite acessar rapidamente aqueles
canais atribuídos para um VCA específico e imediatamente focar
nesses canais, sem a necessidade de procurá-los pelos bancos de
faders de entrada
Para “distribuir” um VCA:
1 Selecione o banco de faders de saída VCA.
2 Clique duas vezes o switch Select do VCA para espalhar seus

membros pelos faders de entradas.
O LED do switch Select do VCA selecionado pisca, assim como

o switches Bank (A-D) ou FX Return (1-8). Qualquer atribuição
Bank Safe é encoberta (apesar do status Bank Safe permanecer
inalterado).
Se o VCA contém menos que 16 membros, os canais são justificados

à direita dentro do banco de faders de entrada, de modo a mantê-
los o mais próximo possível do centro da console. Réguas de canal
não usadas ficam em branco e inativas.
Se o VCA contém mais que 16 membros, apenas os primeiros 16

são mostrados.
Para cancelar o VCA Spill, siga um dos seguintes procedimentos:
• Pressione o switch Select do VCA.

• Pressione qualquer switch Bank (A-D).
• Pressione o switch FX Returns 1-8.
• Pressione o switch GEQ.
• Na caixa de diálogo da tela, clique Exit VCA Spill.
Selecionando Outro VCA no modo Spill
Selecionar outro VCA enquanto o modo spill está ativo

automaticamente “distribui” esse VCA.

Capítulo
Chapter 9: Groups
9: Groups
Chapter 9: Groups
Estecan
capítulo mostra
be used como:
simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total inputs. Para endereçar canais
recommended; para qualquer
1024x768 número
minimum de bussesVGA
resolution). Group:
and
• This chapter busses
Configurar shows how
Groupto do the following: To route channels to any number of Group busses:
DVI supported.
• Audio
This chapter
•Endereçar shows
Configure
I/O how
Group
Groups to do the following:
busses 1 1To route
Selecione
Target channels
um or
one to any
oumore
mais number of Group busses:
canais.
channels.
• •Ajustar parâmetros
Configure
Route Groupdo
Groups bus Group
busses • USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
1 Target one or more channels.
2 2NaInseção
the Bus Assigns
Bus section,
Assigns, press qualquer
pressione any of the Group
dos switches
switches Group
• individually
Route Groups
Adjust Group bus parameters
selectable phantom power. so
para
2 Inthat
Digitalque
thethey
Bus are
fiquem
Snake lit. (VENUE
acesos.
Assigns
Cable section,Profile
press any of theOnly)
Systems Group switches
• Adjust Group bus parameters
• 8 analog output channels; expandable up to 48 analog or so that they are lit.
Configurando Busses
digital outputs per Group
Stage Rack.
Configuring Group Busses from
Left-Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Center/Mono
Synchronization
A seção Output possuiand
Configuring ControlGroup
Group
8 busses I/O
Busses
disponíveis. As saídas Group Right
Left- Center/Mono
The Output section has 8 available Group busses. Group out-
podem• ser atribuídas
Snake para os
connectors to busses
enable Main Output,
primary para os plug-ins
and redundant (if Right
puts canpor
be bus,
The Output
alimentados assigned
section to
osthe
parahas MainMatrix
8mixers
availableOutput
Group busses,
eFOHbusses.
para toGroup
available
qualquer out-
saída Optional Components
applicable) connection to a VENUE Rack.
bus-fed
puts canplug-ins,
be to
assigned
de hardware no sistema. Matrix
to the mixers,
Main and
Outputto any hardware
busses, to out-
available
puts on plug-ins,
bus-fed the systems.
to Matrix mixers, and to any hardware out- The following components are optional, and must be
Groups
Busses
putsGroup
on the podem
systems.ser globalmente configurados para serem purchased separately:
Groups
monoSystem
Group
ou estéreo Components
busses can beparte
como globally configured todebebus
da configuração mono or stereo
Aux/Group. • USB flash disk (or other portable USB storage device for
as part
Group of the
busses Aux/Group
can be bus
globally configuration.
configured to See
be “Configuring
Veja “Configurando Busses Aux, Group e Variable Group” naorpágina
mono stereo transfer of Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
Aux,
80. as Group,
part of the and Variablebus
Aux/Group Group Busses” onSee
configuration. page 80.
“Configuring
Included • Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
Aux, Group,Components
and Variable Group Busses” on page 80.
All VENUE Profile systems include the following: Stereo Pan
Endereçando
Routing Entradas
Inputs
• VENUE Profile
para
to
console
BussesBusses
Group Group • Dynamic or condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
Stereo Pan
(for Talkback)
Bus Assign switches
Routing Inputs
• Two (2) IEC to Group Busses
power cables Switches de atribuição de bus
• Assign
Footswitches
switches(up to 2)
Para endereçar vários canais
To route multiple paratoum
channels único Group:
a single Group:
Bus
To routethe
multiple channels to abank
single Group:
1 •Press
1 Pressione Groups
o switch
Trackball switch
Groups
mount paratoassociar
(trackball not theos Output faders para
faders Output
included) to the
os Routing
• BNC cablesGroup Outputs
(for connecting Wordto the
clock Main
between
Endereçando
Routing Saídas Group para os the
busses
VENUE system and external digital devices) Main
Group Outputs to the
busses Groups.
Groups
1 •Press
VENUEbusses.
the Groups switch to bank the Output faders to the
Mouse Pad Busses
Groups
2 •Press
VENUEbusses.
Profileswitch
Guide the Output strip for the Group
Main
Busses
2 Pressione othe Select
switch Select na in
régua Output para o Group (1–8) ao • 25-pin
You D-Sub
can route cables
Group (for connecting
outputs to the Mainto GPI devices)
busses from the ACS
(1–8)
2 • to
Press
Two which
the
(2) you
Select
console want
switch to the
lightsin
qual você deseja atribuir canais. assign channels.
Output strip for the Group or
You
Você on-screen.
can route
pode Groupsaídas
endereçar outputs to the
Group Main
para os busses
bussesfrom
Mainthe ACS
pelo ACS
(1–8) to whichDust
you want to assign channels.
3 •Press
Protective Cover
the Multi-Assign switch near the Output encoders. The ouorpela tela.
on-screen.
3 Pressione o switch Multi Assign próximo aos codificadores Output.
3 •Press
MultiRack(s) (see
Assign andnext)
outputswitch
the Multi-Assign Select near
switches
Os switches Multi Assign e Select piscam.
flash. encoders. The
the Output VENUE Profile
To route a Group outputExpansion Options
to the Main busses from the ACS:
Multi Assign and output Select switches flash. Para endereçar
To route umaoutput
a Group saída Group
to the para
Mainos bussesfrom
busses Mainthe
pelo ACS:
ACS:
4 Press the Select switch on the channels you want routed to 1 Press the Groups switch in the Output Fader assignment sec-
Racks,
4 Pressione Software
othe
switch CDs,
Select dosiLoks, anddeseja
canais que Cablesendereçar para tion to the
Press assign control of Group levels toFader
the faders.
the selected
4 Press Group.
Select switch on the channels you want routed to 1
1For
Pressione
details oGroups
onswitch switch
Groups
all VENUE in
nathe Output
seção
systems andOutput assignment
Fader
options, para
visit sec- o
theassociar
Avid
o Group selecionado. tion to assign control of Group levels to the faders.
the selected
Each Mix Rack Group.
or FOH Rack includes: controle dos níveis Group
website (www.avid.com). aos faders.
5 Press the Multi Assign switch again to confirm the action.
•
5 PressioneSystem
5 Press o Restore
switch CD Assign novamente para confirmar a
Multi
– or –the Multi Assign switch again to confirm the action.
ação. • ECx Ethernet Control Software Installer CD
– or – Mix Rack Options
 Select another Group to confirm the current assignment but
– ou remain
– Selectin Multi Assign
another Group mode to assign
to confirm channels
the current to the newly
assignment but
targetedinGroup
remain Multibus.
Assign mode to assign channels to the newly
 Selecione
• Plug-inoutro Groupdiscs
installer para(ifconfirmar
any) witha pre-authorized
atribuição atualiLok
mas Groups switch
targeted Group bus. AI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
continuar no modo Multi Assign
• Two (2) IEC power cables para associar canais a um novo bus Groups switch
Group.
AO16 Analog
Assigning Output
Groups to theCard that
Output provides 16 analog line level
faders
Assigning
Atribuindo Groups faders
Groups to the Output faders
2 Select eachaos
Group Output
that you want to assign to the Main bus-
2 Select each Group thatOutput
XO16
ses byAnalog and
pressing Digital
their Select Card
switches.
you want tothat provides
assign to the 8Main
analog
bus-
2line
Selecione
level cada and
outputs, Group8 quedigital
AES desejaoutputs.
atribuir aos busses Main
ses by pressing their Select switches.
pressionando seus switches Select.
Chapter 9: Groups 89
Chapter 9: Groups 89
digital I/O.
Capítulo 9: Groups 89
3 In
3 Na the ACS
seção Bus Assigns
Bus Assigns section,
do ACS, press the
pressione L–R (left
o switch L–Rand right)
(left/right) To
Paracancel Group Spill,
cancelar do any ofSpill,
o Group the following:
siga um dos seguintes
or C/Mono
ou 3C/Mono
In the ACS(center/mono)
(center/mono) para
Bus Assigns switch
section, so
que fique that it
pressaceso. is lit.
the L–R (left and right) procedimentos:
To •cancel
PressGroup Spill, do any
or double-press ofSelect
the the following:
switch on the currently
or C/Mono (center/mono) switch so that it is lit. • spilled
Press orGroup.
double-press the Select switch on the currently
• Pressione o switch Select do Group.
• Press
spilledany Bank (A-D) switch.
Group.
• Pressione qualquer switch Bank (A-D).
Left- Center/Mono •• Press any Bank
the FX
Pressione (A-D)FX
oReturns
switch switch.
1-8 switch.1-8.
Returns
Right
Left- Center/Mono • Pressione
• Press a GEQ
the o switch
FX switch. GEQ.
Returns 1-8 switch.
BusRight
Assign switches •• In Na
theacaixa
Press GEQde diálogo
on-screen da click
dialog,
switch. tela, clique Exit Group
Exit Group Spill. Spill.
Switches Bus Assign
Bus Assign switches • In the on-screen dialog, click Exit
To route a Group output to the Main busses on-screen: Selecionando Outro Group no Modo SpillGroup Spill.
Para
Toendereçar uma saída
route a Group outputGroup
to thepara
Mainos busses
busses Main na tela:
on-screen: Selecting Other Groups While Spilled
1 Go to the Outputs page and select the Group you want to
Selecionar outro
Selecting OtherGroup
Groupsenquanto o modo spill está ativo,
While Spilled
route
1 Go
1 Vá to the
to theOutputs
à página Main busses.
Outputsepage and select
selecione the que
o Group Group you endereçar
deseja want to Selecting another Group while spill mode is active automati-
automaticamente “distribui” esse Group.
para os
routebusses
to the Main.
Main busses. cally spillsanother
Selecting that Group.
Group while spill mode is active automati-
signment for the selected Group.
Casosspills
cally Especiais
thatcom Spill
Group.
2 Clique no botão Bus Assign na tela para alternar a atribuição de Special Cases with Spill
signment for the
bus para o Group selected Group.
selecionado. Faders
Special Cases with Spill
Faders
Se você está tocando um fader ao mesmo tempo em que chama
Faders
If
umyou are Spill,
Group touching a fader
o fader podeat theoff-line.
ficar same timeSolteaso you
faderinvoke
para trazê-lo
de volta.
Group Spill, that fader may be taken off-line. Let
If you are touching a fader at the same time as you invoke go of the
fader
GrouptoSpill,
bringthat
it back
faderonline.
may be taken off-line. Let go of the
Visualizando Atribuições de Bus Group
fader to bring it back online.
Viewing Group
Você pode ver Bus Assignments
as atribuições do bus Group pela seção Input da
Viewing Group
console ou por Bus
uma lista dosAssignments
membros do Group na tela.
You can view Group bus assignments from the Input section
Assigning a Group output to the Main busses from the Output page of the console or from an on-screen
You can viewAtribuições
Visualizando Group bus Bus Grouplist
assignments
do of
from
na Group members.
theInput
Seção Input section
Endereçando
Assigninguma saída Group
a Group outputpara
to os
thebusses
Main Main na página
busses Output
from the Output page of the console or from an on-screen list of Group members.
Para ver os Group
Viewing membros do Group
Bus na console:in the Input
Assignments
Managing Group Bus Assignments Section
Viewing Group Bus Assignments in the Input
Gerenciando
Managing Atribuições
Group Bus de Bus Group
Assignments 1 Pressione o switch Groups para assoicar os faders Output aos
To help manage Groups, the following sections explain how Section
Groups.
To view Group membership on the console:
you
Para can manage
Toauxiliar
help spill, view,
a gerenciar copy (duplicate)
Groups,
Groups, andsections
a seguinte
the following reset
seção Groups and
explica
explain como
how
Group
distribuir, bus
you canver, assignments.
copiar
spill, view,(duplicar) e resetarand
copy (duplicate) Groups
reset eGroups
atribuições
and de To
1 view the
Press Group
2 Pressione e membership
Groups switch
segure on the
to bank
o switch console:
the Output
Default, faders
e pressione to
o switch Multi
busGroup
de Group.
bus assignments. Assign
Pressna
Groups.
1 seção
the Output.
Groups switch to bank the Output faders to
Group
Group SpillSpill Groups.
OsPress
2 and hold
membros de um the Default
Group são switch, then
mostrados press the
(piscam) emMulti
cada As-
LCD de
Group Spill
You can “spill” a Group to have only its assigned channels
sign
régua
2 switch
Pressdeand in the
canal; Output
holdo the
número section.
indica
Default o grupo
switch, thenao qualthe
press cada canal
Multi As-está
Você pode “distribuir” (“spill”) um Group para ter apenas seus canais atribuído.
sign switch in the Output section.
banked
You canto the Input section. Group Spill lets you quickly ac-
associados à“spill”
seçãoaInput.
Group to have
Group Spillonly its assigned
permite channels
acessar rapidamente Group numbers are shown (flashing) in each channel strip
cess only
banked those channels assigned to a specific Group and im-
apenas ostocanais
the Input section. Group
assinalados para Spill
um lets you específico
Group quickly ac- e LCD;
Groupthe numberare
numbers indicates the Groupin
shown (flashing) toeach
which each channel
channel strip
mediately
imediatamente focus
cess only those on
focar those
channels channels,
assigned
nesses canais, sem without needing
to aa necessidade
specific Group to search
de and im-
procurá- is assigned.
LCD; the number indicates the Group to which each channel
los through
mediately the
pelos bancos input
deon
focus fader
thosebanks.
faders. channels, without needing to search is assigned.
through the input fader banks.
Para
Todistribuir um Group:
spill a Group:
To spill a Group:
1 Select the Group output fader bank.
1 Selecione o banco de faders de saída Group.
1 Select the Group output fader bank.
2 Double-press a Group Select switch to spill its members
2 Pressione
across theduas vezes
input o switch Group Select para distribuir seus
2 Double-press afaders.
Group Select switch to spill its members
membros pelos faders de entrada.
across the input faders.
The selected Group Select switch LED flashes, as do the cur-
O LED
rentdo switch
input Group
Bank Select
or FX selecionado
Return switch. Anypisca,
Bankcomo oschannels
Safed switches
The selected Group Select switch LED flashes, as do the cur-
Bank ou FX Return. Qualquer canal Bank Safe é encoberto (apesar
are
renthidden
input (though
Bank or their
FX Bank
Return Safe status
switch. Any is unaltered).
Bank Safed channels
do status Bank Safe permanecer inalterado).
are hidden (though their Bank Safe status is unaltered).
If the Group contains fewer than 16 members the channels are
Se right-justified
o Group contém menos
within fewer
que fader
the input
16 membros, os canais
bank, in order
são
to bring
If the Group contains than 16 members
justificados à direita dentro do banco de faders de the channels
entrada, are
de modo
channels as close
right-justified as possible
within to the
thepossível
input center
fader bank,ofinthe console.
order Un-
to Réguas
bring
a mantê-los o mais próximo do centro da console.
used channel
de channels
canal nãoas strips are
close ficam
usadas left
as possibleblank and inactive.
to theecenter
em branco of the console. Un-
inativas.
used channel strips are left blank and inactive.
If the Group contains more than 16 members only the first 16
Se o Group contém mais que 16 membros, apenas os primeiros 16
sãomembers arecontains
Ifmostrados.
the Group shown. more than 16 members only the first 16
members are shown.
90 Guia
90 VENUE Profile
VENUE Guide
Profile
Viewing Group Bus Assignments On-Screen 2 Click the Input Assign pop-up menu at the bottom of the
Visualizando Atribuições do Bus Group na Tela 2 2Click
Clique noInput
menu pop-up Input Assign na parte inferior da Members
Viewing
Viewing
Group
Group
BusBus
Assignments
Assignments
On-Screen
On-Screen Members
2 Click
the list,
the choose
Input
Assign pop-up
pop-up
menu
Replace
Assign menu
With at
Mixthe
at bottom
the
From, then ofchoose
bottom the
of the
the
When a Group bus channel is targeted on-screen, its members Members List, escolha Replace With Mix From, e escolha o Group cujas
Group
Members whose
list, list, assignments
choosechoose
Replace youWith
Replace
With want
Mix MixtoFrom,
From, copy to
thenthen the
choose currently
choose
the the
Quando
When aum
are
When canal
shown
Group deabus
in
a Group
bus listGroup
channel
bus on isétargeted
the
channel selecionado
right side
is targeted ofna tela,
the
on-screen, seus
Outputs
on-screen,
its membros
members
its page. atribuições deseja copiar para o bus atualmente selecionado.
members Group
Stage Rack Features selected
Group
whose bus.
whose
assignments
assignments
you
Additional Required Components you
want want
to copy
to copy
to the
to currently
the currently
são
aremostrados
shown in aem
are shown listuma
in listlista
aon the no lado
on right
the right
sidedireito
side
of thedaOutputs
of página
the Outputs.
Outputspage.page. selected
selected
bus. bus.
Members
DVI supported.
Audio I/O
Members
Members • USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
Pop-up
Pop-up
Pop-up Copiando atribuições de entrada entre GroupsGroups
Copying input assignments
purchased separately: between
System Components Copying

Copying
inputinput
assignments
• USB flash
Resetando
assignments
disk (or
Atribuições
between
deother
between
Groups
Groups
portable USB storage device for
Bus Group
Resetting Group
transfer of Show Bus
data; 512 Assignments
MB or larger recommended)
Resetting
Resetting Group Group
Bus Bus
Assignments
Assignments
Você pode remover atribuições de entrada de um Group na tela.
Included Components • Near-field
You can remove monitor
inputspeakers
assignments for mixfromposition
a Group monitoring
on-screen.
You You
can remove
can remove
• Headphones input input
assignments
with assignments
1/4-inch fromfrom
jack a Group
a Group
on-screen.
on-screen.
All VENUE Profile systems include the following: Para remover uma atribuição de entrada de um bus Group:
To
• remove
Dynamic anorinput assignment
condenser from a Group
microphone bus: mic cable
and XLR
• VENUE Profile console To remove
To remove
(foran
1 Selecione
1 Select
input
the
an input
Talkback)
o bus
assignment
Group
assignment
Group
fromfrom
que want
bus you
a Group
você deseja
a Group
bus: bus:
to changealterar paraitsque
so that seus
mem-
• Two (2) IEC power cables 1 membros
bers
Select aresejam
1• Select
the mostrados
displayed
Group
the Group bus na tela.
on-screen.
you
bus you
want want
to change
to change
so that
so that
its mem-
its mem-
Footswitches (up to 2)
•Currently
Monitor selected
mount output (Group)
for VGA screen (screen not included) bers bers
areMIDI
displayed
are displayed on-screen.
2• In the cables (foron-screen.
connecting external MIDI devices)
Currently
•Currently
Group selected
selected
members
Trackball output
output
shown
mount (Group)
(Group)
in the Outputs
(trackball not page
included) 2 Na lista delist of Group
membros do bus members,
Group, clique com right-click
o botãothe input
direito as- a
sobre
Membros de um
GroupGroup
membersGroup
members mostrados
shown in thena
shown página
inOutputs
the Outputs
Outputs
page page 2•theBNC
Insignment
In
2 atribuiçãolist cables
theque
of you
list (for
want
Group
of Groupconnecting
busto remove
members,
bus members,Word
and clock
choose
right-click
deseja remover e escolha Unassign. between
right-click
the input
the
Unassign. the
input
asas-
• VENUE Mouse Pad signment VENUE
signment you you system
want want and
to remove external
to remove
and and digital
choose devices)
choose
Unassign.
Unassign.
Copying Assignments Between Groups
• VENUE
Copiando Profile
Atribuições Guide
Entre Groups Para• remover
To todas
25-pin D-Sub
remove all as
input atribuições
cables defrom
entrada
(for connecting
assignments deGPI
to
a Group um bus Group:
devices)
bus:
Copying
Copying Assignments
Assignments Between
Between
Groups
Groups
You can(2)
• Two copy the current
console lights input assignments from one Group To remove
To removeall input
all input
assignments
assignments fromfroma Group
a Group
bus: bus:
1 Select the Group bus you want to change so that its mem-
Você
Youpode
bus
You
can tocopiar
another.
copy
can ascurrent
copy
the atribuições
theIf current
the atuais
Groups
inputinputarede um bus
stereo,
assignments Group
onepara
assignments
assignments
from from oneoutro.
can
Group be
Group 1 Selecione o bus Group que deseja alterar para que seus membros
• Protective Dust Cover bers
Select
1 sejam are Group
1 Select
the displayed
the Group on-screen.
bustela.
you
bus you
wantwantto change
to change
so that
so that
its mem-
its mem-
Se o Groups
copied
bus to é estéreo,
fromIfother
busanother.
to another. the as atribuições
linked
If Groups
the podem
busses.
Groups
are are This
stereo, ser copiadas
letsassignments
stereo, de
you quickly
assignments outros
can bedupli-
can be mostrados na
bussescate
copied
• associados.
Rack(s) (seeIsso
copiedmonitor
from from
next)
mixes.
otherother permite
linkedlinked duplicar
busses.
busses. rapidamente
ThisThis
lets you
lets you mixagens
quickly
quickly
dupli- de
dupli- VENUE
bers bers
are displayed Profile
are displayed on-screen.Expansion
on-screen. Options
2 Click the pop-up menu at the bottom of the Members list
monitor. 2 Clique no menu pop-up na parte inferior da Members List e escolha
cate cate
monitor
monitor
mixes.
mixes. and
2 Click
2 Click
The choose
the pop-up
the pop-up
following Resetmenu
options menu
Mix. at be
can the
atadded
bottom
the bottom of the
to VENUE of Members
the Members
Profile list list
systems.
Racks,Copying
SoftwareGroupCDs, iLoks, andoverwrites
bus assignments Cablesall the assign- Reset Mix.
Copiar atribuições de Group sobrescreve todas as atribuições and and
choose choose
Reset Reset
Mix. Mix.
ments
Copying
Copying onGroup
Group the
busdestination Group
assignments
bus assignments bus.
overwrites
overwrites
all the
allassign-
the assign-
Each doMix
busRack
Group orde
FOHdestino.
Rack includes: website (www.avid.com).
ments ments
on theondestination
the destination
Group
Group
bus. bus.
To• copy
System Restore
input CD
assignments between Group busses:
Para copiar atribuições de entrada entre busses Group:
To copy
To copy
inputinput
assignments
assignments
between
between
Group Group
busses:
busses: Mix Rack Options
1• Target
ECx Ethernet
the Group Control Software
bus that you want Installer CD destination of
to be the
1• Target
11Selecione
the
Target Standalone
theo Group
copiedthe Software
busassignments
Group
Group
bus that
bus Installer
que that
você
by
you CD
deseja
selecting
want
you want que
its
to be seja
theodestination
on-screen
tothe
be destino
channel
destination ofdasof
Click
atribuições
strip.
the copied
the copiadas
copied selecionando
assignments
assignmentsby sua
selecting
by régua
selecting
its de canal
on-screen
its on-screen
• iLok USB Smart Key (for storing plug-in authorizations) na tela.
channel
channel I/O Options
Click Click
strip.strip. Removing input assignments from a Group bus
• Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok Analog Mic/Line Input
AI16
Removing
Removing
inputinput
assignments
assignments aCard
from from
Groupthat
bus provides
a Group bus 16 analog
• Two (2) IEC power cables Removendo
mic/line atribuições de entrada de um bus Group
level inputs


Chapter
tional 8 channels of analog I/O and 8 channels 9: Groups 91
of AES/EBU
Chapter
9: Groups 91 91
9: Groups
Routing Signals to a Stereo Group Bus
Group Bus Signal Flow Options Endereçando Sinais para um Bus Group Estéreo
Configuration
Opções de Fluxo de Sinal do Bus Group
Quandoconfigured
When configurados para busses,
as stereo busses the
estéreo,
eight os oito Groups
Groups podem
can be fed
Routing Signals to a Mono Group Bus ser8 alimentados por oito busses estéreo
Endereçando Sinais para um Bus Group Mono as true stereo busses or (in Expert mode (apenas nodual
only) as 8 modo Expert)
mono
Configuration ou oito busses Dual Mono.
busses.
Quando
Whenconfigurados
configured ascomo
mono busses
busses,mono, os oito
the eight Groups
Groups podem
can be fed
seras
alimentados como oito busses mono dessassociados ou quatro Busses Stereo
8 unlinked mono busses or up to 4 linked odd/even bus Stereo Busses
pares ímpar/par associados.
pairs. Para utilizar busses Group estéreo:
To use stereo Group busses:
Desassociando Busses Mono
Unlinked Mono Busses Certifique-se
1 Make
1 sure thedeGroup
que os busses
busses are Group estãoasconfigurados
configured como
stereo busses.
Para usar busses Group mono desassociados: busses estéreo. Veja “Configurando Busses Aux, Group e Variable
See “Configuring Aux, Group, and Variable Group Busses” on
To use unlinked mono Group busses: Group Busses” na página 80.
page 80.
1 Certifique-se de que os busses Group estão configurados como
1 Make sure the Group busses are configured as mono busses. 2 Quando endereçando canais para qualquer
mono. Veja “Configurando Busses Aux, Group e Variable Group 2 When routing channels to any of the Groupdos busses
busses, Group,
make
See
Busses”“Configuring Aux, Group, and Variable Group Busses” on
na página 80. certifique-se de Pan
que switch
o switchestá aceso em amarelo.
sure the Stereo is lit yellow.
page 80.
2 Enquanto endereça canais para os busses Group, certifique-se de Quando
When trabalhando
working com
with stereo Gropus
Groups inestéreo no modo
Simple Mode, theSimple,
Ste- o
2 While routing channels to Group busses, make sure the Ste-
que o switch Stereo Pan esteja desligado.
reo Pan switch is off. reo Pan switch is always lit to indicate all Groups operate intodos
switch Stereo Pan está sempre aceso para indicar que
os Groups operam em estéreo.
true stereo.
Os The
switches
GroupGroup na seção
switches in theBus
ACSAssigns do ACS
Bus Assigns se acendem
section em
light green
verde para indicar operação mono. Nessa configuração, os sinais de Busses Dual Mono
to indicate mono operation. In this configuration, input sig- Dual Mono Busses
entrada são manueados da seguinte maneira:
nals are handled as follows: Busses Dualbusses
mono may
podem serbeutilizados apenasMode.
no modo
Dual mono only used in Expert See Expert.
Mono Input Signals Sinais mono são somados para contribuir com Veja “Modos de Operação Simple e Expert” na página 93.
Mono Input Signals Contributing mono signals are summed to “Simple and Expert Operational Modes” on page 93.
o bus Group mono. Qualquer informação de posicionamento (pan)
the mono Group bus. Any pan information from mono input
dos canais de entrada mono que alimentam o bus é ignorada.
channels feeding the bus is ignored.
Stereo Input Signals Sinais estéreo são somados para contribuir
Stereo Input Signals Contributing stereo signals are summed
Adjusting Group Bus
Ajustando Controles Output
de Saída Controls
do Bus Group
com o bus Group mono mas sem atenuação. As informações de
to theemono
balance width Group bus
do canal dewith no attenuation.
entrada The balance and
estéreo são ignoradas. Níveis de Saída do Bus Group
width information from each stereo input channel is ignored. Group Bus Output Levels
Associando Pares de Bus Ímpar/Par Os níveis do bus Group são ajustados da mesma forma que os outros
Group bus levels are adjusted just like other Output busses
Linked Odd/Even Bus Pairs busses Output (atribua aos Groups, ajuste os faders). Para mais
Para usar pares de bus Group mono associados: (bank to Groups, adjust the fader). For more information, see
informações, veja “Ajustando Controles de Saída” na página 83.
“Adjusting Output Controls” on page 83.
To use linked mono Group bus pairs:
1 Certifique-se de que os busses Group estão configurados como Posicionamento (Pan) de Saída dos Bus Group
1 Make
busses sureVeja
mono. the Group busses are
“Configurando configured
Busses as mono
Aux, Group e busses.
Variable
Group
See Busses” na página
“Configuring Aux,80.
Group, and Variable Group Busses” on
Group Bus Output Pan
O posicionamento (pan) de saída do bus Group é controlado pelos
page 80. codificadores
Group Output.
bus output pan is controlled from the Output encoders.
2 Enquanto endereça canais para os busses Group, pressione o
2 While
switch Stereorouting channels
Pan para que se to Group
acenda embusses, press the Stereo
amarelo. Atribuição Groups-to-Mains
Groups-to-Mains assignmenté mostrada peloby
is displayed LED
theindicador
indicatorde cada
Pan switch so that it lights yellow. codificador
LED for eachOutput,
Output quando
encoder,Groups está associado
when Groups are bankedaos faders
to the
Os switches Group na seção Bus Assigns do ACS e os LEDs Stereo Output. O switch Pan do codificador Output alterna os
Output faders. The Output encoder Pan switch cycles the en-codificadores
PanThe
LEDGroup switches in
no indicador theAssign
Bus ACS BusdosAssigns
canaissection and theem
se acendem e LCDs and
coders paraLCD
parâmetros
to pan, pan, balance
balance and e width.parameters.
width
Stereo para
amarelo Pan LED in the
indicar channel’s
operação Bus Assign
estéreo. indicator
Nessa light yel-
configuração, os
lowde
sinais toentrada
indicatesão
stereo operation.
manueados da In this configuration,
seguinte maneira: input Os controles
The de pan
pan controls ajustam
adjust pan in
pan (when (quando na configuração
mono Groups configu- de
signals are handled as follows: Groups mono) ou balance e width estéreo (quando na configuração
ration) or stereo balance and width (when in stereo Groups
Mono Input Signals Sinais mono são posicionados nos pares ímpar/ de Groups estéreo) da saída Group para os busses Main apenas. As
configuration) of the Group output to the Main busses only.
parMono
de busInput
GroupSignals Contributing
associados. monodesignals
Informações are panned
posicionamento (pan) saídas Group no Patchbay são canais esquerdo e direito distintos.
The Group outputs in the Patchbay are distinct left and right
de across
cada canal de entrada
the linked determina
odd/even Groupsua posição
bus no par
pair. Pan de bus.
information
channels.
Para controlar o pan de saídas de Group mono:
from each mono input channel determines its pan position in
Stereo Input
the bus Signals Sinais estéreo são posicionados nos pares
pair.
ímpar/par de bus Group associados. Informações de balance e width To control os
1 Associe mono Group
faders output
Output pan:
para Groups.
de Stereo
cada canal
Input de entrada
Signals estéreo determinam
Contributing suaarecontribuição
stereo signals panned
1 Bank the Output faders to Groups.
para os lados
across ímpar eodd/even
the linked par do bus.
Group bus pair. Balance and width 2 Pressione o switch Pan na seção de codificadores Output uma vez
information from each stereo input channel determines its para
2 atribuir
Press o controle
the Pan switch do panOutput
in the do Group aos codificadores
encoder section onceOutput.
to
contribution to the odd and even sides of the bus pair. assign control of Group pan to the Output encoders.
3 Gire um codificador rotativo para ajustar o pan do Group mono
Turn a rotary encoder to adjust the pan for the correspond-
correspondente.
3
ing mono Group.

Para controlar balance e width de um Group estéreo: 2 Selecione um Input Channel ou FX Return cujo sinal deseja enviar
To control stereo Group output balance and width: Topara um link
set the busstatus
Group.ofPara selecionar
individual mono vários canais, on
Group busses use
a o switch
1 Pressione o switch Pan na seção de codificadores Output. Multi-Select
channel próximo
(Expert Mode dos fader de entrada.
only):
Press theRack
1 Stage Pan switch in the Output encoder section.
Features Additional Required Components
1 Make sure Stereo Group Panning is set to Expert Mode.
2 2Gire
Turnum codificador
aRacks
rotary rotativo
encoder parathe
to adjust ajustar o balance
balance do Group 3 Na seção Bus Assigns, pressione o switch Stereo Pan. O switch
Stage are used with an FOH Rack, andfor the corre-
provide all stage The following components must be purchased separately:
estéreo correspondente.
sponding stereo Group. 2 pisca
Selectem
an amarelo para indicar
input channel or FX oreturn
modowhose
de associação dowant
signal you bus.
to •send
Video
to aDisplay
Group (15-inch or greater
bus. To select flat-panel
multiple VGAuse
channels, display
the
can
Pressbethe
3 3Pressioneused simultaneously,
oGroup
switchPan
Panswitch supporting
in
na seção the upEncoder
deOutput to 96 total
codificadores inputs.
assign-
Output uma 4 Pressione qualquer umtodos switches Group switches VGA
para associar
recommended;
Multi-Select switch 1024x768
next the minimum resolution).
input faders. and
vez mais
ment para an
section atribuir controle
additional width
time do Group
to assign selecionado
Group width con-aos ou DVI
desassociar os pares de bus (1–2, 3–4, 5–6 ou 7–8). O switch
supported.
Audio
trol I/O
codificadores
to the Output.encoders.
Output 3 Group
In thepisca em amarelo
Bus Assigns para
section, indicar
press the associação estéreo,The
Stereo Pan switch. ou pisca
•
em USB keyboard
verde para and
indicar trackball/mouse
mono. (Windows
switch flashes yellow to indicate bus link mode. compatible)
Turn
4 4Gire uma rotary encoder
codificador to adjust
rotativo para the width
ajustar for the corre-
o balance e width do
individually selectable phantom power. Press any
4 5Digital ofo the Group switches to link or unlink the o
bus
sponding stereo Group.
Group estéreo correspondente. Snake
Pressione Cable
switch (VENUE
Stereo PanProfile Systems
piscante para Only)
confirmar status de
• 8 analog output channels; expandable up to 48 analog or pairs (1–2, 3–4,
associação de 5–6,
bus or 7–8).
para os The Group
canais switch pairs flash yel-
selecionados.
digital outputs per Stage Rack. low to indicate stereo linked, or flash green to indicate mono.
Simple Trabalhando com Busses Group Estéreo
De and Expert Operational Modes from
5 Press theAvid or assembled
flashing Stereo byswitch
Pan your preferred vendor.
to confirm the bus link
Synchronization
Modos and Control
Operação Simple I/Oe Expert
status for the selected channels.
When• configuring
Snake connectors
Group to enable
busses, primary
you and redundant
can choose between two (if Quando configurados como busses stereo, Groups podem operar
Quando configurando
applicable) busses Group,
connection to avocê pode
VENUE escolher
FOH Rack. entre dois
operational modes that provide different levels of flexibility: Optional
nos seguintesComponents
modos:
modos de operação que oferecem diferentes níveis de flexibilidade: Working with Stereo Group Busses
Simple mode and Expert mode. The following components are optional, and must be
Simple e Expert. Simple Mode No modo Simple, todos os oito busses Group
purchased
funcionam
When separately:
como
configured busses
as stereoestéreo.
busses, Groups can operate in the
System
Ajustando
Setting theComponents
o Modo de Operação
Operational Mode following
• USBmodes:
flash disk (or other portable USB storage device for
Mode No
Experttransfer of modo Expert,
Show data; qualquer
512 um dos
MB or larger oito busses Group
recommended)
Para alternar entre os modos Simple e Expert: Simple Mode
estéreo podeInser
Simple Mode,
ajustado all 8
para Group
atuar comobusses
bus function
estéreo ou como
To switch between Simple mode and Expert mode: • Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
Included Components busas
only mono
trueduplo,
stereobaseado
busses. em canais.
Put theo system
1 1Coloque sistemainnoConfig mode.
modo Config. • Headphones with 1/4-inch jack
All VENUE Profile systems include the following: In
Expert Mode
Para• ajustar
Dynamic o Expert
status Mode,
de any of the
associação
or condenser de 8busses
microphone stereo Group
and Group
XLR micbusses
estéreo
cablepara
2 Go• toVENUE
the Options
Profilepage and click the Busses tab.
console
2 Vá à página Options e clique a aba Busses. umbecanal
can set (modo
(forto act asExpert apenas):
true stereo
Talkback) or as dual mono busses, on a per
• Two
3 Under (2) IEC
Stereo power
Group cables
Panning Operation, select the mode you channel basis.
Em Stereo
3 want useGroup Panning Operation, selecione o modo que deseja 1 Certifique-se de que o Stereo Group Panning está ajustado para
•toMonitor
(Simple or Expert).
mount for VGA screen (screen not included)
usar (Simple ou Expert). • MIDI cables (for connecting external MIDI devices)
• Trackball mount (trackball not included) ToExpert Mode.
set the link status of individual stereo Group busses for a
• BNC
channel cables
(Expert (foronly):
Mode connecting Word clock between the
• VENUE Mouse Pad 2 Selecione
VENUE um Input
system andChannel
externaloudigital
FX Return cujo sinal deseja
devices)
Make surepara
1 endereçar Stereo
umGroup Panning
bus Group. Paraisselecionar
set to Expert Mode.
vários canais, use o
switch Multi-Select próximo aos faders de entrada.
• Two (2) console lights 2 Select an input channel or FX return whose signal you want
• Protective Dust Cover to3route to a Group

Na seção bus. To
Bus Assigns doselect
ACS, multiple
pressionechannels, use thePan. O
o switch Stereo
Multi-Select switch next to the input faders.
switch pisca em amarelo para indicar o modo de associação de
Setting othe
Ajustando Group
modo bus operational
de operação mode
do bus Group VENUE Profile Expansion Options
bus.
3 In the ACS Bus Assigns section, press the Stereo Pan switch.
The following options
yellowcan
to be added bus
to VENUE Profile systems.
Racks, Software
Trabalhando
Working como CDs,
withbusses
Mono iLoks,
Group and Cables
mono Busses
Group The switch
Pressione
4For
flashes
qualquer
indicate
um systems
dos switches
link mode.
Group (1–8) paraAvid
ajustar
details on all VENUE and options, visit the
Eachconfigured
Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes: 4 oPress
bus any
correspondetne
of the Group
para estéreo
switches ou to
(1–8) dual
setmono.
the O switch Group
correspond-
Quando
When configurados
ascomo
monobusses mono,
busses, os Groups
Groups podem
can operate in operar
the pisca
• System Restore CD ing bus em amarelo
to stereo paramono.
or dual indicarThe
estéreo
Group ouswitches
em verde para
flash indicar
yel-
nos seguintes
following modos:
modes: dual mono.
low to indicate stereo, or flash green to indicate dual mono.
Simple Mode Pressione
5 5Press o switchStereo
the flashing Stereo Panswitch
Pan piscante para confirmar
to confirm the busolink
status de
Simple Mode Software Installer CD
• Standalone
associação
status thedo bus para os canais selecionados.
No • iLok USB todos
Smart KeyGroups
(for storingmono
plug-in
ou authorizations) I/Ofor
Optionsselected channels.
In modo
SimpleSimple,
mode, eitheros all Groupssãoon a channel todos os grupos
are mono, or
atuam •como pares
Plug-in de bus.
installer discs (if any)
all Groups on a channel act as bus pairs. with pre-authorized iLok Para utilizar busses Group dual Card
(modothat
Expert apenas):
ToAI16 Analog
use dual monoMic/Line Input
Group busses (Expert provides
Mode only):16 analog
Expert Mode Certifique-se
1 1Make de quebusses
sure the Group os busses Group estão
are configured confgurados
as stereo busses. para
Expert Mode
busses
SeeAO16 estéreo.
“Configuring
Analog Veja Group,
Aux,
Output “Configurando Busses
andprovides
Card that Variable Aux,
Group
16 Groupe
Busses”
analog Variable
on
line level
No modo Expert, qualquer dos 4 pares de bus pode ser associado em Group” na página 80.
In Each
Expert mode,
Stage any
Rack of the 4 bus pairs can be stereo linked in-
includes: page 80.
outputs
estéreo enquanto outros busses são deixados em mono, baseados
dividually
• Two (2) IEC powerthe
em canais. while leaving other busses as mono, on a per
cables Make
2 2XO16 sure theand
Certifique-se
Analog link
de questatus of the
o status
Digital Group busses
de associação
Output Card that dosyou want
busses
provides to que
Group
8 analog
channel basis.
deseja
use is setutilizar
to dualestão
mono.ajustados para dual mono.
Para ajustar o status de associação de busses Group mono
individuais em um canal (modo Expert apenas): When
AT16routing
Quando A-Net channels
endereçando
Output to athat
dual
canais
Card mono
para umGroup
provides bus bus, the
Group
16 channels Stereo
dual
of mono, o
A-Net
switch
Panoutput compatible with Aviom® Personal Mixers andacende
Stereo
switch will Pan
be ficará
off and desligado
the Group e o switch
switch Group
will light se
green to em
other
1 Certifique-se de que o Stereo Group Panning está ajustado para verde
indicatepara indicar
dual mono modo de operação
operation. dual mono.
Expert Mode.
digital I/O. Chapter 9: Groups 93
Chapter
Capítulo 10: 10: Aux Sends
Aux Sends andGroups
e Variable Variable Groups
This
Estecan bechapter
capítulo explains
explica
used the following
as seguintes
simultaneously, Aux
operações
supporting upSends
Aux 96operations:
Sends:
to total inputs. ClickEdit.
3 3Clique Edit.
• Configuring Aux Send busses
DVI supported.
• Configurar
Audio I/Obusses
• Routing toAux
AuxSend
Sends
• Endereçar para Aux Sends • USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
•• 48 inputs with
Adjusting Auxremotely controllable mic preamps and
Send parameters
• Ajustar os parâmetros de Aux Send
individually
• Managing
• Gerenciar selectable
Auxes Auxes phantom power.
• 8 analog output channels; expandable up to 48 analog or Bus Pair
• TheLinks
connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
Configurando busses
Configuring AuxAuxand
e Variable Group
Variable Group from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Busses
Até 16• busses Aux estão todisponíveis. O número de busses (if
Aux
Snake connectors enable primary and redundant
disponíveis
Up to é ajustado
applicable)
16 como parte
connection
Aux busses are todaa configuração
available.VENUE FOHAux/Group.
The number Rack. (Veja
of available Optional Components
Linking bus pairs in the Options > Busses page
“Configurando
Aux bussesBusses Aux,
is set as Group
part e Variable
of the overall Group” na página
Aux/Group 80.)
bus config- Associando pares de bus na página Options > Busses
The following
4 Click components
the checkboxes are optional,
above any of theand
busmust
pairsbe
to link or
uration. (See “Configuring Aux, Group, and Variable Group purchased separately:
Quando o sistema está ajustado para o modo Variable Groups, os Clique as
4 unlink checkboxes
each pair. acima de qualquer par de bus para associar
Busses” on page 80.)
System
8 busses Group Components
são substituídos pou busses Variable Group, que • USB flash cada
ou desassociar disk (or
par.other portable USB storage device for
operam da mesma maneira 5 Click Apply.
When the system is set que os busses
to Variable Aux. mode,
Groups Quandothe
ajustados
8 Group transfer of Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
para o modo Variable Groups (Var Groups), os 16 busses Aux e 8 5 Clique Apply. monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
busses
Includedare replaced by
Components Variable Group busses, which operate in • Near-field
When busses are linked, signals are handled as follows:
busses Variable Group oferecem até 24 busses.
much the same way as Aux busses. When set to Variable • Headphones with 1/4-inch jack
All VENUE Profile Quando busses
Mono Input são
Signals associados,
Contributing os sinais
mono são manuseados
signals are panned da
AuxesGroups
podemmode (Varsystems
ser mono
include
Groups), the 16the
ou associados em
following:
Aux and 8estéreo.
pares VariableBusses
Group • Dynamic or condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
seguinte forma:
• VENUE
busses Profile
provide up console
to 24 busses. across the linked odd/even bus pair.
Auxes e Variable Group podem ser alimentados por Input Channels (for Talkback)
e FX Returns, e podem
• Two (2) ser atribuídos
IEC power cables para saídas de hardware no Mono • Input
WhenSignals
the Follows
SinaisChannel
mono são option is off,
Pandistribuídos panning
(pan) of
pelos pares
AuxesControles
can be mono, or linked to form stereo pairs. de
Auxes • Footswitches (up to 2)
Patchbay. de nível
• Monitor mount Aux Send
for VGA screenoferecem
(screen ganho –INFand
not included) a the mono signal to
de bus ímpar/par associados . the bus pair is controlled by the Aux
Variable
+12 dB. Group
• Trackball
busses can be fed by input channels and FX re- • • Quando
MIDI cables (for
a opção
Pan control (theconnecting external
Follows Channel
even-numbered MIDI
Pan
send). devices)
está desligada, o
turns, and canmount (trackball
be assigned not included)
to hardware outputs in the Patch- ••posicionamento
BNC
When the Follows Channel Pan option is on, the the
cables (for connecting
dos sinais Word
mono clock
para between
os pares de bus
pan in- é
•
bay.VENUE
Aux Mouse
Send Pad
Associando Busses Aux e Variable Group range
level controls provide a gain para ofoperação
–INF to controlado
VENUE pelo
system controle
and Aux
externalPan control
digital (as mandadas
devices) pares).
formation from each mono input channel determines its
estéreo
+12 dB.
• VENUE Profile Guide • • Quando
25-pin aD-Sub
opçãocables
pan position
Follows Channel
in the (for
Pan está
bus connecting
pair.
ligada,
to GPI a informação
devices)
de posicionamento de cada canal de entrada mono determina
Quando trabalhando com busses Aux/Var Group, você pode associar seu posicionamento no par de bus.
Stereo Input Signals Contributing stereo signals are panned
Linking
• ímpar/par
busses Aux
Protective and
Dust
em eVariable
Cover
pares Group
posicionar (pan) Busses
os sinais for
de entrada
across the linked odd/even bus pair. Stereo width information
Stereo
nesses
• pares deOperation
Rack(s) bus. next)
(see VENUE
Stereo InputProfile Expansion
Signals Sinais Options
estéreo são posicionaods (pan) pelos
from the input channel is applied to the bus signal.
pares de bus ímpar/par associados. A informação width do canal de
When working
Para associar pares dewith Aux/Var
busses Aux ouGroup busses, you can link
Var Group: The•following
entrada When the
estéreo é Follows
aplicada
options canChannel
ao dotooption
Pan
be sinal
added bus.
VENUE is Profile
off, balance of
systems.
odd/even bus pairs and pan input signals into those bus pairs. • For details
Quando a opção
the stereo Follows
signal to theChannel
bus Pan
pair is está desligada,
controlled
on all VENUE systems and options, visit the Avidby o
thebalance
Aux
1 Coloque o sistema
Each Mix Rack ornoFOH
modo Config.
Rack includes: doPan
website sinal estéreo para o par de bus é controlado pelo controle
control.
(www.avid.com).
To link Aux or Var Group bus pairs: Aux Pan.
• When the Follows Channel Pan option is on, the balance
2 Vá à página Options e clique na aba Busses.
1 •Put theEthernet
system into Config mode.Installer CD
• Quando a opção Follows Channel Pan está ligada, o balance
from each stereo input channel determines its contribu-
ECx Control Software MixdeRack Options
cada entrada de canal estéreo determina sua contribuição
tion to the odd and even sides of the bus pair.
2 •Go
Standalone Software
to the Options pageInstaller CDthe Busses tab.
and click para os lados esquerdo e direito do par de bus.

Pro16™ Series devices.Chapter 10: Aux Sends and Variable Groups 95

digital I/O.
Capítulo 10: Aux Sends e Variable Groups 95
Selecionando Pontos de Alimentação Aux Send e Variable Classificando Auxes para Snapshots
Selecting Aux Send and Variable Group
Group Classifying Auxes for Snapshots
Selecting
Selecting
Pickoff Points Aux
Aux SendSend andand Variable
Variable Group
Group Classifying
Classifying Auxes
Auxes for
for Snapshots
Snapshots
Você pode classificar mandadas Aux Sends e Variable Group como
You can classify Aux Sends and Variable Group sends as mon-
Pickoff
Pickoff
Você Points
Points
pode especificar o ponto de alimentação (pickoff point) em Input mandadas de monitor (“Mon”) ouVariable
mandadas de efeitos (“FX”) para
You can specify the pickoff point on input channels and FX You
You can classify
can
itor sendsclassify
(“Mon”) Aux Sends
or as
Aux Sends and
and
effects Variable
sends Group
(“FX”)Group
for thesends as mon-
purposes
sends as of
mon-
Channels
You cane FX Returns para
specify mandadas Aux e Var Group. Os pontos fins
itor de organização
(“Mon”)
sendsand e armazenamento
oreach
as effects
effects de
(“FX”)
sends (“FX”)cada
for tipo separadamente
the purposes
purposes of
returns
You specify the
canchannels for pickoff
the Aux and
pickoff point on
on input
Var Group
point channels
sends.
input Pickoff
channels and FX
points
and FX scoping
itor sends safingor
(“Mon”) as type separately
sends in for
snapshots.
the See of
de returns
alimentação são
channels
ajustados
for Aux and
para
Var
cada
Group
bus independentemente.
sends. Pickoff points
em cenas.
scoping andVeja “Classificando
safing each type
type Aux Sends”in
separately nasnapshots.
página 200.See
are set
Se returns for
os busses each
channelsbus independently.
for Aux andoVar
estão associados, pontoIf
Group any busses
sends. Pickoff
de alimentação are linked,
points
é ajustado “Classifying
scoping and Aux Sends”
safing each on page 200. in
separately snapshots. See
are
the
are set for each
each bus independently. If bus
anypair.
busses are
are linked,
linked, “Classifying Aux
“Classifying Aux Sends”
Sends” onon page
page 200.
200.
para pickoff
o set
par for point
de bus. is set
bus for the linked
independently. If any busses
the pickoff
the pickoff point
point is
is set
set for
for the
the linked
linked bus
bus pair.
pair.
Each
Cada channel
canal pode can
ser be sent to
enviado anou
pré Aux or Var Group
pós-fader either
para um Auxpre- or
ou Var
Each channel
post-fader.
Each can be sent to an Aux or Var Group either pre-
pre- or
Endereçando
Routing Inputstopara
Inputs Aux Aux Busses
Busses
Group. OchannelPre-fade
pré-fadecan beoffers
oferecesent several
to
váriasan Auxchoices
opções orde
Var of pickoff.
Group
pontos deeither or
alimentação. Routing Inputs to Aux Busses
post-fader.
post-fader. Pre-fade
Pre-fade offers
offers several
several choices
choices of
of pickoff.
pickoff. Routing Inputs to Aux Busses
Pre-EQ Post-HPF and pre-EQ, Dynamics and Channel Inserts, Vocêcan
You pode enviar
send sinais
signals deany
from qualquer Input Channel
input channel or FX ou FX Return
return to
Pré-EQ Após HPF e antes de EQ, Dynamics e Channel Inserts, pré- You
any
You can
paranumber
can send
sendofsignals
qualquer número
Aux Send
signals from
deor
from any
busses input
Variable
any input channel
AuxGroup
Send ou
channel or
or FX return
Variable
busses
FXwith to
Group
tocom
the in-
return
Pre-EQ Post-HPF
pre-Mute, and pre-EQ,
and pre-Fader.
Post-HPF Dynamics and Channel isInserts,
Pre-EQ
Mute e pré-Fader. A and
mandada The
pre-EQ, Aux or Var
AuxDynamics
ou Var Group
and
Group não send
Channel notpelo
é afetada af-
Inserts,
any
os number of
codificadoresAuxde Send or
entrada,Variable
pelo Group
ACS, pelabusses
seção with the
Output in-
ou na
pre-Mute,
fected by the
pre-Mute, and pre-Fader.
andchannel
pre-Fader. The
The Aux or Var Group send is
mute. Aux or Var Group send is not
not af-
af- put encoders,
any number offrom the ACS,
Aux Send from the
or Variable Output
Group section,
busses with or
the in-
Mute de canal. tela.
put encoders, from the ACS, from the Output section, or
fected
fected by
by the
the channel
channel mute.
mute. on-screen.
put encoders, from the ACS, from the Output section, or
Pre-Mute Post-HPF, post-EQ, Dynamics, and Channel Inserts, on-screen.
on-screen.
Pré-Mute Após HPF, Após EQ, Dynamics e Channel Inserts, pré-Mute Para endereçar canais para mandadas Aux ou Var Group utilizando
Pre-Mute Post-HPF,
Pre-Mute Post-HPF,
pre-Mute, and post-EQ,
pre-Fader. The
post-EQ, Dynamics,
Aux or
Dynamics, Var and Channel
Group
and send
Channel isInserts,
not af-
Inserts, To route channels to Aux or Var Group sends using the input
e pré-Fader. A mandada Aux ou Var Group não é afetada pelo Mute os codificadores de entrada:
pre-Mute,
fected
de canal. by
pre-Mute, and
the
and pre-Fader.
channel
pre-Fader. The
mute.
The Aux
Aux or
or Var
Var Group
Group send
send is
is not
not af-
af- To
To route
route channels
encoders: channels toto Aux
Aux or
or Var
Var Group
Group sends
sends using
using the
the input
input
fected by
fected by the
the channel
channel mute.
mute. encoders:
encoders:
1 Para acessar os Aux Sends pelos codificadores dos
1 To access Aux Sends on the input channel encoders, press Input Channel,
an
Pre-Fader
Pré-Fader Após Post-HPF,
HPF, apóspost-EQ Dynamics,
EQ Dynamics and Channel
e Channel Inserts,
Inserts, pós-Mute 1 To access
pressione
Encoder Aux
um
assign
1 To access Sends
switch
Aux Send deon
Sendsswitchthe input
atribuição
on the1–2 channel
de encoders,
encoders, press an
codificador
through
input channel15–16. Send press
1–2 a 15–
an
Pre-Fader
post-Mute,
Pre-Fader
e pré-Fader. APost-HPF,
and pre-Fader.
Post-HPF,
mandada post-EQ
post-EQ
Aux ou Dynamics,
The
VarAux
Dynamics,
Group éand
or Var Channel
Group
and
afetada sendInserts,
Channel
pelo is af- de
Inserts,
Mute 16.
Encoder assign Send switch 1–2 through 15–16.
post-Mute,
canal.
fected by the
post-Mute, and
and pre-Fader.
channel The
The Aux
mute.
pre-Fader. Aux oror Var
Var Group
Group send
send isis af-
af- Encoder
– or – assign Send switch 1–2 through 15–16.
– ou –
fected by the channel mute. –
– or –
fected by the channel mute. •• Toor – acessar
Para
access os Variable
Variable Groups,Groups, pressione
press the o switch
Var Groups Var in
switch Groups
Para
Toajustar
set the o ponto
Pre depoint
pickoff alimentação
for an Auxpara
or uma mandada
Variable Aux ou
Group send: • To na seção
access Bus
Variable Assigns
Groups, do ACS.
press Isso
the apresenta
Var Groups as mandadas
switch in
• the ACS Bus
To access Assigns
Variable section.
Groups, Thisthe
press displays Variable
Var Groups Group
switch in
Variable
To setGroup:
the Pre pickoff point for an Aux or Variable Group
To set the Pre pickoff point for an Aux or Variable Group send: send: Variable Group nosencoders
codificadores de entradas eSend
e nos controles
the ACS
Sends
the ACSonBus
the
Bus Assigns
input
Assigns section.
section. This displays
and the
This Variable
ACS Aux
displays Variable Group
con-
Group
Aux on
Sends Send
thedoinput
ACS. encoders and the ACS Aux Send con-
1 àGo
1
1 Vá Go to
to the
páginathe Options
Options
Options page
page and
e clique and click
click
na aba the
Busses.Busses tab.
the Busses tab. trols. on the input encoders and the ACS Aux Send con-
Sends
trols.
trols.
Pickoff
point
Pickoff
Pickoff
options
point
point
options
options
Encoders
Setting Aux bus pickoff points Encoders
Encoders
Setting
Ajustando Aux
Aux bus
Settingo ponto pickoff
pickoff points
de alimentação
bus do bus Aux
points
2 Select a Pre pickoff point for any of the busses or linked bus
2 Select a Pre pickoff point for any of the busses or linked bus
pairs by aclicking
2 Select the
Preponto
pickoff point for anyparaor
of the orbutton.
bussesum linked bus Aux
2 Selecione um de Pre-EQ, Pre-Mute,
alimentação Pre-Fader
qualquer dos busses
Sends
ou pairs
par deby
pairs clicking
bybusses
clicking the
the Pre-EQ,
associados clicando
Pre-EQ, nosor
Pre-Mute,
Pre-Mute, or Pre-Fader
botões
Pre-Fader button.
button.
Pré-EQ, Pré-Mute Aux
Aux
Sends
Sends
Pré-Fader.
ou To activate a Pre pickoff point for an Aux or Variable Group send:
To
To activate
activate a
a Pre
Pre pickoff
pickoff point
point for
for an
an Aux
Aux or
or Variable
Variable Group
Group send:
send:
1 Go to the Inputs page and target the channel with the pick-
Para ativar o ponto de alimentação para uma mandada Aux ou
offGo
1
1 to
to the
point
Go
Variable youInputs
the
Group: want page
Inputs and
and target
target the
to activate.
page the channel
channel with
with the
the pick-
pick-
off
off point
point you
you want
want to
to activate.
activate.
2 Do any of the following:
1 Vá à página Inputs efollowing:
selecione o canal com o ponto de alimentação
2 Do
2 Do any
any of
of the
the following:
• To activate Encoder assignment switches for input channels
que deseja ativar. an Aux Send Pre pickoff, click the correspond- Encoder assignment switches for
•
• To
ingactivate
To an
an Aux
Pre button
activate Send
in the
Aux AuxPre
Send Pre pickoff,
pickoff,
Sends click
click the
section. the correspond-
correspond-
Switches de
Encoder atribuição de
assignment switches for input
codificadoresinput channels
para Input Channels
channels
2 For each channel you want to assign to the selected Aux
ing
ing
2 Siga– um Pre
Pre
dos button
button
seguintesin
in the
the Aux
Aux Sends
Sends
procedimentos: section.
section. For each channel you want to
or – 2
Send
Forbus,
2 Para
2 each
cadapress
canalitsque
channel channel
you want
deseja to assign
encoder assign
atribuir so to
that
o bus the selected
its Send,
to Aux
the “On” Aux
indicator
selected Aux seu
pressione
• Para
–
– or
or
ativar
–
–
um ponto de alimentação Aux Send, clique no botão Send bus,
codificador
LED
Send lights. press its
paraitsque
bus, press channel encoder
o LED “On”
channel encoder so that
se acenda. its “On” indicator
so that its “On” indicator
• Pre
To activate a Variable
correspondente naGroup
seção Pre
Aux pickoff,
Sends. click the Var Groups
•
• To activate
button
To in
activate a
the
a Variable
Variable
Bus Group
Group
Assign Pre
section
Pre pickoff,
to click
display
pickoff, Varthe
click Var
Var Groups
Groups,
the then
Groups
• • Alights.
LED
LED primeira
lights.
The vez que
first press o codificador
of an Aux Sendassigns
Aux Send encoder é pressionado atribui
level con-
– ou – aTheelefirst
controle de an
nível das mandadas ímpares. O switch se
• press of Aux Send encoder assigns level con-
• Para
button in
click ativar
button the the Bus
umBus Assign
ponto
incorresponding
the section
dePre
Assign to
alimentação
button.
section display Var
Variable
to display Groups, then
Group, clique
Var Groups, then • trol
The of
acende
the
first
em
odd-numbered
press of an Aux Send
verde para
send.
indicar a
The switch
encoder
seleção ímpar.
lights
assigns green
level con-
click the corresponding Pre button. trol of
of the
the odd-numbered
to indicate
trol an odd-numbered
odd-numbered send.
send. The
The switch
switch lights
selection. lights green
green
no
click the Var
botão Groups na seção
corresponding Bus Assign para visualizar Var
Pre button. • Na segundaanvez que o codificador Aux Send é pressionado
Groups, entrão clique no botão Pre correspondente. to
to indicate
indicate an odd-numbered
odd-numbered selection.
selection.
• atribui
The second press of an Aux Send encoder assigns
a ele controle de nível das mandadas pares. O switch se level
• The
The second
control
• acende of the
second
em press of an
an Aux
even-numbered
press
amarelo ofpara Aux Send
indicar encoder
send.
Send assigns
The switch
encoder
a seleção level
assignslights
par. level
control
control
yellow to of the even-numbered
ofindicate
the even-numbered
an even-numbered send. The
send. The switch lights
switch lights
selection.
3 Para yellow to
to indicate
ajustar
yellow o nívelan
indicate ando even-numbered
Aux Send, siga
even-numbered selection.
um dos seguintes
selection.
3 To set the Aux Send level, do either of the following:
procedimentos:
Activating Pre pickoff for an Aux Send (Inputs page shown) • To
3
3 To set
set the
• Gire
Turn the
othe
Aux
Aux Send
Sendde
codificador
encoder
level,
level,
oncada
each
do either
either of
docanal.
channel. of the
the following:
following:
Activating
Activating
Ativando Pre pickoff
pickoff for
Prealimentação
ponto de an
forpara Aux
an Aux Send
AuxSend (Inputs
Send(página
(Inputs page
page shown)
Inputs) shown)
• •• Pressione
• Turn
Turn the
the encoder
o switch
encoder on
Flip
on each
to
each channel.
Faders,
channel.
Press the Flip to Faders switch, then adjust e ajuste o fader de canal.
the channel
When the Pre button is lit, the selected Pre pickoff point is • Press the Flip to Faders switch, then adjust the channel
When the Pre
Pre button is lit,
lit, the
the selected Pre pickoff
pickoff point is • fader.
Press the Flip to Faders switch, then adjust the channel
used. When
When the the Pre button
button is
Quando o botão Pre está aceso, oisponto
off, the pickoff
selected Pre point point
de alimentação is is
selecionado fader.
fader.
used. When
When the
Post-Fader.
used. the Pre
Pre button
button is is off,
off, the
the pickoff
pickoff point
point is
is
está sendo usado. Quando o botão Pre está apagado, o ponto de
Post-Fader.
Post-Fader.
alimentação é pós-fader.
96
96 Guia
96 VENUE
VENUE
VENUE Profile
Profile
Profile Guide
Guide
Para endereçar canais para busses Aux Sends utilizando o ACS:
Endereçando Aux Busses para Outputs e Plug-
1 Siga um dos seguintes procedimentos:
• Stage Rack Features
Para selecionar um único canal, pressione seu switch Select.
Ins
• Stage
Para selecionar vários canais, pressione Select do primeiro
Busses Aux e Var Group podem
Racks are used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage The following components mustser
be endereçados para saídas de
canal, segure o switch Multi-Select (localizado à esquerda dos
audio hardware outputs e plug-ins alimentados por bus disponíveis.
fadersI/O
defor VENUEeProfile
entrada), systems.
presione Up to two
os switches Stage
Select dosRacks
outros • Video Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display
can be
canais.used simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total inputs.
recommended;
Para 1024x768
endereçar saídas Aux ouminimum resolution).
Variable Group para osVGA andMain
busses
DVI
pelo supported.
ACS:
2 NaAudio
seção I/O
Aux Sends, pressione o switch Aux 1–8 ou 9–16 para
associá-lo ao par correspondente • USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
• 48 inputs with remotelyde Aux Sends.mic preamps and
controllable 1 Pressione um switch Aux (1-8 ou 9-16) na seção Output para
individually selectable phantom power. atribuir o controle dos níveis Aux aos faders Output.
3 Pressione um codificador Aux Sends para habilitar essa Digital Snake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
mandada.
2• The connection
Selecione cada between
Aux queFOH Rack atribuir
deseja and Stage Rack
aos requires
busses Main
pressionando seus cable.
a Digital Snake switches Select.
This cable can be purchased directly
4 Gire o codificador para ajustar o nível de saída.
Synchronization and Control I/O 3 Na seção Bus Assigns do ACS, pressione o switch L–R (left/right)
Para endereçar canais para Aux Sends pela seção Output:
• Snake connectors to enable primary and redundant (if ou C/Mono (center/mono) para que se acenda.
1 Pressione o switch Aux 1–8 ou 9–16 para atribuir os faders Output
4 Movimente os faders de canal para ajustar o nível de saída do
para os busses Aux. The following components are optional, and must be
Aux.
2 Pressione o switch Select na régua Output para os Aux Send para
System Components
o qual deseja atribuir canais.
Assim como
• USB outros
flash diskbusses Output,
(or other busses
portable USBAux também
storage oferecem
device for
Directtransfer
Outs, inserts e Graphic
of Show EQ embutido.
data; 512 Para
MB or larger detalhes, veja:
recommended)
Included
3 Pressione Components
o switch Multi-Assign próximo aos codificadores Output. • Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
Direct Outs Veja “Direct Outputs” na página 85.
Os switches Multi Assign e Select piscam. • Headphones with 1/4-inch jack
Inserts Veja “Utilizando
• Dynamic Insertsmicrophone
or condenser em Busses Output”
and XLRnamic
página 82.
cable
• VENUE Select
Profile nos canais que você deseja endereçar
console
(for Talkback)
para o Aux Send selecionado.
• Two (2) IEC power cables Graphic EQ Veja “Inserindo Graphic EQs Embutido em Busses
• Monitor mountMulti-Assign
for VGA screen (screen para
not included) Output” na página 83.
5 Pressione o switch novamente confirmar a • MIDI cables (for connecting external MIDI devices)
ação. • Trackball mount (trackball not included)
– ou –• VENUE Mouse Pad
 Selecione outro Aux Send para confirmar a atribuição corrente
• VENUE
mas continuar noProfile Guide
modo Multi-Assign para atribuir canais a um outro • 25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
bus Aux.


digital I/O.
Para controlar o posicionamento de bus Aux bus ou pares de bus
To control panning
pelaofseção
Aux Aux
bus or Variable Group bus pairs from
Ajustando Controles
Adjusting Aux Send
Aux Send Controls Variable Group
the ACS Aux Sends section:
Sends do ACS:
Você
Youpode
can ajustar os Aux
adjust Aux Sends
Sends frompelos codificadores
the input encoders,defrom
entrada,
the 1 Atribua
1 Bank theosOutput
faders faders
Outputtofaders para
the Aux osorAux
1–8 Aux1–8 ou(for
9–16 Aux 9–16
pelo ACSand
e naon-screen.
tela. (para Aux)
Auxes) ou Groups
or Groups (for(for Variable
Variable Groups).
Groups).
ACS,
Utilizando os codificadores de entrada 1 Target the obus

2 Selecione busyou want
que to pan
deseja by pressing
posicionar its Select switch.
pressionando seu switch
Using the Input Encoders Select.
In Em um
a linked buspar dethe
pair, busACS
associados
Aux Sendo controle
controlsAux Send
show thedofol-
ACS:
Para controlar os Sends utilizando os codificadores de entrada: • Codificadores rotativos ímpares controlam o nível da mandada
lowing:
To control Aux Sends using the input encoders: • • Condificadores rotativos pares controlam o posicionamento da
Odd-numbered rotary encoders control send level
 Pressione o switch Send (1–2/15–16) para atribuir os Aux Send mandada.
Press an Encoder
aos codificadores assign Send switch (1–2/15–16) to bank
de entrada. • Even-numbered rotary encoders control send pan
that Aux Send to the input encoders. 2 Use os switches Aux 1–8, Aux 9–16 e Var Groups para selecionar
2 Use the Aux 1–8, Aux 9–16 and Var Groups switches to tar-
Para ligar ou desligar uma mandada: os busses de mandada desejados. O LED aceso do switch indica a
get the desired send busses. A lit switch LED indicates the cur-
To turn a send on or off: seleção atual.
rent selection.
1 Pressione o codificador de entrada Aux no canal desejado par
1 Press the inputentre
encoder forethe Aux on the desired channel 3 Gire
alternar a mandada ligada desligada. 3 Turn os
thecodificadores
even-numberedrotativos
rotarypares na seção
encoders in theAux
AuxSends
Sendspara
to toggle that send on/off. ajustar o posicionamento da mandada.
section to adjust the corresponding send pan.
2 Para ajustar o nível da mandada, gire o codificador.
2 To adjust send level, turn that encoder.
YouVocê
canpode associar
link the a seção
ACS Aux Aux
Sends Sendstodo
section ACS para
follow AFL, seguir
let- o
Quando AFL, permitindo acesso imediato aos controles de mandadas
Whenbusses Aux estão
Aux busses associados,
are linked, os sinais
input signals are de entrada
panned são
across ting you immediately access send controls for Auxes and
distribuídos pelos pares de bus. O posicionamento (pan) pode ser de Auxes e Variable Groups colocando em Solo qualquer
the bus pair. Panning can be controlled from the Input encod- Variable Groups by soloing any Aux or Group output strip.
controlado pelos codificadores Input ou da seção Aux Sends no régua de saída Aux ou Group. Para mais informações,veja
ers or from the ACS Aux Sends section. For“Auxes/Variable
more information, see “Auxes/Variable
Groups Seguindo AFLGroups
e AFLFollow
Seguindo
ACS.
AFL and AFL Follows Auxes/Variable
Auxes/Variable Groups” na página 120.Groups” on
Controlling
Controlando o Aux Send and Variable
Posicionamento GroupAux
de Mandadas Send Pane
Send page 120.
Variable Group Utilizando Flip to Faders para acessar simultaneamente
When Aux busses or Variable Group busses are linked, input Using Flipe Pan
Send Level to Faders to Access Send Level and Pan
signals
Quando osare panned
busses across
Aux ou the bus
Variable pair.
Group Panning
estão can beoscon-
associados, sinais Simultaneously
de trolled
entradafrom the Input encoders
são distribuídos or from
pelos pares the ACS
de bus. Aux Sends
O posicionamento Você pode usar o modo Flip to Faders para distribuir o controle de
(pan) pode ser controlado pelos codificadores Input ou da seção Aux
section. You
nívelcan
Auxuse
ouFlip to Faders
Variable mode
Group toos
para spill Aux or
faders deVariable
entradaGroup
enquanto
Sends no ACS. mantém
level o controle
control de posicionamento
to the input (pan) da
faders while retaining mandada
control of nos
codificadores
Send pan fromdethe
entrada.
input encoders.
To control panning of Aux bus or Variable Group bus pairs from
Para
thecontrolar o posicionamento do Aux ou dos pares de bus
Input section:
Variable Group pela seção Input: Para
To acessar
access nível
Send level de simultaneously:
and pan mandada e posicionamento
1 Do one of the following: simultaneamente:
1 Siga• um dosan
Press seguintes
Encoderproecedimentos:
assign Send switch to bank that Send to 1 Assign the input encoders to Aux Sends or Variable Groups
• Pressione o switch
the input Send para atribuir essa mandada para os
encoders. 1 Atribua
by os codificadores
doing either de entrada para Aux Sends ou Variable
of the following:
codificadores Input. Groups seguindo
• Press a Send um dos in
switch seguintes procedimentos:
the Input Encoder Assignment sec-
• Press the Var Groups switch in the ACS Bus Assign section
• Pressione do switch Var Groups na seção Bus Assign do ACS • Presione um switch Send na seção Input Encoder Assignment
tion to assign the encoders to control level for the se-
paratoatribuir
bank Variable
VariableGroup Sends on
Group Sends nosthe input
Input channels.
Channels. para atribuir os codificadores para controlar o nível da mandada
lected send.
2 In the Input Encoder Assignment section, press the Send
selecionada.
2 Na seção Input Encoder Assignment, pressione o switch Send
switch (1–16) for the bus pair you want to pan. If you banked
• Selecione
• Target an Aux or Variable
um bus Group bus
Aux ou Variable by selecting
Group na seção it in the
Output.
(1–16) para o par de bus que deseja posicionar. Se você atribuir aos Output section.
to Variable Groups, press a Send switch 1–8. 2 Pressione o switch Flip to Faders, na parte inferior da seção Input
Variable Groups, pressione um switch Send 1–8.
2 Press the Flip to Faders switch, at the bottom of the Input
• A• primeira
The firstvez
press
queofothe Aux switch
switch assigns control
Aux é pressionado of the
atribui a ele Encoder Assignment. Os faders de entrada controlam e mostram
Encoder
agora o Assignment
nível para asection.
mandada Theselecionada,
input faders enow
os control
codificadores
controle de nível da mandada. O switch se acende emand
send level to the encoder. The switch lights green verdethee
o display do display
encoder codificador mostra
shows a mandada de número
the odd-numbered send. ímpar . and display
controlam level for the
e mostram selected send, and the encoders dis-
o posicionamento.
• Na segunda
• The second vezpress
que of
o switch
the AuxAux é pressionado
switch atribuiofathe
assigns control ele play and control Send pan.
controle de posicionamento (pan) da mandada. O switch se Ajustando o posicionamento do Aux Send para seguir o
send pan to the encoder. The switch lights yellow and the
acende em amarelo e o display apresenta um “P” antes da posicionamento
Setting doPan
Aux Send canal
to Follow Channel Pan
display shows a “P” before the odd-numbered send.
mandada número ímpar.
Panning of the input
O posicionamento dossignal can
sinais debeentrada
set to follow
pode the
ser pan or bal-para
ajustado
3 With the Aux switch lit, turn the rotary encoder on each In-
3 Com seguirvalues
ance os valores deInput
of the pan ou balanceor
Channel dosFXInput Channel
Return ou the
feeding FX Return
put o switch Aux
Channel aceso,
or FX gireto
Return o adjust
codificador rotativo
the send pan.de cada Input
Channel ou FX Return para ajustar o pan da mandada. alimentando
Aux bus o bus Aux.
Para
To setajustar
the AuxoSend
posicionamento de Auxpan:
pan to follow Channel Send para seguir o
posicionamento do canal:
1 Vá à página Options e clique na aba Busses.
2 On any linked bus pairs, select the Follows Channel Pan op-
tion.
2 EmThis setting
qualquer is applied
par de bus globally to the
associado, corresponding
selecione a opção Aux
Follows
Send.
Channel Pan. O ajuste é aplicado globalmente à mandada Aux
correspondente

Copying Assignments Between Busses
Managing Aux Bus Assignments Copiando Atribuições Entre Busses
Copying
You canAssignments Between
copy the current input Busses
assignments from one Aux or
Gerenciando
Managing Atribuições de Bus Aux
Aux Bus Assignments Copying Assignments Between Busses
Managing Aux
Viewing Aux andBus Assignments
Variable Group Bus
Variable Group bus (or Mains) to another bus of either type. If
Você
You canpode
copycopiar as atribuições
the current de entrada
input assignments from de one
um Aux
bus orAux ou
Stage Rack
Visualizando Features
as Atribuições de Busses Aux e Variable Group Additional
the can
You
Variable bussescopy
Group are Required
(oulinked,
the current
Mains) Components
assignments
input
para can be
assignments
outro bus deofcopied from
from one
qualquer other
Aux
tipo. or
IfSe os
Assignments
Viewing Aux and Variable Group Bus
Variable
linked
Group
busses.
bus (or
This
Mains)
letsMains)
to another
you quickly
bus
duplicate
either type.
busses
Variable estão
Groupassociados,
bus (or atribuições podem
to another bus ofmonitor
ser copiadas demixes.
either type.outros
If
Viewing
Stage
Assignments
Racks are Auxusedand withVariable
an FOH Rack, Group Bus all stage the
and provide Thebusses
busses
are linked,
following
associados.
assignments
components mustcan
Issoassignments
be copied from
be purchased
permite diplicar
other
separately:
can berapidamente
copied frommixes other de
Quando Whenum canal
an Aux debus
saída or de
Varbus Aux ou
Group Var Group
output channel é selecionado
is targeted the busses are linked,
Assignments
audio
na tela,
I/O for VENUE Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks
seus membros
on-screen, são mostrados
its members are shown eminuma lista
a list onna theparte
rightdireita
linked busses.
side of monitor.VideoCopying
•linked
Thisbus
DisplayThis
busses.
lets you quickly
assignments
(15-inch
lets you
duplicate
overwrites
or greater
quickly allmonitor
flat-panel
duplicate theVGA mixes. on
assignments
display
monitor mixes.
can
daWhen
página be used
anOutputs. simultaneously, supporting
Aux bus or Var Group output channel is targeted up to 96 total inputs. the destination Aux bus.
the Outputs
When an Auxpage. bus or Var Group output channel is targeted recommended;
Copying bus assignments1024x768 minimum
overwrites allresolution).
the assignmentsVGAon and
on-screen, its members are shown in a list on the right side of DVI Copiar
Copying
supported.atribuições
bus assignments de bus sobrescreve
overwrites todas
all the as atribuições
assignments on
on-screen, its members are shown in a list on the right side of the destination Aux bus.
theAudio
Para OutputsI/O page.
visualizar as atribuições de entrada de um bus ou Variable To copythe input
dosdestination
bus Aux assignments
deAuxdestino.
bus.between busses:
To view
the Outputsinputpage.
assignments to an Aux or Variable Group bus: • USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
Group:• 48 inputs with remotely controllable mic preamps and 1 Target
To copy input the Aux bus that
assignments betweenyou want
busses: to be the destination of
1 Go to the
To viewindividually Outputs
input assignments page.
to anphantom
Aux or Variable Para
To copiar
copy atribuições
input assignments de entrada
betweenentre busses:
busses:
selectable power. Group bus: the copied assignments by selecting its on-screen
1 Vá To view input
à página Outputs.assignments to an Aux or Variable Group bus: 1 Digital
Target the Snake
AuxCablebus that (VENUE
you want Profile
to Systems Only) channel
be the destination of
1 Go2• to 8 the
analog
Target an output
Aux bus
Outputs channels;
page. expandable
output channel up to 48its
by selecting analog or
on-screen strip.
Target the
1•1Selecione o Aux bus that
bus between
Aux que you
desejawantcomoto be the destination
destino das requiresof
atribuições
1 Go to the Outputs page. the copied
The assignments
connection by selecting
FOH its
Rack on-screen
and Stage channel
Rack
2 2Selecionedigital
channel um outputs
fader
canal strip.
de per Stage
Input
saída de Rack.
channels
bus Aux routed to the selected
selecionando sua régua the copied
bus strip.
copiadas assignments
selecionando sua by selecting
régua de its on-screen
canal na tela. channel
Target an Aux bus output channel by selecting its on-screen 2 Click the
a Digital Input
Snake Assign
cable. Thispop-up menu
cable can be at the bottom
purchased of the
directly
2are
de fader displayed
de
Target canal
an Aux nainbus
theoutput
tela. Input Channels
Members list onby
channel the right side
endereçados
selecting of
para
its the page.
o bus
on-screen strip.
channel fader strip. Input channels routed to the selected bus Members
from Avidlist, choose Replace
or assembled by your With Mix From,
preferred then choose the
vendor.
Synchronization
selecionado
channelsão fader and Input
apresentados
strip. Control naI/O
Members
channels routedlist to
no the
ladoselected da 2 2Click
direito bus Clique thenoInput
menuAssignpop-uppop-upInput Assign
menuna atparte inferior of
the bottom dathe
Members
are displayed in the Members list on the right side of the page. 2Aux/Var
Click theGroup
Inputbus whose
Assign assignments
pop-up menu atyou
the want
bottomto copy
of theto
página. To
are go to any assigned input channel fromright
the redundant
Outputs page: list,
Members escolha
list, Replace
choose With
Replace Mix From,
With Mix e escolha
From, theno bus Aux/Var
choose the Group
• displayed
Snake in the Members
connectors to enablelistprimary
on the and side of the page.
(if the
Memberscurrently
list, selected
choose bus.
Replace With Mix From, then choose the
de ondeGroup
Optional
Aux/Var deseja copiar
Components
bus whose as atribuições
assignments para
youo want
bus selecionado.
to copy to
To go applicable)
Click
any the nameconnection
of the to a channel
input VENUE theFOH
in theRack. page: list. theAux/Var
Members Group bus whose assignments you want to copy to
Para irato
qualquer assigned
Input input
Channel channel frompela
atribuído Outputs
página Outputs: currently selected bus.
To go to any assigned input channel from the Outputs page: the following
currently components
selected bus. are optional, and must be
The
 Click the name of the input channel in the Members list.
 Clique
 Clickno nome
the name do Input Channel
of the input na Members
channel list.Members
in the Member
list. purchased separately:
System Components input
channels • USB flash disk (or other portable USB storage device for
Member
inputMember transfer of Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
channels
input
Included Components channels • Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
• VENUE Profile console Input assign
pop-up menu (for Talkback)
• Two (2) IEC power cables Input assign • Footswitches (up to 2)
pop-up menu
Input assign
pop-up menu • MIDI cables (for connecting external MIDI devices)
Currently selected output
Aux bus assignments shown in the Outputs page
• Two
Currently (2) console
selected output lights Copiando atribuições
Copying de entrada entre
input assignments bussesAux
between Aux busses
AtrivuiçõesCurrently selected
de bus Aux output na página Outputs
apresentados
• Protective
Aux bus assignmentsDust
shownCover
in the Outputs page
Resetting
Aux Aux
bus assignments and
shown Variable
in the Group
Outputs page Bus Copiando
Copying inputatribuições
Copying
assignmentsMains paraAux
between
Mains Assignments
Aux Busses
Busses Aux
busses
between Aux bussesto
• Rack(s)
Resetando (see next)
Atribuições
Assignments de Bus Aux e Variable Group VENUE Profile Expansion Options Copying input assignments
Resetting Aux and Variable Group Bus Você
Copying pode copiarthe
canMains asAssignments
atribuições
Mainatuais do Aux
to bus Mainto para
Busses busses
Resetting Aux and Variable Group Bus
Assignments
You
Copying
The
copy
following Mains
current
options Assignments
can be
bus assignments
addedato tomixes
VENUE Aux
Profile
Aux busses
Busses
systems.
Você You
podecan
Racks, remove
remover input assignments
atribuições
Software CDs, from
de entrada
iLoks, and Aux/Var
dos bussesGroup
Cables bus Aux
Aux/Var orou Variable
Variable Groupbusses
Group para basear
to base mixagem
monitor de monitor
from a amain
partir
Assignments
Groupoutput
na tela.channels on-screen. Forcan
You
de details
uma copy on
theall
mixagem VENUE
current systems
Main
principal. anddos
options,
bus assignments
Atribuições tovisit
busses Aux
Mainthe AvidRight
busses
Left/
You can remove mix.
You Assignments
can copy the current to the Main Left/ Right bussesto
bus assignments canAuxbebusses
copied
Each
You Mix Rackinput
can remove or input
FOHassignments
Rack from Aux/Var Group bus
includes:
assignments from Aux/Var Group bus orpodem website
Variable ser copiadas
(www.avid.com).
Group paratobusses
busses associados,
base monitor mixes e from
atribuições
a maindo bus
output channels on-screen. to
or linked
Variable busses,
Group and assignments
busses to base to the
monitor Center/Mono
mixes from abus
maincan
Para remover
• System
To remove umaRestore
an atribuição
input CD de entrada
assignment from an de Auxum bus Aux
or Variable ou mix.
Group
Center/Mono
Assignments podemto theserMain
copiadas para busses
Left/ Right busses mono.
can be copied
output channels on-screen. be copied
mix. Assignmentsto mono to busses.
the Main Left/ Right busses can be copied
Variablebus:Group: to linked busses, and assignments to the Center/Mono bus can
• ECx Ethernet Control Software Installer CD Mix Rack
to linked busses,Options
and assignments to the Center/Mono bus can
To remove an input assignment from an Aux or Variable Group
To remove an input assignment from an Aux or Variable Group bePara
copiedcopiarto monoatribuições
busses.de bus dos Mains para Aux ou Variable
1• Standalone
Target the bus Software
output Installer
channel CD
you want
Selecione o canal de saída do bus que deseja alterar selecionando
1 bus: to change by select- Groups:
To
be copy
copied busto assignments
mono busses.from the Mains to Auxes or Variable
bus:
ing its on-screen channel strip. I/O Options
Groups:
sua régua de canal na tela.
1 Target the bus output channel you want to change by select- To copy bus assignments from como
the Mains to Auxes or Variable
1 •Target
Plug-in the bus output channel you want to change byiLok select- 1 Selecione
To
1 copy bus o bus que deseja
assignments from thedestino
Mains das atribuições
to destination
Auxes copiadas
or Variable
2 In
ing its the listinstaller
on-screen ofchannel
member discs (if any)
input
strip. with
channel pre-authorized
assignments, right-click Groups:
AI16 Target
Analog
selecionando
the bus thatInput
Mic/Line you want
Card
sua régua de canal na tela.
to be provides
that the 16 analog of the
2 Nainglistaitsdeon-screen
atribuições de Input
channel Channel membros, clique com o
strip. Groups:
• Two
the input (2)assignment
IEC power cables copied assignments by selecting its on-screen channel strip.
botão direito
2 In the listnaof atribuição
member input deto remove
entrada
channel queand choose
deseja Unassign.
remover
assignments, e escolha 1 mic/line
right-click Target thelevel bus inputs
that you want to be the destination of the
2 •InOne
Unassign. the list
FOH of Link
member cableinput channel assignments,
for connection to a VENUE right-click
console copied 1 Target
2 Clique the
nothemenu bus that
pop-up you
Inputwant
Assignto benathe destination
parte inferior daof the
Members
the input assignment to remove and choose Unassign. 2 Click
assignments Input byAssign pop-up
selecting menu
its on-screen at the bottom
channel of
strip. the
To remove
the all input assignments
input assignment to remove and from choose
a bus: Unassign. AO16
copied Analog
escolha Replace
list,Members Output
assignments Card
by
WithReplace that
selecting
Mix From, provides
its
e escolha16
on-screenanalog line
channel
o bus Main level
strip.
disponível
list, choose With Mix From, then choose the
ParaEach
removerStage Rackasincludes:
todas atribuições de entrada de um bus: outputs
Click the Input
2 (Left-Right ou Mono) Assign pop-up
cujas menu atdeseja
atribuições the bottom of thecopiadas
que sejam
1 Target
To remove all the
inputAux bus outputfrom
assignments channel
a bus:you want to change by Members 2available
Click the Main
Inputbus (Left-Right
Assign pop-up ormenu
Mono)at whose assignments
the bottom of theyou
To • remove
Two (2)allIEC input power cables from a bus:
assignments para o bus list,selecionado.
choose Replace With Mix From, then choose the
selecting its on-screen channel strip. wantAnalog
Members
XO16 to copy
list,and to Digital
the currently
choose Replace
Output selected
WithCard bus.
Mixthat
From, then choose
provides 8 analog the
1 1Selecione o canal de saída do bus Aux
Target the Aux bus output channel you want to change by bus que desjea alterar available Main bus (Left-Right or Mono) whose assignments you
1 Target
selecionando the Aux bus output channel you want to change by O available
line level
estado Main
outputs,
dos bus
controles(Left-Right
and 8deAES busor Mono)
digital
seguem whose
outputs.
o assignments
estado dos you
controles
2 Click
selecting its sua
the régua
pop-up
on-screen de canal at
menu
channel na tela.
the
strip. bottom of the Members list wantThe to copy
state to of the
the currently
bus controls selected
followbus.the state of the corre-
selecting its on-screen channel strip. want to copy todos
correspondentes theInput
currently
Channelsselected bus. aos Mains: Channel
atribuídos
and choose Reset Mix. sponding
AT16 controlsCard
A-Net Output on the that input
provideschannels assignedoftoA-Net
16 channels the
Clickothe
2 2Clique menu pop-up
pop-up menu at the
na parte bottom
inferior da of the Members
Members list
list e escolha Mute
The mapeia
state of theobus Buscontrols
Send, Channel
follow Pan mapeia
the state o Bus
of the Pan e o nível
corre-
2 Click the pop-up menu at the bottom of the Members list Mains:
The
output state Channel
of
compatible
do fader controls the
de canal on Mute
buswith
mapeia maps
controls
Aviom® to Bus
follow Send,
the
Personal
o nívelchannels
do bus Send. Channel
state of
Mixers thePan
and maps
corre-
other to
Reset Mix. Reset Mix.
and choose sponding the input assigned to the
and choose Reset Mix. Bus Pan,
sponding
Pro16™ anddevices.
controls
Series Channelon the Fader
input level maps to
channels Bus Send
assigned to level.
the
Mains: Channel Mute maps to Bus Send, Channel Pan maps to
Mains: Channel Mute maps to Bus Send, Channel Pan maps to
Bus Pan, andand Channel Fader level maps to Bus Send level.
BusInput
IOx Pan, and output Channel expansion
Fader 10:
Chapter levelcard
Aux that
maps
Sendstoprovides anlevel.
BusVariable
and Send addi-
Groups 99
digital I/O. Chapter 10: Aux Sends and Variable Groups 99
Chapter 10: Aux Sends and Variable Groups 99
Capítulo
Chapter 11:11:
Mixers Matrix
Matrix ande Personal
PersonalQ Q Mixers
A seção Outputs
can be oferece 8 mixers supporting
used simultaneously, Matrix monoup
e8tomixer Personal
96 total Q (PQ) estéreo
inputs. para configurar
recommended; mixagens
1024x768 alternativas, ou mixagens
minimum de cue,
The Outputs section
monitor ou press. offers 8 mono Matrix mixers and 8 stereo Personal Q (PQ) mixers for setting up alternateresolution). VGA
mixes, fill and and
delay
feeds, and cue, monitor or press mixes. DVI supported.
Audio I/O
Mixers individually
Matrix selectable phantom power.
Matrix Mixers
Cada um dos 8 mixers Matrix disponíveis pode receber até 12 canais de entradas. As fontes between
• The connection de entrada
FOHpodem
Rackser
andqualquer combinação
Stage Rack requires de
digital
Each of the 8 outputs per
available Stagemixers
Matrix Rack. can receive up to 12 channels of input. Input sources can be any combination of Auxes,
busses Aux, Groups ou Mains, ou qualquer dos 8 Matrix User Sends. Por padrão, cada
a Digital mixer
Snake Matrix
cable. possui
This cablesaída mono,
can be mas saídas
purchased podem
directly
serGroups
associadas para busses,
or Mains formar um par of
or any estéreo.
the eight available Matrix User Sends. ByAvid
from default, each Matrix
or assembled by mixer has a mono
your preferred output, but
vendor.
Synchronization
outputs and to
can be linked Control I/O pairs.
form stereo
Matrix Mixer tab The following components are optional, and must be
purchased separately: Matrix Input Source selectors
Matrix output
• Headphones with 1/4-inch jackMatrix Source controls
All and
level VENUE Profile systems include the following:
controls • Dynamic or condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
(for Talkback)
User Assign
Racks, Software CDs,
Reset, Clear iLoks, and
and Replace CablesCurrently selected Matrix mixer
selector
Matrix
Mixer Mixer
Matrix in Outputs
na página Outputspage

Chapter 11: Matrix and Personal Q Mixers 101
digital I/O.
Capítulo 11: Mixers Matrix e Personal Q 101
Mixers Personal Q
Personal Q Mixers
Cada um dos 8 mixers Personal Q (“PQ”) disponíveis pode receber até 12 canais de entradas. As fontes de entrada podem ser qualquer
combinação de busses
Each of the Aux, Personal
8 available Groups ouQMains,
(“PQ”)ou qualquer
mixers can dos 8 PQup
receive User Sends.
to 12 Cada of
channels mixer Personal
input. Input Qsources
possui can
saída
beestéreo.
any combination
Personal Q Mixers
of Auxes, Groups or Mains busses, or any of the eight available PQ User Sends. Each Personal Q mixer has a stereo output.
Each of the 8 available Personal Q (“PQ”) mixers can receive up to 12 channels of input. Input sources can be any combination
of Auxes, Groups or Mains busses, or any of the eight available PQ User Sends. Each Personal Q mixer has a stereo output.
PQ Source controls
PQ output
level and PQ Source controls
controls
PQ output
level and
controls
User Assign
User Assign
Currently selected PQ mixer Reset and Replace selector
Personal Q Mixer in Outputs page

Currently selected PQ mixer Reset and Replace selector
Mixer Personal Q na página Outputs
Personal
Personal Q MixerQinController
Outputs page System (Optional)
Sistema Personal Q Controller System (Opcional)
With the optional Personal Q Controller system, performers
Personal Q Controller System (Optional)
Comcan o adjust
sistema theopcional
controls Personal Q Controller,
in the Personal Q mixeros fromperformers
a remote
(músicos theetc)
location.
With podem
See ajustarPersonal
thePersonal
optional VENUE QosController
controles nofor
mixer
system,
Q Guide Personal Q
details.
performers
remotamente.
can adjust the Veja o GuiainVENUE
controls Personal
the Personal QQmixer
para from
mais detalhes.
a remote
If no PQ Controllers are used, the PQ mixers
location. See the VENUE Personal Q Guide for details. are still avail-
able for use as stereo Matrix mixers controllable from the
IfSenoPQPQControllers
console.Controllersnão
areestiverem sendo
used, the PQ usados,
mixers os mixer
are still avail-PQ
mixers
able for continuar disponíveis
use as stereo para controllable
Matrix mixers uso como mixers
from the Matrix
estéreo, controláveis pela console.
console.

To stereo
ToPara link
link Matrixes:
associar
stereo Matrixes em estéreo:
Matrixes:
Configuring
ConfiguringMixers Matrix
Matrix and
and PQ
PQ Mixers
Mixers
Configurando Matrix e PQ 1 PutTothe
stereo link into
system Matrixes:
Config mode.
Configuring Matrix and PQ Mixers 1 Put the system into Config mode.
1 Coloque o sistema no modo Config.
The 12 Inputs
Stage Rack forFeatures
each Matrix and PQ mixer can be any com-
The 12 Inputs for each Matrix and PQ mixer can be any com- Additional
1 Put the system Requiredinto Config Components
mode.
Asbination
12 entradas of these para potential
cada mixer Matrix e PQ mixer podem ser 22 Go Go toto the
the Options
Options > Busses page.
> Busses page.
bination The 12 these 35
of Inputs 35 forpotential
each Matrix sources:
and PQ mixer can be any com- 2 Vá à página Options > Busses.
sources: Go to the section,
Options > Busses
qualquer
Stage combinação Racks are used dessas
with35 anfontes
FOH Rack, potenciais:
and provide all stage 3 The In2thefollowing
Matrix components click mustpage.
Edit. be purchased separately:
•• bination
24 shared ofAuxthese and35Group
potential sources
sources:
• audio 2424fontesshared
I/O for Aux and
compartilhadas
VENUE Group
Profile sources
Auxsystems.
e GroupUp to two Stage Racks 3 In the Matrix section, click Edit.
3 Na
•Click seção
Video Matrix,
Display clique
(15-inch Edit.
or greater flat-panel VGA display
Intothe Matrix section, click Edit.
• can••3 3 •Mains
3fontes
be
24Mains
Mains
used
sources
shared
sources (LCR (LCR
Aux
(LCR
simultaneously,
and
ou or
LR+M) LR+M)
orGroup sources
supporting up to 96 total inputs. 4
LR+M)
3 enable the Link between
4 Click to enable the Link between any two adjacent
any two adjacent
• ••8 88fontes •User
User
User
Input
3 Mains Input
sources
Input sources
sources (LCR or LR+M)
recommended;
(odd/even)
4 Click
(odd/even)
4 Clique
Matrixes.
to habilitar
1024x768
enable the
Matrixes.
para
minimum
Link between
a associação entre
resolution).
any
doistwo
VGA and
adjacent
Matrixes (ímpar/par)
DVI supported.
Audio • I/O8 User Input sources 5 (odd/even)
adjacentes.
Click Apply. Matrixes.
(Click Cancel to exit Edit mode without
User
User
UserInputs Inputs
Inputspodem can
can be be ser input
input channels,
Input Channels,
channels, FX
FX Returns,
FX Returns,
Returns, physical
physical stage
entradas
stagede 5 •Click USBApply.
keyboard (Clickand Cancel to exit Edit mode
trackball/mouse (Windows without
compatible)
áudio
audio •door 48 inputs
palco
FOH oucan
audio with
FOH remotely
ou
inputs, entradas
or controllable
inputs da from
opções Pro mic
deToolspreamps
playback
playback and
do Pro changes.)
5 Click Apply. (Click Cancel to exit Edit mode without
changes.)
User Inputs be input channels,
audio or FOH audio inputs, or inputs from Pro Tools playback FX Returns, physical stage 5 Clique Apply. (Clique Cancel para sair do modo Edit sem
Tools.
options. Além Indisso:
individually selectable phantom power. changes.)
audio Inoraddition:
FOH audio inputs, or inputs from Pro Tools playback alterações). Digital Snake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
• options. Um•One
•• options.
ou
8 analog
or
addition:
mais
more
In
dos
output
of
addition:
8 User
the 8
Inputsexpandable
channels;
available
disponíveisup
user inputs
pode
to 48
can
seranalog
be
enviado
sent to or
Oneum
para or mais
moremixers of theMatrix
8 available
ouRack.
PQ. user inputs can be sent to • The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
one digital
or outputs perorStage
• Atribuições one • Oneor more
moreor
demore
Matrix
fontes
Matrix of deor PQ
the mixers.
8 available
entrada
PQ mixers. e deuser User inputs
Inputcan podembe sentserto a Digital Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
••armazenadas
Input onesource
or more
Input source assignment assignment
Matrix
juntamente and
or
com PQ
umauser
mixers.input
cena. assignment can from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
and Controland I/Ouser input assignment can
• Synchronization
Asbe •fontes
stored
Input de
on
sourceentrada
a per-snapshotdos
assignment
be stored on a per-snapshot basis. mixer
basis.
and Matrix
user e
input PQ mixers
assignment sãocan
Editing the link status of a Matrix pair in the Options > Busses page.
••configuradas
•The Snake
input
be stored como
connectors
sources on Pre
afor ou
to Pós-Fader
enable
Matrix
Matrix and
per-snapshot primaryna aba
PQ
PQ mixers
andbasis.
and Pickoffs
mixers are
da página
redundant
are config-
(if Editing the link status of a Matrix pair in the Options > Busses page.
The
Options. input
applicable)
sources for
connection to a VENUE FOH Rack.
config- Optional
When Editing Components
the link
a matrix pair status of a Matrix
is linked, the pair in the Optionschannel
> Busses in-
page.
ured• The as Pre-
input or Post-Fader
or sources in the Pickoffs tab of the Op- Editando o status de associação de um pareven-numbered
Matrix na página Options > Busses.
• Asured as Pre-
etiquetas de entradasfor(1–8,
Post-Fader Matrix
in the and PQtab
Right,mixers
Pickoffs
Left, of the
C/Mono areOp-
econfig-
User) When a matrix pair is linked, the even-numbered channel in-
tions
tionsured
servem
page.
page.
apenasas Pre- or Post-Fader
como guia. Em sua in the Pickoffsqualquer
utilização, tab of the Op- herits
fonte
The
herits all
all parameter
following
When a matrix
parameter settings
components
pair
settings of the
ofare
is linked, odd-numbered
theoptional,
the and must
even-numbered
odd-numbered channel.
be
channel in-
channel.
••deInput labels
tions page.(1–8, Left, Right, C/Mono and User) are only Quando
purchased um par Matrix
separately: é associado, os
herits all parameter settings of the odd-numbered channel.canais pares herdam todos
entrada pode ser atribuída a qualquer
Input labels (1–8, Left, Right, C/Mono and User) are only entrada do mixer (por The
os matrix
parâmetros mixer dechanges
ajuste dos to a stereo
canais matrix
ímpares. mixer:
System intended
exemplo,
• Input
intended LeftComponents
as
as a
a guide.
não
labels (1–8,In
precisa
guide. use,
semprs
InLeft,
use, any
any ser
Right, input source
atribuída
C/Mono
input source and àcan be
entrada
User)
can as-
as-Left
be are only
The matrix mixer changes to a stereo matrix
• USB flash disk (or other portable USB storage device for mixer:
• A
A Pan
• The control
matrix mixeris
is added
changes to each
to a matrix mixer
stereo matrix input
mixer: source.
designed
um mixer).
to
intended any mixer
as a input
guide. In (for
use,
signed to any mixer input (for example, Left doesn't al-example,
any input Left doesn't
source can al-
be as- Pan control
transfer of Show addeddata; to 512
each MBmatrix mixerrecommended)
or larger input source.
O• mixer
All
matrixsources
input
se transforma
are panned
em um mixer
center
matrix
upon
estéreo:
linking.
• A Pan control is added to each matrix mixer input source.
Included
Configurando
ways have
signed
ways haveComponents to
to be
any assigned
mixer to
inputthe Left
(for input
example,
to be assigned to the Left input of a mixer).
Pontos de Alimentação (Pickoffs) de Aux,
of a mixer).
Left doesn't al- • Um controle de pan é adicionado a cada fonte de entrada do
• •All input
Near-field sourcesmonitor are panned
speakers center
for mixupon linking.
position monitoring
• AllMatrix.
input sources are panned center upon linking.
ways have to be assigned to the Left input of a mixer). Plug-in • mixer
Headphones
assignments with
to 1/4-inch jack
GroupAll eVENUE Mains Profile systems include the following:
•
Plug-in assignments
Todas as fontes todethe
the formerly
formerly
entrada estão
mono
mono matrix
matrix channels
posicionadas channels
no centro até a
Configuring
Configuring Aux,
Aux, Group
Group and
and Mains
Mains Pickoffs
Pickoffs are lost,
• including
Dynamic
Plug-in
are lost, or
assignments
including all
all snapshot
condenser references.
microphone
to the references.
snapshot formerly mono and matrix
XLR mic cable
channels
• VENUE Profile console associação de canais.
Para configurar os pontos
Configuring Aux, Group and Mains Pickoffsde alimentação (pickopffs) de Auxes, (for Talkback)
are lost, including all snapshot references.
Groups
To
To configure
• eTwo Mains
configure Auxes,
(2)para
IECos
Auxes, Groups,
mixerscables
power
Groups, and
Matrix
and Mains
e PQ:pickoffs for
Mains pickoffs for the
the Matrix
Matrix Unlinking Matrixes
• Footswitches (up para
to 2) os canais formadores do Matrix mono
Atribuições
Unlinking de plug-ins
Matrixes
and
and PQ To
PQ mixers:
• Monitor
mixers: mount
configure Auxes, for VGA and
Groups, screen Mains (screen
pickoffsnot for
included)
the Matrix sãoUnlinking
• perdidos,
MIDI incluindo
cablesMatrixes
(for todas as referências
connecting external de MIDIcenas (snapshots).
devices)
1 Coloque and os sistema
PQ mixers: no modo Config.
1 Put • the system
Trackball in
mount Config mode.
(trackball not included) To
To unlink
unlink a
a pair
pair of
of Matrixes:
Matrixes:
1 Put the system in Config mode. • BNC cables (for connecting Word clock between the
1• Configurar
VENUE
Put Mouse
the system pontos Pad
in Config
de mode. pode causar uma perda 1 Desassociando
alimentação PutTothe
unlink
system
Matrixes
a system
pair of Matrixes:
into
Configuring pickoff points may cause a momentary loss of 1 Put the VENUEsystem into Config
and external
Config mode.
mode.digital devices)
Configuring
momentânea
• VENUE Profile Guide pickoff
de points
áudio e, may cause
portanto, a
nãomomentary
pode ser loss of
realizado
audio, and therefore cannot be changed in Para •
1 Put
25-pinthe
desassociar system
D-Sub um>par into
cables Config
(for
de Matrixes: mode.
connecting to GPI devices)
no modo
audio, Configuring
andShow.therefore pickoff
cannotpointsbe may
changed cause inaShow mode.
mode. loss of 2
momentary
Show Go to the Options
2 Go to the Options > Busses page.
Busses page.
audio, and therefore cannot be changed in Show mode. 2 Go
3 1Click to thethe Busses page.
Options > section.
2 Go• toProtective
2 2VáGo to the
à página
Options
the Options
Options Dust page
epageCover
clique
and
and click
click
a aba
the
Pickoffs. Pickoffs tab.
the Pickoffs tab.
Coloque
3 Click Editoin
Edit the Matrix
insistema no modo
Matrix section.Config.
2• Go to the Options page and click the 3 Click Edit in the Matrix section.
3 Under Rack(s)
Matrix (see
and next)
PQ Sources,
3 Under Matrix and PQ Sources, configure Aux, Groups and
configure Aux, Groupstab.
Pickoffs and 4 VENUE
Click to
4 2Click
Vá à to Profile
unlink
unlink
página
the
the desired
Options Expansion
desired
> Busses.
Matrixes.
Matrixes. Options
Em Matrix
3 Mains (LCR eor PQ
LR+M)Sources,as configure
pre- or Aux,
post-fader. Groups e Mains (LCR ou 4 Click to unlink the desired Matrixes.
Mainscomo 3 Under
(LCR or Matrix and PQ Sources,
as pre- or post-fader. configure Aux, Groups and 5 Click Apply.
LR+M) préLR+M)
ou pós-fader. Clickfollowing
5 The Apply. options can be added to VENUE Profile systems.
Racks, Mains (LCR Software or LR+M) CDs,
as pre- iLoks, and Cables
or post-fader. 3 Clique Edit na seção Matrix.
For Click Apply.
5 details on all VENUE systems and options, visit the Avid
When a a Matrix
Matrix pair pair isis unlinked
unlinked the the even-numbered
even-numbered channel
Linking
Each Mixand
Associando
Linking and e Unlinking
Rack or FOH Rack Pairs
Desassociando
Unlinking Pairs Paresto form
includes: to formde Saídas Stereo
Stereo Matrix When
4website
again Clique (www.avid.com).
para
inherits desassociar
all os Matrixes desejados.
channel
Estéreo
Matrix Outputs again When
inherits all parameter
a Matrix parameter settings
pair is unlinked
settings the of
of the odd-numbered
even-numbered
the odd-numbered channel
Matrix Linking
• System Outputs and Unlinking
Restore CD Pairs to form Stereo channel. again inherits all parameter settings of the odd-numbered
channel.
The Matrix
• mixers
eight ECx mono Outputs
Ethernet Matrix Control
mixersserSoftware
can be Installer CD (ímpar/par) 5 Clique Apply.
Mix Rack Options
Os oito
The eight mono MatrixMatrix podem mixers can be linked
associados linkedem in odd/even
in pares
odd/even pairs
pairs channel.
Pre-existing
para
to formar
form
•
The up até
to
Standalone
eight quatro
four
mono saídas
stereo-linked
Software
Matrix estéreo.
mixers pairs
Installer can CDof Combinações
bematrix
linked outputs.
in de
odd/even Amixers
pairs Pre-existing plug-inplug-in and and GEQGEQ routing
routing may may be be affected
affected when
when
to form up to four stereo-linked pairs of matrix outputs. A Quado
the matrix umlink
Pre-existing
parstateMatrix
plug-inis é desassociado,
changed.
and GEQ An alert
routing
os canais
dialog
may
pares when
warning
be affectedof
herdam
mono
combination e
to estéreo
form
• iLok USB up (pares
of mono
to fourassociados)
Smart and and é
stereo-linked
stereo-linked
Key stereo-linked
possível.
pairs
(for storing plug-in
Os
Matrix
of pares
mixers
matrix (ímpar/par)
is
outputs. pos- A theI/Omatrix
Optionslink state is changed. An alert dialog warning of
combination of mono Matrixauthorizations)
mixers is pos- novamente todos os ajustes de parâmetros dos canais ímpares.
são associados e matrix
desassociados utilizando os unlinked
controles usingda página data lossmatrix
the is shown linkprior
statetoisperforming
changed. An the linkdialog
alert or unlink
warningop- of
sible. Odd-even
sible.combination
•Odd-even
Plug-in of mono
matrix
installer
pairs
pairs
discsandare
are linked
(if stereo-linked
linked
any) with
and
and Matrix mixers
unlinked
pre-authorized using is pos- data loss is shown prior to performing the link or unlink op-
iLok
Options > Busses na tela. eration.
AI16data Click
Analog
loss OK
is to
Mic/Line
shown completeInput
prior tothe
Card link operation,
that
performing provides
the or
link 16click
or Can-op-
analog
unlink
on-screen
on-screen controls in
sible. Odd-even the
the Options
matrix pairs are > Busses
linked page.and unlinked using eration. Click OK to
Endereçamentos complete the
pré-existentes delink operation,
plug-in or click
e GEQ podem serCan-
afetados
• Twocontrols (2) IEC in power Options
cables > Busses page. cel to cancel
mic/line
eration.
to cancel
celquando without
level
Click
withoutinputs
OK changes.
to complete the link operation,
changes. do Matrix é alterado. Uma caixa or click Can-
on-screen controls in the Options > Busses page. o status de associação de
AOneassociação
•Linking FOH
Matrixes de isMatrixes
Link cable for éconnection
accomplished realizada
using utilizando
to asame
the VENUE os mesmos
Edit console
and cel to cancel without changes.
Linking Matrixes is accomplished using the same Edit and alerta de perda de dados é apresentada antes da operação de
métodos de Edit e Apply usados nos pares associados Aux. AO16 Analog Output Card that provides 16 analog line level
Apply
Apply methods
Linking
methods used
used for
Matrixes is stereo
for linking
accomplished
stereo using the same Edit and associação ou desassociação. Clique OK para completer a operação
linking Auxes.
Auxes.
ou Cancel para cancelar sem alterações.
Apply methods used for stereo linking Auxes.


digital I/O. Chapter 11: Matrix and Personal Q Mixers 103
Capítulo
Chapter11:
11:Mixers
MatrixMatrix e Personal
and Personal Q 103
Q Mixers 103
Snapshots
Snapshots Associando
Linking e
and Unlinking desassociando
Adjacent Matrix Inputs entradas
Todos os ajustes de Matrix, incluindo
adjacentes no Matrix
Snapshots
All matrix settings, including Pan obut
panexcluding
mas excluindo o status
the stereo Linking
Adjacent andtoUnlinking
inputs Matrix mixersAdjacent Matrix
can be linked Inputs
or unlinked on
de link
associação
status, areestéreo, sãorecalled
stored and armazenados e carregados
with snapshots. com
The stereo aEntradas
per inputadjacentes
pair basis.para
Link os
status canMatrix
be specified
All matrix settings, including Pan but excluding the stereo mixers podemonser a per Ma-
associadas
snapshots. A associação estéreo do master do Matrix
link status of Matrix masters is not snapshottable. não podem Adjacent inputs to Matrix mixers can be linked or unlinked on
ou desassociadas
trix basis (for example,em uma base
inputs por par
1 and 2 candebe
entradas.
linked for Matrix
link status,
ser gravados emare stored and recalled with snapshots. The stereo
cenas. a per input pair basis. Link status can be specified on a per Ma-
O but
1, status de associação
unlinked for Matrix pode ser gives
2). This especificado
you the em umatobase
ability con- por
link status of Matrix masters is not snapshottable. trix basis
Compatibility Matrix
trol (por(for
inputs
example, inputs 1
asexemplo,
either a entradas
1 and
stereo-linkede2 2podem
pair
can beserlinked for Matrix
associadas
or as independent para
Compatibilidade
a1,Matrix
mono
but unlinked
1, mas for
inputs.
Matrix 2). This
desassociadas gives
para you the
a Matrix 2).ability to con- a
Isso oferece
Compatibility
Show files created in previous versions of software preserve all trol inputsde
habilidade as controlar
either a stereo-linked pair or
entradas e pares as independent
associados em estéreo
Arquivos
monoShow
matrix criados em in
settings versões anteriores
working memory doand
software preservam
snapshots. • When linked, level and source on/off controls are linked.
como
mono entradas
inputs. mono independentes.
todos os ajustes
Show de Matrix
files created in mono na memória
previous versionsde
oftrabalho
softwareepreserve
snapshots.
all
Loading a Show file containing stereo-linked Matrixes in a
Carregar
monoum arquivo
matrix Showinque
settings contém
working matrixes
memory andassociadas
snapshots.em
• • •When
Whenunlinked,
Quando associar,
linked, discrete
level and level
controles
sourceand
de on/off
nível
on/off e controls
controls affect
fontearehabilitada/
linked.
previous version of software preserves all date except Matrix desabilitada
each individual são channel.
associados.
estéreo em uma versão anterior dostereo-linked
software preserva todos
in aos
Loading
master
dados,
a Show
linkostatus.
exceto
file containing
statusofdesoftware
associação masterall
dodate
Matrixes
Matrix.
• •Quando
When unlinked, discrete level and on/off controls affect
desassociar, controles de nível e fonte habilitada/
previous version preserves except Matrix Stereo each
inputsindividual
desabilitada(such channel.
as stereo
distintos groups,
afetam Mains
cada canalLR, and ste-
individual.
master link status. reo-linked auxes) are linked by default, such as after a Clear
Ajustes
Settings Stereo inputs (such as stereo groups, Mains LR, and ste-
Entradasoperation.
Console estéreo (como Groups
Adjacent estéreo,
inputs can Mains LR eorAux
be linked associados
unlinked
reo-linked
em estéreo) auxes) are linkedpor
sãoConfig
associados bypadrão,
default,como
such após
as after
umaa Clear
operação
You
Você Settings
can copiar
pode copy and paste
e colar settings
ajustes between
entre mono
Matrixes monoand stereo e
e estéreo, at any time, in or Show mode.
Console
Clear operation.
Console. Adjacent
Entradas inputs can
adjacentes be linked
podem or unlinked ou
ser associadas
utilizar o comando
Matrixes, and useReplace with Mix,
the Replace withclicando com o botão
Mix command, by direito
at any time, ina Config ortempo,
Show mode.
You can copy and paste settings between mono and stereo desassociadas qualquer nos modos Config ou Show.
do right-clicking
mouse no Matrix e escolhendo
on the Matrix and Copy, Paste ou
choosing Replace
Copy, Paste,with Mix
or Re- To link or unlink inputs to Matrix mixers:
Matrixes, and use the Replace with Mix command, by
do place
menu. with Mix from the menu. 1Para associar
Golink
to or ou desassociar
theunlink
Outputs page, entradas
and click para os mixers
to display theMatrix:
Matrix
right-clicking on the Matrix and choosing Copy, Paste, or Re- To inputs to Matrix mixers:
place with Mix from the menu.
Copy/Paste mixer.
Copy and Paste 11VáGo to the Outputs
à página Outputs epage,
cliqueand
paraclick to display
mostrar the
o mixer Matrix
Matrix.
2 mixer.
Click the checkboxes below any adjacent inputs to link or
Copy/Paste
Copy and
Copy/paste só Paste
se aplica
only aosto
applies ajustes
masterdastrip
régua master(fader,
settings (fader,mute,
Mute,
unlink
2 Cliquethem.
nas A check markabaixo
checkboxes in thedecheckbox indicates
cada entrada a linkedpara
adjacente
polarity, delay,
polarity, direct
delay, out).
direct Parâmetros
out). de mixagem
Mix parameters and mixe fontes
sourcessão 2 Click the checkboxes below any adjacent inputs to link or
Copy/paste only applies to master strip settings (fader, mute, associá-las
input ouan
source; desassociá-las.
empty checkbox Umaindicates
marca nounlinked
checkboxsources.
indica uma
manuseados
are handled separadamente.
separately. unlink them. A check mark in the checkbox indicates a linked
polarity, delay, direct out). Mix parameters and mix sources fonte de entrada associada; uma checkbox vazia indica fontes
input source; an empty checkbox indicates unlinked sources.
desassociadas.
Replace
are handled separately.
Replace
Você pode
can usar
Replace
You o menu
use the do botão
right-click direito
menu do mouse
to Replace para
mixer substituir
settings be-
(Replace) ajustes de mixer matrixes
tween mono and stereo Matrixes. mono e stereo.
.
You can use the right-click menu to Replace mixer settings be-
tween mono and stereo Matrixes.
From
.
To Result
Click to link or unlink
From
Mono To
Mono AllResult
mix parameters and mix
sources applied Click to link or unlink
Mono Mono All mix parameters and mix Link controls in the Outputs page
Mono Stereo Allsources applied and mix
mix parameters
sources applied; Pans default to Link controlsand
Relinking in the Outputs page
Offsets
Controles Link na página Outputs
Mono Stereo All mix parameters and mix
center
sources applied; Pans default to Relinking
When inputs and Offsetstheir level and on/off state will
are relinked,
Stereo Stereo Allcenter
mix parameters and mix Reassociação
change as follows:
sources applied When inputs are relinked, their level and on/off state will
Stereo Stereo All mix parameters and mix Quando
change entradas
aschannelsão
follows: reassociadas, seus níveis e estado se alteram
Level Each maintains any offset between the two
Stereo Mono Allsources applied and mix
mix parameters como se segue:
sources except pan applied channels. This offset is not maintained if both linked controls
Level Each channel maintains any offset between the two
Stereo Mono All mix parameters and mix are adjusted beyond their maximum or minimum.
sources except pan applied Level Cada canal
channels. mantém
This offset qualquer
is not diferença
maintained entre
if both os dois
linked canais.
controls
Essa
are diferença
adjusted não
beyond é mantida
their se ambos
maximum or os controles
minimum. associados
On/Off Each channel maintains its discrete on/off state at the
estãothe
time além de seus
sources aremáximo
relinked.ouFor
mínimo.
example, if one channel is
On/Off Each channel maintains its discrete on/off state at the
on and the other is off the stereo input will maintain these set-
On/Off
time theCada canalare
sources mantém seuFor
relinked. estado ativado
example, (On)/não
if one channelativado
is
tings after relinking, thus providing a stereo source with one
(Off) distinto
on and no momento
the other is off theem que input
stereo as fontes
will são reassociadas.
maintain these set-Por
channel
exemplo, on, andcanal
se um the other
está off. Toggling
habilitado one desabilitado,
e o aoutro channel froma entrada
Off
tings after relinking, thus providing stereo source with one
to On results
estéreo manteráin both
esses channels
ajustes switching
depois de On; toggling oferecendo
reassociados, one of
channel on, and the other off. Toggling one channel from Off
the linked
dessa channels
maneira from On
uma fonte to Off
estéreo results
com in both
um canal channels
habilitado e outro
to On results in both channels switching On; toggling one of
não. Alterar
switching um canal de Off para On resulta na alteração de ambos
Off.
the linked channels from On to Off results in both channels
para on; alterar um dos canais associados de On para Off resulta na
switching
alteração deOff.
ambos para Off.

ConfiguringUser
Configuring UserInputs
Inputs Forany
4 4For anyassigned
assignedUser
UserInputs,
Inputs,click
clickthe
thePickoff pop-upmenu
Pickoffpop-up menu
andchoose
and choosethe thedesired
desiredpickoff
pickofffor forthat
thatUserUserInput
Inputsource.
source.
Youcan
You canassign
assignup uptotoeight
eightUser
UserInputs
Inputstotobebeavailable
availableglobally
globally Choices include Top of Channel, Insert Return, and
Configuring User Inputs Choices
4 For anyinclude um Top
assigned of
User Channel,
Inputs, Insert
Inputsclick Return,
the andpop-up menu
Configurando User Inputs Inputs 4 De qualquer dos User atribuídos, clique no menu pop-
Pickoff
totothe
theMatrix
Matrix mixers
mixers and,
and, separately,up
separately, uptotoeight
eightUser
UserInputs
up Pre/Post-Fader
Pickoff
Pre/Post-Fader e (forInput
escolha
(for oInput
ponto Channels)
de orTop
alimentação
Channels) or Topdesejado
ofofFXFXReturn
Return
para and
andaquela
and choose the desired pickoff for that User Input source.
Configuring
toto
VocêYou bebe
pode assignUser
available
available
canatribuir globally
up
até to Inputs
globally totothe
eight
oito User
thePQ
User PQmixers.
mixers.
Inputs
Inputs parato be available
estarem globally
disponíveis
4 For any assigned User Inputs, click the Pickoff pop-up menu
Pre/Post-Fader
fonte User Input.(for (for
As FX
opções Returns).
incluem TopReturn,
of Channel, Insert Return
and Pre/Post-Fader
Choices
choose include
the desiredTop FX ofReturns).
Channel,
pickoff Insert
for that User Input andsource.
Stage
globalmente
to
YouAny the
canof
Any
Rack
para
Matrix
assign
ofthe up
theeight
Features
os mixers
mixers
toUser
eight eight Matrix
and, e,
User Inputs
UserInputs
Inputs separadamente,
separately,to
defined up
be
for to
theeight
available até oito
User
Matrix or User
Inputs
globally
PQ can eAdditional
Pre/Pós-Fader
Pre/Post-Fader
Required
(para
(for Input
Input
Components
Channels)
Channels) orouTopTopofofFXFX Return
Return ande Pre/
defined for the Matrix or PQ can Choices include The(para TopChannel
Input of Channel,Fader Insert Return,
Pickoff and
setting onthetheOptions
Options>>
Inputs
to
to Stage
the para
be estarem
available
Matrix disponíveis
globally to theglobalmente
PQ mixers. para os mixers PQ Pós-Fader The Input FX Returns).
Channel Fader Pickoff setting on
Racks mixers
bebeassigned
assigned totoany
are any
used and,
mixer
with
mixer separately,
input.
an FOH
input. upInputs
User
Rack,
User to eight
Inputs
and User
are
provide
are Inputs
assigned
all stage
assigned from Pre/Post-Fader
from Pre/Post-Fader
The following
Pickoffs
(for FX Channels)
components
(for Input
page
Returns).
determines must be
or purchased
Top
globally separately:
of FX Return
whether the andpickoff
fader
mixers. Pickoffs page determines globally whether the fader pickoff
to audio
be available
the User
I/O globally
Assign
for VENUE panelto the
of
Profile PQ
the mixers.
Matrix
systems. or
Up PQto main
two page.
Stage Racks (for FX Returns).
the
AnyUserof the eightpanel
Assign of the Matrix
User Inputs definedorfor PQthemain
Matrix or PQ can Pre/Post-Fader
page. • Video Os ajustes
points
Display are Input
pre-
(15-inchor Channel
post-fader.
or greaterFader Pickoff na página Options
points
The are pre-
Input Channelor post-fader.
Fader Pickoffflat-panel
setting onVGA display
the Options >
can
Qualquer bedas
used simultaneously,
oito User Inputs supporting
definidas para up
o toare
96assigned
Matrix total
ou inputs.
PQ pode > Pickoffs determinam globalmente se os pontos
be assigned to any mixer input. User Inputs
Any of the eight User Inputs defined for the Matrix or PQ can from recommended;
Pickoffs page 1024x768
determines minimum
globally resolution).
whether the VGA
fader and de
pickoff
The
Click Input Channel
theUser sãoFader Pickoff
button setting
again on the toOptions > Ma-
ser atribuída
the Userato
be assigned
qualquer
Assign entrada
panel
any mixer of thedoMatrix
input.
mixer. or
User
User Inputs
Inputs
PQaremain são atribuídos
page.
assigned from 5 5DVI
Click alimentação
the
supported.
UserAssign
Assign pré ou
button totoreturn
pós-fader.
again return to thethemain
main Ma-
points
Pickoffs are determines
page pre- or post-fader.
globally whether the fader pickoff
peloAudio
painelI/OUser Assign da página Matrix ou PQ. trix
trix screen.
screen.
the User Assign panel of the Matrix or PQ main page.
• 48 inputs with remotely controllable mic preamps and 5• Clique
USB
pointskeyboard pre- and
are botão
no trackball/mouse
or User
post-fader.
Assign novamente (Windows para compatible)
retornar a tela
5 Click the User Assign button again to return to the main Ma-
Matrix.
individually selectable phantom power. Assigning
trix screen. Input Sources
5 Click Assigning
the User Assign
Digital Input
Snake Cable Sources
button
(VENUE again to return to the main Ma-
Profile Systems Only)
• 8 analog output channels; expandable up toUser
48 Input
analog or
Assign Atribuindo
trix screen. Fontes de Entrada
User Input Assign • The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
digital outputs per Stage Rack. Toassign
assign inputsources
sourcestotoa aMatrix
MatrixororPQ
PQ mixer:
Assigning
To
a Digitalinput
SnakeInput
cable.Sources
This cable can be mixer:
purchased directly
Par atribuir fontes de entrada para um mixer Matrix ou PQ:
User Input Assign Go
Assigning to the Outputs
1 Go to theInput
1
from Avid or page
Sources
assembled
Outputs and click to select
a aMatrix
page and click to selectvendor.
by your preferred MatrixororPQ
PQ
To assign
mixer.
mixer. input sources to a Matrix or PQ mixer:
User Input Assign 1 Vá à página Outputs e clique para selecionar um mixer Matrix
• Snake connectors to enable primary andClick
redundant access(if
Clicktotoaccess Toou
assign input sources to a Matrix or at
PQto mixer:
1 2PQ.
Go to the Outputs page and click select a Matrix or PQ or
UserAssign
applicable) connection to a VENUE FOHUser
Rack. Assign Optional
Click
2 Click the Components
theInput
InputSource
Source selector
selector at thethe topofof
top eachMatrix
each Matrix or
1 Gomixer.
PQ channel and select the desired input source. Choices in-
PQto the Outputs
channel page the
and select anddesired
click toinput
selectsource.
a Matrix or PQ in-
Choices
Click to access Clique
2The no selector
following Input Source
components are no topo de
optional, and cada
must canal
be Matrix ou
mixer.clude
clude
2 Click
Auxes,
Auxes, Groups,
Groups,
the Input Mains
Mains and
and any
any ofofthe
the 8available
8of available User
User In-In-
User Assign PQ e selecione
purchased
Source
a fonte
separately: deselector
entrada at the top
desejada. Aseach Matrix
opções or
incluem
Click to access
PQputs.
puts.channel and select the desired input source. Choices in-
System Components User Assign 2 Auxes,
Click Groups,
the
• USB Input Mains e qualquer
disk (orselector
flash Source atumthedos
other portable top8 of
USB
User
eachInputs
storage
disponíveis.
Matrix
deviceorfor
clude
PQ channel Auxes, Groups,
andofselect Mains and any of the 8 available
Choices in- In-
User
transfer Showthe desired
data; 512 MB inputor source.
larger recommended)
puts.
clude Auxes, Groups, Mains and any of the 8 available User In-
puts.
Currently selected Matrix mixer • Headphones with 1/4-inch jack
Currently
All VENUE selected Matrixsystems
Profile mixer include the following:
UserInput
Inputpanel
panelshowing
showingassignments
assignmentsfor
fora aMatrix
Matrixmixer
mixer • Dynamic or condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
User
Currently selected Matrix mixer
(for Talkback)
ToTo configure
•configure
Two (2) the theUser
IEC UserInputs
power Inputs
cablesforfora aMatrix
MatrixororPQ PQmixer:
mixer:
User Input
Currently selected panel
Matrixshowing
mixer assignments for a Matrix mixer Choosing anInput
Inputde Source for
1 • Monitor
Go to the mount
Outputs for VGA
page andscreen
click (screen
a Matrix not
or included)
PQ mixer to Escolhendo
Choosing uma
• MIDIancables
fonte entrada
Source for
(for connectinga amixer
para mixer
um mixer
external MIDI devices)
1 Go to the Outputs page and click a Matrix or PQ mixer to
UserTo
Painel Input
User panel
Input
configure showing
mostrando
the User assignments
atribuições
Inputs de um
for for
a a
mixer Matrix
Matrix
Matrix or mixer
PQ mixer:
• Trackball
navigate to mount
that
navigate to that mixer page. mixer (trackball
page. not included)
• BNC Para cables
utilizar (for
Inputconnecting
Channel Word
ou clock between
FX Return em mixers the
Matrix ou
•GoVENUE Mouse Pad Choosing
To Touse
anuse Input
Input
Input ororand
SourceFXFX forReturn
a mixer
Return channels
channels inina aMatrix
Matrix ororPQ
PQ
To configure
Para 1configurar
2 Click the
to the os
the User
Outputs
User Inputs
page
Inputs
Assign for
and
para aum
button Matrix
click
mixer
to aorMatrix
PQ mixer:
Matrix
display orouUser
the PQPQ: mixer
Assignto VENUE
PQ mixer,system
atribua-os external
como digital
User devices)
Inputs, entrão atribua esses
2 Click the User Assign button to display the User Assign mixer, assign them as User Inputs, then assign those User
•toVENUE
navigate Profile Guide Choosing mixer,
an Input assign
Source them as
for afontes UserdeInputs,
mixer then assign those User
1 Go panel.
panel. the to that
Outputs mixer
page page.
and click a Matrix or PQ mixer to User
• 25-pin
Inputs
Inputs
D-Sub
asinput
como
cables
input
entrada.
(for connecting
sources. to GPI devices)
Vá à•página
1navigate Outputs e clique o mixer Matrix ou PQ para navegar Inputs
To use as
Input or sources.
FX Return channels in a Matrix or PQ
Two (2)
tothe console
thatUsermixer lights
page.
para23a3ClickForany
página
For any theAssign
ofofthe
dele. eight
button
eightavailable
available to User
display
User Inputs,
the User
Inputs, click
Assign
clickthethe Atribuindo
To mixer, Fontes
use Input oraFX
assign Vários
themReturnMixers
as User Inputs, then
channels assign orthose
PQ User
2 Click
panel.
on-screen
the UserSource
Assign pop-up
button menu
to and
display select
the an
User available
Assign source. Assigning
Assigning Sources
Sources to MultipleinMixers
toMultiple a Matrix
Mixers
on-screen Source pop-up menu and select an available source. Inputs as input sources.
mixer, assign them as User Inputs, then assign those User
Clique
2panel. • no
Choices
Rack(s)
Choices
3 For any
botão (see
User
include
include
of the
next)
Assign
Channels,
Channels,
eight para
FX
availableFXvisualizar
Returns,
Returns,
User Inputs,oStage
painel
Stage User
and
and
click FOH Assign.
FOH
the audio VENUE
audio Você
Inputs
Profile
pode selecionar
asselect
inputmultiple
váriosExpansion
mixers Matrix e/ou
sources. Matrix and/or PQ mixers
Options
PQ simultaneamente
e You
You canselect
atribuir
can fontes para
multiple todos
Matrix os mixers
and/or selecionados
PQ mixers ao mesmo
sources,
sources, and Pro Tools record/playback options (if any). Assigning Sources to Multiple Mixers
33DeFor any ofand
on-screen
qualquer the Pro
Source
um dos
Tools
pop-up
eight record/playback
available
oito
menu
UseriLoks,User
Inputs
andInputs,
selectoptions
disponíveis,
an
click (if any).
available
the
clique
source.
no menu Thesimultaneously
tempo. following options
simultaneously andassign
and assign
can be sources
addedto
sources totoall
allselected
VENUEselected mixers
Profile atatthe
systems.
mixers the
Racks,
Choices
Software
include
CDs,
Channels, FX
and
Returns,
Cables
Stage and FOH audio Assigning Sources to Multiple Mixers
on-screen
pop-up Source Source pop-up
na tela menu and
e selecione umaselect
fontean available As
disponível. source.
opções Forsame
same time.
details
time. on all VENUE systems and options, visit the Avid
sources, and Pro You can select multiple Matrix and/or PQ mixers
incluem
Each
Choices Channels,
Mix Rack
include FXTools
or FOH
Channels, record/playback
Returns,
Rack fontes
includes:
FX Returns, deStageoptions
áudio and (if any).
Stage
FOH eaudio
FOH, e Par atribuir
website fontesand
(www.avid.com).
simultaneously de assign
entrada para mais
sources to allque um mixer
selected mixersMatrix
at theou
opções You can
ToTo select
assign multiple
input PQ: Matrix
sources totomoreand/or
more than PQ mixers
one Matrixmixer,
mixer,orormore
more
sources,• de gravação/reprodução
and
System Pro do Pro Tools
Tools record/playback
Restore CD (se existente).
options (if any). mais
same que
assign
time.um mixer
input sources than one Matrix
simultaneously
thanone
than onePQ and
PQmixer, assign
mixer, sources
time: to all selected mixers at the
atata atime:
1Mix àRack Options
• ECx Ethernet Control Software Installer CD same Vátime.
Go página Outputs epage
useand Multi-Select (ou a tecla Shift) para
To1Go totothe
assign theOutputs
input Outputs
sources pageto more
and use useMulti-Select
than Multi-Select
one Matrix mixer, (orthe
the Shift
orShift
more
• Standalone Software Installer CD 1
selecionar
than one dois
PQ ou mais
mixer, at a mixers
time: Matrix, ou dois ou (or mais mixers PQ,
To key)toto
key)
assign inputselect
select twooror
two
sources to more
moremore Matrix
Matrix
than mixers,
mixers,
one Matrix oror twooror
two
mixer, more
more
or more PQPQ
• iLok USB Smart Key (for storing plug-in authorizations) I/O
na Options
seção de faders na parte inferior da tela.
than mixers,
1 one
mixers,
Go toPQin in
the thethe
mixer, fader display
at a display
fader
Outputs time:
page andatatthe
thebottom
use bottomofofthe
Multi-Select the screen.
screen.
(or the Shift
• Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16
AI16
1 2GoClique
key)
2 to
Click
to theoselect
seletor
the
Outputs two Source
Source or more no Matrix
selector
page and topo
at
use de
the um of
mixers,
top canal
Multi-Select a or do
mixer
(or oranalog
twomixer
the (1–8,
more
channel
Shift PQLeft,
(1–8,
• Two (2) IEC power cables 2 Click the Source selector at the top of a mixer channel (1–8,
mic/line
Right,
mixers,
Left,C/Mono level
in
Right, the inputs
ou User)
fader
C/Mono, e Matrix
selecione
display
or User) atand
the aselect
fonte
bottom desejada.
the ofdesired
the screen.
source.
key) to select two or more mixers,
Left, Right, C/Mono, or User) and select the desired source. or two or more PQ
Choosing a User Assign source for a Matrix mixer mixers,
AO16
2 Clickin the
the fader
Analog Output
Source display
Cardatthat
selector the
at thebottom
provides
top of a of
16 the screen.
analog
mixer line level
channel (1–8,
Choosing a User Assign source for a Matrix mixer
Left, the
2 Click Right, C/Mono,
Source or User)
selector at theand
topselect the desired
of a mixer channelsource.
(1–8,
• Two a(2)
Choosing IEC
User power
Assign cables
source for a Matrix mixer Left, Right, C/Mono, or User) and select the desired source.
Choosinguma
Escolhendo a User Assign
fonte source
User Assign forum
para a mixer
MatrixMatrix
mixer line level outputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.

Chapter11:
Chapter 11:Matrix
Matrixand
andPersonal
PersonalQQMixers 105
Mixers 105
digital I/O.
Capítulo
Chapter 11: 11: Mixers
Matrix and Matrix e Personal
Personal Q Mixers Q105
105
Resetting Matrix and PQ Mixer Input
Resetting Matrix andde PQ Mixer Input
Adjusting Matrix
Adjusting Matrix and
and PQ
PQ Mixer
Mixer Input
Input Resetando
Controls controles de entrada Mixers Matrix e PQ
Controls Controls
Ajustando
Controls Controles de Entrada Dos Mixers Resetting Matrix and PQ Mixer Input
Adjusting Matrix and PQ Mixer Input Você
You pode resetar
can reset
Controls
You
ospan
level, ajustes de nível,
and stereo linkpan e associação
settings link de
for any Matrix
can reset level, pan and stereo link settings for any Matrix
Matrix e PQ qualquer mixer Matrix ou PQ. Atribuições de fontes de entrada se
Controls
Matrix and PQ Mixer Input Levels
or PQ mixer. Input source assignments persist.
or PQ mixer. Input source assignments persist.
mantém.
Matrix and PQ Mixer Input Levels
Níveis de entrada dos mixers Matrix e PQ
You can reset level, pan and stereo link settings for any Matrix
The levels for the first eight input sources (or “sends”) of a Ma- orreset
To PQ mixer. Input
a Matrix source
or PQ mixerassignments persist.
parameter to its default value:
Matrix
The and
levels for the PQ Mixer
first eight Input
input sourcesLevels
(or “sends”) of a Ma- To reset
Para a Matrix
resetar or PQ mixer
os parâmetros de parameter
um mixer to its default
Matrix ou PQvalue:
para seus
trix or PQ as
Os níveis mixer are controlled by theentrada
Output Encoders.
trix orpara primeiras
PQ mixer oito fontes
are controlled by de
the Output(ou “sends”) de
Encoders. valores-padrão:
1 Select one or more Matrix or PQ mixers you want to change.
Select
um mixer
The Matrix ou PQ
levels for thesão
firstcontrolados
eight inputpelos
sourcescodificadores
(or “sends”) Output.
of a Ma-
1 To resetone or more
a Matrix or Matrix or PQ
PQ mixer mixers you
parameter to itswant to change.
default value:
The eight Output encoders control the input levels of the cur- Right-click
122Selecione the
umthe encoder
oumore
mais on-screen
mixers Matrix and
ou choose
PQchoose
que Reset.
trix or PQ mixer are controlled by the Output Encoders.
The eight Output encoders control the input levels of the cur- 1Right-click
Select one or encoder on-screen
Matrix or and
PQ mixers you deseja
toalterar.
Reset.
want change.
rently
Os oito selected Matrix
codificadores Outputor or PQ mixer
controlam input sources.
o nível
rently selected Matrix PQ mixer inputdesources.
entrada das fontes
de entrada do mixer
The eight Matrix
Output ou PQ selecionado.
encoders control the input levels of the cur- To Right-click
2 reset the or
all Matrix encoder on-screen
PQ mixer and choose
parameters to their Reset.
default
Clique
2To resetcom o botão
all Matrix ordireito no
PQ mixer codificador
parametersnatotela default Reset.
e escolha
their
rently selected Matrix or PQ mixer input sources. values:
values:
Para
1To
resetar
Select alltodos
resetone os parâmetros
Matrix
or moreorMatrix
PQ mixer de mixerstoMatrix
parameters
or PQ mixers you their ou PQ para
wantdefault
to change.
seusSelect one or more Matrix or PQ mixers you want to change.
valores-padrão:
1 values:
2 Click the pop-up menu at the bottom of the mixer area and
1 Select one or more Matrix or PQ mixers you want to change.
1 choose
Selecione um Mix.
Reset ou mais mixers Matrix ou PQ que deseja alterar.
choose Reset Mix.
2 Clique no menu pop-up na parte inferior da area do mixer e escolha
choose Reset Mix.
Matrixes Reset Mix.
Matrixes
Matrixes Resetting a mix

Resetting a mix
Banking Matrix mixers to the Output faders
Banking Matrix mixers to the Output faders
Associando mixers Matrix aos faders Output
To control mixer input source (“send”) levels on the console: Clearing Matrix
Limpando Matrix and
Ajustes
Resetting
Clearing and PQ
PQ Mixer
Mixer Settings
Settings
dos Mixer Matrix e PQ
a mix
ToBanking
controlMatrix
mixermixers
input tosource (“send”)
the Output levels on the console:
faders
Para controlar os níveis de entrada das fontes de entrada (“send”)
Press the Matrixes switch or the Personal Qs switch in the Youpode
Você can clear mixer
limpar input de
atribuições assignments to
entrada deto quickly
mixer set
paraset all the
rapidamente
1
na console:
Press
1 To the mixer
control Matrixes switch
input source or (“send”)
the PersonallevelsQsonswitch in the
the console: Clearing
You can clear Matrix
mixer and
input PQ Mixer
assignments Settings
quickly all the
Output fader assign section. ajustar
input todas asto
sources fontes
None. de entrada para None.
Output fader assign section. input sources to None.
1 Pressione o switch Matrixes ou Personal Q na seção Output.
1 Press the Matrixes switch or the Personal Qs switch in the You can clear mixer input assignments to quickly set all the
2 Press a Select switch for a Matrix or PQ to select that mixer Para limpar atribuições
Press a fader
2 Output
2 Pressione Select switchsection.
assign for a Matrix um or PQ to selectou that mixer Toinput
clearsources
Matrix to PQ de
or None. entradas
input de Matrix ou PQ:
assignments:
and viewum its switch
inputs.Select
Input para
parameters mixer Matrix
are shown on PQ
the para
top To clear Matrix or PQ input assignments:
selecioná-lo
and viewe its verinputs.
suas entradas. Os parâmetros
Input parameters are shown de entrada
on the top são Select one or more
2 Press
row
mostrados of na
thealinha
Select
Output switch
LCD.for
superior aLCD
Input
dos Matrix
source orlevels
Output. PQ Ostoníveis
select
are that
controlled
das mixer
by
fontes 111Selecione
Select umor maisMatrix
oumore or PQ mixers
mixer Matrix
or PQ ou PQ que you wantalterar.
youdeseja
to clear.
row of the Output LCD. Input source levels are controlled by To clearone
Matrix or PQMatrix mixers
input assignments: want to clear.
de entrada
the são controlados
andencoders,
view and output
its inputs. pelos
Input codificadores,
levels areeshown
are controlled
parameters os níveis onde
by the saída
faders.
the top 2 Click the pop-up menu at the bottom of the mixer area and
pelosthe
row
encoders, and output levels are controlled by the faders.
faders.
of the Output LCD. Input source levels are controlled by 22Clique
1Click no
the
Select menu
one or pop-up
pop-up menu
more parte inferior
at the
Matrix orbottomda of
área
PQ mixers thedo mixer
mixer
you want e escolha
area
to and
clear.
3 Press the encoder to turn that mixer input source on or off. choose
Clear Clear
MixClear Mix Sources.
Sources.
Press choose Mix Sources.
3 the
3 Pressione othe
encoders, encoder
codificador to
and output
paraturn thatou
levels
ativar mixer
are inputa source
controlled
desativar byde
fonte on
the or off.
faders.
entrada 2 Click the pop-up menu at the bottom of the mixer area and
do mixer.
4 Turn the Output encoders 1–8 to set the level for the first choose Clear Mix
4 3Turn
PressthetheOutput
encoder encoders
to turn 1–8thatto set the
mixer level
input for the
source onfirst
or off. Copiando Ajustes
Copying Matrix
Matrix and deSources.
and PQ Entrada de Mixers Matrix e PQ
PQ Mixer
Mixer Input
Input Settings
Settings
eight input sources assigned to the currently selected Matrix
4 Gire os codificadores
eight input sources Output
assigned 1–8toparatheajustar
currentlyo nível das primeiras
selected Matrix Copying
or
oito or4 PQ
Turn
fontes mixer.
de the Output
entrada encoders
atribuídas ao1–8
mixerto Matrix
set theou level
PQ for the first
atualmente Você
Youpode copiar
can copy ajustes
mixer de um
settings mixer
from oneMatrix
Matrixou or
PQPQpara outro
mixer to de
PQ mixer. Copying
You can copyMatrix and from
mixer settings PQ Mixer
one MatrixInput
or PQSettings
mixer to
selecionado.
eight input sources assigned to the currently selected Matrix mesmo
anothertipo. Isso of
mixer permite rapidamente
the same duplicar
type. This mixagens
lets you quicklyde monitor
dupli-
5 To adjust source inputs 9–12, press the Next Page switch to another mixer of the same type. This lets you quickly dupli-
ToPQadjust source inputs 9–12, press the Next Page switch to ou outras
canmandadas de sinal.
5 or mixer.
5 Para
bankajustar
those assources
fontes to de Output
entradaEncoders
9–12, pressione
5–8. To o switchtoNext
return cate
Youmonitor
copymixes
mixerorsettings
other signal
from feeds.
one Matrix or PQ mixer to
bank those sources tofontes
Output Encoders 5–8. To cate monitor mixes or other signal feeds.
Pagesources
para associar
1–8, press
5 To adjust
essas
source the aos
Prev 9–12,
inputs Page codificadores
switch.
press the Next dereturn
Page
to
saídaswitch
Output to another mixer of the same type. This lets you quickly dupli-
5–8.sources
Para retornar
1–8, press paratheasPrevfontes
Page1–8, pressione o switch Prev
switch. Copiar ajustes
Copying mixer para um
settings mixer sobrescreve
overwrites todosonosthe
all the settings ajustes
bank those sources to Output Encoders 5–8. To return to cateCopying
monitormixer
mixes or other
settings signal feeds.
overwrites all the settings on the
Page. existentes nele.
destination mixer.
sources 1–8, press the Prev Page switch. destination mixer.
Matrix and PQ Mixer Input Pan
Matrix and
Posicionamento (pan)PQ
das Mixer Input
Entrada de MixersPan
Matrix e PQ Copying mixer settings overwrites all the settings on the
Para copiarsettings
To copy ajustes between
entre mixers:
mixers:
The Matrix and PQ mixer input pan controls adjust the pan- To copydestination mixer. mixers:
settings between
TheMatrix
Matrix
Os controles and
panand PQ
dasPQ Mixer
mixer
entradas dos Input
input mixers Pan eadjust
pan controls
Matrix the pan-
PQ ajustam o Select theo Matrix
111Selecione or PQ mixer
mixer or
Matrix that
ou PQthat you
queyou want to bedestino
deseja the des-
ning of each mixer input across the stereo outputs of either a
posicionamento
ning of eachde cadainput
mixer entrada do mixer
across pelasoutputs
the stereo saídas estéreo
of eitherdea Select
To copythe Matrix
settings PQ mixer
between mixers: wantcomo
to be the des-dos
linked stereoand
The Matrix Matrix
PQ mixer
mixer or PQ mixer
input pan (PQ mixers
controls arethe
adjust always
pan- ajustes copiados
tination para que
of the copied seja apresentado
settings na tela. on-screen.
so that it is displayed
um mixer
linkedmatrix
stereoassociado em estéreo
Matrix mixer ou de
or PQ mixer ummixers
(PQ mixer PQ
are(mixers
always tination of the copied settings so that it is displayed on-screen.
1 Select the Matrix or PQ mixer that you want to be the des-
stereo).
PQ são ning of each
sempre mixer input across the stereo outputs of either a
estéreo). Click the pop-up menu at the bottom of the mixer area,
stereo). 222Clique
Clickno menu
the
tination the pop-up
ofpop-up na
menu
copied parte
at theinferior
settings sobottom daisof
that it área
thede mixer
mixer
displayed e escolha
area,
on-screen.
linked stereo Matrix mixer or PQ mixer (PQ mixers are always chooseWith
Replace With Mix and Mix Sources From.
Para To
controlar Replace Mix e Mix Sources From.
choose Replace With Mix and Mix Sources From.
controloMatrix
stereo). pan dasend
mandada
pan: Matrix: 2 Click the pop-up menu at the bottom of the mixer area,
To control Matrix send pan: 3 Choose the Mtx (Matrix mixer) or PQ from the sub-menu
1 Press the Matrix
Matrixes na seção
switch deOutput
in the atribuição deassign
fader faders.section. ChooseReplace
33Escolha
choose othe
MtxMtx (Matrix
(mixer
With mixer)
Matrix)
Mix and ou or
Mix PQPQdofrom
Sources the sub-menu
submenu
From. cujos ajustes
Press the Matrixes switch whose settings you want to copy to the current mixer.
1 To control Matrix send pan:in the Output fader assign section. deseja
whosecopiar para
settings youo mixer
want atualmente selecionado.
to copy to the current mixer.
2 Press um
an Output channel 3 Choose the Mtx (Matrix mixer) or PQ from the sub-menu
2 Pressione
2 1Press
Pressan
switch
Output
the
Select
channel
Matrixes
deSelect
switchSelect
switch
um canal
in theswitch
Output
to select
Output para
tofader
select
a Matrix.
aselecionar
Matrix.
assign section.
o Matrix. whose settings you want to copy to the current mixer.
3 Press the Pan switch located below the Prev Page and Next
3 2Press
Pressthe
anPan switch
Output located
channel below
Select the Prev
switch Page aand
to select Next
Matrix.
Page switches.
3 Pressione o switch Pan localizado abaixo dos switches Prev Page
Page switches.
e Next3 Page.
Press the Pan switch located below the Prev Page and Next
4 Adjust the Output Encoder 1–8 to adjust pan on Matrix in-
Adjust
4 Page the Output Encoder 1–8 to adjust pan on Matrix in-
switches.
puts 1–8.
4 Ajuste To access inputs
os codificadores 9–12 1–8
Output for the current
para mixer,
ajustar press the
o pan
puts 1–8. To access inputs 9–12 for the current mixer, pressdas
the
entradas
Next 1–8
Pagedo
4 Adjust Matrix.
switch.
the Output Para acessar
Encoder 1–8astoentradas 9–12
adjust pan on do mixerin-
Matrix
Next Page switch.
atual,puts
pressione o access
1–8. To switch inputs
Next Page.
9–12 for the current mixer, press the
106 Next Page
VENUE switch.
Profile Guide
106
106Guia VENUE
VENUE Profile
Profile Guide
Delay Compensation with Matrix and
Adjusting Matrix and PQ Mixer Output PQ Mixers
Controls Delay
DelayCompensation
Compensation
Compensação with
with
de Delay com Mixers Matrix
e PQ and
Matrix
Matrix and
Adjusting
AdjustingMatrix
Matrixand
andPQPQMixer
MixerOutput
Output VENUE automatically compensates for the delay offsets that
PQ
PQMixers
Mixers
Ajustando
ControlsControles de Saída de Mixers
Controls
Matrix and PQ Mixer Output Levels
can arise
VENUE when combining
automaticamente differentas
compensa signal paths within
diferenças de delaya Ma-que
Matrix
Stagee PQ
Rack Features Additional
VENUE
trix
VENUE
podem orsurgir
PQ mixer.Required
automatically
automatically
quando Components
sãocompensates
compensates
combinados for
forthe
thedelay
diferentes delay offsets that
offsetsde
caminhos that
sinal
Matrix andare PQusedoutput levels are controlled by the Output can
canarise
fad- dentro de um
arise whenmixer
when combining
Matrix ou different
combining differentsignal
PQ. signalpaths
pathswithin
withinaaMa- Ma-
Matrix
Níveis Matrix
Stage Racks
de Saída and
deand PQ
Mixers Mixer
PQwith
Mixer
Matrix an
e PQ Output
FOHOutput Levels
Rack, andLevels
provide all stage The following components must be purchased separately:
Additional
trix
trix ororPQPQ Information
mixer.
mixer. about Delay Compensation
ers. I/O for VENUE Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks
audio
Matrix and PQ Informações
• Video Display Adicionais sobre
(15-inch orCompensação
greater flat-panel de Delay
VGA display
Matrix and PQoutput
output levels
levels are
arecontrolled
controlled byby the
theOutput
Output fad-
fad- • The overall latency through a Matrix or PQ mixer is de-
Níveis
can de
ers.
besaída
used Matrix e PQ são
simultaneously, controlados
supporting pelos
up to faders
96 Output.
total inputs. • A latência
Additional
recommended;
Additional total
Informationde um
1024x768
Information mixer
about Matrix
Delay
minimum
about Delay ou PQ mixer éVGA
Compensation
resolution).
Compensation determinada
and
ers.
To control mixer output levels: termined bycom
theapath with the highest latency.
DVI pelo caminho
supported. mais alta latência.
ParaAudio
controlar níveis de saída do mixer:
the Matrixes or PQ switch to bank Matrix or PQ mixers • •Todas
I/O •• The The
All overall
overall
inputs
as latency
latency
within
entradas through
dea um through
Matrix
mixer aPQ
aMatrix
orMatrix Matrix
mix or
ouare
PQ PQPQmixer
tem a faseisis
orguaranteed
mixer tode-
de-
be
correta
1 Press
ToTocontrol
controlmixer
mixeroutput
outputlevels:
levels: • USB termined
keyboard
termined
garantida,
phase by
masbythe
and
accurate, os path
path
mixes
but with
trackball/mouse
the the
withare
não
mixes the
são highest
not(Windows
highest latency.
compatible)
latency.
necessariamente
necessarily alinhados
aligned to
to• the
1 Pressione 48 Output
o switchwith
inputs faders.
Matrix ou PQ para
remotely associar mic
controllable os mixers Matrix
preamps andou
PQ aos faders
11Press
Press theOutput.
the Matrixes
Matrixes or
orPQPQswitch
switchtotobank
bank Matrix
Matrixor orPQ
PQmixers
mixers •uns
• All aos
each
All outros.
inputs
other.
inputs Issoensures
within
This
within agarante
aMatrix
Matrix que
or
orPQ
that nenhuma
allmix
PQ mixare
mixes mix
are
are serápenalized
guaranteed
not penalizada
guaranteed totobebe
2 Adjust the fader corresponding to the output level you want Digitalno inSnake
caso
phasethe
phase da Cable
accurate,
case of
accurate, (VENUE
existência
onebut
or
but de Profile
um
mixes
more
mixes ou
are Systems
mais
not
exceptionally
are not Only)
caminhos
necessarily de sinal
aligned
high-latency
necessarily aligned com
to
sig-
to
toto the
the Output
Output faders.
faders.
to• change.
2 Ajuste
8 analog output channels; expandable up to 48 analog or
o fader correspondente do nível de saída que deseja • The latências
each
nal
each excepcionalmente
other.
paths.
connectionother. This
Thisensures
betweenensures
FOH altas.
that
that
Rack all mixes
alland
mixes are
Stage not
notpenalized
areRack penalized
requires
alterar. digital
22Adjust
Adjust theoutputs
the fader per Stage Rack.totothe
fadercorresponding
corresponding theoutput
outputlevel
levelyou want • a Digital
youwant A incompensação
inthethe case
case
Snake ofof
de
one
one
cable.
delay
orormore
This
apenas
more
tem efeito
exceptionally
cableexceptionally
can be
para pontos
high-latency
high-latency
purchased directly sig-de
sig-
•alimentação
Delay compensationpós-insert only accountsCanais
de canais. for a channel’s
que alimentam
totochange.
change. nal paths.
PQ
Limiter de Mixer
Saída do Output
Synchronization Mixer
and PQ
ControlLimiter
I/O
from
User nal
Avid paths.
post-insertor assembled
Inputs pickoff. by your preferred
e AuxesChannels
(pré-insert) nãovendor.
that feed User Inputs
serão and
totalmente
•compensados.
• Delay
Delaycompensation
Auxes (pre-insert)
compensation willonly
not accounts
only be for
foraachannel’s
fully compensated
accounts for.
channel’s
A•limiter
Snake connectors
can beaplicado
appliedtotoàenable primary
the output and
of PQ redundant
PQ.mixers. (ifdo
PQ output
PQPQMixer
Um limiter pode
Mixer serOutput
Output Limiter
saída
Limiter do mixer Os controles
Optional post-insert
post-insert pickoff.
pickoff.Channels
Components Channelsthat thatfeedfeedUser
UserInputs
Inputsand and
limiter applicable)
limiter
da saídacontrols connection
do PQappear
aparecem to
on-screena VENUE
apenasonly. FOH Rack.
(Matrix mixers
na tela.(Mixers Matrix donãonot See also “Settings
Veja
Auxes
Auxes “Ajustes parafor
(pre-insert)
(pre-insert) willDelay
Compensação
willnot Compensation”
notbe befully
fullydecompensated
Delay” on
na page
compensated página61.61.
for.
for.
possuem
Ahave limiters
Alimiter can
output
limiter can de
bebesaída.)
applied
appliedtotothe
limiters.) theoutput
outputofofPQ
PQmixers.
mixers.PQPQoutput
output The following components are optional, and must be
limiter
limitercontrols
controlsappear
appearon-screen
on-screenonly.
only.(Matrix
(Matrixmixers
mixersdo
donot
not See
Seealso
also“Settings
“Settingsfor
forDelay
DelayCompensation”
Compensation”on
onpage
page61.
61.
Para usar purchased separately:
haveum
Tohave
limiter
output
useoutput
na saída de um mixer PQ:
limiters.)
limiters.)
a limiter on the output of a PQ mixer:
System Components Snapshot Data
• USB flash disk and
(or other Parameters
portable for for
USB storage device
1 Vá à1 página Outputs.
Go to the Outputs page. Dados
Matrix e Mixers
transfer ofParâmetros de or Cena
Show data; 512 MB para Mixers
larger recommended)
To
Touse
useaalimiter
limiteron
onthe
theoutput
outputofofaaPQ
PQmixer:
mixer: Snapshot Data and Parameters for
Included
2 Selecione
2 Select um Components
a PQcanal PQ para
channel apresentar
to display o mixer
the mixer que to
you want deseja
con-
Snapshot
Matrix Dataspeakers
• Near-field monitor and Parameters for
for mix position monitoring
11 Go
Gototothe
configurar.
figure.
theOutputs
Outputspage.
page. Matrix
Matrix Mixers
Snapshots can
• Headphones
store and recall all source assignments of each
Mixers
with 1/4-inch jack
All VENUE Profile systems include the following: Matrix and
Snapshots PQ mixer
podem when the
armazenar MTX (Matrix)
e carregar todasorasPQatribuições
data type isde
22 Select
SelectaaPQPQchannel
channeltotodisplay
displaythe
themixer
mixeryouyouwant
wanttotocon-con- • Dynamic
fonte de cada
Snapshots
scoped.
SnapshotsIn canorstore
condenser
mixer
addition,
can Matrix
store and
all
and emicrophone
PQ
recall
User quando
all
Input
recall allsource and
os XLR
tipos
assignments
assignments
source mic
de
are
assignments cable
dados
of
ofeach
stored, MTX
let-
each
3 Clique no botão
3•Click
VENUE Limiterconsole
the Profile
on-screenIn Limiter
da tela para habilitar
In button o limiter.the limiter.
to engage
figure.
figure. ting(for
(Matrix)
Matrix ou
you
Matrix Talkback)
andPQPQestão
mixer
reconfigure
and PQ abrangidos.
mixer when
whenthe
Matrix Além
or MTX
the PQ
MTX disso,and
(Matrix)
mixers
(Matrix) todas
or PQas
PQ
orUserdataatribuições
type
Input
data isis
as-
type
4•Drag
4 Arraste Two (2)on-screen
the
o knob IEC power cables
daLimiter knob to set the limiterdothreshold. descoped.
User Input sãoaarmazenadas, permitindo reconfigurar atribuições
theLimiter tela para ajustar o to
threshold limiter.
33Click the on-screen Limiter In button scoped. In
Inaddition,
• Footswitches
signments on per
addition, all
allUser
UserInput
(upsnapshot
to 2) basis,assignments
Input if desired.
assignments are
arestored,
stored, let-
let-
Click on-screen Limiter In button toengage
engagethethe limiter.
limiter.
• Monitor mount for VGA screen (screen not included) deting
mixer
tingyou
youMatrix ou PQMatrix
reconfigure
reconfigure e Useroror
Matrix Input
PQPQ em base
mixers
mixers andpor
and User snapshot,
User Input
Inputas-as-se
Balance dethe
44•Drag Saída de Mixers
on-screen LimiterMatrix
knob Associados emthreshold.
Estéreo desejado.
The following table describes what can be stored and recalled
Drag the
Trackball on-screen
mount Limiter
(trackball notto
knob toset
setthe
thelimiter
included) limiter threshold. signments on a per snapshot basis, if desired.
signments on a(for
perconnecting
snapshot basis,
e PQ Stereo-Linked Matrix and PQ Mixer Output • BNC cables Wordif clock
desired.
between the
in each snapshot when the MTX and PQ data type is scoped.
Balance
• VENUE Mouse Pad A The VENUE
seguinte
Thefollowing
system
tabela
followingtable
and
descreve external
o que
tabledescribes
digital
pode
describeswhat ser
whatcan
devices)
armazenado
canbebestored
storedand e recalled
and carregado
recalled
Stereo-Linked
MixersStereo-Linked
•PQ e mixerProfile
VENUE Matrix
Matrixand
MatrixGuide
associados and PQ
PQMixer
em estéreo Mixer Output
oferecemOutput
controle emTable
•
12. snapshot
cada
25-pin
inineach
Snapshot data
D-Sub
eachsnapshot
types os
quando
cables
snapshotwhen
whenthe
andtipos
(for
theMTX
parameters
MTXand
de
connecting
andPQ
for Matrix
dados
to GPI
PQdata
MTX and
e
devices)
datatype
PQ estão
PQ
typeisisscoped.
scoped.
PQ Mixers
de balance do and de
sinal stereo-linked
saída do Matrix
mixer mixers
pelas suasprovide
saídas aestéreo.
balance
Balance
Balance
• Matrix
Two (2) console lightssaída mono, portanto não possuem abrangidos.
Snapshot
(Mixers
control mono
for possuem
controlling the balance of the mixer output signal Table Included
dataParameters (for Each Scoped Channel Strip)
Data12.
Table 12.Snapshot
TypeSnapshot data types
typesand
andparameters
parameters for
forMatrix
Matrixand
andPQ
PQ
controle
PQ Balance.)
• Mixers
Protective
across
PQ and Dust
its stereo
Mixers and Cover(Mono
stereo-linked
outputs.
stereo-linkedMatrix mixers
Matrix
Matrix provide
mixers
mixers haveaamono
provide balance
balance
Snapshot
Snapshot
control
outputs,
controlfor
socontrolling
• Rack(s)
for(see
they do notthe
next)
controlling balance
have
the ofofthe
Balance
balance themixer
mixeroutput
controls.) outputsignal
Use o codificador Balance da tela na página Outputs de qualquer
signal VENUE
MTX
Data TypeProfile Expansion Options
DataType
Mixer Input
Included
Included Sources, (for
Parameters
Parameters User Input
(forEach
Each Assignments
Scoped
Scoped (global
Channel
ChannelStrip)
Strip)
to all Matrixes), and pickoffs; Mixer Input level, Mixer
mixeracross
Matrixits
across oustereo
its stereo
PQ queoutputs.
outputs.(Mono
(Mono
necessite Matrix
Matrix
ajustar mixers
de have
mixers
os níveis havemono
mono
balance. Input on/off state and Mixer Input Link state
Use the on-screen
outputs, so
sothey
theydo Balance
not
nothave encoder in the
Balance Outputs page of all The
MTXfollowing options
Mixer can
MixerInput be added
Sources, to Input
User VENUE Profile
InputAssignments systems.
(global
Racks,
outputs,Software doCDs, iLoks,
have andcontrols.)
Balance Cables
controls.) MTX Input Sources, User Assignments (global
Matrix oroPQ
Para controlar mixers
balance deifsaída
youdeneed to balance
mixers levels.
Matrix ou PQ: ForPQ to
details on all
toall
allMatrixes),
VENUE and
systems
Matrixes), andpickoffs;
and Mixer
options,
pickoffs; MixerInput
visit
Inputlevel,
the
level,Mixer
Avid
Mixer
Mixer Input Sources, User Input Assignments (global
Use
Usethe
Each theon-screen
Mix on-screen
Rack Rackencoder
Balance
or FOHBalance encoderininthe
includes: theOutputs
Outputspage
pageofofall
all Input
Input on/off
website (www.avid.com).on/offstate
stateand
and Mixer
Mixer Input
Input Link
Linkstate
state
to all PQs) and pickoffs; Mixer input level, pan, and
1 Selecione
Matrix
Matrix
To o
or canal
PQ
orMatrix
• control
System PQ de
mixerssaída
mixers
Restore if Matrix
you
PQifmixer
orCD need
you needassociado
to balance em
to balance:
output estéreo
levels.
balance levels. ou PQ PQ on/off
Mixer state, Mixer Input Link state, Limiter threshold
PQ MixerInput
InputSources,
Sources, User
User Input
Input Assignments
Assignments (global
(global
pressionando seu switch Select na seção Output Faders. and
to LImiterandin/out
toall
allPQs)
PQs) andpickoffs;
pickoffs;Mixer
Mixerinput
inputlevel,
level,pan,
pan,and
and
1•Target
ECx Ethernet Control Matrix
the stereo-linked Software
orInstaller
PQ mixer
To control Matrix or PQ mixer output balance:
CD
output channel Mix Rack Options
on/off
To control Matrix or PQ mixer output balance: on/offstate,
state,Mixer
MixerInput
InputLink
Linkstate,
state,Limiter
Limiterthreshold
threshold
2 Clique
by eStandalone
ajuste oits
• pressing codificador
Select Balance
switch
Software da
in the
Installer CDtela na página
Output Faders Outputs
section. do
and
andLImiter
LImiterin/out
in/out
mixer11PQ selecionado.
Target
Target the
thestereo-linked
stereo-linkedMatrix
MatrixororPQ
PQmixer
mixeroutput
outputchannel
channel You cannot snapshot link state of Matrix outputs.
I/O Options
2• Click
iLok and
USBadjust
SmarttheKeyon-screen
(for storing plug-in
Balance authorizations)
encoder in the Out-
by
bypressing
pressingitsitsSelect
Selectswitch
switchininthe
theOutput
OutputFaders
Faderssection.
section.
• Plug-in
Delayputs
de Saída
page de installer
forMixers discs (if
Matrix
the targeted PQany) with pre-authorized iLok
mixer. The Analog
AI16 Você
Recall
You Mic/Line
não
Safe
Youcannot
cannotpode
tab of Input
salvar
snapshot em
the link
snapshot Card
Snapshots
link that
snapshots
state
state provides
o estado
page
ofof 16deanalog
provides
Matrix
Matrix outputs.
outputs.associações
two data
22•Click
Twoand
Click adjust
andIEC
(2) adjust the
powertheon-screen
cables Balanceencoder
on-screenBalance encoderininthe
theOut-
Out- “Mix”dedata
mic/line saídas
level Matrix.
inputs
types that let you discretely “safe” source and/or
Um delay
puts
puts variável
page
page for
for(0–500
the
the ms) pode
targeted
targetedPQPQ ser aplicado à saída de mixers
mixer.
mixer.
Matrix.• One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console
Matrix Mixer veja
Para instruções, Output
“DelayDelay
de Saída” na página 84. The
TheRecall
user RecallSafe
input Safetab
tabofofthe
assignments toSnapshots
the prevent
Snapshots page
them provides
from
page beingtwo
provides data
changed
two data
AAO16
aba Analog
Recall Output Card that provides 16 analog lineand/or
level
“Mix”
with
“Mix” dataSafe
a data types
snapshot
typesda página
that
recall.
that let Snapshots
letyou
youdiscretely oferece
discretely “safe”dois
“safe” tipos
source
source de “Mix”
and/or
Each Stage Rack
A variable delayincludes:
(0–500 ms) can be applied to the output of de dados
outputs que permitem distintamente “salvar” atribuições de
Matrix
MatrixMixer
Mixer Output
OutputDelayDelay user
userinput
fonte
inputassignments
assignmentstotoprevent
e/ou Userinformation
preventthem
Input para prevenir
themfrom
frombeing
que snapshots,
beingchanged
sejam alterados
changed
com um
Matrix mixers. For
• Two (2) IEC powerinstructions,
cables see “Output Delay” on For
with complete
aasnapshot
withAnalog
snapshot recall. on VENUE see
recall. Output Card that provides 8 analog
XO16
carregamento andsnapshot.
Digital
AAvariable
page 84. delay
variable delay(0–500
(0–500ms)
ms)can
canbe
beapplied
appliedtotothe
theoutput
outputofof Chapter 21, de “Snapshots.”
line
For level outputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.
Matrix
Matrixmixers.
mixers.For
Forinstructions,
instructions,see
see“Output
“OutputDelay”
Delay”on
on Forcomplete
completeinformation
informationon onVENUE
VENUEsnapshots,
snapshots,see see
Para informações
Chapter 21, completas
“Snapshots.” sobre snapshots na VENUE, veja o
page
page84.
84. Chapter 21, “Snapshots.”
Capítulo 21, “Snapshots.”
tional 8 channels of analog I/O11:
Chapter
Chapter and
11: 8 channels
Matrix
Matrixand of AES/EBU
andPersonal
Personal Mixers 107
QQMixers 107
digital I/O.
Capítulo 11: Mixers Matrix e Personal Q 107
Working with a PQ Controller
Trabalhando comPersonal
When an optional PQ Controller
Q remote control system is con-
nected to a VENUE system, it can be used to adjust the con-
Quando um sistema de controle remoto Personal Q é conectado a
trols in the Personal Q mixers from a remote location.
um sistema VENUE, ele pode ser usado para ajustar os controles do
mixer
For Personal
completeQinstructions
de um lugar on
remoto.
connecting and using PQ Con-
trollers, refer to the Personal Q Controller Guide, included with
Para instruções completas sobre conexão e uso de PQ Controllers,
the PQ Controller system.
veja o Guia Personal Q Controller, incluído com o sistema PQ
Controller.
Controller Detection
Controller Detection
When a PQ Controller is detected, the Controller Detected indi-
cator lights
Quando um PQin the corresponding
Controller é detectado,Personal Q Controller
o indicator mixer on-screen
Detected
sewindow.
acende na tela na página dos mixer Personal Q correspondente.
PQ Controller Detected indicator in PQ mixer

Indicador PQ Controller Detected no mixer PQ
Controller Lockout
Controller Lockout
Lockout From Console The PQ Controller can be locked out by
Lockout
clickingFrom Console OLockout
the on-screen PQ Controller podebutton
From Console ser travado
in any ofna
tela clicando no botão Lockout From Console
the PQ mixers. When this Lockout button is engaged, themixers
em qualquer PQ
PQ. Quando este botão está acionado, o PQ Controller não pode
Controller cannot adjust PQ mixer controls. The performer us-
ajustar os controles do mixer PQ. O performer que estiver usando
ing the PQ Controller cannot override this lockout from the
o PQ Controller não pode superar esse travamento a partir do
controller.
controlador.
Lockout From Controller Users can lock their PQ Controllers to
Lockout From Controller Usuários podem travar seus PQ Controllers
prevent
para inadvertent
prevenir alteraçõeschanges to controller
dos ajustes settings.
realizadas When this
inadvertidamente.
is done,
Quando theéon-screen
isso Lockout From
feito, o indicador Controller
Lockout indicator lights
From Controller na tela
sein the corresponding
acende PQ mixer. This Essa
no mixer PQ correpondente. function
funçãodoes notpode
não lockser
destravada pela
out control ofconsole.
the PQ mixer from the console.
Chamando
Calling othe
Operador da Console
Console pelo from
Operator PQ Controller
the
PQ Controller
Para chamar o operador da console por um Personal Q
Controller:
To call the console operator from a Personal Q Controller:
  Pressione o knob Volume
Press the Master codificador Masterknob.
encoder Volume.
Uma mensagem
A call message de chamado
appears on thesurge no console
Profile display da console
display thatProfile
que identificawhich
identifies qual PQ
PQ Controller
Controllerestá chamando.
is calling. O LED
The Call LED Call
onnothePQ
Controller pisca até
PQ Controller que until
flashes a mensagem seja is
the message apagada
cleared do display
from the da
console.
console display.

Chapter 12: Patchbay
Chapter
Chapter12: 12:Patchbay
Patchbay
Capítulo 12: Patchbay
The main tools and sections of the Patchbay screen are the
Accessing
Stage Racks are the Patchbay
used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage Themain
following
following:
The tools components
and sections must
of be
thethe purchased
Patchbay separately:
screen are the
Accessing AsThe main
principaistools and
ferramentas sections of
e seções da Patchbay screen
tela Patchbay são:are the
Accessingthe
audio I/O for thePatchbay
VENUE Patchbay
Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks following:
•following:
Acessando
Tocan
show
be the osimultaneously,
Patchbay
usedPatchbay screen: supporting up to 96 total inputs.
Tabsrecommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
To To
show thethe
show Patchbay
Patchbayscreen:
screen:
Abas
 Press the Patchbay switch, located in the View Modes sec- DVI supported.
ParaAudio I/O a tela Patchbay:
visualizar Tabs
TheTabs
Patchbay is navigated using the following tabs.
tion, or click the Patchbay tab on-screen.
 Press
 Pressthethe
Patchbay
Patchbayswitch, located
switch, locatedin in
thethe
ViewViewModes sec-
Modes sec- Se navega
• USB pelo Patchbay
keyboard utilizando as seguintes
and trackball/mouse (Windows abas.
compatible)
tion,• or48click
inputs with
thethe remotely
Patchbay tabtabcontrollable mic preamps and
on-screen. The Patchbay
The Patchbayis navigated using
is navigated thethe
using following
followingtabs.
tabs.
tion, or click Patchbay on-screen.
 Pressione o switch Patchbay, localizado na seção View Modes, ou
To jump individually
to Patchbay selectable
the Patchbay phantom
from the Inputs power.
and Outputs screens: I/O
AbasTabs
I/OSnake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
clique a aba na tela. Digital
I/OI/O
Tabs
To • jump
jump8 to
analog
thetheoutput
Patchbay channels;
Patchbayfrom the
from expandable
Inputs
 Click on the channel routing indicator, and
To to the Inputs up
andright to 48screens:
Outputs
Outputs
below
analog or
screens:
the Click
• ThetoTabs
display andbetween
connection patch Inputs, Outputs,
FOH Inputs,
Rack and or Directs
Stage Rack (Direct
requires
Para digital
saltar para outputs per
Patchbay das Stage
janelasRack.
Inputs e Outputs: Clique para visualizar e endereçar Outputs ou Directs (Direct
channel
Click name
on display.
thethe
channel The screen
routing automatically
indicator, right jumps
below tothe
the the Outputs).
Click
a to Other
display
Digital options
and
Snake patch
cable.in the Patchbay
Inputs,
This screen
Outputs,
cable can be or change
Directs
purchased to re-
(Direct
directly
  Click on channel routing indicator, right below Outputs). Outras opções na tela Patchbay se alteram para(Direct
Click to display and patch Inputs, Outputs, or Directs refletir a
corresponding
channel
channel name
name Patchbay
display.
display.screen
The (whether
screen an input,
automatically output,
jumps or
to to
the flect
aba the
Outputs).
from
Outputs).currently
Other
Avid ouselected
or options
assembled
Other
de entradas in I/O
options
saídas the
in tab.
Patchbay
bythe
your screen
preferred
Patchbay
selecionada. change
vendor.
screen change to to
re-re-
 Clique no indicadorand
Synchronization Control I/Ode canal, abaixo do display the
The screen
de roteamento automatically jumps de
bus).
corresponding
corresponding Patchbay
Patchbayscreen (whether
screen (whetheran input,
an output,
input, or or
output, flect thethe
flect currently selected
currently I/OI/O
selected tab.
tab.
nome do canal. A tela automaticamente salta para a janela Patchbay
bus).• Snake connectors to enable primary and redundant (if
bus).
Channel Type Tabs
Abas Channel Type
correspondente (seja uma entrada, saída ou bus). Optional Components
applicable) connection to a VENUE FOH Rack. Channel
Channel Type
TypeTabs
Tabs
Click these tabs to select and display specific types of chan-
Clique
The
nessas abas
following
para selecionar
components are
e visualizar
optional, and
tipos
mustof be
específicos
nels,
Click as
deClick available
these tabs for
to
thesedetabs
canais, tothe
select
acordo currently
and
select
com and
os selected
display
display I/O.
specific
specific
disponíveis na The
types
typesfollowing
entradachan-
of chan-
ou saída
Channel purchased separately:
Routing table
nels, shows
as
selecionada.
nels, as the
available available
forfor
thea
A tabela
available the Channel
currently
seguir Types
selected
apresenta
currently for
I/O.
os
selected the current
The
tipos
I/O. The I/O. para
following
de canais
following
System Components
Channel
Channel
indicator
Routing table• shows
entradas
table USB eflash
shows disk
saídas.
thethe (or other
available
available portable
Channel
ChannelTypesUSB storage
forfor
Types thethe device
current
current for
I/O.
I/O.
Routing
indicator
Jump to Patchbay
indicator transfer of Show
I/O tab data; Types
Channel 512 MB or larger recommended)
available
I/OI/O
•tabNear-field Channel
monitor Types
speakers available
foravailable
mix position monitoring
Included
Jump Components
to Patchbay
Jump to Patchbay Inputs tab Channel
Channels, Types
FX Returns
• Headphones with
Inputs 1/4-inch
Channels, jack
FX FX
Returns
Inputs Channels, ReturnsPQ, Mains
Overview of the
All VENUE Profile systemsPatchbay
include the following: Outputs Groups, Auxes, Matrix,
Visão• geral doof
Overview
VENUE
Overview Patchbay
ofthe
Profile Patchbay
console
the Outputs Groups, Auxes, Matrix, PQ,PQ,
Mains
you Patchbay
Outputs Groups,
(for Talkback) Channels,
Directs Auxes,
FX Matrix,
Returns, OutputsMains
The Patchbay screen lets patch hardware I/O to input and
• Two (2) IEC power cables Directs Channels,
output
The channels.
Patchbay screen lets you patch hardware I/OI/O
tode
input and • Footswitches (up
Directs to 2) FX
Channels, Returns,
FX FX
Outputs
Returns, Outputs
A tela Patchbay
The Patchbaypermite endereçar
screen lets you entradas
patch e saídas
hardware to hardware
input and Inserts Channels, Returns, Outputs
para canais
output de entrada e saída.
channels.
output channels. • MIDI cables (for
Inserts connecting
Channels, FX FX external
Returns, MIDI devices)
Outputs
Inserts Channels, Returns, Outputs
• Trackball mount (trackball not included) Hardware
• BNCTabs
cables (for connecting Word clock between the
• VENUE Mouse Pad Hardware tabs Hardware Tabs
VENUE
Hardware system and external digital devices)
Tabs
Click these tabs to display the hardware inputs and outputs
• VENUE Profile Guide Hardware tabs
Hardware tabs Aba• Hardware
Click 25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
available fortabs
these the current
to I/O
display theand Channel
hardware Type.
inputs These
and repre-
outputs
Click these tabs to display the hardware inputs and outputs
I/O sent the
availablephysical
for the inputs
current and
I/O outputs
and of
Channelthe system.
Type. These repre-
available for the current I/O and Channel Type. These repre-
Clique nestas abas para visualizar as entradas e saídas de hardware
tabs
• I/O
Protective Dust Cover
I/O sent thethe
sent physical
disponíveis para os
physical inputs
tipos
inputs and
deandoutputs
canal of of
thethe
e entrada
outputs system.
e saídas
system. selecionadas.
tabs Choices include Stage audio inputs and outputs (Mix Rack or
• tabs
Rack(s) (see next) VENUE
Elas
Stage
Choices
representam
Rack),
include
Profile
FOHStage
Expansion
as entradas
(local) inputs
audio
e saídas físicas
and
inputs outputs
and
Options
dos sistema.
(Mix(Mix
outputs Rack or Rack
RackFOHor or
Choices include Stage audio inputs and outputs (Mix
Rack),
Stage
The
AsStage and
Rack), Pro
followingFOH
Rack),
escolhas Tools
FOH
incluem playback/record
(local)
options inputs
caninputs
(local)
entradas and
beeadded andto
saídas option
outputsVENUE
outputs
de inputs
(Mix Rack and
Profile
áudio(Mix
StageRackor out-
FOH
systems.
(MixorRack
FOHou
puts,
Rack),
Stage
For ifand
any.
Rack),
details
Rack), and Available
Pro
on Tools
entradas
ProallTools
VENUEhardware
playback/record
systems inputs
eplayback/record
saídas FOH and
option
(local)
and outputs
(Mix
options,
option visitare
inputs
Rack
inputsand
ou
thebased
out-
FOH
and Rack)
Avid
out-
Channel
controls on channel
ewebsite
opções
puts, if any.
puts, type
de selection,
entradas
Available
if (www.avid.com).
any. Available system
ehardware
saídas
hardware configuration
de
inputs
inputs and outputs
and andare
gravação/reprodução
outputs hard- do Pro
based
are based
Channel
Channel
controls
•controls
System Restore CD Tools,
ware
on se existentes.
device
channel
on channel status.
type As “Unavailable
See
selection,
type entradas
selection, system e saídas
system I/O” de
onhardwares
configuration pageand
configuration 110.
and disponíveis
hard-
hard-
são
ware baseadas
device
ware device na seleção
status. SeeSee
status. de tipo de canal,
“Unavailable
“UnavailableI/O” configuração
on
I/O” page
on 110.
page do sistema
110.
• ECx Ethernet Control Software Installer CD eMix Rack
status Options de hardware. Veja “Entradas e Saídas
dos dispositivos
• Standalone Software Installer CD Indisponíveis ” na página 110.
Channel Type tabs
• Two (2) IEC power cables Patching Grid
Channel Type tabs
Channel Type tabs Patching
Patchbay
• Onepage (Inputs
FOH Linktab shown)
cable for connection to Grid
Patching Grid
a VENUE console
Patchbay page (Inputs tabtab
shown) AO16 Analog Output Card that provides 16 analog line level
Patchbay page (Inputs shown)
Chapter 12: Patchbay 109
Chapter 12:12:
Patchbay 109
output compatible with Aviom® PersonalChapter
Mixers and other 109
Patchbay

digital I/O.
Capítulo 12: Patchbay 109
Patching Grid
Patching Grid
Unavailable hardware I/O appear grayed out in the patchbay
Entradas/saídas de hardware indisponíveis aparecem em cinza no
Patching Grid Unavailable
and italicizedhardware I/O appear
in all routing pop-upgrayed
lists. Itout in the patchbay
is possible to make
patchbay e em itálico em todas as listas pop-up de endereçamento.
The Patching Grid shows hardware I/O across the top, and and italicizedto
assignments inunavailable
all routing pop-up lists.
hardware I/O.It is possible to make
O Patching
VENUE Grid
The Patching apresenta
Griddown
channels entradas
showsthe left e
hardware saídas
I/O
side. de hardware
Theacross the top,
available aoand
alto,
channel É possível fazer atribuições para entradas/saídas de hardware
Patching
e canais VENUE aoGrid
lado esquerdo.
assignments hardware
Unavailable to unavailable hardware
I/O appear I/O.out in the patchbay
grayed
Patching
VENUE
tabs Grid
andchannels
choices down
are the leftAs
determined
abas
side. deavailable
The
by the
canal e channel
currently
as opções
selected I/O
indisponíveis.
Unavailable
The hardware I/O
VENUE Standalone appear provides
software grayed out in the patchbay
additional display
and italicized in all routing pop-up lists. It is possible to make
disponíveis são determinadas pela aba I/O selecionada e o tipo de and italicized
The VENUE in all routing
Standalone pop-up lists. It is possible to make
tabsand
The
tab andChannel
choices
Patching are
Grid determined
shows
type(s). hardware
The gridbysquares
the
I/O currently
across theselected
representtop, andI/O
patch options for hardware I/Osoftware provides
(including additional
unavailable
I/O. opçõesI/O).
display
canal. OsPatching
The quadrados no grid
Grid representam
shows hardware pontos de endereçamento
I/O across the top, and Aassignments
assignments
to unavailable
versão Standalone hardware
software VENUE
to unavailable oferece
hardware I/O. de visualização
tab andbetween
VENUE
points Channelhardware
channels type(s).
down the Theleft
I/O grid
and squares
side.
VENUE represent
The available
mixing patch
channel
channels. options for hardware I/O (including unavailable I/O).
entreVENUE
entradas e saídas
channels down dethe
hardware e The
left side. canais de mixagem
available channelna adicionairs para entradas/saídas de hardware (incluindo entradas/
points
tabs andbetween
choiceshardware I/O and
are determined byVENUE mixingselected
the currently channels. I/O See Chapter
The VENUE 24, “Using
Standalone the Standalone
software Software.” display
provides additional
VENUE.
tabs and choices are determined by the currently selected I/O saídas indisponíveis).
The VENUE Standalone software provides additional display
By
tabdefault, hardware
and Channel inputs
type(s). Theare routed
grid squaresin arepresent
1-to-1 pattern
patch to See for
options Chapter 24, “Using
hardware the Standalone
I/O (including Software.”
unavailable I/O).
tabdefault,
By
inputand Channel
hardware
channels. type(s).
For inputsTheare
example, grid squares
routed
Stage in
inputs arepresent
1-to-1
1–48 patch
pattern
appear ontoIn- options
Assigned for hardware
I/O I/O (including unavailable I/O).
Por points
padrão,between hardware
as entradas I/O and VENUE
de hardware mixing channels.
são endereçadas em um
points
input
put between
channels.
Channels hardware
For
1–16 (Bank I/O
example,
A), and VENUE
Stage
17–32 inputs
(Bank mixing
1–48
B) and
padrão 1-para-1 para Input Channels. Por exemplo, entradas Stage
channels.
appear
so on. on In- Assigned
See I/O 24, “Using
Chapter
Veja o Capítulo the Standalone
24, “Utilizando Software.”
o software Standalone.”
WhenSee Chapter 24,
a hardware “Using theisStandalone
connection assigned, itsSoftware.”
connection is
put
By
de 1By Channels
default,
a 48 aparecem 1–16
hardware (Bank
inputs
nos Input A), 17–32
are routed
Channels (Bank
in aB) and
1-to-1
1 ain16a (Bank so on.
pattern to
default, hardware inputs are routed 1-to-1 A), 17 a 32
pattern to When a hardware
dimmed in all connection
Patchbay screens.is This
assigned,
lets its connection
you is
see which hard-
(Bankinput
B) e channels.
assim por For example, Stage inputs 1–48 appear on In-
diante. Assigned I/O
Entrada/saída atribuída
Channel
input channels.Controls
For example, Stage inputs 1–48 appear on In- Assigned
dimmed
ware I/O
in all
connections Patchbay
are in screens.
use withoutThis having
lets youtosee which
switch hard-
back
put Channels 1–16 (Bank A), 17–32 (Bank B) and so on.
Channel
put Channels Controls
1–16 (Bank A), 17–32 (Bank B) and so on. wareforth
and
When
Quando
connections
between
a hardware are in use without
Patchbay
connection screens. having
éYou
is assigned, itsto
can switch
also use back
suathe
connection is
Controles
Thesede Canal mirror the controls for the currently selected
controls When auma conexão
hardware de hardware
connection assinalada,
is assigned, its connection conexão
is
and
dimmed
édimmedforth in
marcadainem between
column
all Patchbay
number
Patchbay screens.
indicator
screens.
todas as screens. Thisto
telas Patchbay. You
jump
lets can
you toalso
the
see use the
Patchbay
which hard-
These
channel.controls mirror the
For example, when controls
showing for Inputs,
the currently selected
the Channel all Patchbay This lets Isso permite
you see which ver quais
hard-
EssesChannel
controles Controls
espelham os controles do Inputs,
canal selecionado. Por dimmed
tab
ware for
conexões thecolumn
existing
connections
de hardwarenumber
are indicator
assignment
in use without to
(forsem jump
more
having to the
terinformation,Patchbay
to navegar
switch see trás
back
Channel
channel. ForControls
example, when showing the
controls let you adjust input gain, polarity, phantom power, Channel ware connections areestão
in useem uso
without having que para
to switch back
exemplo, quando visualizando Inputs, os controles permitem ajustar tab
eand for
para
“Shortcut thebetween
frente
forth existing
forpelas
Locatingassignment
telas (for more
do Patchbay.
Assignments”
Patchbay screens. Você
on
You information,
também
page
can 113). pode
also use seeusar o
the
controls
These
HPF, Directlet Out,
youmirror
controls adjust
and basic input
the gain,
controls
level polarity,
for the
without phantom
currently
leaving power,
selected
the Patchbay. and forth between Patchbay screens. You can also use the
ganho de entrada,
These controls polaridade, phantomfor
mirror the controls power, HPF, Direct
the currently Out e
selected indicador
“Shortcut
dimmed do número
for
columnLocatingda coluna
number marcada
Assignments”
indicator toonpara
jumppagesaltar
thepara
to113). a aba do
Patchbay
HPF, Direct
channel. ForOut, and basic
example, when level without
showing leaving
Inputs, theChannel
the Patchbay. dimmed column number indicator to jump to the Patchbay
nívelchannel.
básico sem Fordeixar
example,a tela Patchbay.
when showing Inputs, the Channel Patchbay
tab
Text para
forDisplay
the a of
atribuição
existing existente
assignment
Patch Source (for (para mais
moreDestination
and informações,
controls
Channel let you adjust input gain, polarity, phantom power, tab for the existing assignment (for more information,
113). see
controls letDirect Outs
you adjust input gain, polarity, phantom power, “Atalhos
Text para
Display
“Shortcut forLocalização
of Patch
Locating deSource
Atribuições”
Assignments” onnapage
and página
Destination
113).
HPF,
Channel
Channel Direct
Direct Out,
Direct
Outs andOutsbasic level without leaving the Patchbay. “Shortcut for Locating Assignments” on page 113).
Above the grid tabs are “from” and “to” text display fields that
HPF, Direct Out, and basic
The channel area in the Patchbay level without
provides leaving thetoPatchbay.
access Direct Displays
Above the
display de
theFonte
grid e Destino
fulltabs
text are “from”
names and “to” text
of hardware display fields that
Thedechannel
Out
A área controls.
canais area
no in the Patchbay
Patchbay oferece provides
acesso access
aos to Direct
controles Direct Text Display of Patch Source andI/O and channels.
Destination
Channel Direct Outs Text
display Display
the full oftextPatch
namesSource
of hardwareandI/O Destination
and channels.
Out. Channel
Out controls.Direct Outs Sobre as abas do grid há campos de display de texto “de” e “para”
Above
To viewthe fullgrid
namestabsofare “from”
a patch and “to”
source andtext display fields that
destination:
The channel
To adjust area
Direct in thelevel
Output Patchbay provides
from the access to Direct
Patchbay: Above
que the grid
mostram tabs are
o nome “from” and
completo dos “to” text
canais display
e das fields that
entradas/saídas
The channel area in the Patchbay provides access to Direct To view the
display full names
full text ofnames
a patchofsource
hardwareand I/O
destination:
and channels.
ParaOut
ajustar
To o nível
adjust doOutput
Direct
controls. Direct level
Output pelo
from thePatchbay:
Patchbay: de hardware.
Place the
display
 the full
cursor
textover a Channel
names of hardware
Name. I/O and channels.
Out
1 Incontrols.
the Patching Grid, patch the channel Direct Out to an
 Place the cursor over a Channel Name.
1 In the Patching Grid, patch the Direct
channel
available
1 NoToPatching output.
Grid, Output
adjust Direct enderece o canal
level from the OutDirect
Patchbay: para Out
umatosaída
an To
Para view full
visualizar
Channel
To view Name
full
names
os nomes
names
of a completos
patch source
of Source
a patch source
and destination:
de uma fonte ou destino:
and destination:
Destination
available output.Output level from the Patchbay:
To adjust Direct
disponível. Channel Name
2 In the channel controls, adjust the on-screen Direct Output  Place the cursor over
 a Channel Name.
Source Destination
1 In the Patching Grid, patch the channel Direct Out to an Place the
 Coloque cursorsobre
o cursor over aum Channel
nome Name.
de canal (Channel Name).
1 In the channel
2
encoder. Patchingcontrols,
Grid, patch adjust
the the
channel
on-screen
Direct Out Output
Direct to an
2 Nos controles
available de canal, ajuste o codificador Direct Output na tela.
output. Channel Name
available output.
encoder. Channel Name
Source Destination
Source Destination
2 In the channel controls, adjust the on-screen Direct Output
2 In the channel controls, adjust the on-screen Direct Output
encoder.
encoder.
Adjusting
Ajustando o nívelDirect Output
de Direct Outputlevel
pelo from the Patchbay
Patchbay Channel source and destination display
Adjusting Direct Output level from the Patchbay Channel source and destination display
If the channel is already routed, its source and destination as-
VisualVIsuais
Indicadores Indicators
e Displays and Displays If the channel
signments appearis already
directly routed,
above itsthesource andGrid.
Patching destination
An aster-as-
Visual
Adjusting Indicators
Direct Output leveland Displays
from the Patchbay Channel source and destination display
signments appear directly above the indicates
Patching aGrid. An aster-
Adjusting Direct Output level from the Patchbay
The Patchbay isk at the
Channel end
source of a destination
and destination name
display multiple out-
O Patchbay utiliza uses the following
as seguintes visual conventions
convenções in all its
visuais em todas as Display de fonte e destino de canal
iskthe
If
put at the end of
channel
assignment. aalready
is Seedestination
routed,
“Multiple name
its source
Input indicates
and andadestination
Output multiple out-
Assignments as-
suasThe Patchbay
pages ande tabs.uses the following visual conventions in all its
Visual Indicators and Displays
páginas abas. If the channel is already routed, its source and destination as-
Visual
pages andIndicators
tabs. and Displays Seput
in assignment.
signments
the
signments
appear
Patchbay”
o canal está See
on “Multiple
directly
endereçado,
appear
page above
112. Input
the and
suas atribuições
directly above
Output
Patching
the Patching
Assignments
Grid.
de fonte An
Grid.eAn
aster-
destino
aster-são
The Patchbay uses in the
isk Patchbay”
at the of aon
enddiretamente pagesobre
destination112. name indicates a Um
multiple out-
Unavailable I/O
Unavailable
The Patchbay usesI/Othe following visual
the following conventions in all its
visual conventions in all its
apresentadas
isk at the end of a destination name indicates a multiple out- no
o Patching Grid. asterisco
pages and
Unavailable tabs.I/O putde
fim assignment.
um nome de Seedestino
“MultipleindicaInput and Output
múltiplas Assignments
atribuições de saídas.
pages
O Patchbay
and tabs.shows
The Patchbay
mostra abas de hardware
hardwaretabs fortodas
para all possible configura-
as configurações
Naming
put
Veja “Múltiplas
in the
Channels
assignment.
Patchbay”Atribuições
on pagede
from
See “Multiple theand
Input Patchbay
Output Assignments
Entradas e Saídas” na página 112.
112.
possíveis.
The Patchbay
tions. The showsindicates
Patchbay hardwareI/Otabs forisall
that possible
offline or configura-
unavailable
Naming
in Channels
the Patchbay” on pagefrom 112. the Patchbay
Unavailable I/O Channel names can be changed from the Patchbay. Channel
Unavailable
O Patchbay
tions.
by graying out I/O
Theindica se columns
Patchbay
the uma entrada
indicates outhat
I/O that
beneath issaída está
offline offline ou
or unavailable
device. Nomeando
Channel Canais Pelo Patchbay
indisponível tornando cinza as colunas abaixo alldesse dispositivo. Namingnames
names can be upcan
Channels be
to 32 changed from
characters
from the the Patchbay.
in length.
Patchbay Channel
When displayed
by graying
The Patchbay outshows
the columns
hardwarebeneath
tabs that
for device.
possible configura-
The Patchbay shows hardware tabs for all possible configura-
Naming
names can Channels
be up to 32 from
characters the
in Patchbay
length.
on the console, names are abbreviated to fit the display. When displayed
tions. The Patchbay indicates I/O that is offline or unavailable Nomes de canais podem ser alterados pelo Patchbay. Nomes de
tions. The Patchbay indicates I/O that is offline or unavailable on the console,
Channel names namescan be are abbreviated
changed from theto fit the display.
Patchbay. Channel
canais
Channel podem
names tecan atébe32 caracteres.
changed from Quando apresentados
the Patchbay. Channel na
by graying out the columns beneath that device. names can be
To nameosornomes up to 32
rename a channel characters in length.
from the caberem When displayed
Patchbay:no display.
by graying out the columns beneath that device. console,
names can be up são to 32abreviados
charactersparain length. When displayed
on the console,
To name or rename names are abbreviated
a channel to fit the display.
from the Patchbay:
onDouble-click
1 the console,the nameschannel name.
are abbreviated to fit the display.
Para nomear ou renomear
1 Double-click the channel um canal
name.pelo Patchbay:
To Type
2 nameaor new namea and
rename pressfrom
channel Enter
theon your keyboard.
Patchbay:
To name or rename a channel from the Patchbay:
12Clique
Type duas
a newvezes
name noand
nome do Enter
press canal. on your keyboard.
Unavailable I/O 1 Double-click the channel name.
When naming
1 Double-click the channels in the Patchbay, press Tab on the
channel name.
Entrada/Saída indisponível
Unavailable (colunas
I/O (grayed cinza)
columns) Unavailable I/O 22Digite When
um naming
novo
keyboard to go channels
nome ethe
toand inchannel
pressione
next theEnter
Patchbay,
no
and press
teclado.
Shift+TabTabtoon
gothe
to
Type a new name press Enter on your keyboard.
Unavailable I/O (grayed columns) 2 Type a new
keyboard name
to go toand
the press
next Enter
channel on your
and keyboard.
Shift+Tab to go to
the previous channel.
Unavailable I/O Quando
the
Whenprevious nomeando
naming channel.
channels canais
in theno Patchbay,
Patchbay, pressione
press Tab no
Tab on the
Unavailable I/O When naming channels in the Patchbay, press Tabpara
on the
Unavailable I/O (grayed columns) teclado
keyboard para
to goirtopara o próximo
the next channelcanal
andeShift+Tab
Shift+Tab ir para
to go to
110Unavailable I/O (grayed
VENUE Profile Guide columns) keyboard
o anterior.to go to the next channel and Shift+Tab to go to
110 VENUE Profile Guide the previous channel.
the previous channel.
Busca Type Text ToPara
scroll rolar pelo Grid,
Patching
do oneGrid,
of thesiga um dos seguintes
Type Text Search the Patching following:
procedimentos:
A Type
buscaText
Typesearch
Text permite
lets youutilizar
use theo keyboard
teclado para rápida
for fast nevegação  Click the up/down or left/right Patching Grid scroll arrows
navigation
para Type
Stage
Type
um Text
Rack
Text
canal. Search
Features
Search
Você pode digitar os primeiros caracteres do nome to Additional
Toscroll
move scroll
ToClique the
nas
square Required
thesetas
Patching
Patching
by para
square. Grid,
Grid, Components
doone
do
cima/paraoneofbaixo
ofthe
thefollowing:
following:
ou esquerda/direita do
to a channel. You can enter the first characters of a channel
do canal ou o número absoluto do canal para selecionar esse canal Patching
Click
 Click
Grid
thepara movimentar-se
up/down or quadrado
left/right Patchingpor quadrado.
Grid scrollarrows
arrows
name orRacks
the absolute channel number to target that channel thethe
up up/down or left/right bePatching Grid scroll

Type
Stage
Type Text
Text search
are
searchused lets
lets youan
with
you use
use FOHthekeyboard
the keyboard
Rack, andforfor fast
provide
fast navigation
all stage  Click
navigation The following orcomponents
down Patching mustGrid purchased
double separately:
arrows to move
no ACS. to move square by square.
onaudio
the
totoa aACS.
channel.
I/O Youcan
for VENUE
channel. You can entersystems.
Profile
enter thefirst
the firstcharacters
characters
Up to two of ofa achannel
Stage channel
Racks to move
screen square by square.
by screen.
• Clique
 Video nas setas
Display duplas or
(15-inch para cima/para
greater baixoVGA
flat-panel do Patching
display Grid
canname
Para name be
buscaror or
used the absolute
simultaneously,
the absolute channel
umchannel number
supporting upto target
to 96 that
total
canal: number to target that channel channel
inputs. Click the up or down Patching Grid double arrows
e selecionar para


movimentar-se
Click the up or tela
down a tela.
Patching Grid
recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGAdouble arrows
Right-click in the Patching Grid and drag in any direction. totomove
move
and
To search
on thefor
onthe ACS.and select a channel:
ACS. screen byscreen.
screen.
screen by
DVI supported.
Audio
11Digite I/O
Typeas primeiras
the first fewletras, o nome
letters, completo
full name, ou o número
or channel numberde canal
of  Clique com o botão direito do mouse no Patching Grid e arraste
Right-click
de um Tocanal.
searchPor exemplo,
for and digite
select a “s” para
channel: ir para o primeiro canal • USB
para keyboard
Right-click
qualquer ininand
thePatching
the
direção. PatchingGrid
Gridand
trackball/mouse and dragininany
(Windows
drag anydirection.
direction.
compatible)
theTo • search
channel. for
Forand
48 inputs select
with
example, a channel:
remotely
type controllable
“s” micfirst
to go to the preamps and
channel
começado com a letra s (como Snare).
beginningindividually
Type
1 1Type with thefew
thefirst
the first selectable
letter
fewletters,
letters,phantom
s (such asname,
full
full name, power.
Snare). ororchannel
channelnumber
numberofof Digital Snake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
the
the 8channel.
• channel.
2 2Pressione analog
a For
output
For
tecla example,
channels;
example,
Tab para type
type
navegar “s”
“s”
e totogo
expandable gotoup
tothe
selecionar the
to 48first
first channel
analog
qualquerchannelor
outro
Press the Tab key to cycle through and select any other • The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
canal beginning
iniciado
beginning with
digitalcom
outputs
with essathe
the perletter
Stage
letra
letter (como
s (such
s(such
Rack. asSnare).
Snare
as Snare).
Top, Snare Bottom ou
channels beginning with that letter (such as Snare Top, Snare a Digital Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
Strings).
Bottom, or Strings).
Press
2 2Press theTab
the Tabkeykeytotocycle
cyclethrough
throughand andselect
selectanyanyother
other from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
channels
channels beginning
beginning
Evite giving
dar aos with
with
canais thatletter
that
nomes letter (suchasasSnare
(such
quebegin
começam Snare Top,
comTop, Snare
Snare
números
•Avoid channels
Snakeorconnectors
Bottom, Strings). tonames
enablethat
primary with numbers
and redundant dif-(if
Bottom, or Strings).
diferentes do número absoluto do canal.Quando você digita
ferent from the absolute channel
applicable) number.FOHWhen you type a Optional Components
um número, connection to a VENUE
a VENUE navega por números Rack.
absolutos de
number,
Avoid
Avoid
canal VENUE
giving
emgiving navigates
channels
vez dochannels to absolute
names
nome donames that channel
begin numbers
with numbersre- dif-
canal.that begin with numbers dif- Scrolling The following components
the Patching are optional,
Grid by right-clicking and must be
and dragging
gardless
ferent offrom
ferent the the
from channel name.
theabsolute
absolute channelnumber.
channel number.WhenWhenyou youtype
typea a purchased separately:
number,VENUE
number, VENUEnavigates
navigatestotoabsolute
absolutechannel
channelnumbers
numbersre- re-
System gardless
Components
of the channel name.
• USB
Scrolling
Scrolling
Rolando flash
pelothe disk
Patching Grid(or
thePatching
Patching Gridother
Gridbybycom
clicando portable
right-clicking USB
right-clicking
botão direitoand
and storage
draggingdevice for
dragging
e arrastando
gardless of the channel name. Assigning
transfer of Channels
Show data; 512 inMB the Patchbay
or larger recommended)
Navigating
Navegando the
pelo Patchbay
Patchbay
Included Components
Assigning
Assigning
ToAtribuindo
assign channels
• Headphones
inChannels
Channels
Canaisthe no
with
Patchbay: ininthe
Patchbay
1/4-inch jack thePatchbay
Patchbay
Navigating
Navegando pelos
toTipos
Navigating
Navigating
All the
de Patchbay
Canal
the Patchbay
Channel Types
VENUE Profile systems include the following: 1 Go• toDynamic
a Patchbay page by clicking
or condenser the appropriate
microphone I/O tab,
and XLR mic cable
OThe • VENUE
Patchbay
Patchbay Profile
utiliza console
múltiplas
uses multipleabas
tabspara acessar
to access diferente
different entradas/
hardware ToToassign
Para
Channel assign
atribuir
Type
(for
channels
canais
channels
tab, and
Talkback)
in thePatchbay:
Patchbay:
noinPatchbay:
the
Hardware tab.
saídasNavigating
Navigating
de hardware toto
e Channel
Channel
tipos de TypesPor exemplo, a tela Inputs
Types
canais.
• Two
I/O and (2) IEC
channel power
types. Forcables
example, the Inputs screen pro- Gototoa aPatchbay
1 1•Go Patchbay page
page byclicking
clickingthe
theappropriate
appropriateI/OI/O tab,
Vá Footswitches
2 1Place àthe
uma página
cursor (up
over the 2)by
to Patching
Patchbay clicando
Grid.na aba
The changestab,
de entrada/saída
cursor
oferece
vides abas Channels emultiple
FX Returns para você endereçar esses
•Channels
The
The Patchbay
Monitor
Patchbay and FXmultiple
uses
mount
uses Returns tabs
tabs
for VGAtabs for
screen
to you
toaccesstodifferent
access
(screen patch these
different dif-
hardware
not included)
hardware ChannelType
Channel
toapropriada,
a crosshair,
Typetab,
tab,and
Channel
andHardware
Type
and lines
Hardwaretab.
e Hardware.
extend
tab.
aboveexternal
and to the leftdevices)
of the cur-
tipos de channel
canais independentemente. • MIDI cables (for connecting MIDI
ferent
I/O
I/O• and types independently.
andchannel
channel
Trackball types.
types.
mount Forexample,
For
(trackballexample, theInputs
the
not included)Inputsscreen
screenpro-
pro-
sor location
Place
2•Place
BNCthe to cursor
the identify
cursor
cables (for thethe
over column
the
connecting
over andGrid.
Patching
Word
Patching row.
Grid.
clock The cursorchanges
between
The cursor changes
the
videsChannels
vides Channelsand andFXFXReturns
Returnstabs
tabsfor
foryou
youtotopatch
patchthese dif- 2 2Posicione
thesedif- o cursor sobre o Patching Grid. O to
cursor se of
altera para
Exemplos• VENUE Mouse Pad to a crosshair,
VENUE
to a crosshair, and
system
and lines extend
andchannel
lines external
extend above and
digital
above and the
devices)
tocolumn left
the left for the cur-
of the
Examples
ferentchannel
ferent channeltypes
typesindependently.
independently. Click
3 uma in the
cruz, row
e linhas for
sãothe
extendidas sobre and in
e àthe
esquerda thecur-
da localização
• VENUE Profile Guide sor location to identify the column and row.
Para visualizar Inputs: dosor• location
25-pin
cursor
hardware para
I/O to
D-Subidentify
identificar
source. the
(forcolumn
cableslinhas and row.
connecting
e colunas. to GPI devices)
To show• Two
Examples (2)
Inputs:
Examples console lights Clickininthe therowrowforforthe
thechannel
channelandandininthethecolumn
columnfor forthe
the
3 3Click
Vá à •página Patchbay
Protective Dust e clique
Cover a aba Inputs. 3 Clique
hardwarena linha
I/O de um canal e na coluna de uma fonte de entrada/
source.
Go to the Patchbay page and click the Inputs tab. hardware I/O source.
ToTo showInputs:
Inputs: saída de hardware.
• show
Rack(s) (see next)
Para visualizar um tipo específico de Input no Patching Grid:
To showGoatoto
 Go specific
the type of page
thePatchbay
Patchbay Input in
pageand the
and Patching
click
click grid:tab.
theInputs
the Inputs tab.
Racks,
 Na
In página Software
Patchbay,
the Patchbay page, CDs,
clique a iLoks,
click aba and Cables
Channels
the Channels ou FX
tab, or Returns.
the FX Re-Shift- For details on all VENUE systems and options, visit the Avid
click
turnsToTo
para show
show
tab. a a specific
selecionar e
specific
Shift-Click type
mostrar
type
to ofof
select Input
múltiplos
Input
and inin the
the
show Patching
tipos de uma
Patching
multiple grid:
vez.
grid:
types at
once. Inthe
thePatchbay
Patchbaypage,page,click
clickthe
theChannels tab,ororthe
Channelstab, theFXFXRe-
Re- Routing a hardware input to an Input Channel
 In
• System
Para navegar paraRestore CD de hardware diferente:
uma fonte
tab.Shift-Click
turnstab.
turns Shift-Clicktotoselect
selectand
andshow
showmultiple
multipletypestypesatat 4 Click and drag vertically, horizontally, or at an angle to as-
To navigate
once. to a different hardware source:
once.
Mix Rack
Routing
Routing
Endereçando
sign multiple uma
Options
a ahardware
hardware
entrada
patch
input
input
points toto
anan
in
Input
aInput
de hardware Channel
para Channel
singleum Input Channel
action.
 Clique a aba de hardware
• Standalone Software apropriada no alto do Patching Grid.
Installer CD
 Click the appropriate Hardware tab across the top of the Clickand
4 4Click anddrag
dragvertically,
vertically,horizontally,
horizontally,ororatatan
anangle
angletotoas-
as-
• iLok USBto Smart Key (for storingsource:
plug-in authorizations) 5 4I/O Options
Repeat
Clique as needed.
e arraste verticalmente, horizontalmente ou em ângulo para
ToTonavigate
Rolando
Patching navigate
pelo to a adifferent
Patchbay
Grid. different hardware
hardware source: sign multiple patch points in a single action.
sign multiple
• Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok atribuir múltiplospatch points
pontos in a single action.
de endereçamento em uma única ação.
Clickthe
 Click theappropriate
appropriateHardware
Hardwaretab tabacross
acrossthe
thetop
topofofthe
the AI16
PatchbayAnalog
Click Mic/Line
and DragInput Card that provides 16 analog
Para rolar pela(2)
listaIEC
de power
canais (verticalmente): 5 Repeat as needed.
5 Repeat as needed.
•
Scrolling Two cables 5mic/line level inputs
Patchingin
Patching the Patchbay
Grid.
Grid. Repita conforme necessário.
• One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console You can quickly select a range of crosspoints in the Patchbay
 Mova o cursor sobre um nome de canal à esquerda do Patching Patchbay
Patchbay
AO16 Analog Click
Click andDrag
and
Output Dragthat provides 16 analog line level
Card
grid in one
Clique operation
e Arraste with
no Patchbay a left-click and drag of the cursor.
Grid, Scrolling
To scroll
Scrolling
então ininthe
through
pressione the
theas Patchbay
channel
Patchbay
teclas list (vertically):
de setas para cima e para baixo no
Each Stage Rack includes: Yououtputs
cancan
You click and drag
canquickly
quickly horizontally,
select vertically, and at 45 de-
teclado. You select a arange
rangeofofcrosspoints
crosspoints ininthe
the Patchbay
Patchbay
 Move the cursor over a channel name at the left of the
• Two (2) IEC power cables Você
greegrid pode
angles
gridin in rapidamente
inone
oneany direction.
operation
operation selecionar
with
with a aleft-clickuma
left-click and
and gama de
dragofof
drag pontos
the
the de
cursor.
cursor.
ToToscroll
Patchingscroll
Grid,through
through thechannel
thenthe
presschannel list
the Uplist (vertically):
or(vertically):
Down Arrow keys on the XO16 Analog
interseção no and Digital
Patchbay GridOutput
em umaCard that provides
operação de 8 analog
clicar e arrastar
Para rolar pela lista de entradas/saídas de hardware Youcan
You canclick
clickand
anddrag
draghorizontally,
horizontally,vertically,
vertically,and
andatat45
45de-
de-
keyboard. line
do level
cursor. outputs,
Você pode and 8eAES todigital outputs.
Movethe
 Move thecursor
(horizontalmente):
cursorover
overa achannel
channelname
nameatatthe
theleft
leftofofthe
the You
gree
gree
cannot
angles
angles anyclicar
undo
ininany
changes arrastar
direction.
direction.
horizontalmente,
the Patchbay grid. verticalmente
PatchingGrid,
Patching Grid,then
thenpress
pressthetheUp
UpororDown
DownArrow
Arrowkeys
keyson the e em ângulos de 45 graus em qualquer direção.
onthe
AT16 A-Net Output inCard that provides 16 channels of A-Net
ToMova
scroll
o through
cursour the
keyboard.
keyboard. sobrehardware
um canalI/O de (horizontally): de hardware To use click
listentrada/saída Youand drag undo
cannot thechanges
Patchbay grid:
totoPersonal
thePatchbay
Patchbay grid.
outputYouVocê cannot
não pode
compatible undo
with changes
desfazer
Aviom® the
alterações para ogrid.
Mixers Patchbay grid.
and other
no alto do Patching Grid, então pressione as teclas
Move the cursor over a hardware I/O channel at the top ofde setas para a 1 Left-click
Pro16™ on
Seriesthe crosspoint
devices. defining the start of the range.
esquerda ou direita Para usar
ToTouse oclick
“clicar
useclick andedrag
arrastar”
dragininthenoPatchbay
the Patchbay grid:
Patchbaygrid:grid:
theToToscroll
scroll
Patching Grid,no
through
through teclado.
thehardware
the
then hardware
press theI/OI/Olist
Left list(horizontally):
or (horizontally):
Right Arrow keys on and
thekeyboard.
Movethe
Move thecursor
cursorover
overa ahardware
hardwareI/O I/Ochannel
channelatatthe topofof 1IOx
thetop Input
1Clique noand
ponto
Left-click
1Left-click onoutput
on de
the expansion
theinterseção
crosspoint
crosspoint card that
definindo
defining
defining otheprovides
início
the start
start ofan addi-
daofseleção.
the
the range.
range.
thePatching
PatchingGrid,
Grid,then
thenpress
pressthe
theLeft
LeftororRight
RightArrow
Arrowkeys
keysonon tional 8 channels of analog I/O and 8 channels of AES/EBU
the Chapter 12: Patchbay 111
thekeyboard.
keyboard. digital I/O.
the Capítulo 12: Patchbay 111
Chapter
Chapter 1: Introduction 12:Patchbay
to VENUE
Profile 5111
2 Continue to hold the left-click button, then drag horizon- 3 Click additional grid squares in the same column to assign
2 Continue
tally (toapopulate
Continuesegurar oa botão esquerdo,
row),left-click
vertically e arraste
(to horizontalmente
populate a column), or Clique
3the quadrados
source adicionais
to additional no grid
channels. na
Themesma coluna
selected para
hardware atribuir
in-
2 2Continue to to hold
hold thethe button,
left-click button, then
then drag
drag horizon-
horizon- 3 3 Click
Click additional
additional grid
grid squares
squares in in
thethe same
same column
column to to assign
assign
(para marcar
tally (to
uma
horizontally linha),
populate a
verticalmente
and vertically
row), vertically
(para
(a 45 degree
(to angle). auma
marcar
populate
coluna)
column), or
aput
fonte
the
a
source
canais
is routed
to to adicionais.
each of the
additional
A entrada
assignedThe
channels.
de
Input hardware
Channels
selected
selecionada
or FXin-
hardware Re-
outally (to populate ea verticalmente
horizontalmente row), vertically (toângulo
(em populate a column),
de 45 graus). or the source to additional
é endereçada para cadachannels.
um dosThe Inputselected hardware
Channels ou FX in-Returns
horizontally and vertically turns.
horizontally
3 Release the and vertically
left-click (a (a
4545
button
degree
degree
when the
angle).
angle).
destination cros-
put
put is routed to each of the assigned Input Channels or FX Re-Re-
is routed
atribuídos.
to each of the assigned Input Channels or FX
3 Solte o botão quando oAll
ponto de interseção de destino turns.
turns.
spoint
3 is reached.
Release the left-clickcrosspoints
button whenalong
thethe path é alcançado.
are
destination filled
cros- in.
3 Release the left-click button when the destination cros-
Todos os pontos
spoint is de interseção
reached. All ao longoalong
crosspoints do caminho
the sãoare
path marcados.
filled
spoint is reached. All
The destination crosspoints
crosspoint sets along the path
the targeted are filled
channel. in.in.
If the
O ponto
new
The de interseção
assignments
destination de destino
steal ajustatargeted
any previous
crosspoint sets o canalchannel.
selecionado.
assignments, If theSe
a warning
The destination crosspoint sets thethe
targeted channel. If the
umadialog
nova
new atribuição
will
assignments “rouba”
ask yousteal qualquer
to confirm
any atribuição
or cancel
previous anterior,
the reassignment.
assignments, a warninguma
new assignments steal any previous assignments, a warning Multiple input
mensagem
dialog de ask
will alerta
you pede
to a confirmação
confirm or cancel ou
thecancelamento
reassignment. da assignments
dialog will ask you to confirm or cancel the reassignment.
operação. Multiple input
Multiple input
Using the Arrow Keys to Assign Channels assignments
assignments
Using
Utilizando
Using thethe
teclas Arrow
de
Arrow setas Keys
parato
Keys to Assign
assinalar
Assign Channels
canais
Channels
You can use the Arrow keys to assign routing.
You can use the Arrow keys to assign routing.
You can use the Arrowaskeys to assign
Você pode utilizar teclas de routing.
setas para assinalar
To assign channels using the Arrow Keys on the keyboard: A hardware
Uma entrada deinput routed
hardware to multiple
endereçada paraInput
váriosChannels
Input Channels
endereçamentos.
To To assign
1assign
Place thechannels
channels
cursor using
using
over the
the
the Arrow
Arrow
PatchingKeys
Keys onon
Grid the
the
so keyboard:
keyboard:
that the cursor A hardware input
A hardware
To assigninput
routed
routed
an Output to to multiple
multiple
bus
Input
Input
to multiple
Channels
Channels
hardware outputs:
Parachanges
assinalar endereçamentos utilizando as teclas de setas no Para atribuir um bus Output para várias saídas de hardware:
1 Place to the
the crosshair.
cursor over the Patching Grid so that the cursor
1 Place the cursor over the Patching Grid so that the
teclado: cursor To To assign
1assign
Go anan
the Output
Output bus
bus
appropriate to to multiple
multiple
Output hardware
hardware
tab in outputs:
outputs:
the Patchbay.
changes
changes to
thethe crosshair. 11VáGo
à aba appropriate
Output apropriada no Patchbay.
2 Presstothe crosshair.
Left or Right Arrow keys to move the crosshair to
1 Go thethe
2 Click appropriate Output
in the Patching tabtab
Output
Grid
in
thethe
toinassign
Patchbay.
Patchbay.
the Output bus to the
1 2Posicione
2 nexto
thePress
Press
cursor
or
thethe Left
Left
sobre
previous
or or
o
Right
Right
Patching
hardware
Arrow
Arrow
I/O
keys
Grid
keys
to to
para
column;
move
move
quecrosshair
pressse
thethe
torne
the Downuma
crosshair or
to to first hardware output.
Click in the Patching Grid to assign the Output bus
cruz.Up
the Arrow
next orkeys to move
previous the cursor
hardware to the next
I/O column; orthe
press previous
Down or 2 22Clique
Click innothePatching Grid
Patching para
Grid toatribuir
assign o bus
the Output
Output bus toato
para the
primeira
the
the next or previous hardware I/O column; press the Down or saída
first de hardware.
hardware output.
channel. first hardware output.
3 Click additional grid squares in the same row to assign the
UpUp Arrow
Arrow
2 Pressione as
keys
keys to to
teclas
move
move thethe
de setas
cursor
cursor
esquerda
to
thethe
to ou next
next
direita or or previous
previous
para movimentar
channel. same Output
Click bus togrid
additional additional
squares hardware outputs. An asterisk
channel.
a cruz When
3 para the crosshair
a próxima colunaisou
over the
para correctanterior
a coluna square inde the grid,
entradas/ 3 33 Clique
Click quadrados
additional grid adicionais
squares in in
nathe
the same
mesma
same row
row to to
linha assign
para
assign thethe
atribuir
(*)
osameappears
Output at the
bus end of the displayed destination to indicate
saídas de Enter
press
Whenhardware; pressione
tocrosshair
assign the asthe
teclas
patch. de setas para cima ougrid,
para same mesmo
Output bus
bus to to
Output additional
para saídas
additional hardware outputs.
adicionais
hardware outputs. An asteriskUm
deAnhardware.
asterisk
3 3When thethe
crosshair is over
is over the correct
correct square
square in in
thethe
grid, the
(*) multiple
appears routing.
baixopress
paraEnter
movimentar o cursor
to assign para o próximo canal ou o anterior.
the patch.
asterisco
(*) appears at at
(*)thethe end
aparece
end of
thethe
ofno fim displayed
do display
displayed destination
destination to to
de destino indicate
para
indicateindicar
press Enter to assign the patch. múltiplos endereçamentos.
thethe multiple
multiple routing.
routing.
Multiple
3 Quando Inputsobre
a cruz estiver ando Output Assignments
quadrado correto in
no grid, pressione
the
Enter paraPatchbay
Multiple Input and Output Assignments inin
Multiple Input
assinalar um and Output
endereçamento. Assignments
thePatchbay
the Patchbay
InputRoteamentos
sources can be
Múltiplos de assigned
Entradas etoSaídas
multiple Input Channels in
no Patchbay
the Patchbay.
Input sources Output
can busses can be assigned to multiple hard-
Input sources can bebe assigned
assigned to to multiple
multiple Input
Input Channels
Channels in in
ware
Fontes de outputs.
entrada podem ser atribuídas para vários Input Channels
thethe Patchbay.
Patchbay. Output
Output busses
busses cancan
bebe assigned
assigned to to multiple
multiple hard-
hard-
noware
Patchbay.
ware Busses
outputs.
outputs.
de saída podem ser assinalados para várias
Stage
saídas inputs assigned to multiple channels share a common
de hardware.
Multiple output
preamp
Stage gain.assigned
inputs Adjusting one channel's gain share
automatically ad-
Stage inputs assigned to to multiple
multiple channels
channels a common
share a common assignments
Multiple output
Entradas
preamp gain. Adjusting one channel's gain automatically ad-de
justs
preamp Stage atribuídas
all other
gain. channels.
Adjustinga vários
one canais
All other compartilham
channel
channel's gain functionso ganho
(suchad-
automatically as An Output bus
Multiple output
assignments
assigned to multiple hardware outputs
preamp comum. Ajustar assignments
EQ, dynamics, and um ganho
panning) de canal
remain automaticamente
independent, ajusta
making it
justs all other channels. All other channel functions (such as as
justs all other channels. All other channel functions (such An
Um
An Output
bus busbus
Output
Output assigned
atribuído
assigned a to to multiple
múltiplas saídas
multiple hardware outputs
de hardware
hardware outputs
outros canais.
convenient Todas as outras
to have funções
a channel de canal
appear on (como
one EQ,
input dinâmica
strip to bus
EQ, dynamics, and panning) remain independent, making it it
EQ, dynamics, and panning) remain independent, making Choosing the Digital Source (AES or ADAT)
e posicionamento
and process to
convenient itpanorâmico)
for the
have housecontinuam
a channel mix, andindependentes,
appear onone
on another
input tornando
input
strip strip
to to bus Escolhendo
Choosing a fonte
thedigital (AES ou
Digital ADAT)
Source (AES
convenient
possível
with
and
ter umtocanal
different
process
have
it
a channel
em uma
processing
for the house
appear
régua
formix,
paraon
monitor
and
one input
endereçá-lo
mixing.
on another
strip
e bus
processá-lo
input strip Choosing the
If your system Digital
includes Source
a DSI (AES
digital input oror
card, do
ADAT)
ADAT)
the follow-
andaprocess
para house mixit for the house
e outra réguamix,
com and on another
diferente input strip
processamento para
ing to specify the digital
a source.
with
with
mixagem different
different
de processing
processing
monitoração. forfor monitor
monitor mixing.
mixing. IfSe seu
If your
your sistema
system
system inclui
includes
includes auma
DSI placa
DSI
digital de
digital entrada
input
input card, digital
card,
dodo DSI,
thethe faça o
follow-
follow-
Using multi-assigned inputs requires additional input chan- seguinte
ing to para
specify especificar
the a
digital fonte digital.
source.
ing to specify the digital source.
nels
Usingbemulti-assigned
available in the current
inputs System
requires Configuration.
additional If you
input chan- To configure a digital input for AES or ADAT:
Usingentradas
Utilizar multi-assigned inputs requires
multi-atribuídas requeradditional
Input Channelsinputadicionais
chan-
are
nels using all available stage inputs, you Configuration.
must increase the Paraconfigure
configurara uma entrada digital para AES ou ADAT:
nels bebe
disponíveis
available
available in in
thethe
na configuração
current
current
do sistema.
System
System Configuration.
Se você está utilizando
If you
If you To To
1configure digital
a digital
In the Patchbay, input
input
route a for
for AES
DSIAES or ADAT:
orother
or ADAT:digital input to an in-
number
are using ofallInput Channels
available stage in the Options
inputs, you > System
must increasepage.
the (To
todas as entradas
are using Stage
all available stagedisponíveis,
inputs, youvocê mustpodeincreaseaumentar
the o put channel.
learn
number howof to configure
Input Channels the number
in the of Input
Options > Channels,
System page.see(To In
Nothe
1 1In
1 the Patchbay,
Patchbay,
Patchbay, route
enderece a
route auma DSI or
DSI entradaother digital
or otherdigital DSI
digital input
input to to
anan
ou outra in-in-um
para
número
numberdeofInputInputChannels
Channelsna página
in the Options
Options > System.
> System (Para
page. (To
“System Configuration Settings” on of
page 58.)Channels, Input
putput Channel.
channel.
saberlearn
learncomo
howhowto to configure
configurar
configure thethe
o número number
de Input
number Input
Channels,
of Input seesee
veja “Ajustes
Channels, 2 channel.
Click the Inputs tab and navigate to the input channel being
de“System
Configuração
“System de Sistema”
Configuration na página
Settings” on58.)
page 58.) fed fromthe
Click the DSI input.
tab and navigate to
Configuration Settings” on page 58.)
On VENUE Mix Rack systems, choosing the 64 channel set-
2
Clique
2 2Click thena Inputs
aba tab
Inputs Inputs
and enavigate
navegue thethe
to para oinput
para
input channel
o Input
channel being
Channel
being
fed from
alimentado the DSI input.DSI.
Emting
On gives Mix
sistemas
VENUE you additional
VENUE
Mix Rack Mix input
Rack,
systems, processing
escolher
choosing channels
a64 beyond
configuração fed3 from
Clickthethepela
DSI
ADATentrada
input.
button on-screen, in the channel Input con-
On VENUE Rack systems, choosing thethe
64 channel
channel set-set-
de 64
the canais
number oferece
of hardwarecanais
inputsadicionais
(48). Usede processamento
this setting to be trols section.
Click the When lit, ADAT
button input in
on-screen, is active; when Input
unlit, con-
AES
ting gives you additional input processing channels
ting gives you additional input processing channels beyond beyond 3
3 3Click
Cliquethe
ADAT
botãobutton
noADAT ADAT na on-screen,
tela, na in thethe
seção
channel
channel
de Input
controles decon-
entrada.
além
able do
to número de entradas
multi-assign inputs to de hardware
input processing(48). Usetoessa
channels. inputsection.
trols is active. The corresponding
When lit, ADAT input channel’s
is active; Source
when LED on
unlit, AES
the number of hardware inputs (48). Use this setting to be be
the number of hardware inputs (48). Use this setting trols section.
Quando When
aceso, lit, ADATADAT
a entrada inputestá
is active;
ativa;when
quandounlit, AES
apagado, a
configuração
able to para permitir
multi-assign inputs a múltipla atribuição de entradas the Stage
input is Rack DSI
active. The Card lights to indicate
corresponding channel’s AESSource
or ADAT.
LED on
able
parato multi-assign
canais inputs
de processamento to to input
input processing
processing
demultiple
entradas.
channels.
channels. entrada
input AES está
is active. Theativa. O LED Source
corresponding do canal
channel’s correspondente
Source LED on na
To assign a hardware input source to Input Channels or the Stage Rack DSI Card lights to indicate AES
placa
the Stage
Stage RackRack
DSI DSI
Card selights
acende topara indicar
indicate AES or or
AES ou ADAT.
ADAT.
ADAT.
FX assign
Returns:
To To a hardware
assign a hardware input
input source
source to to multiple
multiple Input
Input Channels
Channels or or
ParaFX
atribuir uma fonte de entrada de hardware para vários Input
Returns:
FX1Returns:
Go to the appropriate Input tab in the Patchbay.
Channels ou FX Returns:
1 Go
1 Go to to the appropriate
the Input tab
in in
thethe Patchbay.
2 Click in appropriate Gridtab
the PatchingInput to assign Patchbay.
the source to the first In-
1 Vá à aba Input apropriada no Patchbay.
put Channel
Click or FX Return.
2
2 Click in in
thethe Patching
Patching Grid
Grid to to assign
assign thethe source
source to to
thethe first
first In-In-
Clique
2 put
put no Patching
Channel
Channel or or
FX Grid
FX para atribuir a fonte ao primeiro Input
Return.
Return.
112 VENUE
Channel ou FXProfile
Return.Guide
112VENUE
112 VENUE Profile
Profile Guide
Guide
Advertências Quando “Roubar” Entradas e Saídas no Exportação de Informações do Sistema
Patchbay
Warning
Warning whenwhen Stealing
Stealing Inputs or
Inputs VENUE
VENUE System Information Export
Stage
Warning
Warning
Outputs
Rackwhen
when
Features
in theStealing
Stealing
Patchbay Inputs or
Inputs or
or VENUE System
VENUE System Information
Information Export VENUE System
Additional
Export Information
Required Export
Components
Warning
OOutputs
Patchbay
Outputs in
indica
in when
the
as saídas
the Stealing
de hardwareInputs
Patchbay
Patchbay que estão orallem uso VENUE
The System System
Information Information
Export feature lets Export
you generate an
Outputs
Stage
acendendoRacks
o in the
are
número used
da Patchbay
with an
coluna FOH
da Rack,
saída and
física. provide
Além disso,stage
uma
O
The recurso
The
The System Information
Information
following
System
Export
Export
components
Information Export
permite
feature
must gerar
lets
be purchased
feature lets
um
you
you
documento
generate an
separately:
generate an
HTML
Outputs
The
audio Patchbay
I/O for in the
indicates
VENUE Patchbay
hardware
Profile outputs
systems. Up tothat
two are already
Stage
The Patchbay indicates hardware outputs that are already in in
Racks
The
HTML
System
HTML
(texto)
(text)
Information
(text) document
document
Export
thatthat feature
details
details the
lets
the you
system’s
generate
system’s an
hardware,
The System Information Export feature lets you generate ando
que detalha as configurações do hardware do sistema,
hardware,
mensagem
The Patchbayé apresentada
indicates se o endereçamento
hardware outputs that are “roubar” uma
alreadyoutput.
in HTML
•software
HTML Video (text)
(text) document
Display
document (15-inch that
that details
or greater
details the system’s
theflat-panel
system’s hardware,
VGA
hardware, display
The Patchbay
use
can byused
be indicates
dimming the hardware
column
simultaneously, outputs
number
supporting forthat
that
up toare
96already
physical
total in
inputs. software
software andeand
do currently
arquivo
currently show
loaded loaded
atualmente
Show Show file file configurations.
carregado.
configurations. Esse This This
documento
entrada
use
useInby
The
by ou saída
dimming
Patchbay
dimming de hardware
the column
indicates
the column que está
number
hardware
number em
for uso,
that
outputs
for that perguntando
physical
that
physicalare sobre
output.
already in softwareHTML and
recommended; (text) document
currently loaded
1024x768 that Show details
minimum file the system’s
configurations.
resolution). hardware,
VGA Thisand
a use byaddition,
dimming
confirmação
In addition, aou the column
acancelamento
dialog
dialog is
number
is shown
shown da
if
for thatwill
ifatribuição.
the the patch
patch will
physical
steal
steal a aoutput.
output.
hardware
hardware
software
podedocument
documentsoftware
serandlido
can
currently
can
and
por be
be currently
read readloaded
qualquer
by any by any
loaded
Show
browser
Internet
filede
Internet
Show
configurations.
browser, internet,
browser, such as
file configurations.
como
such This
as Internet
Inter-
Inter-This
In use by
addition, dimming
a the column number for that physical output. document DVI can
can be
supported. read
read by any Internet browser,
browser, such such as as Inter-
InAudio
addition,
input I/O a dialog
dialog
or output is
is shown
that shown if
if the
is already inpatch
the patch
use, will
will steal
asking steal
you a hardware
ato
hardware
confirm or Explorer,
document
net net
Explorer,
Mozilla
Explorer, Mozilla
Firefox
beMozilla ou
byFirefox
Firefox
any Safari.
or
Internet
or Safari.
Safari.
Inter-
inputInor output
addition, that is
a dialogalready in
is shown use, asking
if the patchyou to
will confirm
steal or
a hardware net documentMozilla can beFirefox read byor any Internet browser, such as Inter-
input
input
Para
or output
or output
cancel the
confirmar
that
that is already
is already
reassignment.
uma
in use, asking
in use, asking
reatribuição, siga
you to
you to
um dos
confirm
confirm or
or
seguintes net• Explorer,
Explorer, Mozilla Firefox or
USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
Safari.
Safari.
cancel• the
input
cancel reassignment.
48 inputs
or output with
thatremotely
is alreadycontrollable micyou
in use, asking preamps and or
to confirm net The Explorer,
A patch lista Mozilla Firefox
decanendereçamentos
list also or Safari.separately
be exported pode ser (for exportada
more in-
cancel the
the reassignment.
procedimentos: reassignment. The patch
patch list
Theformation, list can
can also
also be
be exported
exported separately
separately (for
(for more
more in-
in-
individually
cancel selectable phantom power.
the reassignment. The separadamente
patch list can
see also
“Patch(parabe mais
exported
List Export”informações,
separately
on page veja
(for
114). “Exportação
more in-
To confirm a reassignment, do one of the following: Digitalformation,Snake
The patchCable
see “Patch
list (VENUE
canList Profile
alsoExport”
be exported Systems
on page Only)
114).
separately
To confirm
• 8Assign a
analogreassignment,
outputperguntado do
channels; one of the following: formation,
de
formation, Lista see
see “Patch
de“Patch List
Endereçamentos”
List Export”
Export” onpágina
na
on page
page 114).(for more in-
114).
114).
To
ToClique
confirm
confirm a quando
a reassignment,
reassignment, do
do oneone expandable
para
of theconfirmar
of the up to
following:
following: 48 analog or
a reatribuição.
• The formation,
connection see “Patch
between List
FOH Export”
Rack and on page
Stage 114).requires
Rack
Click
 To confirm
 Clickdigital
AssignAssign when
a reassignment,
outputs
when perprompted
prompted Stagedo to confirm
one
Rack.
to confirmof thethe the reassignment. TheThe
following:
reassignment. System System Information
Information document
document can can
be be sent
sent directly
directly to to pro-
pro-
 Click Assign when prompted to confirm the reassignment. The
O
The System
documento
a Digital
System
duction Information
SnakeSystem
Information
or rental cable. document
Information
This
document
companies cable
to can
pode
cancan
describe be
be besent
ser
sent directly
enviado
purchased
your directly
exact to pro-
diretamente
directly
to pro-
console
–ouClick Assign when prompted to confirm the reassignment.
– –Click duction or rental companies to describe your beexact console
–
– or ––or – Assign when prompted to confirm the reassignment. duction duction The
à needs.
from System
or
produtora
or rental
Avid
rental
Once orInformation
companies
oucompanies
locadora
assembled
exported, the
document
to
by
to describe
para
your preferred
describe
information
canyour
descrever
yourcan
sent
exact
vendor.
exact
be
directly
consoleto pro-
exatamente
console
re-formatted suas
as
– or
Synchronization
or – and Control I/O needs.
necessidades
needs. Once
duction
Once exported,
or rental
de
exported, console.the
companies
the information
Após
information to
exportada, can
describe
can be
bea re-formatted
your exact
informação
re-formatted as
console
pode
as ser
 Click
Clique – or again
–
novamente onno themesmosame patch
ponto point.
de interseção. needs.desired Once by exported,
copying the
and information
pasting the can
data be
intore-formatted
a word as
process-
Click
 Click
again
• Snake on
on the
again connectorsthe samesametopatch enable
patch point.
primary and redundant (if
point. desired
reformatada
needs. by copying
Once como and
exported, pasting
desejado, the
colando
the information data einto a
copiando
can word process-
dados
be re-formatted em umas
 Click again on the same patch point. desired
desired
ing by
by copying
copying
or spreadsheet and
and pasting
pasting
application. the
the data
data into
into a
a word
word process-
process-
 Click again on
applicable) the same to
connection patch
a point.FOH Rack.
VENUE ingOptional
ing or or
processador spreadsheet
desired
or spreadsheet by Components
de
copying
spreadsheet application.application.
textos. and
application. pasting the data into a word process-
Para Tocancelar uma reatribuição,
cancelreassignment,
a reassignment, do eithersiga of theum dos seguintes ing
following:
To
To cancel
cancel a reassignment, do
a reassignment, do either
either of of the
the following:
following: ing or spreadsheet application.
procedimentos:
To cancel a do either of the following: The following
To export VENUE components
System are optional, and must be
Information:
Click
 To cancel Cancel to leave the patchpoint
a reassignment, do either of the unchanged.
following: ToPara
export exportarVENUE VENUE
System System Information:
Information:
 Click Cancel to leave the patchpoint unchanged. To export
purchased VENUE System
separately: Information:
 Click Cancel to leave the patchpoint unchanged.
Click Cancel
Cancel para to leave theopatchpoint unchanged. To export VENUE System Information:
Clique deixar ponto de interseção inalterado. 1 To Insert
export a USBVENUE key disk
System into a USB
Information: port on the system.
System
 Click
 Click
Click
any any
otherComponents
other
Cancel to
point point
leave
in in
thethethe patchpoint
grid grid
(the
 Click any other point in the grid (the Patchbay grid remains
(the Patchbay
unchanged.
Patchbay grid grid remains 1
remains
Insert
Insira
1 1Insert
1 Insert• USB a
a USB
uma
a USB
USBflash key
key
keymídia
diskdisk
disk
disk de
(orinto
into
intoother a
a USB
armazenamento
a USB
port
portable
USB port
port on
on
USB
on
the
USB
the
the
system.
storagena porta
system.
system. deviceUSB for do
 Click
active, any other
even whenpoint the inConfirm
the grid (the Patchbaydialog
Assignment grid remains
is open sistema.
2 1Go Insert
to the a USBOptions key >diskSysteminto apage.
USBorport on recommended)
the system.
active,
Clique
active, even
qualquer
 Click when the Confirm
outro point
any other pontoin notheAssignment
gridgrid
(o Patchbay dialog
(the Patchbay is
grid seopen
gridmantém 2 Go to transfer
the of
Options
remains 2 Go to the Options > System page. Show > data;
System 512
page. MB larger
active, even
even when
on-screen). when the the Confirm
Confirm Assignment
Assignment dialog dialog isis open
open 2 Go to the Options > System page.
on-screen).
ativo, mesmoeven
Included
active, quando a caixa
Components
when de diálogoAssignment
the Confirm de confirmação dialogestáis aberta
open 2•ClickNear-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
on-screen).
on-screen).
3Vá
3 2Click
Click
àGo to
the
página
the
the
the
Info Info
Options
button.
button.
button.
Options System page.
> >System.
na tela).on-screen). 3
3 Click Info
the Info button.
All VENUE Profile systems include the following: 3 Click the Info button.
3 Clique
• Dynamic no botão orInfo.
condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
(for Talkback)
• Monitor mount for VGA screen (screen not included) Export VENUE System Information button in Options > System
Export• VENUE
Export MIDI Systemcables Information
(for connecting buttonexternal
in OptionsMIDI > System devices)
• Trackball mount (trackball not included) Export VENUEVENUE System System Information
Information button button in in Options
Options > > System
System
4 Botão
Do •Do
4 Export BNCany
Expor VENUE
VENUEof the
cables System
Systemfollowing:
(for connecting
Information
Information WordOptions
button
na página inclock > between
Options > System
System the
• VENUE Mouse Pad 4 Do any
4 Do any of
any of the
of the following:
the following:
following:
• VENUE
If you system
have more and thanexternalone USB digital
key devices)
disk connected, make
• VENUE Profile Guide 4•••Siga
4If Do
If youany
If you
youumhave
sure dos
have
have
the
ofmore
more
correct
than
the following:
seguintes
more than
thanUSB
one
onekey
USB
procedimentos:
one USB
USB
disk
key
key
keyis
disk
disk
diskto
selected.
connected,
connected,
connected,
If it is
make
make
make
not, click
•sure 25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting GPI devices)
Warning when reassigning an output that is already in use
Warning• when(2)
Two reassigning
console an output that is already in use
lights
• sure Se
sure
• If the
you
você
the
the
Next
correct
havemais
tem
correct
correct
Disk to
USB
more
USB
USB key
cycle
key
than
que
key
through
disk
oneis
uma
disk
disk is selected.
USB
mídia
selected.
iseach
selected.
key dedisk
available
If
If
If
it
it is
is not, click
connected,
armazenamento
is not,
it disk not,untilclick
click
make
the
USB
Warning
Warning when when reassigning an output that
that is already in in use Next Disk
conectada,
sure to
the cycle through
certifique-se
correct USB key each
de que
disk available
isaselected.
mídia disk Ifuntil
USB it is the
correta
not, está
click
Advertência quandoreassigning
atribuir uma an output
saída que esteja is
emalready
uso use Next
Next Disk
Disk to
correct toone cycle
cycle through each available
through each available disk until the
is selected. disk until the
Warning
• Protective when reassigning
Dust Cover an output that is already in use correct
correct Nextone
selecionada. one Disk is
is selected.
toSecycle
selected.não,through clique Next Disk paradisk
each available alternar
until thepelas
To suppress the reassignment warning dialog, hold Default correct
• Click one is selected.
to proceed and export system info to the se-
•To suppress
Rack(s)
Para the
(see
eliminar reassignment
next)aorcaixa warning dialog, hold Default
VENUE mídias Save
disponíveis
Profile até que
Expansion a correta esteja
Options selecionada.
To
To
on
suppress
suppress
on the
the
the reassignment
the
console reassignment
Alt on de the diálogodialog,
warning
warning
computer de
dialog, advertêencia
hold while
hold
keyboard Default
Default de
click- • Click
• •• Click
Click
Clique
correct
Save
Save
Save
lected Save
USB
to
to
to
one proceed
is selected.
proceed
proceed
para
disk.exportar
and
and export
and export system
export system
system
as informações
info
info to
infodo to to the
the se-
the
sistema se-
se- para a
on Toconsole
the suppress
reatribuição,
console or
or Alt
the
segure
Alt on
on the
reassignment
Default
the computer
na warning
computer keyboard
console
keyboard while
dialog,
ou Alt
whilenoclick-
hold Default
teclado
click- lected
• USB
Click disk.
Save to proceed and export system info to the se-
on the
ing console
in the or
patch Alt on
grid the
to computer
change the keyboard
assignment. while click- lected
mídia
lected USB
USB
USB disk.
desejada.
disk.
ing
do in
on the
the patch
computador console grid or to
enquantoAltchange
on clica
the theno assignment.
computerpatch grid para
keyboard alterar
while a
click- The • following
Click options
Cancel to can
dismiss be added
the dialogto VENUE
without Profile systems.
exporting.
Racks,
ing in in Software
the patch
patch gridgrid CDs, iLoks,
to change
change theand Cables
assignment.
ing the
atribuição.
to the
ing in the patch grid to change the assignment.
assignment. • For
•
• Click
• ClickClique
details
Click
lected
Cancel
Cancel
Cancel USB
on all
Cancel
to
to disk.sairthe
dismiss
para
dismiss
toVENUE
dismiss semdialog
the
systems
the exportar
dialog
dialog
without exporting.
andwithout
options,exporting.
without visit the Avid
exporting.
Shortcut for Locating Assignments 5 Click • Click
OK to
Cancelconfirm to dismiss
the the
export dialog
procedure. without exporting.
Each Mix Rack
Shortcut for or FOH Rack includes:
Locating Assignments Click
5 website
Click OK
OK to confirm
(www.avid.com).
topara
confirm the export
the export
export procedure.
procedure.
Shortcut
Shortcut
Atalhos for
for Locating
Locating Assignments
Assignments
5 5Click
5 Clique OK OKto confirm confirmar the procedure.
o procedimento de exportação.
• para
Before System
Shortcut
Localização
Restore
reassigning for
de
CD
in
Atribuição
Locating
the Patchbay, Assignments
you may want to dou- 5 Click
You can OK to
now confirm
remove the theUSB export
key procedure.
disk —from there, you can
Before reassigning in the Patchbay, you may want to dou- You can
can now
Youtransfer now remove
remove the
thefile USB
USB key
key disk
disk —from—from there,
there,for you
you can
can
Before reassigning in the Patchbay, you may want to dou- You can now remove the USB key disk —from there, you can
Before
Antes •
ble-check
ECx
ble-check Ethernet
reassigningthe
da reatribuição
Before the
in
existing
reassigning
Control
existingthe
no
in the
Software
Patchbay,
assignment
Patchbay,
assignment Patchbay,to
youtoInstaller
você
the
may
the pode
desired
you
CD
want
desired to
mayhardware
dou-
hardware
querer
want tochecardou-
Mix
Você
transfer
transferYouthe Rack
pode the
canexported
the
Options
exported
remover
now remove
exported
a
file mídia
file totothe ato a
USBpersonal
personal —
USB key computer
adistribution.
personal
dela computer
disk —from
computer
você pode
for printing,
transferir
printing,
there,
forparaprinting, you can
o
ble-check
ble-check
output: the
the existing
existing assignment
assignment to
to the
the desired
desired hardware
hardware transfer
arquivo
formatting,the exported
exportado archiving file
para to
um
or a personal
computador computerpessoal for printing,
impressão,
•
duplamente Standalone
a Software
atribuição Installer
existente CD
para a saída de hardware formatting,
transfer archiving or
output:
output:ble-check the existing assignment to the desired hardware formatting,
formatação,
formatting,
the exported
archiving
arquivamento
archiving or distribution.
or
file to a personal computer for printing,
distribution.
ou distribuição.
distribution.
output:
desejada:• iLok USB Smart Key (for storing plug-in authorizations) I/O Options
output: formatting, archiving or distribution.
To•identify the bus or channels currently assigned tohardware
a hardware Standalone
Standalone Software Software
To identify the
Plug-in bus or
installer channels
discs (if currently
any) assigned
with to a
pre-authorized iLok
To
Para
To identify
identificar
output:
identify the
the bus
o bus
bus or
or channels
ou canaiscurrently
channels atualmente
currently assigned
assigned to
atribuídos
to a
a para uma Standalone
hardware
hardware
Standalone
Standalone
AI16 Analog Software
Software
Software
Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
output:
output:To identify
Two (2)the
• hardware: IECbus power or channels
cables currently assigned to a hardware When Standalone
When exporting Software System Info from the Standalone software,
saída
output:de mic/line
When level
exporting
exporting inputs
System
System Info
Info from
from the
the Standalone
Standalone software,
software,
Click
 output:
 Click on anyon any dimmed
dimmed (already
(already assigned)
assigned) column column number
number at at When
Quando
the exporting
exportar
exported System
System System Info Info
Information fromdo the
software
file Standalone
is Standalone,
displayed software,
immediatelyo arquivo
• One FOH Link cable for connection
 Click on any dimmed (already assigned) column number at
to a VENUE console the
the exported
When exporting
exported System
System Information
System Infofile
Information from
file is
is displayed
the Standalone
displayed immediately
immediately software,
Click
the
Clique
the on
top em any
of thedimmed
qualquerPatchbay. (already
número The de assigned)
Outputs
coluna tabcolumn
assinalada number
containing no the
altoatas-
do System
the exported
using
AO16 Information
Analog
the SystemOutput
default exportado
Information
Card
browser that file
installed é is
provides apresentado
displayed
on 16
your imediatamente
immediately
analog
computer. line level
the top of
 Click
top of the
theonPatchbay.
any dimmed
Patchbay. The
The Outputsassigned)
(already tab containing
column the as-
number at using the the default
exported browser
System installed
Information on your
file isseucomputer.
displayed immediately
theEach
top Stage
signment
Patchbay. of
A theis
aba Patchbay.
automatically
Outputs
Rack The Outputs
contendo
includes: Outputs
revealed.
as
tab
tab containing
atribuições containing
é
the
the as-
automaticamente as- using
utilizando
using
outputs the
the default
o browser
default browser
browser padrão installed
instalado
installed on
on your
em
your computer.
computador.
computer.
signment
the top
signment is
is automatically
of the Patchbay.
automatically revealed.
The Outputs tab containing the as-
revealed. using the default browser installed on your computer.
signment
revelada.• Two is (2)
automatically
IEC power cables revealed. VENUE System Information Contents
signment
Click is automatically revealed. VENUE
Conteúdo
VENUE Analog
XO16 System
do VENUE
System andInformation
SystemOutput
Digital
Information Contents
Information Card that provides 8 analog
Contents
Click
Click VENUE System Information Contents
Click line VENUE
Exported System
level outputs,
VENUE and Information
System 8 AES digital Contents
Information outputs.
is saved as an HTML
Click Exported
Ofile,
VENUE
Exported VENUE
System
VENUE System
Information
System Information
Information exportado is
is saved
é and
saved salvoas
as an
como
an HTML
HTML um arquivo
Exported and VENUE
the fileSystem
name Information
includes the is
datesaved astime
an HTML
of the ex-
file,
HTML,
AT16
file, and
Exported
and the
e
A-Net
theo file
VENUE
nome name
Output
file name do includes
System
arquivo
Card
includes that the
Information
inclui
the date
a
provides
date data and
16
and is
e time
saved
a hora
channels
time of
of the
asdaan
of
the ex-
HTML
exportação.
A-Net
ex-
Clicking a column number to “go to” its current assignment file,port.
and Contents
the file name include includesthe the date (not
following and timeall dataof thewill ex-
be gen-
Clicking umaum column number to para
“go to” its suas
current assignment port.
Ooutput Contents
conteúdo
file, and the
compatible include
incluifileas namethe
seguintes
with following
includes the(not
informações date all Mixers
data
(nem
and will
timetodos be
of thegen-
os dados
ex-
the Aviom® Personal and beother
Clicando número de coluna ir para atribuições atuais port. Contents include the following (not
Clicking
Clicking a a column
column number
number to to “go
“go to”
to” its
its current
current assignment
assignment port. Contents
erated from include
the Standalone following
software): (not all all data
data will will be gen-
gen-
Clicking a column number to “go to” its current assignment serão
erated port.
Pro16™
erated gerados
from
from the
Contents
Series
the pelo
Standalonesoftware
include
devices.
Standalone the Standalone):
software):
following (not all data will be gen-
software):
erated from the Standalone software):
erated from the Standalone software):
digital I/O.
Capítulo 12:12:
Chapter Patchbay
Patchbay 113
113
Chapter
Chapterto12: Patchbay 113
Chapter 1: Introduction 12:
VENUE Profile113
Patchbay 5
VENUE
VENUE 44Siga
Do um
anydos seguintes
of the procedimentos:
following:
• Se você tem mais que uma mídia de armazenamento USB
Registra •conectada,
If you havecertifique-se
more than one de USB
quekey disk connected, make
System Information
System Information Listsathe
data e aand
date hora em the
time queInfo
o arquivo Info
file was a mídia USB correta está
foi gerado. sure the correct
selecionada. USB one
Se não, is selected.
clique Next DiskIf itpara
is not, click Next
alternar pelas
generated.
Disk to
mídias cycle through
disponíveis each
até que a available disk until
correta esteja the correct
selecionada.
Console Registra
Console Lists athe
configuração atual doconfiguration
current hardware hardware e de opcionais
and in- • Clique
one isSave para exportar as informações do Patchbay para a
selected.
da console, incluindofor
stalled options placas ECx e FWx
the console, (se existentes).
including ECx and FWx cards •mídia
ClickUSB
Savedesejada.
to proceed and export Patchbay info to the se-
(if any). • Clique Cancel
lected USB keypara sair sem exportar
disk.
Stage Configuration Registra o conteúdo de cada slot do Stage
RackStage
ou doConfiguration
Stage I/O. Lists card slot contents for each detected • Click
5 Clique OKCancel to dismissothe
para confirmar dialog without
procedimento exporting. Você
de exportação.
Stage Rack or Stage I/O slot. pode remover a mídia USB — dela você pode transferir
5 Click OK to confirm the export procedure. You can now o arquivo
re-
Installed Plug-Ins Registra versões e outras informações (como exportado para um computador pessoal para impressão, formatação,
move the USB key disk and transfer the export file to a per-
informado por
Installed cada Lists
Plug-Ins plug-in) de todos
version os plug-ins
and other atualmente
information (as re- arquivamento ou distribuição.
sonal computer for printing, formatting, and distribution.
instalados. A lista
ported by eachagrupa osfor
plug-in) plug-ins por seuinstalled
all currently estado de habilitado
plug-ins. The
ou desabilitado. Plug-insby
list groups plug-ins habilitados e emare
whether they usoEnabled
aparecem no topo,
or Disabled. Quando exportar um Patch List pela versão Standalone do
When exporting a Patch List from the Standalone software,
seguidos por qualquer plug-ins habilitado (mas não em uso). As
Enabled and In Use plug-ins appear at the top, followed by
software, o arquivo HTML gerado é automaticamente aberto
informações dos plug-ins não estão disponíveis quando exportando the generated
utilizando HTML
seu file isdeautomatically
browser opened
internet padrão usingInternet
(como
any remaining enabled (but not In Use) plug-ins. Plug-in inyour default Internet browser (such as Internet Explorer,
da versão Standalone do software. Explorer, Mozilla Firefox ou outro).
formation is not available when exporting from the Stand- Mozilla Firefox or other).
alone
Show software. Registra o nome, caminho, data e hora dos
File Information Conteúdo do Exported Patchbay Information
mais recentes arquivos Show carregados. Contents of Exported Patchbay Information
Show File Information Lists the name, file path, date and time
O Exported Patchbay Information é salvo como um arquivo HTML, e
of the
System most recently
Configuration loadedinformações
Registra Show file. encontradas na aba oExported
nome do Patchbay information
arquivo inclui a data e aishora
saved
daas an HTML O
exportação. file, and
conteúdo
Options > System. the file name includes the date and time of the export. Con-
inclui:
System Configuration Lists information found on the Options tents include the following:
DSP >Usage
System tab. os processos atribuídos a cada DSP da placa
Registra VENUE Patch List
Mix Engine. A informação é subdividida por Mix Engine como VENUE Patch List
DSP Usage Lists the processes assigned to each DSP of each
apresentado na aba Options > Devices. Show Nome, caminho, data e hora dos arquivos Show mais
Mix Engine card. Information is sub-divided by Mix Engine as Show Name, carregados.
recentemente file path, date and time of most recently loaded
displayed
Patch on the
List Registra Options de
o conteúdo > Devices tab. Patchbay. Uma lista
cada página Show file.
completa de endereçamentos está incluída no System Information Input and Output Patching
Patch List Lists the contents of each Patchbay page. A com- Input and Output Patching
Export, ou uma lista detalhada pode ser exportada separadamente
peloplete patch
Patchbay list a
(veja is seguir).
included in the System Information Export, A lista de endereçamentos é dividida em três seções: Stage, FOH e
or a detailed patch list can be exported separately from the The patch list is divided into three sections: Stage, FOH, and
Pro Tools (FWx).
Patchbay (see next). Pro Tools (FWx).
• • Stageinputs
Stage Inputsshow
mostra número
global global
number 1-48,
1-48, nome
input das entradas,
name(s), card
Patch List Export slotand
slot e número
number.da placa.
• Stage Outputs mostra o número global 1-16 (ou 32 em sistemas
Patch List Export
A exportação do Patchbay gera uma lista de endereçamentos em
• Stage outputs show
expandidos), nome global number
da saída, slot e1-16 (or 32
número da on expanded
placa.
um formato de fácilexport
leitura.generates a patch list in an easily read- • systems), output
FOH Inputs and name, card
Outputs slot and
(local) number.
mostra nome e número das
The Patchbay
entradas/saídas
• FOH (local) inputsfísicas, quandoshow
and outputs aplicável.
the physical in-
able format.
Para exportar informações do Patchbay: • Pro Tools Inputs and Outputs mostra todas as 18 possíveis
put/output name and number, where applicable.
atribuições de entradas/saídas.
To export
1 Insira Patchbay
uma mídia information:
USB em qualquer porta USB na console. • • Pro Toolsindisponíveis
Canais inputs and outputs show all
são marcados 18 possible
como N/A. input/out-
1 Insert a USB key disk into any USB port on the console.
• put assignments.
Direct outs são identificados diferentemente.
2 Vá à página Patchbay. • Unavailable channels are labelled N/A.
2 Go to the Patchbay page.
• Direct outs are identified uniquely.
3 Clique no botão Export na página Patchbay.
3 Click the Export button on the Patchbay page.
Export button
ÍconeExport Patchbay
Export Patchbay Information icon
Information

Chapter
Chapter 13:
13:Metering
Metering
Chapter
Capítulo 13:
13:13: Metering
Metering
Chapter
Chapter 13:Metering
Metering
Stage Racks
VENUE are used
provides signalwith an FOH
metering onRack, and provide
the channels, all me-
in the stage The following components
Compressor/Limiter Gainmust be purchased
Reduction separately:
Meter
A VENUE
VENUE
audio
oferece medição
I/Oprovides
for and
VENUE
demetering
signal sinal
Profile
doson
canais,
systems. the to
Up
na seçãoin
channels,
two Stage
metering
the me- Medidor
Racks
de Redução de Ganho
Compressor/Limiter Gaindo Compressor/Limiter
Reduction Meter
tering section,
VENUE provides on-screen.
signal metering on the channels, in the me- • Compressor/Limiter
Video Display (15-inch or greater
Gain flat-panel Meter
Reduction VGA display
e na tela.
tering section, and on-screen. The LEDs in the Compressor/Limiter meter show the amount
tering
VENUE
VENUE section,
provides
providesand
signal on-screen.
signal
metering
meteringon on
thethe
channels,
channels,
in the OsThe
LEDsLEDs in the Compressor/Limiter
recommended;
no medidor
me-me- Compressor/Limiter
in the Compressor/Limiter 1024x768
Gain minimum
do Compressor/Limiter
GainReduction meter
Reduction show
resolution).
mostram
Meter
Meter the
VGAamount
and
a quantidade
of gain
The reduction
LEDs in thebeing applied to
Compressor/Limiterthe input
meter channel
show byamount
the the
tering
tering
section,
section,
andand
on-screen.
on-screen. de ofredução
gain de
reduction
DVI supported. ganho
beingsendo
appliedaplicada
to the ao
input Input Channel
channel by thepelo
Audio I/O built-in
of Compressor/limiter
gain reduction being from right
applied to input
left, according to the
Compressor/Limiter
The The
LEDs
LEDs
built-inin the
in the embutido,
Compressor/Limiter datodireita
Compressor/Limiter
Compressor/limiter from the
meter
rightmeter
to para
show channel
show
left, a the
the by
esquerda,
amount
amount
according to de
Channel
Channel Meters • USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
• 48 Meters
Channel Meters the following a scale:
inputs with remotely controllable mic preamps and ofacordo
gain com
built-in
of gain
the reductionseguinte
reduction
following being tabela:
Compressor/limiter
being
scale: applied from
applied toright
to the the
inputto channel
inputleft,channel
according
by by to
thethe
Channel
Input and Meters
individually
FX returnselectable
channelsphantom
provide apower.
compressor/limiter the
Channelfollowing
built-in
built-in scale:
Compressor/limiter
Compressor/limiter
Compressor/Limiter from
gain from
right
right
reduction to left,
to scale
meter left,
according
according
to to
Channel
InputChannel
Input
gain
Channels
•reduction
8 analog
Input
Meters
and FX Meters
return
e FX
FXmeter,
output an
channels
Return provide
oferecem
input level
channels;
andcompressor/limiter,
return
um amedidor
meter,
expandable
compressor/limiter
and
up
de redução
indicator
to 48 analog or the
Channel
the
Compressor/Limiter
following
following
scale:
scale:
gain reduction meter scale
de ganho do
gain reduction meter,channels
an input provide
umlevel a compressor/limiter
medidor
meter,de
andnível e LEDs
indicator Channel Compressor/Limiter
LED
• The
LED connection between
gain reduction
Gain Reduction meter scale
Color
FOH Rack andColor
Gain Reduction Stage Rack requires
LEDs for
gain EQ, stereo,
digital outputs
reduction and
per
meter, gate
an status.
Stage Rack.
input level meter, and indicator
indicadores
Input
Input
and para
and
FX status
FX
return de
return EQ,
channels estéreo
channelsprovide
LEDs for EQ, stereo, and gate status. e gate.
provide
a compressor/limiter
a compressor/limiter Channel
Channel
LED
a Compressor/Limiter
Compressor/Limiter
Digital Snake gain
Gain
cable. gain
reduction
reduction
Reduction
This cable canmeter
meter
be scale
Color scale directly
purchased
none 0 dB Off
LEDs
gain
gain for EQ,meter,
reduction
reductionstereo,
meter,
anand
an gate
input status.
input
level
level
meter,
meter,
andand
indicator
indicator none 0 dB Off
LEDfrom
LED Avid or assembled
Gain
Gain by your preferred
Reduction
Reduction Color vendor.
Color
Synchronization
LEDs
LEDs
forfor
Comp/LimEQ,EQ, and
stereo,
stereo,Control
andand
gate I/O
gate
status.
status. none
1 (right) <= 03 dB
dB Off
Green
GainComp/Lim
Reduction 1 (right) <= 3 dB Green
• Comp/Lim
Snake
Gain connectors to enable primary and redundant (if
Reduction nonenone 0 dB
0 dB Off Off
1 (right)
2Optional <= <= 3 dB
6 dB Green
Green
Gain Reduction
applicable) connection to a VENUE FOH Rack. 2 Components<= 6 dB Green
Comp/Lim
Comp/Lim 1 (right)
1 (right) <= <=
3 dB
3 dB Green
Green
Gain
Gain
Reduction
Reduction 3The2
(left) <= <=
12 6dBdB Green
Green
Input Level
Input Level 3 following
(left) components
<= 12aredBoptional, Green
and must be
2 2 <= <=
6 dB
6 dB Green
Green
Input Level 3 (left) separately: <= 12 dB
purchased Green
EQ Status LED <= <=
System
EQInput
Input Components
In/Out
Level
Level
EQ In/Out
Gate
Gate
3 EQ
(left)Status
•3 (left)
USB flashLED
disk (or 12 12
dB dB
other Green
portable USB Green
storage device for
LED
EQ de status EQ
Status
transfer ofLED
Show data;
EQ In/Out Gate A single red LED indicates EQ512 MB or
In/Out larger
status as recommended)
shown in the
Stereo EQAEQ single
•Status
following
red
Status LED
table.
Near-field
LED
LED indicates EQ In/Out status as shown in the
monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
Included
Input EQ EQ Components
In/Out
channel In/Out
meters
Stereo
and LEDs Gate
Gate UmA single
LED red LEDindica
vermelho
following table. indicates
se o EQ In/Out
EQ está no status
circuitoasoushown in acordo
não, de the
Medidores
Inpute LEDs de Input
channel Channel
meters Stereo
and LEDs com• a seguinte
Headphones
following
A single
A single
redred
LED tabela.
table.
LED with 1/4-inch
indicates
indicates
EQEQ jack
In/Out
In/Out
status
status
as shown
as shownin the
in the
All
All VENUE
Input
console Profile
channel
channel systems
meters and
meters include
LEDs
have
Stereo
Stereo the resolution
higher following: on-screen Color EQ Status
•Color
Dynamic or condenser
EQ Status microphone and XLR mic cable
Todos All
Input •os
Input
console
medidores
VENUE
equivalents
channel
channel
channel
de
Profile
that appear
meters
meters
and
meters
canal
console
inLEDs
and
LEDs both
have higher
da console
the targeted
resolution
possuem
channel controlsde following
on-screen
equivalentes followingtable.
table.
All console
equivalents channel meters have higher resolution on-screen Color
(none)(for NotEQ
Talkback) Status
in circuit
alta resolução nathat
tela,appear in both the
que aparecem emtargeted
ambos channel controls
os controles de (none) Not in circuit
andequivalents
•above
Two the
(2) faders
IEC
that in the
power
appear channel
cables
in both theoverview.
targeted channel controls Color
Color EQ EQ
Status
All and
canal All
console
console
channel
selecionados
above channel
the meters
efaders
abaixometershave
indos
the have
higher
faders
channelhigher
resolution
resolution
na visão on-screen
geral dos
overview. on-screen
canais. • FootswitchesNot (upStatus
intocircuit
2)
and above
• Monitor the faders
mount inVGA
for theboth
channel
screen overview.
(screen not included) Red(none) In circuit
equivalents
equivalentsthat
that
appear
appear
clip in both
in thethe
targeted
be targeted
set forchannel
channel
controls
controls •Red
MIDI cables In circuit
Meter ballistics and margin can channel meters. (none)
(none) Not(for
Not connecting
in circuit
in circuit external MIDI devices)
andMeter
Medidores
Forand
•aboveballistics
balísticos
above
thethe
Trackball
more
and
faders inclip
e margem
faders
mount
information, themargin
in “Metering
the
channel
(trackball
see
can
dechannel
clipe
not be
podemset for
overview.
overview.
included) channel
seron meters.
ajustados para Red In circuit
Meter
medidores ballistics
de
For more canal. and mais
Para
information,clip margin canOptions”
informações,
see “Metering beveja
set for page 118.
channel
“Metering
Options” meters.
Options”
on page • BNC
118. Stereo cables (for
Channel LED connecting Word clock between the
• VENUE Mouse Pad see “Metering Options” on page 118. Stereo
RedRed
VENUE Channel
system LEDexternal digital devices)
In circuit
In circuit
and
For
naMeter
páginamore
Meter 118. information,
ballistics
ballistics
andand
clipclip
margin
margincancan
be set
be set
forfor
channel
channel
meters.
meters. LEDStereo Channel LED a stereo input channel. The ste-
de canal
A single Stereo
yellow LED indicates
Input
ForFor
moreChannels
more
information, and
information, FX
seesee Returns
“Metering
“Metering
Options”
Options”
on on
page
page
118.
118. A•single
Stereo
25-pin
reoStereo Channel
D-Sub
yellow
Channel
cables
LED
LED LED
(for connecting
indicates to GPI
a stereo input devices)
channel. The ste-
InputInput
• Two Channels
Channels e FX
(2) Returns
console and
lights FX Returns
Um
Achannel
single
reo
LEDchannel
LED flashes
yellow
amarelo LED LED
flashes
indica
if a 12 dBa or
indicates
um ifcanal
a 12 dB de
greater
stereo
or
offset
input
greater
entrada
is detected
channel. The ste-
offset isOdetected
estéreo. LED pisca
Input Channels and FX Returns between
reo left and
channel LED right inputs.
flashes if a 12 dB or greater offset is detected
Input Level Meters
• Protective Dust Cover Asesingle
A single
yellow
yellow
uma diferença
between LED
left and LEDindicates
deright indicates
12 dB ou mais é detectada entre asThe
a
inputs. stereo
a stereo
input
input
channel.
channel. The ste-ste-
entradas
Input
Input
InputChannels
Medidores Channels
deLevel and
Meters
Nível de and
Entrada FXFXReturns
Returns between
esquerda
reo reo
channel e left
channel and
direita.
LED LED rightifinputs.
flashes
flashes aif12
a 12
dB dB or greater
or greater
offset
offset
is detected
is detected
• Rack(s)
Input
Each inputLevel
(seeMeters
and FX
next)
return channel strip has a 6-segment Input VENUE
Color
between
between
Color left
Profile
left
and
Channel Expansion
andright
right
Status
inputs.
Channel inputs.
Status
Options
Cada Each
régua
Input
Input input
de
Level and
Input
Level FX return
Channel
Meters
Meters e channel
FXlevels
Return strip has um
possui a 6-segment
medidor Input
Input
Level
Each meter
inputthat
andshows
FX input
return channel from
stripbottom to top, ac- Color Channel can Status
entrada de baixo Input
hasbottom
a 6-segment
Level meter that shows input levels from to top, ac- (none)
The Mono
following options be added to VENUE Profile systems.
Racks,
Level
cording to Software
de 6 segmentos
the
queCDs,
following
mostra iLoks,
scale: and
os níveis de Cables para (none) Mono
Level
Each
Each meter that shows input levels from a bottom to top, ac- Color
Color
For(none) Channel
details on all VENUEChannel Status
Status and options, visit the Avid
systems
cima, deinputinput
acordo
cording and
to and
FXfollowing
coma
the FX
return
return
channel
seguinte channel
escala:
scale: strip
strip
hashas 6-segment
a 6-segment
Input
Input Yellow Mono
Stereo
cording
Each
Level
Level Mix
meter to
meter the
Rack
that or
that FOH
following
shows
shows Rack
input scale:
inputincludes:
levels
levels
fromfrom
bottom
bottomto top,
to top,
ac-ac- Yellow(www.avid.com).
website Stereo
LED Level Colors (none)
(none) Mono Mono
Yellow Stereo
cording
cording
•LED to the
to the
System following
following
Restore scale:
CDLevel scale: Colors
LED
Gate Status LED
1 (top)
• ECx Ethernet Control ClipLevelSoftware Installer
RedColors
CD Gate
Mix
YellowStatusStereo
Yellow
Rack
LED
Options
Stereo
1 (top)
LEDLED +15
Clip
Level dB
Level
Red
Yellow
Colors
Colors ALedGate Status
de status
single de LED
bi-color LED
Gate shows the current Expander or Gate sta-
•1 (top)
Standalone Software Clip
+15Installer
dB CD Red
Yellow A single bi-color LED shows the current Expander or Gate sta-
Gate
tus,Gate
as Status
Status
shown inLED LED
the following
2
1 (top)
1 (top) +6
Clip+15
dB
Clip dB Yellow
Yellow
Red Red A
I/O single bi-color
Options LED shows table.
the current Expander or Gate sta-
2 +6 dB Yellow Um LED bicolor mostrafollowing
tus, as shown in the o status table.
atual do Expander ou Gate, de
+15+15dB dB Yellow
Yellow A tus,
single
A asbi-color
singleshown
bi-color in the
LED LED following
showsshows the the table.
current
current
Expander
Expander or Gate
or Gatesta-sta-
3 •2 Plug-in installer discs
0 dB+6 (if
dB any) with pre-authorized
Yellow
Green iLok acordo
Color com a seguinte
AI16 AnalogExpander
Mic/LineStatus tabela:
Input Card that Gate Status 16 analog
provides
3 0 dB Green tus,tus,
as shown
as shown
Color inExpander
the
in thefollowing
following
Statustable. table. Gate Status
2 •2 Two (2) IEC power +6 +6cables
dB dB Yellow
Yellow mic/line
Color level inputs Status
4 3 –6 0dBdB Green
Green (none) NotExpander
in circuit NotGate Status
in circuit
•4 One FOH Link cable –6 for
dB connection to Greena VENUE console (none) Not in circuit Not in circuit
3 3 0 dB0 dB Green
Green Color
Color Expander
Expander Status
Status Gate Status
Gate Status
AO16 Analog
(none) Output
Not Card that provides
in circuit 16
Not inanalog
circuit line level
5 4 –12–6dBdB Green
Green Green 3 dB gain reduction Gate Open & Hold
Each 5 Stage Rack includes: –12 dB Green Green
outputs 3 dB gain reduction Gate Open & Hold
4 4 –6 –6
dB dB Green
Green (none)
(none) NotNot in circuit
in circuit NotNot
in circuit
in circuit
5 Green 21 3dBdBgain gainreduction
reduction Gate Open & Hold
6 (bottom)
•6 (bottom)
Two (2) IEC power –30–12
dB dB
cables
Green
Green Yellow Gate Release
–30 dB Green Yellow 21 dB gain reduction Gate Release
5 5 –12–12
dB dB Green
Green XO16
Green
GreenAnalog and
3 dB3 dB Digital
gain Output Card
reduction
gain reduction that
Gate provides
Open
Gate & Hold
Open 8 analog
& Hold
6 (bottom) –30 dB Green Red Yellow > 21 21dB dBgaingainreduction
reduction Gate Gate Release
Closed
line level
Red outputs, and 8 AES
> 21 dB gain reduction digital outputs.
Gate Closed
6 (bottom)
6 (bottom) –30–30
dB dB Green
Green Yellow
Yellow 21 21 dB dBgaingainreduction
reduction Gate Release
Gate Release
Red > 21 dB gain reduction Gate Closed
RedRed > 21> 21dB dBgaingainreduction
reduction Gate Closed
Gate
ChapterClosed
13: Metering 115
output compatible with Aviom® PersonalChapter Mixers13: andMetering
other 115
Pro16™ Series devices. Chapter 13: Metering 115
Chapter
Chapter
13:13:
Metering 115115
Metering
digital I/O.
Capítulo 13: Metering 115
Bank Clip Indicators Selected Channel Gain Reduction Meters
Bank Clip
The Clip LEDIndicators
at the top of Input Channel and FX Return Selected Channel
The three dynamics Gain Reduction
gain reduction meters in theMeters
ACS section
Bank Clip
Indicadores
channels de Indicators
Clip
lights when clipping occurs on a hidden
and FX fader bank. Selected
Medidores
show gain de Channel
Redução
reduction de
for Gain
Ganho
the de Reduction
built-inCanais Meters
Selecionados
Compressor/Limiter
Bank
The ClipClip Indicators
LED at the top of Input Channel Return Selected
The Channel
three dynamics Gain Reduction
gain reduction Meters
meters in the ACS section
The channel
channels position
lights of the Clip
when clipping indication
occurs corresponds
on a hidden to
fader bank. (Comp/Lim),
show gain the built-in
reduction for Expander/Gate
the (Exp/Gate), and any
built-in Compressor/Limiter
O LEDThe Clip
Clip no LED
alto at the
dos topChannel
Input of Input Channel
e FX Return and FX Return
seLED
acende quando The
Os three
três dynamics
medidores gain
deplug-in reduction
redução dethe meters
ganho in the ACS
na seção ACSmostram
section a
the
TheThe Clip
position
channel LEDof at the
the topthe
off-bank
position of ofchannel.
Input
Clip Channel
The
indication and
Clip FXflashes
Return
corresponds toto The three
applicable dynamics
Dynamics gain reduction
on meters
selected in the ACS
channel. section
channels lights when clipping occurs on a Ahidden fader bank. (Comp/Lim),
show gain the built-in
reduction forExpander/Gate (Exp/Gate), and
the built-in Compressor/Limiter any
ocorre um
channels
indicate clip em
lights
momentary um banco
when oculto
clipping
clips, and de faders.
occurs
lights on
solid a posição
hidden
for declip-
fader
sustained canal
bank. redução
show de
gain ganho do
reduction Compressor/Limiter
for the built-in embutido, do
Compressor/Limiter Expander/
dothe position
The
indicador Clipofcorresponde
channel
The channel
the off-bank
position
position
à channel.
of the
of the
posição
Clip
doThe Clipoculto.
Clip indication
canal
indication
LED flashes
O LED to
corresponds
corresponds
to
Clip
to
applicable Dynamics
(Comp/Lim),
Gate embutido the plug-in on the selected
built-in Expander/Gate
(Exp/Gate), channel.
(Exp/Gate),
e de qualquer plug-in and any do
de dinâmica
ping.
indicate momentary clips, and lights solid for sustained clip- (Comp/Lim), the built-in Expander/Gate (Exp/Gate), and any
piscathe
para mostrar
position of clips momentâneos
the off-bank channel.e seThe
acende para flashes
Clip LED clipes de
to canal selecionado.
applicable Dynamics plug-in onCompressor/Limiter
the selected channel.
the position of the off-bank channel. The Clip LED flashes to
ping. applicable Dynamics plug-in on the selected channel.
longa duração.
indicate momentary clips, and lights solid for sustained clip- Compressor/Limiter
Toindicate
locate the momentary clips, and lights solid for sustained clip-
clipped channel: Expander/Gate
ping.
Paraping.
localizar canais clipados: Compressor/Limiter
To locate
 Press thethe clipped
Bank channel:
switches until the Channel Input Level me- Compressor/Limiter
Expander/Gate
ters
To show
locateclipping.
the clipped channel: Plug-in
 Press the Bank switches until the Channel Input Level me- Expander/Gate
 Pressione
To locateos switches
the clippedBank até que os medidores Channel Input
channel: Expander/Gate
ters
Level showthe
 mostrem
Press clipping.
o cliping.
Bank switches until the Channel Input Level Plug-in
For more information on clip indication, see “Metering
 Press the Bank switches until the Channel Input Level me-
Op-me- Selected Channel Gain Reduction meters
ters show clipping. Plug-in
tions”
For more
ters on information
show page 118. on clip indication, see “Metering Op-
clipping. Plug-in
Para mais informações sobre indicação de clipes, veja “Opções de Selected Channel Gain Reduction meters
tions”
For moreon page 118.
information
Comp/Lim and Plug-In Gain Reduction Meters
Medição” na página 118. on clip indication, see “Metering Op- Selected Channel Gain Reduction meters
For more information on clip indication, see “Metering Op- Comp/Lim
Medidores
Selectedde andGain
redução
Channel Plug-In
de ganho de Gain
canais
Reduction Reduction
selecionados
meters Meters
tions” on page 118. On the ACS Comp/Lim and Plug-In gain reduction meters, the
tions” on page 118.
ACS Input and Dynamics Meters 6
On
Comp/Lim
LEDs show
Comp/Lim
the ACSde
Medidores
and Plug-In
dynamics
Comp/Lim
Redução
gain
and Plug-In
and
de Ganho
Gain Reduction
reduction
Gain
Plug-In from
Reduction
degain
right
reduction
Comp/Lim
Meters
to left, ac-
Meters
meters,
e Plug-In the
Medidores
ACS Input ACSandInputDynamics
e DynamicsMeters cording
6 On
LEDs to thedynamics
show following scales
the ACS Comp/Limgain andreduction from
Plug-In gain right tometers,
reduction left, ac-the
On the ACS Comp/Lim anddePlug-In gain reduction meters, the
ACS
ACS deInput
Selected
Medidores Input
Nível deand
ChannelCanaisDynamics
and Level
Dynamics Meters
Selecionados Meters
Meters
Nos
6 LEDs show dynamics gain reduction from right to left,do
medidores
cording
ACS gain to the de redução
following
reduction meter scales
scale for ganho Comp/Lim
comp/lim/plug-in e Plug-In ac-ACS,
6
os LEDs show
seis LEDs dynamics
mostram gain
redução reduction from right to left, ac-
de ganho dinâmica da direita para a
Selected Channel
The Selected Channel Level
meters Meters
in the ACS include two 10-seg-
cording
ACS
LED
cording
esquerda,
to the
gain reduction
to
dethe
following
meter scale
Gain
following
acordo com
scales
for comp/lim/plug-in
Reduction
ascales
seguinte Color
tabela:
Os medidores
Selected Selected Channel
Channel no ACSMeters
Level incluem dois medidores de ACS gain reduction meter scale for comp/lim/plug-in
ment level meters:
Selected
The Selected Channel
Channel
nível de 10 segmentos: metersLevel
in theMeters
ACS include two 10-seg- LED
(none) Gain Reduction
0 dBscale
ACS gain reduction meter
Color
(none)
for comp/lim/plug-in
ment
The level meters:
Selected Channel meters in the ACS include two 10-seg- LED
(none)
Gain Reduction
0 Gain
dBdB Reduction
Color
(none)
The Selected Channel meters in the ACS include two 10-seg- 1 LED
(right) 1.5 Color
Green
ment level meters: (none) 0 dB (none)
ment level meters: 1 (right) 1.5 dB Green
2 (none) 30dBdB (none)
Green
1 (right) 1.5 dB Green
2
3 1 (right) 3 dB
6 1.5
dB dB Green
Green
Green
Meters 2 3 dB Green
Solo 3
42 6
93dB
dBdB Green
Green
Green
Meters
Solo 3 6 dB Green
Stereo 4
53 9 dB
156 dB
dB Green
Green
Yellow
Meters
Meters Solo 4 9 dB Green
Selected
Medidores Channel
e LEDs meters
Selected and LEDs
Channel Solo
Stereo 5
64(left) 15
219dB
dB
dB Yellow
Green
Yellow
Selected Channel meters and LEDs Stereo 5 15 dB Yellow
These meters show mono or stereo levels on the selected chan-
Stereo 65(left) 2115
dBdB Yellow
Yellow
Esses medidores mostram os níveis mono ou estéreo do canal Expander/Gate Gain Reduction Meter
nel. The
Selected
selecionado.
These dual, 10-segment,
Channel
O medidor
meters show meters
duplo
mono orbi-color
and LEDs
de LED meters
10 segmentos
stereo levels deindicate
on the input
LEDs bicolores
selected chan- 6 (left) 21 dB Yellow
Selected Channel meters and LEDs 6 (left) 21 dB Yellow
level
indicam for the
o nível currently targeted
dual,de10-segment,
entrada do sinalor Solo’ed
selecionadochannel. Expander/Gate Gain Reduction Meter
nel. The
These meters show mono bi-color
or stereoLED onouthe
meters
levels emselected
Solo.input
indicate chan- On the ACS Exp/Gate gain reduction meter, the 6 LEDs show
These meters show mono or stereo levelschannel.
on the selected chan- Expander/Gate
dynamics gain Gainfrom
reduction Reduction
right to Meter
left, according
level
nel.for
Selected Thethe currently
dual,
Channel Meter targeted
10-segment, or Solo’ed
Scale bi-color LED meters indicate input OnExpander/Gate
the ACS
Medidores reduçãoGain
Exp/Gate
de gain Reduction
reduction
de ganho Meter
meter,
Expander/Gate the 6 LEDstoshow
the
nel. The dual, 10-segment, bi-color LED meters indicate input following scales
level for
Selected
LED
the currently
Channel Meter
Level
targeted or Solo’ed
Scale channel.
Color channel. dynamics
On the ACS gainExp/Gate
reductiongain
from right to left,
reduction according
meter, to the
the 6 LEDs show
level for the currently targeted or Solo’ed On the ACS Exp/Gate gain reduction meter, dotheACS,
6 LEDs show
Selected Channel Meter Scale
Nos medidores
following
dynamics
ACS gain gainde
scales
reduction redução
scalede
reduction
meter forganho
from Exp/Gate
right to left, according
exp/gate/plug-in os to
seis LEDs
the
LED
1Selected
(top) Level
Clip Scale Color
Red dynamics gain reduction from rightdatodireita
left, according to the de
Channel Meter mostram
following redução
scales de ganho dinâmica para a esquerda,
ACS
LED gain reduction
following meter scale
Gain for exp/gate/plug-in
Reduction Color
LED
1 LED
(top)
+15 dB
Level
Clip
Yellow
Color
Red acordo comscales
a seguinte tabela:
Level Color
+15 dB Yellow ACS gain reduction meter
LED Gain scale for exp/gate/plug-in
Reduction Color
2 1 (top) +9Clip
dB Yellow
Red (none) 0 dBscale
ACS gain reduction meter (none)
for exp/gate/plug-in
1 (top) Clip Red LED Gain Reduction Color
+15 dB Yellow (none) 0 Gain
dB Reduction (none)
2
3 +9+15
+3 dB dB
dB Yellow
Yellow
Yellow 1 LED
(right) 3 dB Color
Green
2 +9 dB Yellow (none) 0 dB (none)
3 +3 dBdB Yellow 1 (none)
2 (right) 3
60dB
dBdB Green
(none)
Green
42 0 +9
dB Yellow
Green
3 +3 dB Yellow 1 (right) 3 dB Green
4 0 dB Green 2
3 1 (right) 6 dB
123 dB
dB Green
Green
Green
53 -3 +3
dB dB Yellow
Green
4 0 dB Green 2 6 dB Green
5 -3 0dB Green 3
42 12
216dB
dB
dB Green
Green
Green
64 -9 dBdB Green
Green
5 -3 dB Green 3 12 dB Green
6 -9 dB Green 4
53 21 dB
3612
dBdB Green
Green
Yellow
75 -15-3 dB
dB Green
Green
6 -9 dB Green 4 21 dB Green
7 -15-9dB Green 5
64(left) 36 dB
6021
dBdB Yellow
Green
Yellow
86 -21 dB
dB Green
Green
7 -15 dB Green 5 36 dB Yellow
87 -21-15dBdB Green
Green 65(left) 6036
dBdB Yellow
Yellow
9 -30 dB Green
8 -21 dB Green 6 (left) 60 dB Yellow
9
108(bottom) -30
-60-21dBdB
dB Green
Green
Green 6 (left) 60 dB Yellow
9 -30 dB Green
109(bottom) -60-30dBdB Green
Green
10 (bottom) -60 dB Green
10 (bottom) -60 dB Green
Selecting Output Meter Display
Metering Section Selecionando Apresentação de Medidores de Saída
Seção Metering Selecting Output Meter Display
Metering Section
The Metering
To select an output type for metering:
section includes Bus and Main Outputs meters. Para selecionar um tipo de saída para medição:
Stage
A The
seção Rackinclui
Metering Features ToAdditional Required inComponents
section medidores para Bus e Main Outputs. select an the
 Press output type
Select for metering:
switch the metering section to cycle
Metering includes Bus and Main Outputs meters.
The Metering section includes Bus and Main Outputs meters.
Pressioneavailable
 through o switchchoices
Select (Auto,
na seção de medição para alternar
Stage Racks are used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage The following
 Press
 the Selectcomponents
switch in the must beAux
metering 1–8,
purchased Aux
section 9–16,
cyclePersonal
separately:
to
entre as opções disponíveis (Auto, Aux 1–8, Aux 9–16, Personal Qs,
audio I/O for VENUE Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks Qs, Matrixes
through available or Groups).
choices TheAux
(Auto, currentlyAux assigned bus is indi-
Matrixes
• Video ou Groups).
Display O bus
(15-inch or greater1–8,
atualmente 9–16,
VGAPersonal
selecionado
flat-panel édisplay
indicado por
can be used simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total inputs. Qs, cated by or
Matrixes its Groups).
Meter LED lighting.
The currently assigned bus is indi-and
seu LED aceso.
recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA
catedDVI
by its Meter
supported. LED lighting.
Audio I/O Toajustar
Para set metering
a mediçãoto follow the Output
para seguir faders:
os faders Output:
• 48 inputsBus
with remotely controllable
Masters Meteringmic preamps
Main and To set metering
 Press the to follow
Meter the Output
Select switch faders:
repeatedly so that the Auto
 Pressione o switch Meter Select repetidamente até que o LED
individually
Meters selectable phantom
Bus Masters Meteringpower. Main LED is lit.
 Press the Meter Select switch repeatedly so that the Auto
 Digital
Auto Snake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
se acenda.
Meters• 8ofanalog
Medidores
All output channels;
the 10-segment meters expandable
in the meterup to 48 show
bridge analog or
levels LED is lit.
digital outputs
according per Stage scale:
to the following Rack.
All ofos
themedidores
10-segment a Digital Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
Todos demeters in the meter
10 segmentos do bridge
grupo show levels
de medidores
according
apresentam to the
níveis following
Meterconforme scale:
a tabela from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Table 14.
Synchronization bridge I/Oameter
10-segment
and Control seguir:
scale
Table •14.
LED Meterconnectors
Snake bridge 10-segment
Level
to meter
enable scale and redundant (if
primary
LED 1 applicable) connection
Level+15 dBto a VENUE FOH Rack. Optional Components
(top)
(red=clip) The following components are optional, and must be
1 (top) +15 dB BusSelect
output LEDsBus
andOutput
Select switch
Switch e LEDs
2 (red=clip)
+9 dB purchased separately:
2
System Components
+9 dB
Bus output LEDs and Select switch
• USB flash
Main disk
Main Output Meters
Medidores (or other portable USB storage device for
Output
3 +3 dB
Main
Os The
Output
three MainMeters
output metersnain the
3 4
Included +3 dB
0 dB
Components
+3 dB •três medidores
Near-field Main speakers
monitor Output mixmeter
forseção bridge
de medidores
position show out-
mostram
monitoring
os put
The níveis
three de saída
levels
Main for dos
the
output trêsMain
three Main
meters Outputs
outputs
in the meter (tanto
(either no formato
inshow
bridge L–C–R orL–C–R
out- in
4 0 dB • Headphones with 1/4-inch jack
All 5 –3 dB
VENUE Profile systems include the following: quanto
put L–R+M
levelsno L–R+M).
format).
for the three Main outputs (either in L–C–R or in
5 •6 VENUE Profile–3console
dB–9 dB L–R+M (for
format).
Talkback)
6 •7 Two (2) IEC power cables
–9 dB–15 dB • Footswitches (up to 2)
7 8 –15 dB
–21 dB • MIDI cables (for connecting external MIDI devices)
8 –21 dB
•9 VENUE Mouse–21
PaddB
–30 dB
9 (bottom)Profile–30
•10VENUE dB
Guide
–60 dB • 25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
• Two (2) console
10 (bottom) –60lights
dB
Main output level meters in the meter bridge
Bus Output
• Protective Meters
Dust Cover Medidores de nível Main Output na seção de medidores
MainThe
output
10level meters
showininput
the meter
levelsbridge
•
BusThe Rack(s)
Output
Medidores do Bus
eight
(see next)
Meters
Output
output level meters in the meter bridge are assign-
LEDs from bottom to top, according
Os 10 LEDs mostram níveis de entrada de baixo para cima, de
The to
10 the
LEDsscale
showshown
inputinlevels
Tablefrom
14 on page 117.
bottom to top, according
The able as a unit for metering of Groups, Auxes, Matrixes, and
eight output level meters in thedo
meter bridge are assign-são acordo com a tabela
The following 14can
options apresentada naVENUE
be added to página 117.
Profile systems.
Os oito medidores
Racks, de nível
Software CDs,de iLoks,
saída grupo
and de medidores
Cables to the scale shown in Table 14 on page 117.
able Personal
as a unit
atribuídos
Qs. metering of Groups, Auxes, Matrixes, and
comoforuma unidade para medição de Groups, Auxes, For details on all VENUE systems and options, visit the Avid
Each eMix Rack or Metering
Medição the Solo Bus
do Bus Solo
Personal
Matrixes Qs.
Personal
The Bus OutputQs.FOH Rack includes:
meters can automatically follow the current
• System Restore Metering the Solo Bus
The Output fader
Bus Output bankCD
assignment (indicating level for the cur-
meters can podem
automatically follow the current Medindo Canais em Solo
Metering Soloed Channels
Os medidores Bus Output automaticamente seguir as
• ECxselected
rently
Output
atribuiçõesfader
Ethernet Control
Output
bank assignment
de associação
Software
de bus),
Installerto
or be assigned
(indicating
faders
CD a bus
level for
Output (indicando the output
cur-parafor
o nível Mix Rack Options
Metering
persistent
• bus
Standalone level indication.
Software Installer CD A mediçãoSoloed Channels
do bus Solo depende do tipo de canal que está em Solo.
Solo bus metering depends on the type of channel being
o rently
bus Output selecionado),
selected ou or
Output bus), serbeatribuído
assignedpara
to auma saída de
bus output forbus
output •para
iLokindicação
USB permanente
Smart do nívelplug-in
Key (for storing do bus.authorizations) I/Osoloed.
Options
persistent bus level indication. Solo bus metering depends on the type of channel being
Canais Isolados
Stereo Output Metering soloed.
• Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok Single
AI16 Channels
Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
Medidores StereoMetering
Stereo Output Output
With
• Two stereo
(2) IECGroups
power the output level meters in the metering
cables Nos modos
mic/line PFL,
level AFL ou SIP (Solo-in-place), um canal isolado em
inputs
Single
SoloIn Channels
é apresentado
PFL, AFL, or SIPdo mesmo modo
(solo-in-place) como ase
modes, o canal
single estivesse
soloed chan-
Com
With section
•stereo
Groups show
Oneestéreo,
FOH
Groups level
Link os
the for
cableonly
medidores
output thedehighest
for level
connection of
nível deto
meters athe left
VENUE
insaída
the na and right
console
seção
metering de
channels. Inselecionado
nel
AO16
PFL, is
Analog
AFL, orno
metered ACS.
SIP in
Outputthe same
Card way
that
(solo-in-place) as if the
provides
modes, a channel
16 analog
single were
line
soloed targeted
level
chan-
medição
section mostram
show level o nível apenas
for only the do mais alto
highest dosleft
of the canais esquerdo
and right
Each Stage Rack includes:
e channels.
direito. ison
neloutputsthe ACS.
metered in the same way as if the channel were targeted
To see level for both
• Two (2) IEC power cables the left and right channels of a stereo out- on the ACS.
Para put,
ver
To see orefer
level fortoboth
nível theambos
de on-screen
osand
the left meters,
canais
rightde oruma
target
channels the
of achannel
saída estéreo, on
stereo out- the XO16 Analog and Digital Output Card that provides 8 analog
veja
ACS line level outputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.
osput, referand
medidores use
na
to the theou
tela, Selected
on-screen Channel
selecione
meters, Level
oorcanal
targetna
the Meters.
seção
channelACS one use
the os
medidores Selected
ACS and use ChannelChannel
the Selected Level. Level Meters.

Chapter
tional 8 channels of analog I/O and 8 channels of 13: Metering 117
AES/EBU
digital I/O. Chapter 13: Metering 117
Capítulo 13: Metering 117
Multiple Channels Peak Hold Time
Múltiplos Canais Peak Hold Time
In PFL or AFL mode, when multiple channels are soloed, the Peak Hold Time can be set within a range of 0–20 seconds.
left and right channels of the Solo bus are metered on the Se-
Nos modos PFL ou AFL, quando múltiplos canais estão em Solo, os O Peak Hold Time pode ser ajustado entre 0 e 20 segundos.
lected
canais Channel
esquerdo meters,dopre-Solo
e direito bus SoloTrim control. pelos medidores
são medidos To set the Peak Hold Time:
Selected Channel, antes do controle Trim do Solo. 1Para
Goajustar
to the oOptions
Peak Hold Time:
page and click the Interactions tab.
In SIP mode, when multiple channels are soloed, the Left and
No modoMain
Right bus meters
SIP, quando are mirrored
múltiplos on the
canais estão emSelected
Solo, os Channel
medidores Vá à página
21 Under Meter,Options
enter aevalue
cliquefor
nathe
abaPeak
Interactions.
Hold Time.
meters.
esquerdo e direito do bus Main são espelhados nos medidores
Selected Channel. 32 Press Enterinsira
Em Meter, on theumkeyboard.
valor para o Peak Hold Time.
Dynamics Key Listen
Key Listen 3 Pressione Enter no teclado.
When Key Listen is activated, the left and right channels of Clipping Indication
the Solo
Quando busListen
o Key are metered on theos
está ativado, Selected
canais Channel
esquerdometers,
e direito do Indicação de Clipping
VENUE meter clip indicators are proximity warnings that
pre-Solo
bus Trim
Solo são control.
medidos pelos medidores Selected Channel, antes do show when an input or output signal reaches or exceeds the
controle Trim do Solo. IndicadoresClip
configured de clip da VENUE são advertências de proximidade que
Margin.
Solo Clip Indication mostram quando um sinal de entrada ou saída atinge ou ultrapassa
Indicação de Clip no Solo a Clip Margin
Clipping configurada.
can occur at several points throughout the signal
When the Selected Channel meters are showing levels of a sin- chain. A clip at any one of these points is indicated by lighting
Quando os medidores
gle soloed channel, Selected Channel
the clipping estão mostrando
information níveis de
in the metering Clipping pode ocorrer em vários pontos da cadeia de sinal. Um clip
the top LED red on the meter. For more information on the lo-
umsection
canal em
LEDsSolo isolado,
mirrors thataon
informação
the channelde clipping
itself. nos LEDs da em qualquer um desses pontos é indicado pelo acendimento do LED
cation of clip detect points, refer to Chapter 26, “Signal Flow
seção de medição espelham esse clipping no canal. vermelho do medidor. Para mais informações sobre a localização
. Quando os Selected
medidores Selected Channel nametering
seção desection
medição Diagrams.”
dos pontos de detecção de clips, verifique o Capítulo 26, “Diagramas
When the Channel meters in the
estão
are mostrando
showing Soloos níveis do busthe
bus levels, Solo, os LEDs
meter LEDsde medição
turn red totornam-
indi- de Fluxo de Sinal”.
secate
vermelhos
clippingpara
onindicar
the Soloclipping
bus. no bus Solo. Clip Margin
Clip Margin
The Clip Margin setting lets you configure the amount of
O ajuste Clip
headroom youMargin
want permite configurar
before clipping a quantidade
indication de Clip
begins. headroom
Metering
Opções Options
de Medição desejada
Margin antes queasadBindicação
is expressed de clip (where
below maximum se inicie. Clip Margin
maximum is é
aexpressa emofdB+20
peak level abaixo do máximo (onde máximo é um pico de nível
dBVU).
Apresentação de Medição de +20 dBVU).
Meter Display Clip Margin can be set within a range of 0 dB to 30 dB below
AsThe
seguintes opções podem ser configuradas para os A Clip Margin
maximum, andpode ser ajustada
is configured entre for
separately 0 dB e 30and
inputs dB out-
abaixo do
following display options can be configured formedidores.
meters. máximo, e é configurada separadamente para entradas e saídas.
Essas opções afetam todos os medidores da console. puts.
These options affect all meters on the console.
Para ajustar a Clip Margin:
To set the Clip Margin:
Vá àtopágina
11 Go Optionspage
the Options e clique
and na abathe
click Interaction.
Interaction tab.
22 Under Meter,
Em Meter, enter
entre values
valores forInput
para InputClip
ClipMargin
Margin Below Max and
Below Max e Output
Output Clip Margin
Clip Margin Below Below
Max. Max.
3 Press Enter to confirm the setting.
3 Pressione Enter para confirmar o ajuste.
Clip HoldTime
Clip Hold Time
Metering options in the Interactions tab of the Options page
Opções de medição na aba Interactions da página Options
The Clip
O Clip Hold
Hold Time
Time determines
determina howtempo
quanto long auma
clip indication
indicação de clip
Meter Ballistics lasts after the last clipped signal.
Medidores Balísticos permanece depois do último sinalClip HoldClip
de clipe. Time canTime
Hold be set
pode ser
Meters can be set to operate in the following modes: within
ajustadoa range
entre of
0 e0–20 seconds.
20 segundos.
Os medidores podem ser ajustados para operar nos seguintes
modos:
RMS Mode (Default) Meters follow the characteristics of a Para
To setajustar Clip
the Clip Hold
Hold Time:
Time:
damped analog meter. In this mode, meter response and de-
11 Go
Vá àtopágina
the Options
Optionspage and na
e clique click
abathe Interaction tab.
Interaction.
RMS
cayMode (Padrão)
is slower Medidores
than in seguem
Peak mode, as características
providing de um
an average reading
medidor
of the metered signal. A single LED shows the peak levelde
analógico lento. Nesse modo, a resposta e o decay forum 2 Under Meter, enter a value for the Clip Hold Time.
medidor é mais lenta que no modo Peak, oferecendo uma leitura da 2 Em Meter, entre um valor para o Clip Hold Time.
the designated Peak Hold Time.
média do sinal medido. Um LED mostra o nível de pico do Peak Hold 3 Press Enter to confirm the setting.
Time assinalado.
Peak Mode Meters follow the characteristics of a standard 3 Pressione Enter para confirmar.
peak meter. In this mode, meter response is instantaneous,
Peak Mode Medidores seguem as características de um medidor de
showing the true peak level of the metered signal.
pico padrão. Nesse modo, a resposta dos medidores é instantânea,
mostrando o verdadeiro nível de pico de um sinal medido.

Chapter
Chapter
Capítulo 14:14:
14:Solo
Solo
Busses and
and
Solo Monitor
MonitorBusses
e Monitor Busses
Chapter 14: Solo and Monitor Busses
Modos
can bedo
Solo
Solo Bus
used
BusBus Solo
simultaneously,
Modes
Modes supporting up to 96 total inputs. Selecionando
Selecting
Selecting a um
recommended; a
Solo modo
Solo
1024x768Mode Solo resolution). VGA and
Mode
minimum
Solo
Audio
Three
ThreeI/O
Solo
Bus
Solo
modes
Modes
modes
areare
offered:
offered:
Pre-Fader
Pre-Fader
Listen
Listen
(PFL),
(PFL),
Selecting
DVI supported.a Solo Mode
TheThe
Solo
Solo
mode
mode
cancan
be be
selected
selected
from
from
thethe
Solo/PFL
Solo/PFL
section
section
or or
Três modos Solo são oferecidos: Pré-Fader Listen (PFL), After-Fader O modo Solo pode ser selecionado pela seção Solo/PFL ou na tela.
Listen (AFL)
After-Fader
Three e
After-Fader Solo
SoloListenIn
Listen
modes Place
(AFL)
are (SIP).
(AFL)
andand
Solo
offered: Solo
In Place
In Place
Pre-Fader (SIP).
(SIP).
Listen (PFL), • on-screen.
USBSolo
on-screen.
The keyboard
mode and can trackball/mouse
be selected from (Windows
the Solo/PFL compatible)
section or
• •Nos In modos
After-Fader
•individually
AFL
In AFL AFL
Listen
or PFL ou
or PFL PFL,
(AFL)
mode,
mode, colocar
and
soloing
selectable
em
Solo
soloing In
only
phantom
Solo
Place
only afeta
affects apenas
(SIP).
affects
power. what
what
youyouo que
hear
hear Para selecionar
on-screen. o modo Solo pela console, siga um dos seguintes
você ouve no bus estéreo dedicado AFL/PFL Solo (Cue), que To Digital Snake
procedimentos:
select
To select
thethe
SoloCable
Solo
mode (VENUE
mode
from
from Profile
thethe
console,Systems
console,
do do
one Only)
one
of the
of the
•on on
alimenta
theAFL
•8 In the
dedicated
analog
o bus
dedicated
or stereo
PFL mode,
output stereo
AFL/PFL
AFL/PFL
soloing
channels;
Monitor.
Solo
only
expandableSolo
(Cue)
(Cue)
affects
up bus,
bus,
what
to 48 which
which
you
analoghear
or
feeds
feeds
the the
Monitor
Monitor Bus.
Bus. following:
• following:
The
To connection
select the Solobetween
mode fromFOHtheRack and Stage
console, do oneRack requires
of the
• No modo on the
digitalSolo dedicated
outputs
In Place, stereo
per Stage
colocarAFL/PFL
Rack. Solo (Cue) bus,
em Solo afeta apenas o quewhich • Pressione o switch Stereo AFL para entrar no modo AFL.
following:
•você
In feeds
• ouve
Solo
In Solo
Inthe Monitor
Place
nosInbusses
Place
mode, Bus.
mode,soloing
Main. soloing
onlyonly
affects
affects
what
what
youyou
hear
hear • Press
• Press
thethe
Stereo
Stereo
AFLAFL
switch
switch
to enter
to enter
AFLAFL
SoloSolo
mode.mode.
from Avid
in
• the
in Solo
the
Synchronization
In MainMain
Inbusses.
andbusses.
Place Control I/O
mode, soloing only affects what you hear •• Pressione
Press
• Press eor
the
andand
holdassembled
Stereo
hold
segure AFL
thethe
Solo by
Inyour
switch
Solo
o switch Place
InSolo preferred
to
Placeenter
switch AFL
Inswitch vendor.
for
Place Solo
for
at
porleast
atnomode.
least
2mínimo
sec-
2 sec- 2
Pré-Fader Listen
in the (PFL)
Main busses. segundos
onds
• ondspara
to
Press and entrar
enter
to enter
hold no
SIPSIP
themodo
mode.
mode.
Solo SIP.
In Place switch for at least 2 sec-
Pre-Fader
Pre-Fader
Listen
Listen
(PFL)
(PFL) Optional
• onds
• Press
Press aComponents
a litto enter
Solo
lit SoloSIP
mode mode.
mode
switch
switch
to turn
to turn
it off.
it off.
WhenWhen
no no
O modo applicable) connection
PFL Solo envia o sinal to
deaInput
VENUE FOH Rack.
Channels e FX Returns • Pressione um switch de modo Solo aceso para desligá-lo. Quando
Pre-Fader Listen (PFL) switch
• switch
Pressisalit
is
litin
lit the
in the
Solo Solo/PFL
modeSolo/PFL
section,
switch section,
theit
to turn the
system
system
off. is in
When isno
PFL
in PFL
colocados
PFLPFL
Solo em
Solo
modeSolo
mode explicitamente
sends
sends
thethe
signal para
signal
from o
from bus AFL/PFL
explicitly
explicitly
soloedSolo
soloed
input(Cue)
input nenhum switchestá
The following aceso naare
components seção Solo/PFL,
optional, o sistema
and must be está no
mode.
mode.
switch is lit in the Solo/PFL section, the system is in PFL
bus. O sinal
channels
channelsé pós-insert,
andand
FX FX pré-fader
returns
returns
to the
to e
thepré-Mute.
AFL/PFL
AFL/PFL
Solo
Solo
(Cue)
(Cue)
bus.
bus.
PFL Solo mode sends the signal from explicitly soloed input The The modo PFL. separately:
purchased
mode.
System
signal
signal
channels Components
is post-insert,
is post-insert,
and pre-fader
pre-fader
FX returns toand
theand
pre-mute.
pre-mute.
AFL/PFL Solo (Cue) bus. The
Sinais de entrada mono são enviados para ambos os lados do
signal is post-insert, pre-fader and pre-mute. transfer of Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
bus sent
MonoMono Solo
input (Cue),
input
signalse os
arecanais
signals are
sent toesquerdo
sent both
to both e direito
sides
sides
of the de
of the
Soloum
Solosinal
(Cue)
(Cue) de
entrada estéreo
Included são enviados
Components para os lados correspondentes do • Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
bus,bus,
andand
the the
leftleft
and and
right
right
sides
sides
of stereo
of stereo
input
input
signals
signals
Mono input signals are sent to both sides of the Solo (Cue) areare
sentsent
bus Solo (Cue). • Headphones with 1/4-inch jack
to the
to
bus, the
corresponding
corresponding
and sides
the left and sides
ofsides
right the
of the
Solo
of Solo
(Cue)
(Cue)
stereo bus.
bus.
input signals are sent
All VENUE Profile systems include the following: Level
Level
TrimTrim
to the corresponding sides of the Solo (Cue) bus. • Dynamic or condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
PFL éPFL
PFL o•ismodo
VENUE
the Solo
is the padrão.
Profile
default
default
Soloconsole
Solo
mode.
mode. Level Trim
(for Talkback)
PFL is the
• Two (2)default Solo cables
IEC power mode.
After-Fader Listen (AFL) • Footswitches (up to 2)
After-Fader
After-Fader
• MonitorListen
Listen
mount (AFL)
for(AFL)
VGA screen (screen not included) Solo
Solo
Clear
Clear Stereo
Stereo
AFLAFL
After-Fader
O modo
• AFL
Trackball Listen
envia omount (AFL)
sinal de(trackball
canais colocados em Solo explicitamente
not included) Solo Clear Stereo AFL
AFLAFL
Solo
Solo
mode
mode
sends
sends
thethe
signal
signal
from
from
explicitly
explicitly
soloed
soloed
chan-
chan- • InBNC
Solo
Solo Placecables (for connecting Word clock
In Place between
MixMix the
to Monitors
to Monitors
e entradas
•and
Solo-safe
VENUE Mouse
para o bus AFL/PFL Solo (Cue). Colocar em
Padthe
nels
nels
AFL and
solo-safe
Solo solo-safe
mode inputs
inputs
to the
to the
AFL/PFL
AFL/PFL
Solo
Solo
(Cue)
(Cue)
bus.
bus.
Solo-
Solo- VENUE
In Placesystem and external digital devices)
Solo busses Output é sends
sempre signal
AFL. from explicitly soloed chan- Solo Mix to Monitors
inging
of output
of output
• VENUE
nels and busses
busses
Profile
solo-safe is always
is always
Guide
inputs toAFL.
theAFL.
AFL/PFL Solo (Cue) bus. Solo- • 25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
SoloSolo
busbus
controls
controls
ing
No modo ofAFL
• Two output
Solo,
(2) busses is always
tantolights
console sinais de AFL.
entrada quanto de saída são Controles de bus Solo
In AFL
In AFL
Solo Solo
mode,
mode, both
both
input
input
andandoutput
output
signals
signals
areare
sent
sent
to to Solo bus controls
enviados para o
• Protective bus Solo
Dust (Cue) pós-fader
Cover andand e pós-pan/balance, e são To select
To select
thethe
Solo
Solo
mode
mode
on-screen:
on-screen:
sempre posicionados panoramicamente para estéreo quando are
thethe
Solo
In Solo
AFL (Cue)
(Cue)
Solo bus bus
mode, post-fader
post-fader
both input post-pan/balance,
and post-pan/balance,
output signals and
areand
are
sent to
os Para selecionar o modo Solo na tela:
To select the Solo mode on-screen:
• Rack(s)
always
always
the
busses panned
Solo
Main (see
panned
(Cue)
estão next)
toconfigurados
stereo
to
bus stereo
eveneven
if the
post-fader
no if the
and
modoMain
Main
busses
busses
areare
config-
post-pan/balance,
L–C–R. config-
and are VENUE Profile Expansion Options
1 Go
1 Go
to the
to the
Options
Options
page
page
and
and
click
click
thethe
Busses tab.tab.
Busses
ured
ured
in L–C–R
in panned
always L–C–R
mode.
mode.
to stereo even if the Main busses are config- 1 Vá à página
1 Go to theOptions
Optionse page
cliqueand
na click
aba Busses.
the Busses tab.
Under
2 Under
2 The Solo
Solo
andoptions
following and
Monitor
Monitor be addedclick
Operations,
can toclick
Operations, thethe
VENUE Type pop-up
Type pop-up
Profile andand
systems.
Racks,
ured in Software
Monitorando L–C–R Aux eCDs,
Busses mode. iLoks,
Variable Groupand
comCables
AFL choose
choose
thethe
desired
Monitoring
Monitoring AuxAux
andand
Variable
Variable Group
Group
Busses
Busseswithwith
AFLAFL
2
2For
Em Under
details
Solo ondesired
Solo
and Solo
MonitorSolo
andVENUE
all mode.
Monitormode.
Operations,
systems
Operations, and click
clique the Type
options, visit
o pop-up pop-up and
theeAvid
Type escolha
EachAux
Mixassociados
Rack or FOH Rack includes: choose the
diretamente desired Solo mode.
o modo Solo desejado.
Busses
Monitoring Aux and e Variable
Variable Group estéreo with
Group Busses utilizam
AFLestéreo
Linked
Linked
verdadeiroAux Aux
no
• System busses
busses
AFL. andand
Variable
Quando
Restore CD Variable
você Group
Group
coloca busses
em busses
useuse
Solo true
umtruestereo
bus stereo
Aux
AFL.
AFL.
When
associado,
LinkedWhen
os you
dois
Aux you
solo
solo
a
busses
busses linked
a
são
and linked
AuxAux
ouvidos
Variable bus,
bus,
comothe
Group the
umtwotwo
parbusses
busses busses
estéreo
use are
true are
no bus
stereo Type
Type
Solo
(Cue).
heard
heard
AFL.asWhen
aasstereo
a stereo
pair
you pair
onaon
solo the the
Solo
linked Solo
(Cue)
Aux (Cue)
bus.
bus, bus.
the two busses are
Mix Rack Options
• Standalone Software Installer CD Type
heard as a stereo pair on the Solo (Cue) bus.
Mono
MonoAux
Busses• Aux
iLokAux
e busses
USBbusses
and
Smart
Variable and
Variable
Variable
Key
Group (for Group
mono Group
storing
são areare
heard
heard
plug-in
ouvidos as dois
dual
as dual
mono
mono
authorizations)
como mono no I/O Options
onSolo
bus on
the
Monothe
Solo
Solo
(Cue).
Aux(Cue)
(Cue)
bus.
busses bus.
and Variable Group are heard as dual
• Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLokmono
on the Solo (Cue) bus.
Solo In
Solo Place
SoloIn In(SIP)
Place
Place
(SIP)
(SIP)
O SIP
Solo In Place (SIP)
modo SIP se applies
aplica
SIP
mode
modeapplies to apenas
input
to input a channels
Input Channels
channels andand
FX FXe returns
FX Returns.
returns only.
only.Solo
Solo
Solo Choosing
Choosing
the the
SoloSolo
modemode
in Options
in Options
> Busses
> Busses
In InEachenvia
Place StageoRack
sinal includes:
dos canais colocados em Solo para os busses outputs
Place
In Place
sends
sends
the the
signal
signal
from
fromthe the
soloed
soloed
channel
channelto the
to
SIP mode applies to input channels and FX returns only. Solo the
Mains
Mains Escolhendo o modo Solo em Options > Busses
Mains •e Monitor. O sinal é enviado Choosing the Solo mode in Options > Busses
andand Two
InMonitor
Place
(2)busses.
Monitor
sends
IEC power
busses.
Signal
the signal
cables
Signal ispós-pan/balance.
is sent
from sent
post-pan/balance.
the post-pan/balance.
soloed channel to the Mains XO16 Analog and Digital Output Card that provides 8 analog
and Monitor busses. Signal is sent post-pan/balance. line level outputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.
NoSIP
In modo
In SIP SIP,
SoloSolo omode,
mode,audio
audioé is
enviado
audio sent
is sentdiretamente
directly
directly
to the para
to the
Main os
Main busses
busses.
busses.
Main.
UseIn
Use Utilize
thisthis esse
feature
featurerecurso
with
with com
caution.
caution. cautela.
SIP Solo mode, audio is sent directly to the Main busses. AT16 A-Net Output Card that provides 16 channels of A-Net
Use this feature with caution. output compatible with Aviom® Personal Mixers and other
Pro16™ Series devices. Chapter
Chapter
14:14:
SoloSolo
andand
Monitor
Monitor
Busses 119119
Busses
Chapter 14: Solo and Monitor Busses 119
digital I/O.
Capítulo 14: Busses Solo e Monitor 119
Solo
Estado States
e Modos Soloand Modes
Quando when Shows
Carregando Loading Shows
Solo
SoloStates
States
Channel and
andModes
Solo States Modeswhen
when
When you Loading
load Loading Shows
Shows
a Show file, all solos are Auxes Follow
Channel Solo States Quando você carrega um arquivo Show, todos AFL
cleared. Solo states are not saved with Show files.
osChannel
Solos são
Channel limpos.
Solo
SoloStates
States When
Estados
When you
deyouload
Solo a Show
não
load a são
Showfile,
salvos allall
file, solos
em are
arquivos
solos are Auxes Follow
Auxes Follow
Show.
cleared. Solo states are not saved with Show files. AFL
AFL
cleared.
Solo ModeSolo states
Show aredo
files not saved
not openwith Show
in SIP mode.files.
If you save a
Show file while in SIP, when you reopen the Show file, it will
Solo
Solo Mode
Mode
Solo Mode Show
Arquivos
Show files
Show dodo
files not
não
notopen
são inin
SIP
abertos
open mode.
no
SIP modo
mode.If If
you
SIP.
you save aa
Sesave
você
open in AFL Solo mode.
salvar
Show um arquivo
file while Show
in SIP,no modo
when SIP,
you quando
reopen você
the reabrir
Show o
file,
Show file while in SIP, when you reopen the Show file, it will arquivo
it will Solo Solo
and and
Monitor Operation
Ajuste Monitor Operationsettings
na páginainOptions
the Options > Busses page.
> Busses.
Show,
open ele
open será
ininAFL aberto
AFLSolo no
mode.
Solo modo AFL.
mode.
SoloColoque
33Solo
Solo
and anem
Aux
Monitor
and Solo uma bus
output
Operation
Monitor saídabyde
settings
Operation inbus
pressing
settings the
in Auxitspressionando
Options
the AFL
Options>> switch.
Busses seu switch
page.
Busses page.
AFL.
Solo Operation Options 3 3Solo anan
Solo Aux output
Aux bus
output byby
bus pressing itsits
pressing AFL switch.
AFL switch.
To cancel
Para display
cancelar of Aux send
a visualização dos controls:
controles de mandadas Aux:
Solo
Opções Operation
Solode Operação Options
Operation Options
Solo ToTo Unsolo
 cancel the bus,
display orAux
of Aux select
send any other parameter for the input
controls:
Momentary or Latching Switch Operation cancel
 Tire display
o bus de ofSolo, send
ou controls:
selecione outro parâmetro para os
encoders.
codificadores
Unsolo the debus,
bus,entrada.
oror
select any other parameter forfor
the input
Momentary
Momentary
Channel ororLatching
Latching
solo switches Switch
Switch
can operate Operation
Operation
with momentary or latch- Unsolo the select any other parameter the input
Os switches Solo de canais podem operar com comportamento encoders.
encoders.
ing behavior.
momentâneo ou switches
travado. AFL
AFL Follows
Follows Auxes/Variable
Auxes/Variable Groups Groups
Channel
Channel solo
solo can
switches operate
can with
operate momentary
with oror
momentary latch-
latch-
ing behavior. AFL
ing
ParaTo
behavior.
engageSolo
habilitar momentary solo on
momentâneo emaum
channel:
canal: AFLFollows
WhenFollows
Quando the
a AFLAuxes/Variable
Follows
opção Follows Groups
Auxes/Variable Groups
AFLAuxes/Variable Groups option is
Auxes/Variable selected,
Groups está
assigning encoders
selecionada, atribuirto an Aux/Var Group
codificadores paraautomatically
um Aux/Var soloes
Group
Hold the
To engage solo switch
momentary for
solo onmore than one second. Release the
a channel: When
When the AFL
the Follows
AFL Follows Auxes/Variable
Groups option
option is is
selected,
selected,
To engage
 Segure momentary
o switch solo on
Solo por mais de aum
channel:
segundo. Solte o switch Solo automaticamente
that bus. The AFLcoloca
Followsesse
Auxesbus em Solo.
setting O ajuste
is stored and AFL Follows
recalled
solo switch to unsolo the channel. assigning
assigningencoders
encoders totoanan
Aux/Var
Aux/Var Group
Group automatically
automatically soloes
soloesPor
para tirar
 Hold
Holdothe
canal deswitch
solo
the solo Solo.
switchfor more
for morethan one
than onesecond. Release
second. the
Release the Auxes é armazenado
with each Show file. By e default,
carregadothecom
option cada arquivo
is off Show.
(not selected).
that bus.
that bus.The
TheAFL
AFLFollows Auxes
Follows Auxes setting
settingis is
stored
stored andand recalled
recalled
solo switch
solo toto
switch unsolo the
unsolo channel.
the channel.
padrão, a opção está desabilitada (não selecionada).
with
witheach
eachShow
Showfile. ByBy
file. default, the
default, theoption
option is is
offoff
(not
(notselected).
selected).
ParaTo latch
travar solo de
o Solo on um
a channel:
canal: To set AFL to follow Aux encoder assignment:
Para ajustar o AFL para seguir a atribuição do codificador Aux:
ToToPress
latch
latchand
solo release
on
solo aa
on the solo switch. Press the switch a second
channel:
channel:
 Pressione e solte o switch Solo. Pressione o switch uma segunda To1
To Go
setsetto
AFL the
AFLtotoOptions
follow
follow > Busses
Aux encoder
Aux tab
encoder and select the AFL Follows
assignment:
assignment:
time to unsolo the channel.
Press
vez para and
tirar
Press orelease
and canal the
de
release solo
Solo.
the switch.
solo Press
switch. the
Press switch
the a second
switch a second Vá à aba Options
1Auxes/Variable > Busses
Groups e selecione a opção AFL Follows Auxes/
option.
1 1GoGototo
the
theOptions
Options >>Busses
Busses tab and
tab andselect the
select AFL
the Follows
AFL Follows
time toto
time unsolo the
unsolo channel.
the channel. Variable Groups.
Auxes/Variable
2
In the Input Groups option.
section,option.
assign encoders to an Aux Send bus.
Auxes/Variable Groups Follow
Auxes/Variable GroupsAFLFollow
e AFL AFL
Follows
andAuxes/
AFL
Variable Groups Auxes/Variable Groups Nathe
222In seção Input, atribua os codificadores para um Send
bus Aux Send.
Follows
Auxes/Variable
Input
In the section,
Input section,assign encoders
assign encoderstoto
anan
Aux bus.
Aux Send bus.
Auxes/VariableGroups GroupsFollow
FollowAFL AFLand
andAFL AFL To cancel (unsolo) in AFL Follows Auxes mode:
Follows
VocêFollows
podecan
You Auxes/Variable
Auxes/Variable
personalizar
customize a how
interação
encoder Groups
entre Groups
associação
banking andde codificadores
AFL interact. Para cancelar (unSolo) no modo AFL Follows Auxes:
ToTo Press
 cancel the flashing
(unsolo) inin Solo
AFL Clear button
Follows Auxes mode:
cancel (unsolo) AFL Follows Auxes mode:
e AFL.
You
Youcan customize
can how
customize encoder
how banking
encoder and
banking AFL
and interact.
AFL interact. Pressione
Press the oflashing
botãoSolo
flashing piscante Solo Clear
Auxes/Variable Groups Follow AFL
 Press
Thethe
Events canClear
List Solo be button
Clear
usedbutton
to assign the Solo Clear func-
Auxes/Variable Groups Follow AFL
tion to a footswitch or any other available trigger.
Auxes/Variable
Groups
When the Auxes/Variable Follow
Follow
Groups AFL
AFL
Follow AFL option is selected, TheA Events
TheEvents
Events List pode
can
List canbeser
be usada
used toto
used para
assignatribuir
the
assign the a função
Solo Clear
Solo ClearSolo
func-Clear
func-
Quando a opção Auxes/Variable Groups Follow AFL é selecionada, a
tion um
to a a footswitch
footswitch ou
or anyqualquer
other outro trigger
available disponível.
trigger.
tion to a footswitch or any other available trigger.
soloing an Aux/Var Group bus by pressing its AFL switch as-
When
colocar
When emthetheAuxes/Variable
Solo um bus Aux/Var
Groups Follow
Group AFL option
pressionando
Follow AFL option is seu
selected,
is switch
selected, Auto Cancel and Input Priority
signs level and pan controls for that bus to the input encoders.
AFL atribui
soloing
soloing controles
an anAux/Var
Aux/Var deGroup
nível
Group e bus
posicionamento
busbyby pressing
pressing para
its AFL
its aquele
AFL switch busas-
switch aos
as- Auto Cancel e Input Priority
• level
With Auto
Auto
The Cancel
Cancel
Auto and
andInput
Cancel option InputPriority
Priority
determines whether Solo switches can-
codificadores
signs
signs level demono
andand pan
busses,
entrada.
pan controls
controls
level
forfor
is assigned
that
thatbusbustoto to the
the theinput input
input
encod-
encoders.
encoders.
• Com ers.
• •With
With
Withmono,
busses
mono
mono
stereo o(linked)
busses,
busses,
nível
level
level
ébusses,
is atribuído
assigned
is assigned
level
aos
to to
is assigned
the codificadores
theinput
input
to the
encod- de
encod-
Acel
The
The
otherAuto
opção
Auto
soloed
Cancel
Auto Cancel
channels
Cancel
option
option
or are determines
determina
determines
determines
additive (latching).
whether
whether
se switches
Solo
Solo
Input Pri-
os switches
switches can- Solo
can-
entrada. Com busses estéreo (associados), o nível é atribuído
encoders. cancelam
celcel
other
o Solo
ority determines
soloed
de outros
whether
channels
canais
or notou
oror
are
são
soloed aditivos (travados).
inputs replace
additive (latching). Input
Input
soloed
Pri-
ers. With stereo (linked) busses, level is isassigned toto the other soloed channels are
aos ers. With
codificadores
•encoders.
stereo (linked) busses, level
When Flip to Faders is pressed, level is flipped to the fad-
assigned the Priority
outputs determina se os canais
on the AFL/PFL deadditive
Solo bus. entrada (latching). Input
em Solo substituem Pri-
ou
ority
oritydetermines
determines whether
whetheroror
not soloed
not inputs
soloed inputsreplace
replace soloed
soloed
• Quando encoders.
Flip to Faders é pressionado, o
ers and pan for the Aux/Var Group bus (even numbered
nível é lançado aos não os canais de saída em Solo no bus Solo AFL/PFL.
outputs ononthe AFL/PFL Solo bus.
• •When
fadersWhene oFlip totoFaders
posicionamento
Flip Faders is is
pressed, level
panorâmico
pressed, levelispara
flipped
is os bus
flipped toto the fad-
Aux/Var
the fad- outputs the AFL/PFL Solo bus.
send) is automatically mapped to the input encoders. To set Solo switch operation:
Group
ersers (mandadas
and
and panpan for
forpares)
thethe é automaticamente
Aux/Var
Aux/Var Group
Group busbus (even mapeado
(even numbered
numbered para Para ajustar a operação do switch Solo:
The pan button
os send)
codificadores flashes O
de entrada. while
botão this
Pan mode
pisca isenquanto
enabled. esse ToTo Go
1set to
Solo
set the Options
switch
Solo page and click the Busses tab.
operation:
switch operation:
send) is is
automatically
automatically mapped
mapped toto the
the input
input encoders.
encoders.
modo
The está
pan ativado.
button flashes while this mode is enabled. 1 Vá à página Options e clique na aba Busses.
The pan button flashes while this mode
If the encoders were already flipped to the faders, flipped is enabled. 1Go
12 toto
Under
Go the Options
Solo
the page and
and Monitor
Options page click the
Operations,
and click Busses
select
the tab.
the
Busses options
tab. in any
status is maintainedjáwhen anlançados
Aux bus ispara soloed. of the following combinations:
Em Solo and Monitor Operations, selecione a options
opção em qualquer
Se
If If
theos codificadores
encoders were already estão
flipped toto
the faders, os faders, o
flipped 222Under
UnderSolo and
Solo Monitor
and Operations,
Monitor select
Operations, the
select the inin
options any
any
the encoders were already flipped the faders, flipped
status é mantido quando um bus Aux é colocado em Solo. das
of seguintes
the following combinações:
status
To set status is is
Auxes maintained
maintained
and Variable when
when
GroupsananAux
toAux busbus
follow issolo:
soloed.
is soloed. of the
Auto Cancel On,combinations:
following combinations:
Input Priority Off A solo cancels all other solos
(inputs and outputs)
Para ajustar
Go toAuxes e Variable
theand
Options Groups
page and para
click seguirem
the Busseso Solo: Auto
Auto
Auto Cancel
Cancel
Cancel On,
On,
On, Input
Input Priority
Priority
Input Off
Off
Priority AUm
Off A Solo
solo
solo cancela
cancels
cancels todos
allall
other
otherossolos
solosoutros
To1set
To Auxes
set Auxes Variable
and Groups
Variable toto
Groups follow
follow solo: tab.
solo:
Solos (entradas e saídas).
(inputs
(inputs
Auto and outputs)
and outputs)
Cancel On, Input Priority On An input solo cancels all
12
1 Vá1Go toto
Go the
à Under
página Options
Solo
the Options
Options page
andeMonitorand
page
clique click
and
na the
Operation,
click
aba select
the
Busses. the tab.
Busses
Busses Auxes/Variable
tab.
otherCancel
soloedOn,
inputs; an outputOn solo
Um cancels
Solo all other
em output
entrada
Groups Follow AFL option.
Auto
Auto Cancel On, InputPriority
Input Priority An
OnOn Aninput solo
input solo cancels
cancelsall cancela
2 2Under
UnderSolo
Soloand Monitor
and Operation,
Monitor select
Operation, the
select Auxes/Variable
the Auxes/Variable
Auto
todos Cancel
solos;os
soloed
On,
outros Input Priority
Solos
inputs em entrada;
temporarily um
replace Solo
soloed em saídaallcancela
outputs
2 Em Solo and Monitor Operation, selecione a opção Auxes/Variable other
other
todos soloed
os inputs;
soloed inputs;
outros anan
Solos output
output
em solo
solo
saída; cancels allem
cancels
entradas other
all Solooutput
other output
substituem
Groups Follow AFL option.
Groups
Groups Follow AFL.AFL option.
Follow
solos; soloed
solos;Cancel
Auto inputs
temporariamente
soloedOff,
inputs temporarily
saídas
Input em Solo.
temporarily
Priority replace soloed
Off replace soloed
Solos are outputs
outputs
additive, and so-
loed inputs and outputs are heard together
Auto
Auto
AutoCancel
Cancel
CancelOff,
Off, Input
Input
Off, Priority
Priority
Input Off
Off
Priority Solos
Off are
OsSolos
Solos additive,
são
are and
aditivos,
additive, eso-
and entradas
so-
eAuto
saídas
loed em
inputs
loed inputs Solo
and
Cancel and são ouvidas
outputs
Off, outputs are juntas.
heard
are heard
Input Priority together
together
On Solos are additive, and so-
loed inputs temporarily replace soloed outputs.
Auto
Auto Cancel
Cancel
Auto CancelOff,
Off, Input
Input
Off, Priority
Priority
Input On
On
Priority Solos
OnOs are
Solos

Venue Profile Versão 2.9 - Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Venue Profile Versão 2.9 - Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VENUE Profile

e software VENUE versão 2.9

VENUE Profile Guide

9322-62809-00 REV A 08/10

Guide Part Number 9322-62809-00 REV A 08/10

Included Components • Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring

IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an addi-

Chapter 1: Introduction to VENUE Profile 5

Capítulo 1: Introdução à VENUE Profile 3

4 VENUE Profile Guide

4 Guia VENUE Profile

IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an addi-

Chapter 1: Introduction to VENUE Profile 5

Capítulo 1: Introdução à VENUE Profile 5

6 Guia VENUE Profile

AT16 A-Net Output Card that provides 16 channels of A-Net

Chapter 1: Introduction to VENUE Profile 5

Capítulo 1: Introdução à VENUE Profile 7

8 VENUE Profile Guide

8 VENUE Profile Guide

8 VENUE Profile Guide

8 Guia VENUE Profile

AT16 A-Net Output Card that provides 16 channels of A-Net

IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an addi-

Chapter 1: Introduction to VENUE Profile 5

Capítulo 1: Introdução à VENUE Profile 9

Chapter 1: Introduction to VENUE Profile 5

Capítulo 2: Configuração e Conexão da VENUE Profile 11

and software has tested and approved.

8 Aperte bem as porcas para que fixem o suporte de trackball à

AT16 A-Net Output Card that provides 16 channels of A-Net

IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an addi-

Chapter 1: Introduction to VENUE Profile 5

Capítulo 2: Configuração e Conexão da VENUE Profile 13

14 VENUE Profile Guide

Chapter 1: Introduction to VENUE Profile 5

Conector FOH Link

A porta FOH Link conecta a console Profile ao rack do sistema (Mix

Word Clock I/O

As portas Word Clock In e Word Clock Out permitem integrar

16 Guia VENUE Profile

Included Components • Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring

Chapter 1: Introduction to VENUE Profile 5

Capítulo 2: Configuração e Conexão da VENUE Profile 17

Shortcuts show you useful keyboard or

Cross References point to related sections in

• Snake connectors to enable primary and redundant (if

The following components are optional, and must be

Stage Rack Input Cards

Stage Rack Output Card

Figure 9. Audio connectors on Stage Rack

20 VENUE Profile Guide

Included Components • Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring

Capítulo 2: Configuração e Conexão da VENUE Profile 21

: hardware and software it has tested and approved.

22 VENUE Profile Guide

• Video Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display

Acender uma luzsystems,

External digital device Stage Rack

DSI card DSO card

AES (or ADAT)

External digital device Stage Rack

Set device to slave to